California Electrical Code 2022

IMPORTANT NOTICE Act now to keep your code up-to-date. The purchase of this code includes a free subscription for all State-issued supplements and errata. To receive these important updates through 2025, you MUST register online www.nfpa.org/caecupdates 2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS TITLE 24, PART 3 ® Based on the 2020 National Electrical Code Effective January 1, 2023 For Errata and Supplement effective dates see the History Note Appendix

Portions of this publication are reproduced with permission from the National Electrical Code ®, 2020 edition, copyright © 2019 National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02169. All rights reserved. No portions of NEC® material may be reproduced except with permission of the National Fire Protection Association. ISBN 978-1-45592299-4 Copyright © to 2019 National Electrical Code Held By National Fire Protection Association 1 Batterymarch Park (P.O. Box 9146) Quincy, MA 02269-9959 Printed in The United States NFPA® 70, National Electrical Code®, NFPA®, and National Fire Protection Association® are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc., Quincy, MA, 02169. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–iii

Preface This document is Part 3 of thirteen parts of the official triennial compilation and publication of the adoptions, amendments and repeal of administrative regulations to California Code of Regulations, Title 24, also referred to as the California Building Standards Code. This Part is known as the California Electrical Code and incorporates, by adoption, the 2020 edition of the National Electri- cal Code of the National Fire Protection Association with the California amendments The California Building Standards Code is published in its entirety every three years by order of the California legislature, with supplements published in intervening years. The California legislature delegated authority to various State agencies, boards, com- missions and departments to create building regulations to implement the State’s statutes. These building regulations or standards, have the same force of law, and take effect 180 days after their publication unless otherwise stipulated. The California Building Standards Code applies to occupancies in the State of California as annotated.

A city, county, or city and county may establish more restrictive building standards reasonably necessary because of local climatic, geological or topographical conditions. Findings of the local condition(s) and the adopted local building standard(s) must be filed with the California Building Standards Commission to become effective and may not be effective sooner than the date filed with the California Building Standards Commission and in no case sooner than the effective date of this edition of California Building Stan- dards Code. Local building standards that were adopted and applicable to previous editions of the California Building Standards Code do not apply to this edition without appropriate adoption and the required filing. To familiarize yourself with the format of this code, it is suggested that users review the following contents: • How To Distinguish Model Code Language From California Amendments • Matrix Adoption Tables, located at the beginning of each chapter.

Should you find publication (e.g., typographical) errors or inconsistencies in this code or wish to offer comments toward improving its format, please address your comments to: California Building Standards Commission 2525 Natomas Park Drive, Suite 130 Sacramento, CA 95833-2936 Phone: (916) 263-0916 Web Page: www.dgs.ca.gov/bsc Email: cbsc@dgs.ca.gov 2022 California Electrical Code 70–v

Acknowledgements The 2022 California Electrical Code (Code) was developed through the outstanding collaborative efforts of the Department of Housing and Community Development, Division of State Architect, Office of the State Fire Marshal, Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development, California Energy Commission, California Department of Public Health, California State Lands Com- mission, Board of State and Community Corrections, and the California Building Standards Commission (Commission). This collaborative effort included the assistance of the Commission’s Code Advisory Committees and many other volunteers who worked tirelessly to assist the Commission in the production of this Code. Governor Gavin Newsom Members of the Building Standards Commission Secretary Yolanda Richardson — Chair Rajesh Patel — Vice-Chair Erick Mikiten Kent Sasaki Elley Klausbruckner Peter Santillan Aaron Stockwell Laura Rambin Juvilyn Alegre Mia Marvelli — Executive Director Michael L. Nearman — Deputy Executive Director

For questions on California state agency amendments; please refer to the contact list on the following page. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–vii

California Code of Regulations, Title 24 California Agency Information Contact List The following state agencies may propose building standards for publication in Title 24. Request notice of such activity with each agency of interest. See Sections 1.2 through 1.14 of the California Building Code (Part 2 of Title 24) for more detailed information on the regulatory jurisdiction of each state agency. California Building Standards Commission Department of Food and Agriculture State Buildings including UC and CSU Buildings, Parking Lot www.cdfa.ca.gov And Walkway Lighting, Green Building Standards for Meat & Poultry Packing Plant Standards Non-residential Buildings Rendering & Collection Center Standards (916) 900-5004 www.dgs.ca.gov/bsc (916) 263-0916 Dairy Standards (916) 900-5008 California Energy Commission Department of Housing and Community Development www.energy.ca.gov www.hcd.ca.gov (800) 952-8356 Energy Hotline (800) 772-3300 Residential — Hotels, Motels, Apartments, Building Efficiency Standards Single-Family Dwellings; and Permanent Structures

Appliance Efficiency Standards in Mobilehome & Special Occupancy Parks Compliance Manual Forms (916) 445-3338 California State Lands Commission Factory-Built Housing, Manufactured Housing & Commercial www.slc.ca.gov (562) 499-6312 Modular Mobilehome — Permits & Inspections Marine Oil Terminals Standards Northern Region — (916) 255-2501 Southern Region — (951) 782-4420 California State Library www.library.ca.gov (916) 323-9843 (800) 952-8356 Employee Housing Standards Board of State and Community Corrections www.bscc.ca.gov (916) 445-5073 Department of Public Health Local Adult and Juvenile www.dph.ca.gov (916) 449-5661 Detention Facility Standards Organized Camps Standards Public Swimming Pools Standards Department of Consumer Affairs: Division of the State Architect Acupuncture Board www.dgs.ca.gov/dsa (916) 445-8100 www.acupuncture.ca.gov (916) 515-5200 Office Standards Access Compliance Fire and Life Safety Board of Pharmacy Structural Safety www.pharmacy.ca.gov (916) 518-3100 Public Schools Standards Pharmacy Standards Essential Services Building Standards

Bureau of Barbering and Cosmetology Community College Standards www.barbercosmo.ca.gov (800) 952-5210 State Historical Building Safety Board Barber and Beauty Shop, and College Standards www.dgs.ca.gov (916) 445-8100 Bureau of Household Goods and Services Historical Rehabilitation, Preservation, www.bearhfti.ca.gov (916) 999-2041 Restoration or Relocation Standards Insulation Testing Standards Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development Structural Pest Control Board AKA: California Department of Health Care Access www.pestboard.ca.gov (800) 737-8188 and Information (HCAI) Structural Standards www.hcai.ca.gov (916) 440-8300 Veterinary Medical Board Hospital Standards www.vmb.ca.gov (916) 515-5220 Skilled Nursing Facility Standards & Veterinary Hospital Standards Clinic Standards Office of the State Fire Marshal osfm.fire.ca.gov (916) 568-3800 Code Development and Analysis Fire Safety Standards 2022 California Electrical Code 70–ix

How to Distinguish Between Model Code Language and California Amendments To distinguish between model code language and the incorporated California amendments, including exclusive California stan- dards, California amendments will appear in italics. Symbols in the margins indicate the status of code changes as follows: [SFM] This symbol identifies which State agency(s), by its “acronym”, has amended a section of the model code. For a complete listing of the State agency acronyms, see the Application Section within Chapter 1. C A This symbol indicates a California amendment has been made to the model code. This symbol indicates that a change has been made to a California amendment. > This symbol indicates deletion of California language. NOTATIONS USED IN THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE The following notation appears in the National Electrical Code to aid the user: Text revisions are shaded. A Δ before a section number indicates that words within that section were deleted and a Δ to the left of a table or figure number indicates a revision to an existing table or figure.

When a chapter was heavily revised, the entire chapter is marked throughout with the Δ symbol. Where one or more sections were deleted, a • is placed between the remaining sections. Chapters, annexes, sections, figures, and tables that are new are indicated with an N. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–xi

CONTENTS Contents 89 General Code Provisions..................................... 70–1 240 Overcurrent Protection...................................... 70–105 90 Introduction......................................................... 70–21 Part I. General................................................... 70–105 Part II. Location.................................................. 70–109 Chapter 1 General Part III. Enclosures.............................................. 70–112 100 Definitions......................................................... 70–27 Part IV. Disconnecting and Guarding.................. 70–112 Part I. General................................................... 70–27 Part V. Plug Fuses, Fuseholders, and Part II. Over 1000 Volts, Nominal...................... 70–38 Adapters................................................. 70–112 Part III. Hazardous (Classified) Locations Part VI. Cartridge Fuses and Fuseholders............ 70–113 (CMP-14).............................................. 70–39 Part VII. Circuit Breakers...................................... 70–114

110 Requirements for Electrical Installations.......... 70–43 Part VIII. Supervised Industrial Installations......... 70–115 Part I. General................................................... 70–43 Part IX. Overcurrent Protection over Part II. 1000 Volts, Nominal, or Less................. 70–48 1000 Volts, Nominal............................... 70–117 Part III. Over 1000 Volts, Nominal...................... 70–52 242 Overvoltage Protection..................................... 70–117 Part IV. Tunnel Installations over 1000 Volts, Part I. General................................................... 70–117 Nominal.................................................. 70–54 Part II. Surge-Protective Devices (SPDs), Part V. Manholes and Other Electrical 1000 Volts or Less.................................. 70–117 Enclosures Intended for Part III. Surge Arresters, Over 1000 Volts........... 70–118 Personnel Entry...................................... 70–55 250 Grounding and Bonding.................................... 70–120 Chapter 2 Wiring and Protection Part I.

General................................................... 70–120 200 Use and Identification of Grounded Part II. System Grounding.................................. 70–123 Conductors........................................................ 70–61 Part III. Grounding Electrode System and 210 Branch Circuits................................................. 70–63 Grounding Electrode Conductor............ 70–130 Part I. General Provisions................................. 70–63 Part IV. Enclosure, Raceway, and Service Part II. Branch-Circuit Ratings........................... 70–69 Cable Connections.................................. 70–135 Part III. Required Outlets..................................... 70–71 Part V. Bonding.................................................. 70–136 215 Feeders.............................................................. 70–76 Part VI. Equipment Grounding and 220 Branch-Circuit, Feeder, and Service Load Equipment Grounding Conductors............. 70–140 Calculations....................................................... 70–78 Part VII.

Methods of Equipment Grounding Part I. General................................................... 70–78 Conductor Connections.......................... 70–145 Part II. Branch-Circuit Load Calculations.......... 70–79 Part VIII. Direct-Current Systems.......................... 70–148 Part III. Feeder and Service Load Part IX. Instruments, Meters, and Relays............ 70–149 Calculations............................................ 70–81 Part X. Grounding of Systems and Circuits Part IV. Optional Feeder and Service Load of over 1000 Volts.................................. 70–149 Calculations............................................ 70–83 Chapter 3 Wiring Methods and Materials Part V. Farm Load Calculations......................... 70–87 300 General Requirements for Wiring 225 Outside Branch Circuits and Feeders................ 70–88 Methods and Materials...................................... 70–165 Part I. General................................................... 70–88 Part I. General Requirements............................ 70–165 Part II. Buildings or Other Structures Part II.

Requirements for over 1000 Volts, Supplied by a Feeder(s) or Branch Nominal.................................................. 70–175 Circuit(s)................................................. 70–91 310 Conductors for General Wiring......................... 70–177 Part III. Over 1000 Volts...................................... 70–93 Part I. General................................................... 70–177 230 Services............................................................. 70–94 Part II. Construction Specifications.................... 70–177 Part I. General................................................... 70–94 Part III. Installation.............................................. 70–182 Part II. Overhead Service Conductors................ 70–96 311 Medium Voltage Conductors and Cable........... 70–191 Part III. Underground Service Conductors.......... 70–97 Part I. General................................................... 70–191 Part IV. Service-Entrance Conductors................. 70–97 Part II. Construction Specifications.................... 70–191 Part V.

Service Equipment — General............... 70–100 Part III. Installation.............................................. 70–193 Part VI. Service Equipment — Disconnecting Part IV. Ampacities.............................................. 70–195 Means..................................................... 70–101 312 Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket Part VII. Service Equipment — Overcurrent Enclosures......................................................... 70–205 Protection............................................... 70–103 Part I. Scope and Installation............................ 70–205 Part VIII. Services Exceeding 1000 Volts, Part II. Construction Specifications.................... 70–208 Nominal.................................................. 70–104 2022 California Electrical Code 70–xiii

CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE 314 Outlet, Device, Pull, and Junction Boxes; 340 Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Conduit Bodies; Fittings; and Handhole Cable: Type UF................................................. 70–232 Enclosures......................................................... 70–209 Part I. General................................................... 70–232 Part I. Scope and General.................................. 70–209 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–232 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–209 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–233 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–216 342 Intermediate Metal Conduit: Part IV. Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Type IMC.......................................................... 70–233 Bodies, and Handhole Enclosures Part I. General................................................... 70–233 for Use on Systems over 1000 Volts, Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–233

Nominal.................................................. 70–216 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–234 320 Armored Cable: Type AC.................................. 70–217 344 Rigid Metal Conduit: Type RMC...................... 70–234 Part I. General................................................... 70–217 Part I. General................................................... 70–234 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–217 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–235 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–219 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–236 322 Flat Cable Assemblies: Type FC....................... 70–219 348 Flexible Metal Conduit: Type FMC.................. 70–236 Part I. General................................................... 70–219 Part I. General................................................... 70–236 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–219 Part II.

Installation.............................................. 70–236 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–219 350 Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 324 Flat Conductor Cable: Type FCC...................... 70–220 Type LFMC....................................................... 70–238 Part I. General................................................... 70–220 Part I. General................................................... 70–238 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–220 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–238 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–221 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–239 326 Integrated Gas Spacer Cable: 352 Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit: Type IGS........................................................... 70–222 Type PVC.......................................................... 70–239 Part I. General................................................... 70–222 Part I. General...................................................

70–239 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–222 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–239 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–222 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–241 330 Metal-Clad Cable: Type MC............................. 70–223 353 High Density Polyethylene Conduit: Part I. General................................................... 70–223 Type HDPE Conduit......................................... 70–242 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–223 Part I. General................................................... 70–242 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–224 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–242 332 Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–243 Cable: Type MI................................................. 70–225 354 Nonmetallic Underground Conduit Part I. General...................................................

70–225 with Conductors: Type NUCC.......................... 70–243 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–225 Part I. General................................................... 70–243 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–226 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–243 334 Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable: Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–244 Types NM and NMC......................................... 70–226 355 Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit: Part I. General................................................... 70–226 Type RTRC....................................................... 70–244 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–226 Part I. General................................................... 70–244 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–228 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–244 336 Power and Control Tray Cable: Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–246

Type TC............................................................. 70–228 356 Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: Part I. General................................................... 70–228 Type LFNC....................................................... 70–246 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–229 Part I. General................................................... 70–246 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–229 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–247 337 Type P Cable..................................................... 70–230 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–248 Part I. General................................................... 70–230 358 Electrical Metallic Tubing: Type EMT............. 70–248 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–230 Part I. General................................................... 70–248 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–230 Part II.

Installation.............................................. 70–248 338 Service-Entrance Cable: Types SE Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–249 and USE............................................................ 70–231 360 Flexible Metallic Tubing: Type FMT................ 70–249 Part I. General................................................... 70–231 Part I. General................................................... 70–249 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–231 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–249 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–232 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–250 70–xiv 2022 California Electrical Code

CONTENTS 362 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing: 390 Underfloor Raceways........................................ 70–267 Type ENT.......................................................... 70–250 Part I. General................................................... 70–267 Part I. General................................................... 70–250 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–267 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–250 392 Cable Trays....................................................... 70–268 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–252 Part I. General................................................... 70–268 366 Auxiliary Gutters.............................................. 70–252 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–268 Part I. General................................................... 70–252 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–275 Part II. Installation..............................................

70–252 393 Low-Voltage Suspended Ceiling Power Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–254 Distribution Systems......................................... 70–275 368 Busways............................................................ 70–254 Part I. General................................................... 70–275 Part I. General Requirements............................ 70–254 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–276 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–254 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–277 Part III. Construction........................................... 70–256 394 Concealed Knob-and-Tube Wiring................... 70–278 Part IV. Requirements for Over 1000 Volts, Part I. General................................................... 70–278 Nominal.................................................. 70–256 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–278 370 Cablebus............................................................ 70–256 Part III.

Construction Specifications.................... 70–279 Part I. General................................................... 70–256 396 Messenger-Supported Wiring........................... 70–279 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–257 Part I. General................................................... 70–279 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–257 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–279 372 Cellular Concrete Floor Raceways................... 70–258 398 Open Wiring on Insulators................................ 70–280 Part I. General................................................... 70–258 Part I. General................................................... 70–280 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–258 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–280 374 Cellular Metal Floor Raceways......................... 70–258 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–281 Part I.

General................................................... 70–258 399 Outdoor Overhead Conductors over Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–259 1000 Volts......................................................... 70–281 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–259 Chapter 4 Equipment for General Use 376 Metal Wireways................................................ 70–259 400 Flexible Cords and Flexible Cables.................. 70–289 Part I. General................................................... 70–259 Part I. General................................................... 70–289 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–259 Part II. Construction Specifications.................... 70–297 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–260 Part III. Portable Cables Over 600 Volts, 378 Nonmetallic Wireways...................................... 70–261 Nominal.................................................. 70–298 Part I. General................................................... 70–261

402 Fixture Wires..................................................... 70–298 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–261 404 Switches............................................................ 70–301 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–262 Part I. Installation.............................................. 70–301 380 Multioutlet Assembly........................................ 70–262 Part II. Construction Specifications.................... 70–304 Part I. General................................................... 70–262 406 Receptacles, Cord Connectors, Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–262 and Attachment Plugs (Caps)............................ 70–305 382 Nonmetallic Extensions.................................... 70–262 408 Switchboards, Switchgear, and Part I. General................................................... 70–262 Panelboards....................................................... 70–310 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–263 Part I.

General................................................... 70–310 Part III. Construction Specifications Part II. Switchboards and Switchgear................ 70–312 (Concealable Nonmetallic Part III. Panelboards............................................ 70–313 Extensions Only).................................... 70–264 Part IV. Construction Specifications.................... 70–314 384 Strut-Type Channel Raceway............................ 70–264 409 Industrial Control Panels................................... 70–315 Part I. General................................................... 70–264 Part I. General................................................... 70–315 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–264 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–315 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–265 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–316 386 Surface Metal Raceways................................... 70–265 410 Luminaires, Lampholders, and Lamps.............. 70–317 Part I.

General................................................... 70–265 Part I. General................................................... 70–317 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–265 Part II. Luminaire Locations.............................. 70–317 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–266 Part III. Provisions at Luminaire Outlet 388 Surface Nonmetallic Raceways......................... 70–266 Boxes, Canopies, and Pans..................... 70–318 Part I. General................................................... 70–266 Part IV. Luminaire Supports................................ 70–319 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–266 Part V. Grounding............................................... 70–320 Part III. Construction Specifications.................... 70–267 Part VI. Wiring of Luminaires............................. 70–320 2022 California Electrical Code 70–xv

CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE Part VII. Construction of Luminaires.................... 70–322 426 Fixed Outdoor Electric Deicing and Part VIII. Installation of Lampholders................... 70–322 Snow-Melting Equipment................................. 70–345 Part IX. Lamps and Auxiliary Equipment............ 70–322 Part I. General................................................... 70–345 Part X. Special Provisions for Flush Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–345 and Recessed Luminaires....................... 70–322 Part III. Resistance Heating Elements................. 70–346 Part XI. Construction of Flush and Recessed Part IV. Impedance Heating................................. 70–347 Luminaires.............................................. 70–323 Part V. Skin-Effect Heating................................ 70–347 Part XII. Special Provisions for Electric- Part VI. Control and Protection........................... 70–347 Discharge Lighting Systems of 427 Fixed Electric Heating Equipment 1000 Volts or Less.................................

70–323 for Pipelines and Vessels................................... 70–348 Part XIII. Special Provisions for Electric- Part I. General................................................... 70–348 Discharge Lighting Systems of Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–348 More Than 1000 Volts............................ 70–325 Part III. Resistance Heating Elements................. 70–348 Part XIV. Lighting Track........................................ 70–325 Part IV. Impedance Heating................................. 70–349 Part XV. Decorative Lighting and Similar Part V. Induction Heating................................... 70–349 Accessories............................................. 70–326 Part VI. Skin-Effect Heating................................ 70–349 Part XVI. Special Provisions for Horticultural Part VII. Control and Protection........................... 70–350 Lighting Equipment................................ 70–326 430 Motors, Motor Circuits, and Controllers............ 70–350 411 Low-Voltage Lighting.......................................

70–326 Part I. General................................................... 70–350 422 Appliances......................................................... 70–327 Part II. Motor Circuit Conductors...................... 70–356 Part I. General................................................... 70–327 Part III. Motor and Branch-Circuit Overload Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–328 Protection............................................... 70–359 Part III. Disconnecting Means............................. 70–330 Part IV. Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit Part IV. Construction........................................... 70–331 and Ground-Fault Protection.................. 70–362 Part V. Marking.................................................. 70–332 Part V. Motor Feeder Short-Circuit 424 Fixed Electric Space-Heating and Ground-Fault Protection.................. 70–365 Equipment.......................................................... 70–332 Part VI. Motor Control Circuits........................... 70–365 Part I.

General................................................... 70–332 Part VII. Motor Controllers................................... 70–367 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–333 Part VIII. Motor Control Centers........................... 70–368 Part III. Control and Protection of Fixed Part IX. Disconnecting Means............................. 70–369 Electric Space-Heating Part X. Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems........... 70–372 Equipment.............................................. 70–333 Part XI. Over 1000 Volts, Nominal...................... 70–374 Part IV. Marking of Heating Equipment.............. 70–335 Part XII. Protection of Live Parts — All Part V. Electric Space-Heating Cables............... 70–335 Voltages.................................................. 70–375 Part VI. Duct Heaters........................................... 70–337 Part XIII. Grounding — All Voltages..................... 70–375 Part VII. Resistance-Type Boilers......................... 70–337 Part XIV. Tables...................................................... 70–376

Part VIII. Electrode-Type Boilers........................... 70–338 440 Air-Conditioning and Refrigerating Part IX. Electric Radiant Heating Panels Equipment......................................................... 70–380 and Heating Panel Sets........................... 70–339 Part I. General................................................... 70–380 Part X. Low-Voltage Fixed Electric Part II. Disconnecting Means............................. 70–382 Space-Heating Equipment...................... 70–340 Part III. Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit 425 Fixed Resistance and Electrode Industrial and Ground-Fault Protection.................. 70–383 Process Heating Equipment.............................. 70–341 Part IV. Branch-Circuit Conductors.................... 70–384 Part I. General................................................... 70–341 Part V. Controllers for Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–341 Motor-Compressors................................ 70–384 Part III. Control and Protection of Fixed Part VI. Motor-Compressor and Branch-

Industrial Process Heating Circuit Overload Protection................... 70–384 Equipment.............................................. 70–341 Part VII. Provisions for Room Air Part IV. Marking of Heating Equipment.............. 70–343 Conditioners........................................... 70–385 Part V. Fixed Industrial Process Duct 445 Generators......................................................... 70–386 Heaters.................................................... 70–343 450 Transformers and Transformer Vaults Part VI. Fixed Industrial Process (Including Secondary Ties)............................... 70–388 Resistance-Type Boilers......................... 70–343 Part I. General Provisions................................. 70–388 Part VII. Fixed Industrial Process Part II. Specific Provisions Applicable to Electrode-Type Boilers........................... 70–344 Different Types of Transformers............ 70–393 70–xvi 2022 California Electrical Code

CONTENTS Part III. Transformer Vaults................................. 70–394 Part IV. Spray Application Operations 455 Phase Converters............................................... 70–395 in Membrane Enclosures........................ 70–495 Part I. General................................................... 70–395 Part V. Printing, Dipping, and Coating Part II. Specific Provisions Applicable to Processes................................................ 70–496 Different Types of Phase 517 Health Care Facilities........................................ 70–499 Converters............................................... 70–396 Part I. General................................................... 70–499 460 Capacitors......................................................... 70–397 Part II. Wiring and Protection............................ 70–502 Part I. 1000 Volts, Nominal, and Under............ 70–397 Part III. Essential Electrical System (EES).......... 70–507 Part II. Over 1000 Volts, Nominal...................... 70–398 Part IV. Inhalation Anesthetizing

470 Resistors and Reactors..................................... 70–398 Locations................................................ 70–517 Part I. 1000 Volts, Nominal, and Under............ 70–398 Part V. X-Ray Installations................................. 70–519 Part II. Over 1000 Volts, Nominal...................... 70–399 Part VI. Communications, Signaling Systems, 480 Storage Batteries............................................... 70–399 Data Systems, Fire Alarm Systems, 490 Equipment Over 1000 Volts, Nominal.............. 70–402 and Systems Less Than 120 Volts, Part I. General................................................... 70–402 Nominal.................................................. 70–520 Part II. Equipment — Specific Provisions......... 70–402 Part VII. Isolated Power Systems.......................... 70–522 Part III. Equipment — Switchgear and 518 Assembly Occupancies..................................... 70–523 Industrial Control Assemblies................ 70–404 520 Theaters, Audience Areas of Motion Picture Part IV. Mobile and Portable Equipment.............

70–407 and Television Studios, Performance Areas, Part V. Electrode-Type Boilers........................... 70–407 and Similar Locations....................................... 70–525 Part I. General................................................... 70–525 Chapter 5 Special Occupancies Part II. Fixed Stage Switchboards...................... 70–526 500 Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Part III. Fixed Stage Equipment Other Than Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2............. 70–417 Switchboards.......................................... 70–527 501 Class I Locations............................................... 70–425 Part IV. Portable Switchboards Part I. General................................................... 70–425 on Stage.................................................. 70–528 Part II. Wiring..................................................... 70–426 Part V. Portable Stage Equipment Other Part III. Equipment.............................................. 70–432 Than Switchboards................................. 70–531

502 Class II Locations............................................. 70–437 Part VI. Dressing Rooms, Dressing Areas, Part I. General................................................... 70–437 and Makeup Areas.................................. 70–532 Part II. Wiring..................................................... 70–437 Part VII. Equipment Grounding Part III. Equipment.............................................. 70–439 Conductor.................................................. 70–533 503 Class III Locations............................................ 70–443 522 Control Systems for Permanent Part I. General................................................... 70–443 Amusement Attractions..................................... 70–533 Part II. Wiring..................................................... 70–443 Part I. General................................................... 70–533 Part III. Equipment.............................................. 70–444 Part II. Control Circuits...................................... 70–533 504 Intrinsically Safe Systems.................................

70–446 Part III. Control Circuit Wiring Methods............ 70–533 505 Zone 0, 1, and 2 Locations................................ 70–448 525 Carnivals, Circuses, Fairs, and Similar 506 Zone 20, 21, and 22 Locations for Events................................................................ 70–534 Combustible Dusts or Ignitible Part I. General Requirements............................ 70–534 Fibers/Flyings................................................... 70–465 Part II. Power Sources........................................ 70–535 510 Hazardous (Classified) Locations — Part III. Wiring Methods...................................... 70–535 Specific.............................................................. 70–472 Part IV. Equipment Grounding and 511 Commercial Garages, Repair and Bonding.................................................. 70–536 Storage.............................................................. 70–472 530 Motion Picture and Television Studios 513 Aircraft Hangars................................................ 70–475

and Similar Locations....................................... 70–536 514 Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities...................... 70–478 Part I. General................................................... 70–536 515 Bulk Storage Plants........................................... 70–484 Part II. Stage or Set............................................. 70–537 516 Spray Application, Dipping, Coating, Part III. Dressing Rooms..................................... 70–539 and Printing Processes Using Flammable Part IV. Viewing, Cutting, and Patching or Combustible Materials.................................. 70–488 Tables...................................................... 70–539 Part I. General................................................... 70–488 Part V. Cellulose Nitrate Film Storage Part II. Open Containers..................................... 70–488 Vaults...................................................... 70–539 Part III. Spray Application Processes.................. 70–488 Part VI. Substations............................................. 70–539

2022 California Electrical Code 70–xvii

CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE 540 Motion Picture Projection Rooms..................... 70–540 Part III. Contact Conductors................................ 70–605 Part I. General................................................... 70–540 Part IV. Disconnecting Means............................. 70–606 Part II. Equipment and Projectors of the Part V. Overcurrent Protection........................... 70–606 Professional Type................................... 70–540 Part VI. Control.................................................... 70–607 Part III. Nonprofessional Projectors.................... 70–541 Part VII. Grounding and Bonding......................... 70–607 Part IV. Audio Signal Processing, 620 Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, Moving Amplification, and Reproduction Walks, Platform Lifts, and Stairway Equipment.............................................. 70–541 Chairlifts............................................................ 70–607 545 Manufactured Buildings and Part I. General................................................... 70–607

Relocatable Structures...................................... 70–541 Part II. Conductors............................................. 70–609 Part I. General.................................................. 70–541 Part III. Wiring..................................................... 70–611 Part II. Relocatable Structures............................ 70–542 Part IV. Installation of Conductors...................... 70–614 547 Agricultural Buildings...................................... 70–543 Part V. Traveling Cables..................................... 70–614 550 Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, Part VI. Disconnecting Means and Control........... 70–615 and Mobile Home Parks.................................... 70–545 Part VII. Overcurrent Protection........................... 70–617 Part I. General................................................... 70–545 Part VIII. Machine Rooms, Control Rooms, Part II. Mobile and Manufactured Machinery Spaces, and Control Homes..................................................... 70–546 Spaces.....................................................

70–617 Part III. Services and Feeders.............................. 70–553 Part IX. Grounding and Bonding......................... 70–617 551 Recreational Vehicles and Recreational Part X. Emergency and Standby Power Vehicle Parks..................................................... 70–554 Systems................................................... 70–618 Part I. General................................................... 70–554 625 Electric Vehicle Power Transfer System........... 70–618 Part II. Combination Electrical Systems............ 70–555 Part I. General................................................... 70–618 Part III. Other Power Sources.............................. 70–556 Part II. Equipment Construction......................... 70–619 Part IV. Nominal 120-Volt or 120/240-Volt Part III. Installation.............................................. 70–620 Systems................................................... 70–557 Part IV. Wireless Power Transfer Part V. Factory Tests........................................... 70–564 Equipment..............................................

70–622 Part VI. Recreational Vehicle Parks..................... 70–564 626 Electrified Truck Parking Spaces...................... 70–623 552 Park Trailers...................................................... 70–567 Part I. General................................................... 70–623 Part I. General................................................... 70–567 Part II. Electrified Truck Parking Space Part II. Low-Voltage Systems............................. 70–567 Electrical Wiring Systems...................... 70–624 Part III. Combination Electrical Systems............ 70–568 Part III. Electrified Truck Parking Space Part IV. Nominal 120-Volt or 120/240-Volt Supply Equipment.................................. 70–625 Systems................................................... 70–569 Part IV. Transport Refrigerated Units Part V. Factory Tests........................................... 70–576 (TRUs).................................................... 70–627 555 Marinas, Boatyards, Floating Buildings, 630 Electric Welders................................................ 70–628

and Commercial and Noncommercial Part I. General................................................... 70–628 Docking Facilities............................................. 70–576 Part II. Arc Welders............................................ 70–628 Part I. General................................................... 70–576 Part III. Resistance Welders................................. 70–629 Part II. Marinas, Boatyards, and Docking Part IV. Welding Cable........................................ 70–630 Facilities...................................................... 70–578 640 Audio Signal Processing, Amplification, Part III. Floating Buildings.................................. 70–580 and Reproduction Equipment........................... 70–630 590 Temporary Installations.................................... 70–581 Part I. General................................................... 70–630 Part II. Permanent Audio System Chapter 6 Special Equipment Installations............................................ 70–633 600 Electric Signs and Outline Lighting.................. 70–593 Part III.

Portable and Temporary Audio Part I. General................................................... 70–593 System Installations................................ 70–634 Part II. Field-Installed Skeleton Tubing, 645 Information Technology Equipment................. 70–635 Outline Lighting, and Secondary 646 Modular Data Centers....................................... 70–639 Wiring..................................................... 70–597 Part I. General................................................... 70–639 604 Manufactured Wiring Systems.......................... 70–600 Part II. Equipment.............................................. 70–642 605 Office Furnishings............................................. 70–601 Part III. Lighting.................................................. 70–642 610 Cranes and Hoists............................................. 70–602 Part IV. Workspace.............................................. 70–642 Part I. General................................................... 70–602 647 Sensitive Electronic Equipment........................ 70–643 Part II.

Wiring..................................................... 70–603 70–xviii 2022 California Electrical Code

CONTENTS 650 Pipe Organs....................................................... 70–644 Part V. Grounding............................................... 70–689 660 X-Ray Equipment............................................. 70–645 Part VI. Marking.................................................. 70–689 Part I. General................................................... 70–645 Part VII. Connection to Other Circuits.................. 70–690 Part II. Control.................................................... 70–646 694 Wind Electric Systems...................................... 70–690 Part III. Transformers and Capacitors.................. 70–646 Part I. General................................................... 70–690 Part IV. Guarding and Grounding........................ 70–647 Part II. Circuit Requirements.............................. 70–691 665 Induction and Dielectric Heating Part III. Disconnecting Means............................. 70–692 Equipment......................................................... 70–647 Part IV. Wiring Methods......................................

70–693 Part I. General................................................... 70–647 Part V. Grounding and Bonding......................... 70–693 Part II. Guarding, Grounding, and Part VI. Marking.................................................. 70–694 Labeling.................................................. 70–648 Part VII. Connection to Other Sources.................. 70–694 668 Electrolytic Cells............................................... 70–648 695 Fire Pumps........................................................ 70–694 669 Electroplating.................................................... 70–651 Chapter 7 Special Conditions 670 Industrial Machinery......................................... 70–651 700 Emergency Systems.......................................... 70–705 675 Electrically Driven or Controlled Irrigation Part I. General................................................... 70–705 Machines........................................................... 70–653 Part II. Circuit Wiring......................................... 70–707 Part I.

General................................................... 70–653 Part III. Sources of Power.................................... 70–709 Part II. Center Pivot Irrigation Machines........... 70–654 Part IV. Emergency System Circuits for 680 Swimming Pools, Fountains, and Similar Lighting and Power................................ 70–711 Installations....................................................... 70–655 Part V. Control — Emergency Lighting Part I. General................................................... 70–655 Circuits................................................... 70–711 Part II. Permanently Installed Pools................... 70–658 Part VI. Overcurrent Protection........................... 70–712 Part III. Storable Pools, Storable Spas, 701 Legally Required Standby Systems.................. 70–713 Storable Hot Tubs, and Storable Part I. General................................................... 70–713 Immersion Pools..................................... 70–665 Part II. Circuit Wiring......................................... 70–714 Part IV. Spas, Hot Tubs, and Permanently

Part III. Sources of Power.................................... 70–714 Installed Immersion Pools...................... 70–666 Part IV. Overcurrent Protection........................... 70–715 Part V. Fountains................................................ 70–669 702 Optional Standby Systems................................ 70–716 Part VI. Pools and Tubs for Therapeutic Use....... 70–670 Part I. General................................................... 70–716 Part VII. Hydromassage Bathtubs......................... 70–671 Part II. Wiring..................................................... 70–717 Part VIII. Electrically Powered Pool Lifts.............. 70–671 705 Interconnected Electric Power 682 Natural and Artificially Made Bodies Production Sources........................................... 70–718 of Water............................................................. 70–672 Part I. General................................................... 70–718 Part I. General................................................... 70–672 Part II. Microgrid Systems.................................

70–722 Part II. Installation.............................................. 70–672 706 Energy Storage Systems.................................... 70–722 Part III. Grounding and Bonding......................... 70–673 Part I. General................................................... 70–722 685 Integrated Electrical Systems............................ 70–674 Part II. Disconnecting Means............................. 70–724 Part I. General................................................... 70–674 Part III. Installation Requirements....................... 70–724 Part II. Orderly Shutdown.................................. 70–674 Part IV. Circuit Requirements.............................. 70–725 690 Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Systems...................... 70–675 Part V. Flow Battery Energy Storage Part I. General................................................... 70–675 Systems................................................... 70–726 Part II. Circuit Requirements.............................. 70–676 Part VI. Other Energy Storage Technologies....... 70–726 Part III.

Disconnecting Means............................. 70–680 708 Critical Operations Power Systems (COPS).......... 70–726 Part IV. Wiring Methods and Materials............... 70–681 Part I. General................................................... 70–726 Part V. Grounding and Bonding......................... 70–684 Part II. Circuit Wiring and Equipment............... 70–728 Part VI. Marking.................................................. 70–686 Part III. Power Sources and Connection.............. 70–729 Part VII. Connection to Other Sources.................. 70–686 Part IV. Overcurrent Protection........................... 70–731 Part VIII. Energy Storage Systems......................... 70–686 Part V. System Performance and Analysis......... 70–731 691 Large-Scale Photovoltaic (PV) Electric 710 Stand-Alone Systems........................................ 70–732 Supply Stations................................................. 70–687 712 Direct Current Microgrids................................. 70–733 692 Fuel Cell Systems............................................. 70–688 Part I.

General................................................... 70–733 Part I. General................................................... 70–688 Part II. Circuit Requirements.............................. 70–733 Part II. Circuit Requirements.............................. 70–689 Part III. Disconnecting Means............................. 70–734 Part III. Disconnecting Means............................. 70–689 Part IV. Wiring Methods...................................... 70–734 Part IV. Wiring Methods...................................... 70–689 2022 California Electrical Code 70–xix

CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE Part V. Marking.................................................. 70–734 Part IV. Interior Installation — Transmitting Part VI. Protection............................................... 70–734 Stations................................................... 70–794 Part VII. Systems over 1000 Volts........................ 70–734 820 Community Antenna Television and 720 Circuits and Equipment Operating Radio Distribution Systems.............................. 70–794 at Less Than 50 Volts........................................ 70–734 Part I. General................................................... 70–794 725 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote-Control, Part II. Coaxial Cables Outside and Signaling, and Power-Limited Circuits............. 70–735 Entering Buildings.................................. 70–795 Part I. General................................................... 70–735 Part III. Protection............................................... 70–795 Part II. Class 1 Circuits....................................... 70–736 Part IV.

Grounding Methods................................ 70–796 Part III. Class 2 and Class 3 Circuits................... 70–738 Part V. Installation Methods Within Buildings..... 70–796 Part IV. Listing Requirements............................. 70–746 Part VI. Listing Requirements............................. 70–797 727 Instrumentation Tray Cable: Type ITC............. 70–748 830 Network-Powered Broadband Communications 728 Fire-Resistive Cable Systems............................ 70–749 Systems.................................................................. 70–797 750 Energy Management Systems........................... 70–750 Part I. General................................................... 70–797 760 Fire Alarm Systems........................................... 70–751 Part II. Cables Outside and Entering Buildings.... 70–798 Part I. General................................................... 70–751 Part III. Protection............................................... 70–800 Part II. Non–Power-Limited Fire Alarm Part IV. Grounding Methods................................ 70–801

(NPLFA) Circuits................................... 70–752 Part V. Installation Methods Within Part III. Power-Limited Fire Alarm (PLFA) Buildings................................................ 70–802 Circuits.................................................... 70–754 Part VI. Listing Requirements............................. 70–803 Part IV. Listing Requirements............................. 70–759 840 Premises-Powered Broadband Communications 770 Optical Fiber Cables......................................... 70–761 Systems............................................................. 70–803 Part I. General................................................... 70–761 Part I. General................................................... 70–803 Part II. Cables Outside and Entering Part II. Cables Outside and Entering Buildings................................................ 70–762 Buildings................................................ 70–804 Part III. Protection............................................... 70–763 Part III. Protection............................................... 70–804

Part IV. Grounding Methods................................ 70–764 Part IV. Grounding Methods................................ 70–805 Part V. Installation Methods Within Part V. Installation Methods Within Buildings...... 70–805 Buildings................................................ 70–765 Part VI. Premises Powering of Part VI. Listing Requirements............................. 70–768 Communications Equipment over Communications Cables......................... 70–805 Chapter 8 Communications Systems Part VII. Listing Requirements............................. 70–805 800 General Requirements for Communications Systems............................................................. 70–773 Chapter 9 Tables Part I. General................................................... 70–773 1 Percent of Cross Section of Conduit Part II. Wires and Cables Outside and and Tubing for Conductors and Cables........... 70–809 Entering Buildings.................................. 70–774 2 Radius of Conduit and Tubing Bends........... 70–809 Part III. Grounding Methods................................

70–775 4 Dimensions and Percent Area of Conduit Part IV. Installation Methods Within and Tubing (Areas of Conduit or Tubing Buildings................................................ 70–777 for the Combinations of Wires Permitted Part V. Listing Requirements............................. 70–784 in Table 1 Chapter 9)......................................... 70–810 805 Communications Circuits.................................. 70–785 5 Dimensions of Insulated Conductors Part I. General................................................... 70–785 and Fixture Wires.......................................... 70–814 Part II. Wires and Cables Outside 5A Compact Copper and Aluminum Building and Entering Buildings........................... 70–785 Wire Nominal Dimensions** and Areas............ 70–818 Part III. Protection............................................... 70–786 8 Conductor Properties.................................... 70–819 Part IV. Installation Methods Within Buildings...... 70–788 9 Alternating-Current Resistance and Part V. Listing Requirements.............................

70–789 Reactance for 600-Volt Cables, 3-Phase, 810 Radio and Television Equipment...................... 70–791 60 Hz, 75°C(167°F) — Three Single Part I. General................................................... 70–791 Conductors in Conduit.................................. 70–820 Part II. Receiving Equipment — Antenna 10 Conductor Stranding...................................... 70–821 Systems....................................................... 70–791 11(A) Class 2 and Class 3 Alternating-Current Part III. Amateur and Citizen Band Transmitting Power Source Limitations............................. 70–822 and Receiving Stations — Antenna 12(A) PLFA Alternating-Current Power Source Systems................................................... 70–793 Limitations..................................................... 70–823 70–xx 2022 California Electrical Code

CONTENTS Informative Annex A: Product Informative Annex G: Supervisory Control Safety Standards..................................................... 70–827 and Data Acquisition (SCADA)............................. 70–950 Informative Annex B: Application Informative Annex H: Administration Information for Ampacity Calculation................... 70–834 and Enforcement..................................................... 70–951 Informative Annex C: Conduit, Tubing, and Informative Annex I: Recommended Cable Tray Fill Tables for Conductors and Tightening Torque Tables from UL Standard Fixture Wires of the Same Size.............................. 70–847 486A-486B............................................................. 70–957 Informative Annex D: Examples............................ 70–932 Informative Annex J: ADA Standards for Accessible Design............................................. 70–959 Informative Annex E: Types of Construction............ 70–946 Index................................................................ 70–963 Informative Annex F: Availability for Critical

Operations Power Systems; and Development and Implementation of Functional Performance Tests (FPTs) for Critical Operations Power Systems........................................ 70–948 2022 California Electrical Code 70–xxi

CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES California Matrix Adoption Tables Format of the Matrix Adoption Tables The matrix adoption tables, which follow, show the user which state agencies have adopted and/or amended given sections of model code for applications within their respective authorities. See Article 89, Sections 89.102 through 89.114, for building appli- cation and enforcement responsibilities. The side headings identify the scope of the state agencies’ adoption as follows: Adopt the entire NEC article without state amendments If there is an “X” under a particular state agency’s acronym in this row, it means that particular state agency has adopted the entire model code article without any state amendments. Example: ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below SAMPLE Article/Section 89.101 89.101.8.2 89.102 Adopt the entire NEC article as amended (amendments listed below)

If there is an “X” under a particular state agency’s acronym in this row, it means that particular state agency has adopted the entire model code article, with state amendments. Each state-amended section that the agency has added to that particular article is listed. There will be an “X” in the column, by that particular section, under the agency’s acronym, as well as an “X” by each section that the agency has adopted. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–xxiii

CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES Example: ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article Adopt entire Article as amended (amended X sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below SAMPLE Article/Section 89.101 X 89.101.8.2 X 89.102 X Adopt only those sections which are listed below: If there is an “X” under a particular state agency’s acronym in this row, it means that particular state agency is adopting only specific model code or state-amended sections within this chapter. There will be an “X” in the column under the agency’s acronym, as well as an “X” by each section that the agency has adopted. Example: ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed X below SAMPLE Article/Section 89.101 X 89.101.8.2 X 89.102 X Legend of Abbreviations of Adopting State Agencies

BSC California Building Standards Commission BSC-CG California Building Standards Commission-CALGreen SFM Office of the State Fire Marshal HCD Department of Housing and Community Development DSA-AC Division of the State Architect – Access Compliance DSA-SS Division of the State Architect – Structural Safety DSA-SS/CC Division of the State Architect – Structural Safety/Community Colleges OSHPD Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development DPH California Department of Public Health 70–xxiv 2022 California Electrical Code

CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH CEC BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 1-AC AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X that are listed below Article/Section 89.101 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 89.101.8.2 X X 89.102 X 89.107 X 89.108 X X X 89.109 X 89.109.1 X 89.109.2 X X 89.110.1 X X 89.110.2 X 89.110.3 X 89.110.4 X 89.110.5 X 89.111 X 2022 California Electrical Code 70–xxv

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C SECTION 89.101 1. State-owned buildings, including buildings constructed C A by the Trustees of the California State University, and to the A GENERAL C C extent permitted by California laws, buildings designed and A A 89.101.1 Title. These regulations shall be known as the constructed by the Regents of the University of California, and C C A California Electrical Code, may be cited as such and will be regulated by the Building Standards Commission. See Section A C referred to herein as “this code.” The California Electrical 89.102 for additional scope provisions. C A Code is Part 3 of thirteen parts of the official compilation and A 2. Section 89.103 is reserved for the Board of State and C C publication of the adoption, amendment, and repeal of electri- A Community Corrections. A cal regulations to the California Code of Regulations, Title 24, C C 3. Section 89.104 is reserved for the Department of Con- A also referred to as the California Building Standards Code. A sumer Affairs.

This part incorporates by adoption the 2020 National Electri- C A cal Code of the National Fire Protection Association with nec- 4. Section 89.105 is reserved for the California Energy A C C essary California amendments. Commission. A A 89.101.2 Purpose. The purpose of this code is to establish the 5. Section 89.106 is reserved for the Department of Food C C A minimum requirements to safeguard the public health, safety and Agriculture. A C C and general welfare through structural strength, means of 6. Organized camps, laboratory animal quarters, public A A egress facilities, stability, access to persons with disabilities, swimming pools, radiation protection, commissaries serving C C sanitation, adequate lighting and ventilation, and energy con- A A mobile food preparation vehicles and wild animal quaran- servation; safety to life and property from fire and other haz- C C tine facilities regulated by the California Department of Pub- A ards attributed to the built environment; and to provide safety A lic Health (DPH). See Section 89.107 for additional scope C

C to fire fighters and emergency responders during emergency provisions. A A operations. C C 7. Hotels, motels, lodging houses, apartments, dwellings, A 89.101.3 Scope. The provisions of this code shall apply to the A dormitories, condominiums, shelters for homeless persons, C C construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, congregate residences, employee housing, factory-built A A repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, maintenance, housing, and other types of dwellings containing sleeping C C removal and demolition of every building or structure or any A accommodations with or without common toilets or cook- appurtenances connected or attached to such buildings or struc- C ing facilities. See Section 89.108.2.1.1 for additional scope A tures throughout the State of California. A provisions. C C A 89.101.3.1 Nonstate-Regulated Buildings, Structures, A 8. Accommodations for persons with disabilities in buildings C and Applications. Except as modified by local ordinance C containing newly constructed covered multifamily dwellings,

A pursuant to Section 89.101.8, the building standards in the A new common use areas serving existing covered multifamily C C California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Parts 2, 2.5, 3, 4, A dwellings, additions to existing buildings where the addition A 5, 6, 9, 10 and 11 shall apply to all occupancies and appli- C alone meets the definition of covered multifamily dwellings, C A cations not regulated by a state agency. A and new common-use areas serving new covered multifamily C C 89.101.3.2 State-Regulated Buildings, Structures, and dwellings which are regulated by the Department of Housing A A Applications. The model code, state amendments to the and Community Development. See Section 89.108.2.1.2 for C C A model code, and/or state amendments where there are additional scope provisions. A C no relevant model code provisions shall apply to the fol- C 9. Permanent buildings and permanent accessory buildings A lowing buildings, structures, and applications regulated A or structures constructed within mobilehome parks and spe- C C by state agencies and as specified in Sections 89.102

A cial occupancy parks regulated by the Department of Hous- A through 89.114, except where modified by local ordi- C ing and Community Development. See Section 89.108.2.1.3 C A nance pursuant to Section 89.101.8. When adopted by a A for additional scope provisions. C state agency, the provisions of this code shall be enforced C 10. Accommodations for persons with disabilities regulated A by the appropriate enforcing agency, but only to the A C by the Division of the State Architect. See Section 89.109.1 for C extent of authority granted to such agency by the state A additional scope provisions. A legislature. C C Note: See “How to Distinguish Between Model Code Lan- 11. Public elementary and secondary schools, commu- A guage and California Amendments” in the front of the code. nity college buildings, and state-owned or state- leased C 2022 California Electrical Code 70–1

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C essential service buildings regulated by the Division of the 5. Public school automatic fire detection, alarm, and C A State Architect. See Section 89.109.2 for additional scope sprinkler systems. A C C provisions. A 6. Wildland-Urban Interface (WUI) fire areas. A C 12. Qualified historical buildings and structures and their C 15. Section 89.112 is reserved for the State Librarian. A associated sites regulated by the State Historical Building A C 16. Section 89.113 is reserved for the Department of Water C Safety Board with the Division of the State Architect. See Sec- A Resources. A tion 89.109.3 for additional scope provisions. C C 17. Section 89.114 is reserved for the California State Lands A 13. General acute care hospitals, acute psychiatric hospi- A C Commission. C tals, skilled nursing and/or intermediate care facilities, clin- A A ics licensed by the California Department of Public Health 89.101.3.3 Exempted from This Code. This code does C C A (DPH) and correctional treatment centers regulated by the not cover: A

C Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development. See C 1. Installations in ships, watercraft other than floating A Section 89.110 for additional scope provisions. A dwelling units, railway rolling stock, aircraft, automo- C C A 14. Applications regulated by the Office of the State Fire tive vehicles, commercial coaches, mobilehomes, and A C Marshal include, but are not limited to, the following in recreational vehicles. C A accordance with Section 89.111: A 2. Installations underground in mines, mine shafts and C C A 1. Buildings or structures used or intended for use tunnels. A C as an: C 3. Installations of railways for generation, trans- A A 1.1. Asylum, jail, prison. formation, transmission, or distribution of power used C C exclusively for operation of rolling stock or installa- A 1.2. Mental hospital, hospital, home for the elderly, A C tions used exclusively for signaling and communication C children’s nursery, children’s home or institu- A purposes. A tion, school or any similar occupancy of any C C A capacity. 4. Installation of communication equipment under A

C the exclusive control of communication utilities, located C 1.3. Theater, dancehall, skating rink, audito- A outdoors or in building spaces used exclusively for such A rium, assembly hall, meeting hall, nightclub, C C installations. A fair building, or similar place of assem- A C blage where 50 or more persons may gather 5. Installations under the exclusive control of electrical C A together in a building, room or structure for utilities for the purpose of communication, or metering; A C C the purpose of amusement, entertainment, or for the generation, control, transformation, trans- A A instruction, deliberation, worship, drink- mission, and distribution of electrical energy located in C C A ing or dining, awaiting transportation, or buildings used exclusively by utilities for such purposes A C education. or located outdoors on property owned or leased by the C A utility or on public highways, streets, roads, etc., or out- A 1.4. Small family day care homes, large family C C doors by established rights on private property. A day care homes, residential facilities and A

C residential facilities for the elderly and resi- Exception to 4 and 5: In places of employment, the fol- C A dential care facilities. lowing shall apply: installations of conductors, equip- A C C ment and associated enclosures subject to the jurisdiction A 1.5. State institutions or other state-owned or A of the California Public Utilities Commission, that are C state-occupied buildings. C A owned, operated and maintained by an electric, com- A 1.6. High rise structures. C munications or electric railway utility, but not includ- C A 1.7. Motion picture production studios. ing conduit, vaults, and other like enclosures containing A C conductors and equipment of such a utility when located C A 1.8. Organized camps. A indoors or on premises not used exclusively for utility C C 1.9. Residential structures. A purposes, but do not apply to the utility’s conductors and A C 2. Tents, awnings or other fabric enclosures used in equipment therein. C A connection with any occupancy. A 6. Installations on highways or bridges. C C A 3. Fire alarm devices, equipment and systems in con- A

89.101.4 Annexes. Provisions contained in the annexes of C nection with any occupancy. C this code shall not apply unless specifically adopted by a state A A 4. Hazardous materials, flammable and combustible agency or adopted by a local enforcing agency in compliance C C A liquids. with Health and Safety Code Section 18901 et seq. for Building A 70–2 2022 California Electrical Code

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C Standards Law, Health and Safety Code Section 17950 for State additions, or deletions to this code by a city, county, or city and C A Housing Law and Health and Safety Code Section 13869.7 for county filed pursuant to Section 89.101.8.1 shall be the date A C C Fire Protection Districts. See Section 89.101.8 of this code. filed. However, in no case shall the amendments, additions, or A A deletions to this code be effective any sooner than the effective C 89.101.5 Referenced Codes. The codes, standards and publica- C date of this code. A tions adopted and set forth in this code, including other codes, A C C standards and publications referred to therein are, by title and Local modifications shall comply with Health and Safety Code A A date of publication, hereby adopted as standard reference docu- Section 18941.5 for Building Standards Law, Health and Safety C C A ments of this code. When this code does not specifically cover any Code Section 17958 for State Housing Law or Health and Safety A

C subject related to building design and construction, recognized Code Section 13869.7 for Fire Protection Districts. C A architectural or engineering practices shall be employed. The A 89.101.8.1 Findings and Filings. C National Fire Codes, standards and the Fire Protection Hand- C A 1. The city, county, or city and county shall make A book of the National Fire Protection Association are permitted C express findings for each amendment, addition or dele- C A to be used as authoritative guides in determining recognized fire A tion based upon climatic, topographical, or geological C prevention engineering practices. C A conditions. A 89.101.6 Non-Building Standards, Orders and Regulations. C Exception: Hazardous building ordinances and pro- C A Requirements contained in the National Electrical Code, or in A grams mitigating unreinforced masonry buildings. C any other referenced standard, code or document, which are not C A building standards as defined in Health and Safety Code Sec- 2. The city, county, or city and county shall file the A C

tion 18909 shall not be construed as part of the provisions of amendments, additions, or deletions expressly marked C A A this code. For nonbuilding standards, orders, and regulations, and identified as to the applicable findings. Cities, coun- C C A see other titles of the California Code of Regulations. ties, cities and counties, and fire departments shall file A C the amendments, additions, or deletions, and the find- 89.101.7 Order of Precedence and Use. C A ings with the California Building Standards Commission A C 89.101.7.1 Differences. In the event of any differences C at 2525 Natomas Park Drive, Suite 130, Sacramento, CA A between these building standards and the standard refer- A 95833. C ence documents, the text of these building standards shall C A 3. Findings prepared by fire protection districts shall be A govern. C ratified by the local city, county, or city and county and filed C A 89.101.7.2 Specific Provisions. Where a specific provi- A with the California Department of Housing and Commu- C sion varies from a general provision, the specific provision C

A nity Development, Division of Codes and Standards, P.O. A shall apply. C Box 278180, Sacramento, CA 95827-8180 or at 9342 Tech A 89.101.7.3 Conflicts. When the requirements of this code Center Drive, Suite 500, Sacramento, CA 95826-2582. C conflict with the requirements of any other part of the Cali- A 89.101.8.2 California Energy Code Requirements for fornia Building Standards Code, Title 24, the most restric- C Locally Adopted Energy Standards. In addition to the pro- A tive requirements shall prevail. visions of Section 89.101.8.1 of this part, local jurisdictions 89.101.7.3.1 Detached One- and Two-Family Dwell- that adopt changes to energy conservation or insulation ings. Detached one- and two-family dwellings, lodg- standards (including energy efficiency measures) may not ing houses, live/work units, townhouses not more than enforce such changes until the California Energy Commis- three stories above grade plane in height with a sepa- sion has made the findings required by Public Resources

rate means of egress, and their accessory structures, Code Section 25402.1(h)(2), following the process specified may be designed and constructed in accordance with the in Section 10-106 of the California Administrative Code. California Building Code or the California Residential 89.101.9 Effective Date of This Code. Only those standards Code, but not both, unless the proposed structure(s) or C approved by the California Building Standards Commission that are element(s) exceed the design limitations established in A effective at the time an application for building permit is submitted C the California Residential Code, and the code user is shall apply to the plans and specifications for, and to the construc- A specifically directed by the California Residential Code tion performed under, that permit. For the effective dates of the provi- C to use the California Building Code. sions contained in this code, see the History Note page of this code. A C 89.101.8 City, County, or City and County Amendments, Exceptions: (HCD 1 & HCD 2): A Additions or Deletions.

The provisions of this code do not limit C 1. Retroactive permits issued in accordance with Health and C the authority of city, county, or city and county governments to A A Safety Code Section 17958.12. C establish more restrictive and reasonably necessary differences C A to the provisions contained in this code pursuant to comply- 2. Plans approved by the Department of Housing and Commu- A C ing with Section 89.101.8.1. The effective date of amendments, nity Development or a Department-approved design approval C 2022 California Electrical Code 70–3

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C agency for factory-built housing as defined by Health and Reference — Health and Safety Code, Division 13, C A Safety Code Section 19971. Approved plans, pursuant to the Part 2.5, commencing with section 18901. A C C California Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 3, 2. University of California, California State Universi- A Subchapter 1, Article 3, Section 3037 remain valid for a period ties, and California Community Colleges. C A of 36 months from the date of plan approval. A Application — Standards for lighting for parking lots C C 89.101.10 Availability of Codes. At least one complete copy A and primary campus walkways at the University of Cali- each of Titles 8, 19, 20, 24, and 25 with all revisions shall be C fornia, California State Universities, and California A maintained in the office of the building official responsible Community Colleges. C for the administration and enforcement of this code. Each A Enforcing Agency — State or local agency specified by the

A state department concerned and each city, county, or city and C C applicable provisions of law. county shall have an up-to-date copy of the code available for A A public inspection. See Health and Safety Code Section 18942 Authority Cited — Government Code section 14617. C C A A (e) (1) and (2). Reference — Government Code section 14617. C C 89.101.11 Format. This part fundamentally adopts the A A 3. Existing State-Owned Buildings, including those National Electrical Code by reference on a chapter-by-chapter C C owned by the University of California and by the Cali- A A basis. When a specific chapter of the National Electrical Code fornia State University — Building seismic retrofit stan- C C is not printed in the code and is marked “Reserved”, such chap- dards including abating falling hazards of structural and A A ter of the National Electrical Code is not adopted as a portion C nonstructural components and strengthening of building C of this code. When a specific chapter of the National Electrical A A structures. See also Division of the State Architect.

Code is marked “Not adopted by the State of California” but C C Enforcing Agency — State or local agency specified by the A A appears in the code, it may be available for adoption by local applicable provisions of law. C C ordinance. A A Authority Cited — Government Code section 16600 Note: Matrix Adoption Tables at the front of each chapter C C A A may aid the code user in determining which chapter or sec- Reference — Government Code sections 16600 through C C tions within a chapter are applicable to buildings under the 16604 A A authority of a specific state agency, but they are not to be C 4. Unreinforced Masonry Bearing Wall Buildings. C considered regulatory. A A Application — Minimum seismic strengthening standards C C 89.101.12 Validity. If any chapter, article, section, subsection, for buildings specified in Appendix Chapter 1 of the Cali- A A sentence, clause, or phrase of this code is for any reason held to C fornia Code for Building Conservation, except for build- C be unconstitutional, contrary to statute, exceeding the authority of A

A ings subject to building standards adopted pursuant to the state as stipulated by statutes, or otherwise inoperative, such C C Part 1.5 (commencing with Section 17910). A A decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portion of Enforcing Agency — State or local agency specified by the C C this code. A A applicable provisions of law. C C Authority Cited — Health and Safety Code section 18934.7 A A SECTION 89.102 C C Reference — Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.5, A A BUILDING STANDARDS COMMISSION commencing with Section 18901. C C A 89.102.1 BSC Specific scope of application of the agency 89.102.1.1 State building. For purposes of this code, a A C C responsible for enforcement, the enforcement agency, and the “state building” is a structure for which a state agency A A specific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of this or state entity has authority to construct, alter, enlarge, C C code, unless otherwise stated. replace, repair or demolish. A A C C 1. State Buildings for All Occupancies. 89.102.1.2 Enforcement. [CSU, UC, Judicial Council A

A and CDCR] state agencies or state entities authorized to Application — State buildings (all occupancies), includ- C C construct state buildings may appoint a building official A A ing buildings constructed by the Trustees of the California who is responsible to the agency for enforcement of the C C State University and the Regents of the University of Cali- A provisions of the California Building Standards Code. A fornia where no state agency has the authority to adopt C C building standards applicable to such buildings. Exception: State buildings regulated by other sections of A A this code remain the enforcement responsibility of the des- C C Enforcing Agency – State or local agency specified by the A ignated entities. A applicable provisions of law. C C 89.102.1.3 Enforcement, Reserved for DGS. A A Authority Cited — Health and Safety Code section 18934.5. 70–4 2022 California Electrical Code

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C 89.102.1.4 Adopting agency identification. The provi- blies not specifically provided for in this code, shall consist C A sions of this code applicable to buildings identified in this of valid research reports from approved sources. A C C section will be identified in the Matrix Adoption Tables A 89.102.3.2 Tests. Whenever there is insufficient evidence A under the acronym BSC. C of compliance with the provisions of this code, or evidence C A 89.102.2 BSC-CG. Specific scope of application of the agency that a material or method does not conform to the require- A C C responsible for enforcement, the enforcement agency, and the ments of this code, or in order to substantiate claims for A A specific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of this alternative materials or methods, the building official shall C C A code, unless otherwise stated. have the authority to require tests as evidence of compli- A C ance to be made at no expense to the jurisdiction. Test C 89.102.2.1 Green Buildings Standards for Nonresiden-

A methods shall be as specified in this code or by other rec- A tial Occupancies. C C ognized test standards. In the absence of recognized and A Application — All occupancies where no other state A accepted test methods, the building official shall approve C C agency has the authority to adopt green building standards A the testing procedures. A applicable to those occupancies. C C Tests shall be performed by an approved agency. Reports of A Enforcing agency — State or local agency specified by the A such tests shall be retained by the building official for the C C applicable provisions of law. A period required for retention of public records. A C Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Sec- C A tions 18930.5(a), 18938 and 18940.5. A C SECTION 89.103 C A Reference — Health and Safety Code, Division 13, A RESERVED FOR BOARD OF STATE C Part 2.5, commencing with Section 18901. C A AND COMMUNITY CORRECTIONS A 89.102.2.2 Graywater Systems for Nonresidential C C A Occupancies. A C SECTION 89.104 C Application — The construction, installation, and altera- A A

tion of graywater systems for indoor and outdoor uses in RESERVED FOR THE DEPARTMENT C C A nonresidential occupancies. OF CONSUMER AFFAIRS A C C Enforcing agency — State or local agency specified by the A A applicable provisions of law. C SECTION 89.105 C A Authority cited — Health & Safety Code Section A RESERVED FOR THE CALIFORNIA ENERGY C C 18941.8. A COMMISSION A C Reference — Health & Safety Code Section 18941.8. C A A 89.102.2.3 Adopting Agency Identification. The provi- C SECTION 89.106 C A sions of this code applicable to buildings identified in this A RESERVED FOR THE DEPARTMENT OF FOOD C section will be identified in the Matrix Adoption Tables C A under the acronym BSC-CG. A C C A 89.102.3 Alternative Materials, Design and Methods of Con- SECTION 89.107 A C struction and Equipment. C CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH A A The provisions of this code are not intended to prevent the instal- C 89.107 Specific scope of application of the agency responsi- C A lation of any material or to prohibit any design or method of A

ble for enforcement, the enforcement agency, and the specific C construction not specifically prescribed by this code, provided C authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of this code, A that any such alternative has been approved. An alternative A C unless otherwise stated. C material, design or method of construction shall be approved A A where the building official finds that the proposed design is Application — Commissaries serving mobile food prepa- C C A satisfactory and complies with the intent of the provisions of ration units and public swimming pools. A C this code, and that the material, method or work offered is, for C Enforcing Agency — The California Department of Public A the purpose intended, at least the equivalent of that prescribed A Health and the local health agency. C C in this code in quality, strength, effectiveness, fire resistance, A Authority Cited — Health and Safety Code sections A durability and safety. C C 114304, 116050, and 131200. A 89.102.3.1 Research Reports. Supporting data, where A C Reference — Health and Safety Code sections 114304, C

necessary to assist in the approval of materials or assem- A 116050, 116053 and 131200. A 2022 California Electrical Code 70–5

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C SECTION 89.108 accommodations with or without common toilet or cook- C A ing facilities. Sections of this code identified by the abbre- A DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND COMMUNITY C C viation “HCD 1-AC” require specific accommodations for A DEVELOPMENT A persons with disabilities, as defined in Chapter 2 of the C C A 89.108.1 Purpose. The purpose of this code is to establish California Building Code. The application of such provi- A C minimum standards to protect the health, safety, and general sions shall be in conjunction with other requirements of C A welfare of the occupant and the public against hazards that this code and apply only to newly-constructed covered A C C may arise from the use of electricity by governing the design, multifamily dwellings as defined in Chapter 2 of the Cali- A A construction, reconstruction, installation, quality of materials, fornia Building Code. “HCD 1-AC” applications include, C C A location, operation, and maintenance or use of electrical equip- but are not limited to, the following: A

C ment, wiring and systems. C (1) All newly constructed covered multifamily dwellings A A 89.108.2 Authority and Abbreviations. as defined in Chapter 2 of the California Building Code. C C A 89.108.2.1 General. The Department of Housing and (2) New common use areas as defined in Chapter 2 of A C C Community Development is authorized by law to promul- the California Building Code serving existing covered A A gate and adopt building standards and regulations for sev- multifamily dwellings. C C A eral types of building applications. The applications under A (3) Additions to existing buildings, where the addition C the authority of the Department of Housing and Com- C alone meets the definition of covered multifamily dwellings A munity Development are listed in Sections 89.108.2.1.1 A as defined in Chapter 2 of the California Building code. C C through 89.108.2.1.3. A (4) New common use areas serving new covered multi- C 89.108.2.1.1 Housing Construction. Application — Hotels, family dwellings. A A motels, lodging houses, apartments, dwellings, dormitories, C

C (5) Where any portion of a building’s exterior is pre- condominiums, shelters for homeless persons, congregate A A served, but the interior of the building is removed, includ- residences, employee housing, factory-built housing and C C ing all structural portions of floors and ceilings, the A A other types of dwellings containing sleeping accommoda- building is considered a new building for determining the C C tions with or without common toilet or cooking facilities A application of the California Building Code, Chapter 11A. A including accessory buildings, facilities, and uses thereto. C C Sections of this code which pertain to applications listed in “HCD 1-AC” building standards generally do not apply to A A this section are identified using the abbreviation “HCD 1” public use areas or public accommodations such as hotels, C C A motels and public housing. Public use areas, public accom- A Enforcing Agency — Local building department or the C C modations and public housing as defined in Chapter 2 of Department of Housing and Community Development. A

A the California Building Code are subject to the Division C Authority Cited — Health and Safety Code Sections of the State Architect (DSA-AC) in Chapter 11B, and are 17040, 17920.9, 17921, 17921.5, 17921.6, 17921.10, referenced in Section 89.109.1. 17922, 17922.6, 17922.12, 17922.14, 17922.15, 17926, A Newly constructed covered multifamily dwellings, which 17927, 17928, 17958.12, 18938.3, 18944.11, and 19990; C can also be defined as public housing, shall be subject to and Government Code Section 12955.1. A the requirements of Chapter 11A and Chapter 11B. C Reference — Business and Professions Code Division 5; A Enforcing Agency — Local building department or the Health and Safety Code Sections 17000 through 17062.5, C Department of Housing and Community Development. 17910 through 17995.5, 18200 through 18700, 18860 A through 18874, 18938.6, 18941, 19890, 19891, 19892 and Authority Cited — Health and Safety Code Sections 17040, 19960 through 19997; Civil Code Sections 832, 1101.4, 17920.9, 17921, 17921.5, 17921.6, 17921.10, 17922,

1101.5, 1954.201, 1954.202 and 5551; and Government 17922.6, 17922.12, 17922.14, 17926, 17927, 17928, Code Sections 8698.4, 12955.1 and 12955.1.1. California 17958.12, 18938.3, 18944.11, and 19990; and Govern- Code of Regulations, Title 20, Sections 1605.1, 1605.3 and ment Code Sections 12955.1 and 12955.1.1. 1607. C Reference — Health and Safety Code Sections 17000 A C 89.108.2.1.2 Housing Accessibility. Application — Cov- through 17062.5, 17910 through 17995.5, 18200 through C A ered multifamily dwellings as defined in Chapter 2 of the 18700, 18860 through 18874, 18938.6, 18941 and 19960 C California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, also known through 19997; Civil Code Sections 1101.4, 1101.5, A as the California Building Code including, but not limited 1954.201 and 1954.202; and Government Code Sections C A to, lodging houses, dormitories, timeshares, condomini- 12955.1 and 12955.1.1. California Code of Regulations, C ums, shelters for homeless persons, congregate residences, Title 20, Sections 1605.1, 1605.3 and 1607. A

A apartments, dwellings, employee housing, factory-built 89.108.2.1.3 Permanent Buildings in Mobilehome Parks C C housing and other types of dwellings containing sleeping A and Special Occupancy Parks. Application — Permanent A 70–6 2022 California Electrical Code

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C buildings, and permanent accessory buildings or struc- For additional requirements regarding additions, altera- A tures, constructed within mobilehome parks and special tions or repairs to existing buildings and appurtenant C occupancy parks that are under the control and ownership structures, see the California Existing Building Code. A of the park operator. Sections of this code which pertain to C C 89.108.3.2 Laws, Rules, and Regulations. Other than A applications listed in this section are identified using the A the building standards contained in this code, and notwith- C C abbreviation “HCD 2”. standing other provisions of law, the statutory authority and A A Enforcing Agency — The Department of Housing and Com- location of the laws, rules, and regulations to be enforced C C A munity Development, local building department or other by local enforcing agencies are listed by statute in Sections A C C local agency that has assumed responsibility for the enforce- 89.108.3.2.1 through 89.108.3.2.5 below: A

A ment of Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.1, com- 89.108.3.2.1 State Housing Law. Refer to the State C C mencing with Section 18200 for mobilehome parks and A A Housing Law, California Health and Safety Code, Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.3 commencing C C Division 13, Part 1.5, commencing with Section A with Section 18860 for special occupancy parks. A 17910 and California Code of Regulations, Title 25, C C Authority Cited — Health and Safety Code Sections 17040, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 1, commencing A 17920.9, 17921, 17921.5, 17921.6, 17921.10, 17922, with Section 1, for the erection, construction, recon- C 17922.6, 17922.12, 17922.14, 17922.15, 17926, 17927, struction, movement, enlargement, conversion, alter- A C 17928, 17958.12, 18552, 18554, 18620, 18630, 18640, ation, repair, removal, demolition or arrangement of A A 18670, 18690, 18691, 18865, 18871.3, 18871.4, 18873, apartments, condominiums, hotels, motels, lodging C C 18873.1 through 18873.5, 18938.3, 18944.11, and 19990; houses and dwellings, including accessory buildings, A A

and Government Code Section 12955.1. facilities, and uses thereto. C C A A Reference — Health and Safety Code Sections 17000 89.108.3.2.2 Mobilehome Parks Act. Refer to the C C through 17062.5, 17910 through 17995.5, 18200 through Mobilehome Parks Act, California Health and Safety A 18700, 18860 through 18874, 18938.6, 18941, 19890, Code, Division 13, Part 2.1, commencing with Section C 19891, 19892 and 19960 through 19997; Civil Code Sec- 18200 and California Code of Regulations, Title 25, A C tions 1101.4, 1101.5 and 1954.201; and Government Code Division 1, Chapter 2, commencing with Section 1000 A Sections 12955.1 and 12955.1.1. California Code of Regu- for mobilehome park administrative and enforcement C lations, Title 20, Sections 1605.1, 1605.3 and 1607; and authority, permits, plans, fees, violations, inspections A Title 25, Sections 1042 and 2042. and penalties both within and outside mobilehome C parks. A A 89.108.3 Local Enforcing Agency. C C Exception: Mobilehome parks where the Depart- A 89.108.3.1 Duties and Powers. The building department A

ment of Housing and Community Development is the C C of every city, county, or city and county shall enforce all the enforcing agency. A A provisions of law, this code, and the other rules and regu- C C lations promulgated by the Department of Housing and 89.108.3.2.3 Special Occupancy Parks Act. Refer to A A Community Development pertaining to the installation, the Special Occupancy Parks Act, California Health C C A erection, construction, reconstruction, movement, enlarge- and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.3, commencing A C C ment, conversion, alteration, repair, removal, demolition or with Section 18860 and California Code of Regula- A A arrangement of apartments, condominiums, hotels, motels, tions, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2.2, commencing C C lodging houses and dwellings, including accessory build- with Section 2000 for special occupancy park admin- A A ings, facilities, and uses thereto. istrative and enforcement authority, permits, fees, C C violations, inspections and penalties both within and A A The provisions regulating the erection and construction C

C outside of special occupancy parks. of dwellings and appurtenant structures shall not apply to A A existing structures as to which construction is commenced Exception: Special occupancy parks where the Depart- C C A or approved prior to the effective date of these regulations. ment of Housing and Community Development is the A C C Requirements relating to use, maintenance and occupancy enforcing agency. A A shall apply to all dwellings and appurtenant structures 89.108.3.2.4 Employee Housing Act. Refer to the C C approved for construction or constructed before or after A A Employee Housing Act, California Health and Safety the effective date of this code. C C Code, Division 13, Part 1, commencing with Section A A For additional information regarding the use and occu- 17000 and California Code of Regulations, Title 25, C C pancy of existing buildings and appurtenant structures, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 3, commencing A A see California Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, with Section 600 for employee housing administrative C C

A Chapter 1, Subchapter 1, commencing with Article 1, and enforcement authority, permits, fees, violations, A C C Section 1. inspections and penalties. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–7

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C 89.108.3.2.5 Factory-Built Housing Law. Refer to 89.108.4.3.1 Retention of Plans. The building depart- C A the Factory-Built Housing Law, California Health and ment of every city, county, or city and county shall main- A C C Safety Code, Division 13, Part 6, commencing with tain an official copy, microfilm, electronic or other type A A Section 19960 and California Code of Regulations, Title of photographic copy of the plans of every building, C C A 25, Division 1, Chapter 3, Subchapter 1, commencing during the life of the building, for which the department A C with Section 3000 for factory-built housing adminis- issued a building permit. C A trative and enforcement authority, permits, fees, viola- A Exceptions: C C tions, inspections and penalties. A 1. Single or multiple dwellings not more than two A C 89.108.4 Permits, Fees, Applications and Inspections. C stories and basement in height. A A 89.108.4.1 Permits. (a) Except as exempted in para- C 2. Garages and other structures appurtenant to C

A graphs (b) or (c) of this subsection, a written construction A buildings listed in Exception 1. C permit shall be obtained from the enforcing agency prior C 3. Farm or ranch buildings appurtenant to build- A to the erection, construction, reconstruction, installation, A C ings listed in Exception 1. C movement, or alteration of any electrical system. A A 4. Any one-story building where the span between C (b) Consistent with the requirements of Section 17960 of the C bearing walls does not exceed 25 feet (7620 mm), A Health and Safety Code, the local enforcing agency shall A C except a steel frame or concrete building. C enforce the requirements of this code, but shall exempt the A A following activities from the requirement for a permit or All plans for common interest developments as defined C C A inspection. in Section 4100 of the California Civil Code shall be A C retained. For additional information regarding plan C 1. Listed cord and plug connected temporary deco- A retention and reproduction of plans by an enforcing A rative lighting. C C

agency, see Health and Safety Code Sections 19850 A 2. Reinstallation of attachment plug receptacles, A through 19852. C C but not the outlets. A 89.108.4.4 Inspections. Construction or work for which A C 3. Repair or replacement of branch circuit overcur- C a permit is required shall be subject to inspection by the A rent devices of the required capacity in the same location. A building official and such construction or work shall C C A 4. Installation or maintenance of communications remain accessible and exposed for inspection purposes A C wiring, devices, appliances, apparatus or equipment. until approved. Approval as a result of an inspection shall C A not be construed to be an approval of a violation of the pro- A (c) Retroactive permits issued in accordance with Health C C visions of this code or other regulations of the Department A and Safety Code Section 17958.12. A of Housing and Community Development. C Exemptions from permit requirements shall not be deemed 89.108.5 Right of Entry for Enforcement. A to grant authorization for work to be done in any manner C

in violation of other provisions of law or this code. 89.108.5.1 General. Subject to other provisions of law, A C officers and agents of the enforcing agency may enter and C 89.108.4.2 Fees. Subject to other provisions of law, the A inspect public and private properties to secure compli- A governing body of any city, county, or city and county may C C ance with the rules and regulations promulgated by the A prescribe fees to defray the cost of enforcement of rules and A Department of Housing and Community Development. C regulations promulgated by the Department of Housing and C For limitations and additional information regarding A Community Development. The amount of the fees shall not A C enforcement, see the following: C exceed the amount reasonably necessary to administer or A A process permits, certificates, forms, or other documents, or 1. For applications subject to State Housing Law as C C A to defray the costs of enforcement. For additional informa- referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.1 of this code, refer A

C tion, see the State Housing Law, Health and Safety Code, to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1.5, com- C A Division 13, Part 1.5, Section 17951 and California Code of mencing with Section 17910 and California Code of A C C Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 1, Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchap- A A Article 3, commencing with Section 6. ter 1, commencing with Section 1. C C A 89.108.4.3 Plan Review and Time Limitations. Subject 2. For applications subject to the Mobilehome Parks A C C to other provisions of law, provisions related to plan check- Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.2 of this code, A A ing, prohibition of excessive delays and contracting with or refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.1, C C A employment of private parties to perform plan checking are commencing with Section 18200 and California Code A C set forth in the State Housing Law, Health and Safety Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2, com- C A Section 17960.1, and for employee housing, in Health and mencing with Section 1000.

A C C Safety Code Section 17021. A 70–8 2022 California Electrical Code

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C 3. For applications subject to the Special Occupancy Department of Housing and Community Development C A Parks Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.3 of this for fire protection districts. A C C code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, A 3. The California Building Standards Commission has A Part 2.3, commencing with Section 18860 and Califor- C not rejected the modification or change. C A nia Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chap- A Nothing in this section shall limit the authority of fire pro- C ter 2.2, commencing with Section 2000. C A tection districts pursuant to California Health and Safety A 4. For applications subject to the Employee Housing Code Section 13869.7 (a). C Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.4 of this code, A 89.108.7 Alternate Materials, Designs, Tests and Methods of refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1, C Construction. commencing with Section 17000 and California Code of A C Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchap- 89.108.7.1 General.

The provisions of this code as A ter 3, commencing with Section 600. adopted by the Department of Housing and Commu- C C nity Development are not intended to prevent the use of 5. For applications subject to the Factory-Built Hous- A A any alternate material, appliance, installation, device, C ing Law as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.5 of this C arrangement, design or method of construction not specifi- A A code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, C cally prescribed by this code. Consideration and approval C Part 6, commencing with Section 19960 and California A of alternates shall comply with Section 89.108.7.2 for A Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 3, C C local building departments and Section 89.108.7.3 for the Subchapter 1, commencing with Section 3000. A A Department of Housing and Community Development. C C 89.108.6 Local Modification by Ordinance or Regulation. A A 89.108.7.2 Local Building Departments. The building C 89.108.6.1 General. Subject to other provisions of law, C department of any city, county, or city and county may A

A a city, county, or city and county may make changes to approve alternates for use in the erection, construction, C C the provisions adopted by the Department of Housing A reconstruction, movement, enlargement, conversion, A and Community Development. If any city, county, or city C alteration, repair, removal, demolition or arrangement C and county does not amend, add, or repeal by local ordi- A A of apartments, condominiums, hotels, motels, lodging C nances or regulations the provisions published in this C houses, dwellings, or accessory structures, except for the A A code or other regulations promulgated by the Department following: C C of Housing and Community Development, those provi- A 1. Structures located in mobilehome parks as defined A sions shall be applicable and shall become effective 180 C C in California Health and Safety Code Section 18214. days after publication by the California Building Stan- A A C dards Commission. Amendments, additions and deletions 2. Structures located in special occupancy parks as C A

A to this code adopted by a city, county, or city and county defined in California Health and Safety Code Section C C pursuant to California Health and Safety Code Sections 18862.43. A A 17958.5, 17958.7 and 18941.5, together with all appli- C 3. Factory-built housing as defined in California C cable portions of this code, shall also become effective A A Health and Safety Code Section 19971. C 180 days after publication of the California Building C 89.108.7.2.1 Approval of Alternates. The consider- A A Standards Code by the California Building Standards C ation and approval of alternates by a local building C Commission. A A department shall comply with the following proce- C 89.108.6.2 Findings, Filings, and Rejections of Local C dures and limitations: A A Modifications. Prior to making any modifications or C 1. The approval shall be granted on a case-by- C establishing more restrictive building standards, the gov- A case basis. A erning body shall make express findings and filings, as C C required by California Health and Safety Code Section 2.

Evidence shall be submitted to substantiate A A C 17958.7, showing that such modifications are reasonably claims that the proposed alternate, in performance, C A A necessary due to local climatic, geological, or topographi- safety, and protection of life and health, conforms to, C C cal conditions. No modification shall become effective or or is at least equivalent to, the standards contained A A operative unless the following requirements are met: in this code and other rules and regulations promul- C C gated by the Department of Housing and Community A A 1. The express findings shall be made available as a C Development. C public record. A A 3. The local building department may require tests C 2. A copy of the modification and express finding, each C performed by an approved testing agency at the A A document marked to cross-reference the other, shall be C expense of the owner or owner’s agent as proof of C filed with the California Building Standards Commis- A compliance. A sion for a city, county, or city and county and with the C 2022 California Electrical Code 70–9

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C 4. If the proposed alternate is related to accessibil- appeals regarding the requirements of the city, county, or city C A ity in covered multifamily dwellings or in facilities and county relating to the use, maintenance and change of A C C serving covered multifamily dwellings as defined in occupancy of buildings and structures, including require- A A Chapter 2, of the California Building Code, the pro- ments governing alteration, additions, repair, demolition, C C A posed alternate must also meet the threshold set for and moving. In any area in which there is no such board or A C equivalent facilitation as defined in Chapter 2 of the agency, “Housing Appeals Board” means the local appeals C A California Building Code. board having jurisdiction over the area. A C C A For additional information regarding approval of alter- Local Appeals Board. The board or agency of a city, A C nates by a local building department pursuant to the county, or city and county which is authorized by the gov- C

A State Housing Law, see California Health and Safety erning body of the city, county, or city and county to hear A C C Code Section 17951(e) and California Code of Regu- appeals regarding the building requirements of the city, A A lations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 1. county, or city and county. In any area in which there is no C C such board or agency, “Local Appeals Board” means the A 89.108.7.3 Department of Housing and Community A C governing body of the city, county, or city and county hav- C Development. The Department of Housing and Commu- A ing jurisdiction over the area. A nity Development may approve alternates for use in the C A erection, construction, reconstruction, movement, enlarge- 89.108.8.3 Appeals. Except as otherwise provided in law, C ment, conversion, alteration, repair, removal or demoli- any person, firm, or corporation adversely affected by a C A tion of apartments, condominiums, hotels, motels, lodging decision, order, or determination by a city, county, or city A C C

houses, dwellings, or accessory structures thereto and per- and county relating to the application of building standards A A manent buildings in mobilehome parks and special occu- published in the California Building Standards Code, or C C A pancy parks. The consideration and approval of alternates any other applicable rule or regulation adopted by the A C shall comply with the following: Department of Housing and Community Development, or C A any lawfully enacted ordinance by a city, county, or city A 1. The department may require tests at the expense of C C and county, may appeal the issue for resolution to the local A the owner or owner’s agent to substantiate compliance A appeals board or housing appeals board as appropriate. C with the California Building Standards Code. C A The local appeals board shall hear appeals relating to new A 2. The approved alternate shall, for its intended pur- C building construction and the housing appeals board shall C A pose, be at least equivalent in performance and safety to A hear appeals relating to existing buildings.

C the materials, designs, tests, or methods of construction C 89.108.9 Unsafe Buildings or Structures. A prescribed by this code. A C C 89.108.9.1 Authority to Enforce. Subject to other provisions A 89.108.8 Appeals Board. A of law, the administration, enforcement, actions, proceed- C C 89.108.8.1 General. Every city, county, or city and county A ings, abatement, violations and penalties for unsafe buildings A shall establish a process to hear and decide appeals of orders, C and structures are contained in the following statutes and C A decisions, and determinations made by the enforcing agency A regulations: C relative to the application and interpretation of this code and C 1. For applications subject to the State Housing Law A other regulations governing construction, use, maintenance A C as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.1 of this code, refer C and change of occupancy. The governing body of any city, A to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1.5, com- A county, or city and county may establish a local appeals board C C mencing with Section 17910 and California Code of Reg-

A and a housing appeals board to serve this purpose. Members A ulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 1, C of the appeals board(s) shall not be employees of the enforc- C commencing with Section 1. For enforcement related to A ing agency and shall be knowledgeable in the applicable A C accessory dwelling units, see Health and Safety Code C building codes, regulations and ordinances as determined by A Section 17980.12 operative until January 1, 2035. A the governing body of the city, county, or city and county. C C 2. For applications subject to the Mobilehome Parks Act A Where no such appeals boards or agencies have been A C as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.2 of this code, refer to C established, the governing body of the city, county, or city A Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.1, commenc- A and county shall serve as the local appeals board or hous- C C ing with Section 18200 and California Code of Regula- A ing appeals board as specified in California Health and A tions, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2, commencing with

C Safety Code Sections 17920.5 and 17920.6. C A Section 1000. A 89.108.8.2 Definitions. The following terms shall for the C C 3. For applications subject to the Special Occupancy A purposes of this section have the meaning shown. A Parks Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.3 of this C C Housing Appeals Board. The board or agency of a city, A code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part A county, or city and county which is authorized by the gov- C 2.3, commencing with Section 18860 and California Code C erning body of the city, county, or city and county to hear A 70–10 2022 California Electrical Code

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2.2, com- of original materials and the use of original methods of C A mencing with Section 2000. construction for any existing building or accessory struc- A C ture, or portions thereof, shall be permitted in accordance 4. For applications subject to the Employee Housing Act A with the provisions of this code and the California Existing as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.4 of this code, refer to C Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1, commencing Building Code, as adopted by the Department of Housing A and Community Development. For additional information, C with Section 17000 and California Code of Regulations, see California Health and Safety Code, Sections 17912, A Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 3, commencing C 17920.3, 17922 and 17958.8. with Section 600. A A 89.108.10.2 Moved Structures. Subject to the require- C 5. For applications subject to the Factory-Built Hous- C ments of California Health and Safety Code Sections A

ing Law as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.5 of this A C 17922, 17922.3 and 17958.9, local ordinances or regula- C code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, A tions relating to a moved residential building or accessory A Part 6, commencing with Section 19960 and California C C Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 3, structure thereto, shall permit the replacement, retention, A A and extension of original materials and the use of original C Subchapter 1, commencing with Section 3000. C methods of construction so long as the structure does not A A 89.108.9.2 Actions and Proceedings. Subject to other C become or continue to be a substandard building. C provisions of law, punishments, penalties and fines for vio- A A C lations of building standards are contained in the following C A statutes and regulations: SECTION 89.109 A C C 1. For applications subject to the State Housing Law DIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECT A A C as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.1 of this code, refer C 89.109.1 DSA–AC — Division of the State Architect — A

to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1.5, com- A C Access Compliance. C mencing with Section 17910 and California Code of A A Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchap- Note: For applications listed in Section 1.9.1 of the Cali- C C ter 1, commencing with Section 1. fornia Building Code, regulated by the Division of the A A C State Architect—Access Compliance see California Code C 2. For applications subject to the Mobilehome Parks Act A of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2 (California Building Code), A as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.2 of this code, refer to C C Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.1, commenc- Chapter 1 (Division 1 California Administration) under A A authority cited by Government Code Section 4450 and C ing with Section 18200 and California Code of Regula- C in reference cited by Government Code Sections 4450, A tions, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2, commencing with A C through 4461, 12955.1 and Health and Safety Code Sec- C Section 1000. A tions 18949.1, 19952 through 19959. A C 3. For applications subject to the Special Occupancy

C 89.109.2 DSA-SS — Division of the State Architect — Struc- A Parks Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.3 of this A C tural Safety. C code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, A A Part 2.3, commencing with Section 18860 and California 89.109.2.1 DSA-SS (Division of the State Architect — C C Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2.2, Structural Safety). A A C commencing with Section 2000. C 1. Application — Public elementary and secondary A 4. For applications subject to the Employee Housing schools, community college buildings, and state-owned or C Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.4 of this code, state–leased essential services buildings. A C refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1, Enforcing Agency — Division of the State Architect — A commencing with Section 17000 and California Code of Structural Safety (DSA-SS). C Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchap- A The Division of the State Architect has been delegated ter 3, commencing with Section 600. C A the responsibility and authority by the Department of A 5.

For applications subject to the Factory-Built Hous- C General Services to review and approve the design and C A ing Law as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.5 of this oversee the construction of public elementary and sec- A C code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, C ondary schools, community colleges, and state-owned A Part 6, commencing with Section 19960 and California A or state–leased essential services buildings. C C Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 3, A Authority Cited — Education Code Sections 17310 and A Subchapter 1, commencing with Section 3000. C C 81142, and Health and Safety Code Section 16022. A 89.108.10 Other Building Regulations. A C Reference — Education Code Sections 17280 through C A 89.108.10.1 Existing Structures. Notwithstanding other 17317 and 81130 through 81147, and Health & Safety A C provisions of law, the replacement, retention, and extension C Code Sections 16000 through 16023. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–11

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C 89.109.2.2 DSA-SS/CC (Division of the State Architect — 89.110.2 OSHPD 2. Specific scope of application of the C A Structural Safety/Community Colleges). agency responsible for enforcement, enforcement agency, spe- A C C cific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of this code, A Application — Community Colleges. A unless otherwise stated. C C The Division of the State Architect has been delegated the A OSHPD 2 A authority by the Department of General Services to promul- C C A gate alternate building standards for application to commu- Application — Skilled nursing facility and intermediate-care A C nity colleges, which a community college may elect to use in facility buildings. C A lieu of standards promulgated by DSA-SS in accordance with A Enforcing Agency — Office of Statewide Health Planning and C C Section 89.109.2.1. Refer to Title 24, Part 2, Section 1.9.2.2. A Development (OSHPD). The office shall also enforce the Divi- A

C Enforcing Agency — Division of the State Architect – sion of the State Architect access compliance regulations and C A Structural Safety/Community Colleges (DSA-SS/CC). the regulations of the Office of the State Fire Marshal for the A C C above stated facility type. A The Division of the State Architect has been delegated the A C authority by the Department of General Services to review 89.110.2.1 Applicable administrative standards: C A and approve the design and oversee construction of com- A 1. Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations: C C munity colleges electing to use the alternative building A Chapter 7. A standards as provided in this section. C C 2. Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations: A Authority Cited — Education Code Section 81053. A Sections 1.1 and 1.10, Chapter 1 Division I and as indi- C C A Reference — Education Code Sections 81052, 81053, and cated in the adoption matrix for Chapter 1, Division II. A C 81130 through 81147. C 89.110.2.2 Applicable building standards. California A A 89.109.3 SHB — State Historical Building Safety Board.

Building Standards Code, Title 24, Parts 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10 C C A See California Code of Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 8 and 11. A C C (California Historical Building Code). 89.110.3 OSHPD 3. Specific scope of application of the A A agency responsible for enforcement, enforcement agency, spe- C C A cific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of this code, A SECTION 89.110 C unless otherwise stated. C A OFFICE OF STATEWIDE HEALTH PLANNING A OSHPD 3 C AND DEVELOPMENT C A Application — Licensed clinics and any freestanding building A C 89.110.1 OSHPD 1 and OSHPD 1R. Specific scope of appli- C under a hospital license where outpatient clinical services are A A cation of the agency responsible for enforcement, enforcement provided. C C agency, specific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions A Enforcing Agency — Local building department. A C of this code, unless otherwise stated. C A 89.110.3.1 Applicable Administrative Standards. A OSHPD 1 and OSHPD 1R C C 1. Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations:

A Application — [OSHPD 1] General acute-care hospital buildings. A Chapter 7. C C [OSHPD 1R] Non-conforming hospital SPC or freestanding A 2. Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations: A C buildings that have been removed from acute care service. C Sections 1.1 and 1.10, Chapter 1 Division I and as indi- A A Enforcing Agency — Office of Statewide Health Planning and cated in the adoption matrix for Chapter 1, Division II. C C Development (OSHPD). The office shall enforce the Division A 89.110.3.2 Applicable Building Standards. California A C of the State Architect access compliance regulations and the C Building Standards Code, Title 24, Parts 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, A regulations of the Office of the State Fire Marshal for the above A 10 and 11. C stated facility types. C A 89.110.4 OSHPD 4. Specific scope of application of the A C 89.110.1.1 Applicable Administrative Standards. C agency responsible for enforcement, enforcement agency, spe- A A 1. Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations: cific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of this code, C C Chapters 6 & 7.

A unless otherwise stated. A C 2. Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations: C OSHPD 4 A A C Sections 1.1 and 1.10, Chapter 1 Division 1 and as indi- Application — Correctional Treatment Centers. C A cated in the adoption matrix for Chapter 1, Division II. A Enforcing Agency — Office of Statewide Health Planning and C C 89.110.1.2 Applicable Building Standards. California Build- A Development (OSHPD). The Office shall also enforce the Divi- A C ing Standards Code, Title 24, Parts 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10 and 11. sion of the State Architect access compliance regulations and C 70–12 2022 California Electrical Code

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C the regulations of the Office of the State Fire Marshal for the nightclub, fair building or similar place of assemblage where C A above stated facility types. 50 or more persons may gather together in a building, room or A C C structure for the purpose of amusement, entertainment, instruc- A 89.110.4.1 Applicable Administrative Standards. A tion, deliberation, worship, drinking or dining, awaiting trans- C C 1. Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations: A portation, or education. A Chapter 7. C C Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. A 2. Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations: A C Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. C Sections 1.1 and 1.10, Chapter 1 Division I and as A A indicated in the adoption matrix for Chapter 1, Divi- Small family day care homes. C C A sion II. Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Sections 1597.45, A C C 89.110.4.2 Applicable Building Standards. California Build- 1597.54, 13143 and 17921. A A ing Standards Code, Title 24, Parts 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10 and 11.

C Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. C A 89.110.5 OSHPD 5. Specific scope of application of the agency A Large family day care homes. C C responsible for enforcement, enforcement agency and the spe- A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Sections 1597.46, A cific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of this code, C C 1597.54 and 17921. A unless otherwise stated. A C Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. C OSHPD 5 A A Residential facilities and residential facilities for the elderly. C Application — Acute psychiatric hospital buildings. C A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13133. A Enforcing Agency — Office of Statewide Health Planning and C C A Development (OSHPD). The office shall also enforce the Divi- Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. A C sion of the State Architect access compliance regulations and C Any state institution or other state-owned or state-occupied A the regulations of the Office of the State Fire Marshal for the A building. C C above stated facility type.

A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13108. A C 89.110.5.1 Applicable administrative standards: C A Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. A 1. Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations: C C High-rise structures. A Chapter 7. A C Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13211. C 2. Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations: A A Sections 1.1 and 1.10, Chapter 1 Division I, and as indi- Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. C C A cated in the adoption matrix for Chapter 1, Division II. Motion picture production studios. A C C 89.110.5.2 Applicable building standards. California Build- A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143.1. A ing Standards Code, Title 24, Parts 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10 and 11. C C Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. A A C Organized camps. C A SECTION 89.111 A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 18897.3. C C OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL A Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. A C C 89.111.1 SFM-Office of the State Fire Marshal. Specific A Residential.

All hotels, motels, lodging houses, apartment houses A scope of application of the agency responsible for enforcement, C and dwellings, including congregate residences and buildings C A the enforcement agency and the specific authority to adopt and and structures accessory thereto. Multiple-story structures exist- A C enforce such provisions of this code, unless otherwise stated. C ing on January 1, 1975, let for human habitation, including A A Application: and limited to, hotels, motels and apartment houses, less than C C A Institutional, educational or any similar occupancy. Any build- 75 feet (22 860 mm) above the lowest floor level having build- A C ing access, wherein rooms used for sleeping are let above the C ing or structure used or intended for use as an asylum, jail, men- A ground floor. A tal hospital, hospital, sanitarium, home for the aged, children’s C C A nursery, children’s home, school or any similar occupancy of any Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Sections 13143.2 A C capacity. and 17921. C A A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143.

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. C C A Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. Residential care facilities. Certified family care homes, out-of- A C C home placement facilities, halfway houses, drug and/or alcohol A Assembly or similar place of assemblage. Any theater, dance- A rehabilitation facilities and any building or structure used or C hall, skating rink, auditorium, assembly hall, meeting hall, C 2022 California Electrical Code 70–13

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C intended for use as a home or institution for the housing of any building standards relating to fire and panic safety C A person of any age when such person is referred to or placed and other regulations of the State Fire Marshal as A C C within such home or institution for protective social care and they relate to Group R-3 occupancies, as described A A supervision services by any governmental agency. in Section 310.1 of Part 2 of the California Building C C Standards Code, to either of the following: A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143.6. A C C 1.1. The chief of the fire authority of the city, A Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. A county, or city and county, or an authorized C C Tents, awnings or other fabric enclosures used in connection representative. A A with any occupancy. C 1.2. The chief building official of the city, C A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13116. A county, or city and county, or an authorized C C A Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143.

representative. A C C Fire alarm devices, equipment and systems in connection with 2. The chief of any city or county fire department A A any occupancy. or of any fire protection district, and authorized C C A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13114. representatives, shall enforce within the jurisdic- A C tion the building standards and other regulations C A Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. of the State Fire Marshal, except those described in A C Item 1 or 4. C Hazardous materials. A A C Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143.9. 3. The State Fire Marshal shall have authority to C A enforce the building standards and other regula- A Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. C tions of the State Fire Marshal in areas outside of C A Flammable and combustible liquids. A corporate cities and districts providing fire protec- C C tion services. A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143.6. A C 4. The State Fire Marshal shall have authority to C Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. A A

enforce the building standards and other regula- C Public school automatic fire detection, alarm and sprinkler C tions of the State Fire Marshal in corporate cities A systems. A C and districts providing fire protection services on C A Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143 and request of the chief fire official or the governing A C California Education Code Article 7.5, Sections 17074.50, body. C A 17074.52 and 17074.54. A C 5. Any fee charged pursuant to the enforcement C A Reference — Government Code Section 11152.5, Health and authority of this section shall not exceed the esti- A C Safety Code Section 13143 and California Education Code Chap- C mated reasonable cost of providing the service for A ter 12.5, Leroy F. Greene School Facilities Act of 1998, Article 1. A which the fee is charged pursuant to Section 66014 C C A Wildland-urban interface fire area. of the Government Code. A C C Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Sections 13143, 89.111.2.1.2 Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Sec- A A

13108.5(a) and 18949.2(b) and (c) and Government Code Sec- tion 13108, and except as otherwise provided in A this C C A tion 51189. section, building standards adopted by the State Fire A C Marshal published in the California Building Stan- C Reference — Health and Safety Code Sections 13143, Govern- A dards Code relating to fire and panic safety shall be A ment Code Sections 51176, 51177, 51178 and 51179 and Pub- C C enforced by the State Fire Marshal in all state-owned A lic Resources Code Sections 4201 through 4204. A buildings, state-occupied buildings, and state institu- C C 89.111.2 Duties and Powers of the Enforcing Agency A tions throughout the state. Upon the written request A C 89.111.2.1 Enforcement. of the chief fire official of any city, county or fire pro- C A tection district, the State Fire Marshal may authorize A 89.111.2.1.1 The responsibility for enforcement of C C such chief fire official and his or her authorized repre- A building standards adopted by the State Fire Marshal A sentatives, in their geographical area of responsibility,

C and published in the California Building Standards C A Code relating to fire and panic safety and other regu- to make fire prevention inspections of state-owned or A C state-occupied buildings, other than state institutions, C lations of the State Fire Marshal shall except as pro- A for the purpose of enforcing the regulations relating to A vided in Section 89.111.2.1.2 be as follows: C C fire and panic safety adopted by the State Fire Marshal A 1. The city, county, or city and county with juris- A pursuant to this section and building standards relat- C C diction in the area affected by the standard or A ing to fire and panic safety published in the California A regulation shall delegate the enforcement of the C Building Standards Code. Authorization from the State C 70–14 2022 California Electrical Code

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C Fire Marshal shall be limited to those fire depart- operator of any such building or premises shall permit the C A ments or fire districts which maintain a fire prevention State Fire Marshal, his or her deputies or salaried assis- A C C bureau staffed by paid personnel. tants and the chief of any city or county fire department A A or fire-protection district and his or her authorized repre- C Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 13108, C A any requirement or order made by any chief fire offi- sentatives to enter and inspect them at the time and for the A C purpose stated in this section. C cial who is authorized by the State Fire Marshal to A A make fire prevention inspections of state-owned or 89.111.2.3 More Restrictive Fire and Panic Safety Build- C C A state-occupied buildings, other than state institutions, ing Standards. A C may be appealed to the State Fire Marshal. The State C 89.111.2.3.1 Any fire-protection district organized A Fire Marshal shall, upon receiving an appeal and sub- A

pursuant to Health and Safety Code Part 2.7 (com- C C ject to the provisions of Chapter 5 (commencing with A mencing with Section 13800) of Division 12 may adopt A Section 18945) of Part 2.5 of Division 13 of the Health C building standards relating to fire and panic safety C A and Safety Code, determine if the requirement or order that are more stringent than those building standards A C made is reasonably consistent with the fire and panic C adopted by the State Fire Marshal and contained in the A safety regulations adopted by the State Fire Marshal A California Building Standards Code. For these pur- C C and building standards relating to fire and panic safety A poses, the district board shall be deemed a legislative A published in the California Building Code. C body and the district shall be deemed a local agency. C A Any person may request a code interpretation from the Any changes or modifications that are more stringent A C C State Fire Marshal relative to the intent of any regula- than the requirements published in the California A A

tion or provision adopted by the State Fire Marshal. Building Standards Code relating to fire and panic C C A When the request relates to a specific project, occu- safety shall be subject to 101.8.1. A C pancy or building, the State Fire Marshal shall review C 89.111.2.3.2 Any fire protection district that proposes A the issue with the appropriate local enforcing agency A to adopt an ordinance pursuant to this section shall, C C prior to rendering such code interpretation. A not less than 30 days prior to noticing a proposed A C 89.111.2.1.3 Pursuant to Health and Safety Code ordinance for public hearing, provide a copy of that C A Section 13112, any person who violates any order, ordinance, together with the adopted findings made A C C rule or regulation of the state fire marshal is guilty of pursuant to Section 89.111.2.3.1, to the city, county, A A a misdemeanor punishable by a fine of not less than or city and county where the ordinance will apply. The C C A $100.00 or more than $500.00, or by imprisonment for city, county, or city and county, may provide the dis- A

C not less than six months, or by both. A person is guilty trict with written comments, which shall become part C A of a separate offense each day during which he or she of the fire protection district’s public hearing record. A C C commits, continues or permits a violation of any provi- A 89.111.2.3.3 The fire-protection district shall trans- A sion of, or any order, rule or regulation of, the state fire C mit the adopted ordinance to the city, county, or city C A marshal as contained in this code. and county where the ordinance will apply. A C C Any inspection authority who, in the exercise of his or A The legislative body of the city, county, or city and A her authority as a deputy state fire marshal, causes C county, may ratify, modify or deny an adopted ordi- C A any legal complaints to be filed or any arrest to be nance and transmit its determination to the district A C made shall notify the state fire marshal immediately C within 15 days of the determination. Any modification A following such action. A or denial of an adopted ordinance shall include a writ- C C

A 89.111.2.2 Right of Entry. ten statement describing the reasons for any modifica- A C tions or denial. No ordinance adopted by the district C The fire chief of any city, county or fire-protection district, A shall be effective until ratification by the city, county, A or such person’s authorized representative, may enter any C C or city and county where the ordinance will apply. A state institution or any other state-owned or state-occupied A Upon ratification of an adopted ordinance, the city, C building for the purpose of preparing a fire-suppression C A preplanning program or for the purpose of investigating county, or city and county, shall file a copy of the find- A C ings of the district, and any findings of the city, county, C any fire in a state-occupied building. A or city and county, together with the adopted ordinance A C The State Fire Marshal, his or her deputies or salaried C expressly marked and identified to which each finding A assistants, the chief of any city or county fire department A refers, in accordance with Section 101.8.1:3. C C

or fire protection district and his or her authorized repre- A 89.111.2.4 Request for Alternate Means of Protection. A sentatives may enter any building or premises not used for C C Requests for approval to use an alternative material, assem- A dwelling purposes at any reasonable hour for the purpose A bly or materials, equipment, method of construction, method C of enforcing this chapter. The owner, lessee, manager or C 2022 California Electrical Code 70–15

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C of installation of equipment, or means of protection shall be specifications shall be submitted to the enforcing agency C A made in writing to the enforcing agency by the owner or the having jurisdiction. A C C owner’s authorized representative and shall be accompanied A 2. All plans and specifications shall be prepared under A by a full statement of the conditions. Sufficient evidence or C the responsible charge of an architect or a civil or struc- C A proof shall be submitted to substantiate any claim that may A tural engineer authorized by law to develop construction C be made regarding its conformance. The enforcing agency C plans and specifications, or by both such architect and A may require tests and the submission of a test report from an A engineer. Plans and specifications shall be prepared by C C approved testing organization as set forth in Title 19, Cali- A an engineer duly qualified in that branch of engineer- A fornia code of Regulation, to substantiate the equivalency of C ing necessary to perform such services.

Administration of C A the proposed alternative means of protection. A the work of construction shall be under the charge of the C The authority having jurisdiction may consider implemen- responsible architect or engineer except that where plans C A A tation of the findings and recommendations identified in and specifications involve alterations or repairs, such C C A a Risk Management Plan (RMP) as developed in accor- work of construction may be administered by an engineer A C dance with Title 19, Division 2, Chapter 3, when evaluating duly qualified to perform such services and holding a C A requests for alternative means of protection. valid certificate under Chapter 7 (commencing with Sec- A C C tion 65700) of Division 3 of the Business and Professions A Approval of a request for use of an alternative material, A Code for performance of services in that branch of engi- C assembly of materials, equipment, method of construction, C neering in which said plans, specifications and estimates A method of installation of equipment, or means of protection A

C and work of construction are applicable. C made pursuant to these provisions shall be limited to the A A particular case covered by request and shall not be con- This section shall not be construed as preventing the C C A strued as establishing any precedent for any future request. design of fire-extinguishing systems by persons holding A C a C-16 license issued pursuant to Division 3, Chapter 9, C 89.111.2.5 Appeals. When a request for an alternate means A Business and Professions Code. In such instances, how- A of protection has been denied by the enforcing agency, the C C ever, the responsibility charge of this section shall prevail. A applicant may file a written appeal to the state fire marshal A C for consideration of the applicant’s proposal. In considering 89.111.3.4 Existing High-Rise Buildings. C A such appeal, the state fire marshal may seek the advice of the A 1. Complete plans or specifications, or both, shall be pre- C C State Board of Fire Services. The State Fire Marshal shall, A pared covering all work required by Section 3412, for exist- A

after considering all of the facts presented, including any C ing high-rise buildings. Such plans or specifications shall C A recommendations of the State board of Fire Services, deter- A be submitted to the enforcing agency having jurisdiction. C mine if the proposal is for the purposes intended, at least C 2. When new construction is required to conform with A equivalent to that specified in these regulations in quality, A C the provisions of these regulations, complete plans or C strength, effectiveness, fire resistance, durability and safety, A specifications, or both, shall be prepared in accordance A and shall transmit such findings and any recommendations C C with the provisions of this subsection. As used in this A to the applicant and to the enforcing agency. A section “new construction” is not intended to include C C 89.111.3 Construction Documents. In addition to the pro- A repairs, replacements or minor alterations which do A visions of this Section, see Title 24, Part 2, California Build- C not disrupt or appreciably add to or affect the structural C

A ing Code, Appendix Chapter 1, Section 106 for additional A aspects of the building. C requirements. C A 89.111.3.5 Retention of Plans. Refer to Building Stan- A 89.111.3.1 Public Schools. Plans and specifications for C dards Law, Health and Safety Code Sections 19850 and C A the construction, alteration or addition to any building A 19851, for permanent retention of plans. C owned, leased or rented by any public school district shall C 89.111.4 Fees A be submitted to the Division of the State Architect. A C C 89.111.4.1 Other Fees. Pursuant to Health and Safety Code A 89.111.3.2 Movable Walls and Partitions. Plans or dia- A Section 13146.2, a city, county or district which inspects a C grams shall be submitted to the enforcing agency for C hotel, motel, lodging house, or apartment house may charge A approval before the installation of, or rearrangement of, any A C and collect a fee for the inspection from the owner of the C movable wall or partition in any occupancy. Approval shall A structure in an amount, as determined by the city, county or A

be granted only if there is no increase in the fire hazard. C C district, sufficient to pay its costs of that inspection. A 89.111.3.3 New Construction High-Rise Buildings. A C 89.111.4.2 Large Family Day Care. Pursuant to Health C A 1. Complete plans or specifications, or both, shall be A and Safety Code Section 1597.46, Large Family Day-care C prepared covering all work required to comply with C Homes, the local government shall process any required A new construction high-rise buildings. Such plans and A permit as economically as possible, and fees charged for C C 70–16 2022 California Electrical Code

CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS C review shall not exceed the costs of the review and permit 89.111.4.6 Requests of the Office of the State Fire Marshal. C A process. Whenever a local authority having jurisdiction requests A C C that the State Fire Marshal perform plan review and/or A High-Rise. Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Sec- A inspection services related to a building permit, the appli- C tion 13217, High-rise Structure Inspection: Fees and C A Costs, a local agency which inspects a high-rise struc- cable fees for such shall be payable to the Office of the A C State Fire Marshal. C ture pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 13217 A A may charge and collect a fee for the inspection from the 89.111.5 Inspections. Work performed subject to the Provi- C C A owner of the high-rise structure in an amount, as deter- sions of this code shall comply with the inspection requirements A C mined by the local agency, sufficient to pay its costs of that of Title 24, Part 2, California Building Standards Code, Sec- C

A inspection tions 109.1, 109.3, 109.3.4, 109.3.5, 109.3.6, 109.3.8, 109.3.9, A C C 109.3.10 109.5 and 109.6 as adopted by the Office of the State A 89.111.4.4 Fire Clearance Preinspection. Pursuant to A Fire Marshal. C Health and Safety Code Section 13235, Fire Clearance C A Preinspection, fee; upon receipt of a request from a pro- 89.111.5.1 Existing Group l-1 or R occupancies. A C C spective licensee of a community care facility, as defined in Licensed 24-hour care in a Group I-1 or R occupancy A A Section 1502, of a residential-care facility for the elderly, in existence and originally classified under previously C C A as defined in Section 1569.2, or of a child care facility, as adopted state codes be reinspected under the appropri- A C defined in Section 1596.750, the local fire enforcing agency, ate previous code provided there is no change in the use C A as defined in Section 13244, or State Fire Marshal, which- or character which would place the facility in a different A C C ever has primary jurisdiction, shall conduct a preinspec- occupancy group. A A

tion of the facility prior to the final fire clearance approval. C 89.111.6 Certificate of Occupancy. A Certificate of Occu- C A At the time of the preinspection, the primary fire enforc- pancy shall be issued as specified in Title 24, Part 2, California A C ing agency shall price consultation and interpretation of C Building Code, Section 111. A the fire safety regulations and shall notify the prospective A C Exception: Certificates of occupancy are not required licensee of the facility in writing of the specific fire safety A for work exempt from permits in accordance with Section regulations which shall be enforced in order to obtain fire C 105.2 of the California Building Code. A clearance approval. A fee equal to, but not exceeding, the A actual cost of the preinspection services may be charged 89.111.7 Temporary Structures and Uses. See Title 24, Part 2, C for the preinspection of a facility. California Building Code, Section 108. A C C 89.111.4.5 Care Facilities. The primary fire enforcing 89.111.8 Service Utilities. See Title 24, Part 2, California A A

agency shall complete the final fire clearance inspection Building Code Section112. C C A for a community care facility, residential-care facility for 89.111.9 Stop Work Order. See Title 24, Part 2, California A C the elderly, or child care facility within 30 days of receipt C Building Code, Section 115. A of the request for the final inspection, or as of the date the A C 89.111.10 Unsafe Buildings, Structures and Equipment. C prospective facility requests the final prelicensure inspec- A See Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code, Section 116. A tion by the State Department of Social Services, whichever C C A is later. A C C Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 13235, a pre- SECTION 89.112 A A inspection fee equal to, but not exceeding, the actual cost RESERVED FOR THE STATE LIBRARIAN C of the preinspection services may be charged for the prein- A spection of a facility. C A SECTION 89.113 A C Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 13131.5, a C A reasonable final inspection fee, not to exceed the actual RESERVED FOR THE DEPARTMENT OF WATER A C

cost of inspection services necessary to complete a final RESOURCES C A inspection may be charged for occupancies classified as A C C A residential care facilities for the elderly (RCFE). SECTION 89.114 A C Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 1569.84, nei- C A ther the State Fire Marshal nor any local public entity shall RESERVED FOR THE CALIFORNIA STATE LANDS A C COMMISSION C A charge any fee for enforcing fire inspection regulations C pursuant to state law or regulation or local ordinance, with A respect to residential-care facilities for the elderly (RCFE) C which service six or fewer persons. A 2022 California Electrical Code 70–17

ARTICLE 90 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 90 — GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended X X (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section Coordination (Selective) 90.2(B)(1) X X 2022 California Electrical Code 70–19

ARTICLE 90 — INTRODUCTION 90.2 NFPA 70 (C) Relation to Other International Standards. The National Electrical Code requirements in this Code address the fundamental principles of protection for safety contained in Section 131 of Interna- 2020 Edition tional Electrotechnical Commission Standard 60364-1, Electri- IMPORTANT NOTE: This NFPA document is made available cal Installations of Buildings. for use subject to important notices and legal disclaimers. These Informational Note: IEC 60364-1, Section 131, contains notices and disclaimers appear in all publications containing fundamental principles of protection for safety that encom- this document and may be found under the heading “Important pass protection against electric shock, protection against Notices and Disclaimers Concerning NFPA Standards.” They thermal effects, protection against overcurrent, protection can also be viewed at www.nfpa.org/disclaimers or obtained on against fault currents, and protection against overvoltage. request from NFPA. All of these potential hazards are addressed by the require-

UPDATES, ALERTS, AND FUTURE EDITIONS: New ments in this Code. editions of NFPA codes, standards, recommended practices, 90.2 Scope. and guides (i.e., NFPA Standards) are released on scheduled revision cycles. This edition may be superseded by a later ∆ (A) Covered. This Code covers the installation and removal of one, or it may be amended outside of its scheduled revision electrical conductors, equipment, and raceways; signaling and cycle through the issuance of Tentative Interim Amendments communications conductors, equipment, and raceways; and opti- (TIAs). An official NFPA Standard at any point in time con- cal fiber cables for the following: sists of the current edition of the document, together with (1) Public and private premises, including buildings, struc- all TIAs and Errata in effect. To verify that this document is tures, mobile homes, recreational vehicles, and floating the current edition or to determine if it has been amended by buildings ® TIAs or Errata, please consult the National Fire Codes Sub- (2) Yards, lots, parking lots, carnivals, and industrial substations

scription Service or the “List of NFPA Codes & Standards” (3) Installations of conductors and equipment that connect to at www.nfpa.org/docinfo. In addition to TIAs and Errata, the the supply of electricity document information pages also include the option to sign (4) Installations used by the electric utility, such as office up for alerts for individual documents and to be involved in buildings, warehouses, garages, machine shops, and rec- the development of the next edition. reational buildings, that are not an integral part of a gener- ating plant, substation, or control center (5) Installations supplying shore power to ships and watercraft in marinas and boatyards, including monitoring of leakage ARTICLE 90 current Introduction (6) Installations used to export electric power from vehicles to premises wiring or for bidirectional current flow 90.1 Purpose. (B) Not Covered. This Code does not cover the following: (A) Practical Safeguarding. The purpose of this Code is the (1) Installations in ships, watercraft other than floating build-

practical safeguarding of persons and property from hazards ings, railway rolling stock, aircraft, or automotive vehicles arising from the use of electricity. This Code is not intended other than mobile homes and recreational vehicles as a design specification or an instruction manual for untrained (HCD 1 & HCD 2) Installations in ships, watercraft other than persons. floating dwelling units, railway rolling stock, aircraft, automotive (B) Adequacy. This Code contains provisions that are con- vehicles, commercial coaches, mobile homes, and recreational sidered necessary for safety. Compliance therewith and proper vehicles. maintenance result in an installation that is essentially free from hazard but not necessarily efficient, convenient, or adequate for Informational Note: Although the scope of this Code good service or future expansion of electrical use. indicates that the Code does not cover installations in ships, portions of this Code are incorporated by reference Informational Note: Hazards often occur because of into Title 46, Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 110–113.

overloading of wiring systems by methods or usage not (2) Installations underground in mines and self-propelled in conformity with this Code. This occurs because initial mobile surface mining machinery and its attendant electri- wiring did not provide for increases in the use of electric- cal trailing cable ity. An initial adequate installation and reasonable provi- (3) Installations of railways for generation, transformation, sions for system changes provide for future increases in transmission, energy storage, or distribution of power used the use of electricity. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–21

90.3 ARTICLE 90 — INTRODUCTION exclusively for operation of rolling stock or installations Chapter 1 — General used exclusively for signaling and communications purposes (4) Installations of communications equipment under the exclu- Chapter 2 — Wiring and Protection Applies generally sive control of communications utilities located outdoors or to all electrical Chapter 3 — Wiring Methods and Materials installations in building spaces used exclusively for such installations (5) Installations under the exclusive control of an electric util- Chapter 4 — Equipment for General Use ity where such installations a. Consist of service drops or service laterals, and associ- Chapter 5 — Special Occupancies ated metering, or Supplements or modifies Chapter 6 — Special Equipment b. Are on property owned or leased by the electric utility Chapters 1 through 7 for the purpose of communications, metering, genera- Chapter 7 — Special Conditions tion, control, transformation, transmission, energy stor- age, or distribution of electric energy, or Chapter 8 is not subject c.

Are located in legally established easements or rights-of- to the requirements of way, or Chapter 8 — Communications Systems Chapters 1 through 7 except where the requirements are d. Are located by other written agreements either desig- specifically referenced in nated by or recognized by public service commissions, Chapter 8. Chapter 9 — Tables utility commissions, or other regulatory agencies hav- Applicable as referenced ing jurisdiction for such installations. These written Informative Annex A through Informational only; not mandatory agreements shall be limited to installations for the pur- Informative Annex J pose of communications, metering, generation, con- FIGURE 90.3 Code Arrangement. trol, transformation, transmission, energy storage, or distribution of electric energy where legally established easements or rights-of-way cannot be obtained. These 2, 3, and 4 apply generally. Chapters 5, 6, and 7 apply to special installations shall be limited to federal lands, Native occupancies, special equipment, or other special conditions American reservations through the U.S.

Department and may supplement or modify the requirements in Chapters 1 of the Interior Bureau of Indian Affairs, military bases, through 7. lands controlled by port authorities and state agencies Chapter 8 covers communications systems and is not sub- and departments, and lands owned by railroads. ject to the requirements of Chapters 1 through 7 except where Informational Note to (4) and (5): Examples of utilities the requirements are specifically referenced in Chapter 8. may include those entities that are typically designated Chapter 9 consists of tables that are applicable as referenced. or recognized by governmental law or regulation by pub- Informative annexes are not part of the requirements of this lic service/utility commissions and that install, operate, Code but are included for informational purposes only. and maintain electric supply (such as generation, trans- mission, or distribution systems) or communications sys- 90.4 Enforcement. This Code is intended to be suitable for

tems (such as telephone, CATV, Internet, satellite, or data mandatory application by governmental bodies that exercise services). Utilities may be subject to compliance with legal jurisdiction over electrical installations, including sig- codes and standards covering their regulated activities as naling and communications systems, and for use by insurance adopted under governmental law or regulation. Addi- inspectors. The authority having jurisdiction for enforcement tional information can be found through consultation with of the Code has the responsibility for making interpretations of the appropriate governmental bodies, such as state regula- the rules, for deciding on the approval of equipment and materi- tory commissions, the Federal Energy Regulatory Com- als, and for granting the special permission contemplated in a mission, and the Federal Communications Commission. number of the rules. (C) Special Permission. The authority having jurisdiction for By special permission, the authority having jurisdiction may

enforcing this Code may grant exception for the installation of waive specific requirements in this Code or permit alternative conductors and equipment that are not under the exclusive con- methods where it is assured that equivalent objectives can be trol of the electric utilities and are used to connect the electric achieved by establishing and maintaining effective safety. utility supply system to the service conductors of the premises This Code may require new products, constructions, or served, provided such installations are outside a building or materials that may not yet be available at the time the Code is structure, or terminate inside at a readily accessible location adopted. In such event, the authority having jurisdiction may nearest the point of entrance of the service conductors. permit the use of the products, constructions, or materials that 90.3 Code Arrangement. This Code is divided into the intro- comply with the most recent previous edition of this Code duction and nine chapters, as shown in Figure 90.3. Chapters 1, adopted by the jurisdiction.

70–22 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 90 — INTRODUCTION 90.9 90.5 Mandatory Rules, Permissive Rules, and Explanatory facilities described in the preceding paragraph and that requires Material. suitability for installation in accordance with this Code. Suit- ability shall be determined by application of requirements that (A) Mandatory Rules. Mandatory rules of this Code are those are compatible with this Code. that identify actions that are specifically required or prohibited and are characterized by the use of the terms shall or shall not. Informational Note No. 1: See requirements in 110.3. (B) Permissive Rules. Permissive rules of this Code are those Informational Note No. 2: Listed is defined in Article 100. that identify actions that are allowed but not required, are nor- Informational Note No. 3: Informative Annex A contains mally used to describe options or alternative methods, and are a list of product safety standards that are compatible with characterized by the use of the terms shall be permitted or shall this Code. not be required. 90.8 Wiring Planning. (C) Explanatory Material.

Explanatory material, such as (A) Future Expansion and Convenience. Plans and specifi- references to other standards, references to related sections of cations that provide ample space in raceways, spare raceways, this Code, or information related to a Code rule, is included and additional spaces allow for future increases in electric power in this Code in the form of informational notes. Such notes are and communications circuits. Distribution centers located in informational only and are not enforceable as requirements of readily accessible locations provide convenience and safety of this Code. operation. Brackets containing section references to another NFPA (B) Number of Circuits in Enclosures. It is elsewhere pro- document are for informational purposes only and are pro- vided in this Code that the number of circuits confined in a vided as a guide to indicate the source of the extracted text. single enclosure be varyingly restricted. Limiting the number of These bracketed references immediately follow the extracted

circuits in a single enclosure minimizes the effects from a short text. circuit or ground fault. Informational Note: The format and language used in this 90.9 Units of Measurement. Code follows guidelines established by NFPA and pub- lished in the NEC Style Manual. Copies of this manual (A) Measurement System of Preference. For the purpose of can be obtained from NFPA. this Code, metric units of measurement are in accordance with the modernized metric system known as the International System (D) Informative Annexes. Nonmandatory information rela- of Units (SI). tive to the use of the NEC is provided in informative annexes. Informative annexes are not part of the enforceable require- (B) Dual System of Units. SI units shall appear first, ments of the NEC, but are included for information purposes and inch-pound units shall immediately follow in parentheses. only. Conversion from inch-pound units to SI units shall be based on hard conversion except as provided in 90.9(C). ∆ 90.6 Formal Interpretations. To promote uniformity of

interpretation and application of this Code, formal interpre- (C) Permitted Uses of Soft Conversion. The cases given in tation procedures have been established and are found in the 90.9(C)(1) through (C)(4) shall not be required to use hard con- Regulations Governing the Development of NFPA Standards. version and shall be permitted to use soft conversion. 90.7 Examination of Equipment for Safety. For specific (1) Trade Sizes. Where the actual measured size of a product is items of equipment and materials referred to in this Code, not the same as the nominal size, trade size designators shall be examinations for safety made under standard conditions pro- used rather than dimensions. Trade practices shall be followed vide a basis for approval where the record is made generally in all cases. available through promulgation by organizations properly (2) Extracted Material. Where material is extracted from equipped and qualified for experimental testing, inspections another standard, the context of the original material shall not

of the run of goods at factories, and service-value determina- be compromised or violated. Any editing of the extracted text tion through field inspections. This avoids the necessity for shall be confined to making the style consistent with that of the repetition of examinations by different examiners, frequently NEC. with inadequate facilities for such work, and the confusion (3) Industry Practice. Where industry practice is to express that would result from conflicting reports on the suitability of units in inch-pound units, the inclusion of SI units shall not be devices and materials examined for a given purpose. required. It is the intent of this Code that factory-installed internal wir- (4) Safety. Where a negative impact on safety would result, ing or the construction of equipment need not be inspected at soft conversion shall be used. the time of installation of the equipment, except to detect altera- tions or damage, if the equipment has been listed by a quali- (D) Compliance. Conversion from inch-pound units to SI units

fied electrical testing laboratory that is recognized as having the shall be permitted to be an approximate conversion. Compliance 2022 California Electrical Code 70–23

90.9 ARTICLE 90 — INTRODUCTION with the numbers shown in either the SI system or the inch-pound considered a direct mathematical conversion and involves system shall constitute compliance with this Code. a change in the description of an existing measurement but not in the actual dimension. Informational Note No. 1: Hard conversion is considered a change in dimensions or properties of an item into new Informational Note No. 2: SI conversions are based on sizes that might or might not be interchangeable with the IEEE/ASTM SI 10-1997, Standard for the Use of the Inter- sizes used in the original measurement. Soft conversion is national System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System. 70–24 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 1 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 1-AC AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X Adopt entire Article as amended X X X X X X X X X (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are X listed below Article/Section Accessory Dwelling Unit X X Coordination X X X X X Ballasted Solar Photovoltaic System X X X X Building (Exception) X X X ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended X X X X sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 110.2 X X X X X X 110.13 Exception X X X X 110.13(C) X X X X X X 110.26(C)(3) X X X X X X 2022 California Electrical Code 70–25

ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS CHAPTER 1 Chapter 1 General rotational speed of an ac electric motor by controlling the ARTICLE 100 frequency and voltage of the electrical power supplied to Definitions the motor. Adjustable Speed Drive System. A combination of an adjust- able speed drive, its associated motor(s), and auxiliary equipment. Scope. This article contains only those definitions essential to the (CMP-11) application of this Code. It is not intended to include commonly defined general terms or commonly defined technical terms from Ampacity. The maximum current, in amperes, that a conduc- related codes and standards. In general, only those terms that are tor can carry continuously under the conditions of use without used in two or more articles are defined in Article 100. Defini- exceeding its temperature rating. (CMP-6) tions are also found in XXX.2 sections of other articles. Appliance. Utilization equipment, generally other than indus- Part I of this article contains definitions intended to apply trial, that is normally built in standardized sizes or types and is

wherever the terms are used throughout this Code. Part II contains installed or connected as a unit to perform one or more functions definitions applicable to installations and equipment operating at such as clothes washing, air-conditioning, food mixing, deep over 1000 volts, nominal. Part III contains definitions applicable frying, and so forth. (CMP-17) to Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Approved. Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. (CMP-1) Part I. General Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI). A device intended to Accessible (as applied to equipment). Capable of being provide protection from the effects of arc faults by recognizing reached for operation, renewal, and inspection. (CMP-1) characteristics unique to arcing and by functioning to de-energize Accessible (as applied to wiring methods). Capable of being the circuit when an arc fault is detected. (CMP-2) removed or exposed without damaging the building structure or Askarel. A generic term for a group of nonflammable syn- finish or not permanently closed in by the structure or finish of

thetic chlorinated hydrocarbons used as electrical insulating the building. (CMP-1) media. (CMP-9) Accessible, Readily (Readily Accessible). Capable of being Informational Note: Askarels of various compositional reached quickly for operation, renewal, or inspections without types are used. Under arcing conditions, the gases pro- requiring those to whom ready access is requisite to take actions duced, while consisting predominantly of noncombustible such as to use tools (other than keys), to climb over or under, to hydrogen chloride, can include varying amounts of com- remove obstacles, or to resort to portable ladders, and so forth. bustible gases, depending on the askarel type. (CMP-1) N Attachment Fitting. A device that, by insertion into a lock- Informational Note: Use of keys is a common practice ing support and mounting receptacle, establishes a connection under controlled or supervised conditions and a com- between the conductors of the attached utilization equipment mon alternative to the ready access requirements under

and the branch-circuit conductors connected to the locking sup- such supervised conditions as provided elsewhere in the port and mounting receptacle. (CMP-18) NEC. Informational Note: An attachment fitting is different C Accessory Dwelling Unit. (HCD 1 & HCD 2) An attached or from an attachment plug because no cord is associated A detached residential dwelling unit that provides complete inde- with the fitting. An attachment fitting in combination C pendent living facilities for one or more persons and is located A with a locking support and mounting receptacle secures on a lot with a proposed or existing primary residence. Acces- C the associated utilization equipment in place and sup- sory dwelling units shall include permanent provisions for liv- A ports its weight. C ing, sleeping, eating, cooking, and sanitation on the same parcel A as the single-family or multifamily dwelling is or will be situ- Attachment Plug (Plug Cap) (Plug). A device that, by inser- C ated. (See Government Code Section 65852.2) tion in a receptacle, establishes a connection between the

conductors of the attached flexible cord and the conductors Adjustable Speed Drive. Power conversion equipment that connected permanently to the receptacle. (CMP-18) provides a means of adjusting the speed of an electric motor. (CMP-11) Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). An organization, office, or individual responsible for enforcing the requirements of a code Informational Note: A variable frequency drive is one or standard, or for approving equipment, materials, an installa- type of electronic adjustable speed drive that controls the tion, or a procedure. (CMP-1) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–27

CHAPTER 1 ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS Informational Note: The phrase “authority having juris- or the equipment grounding conductor, or both, at a separately diction,” or its acronym AHJ, is used in NFPA documents derived system. (CMP-5) in a broad manner, since jurisdictions and approval agen- Branch Circuit. The circuit conductors between the final cies vary, as do their responsibilities. Where public safety overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s). is primary, the authority having jurisdiction may be a fed- (CMP-2) eral, state, local, or other regional department or individual such as a fire chief; fire marshal; chief of a fire prevention Branch Circuit, Appliance. A branch circuit that supplies bureau, labor department, or health department; building energy to one or more outlets to which appliances are to be con- official; electrical inspector; or others having statutory nected and that has no permanently connected luminaires that authority. For insurance purposes, an insurance inspection are not a part of an appliance. (CMP-2)

department, rating bureau, or other insurance company Branch Circuit, General-Purpose. A branch circuit that sup- representative may be the authority having jurisdiction. plies two or more receptacles or outlets for lighting and appli- In many circumstances, the property owner or his or her ances. (CMP-2) designated agent assumes the role of the authority having Branch Circuit, Individual. A branch circuit that supplies only jurisdiction; at government installations, the commanding one utilization equipment. (CMP-2) officer or departmental official may be the authority hav- ing jurisdiction. Branch Circuit, Multiwire. A branch circuit that consists of two or more ungrounded conductors that have a voltage Automatic. Performing a function without the necessity of between them, and a grounded conductor that has equal volt- human intervention. (CMP-1) age between it and each ungrounded conductor of the circuit C Ballasted Solar Photovoltaic System. [BSC, SFM, HCD 1 & and that is connected to the neutral or grounded conductor of

A HCD 2] A roof mounted system composed of solar photovol- the system. (CMP-2) C taic panels and supporting members that are unattached or A Building. A structure that stands alone or that is separated partially attached to the roof and must rely on their weight, C from adjoining structures by fire walls. (CMP-1) A aerodynamics and friction to counter the effect of wind and seismic forces. Exception: [HCD 1, HCD 2 & HCD 1-AC] For applications C listed in Section 89.108.2.1.1 regulated by the Department of A Bathroom. An area including a sink (basin) with one or more C Housing and Community Development, “Building” shall not of the following: a toilet, a urinal, a tub, a shower, a bidet, or A include the following: similar plumbing fixtures. (CMP-2) C 1. Any mobilehome as defined in Health and Safety Code Sec- A Battery System. Interconnected battery subsystems consisting C tion 18008. of one or more storage batteries and battery chargers, and can A 2. Any manufactured home as defined in Health and Safety include inverters, converters, and associated electrical equip- C

Code Section 18007. ment. (CMP-13) A 3. Any commercial modular as defined in Health and Safety C Bonded (Bonding). Connected to establish electrical continu- Code Section 18001.8 or any special purpose commercial A ity and conductivity. (CMP-5) 4. Any recreational vehicle as defined in Health and Safety C A Bonding Conductor or Jumper. A reliable conductor to Code Section 18010. C ensure the required electrical conductivity between metal parts 5. Any multifamily manufactured home as defined in Health A required to be electrically connected. (CMP-5) and Safety Code Section 18008.7. C A Bonding Jumper, Equipment. The connection between two or For additional information, see Health and Safety Code Sec- C more portions of the equipment grounding conductor. (CMP-5) tion 18908. A C Bonding Jumper, Main. The connection between the grounded Note: Building shall have the same meaning as defined in A circuit conductor and the equipment grounding conductor, Health and Safety Code Section 17920 and 18908 for the C or the supply-side bonding jumper, or both, at the service.

applications specified in Section 89.111. A (CMP-5) Cabinet. An enclosure that is designed for either surface N Bonding Jumper, Supply-Side. A conductor installed on the mounting or flush mounting and is provided with a frame, mat, supply side of a service or within a service equipment enclosure(s), or trim in which a swinging door or doors are or can be hung. or for a separately derived system, that ensures the required elec- (CMP-9) trical conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically Cable, Coaxial. A cylindrical assembly composed of a con- connected. (CMP-5) ductor centered inside a metallic tube or shield, separated by a Bonding Jumper, System. The connection between the dielectric material, and usually covered by an insulating jacket. grounded circuit conductor and the supply-side bonding jumper, (CMP-16) 70–28 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS CHAPTER 1 ∆ Cable, Optical Fiber. A factory assembly or field assembly of adjustment to alter the value of the current at which it will trip one or more optical fibers having an overall covering. (CMP-16) or the time required for its operation. Informational Note: A field-assembled optical fiber cable Setting (of circuit breakers). The value of current, time, or is an assembly of one or more optical fibers within a jacket. both, at which an adjustable circuit breaker is set to trip. The jacket, without optical fibers, is installed in a manner N Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable. Cable(s) used for remote-con- similar to conduit or raceway. Once the jacket is installed, trol, signaling, or power-limited systems that supply critical the optical fibers are inserted into the jacket, completing circuits to ensure survivability for continued circuit operation the cable assembly. for a specified time under fire conditions. (CMP-3) Cable, Optical Fiber, Composite. A cable containing optical N Class 1 Circuit. The portion of the wiring system between the

fibers and current-carrying electrical conductors. (CMP-16) load side of the overcurrent device or power-limited supply Cable, Optical Fiber, Conductive. A factory assembly of one and the connected equipment. (CMP-3) or more optical fibers having an overall covering and containing Informational Note: See 725.41 for voltage and power non–current-carrying conductive member(s) such as metallic limitations of Class 1 circuits. strength member(s), metallic vapor barrier(s), metallic armor, or metallic sheath. (CMP-16) N Class 2 Circuit. The portion of the wiring system between the load side of a Class 2 power source and the connected equip- Cable, Optical Fiber, Nonconductive. A factory assembly ment. Due to its power limitations, a Class 2 circuit considers of one or more optical fibers having an overall covering and safety from a fire initiation standpoint and provides acceptable containing no electrically conductive materials. (CMP-16) protection from electric shock. (CMP-3) Cable Routing Assembly. A single channel or connected N Class 3 Circuit.

The portion of the wiring system between the multiple channels, as well as associated fittings, forming a struc- load side of a Class 3 power source and the connected equip- tural system that is used to support and route communications ment. Due to its power limitations, a Class 3 circuit consid- wires and cables, optical fiber cables, data cables associated ers safety from a fire initiation standpoint. Since higher levels with information technology and communications equipment, of voltage and current than for Class 2 are permitted, additional Class 2, Class 3, and Type PLTC cables, and power-limited fire safeguards are specified to provide protection from an electric alarm cables in plenum, riser, and general-purpose applications. shock hazard that could be encountered. (CMP-3) (CMP-16) Clothes Closet. A nonhabitable room or space intended pri- Charge Controller. Equipment that controls dc voltage or dc marily for storage of garments and apparel. (CMP-1) current, or both, and that is used to charge a battery or other energy storage device. (CMP-13) Communications Equipment.

The electronic equipment that performs the telecommunications operations for the transmission Circuit Breaker. A device designed to open and close a circuit of audio, video, and data, and includes power equipment (e.g., by nonautomatic means and to open the circuit automatically dc converters, inverters, and batteries), technical support equip- on a predetermined overcurrent without damage to itself when ment (e.g., computers), and conductors dedicated solely to the properly applied within its rating. (CMP-10) operation of the equipment. (CMP-16) Informational Note: The automatic opening means can be Informational Note: As the telecommunications network integral, direct acting with the circuit breaker, or remote transitions to a more data-centric network, computers, from the circuit breaker. routers, servers, and their powering equipment, are becom- Adjustable (as applied to circuit breakers). A qualifying term ing essential to the transmission of audio, video, and data

indicating that the circuit breaker can be set to trip at vari- and are finding increasing application in communications ous values of current, time, or both, within a predetermined equipment installations. range. Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of Instantaneous Trip (as applied to circuit breakers). A qualify- the building. (CMP-1) ing term indicating that no delay is purposely introduced in the Informational Note: Wires in concealed raceways are tripping action of the circuit breaker. considered concealed, even though they may become Inverse Time (as applied to circuit breakers). A qualifying term accessible by withdrawing them. indicating that there is purposely introduced a delay in the trip- Conductor, Bare. A conductor having no covering or electri- ping action of the circuit breaker, which delay decreases as the cal insulation whatsoever. (CMP-6) magnitude of the current increases. Conductor, Covered. A conductor encased within material of Nonadjustable (as applied to circuit breakers). A qualify-

composition or thickness that is not recognized by this Code as ing term indicating that the circuit breaker does not have any electrical insulation. (CMP-6) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–29

CHAPTER 1 ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS Conductor, Insulated. A conductor encased within material Dead Front. Without live parts exposed to a person on the of composition and thickness that is recognized by this Code as operating side of the equipment. (CMP-9) electrical insulation. (CMP-6) Demand Factor. The ratio of the maximum demand of a system, Conduit Body. A separate portion of a conduit or tubing sys- or part of a system, to the total connected load of a system or the tem that provides access through a removable cover(s) to the part of the system under consideration. (CMP-2) interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections of Device. A unit of an electrical system, other than a conductor, the system or at a terminal point of the system. that carries or controls electric energy as its principal function. Boxes such as FS and FD or larger cast or sheet metal boxes (CMP-1) are not classified as conduit bodies. (CMP-9) Disconnecting Means. A device, or group of devices, or Connector, Pressure (Solderless).

A device that establishes a other means by which the conductors of a circuit can be discon- connection between two or more conductors or between one or nected from their source of supply. (CMP-1) more conductors and a terminal by means of mechanical pressure N Dormitory Unit. A building or a space in a building in which and without the use of solder. (CMP-1) group sleeping accommodations are provided for more than Continuous Load. A load where the maximum current is 16 persons who are not members of the same family in one room, expected to continue for 3 hours or more. (CMP-2) or a series of closely associated rooms, under joint occupancy and single management, with or without meals, but without individual Control Circuit. The circuit of a control apparatus or sys- cooking facilities. (CMP 2) tem that carries the electric signals directing the performance of the controller but does not carry the main power current. Duty, Continuous. Operation at a substantially constant load (CMP-11) for an indefinitely long time. (CMP-1) Controller.

A device or group of devices that serves to govern, Duty, Intermittent. Operation for alternate intervals of (1) in some predetermined manner, the electric power delivered to load and no load; or (2) load and rest; or (3) load, no load, and the apparatus to which it is connected. (CMP-1) rest. (CMP-1) Cooking Unit, Counter-Mounted. A cooking appliance Duty, Periodic. Intermittent operation in which the load con- designed for mounting in or on a counter and consisting of ditions are regularly recurrent. (CMP-1) one or more heating elements, internal wiring, and built-in or Duty, Short-Time. Operation at a substantially constant load mountable controls. (CMP-2) for a short and definite, specified time. (CMP-1) ∆ Coordination, Selective (Selective Coordination). Localiza- Duty, Varying. Operation at loads, and for intervals of time, tion of an overcurrent condition to restrict outages to the circuit or both of which may be subject to wide variation. (CMP-1) equipment affected, accomplished by the selection and installation

of overcurrent protective devices and their ratings or settings for the Dwelling, One-Family. A building that consists solely of one full range of available overcurrents, from overload to the available dwelling unit. (CMP-1) fault current, and for the full range of overcurrent protective device Dwelling, Two-Family. A building that consists solely of two opening times associated with those overcurrents. (CMP-10) dwelling units. (CMP-1) Coordination. [OSHPD 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5] Localization of an over- Dwelling, Multifamily. A building that contains three or more current condition to restrict outages to the circuit or equipment dwelling units. (CMP-1) affected, accomplished by the selection and installation of overcur- Dwelling Unit. A single unit, providing complete and inde- rent protective devices and their ratings or settings utilizing the 0.10 pendent living facilities for one or more persons, including per- second level of the overcurrent protective device from the time cur- manent provisions for living, sleeping, cooking, and sanitation.

rent curve as the basis for the lower limit of the calculation method. (CMP-2) Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors. Conductors drawn from Effective Ground-Fault Current Path. An intentionally con- a copper-clad aluminum rod, with the copper metallurgically structed, low-impedance electrically conductive path designed bonded to an aluminum core, where the copper forms a minimum and intended to carry current under ground-fault conditions of 10 percent of the cross-sectional area of a solid conductor or from the point of a ground fault on a wiring system to the elec- each strand of a stranded conductor. (CMP-6) trical supply source and that facilitates the operation of the over- Cutout Box. An enclosure designed for surface mounting that current protective device or ground-fault detectors. (CMP-5) has swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescop- Electric Power Production and Distribution Network. Power ing with the walls of the enclosure. (CMP-9) production, distribution, and utilization equipment and facili- N DC-to-DC Converter.

A device that can provide an output dc ties, such as electric utility systems that are connected to prem- voltage and current at a higher or lower value than the input ises wiring and are external to and not controlled by an interactive dc voltage and current. (CMP-4) system. (CMP-13) 70–30 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS CHAPTER 1 Electric Sign. A fixed, stationary, or portable self-contained, electrically operated and/or electrically illuminated utilization Supply source: ac or dc Source equipment with words or symbols designed to convey informa- tion or attract attention. (CMP-18) Available fault current N Electric Vehicle (EV). An automotive-type vehicle for on- road use, such as passenger automobiles, buses, trucks, vans, neighborhood electric vehicles, electric motorcycles, and the Available fault current like, primarily powered by an electric motor that draws current Equipment from a rechargeable storage battery, fuel cell, photovoltaic array, or other source of electric current. Plug-in hybrid electric vehi- Equipment with a short-circuit cles (PHEV) are electric vehicles having a second source of current rating motive power. Off-road, self-propelled electric mobile equip- OCPD ment, such as industrial trucks, hoists, lifts, transports, golf carts, Overcurrent protective device with an interrupting rating

airline ground support equipment, tractors, boats, and the like, are not considered electric vehicles. (CMP-12) Electrical Circuit Protective System. A system consisting of Available fault current components and materials intended for installation as protec- tion for specific electrical wiring systems with respect to the disruption of electrical circuit integrity upon exterior fire expo- sure. (CMP-16) Load N Electrical Datum Plane. A specified distance above a water level above which electrical equipment can be installed and electrical connections can be made. (CMP-7) N Informational Note Figure 100.1 Available Fault Current. Electric-Discharge Lighting. Systems of illumination utiliz- ing fluorescent lamps, high-intensity discharge (HID) lamps, or Exposed (as applied to live parts). Capable of being inadver- neon tubing. (CMP-18) tently touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a Electronically Actuated Fuse. An overcurrent protective device person. (CMP-1) that generally consists of a control module that provides current-

Informational Note: This term applies to parts that are sensing, electronically derived time–current characteristics, not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. energy to initiate tripping, and an interrupting module that inter- Exposed (as applied to wiring methods). On or attached to rupts current when an overcurrent occurs. Such fuses may or may the surface or behind panels designed to allow access. (CMP-1) not operate in a current-limiting fashion, depending on the type of control selected. (CMP-10) Externally Operable. Capable of being operated without exposing the operator to contact with live parts. (CMP-1) Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, housing, fence, or wall(s) that prevents persons from accidentally contacting energized parts. N Fault Current. The current delivered at a point on the system (CMP-1) during a short-circuit condition. (CMP-10) Enclosure. The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or N Fault Current, Available (Available Fault Current). The

walls surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from largest amount of current capable of being delivered at a point accidentally contacting energized parts or to protect the equip- on the system during a short-circuit condition. (CMP-10) ment from physical damage. (CMP-1) Informational Note: A short-circuit can occur during abnor- Informational Note: See Table 110.28 for examples of mal conditions such as a fault between circuit conductors or enclosure types. a ground fault. See Informational Note Figure 100.1. Energized. Electrically connected to, or is, a source of voltage. Feeder. All circuit conductors between the service equipment, (CMP-1) the source of a separately derived system, or other power supply source and the final branch-circuit overcurrent device. (CMP-10) Equipment. A general term, including fittings, devices, appli- ances, luminaires, apparatus, machinery, and the like used as a Festoon Lighting. A string of outdoor lights that is sus- part of, or in connection with, an electrical installation. (CMP-1) pended between two points. (CMP-18)

N Equipotential Plane. Accessible conductive parts bonded Field Evaluation Body (FEB). An organization or part of together to reduce voltage gradients in a designated area. an organization that performs field evaluations of electrical or (CMP-17) other equipment. [790, 2018] (CMP-1) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–31

CHAPTER 1 ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS Informational Note: NFPA 790-2018, Standard for Com- Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI). A device intended petency of Third-Party Field Evaluation Bodies, provides for the protection of personnel that functions to de-energize a cir- guidelines for establishing the qualification and compe- cuit or portion thereof within an established period of time when a tency of a body performing field evaluations of electrical ground-fault current to ground exceeds the values established for products and assembles with electrical components. a Class A device. (CMP-2) Field Labeled (as applied to evaluated products). Equip- Informational Note: Class A ground-fault circuit inter- ment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol, rupters trip when the ground-fault current is 6 mA or or other identifying mark of an FEB indicating the equipment higher and do not trip when the ground-fault current is less or materials were evaluated and found to comply with require- than 4 mA. For further information, see UL 943, Standard

ments as described in an accompanying field evaluation report. for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters. [790, 2018] (CMP-1) Ground-Fault Current Path. An electrically conductive path Fitting. An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other part of from the point of a ground fault on a wiring system through nor- a wiring system that is intended primarily to perform a mechani- mally non–current-carrying conductors, grounded conductors, cal rather than an electrical function. (CMP-1) equipment, or the earth to the electrical supply source. (CMP-5) N Free Air (as applied to conductors). Open or ventilated Informational Note: Examples of ground-fault current environment that allows for heat dissipation and air flow around paths are any combination of equipment grounding con- an installed conductor. (CMP-6) ductors, metallic raceways, metallic cable sheaths, electrical N Fuel Cell. An electrochemical system that consumes fuel to equipment, and any other electrically conductive material produce an electric current.

In such cells, the main chemical such as metal, water, and gas piping; steel framing mem- reaction used for producing electric power is not combustion. bers; stucco mesh; metal ducting; reinforcing steel; shields However, there may be sources of combustion used within the of communications cables; grounded conductors; and the overall cell system, such as reformers/fuel processors. (CMP-4) earth itself. N Fuel Cell System. The complete aggregate of equipment used Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. A system intended to convert chemical fuel into usable electricity and typically con- to provide protection of equipment from damaging line-to- sisting of a reformer, stack, power inverter, and auxiliary equip- ground fault currents by operating to cause a disconnecting ment. (CMP-4) means to open all ungrounded conductors of the faulted cir- cuit. This protection is provided at current levels less than those Garage. A building or portion of a building in which one or required to protect conductors from damage through the opera-

more self-propelled vehicles can be kept for use, sale, storage, tion of a supply circuit overcurrent device. (CMP-5) rental, repair, exhibition, or demonstration purposes. (CMP-1) Grounding Conductor, Equipment (EGC). A conductive Informational Note: For commercial garages, repair and path(s) that is part of an effective ground-fault current path storage, see Article 511. and connects normally non–current-carrying metal parts of N Generating Capacity, Inverter. The sum of parallel-con- equipment together and to the system grounded conductor or to nected inverter maximum continuous output power at 40°C in the grounding electrode conductor, or both. (CMP-5) watts or kilowatts. (CMP-4) Informational Note No. 1: It is recognized that the Ground. The earth. (CMP-5) equipment grounding conductor also performs bonding. Ground Fault. An unintentional, electrically conductive connec- Informational Note No. 2: See 250.118 for a list of tion between an ungrounded conductor of an electrical circuit and acceptable equipment grounding conductors.

the normally non–current-carrying conductors, metallic enclo- Grounding Electrode. A conducting object through which a sures, metallic raceways, metallic equipment, or earth. (CMP-5) direct connection to earth is established. (CMP-5) Grounded (Grounding). Connected (connecting) to ground or to Grounding Electrode Conductor. A conductor used to connect a conductive body that extends the ground connection. (CMP-5) the system grounded conductor or the equipment to a ground- Grounded, Solidly. Connected to ground without inserting any ing electrode or to a point on the grounding electrode system. resistor or impedance device. (CMP-5) (CMP-5) Grounded Conductor. A system or circuit conductor that is Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise pro- intentionally grounded. (CMP-5) tected by means of suitable covers, casings, barriers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms to remove the likelihood of approach Informational Note: Although an equipment grounding or contact by persons or objects to a point of danger. (CMP-1) conductor is grounded, it is not considered a grounded

Guest Room. An accommodation combining living, sleeping, conductor. sanitary, and storage facilities within a compartment. (CMP-2) 70–32 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS CHAPTER 1 Guest Suite. An accommodation with two or more contigu- with associated wiring and terminals, are mounted on, or con- ous rooms comprising a compartment, with or without doors tained within, an enclosure or mounted on a subpanel. between such rooms, that provides living, sleeping, sanitary, and The industrial control panel does not include the controlled storage facilities. (CMP-2) equipment. (CMP-11) N Habitable Room. A room in a building for living, sleeping, eat- Information Technology Equipment (ITE). Equipment and ing, or cooking, but excluding bathrooms, toilet rooms, closets, systems rated 1000 volts or less, normally found in offices or hallways, storage or utility spaces, and similar areas. (CMP-2) other business establishments and similar environments classi- Handhole Enclosure. An enclosure for use in underground fied as ordinary locations, that are used for creation and manip- systems, provided with an open or closed bottom, and sized to ulation of data, voice, video, and similar signals that are not

allow personnel to reach into, but not enter, for the purpose of communications equipment as defined in Part I of Article 100 installing, operating, or maintaining equipment or wiring or both. and do not process communications circuits as defined in 805.2. (CMP-9) (CMP-12) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressor. A combination Informational Note: For information on listing require- consisting of a compressor and motor, both of which are enclosed ments for both information technology equipment and in the same housing, with no external shaft or shaft seals, with communications equipment, see UL 60950-1-2014, the motor operating in the refrigerant. (CMP-11) Information Technology Equipment — Safety — Part 1: General Requirements or UL 62368-1-2014, Audio/Video Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other ver- Information and Communication Technology Equipment tical opening or space in which an elevator or dumbwaiter is Part 1: Safety Requirements. designed to operate. (CMP-12) N Information Technology Equipment Room. A room within Hybrid System.

A system comprised of multiple power the information technology equipment area that contains the sources. These power sources could include photovoltaic, wind, information technology equipment. [75:3.3.14] (CMP-12) micro-hydro generators, engine-driven generators, and others, but do not include electric power production and distribution Innerduct. A nonmetallic raceway placed within a larger network systems. Energy storage systems such as batteries, raceway. (CMP-16) flywheels, or superconducting magnetic storage equipment do Interactive Inverter. An inverter intended for use in paral- not constitute a power source for the purpose of this definition. lel with power source(s) such as an electric utility to supply The energy regenerated by an overhauling (descending) eleva- common loads and capable of delivering power to the utility. tor does not constitute a power source for the purpose of this (CMP-13) definition. (CMP-4) Interactive System. An electric power production system that is Identified (as applied to equipment). Recognizable as suitable

operating in parallel with and capable of delivering energy to an for the specific purpose, function, use, environment, application, electric primary source supply system. (CMP-4) and so forth, where described in a particular Code requirement. (CMP-1) Interrupting Rating. The highest current at rated voltage that a device is identified to interrupt under standard test conditions. Informational Note: Some examples of ways to determine (CMP-10) suitability of equipment for a specific purpose, environ- ment, or application include investigations by a qualified Informational Note: Equipment intended to interrupt testing laboratory (listing and labeling), an inspection current at other than fault levels may have its interrupt- agency, or other organizations concerned with product ing rating implied in other ratings, such as horsepower or evaluation. locked rotor current. In Sight From (Within Sight From, Within Sight). Where Intersystem Bonding Termination. A device that provides

this Code specifies that one equipment shall be “in sight from,” a means for connecting intersystem bonding conductors for “within sight from,” or “within sight of,” and so forth, another communications systems to the grounding electrode system. equipment, the specified equipment is to be visible and not more (CMP-16) than 15 m (50 ft) distant from the other. (CMP-1) N Inverter. Equipment that changes dc to ac. (CMP-4) Industrial Control Panel. An assembly of two or more compo- N Inverter Input Circuit. Conductors connected to the dc nents consisting of one of the following: (1) power circuit com- input of an inverter. (CMP-13) ponents only, such as motor controllers, overload relays, fused N disconnect switches, and circuit breakers; (2) control circuit Inverter Output Circuit. Conductors connected to the components only, such as push buttons, pilot lights, selector ac output of an inverter. (CMP-13) switches, timers, switches, and control relays; (3) a combination N Inverter, Multimode. Equipment having the capabilities of both of power and control circuit components.

These components, the interactive inverter and the stand-alone inverter. (CMP-4) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–33

CHAPTER 1 ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS N Island Mode. The operational mode for stand-alone power pro- Location, Damp. Locations protected from weather and not duction equipment or an isolated microgrid, or for a multimode subject to saturation with water or other liquids but subject to inverter or an interconnected microgrid that is disconnected moderate degrees of moisture. (CMP-1) from an electric power production and distribution network or Informational Note: Examples of such locations include other primary power source. (CMP-4) partially protected locations under canopies, marquees, Informational Note: Isolated microgrids are distinguished roofed open porches, and like locations, and interior from interconnected microgrids, which are addressed in locations subject to moderate degrees of moisture, such Article 705. as some basements, some barns, and some cold-storage warehouses. Isolated (as applied to location). Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used. (CMP-1) Location, Dry. A location not normally subject to dampness or wetness.

A location classified as dry may be temporarily sub- Kitchen. An area with a sink and permanent provisions for ject to dampness or wetness, as in the case of a building under food preparation and cooking. (CMP-2) construction. (CMP-1) Labeled. Equipment or materials to which has been attached Location, Wet. Installations underground or in concrete slabs a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of an organization or masonry in direct contact with the earth; in locations subject that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and to saturation with water or other liquids, such as vehicle wash- concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic ing areas; and in unprotected locations exposed to weather. inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials, (CMP-1) and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified man- Luminaire. A complete lighting unit consisting of a light source ner. (CMP-1) such as a lamp or lamps, together with the parts designed to

position the light source and connect it to the power supply. It Informational Note: If a listed product is of such a size, may also include parts to protect the light source or the ballast shape, material, or surface texture that it is not possible to or to distribute the light. A lampholder itself is not a luminaire. apply legibly the complete label to the product, the com- (CMP-18) plete label may appear on the smallest unit container in N Messenger or Messenger Wire. A wire that is run along with which the product is packaged. or integral with a cable or conductor to provide mechanical sup- N Laundry Area. An area containing or designed to contain a port for the cable or conductor. (CMP-6) laundry tray, clothes washer, or clothes dryer. (CMP-2) Motor Control Center. An assembly of one or more enclosed Lighting Outlet. An outlet intended for the direct connection sections having a common power bus and principally contain- of a lampholder or luminaire. (CMP-18) ing motor control units. (CMP-11) Lighting Track (Track Lighting). A manufactured assembly Multioutlet Assembly.

A type of surface, flush, or freestanding designed to support and energize luminaires that are capable raceway designed to hold conductors and receptacles, assem- of being readily repositioned on the track. Its length can be altered bled in the field or at the factory. (CMP-18) by the addition or subtraction of sections of track. (CMP-18) Neutral Conductor. The conductor connected to the neutral Listed. Equipment, materials, or services included in a list point of a system that is intended to carry current under normal published by an organization that is acceptable to the authority conditions. (CMP-5) having jurisdiction and concerned with evaluation of products Neutral Point. The common point on a wye-connection in a or services, that maintains periodic inspection of production polyphase system or midpoint on a single-phase, 3-wire system, of listed equipment or materials or periodic evaluation of or midpoint of a single-phase portion of a 3-phase delta system, services, and whose listing states that either the equipment, or a midpoint of a 3-wire, direct-current system. (CMP-5)

material, or service meets appropriate designated standards or has been tested and found suitable for a specified purpose. Informational Note: At the neutral point of the system, (CMP-1) the vectorial sum of the nominal voltages from all other phases within the system that utilize the neutral, with Informational Note: The means for identifying listed respect to the neutral point, is zero potential. equipment may vary for each organization concerned with product evaluation, some of which do not recog- Nonautomatic. Requiring human intervention to perform a nize equipment as listed unless it is also labeled. Use of function. (CMP-1) the system employed by the listing organization allows Nonlinear Load. A load where the wave shape of the steady- the authority having jurisdiction to identify a listed state current does not follow the wave shape of the applied volt- product. age. (CMP-1) Live Parts. Energized conductive components. (CMP-1) 70–34 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS CHAPTER 1 Informational Note: Electronic equipment, electronic/ N Pier, Floating. Pier designed with inherent flotation capability electric-discharge lighting, adjustable-speed drive sys- that allows the structure to float on the water surface and rise tems, and similar equipment may be nonlinear loads. and fall with water level changes. [303:3.3.17.3] (CMP-7) Outlet. A point on the wiring system at which current is taken Plenum. A compartment or chamber to which one or more air to supply utilization equipment. (CMP-1) ducts are connected and that forms part of the air distribution system. (CMP-3) Outline Lighting. An arrangement of incandescent lamps, electric-discharge lighting, or other electrically powered light Power Outlet. An enclosed assembly that may include recep- sources to outline or call attention to certain features such as the tacles, circuit breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, buses, and shape of a building or the decoration of a window. (CMP-18) watt-hour meter mounting means; intended to supply and con-

trol power to mobile homes, recreational vehicles, park trail- Overcurrent. Any current in excess of the rated current of ers, or boats or to serve as a means for distributing power equipment or the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from required to operate mobile or temporarily installed equipment. overload, short circuit, or ground fault. (CMP-10) (CMP-7) Informational Note: A current in excess of rating may be N Power Production Equipment. Electrical generating equip- accommodated by certain equipment and conductors for a ment supplied by any source other than a utility service, up to given set of conditions. Therefore, the rules for overcur- the source system disconnecting means. (CMP-4) rent protection are specific for particular situations. Informational Note: Examples of power production Overcurrent Protective Device, Branch-Circuit. A device equipment include such items as generators, solar pho- capable of providing protection for service, feeder, and tovoltaic systems, and fuel cell systems. branch circuits and equipment over the full range of overcur-

rents between its rated current and its interrupting rating. Such N Power-Limited Tray Cable (PLTC). A factory assembly of devices are provided with interrupting ratings appropriate for two or more insulated conductors rated at 300 volts, with or the intended use but no less than 5000 amperes. (CMP-10) without associated bare or insulated equipment grounding con- ductors, under a nonmetallic jacket. (CMP-3) Overcurrent Protective Device, Supplementary. A device intended to provide limited overcurrent protection for specific Premises Wiring (System). Interior and exterior wiring, applications and utilization equipment such as luminaires and including power, lighting, control, and signal circuit wiring appliances. This limited protection is in addition to the protec- together with all their associated hardware, fittings, and wir- tion provided in the required branch circuit by the branch-circuit ing devices, both permanently and temporarily installed. This overcurrent protective device. (CMP-10) includes (a) wiring from the service point or power source to the

outlets or (b) wiring from and including the power source to Overload. Operation of equipment in excess of normal, full- the outlets where there is no service point. load rating, or of a conductor in excess of its ampacity that, when it persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause Such wiring does not include wiring internal to appliances, damage or dangerous overheating. A fault, such as a short circuit luminaires, motors, controllers, motor control centers, and sim- or ground fault, is not an overload. (CMP-10) ilar equipment. (CMP-1) Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units designed Informational Note: Power sources include, but are not for assembly in the form of a single panel, including buses limited to, interconnected or stand-alone batteries, solar and automatic overcurrent devices, and equipped with or with- photovoltaic systems, other distributed generation sys- out switches for the control of light, heat, or power circuits; tems, or generators. designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box placed in or N Prime Mover.

The machine that supplies the mechanical horse- against a wall, partition, or other support; and accessible only power to a generator. (CMP-13) from the front. (CMP-9) Qualified Person. One who has skills and knowledge related ∆ Photovoltaic (PV) System. The total components, circuits, to the construction and operation of the electrical equipment and equipment up to and including the PV system disconnect- and installations and has received safety training to recognize ing means that, in combination, convert solar energy into elec- and avoid the hazards involved. (CMP-1) tric energy. (CMP-4) Informational Note: Refer to NFPA 70E-2018, Stan- N Pier. A structure extending over the water and supported on a dard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, for electrical fixed foundation (fixed pier), or on flotation (floating pier), that safety training requirements. provides access to the water. [303:3.3.17] (CMP-7) Raceway. An enclosed channel designed expressly for holding N Pier, Fixed. Pier constructed on a permanent, fixed foundation,

wires, cables, or busbars, with additional functions as permitted such as on piles, that permanently establishes the elevation of in this Code. (CMP-8) the structure deck with respect to land. [303:3.3.17.2] (CMP-7) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–35

CHAPTER 1 ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS Informational Note: A raceway is identified within spe- Service. The conductors and equipment connecting the serving cific article definitions. utility to the wiring system of the premises served. (CMP-10) Raceway, Communications. An enclosed channel of nonme- Service Cable. Service conductors made up in the form of a tallic materials designed expressly for holding communications cable. (CMP-10) wires and cables; optical fiber cables; data cables associated Service Conductors. The conductors from the service point with information technology and communications equipment; to the service disconnecting means. (CMP-10) Class 2, Class 3, and Type PLTC cables; and power-limited fire alarm cables in plenum, riser, and general-purpose applications. Service Conductors, Overhead. The overhead conductors (CMP-16) between the service point and the first point of connection to the service-entrance conductors at the building or other struc- Rainproof. Constructed, protected, or treated so as to prevent ture. (CMP-10)

rain from interfering with the successful operation of the appa- ratus under specified test conditions. (CMP-1) Service Conductors, Underground. The underground conduc- tors between the service point and the first point of connection Raintight. Constructed or protected so that exposure to a beat- to the service-entrance conductors in a terminal box, meter, or ing rain will not result in the entrance of water under specified other enclosure, inside or outside the building wall. (CMP-10) test conditions. (CMP-1) Informational Note: Where there is no terminal box, Receptacle. A contact device installed at the outlet for the meter, or other enclosure, the point of connection is con- connection of an attachment plug, or for the direct connection sidered to be the point of entrance of the service conduc- of electrical utilization equipment designed to mate with the tors into the building. corresponding contact device. A single receptacle is a single contact device with no other contact device on the same yoke or Service Drop. The overhead conductors between the serving strap.

A multiple receptacle is two or more contact devices on utility and the service point. (CMP-10) the same yoke or strap. (CMP-18) Service-Entrance Conductors, Overhead System. The ser- Informational Note: A duplex receptacle is an example vice conductors between the terminals of the service equip- of a multiple receptacle that has two receptacles on the ment and a point usually outside the building, clear of building same yoke or strap. walls, where joined by tap or splice to the service drop or over- head service conductors. (CMP-10) Receptacle Outlet. An outlet where one or more receptacles are installed. (CMP-18) Service-Entrance Conductors, Underground System. The service conductors between the terminals of the service equip- N Reconditioned. Electromechanical systems, equipment, appa- ment and the point of connection to the service lateral or under- ratus, or components that are restored to operating conditions. ground service conductors. (CMP-10) This process differs from normal servicing of equipment that

remains within a facility, or replacement of listed equipment on Informational Note: Where service equipment is a one-to-one basis. (CMP-10) located outside the building walls, there may be no ser- vice-entrance conductors or they may be entirely outside Informational Note: The term reconditioned is frequently the building. referred to as rebuilt, refurbished, or remanu factured. ∆ Service Equipment. The necessary equipment, consisting of Remote-Control Circuit. Any electrical circuit that controls a circuit breaker(s) or switch(es) and fuse(s) and their accesso- any other circuit through a relay or an equivalent device. (CMP-3) ries, connected to the serving utility and intended to constitute Retrofit Kit. A general term for a complete subassembly of the main control and disconnect of the serving utility. (CMP-10) parts and devices for field conversion of utilization equipment. Service Lateral. The underground conductors between the (CMP-18) utility electric supply system and the service point. (CMP-10) Sealable Equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case or cabinet Service Point.

The point of connection between the facili- that is provided with a means of sealing or locking so that live ties of the serving utility and the premises wiring. (CMP-10) parts cannot be made accessible without opening the enclosure. (CMP-1) Informational Note: The service point can be described as the point of demarcation between where the serving util- Informational Note: The equipment may or may not be ity ends and the premises wiring begins. The serving util- operable without opening the enclosure. ity generally specifies the location of the service point Separately Derived System. An electrical source, other than based on the conditions of service. a service, having no direct connection(s) to circuit conductors Short-Circuit Current Rating. The prospective symmetrical of any other electrical source other than those established by fault current at a nominal voltage to which an apparatus or system grounding and bonding connections. (CMP-5) 70–36 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS CHAPTER 1 is able to be connected without sustaining damage exceeding is capable of interrupting its rated current at its rated voltage. defined acceptance criteria. (CMP-10) (CMP-9) Show Window. Any window, including windows above doors, Switch, General-Use Snap. A form of general-use switch used or designed to be used for the display of goods or advertis- constructed so that it can be installed in device boxes or on box ing material, whether it is fully or partly enclosed or entirely covers, or otherwise used in conjunction with wiring systems open at the rear and whether or not it has a platform raised recognized by this Code. (CMP-9) higher than the street floor level. (CMP-2) Switch, Isolating. A switch intended for isolating an electrical Signaling Circuit. Any electrical circuit that energizes signal- circuit from the source of power. It has no interrupting rating, ing equipment. (CMP-3) and it is intended to be operated only after the circuit has been opened by some other means. (CMP-9) N Single-Pole Separable Connector. A device that is installed at

the ends of portable, flexible, single-conductor cable that is used Switch, Motor-Circuit. A switch rated in horsepower that is to establish connection or disconnection between two cables or capable of interrupting the maximum operating overload current one cable and a single-pole, panel-mounted separable connec- of a motor of the same horsepower rating as the switch at the tor. (CMP-18) rated voltage. (CMP-11) Special Permission. The written consent of the authority hav- Switch, Transfer. An automatic or nonautomatic device for ing jurisdiction. (CMP-1) transferring one or more load conductor connections from one power source to another. (CMP-13) Stand-Alone System. A system that is capable of supplying power independent of an electric power production and distri- Switchboard. A large single panel, frame, or assembly of pan- bution network.(CMP-4) els on which are mounted on the face, back, or both, switches, overcurrent and other protective devices, buses, and usually Structure. That which is built or constructed, other than equip- instruments.

These assemblies are generally accessible from the ment. (CMP-1) rear as well as from the front and are not intended to be installed Surge Arrester. A protective device for limiting surge volt- in cabinets. (CMP-9) ages by discharging or bypassing surge current; it also prevents Switchgear. An assembly completely enclosed on all sides continued flow of follow current while remaining capable of and top with sheet metal (except for ventilating openings and repeating these functions. (CMP-10) inspection windows) and containing primary power circuit Surge-Protective Device (SPD). A protective device for lim- switching, interrupting devices, or both, with buses and con- iting transient voltages by diverting or limiting surge current; nections. The assembly may include control and auxiliary it also prevents continued flow of follow current while remain- devices. Access to the interior of the enclosure is provided by ing capable of repeating these functions and is designated as doors, removable covers, or both. (CMP-9) follows: Informational Note: All switchgear subject to NEC

Type 1: Permanently connected SPDs intended for installa- requirements is metal enclosed. Switchgear rated below tion between the secondary of the service transformer and the 1000 V or less may be identified as “low-voltage power line side of the service disconnect overcurrent device. circuit breaker switchgear.” Switchgear rated over 1000 V Type 2: Permanently connected SPDs intended for instal- may be identified as “metal-enclosed switchgear” or lation on the load side of the service disconnect overcurrent “metal-clad switchgear.” Switchgear is available in non– device, including SPDs located at the branch panel. arc-resistant or arc-resistant constructions. Type 3: Point of utilization SPDs. Thermal Protector (as applied to motors). A protective device for assembly as an integral part of a motor or motor- Type 4: Component SPDs, including discrete components, compressor that, when properly applied, protects the motor as well as assemblies. (CMP-10) against dangerous overheating due to overload and failure to Informational Note: For further information on Type 1, start. (CMP-11)

Type 2, Type 3, and Type 4 SPDs, see UL 1449, Standard Informational Note: The thermal protector may consist of for Surge Protective Devices. one or more sensing elements integral with the motor or Switch, Bypass Isolation. A manual, nonautomatic, or auto- motor-compressor and an external control device. matic operated device used in conjunction with a transfer switch ∆ Thermally Protected (as applied to motors). A motor or to provide a means of directly connecting load conductors to a motor-compressor that is provided with a thermal protector. power source and of disconnecting the transfer switch. (CMP-13) (CMP-11) Switch, General-Use. A switch intended for use in general Ungrounded. Not connected to ground or to a conductive distribution and branch circuits. It is rated in amperes, and it body that extends the ground connection. (CMP-5) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–37

CHAPTER 1 ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS Uninterruptible Power Supply. A power supply used to pro- interrupts current when an overcurrent occurs. Electronically vide alternating current power to a load for some period of time actuated fuses may or may not operate in a current-limiting fash- in the event of a power failure. (CMP-13) ion, depending on the type of control selected. (CMP-10) Informational Note: In addition, it may provide a more Fuse. An overcurrent protective device with a circuit-opening constant voltage and frequency supply to the load, reduc- fusible part that is heated and severed by the passage of over- ing the effects of voltage and frequency variations. current through it. (CMP-10) Utilization Equipment. Equipment that utilizes electric energy Informational Note: A fuse comprises all the parts that for electronic, electromechanical, chemical, heating, lighting, or form a unit capable of performing the prescribed func- similar purposes. (CMP-1) tions. It may or may not be the complete device necessary to connect it into an electrical circuit. Voltage (of a circuit).

The greatest root-mean-square (rms) (effective) difference of potential between any two conductors Controlled Vented Power Fuse. A fuse with provision for con- of the circuit concerned. (CMP-1) trolling discharge circuit interruption such that no solid material may be exhausted into the surrounding atmosphere. Informational Note: Some systems, such as 3-phase 4-wire, single-phase 3-wire, and 3-wire direct current, Informational Note: The fuse is designed so that dis- may have various circuits of various voltages. charged gases will not ignite or damage insulation in the path of the discharge or propagate a flashover to or Voltage, Nominal. A nominal value assigned to a circuit or sys- between grounded members or conduction members in the tem for the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class path of the discharge where the distance between the vent (e.g., 120/240 volts, 480Y/277 volts, 600 volts). (CMP-1) and such insulation or conduction members conforms to Informational Note No. 1: The actual voltage at which a manufacturer’s recommendations.

circuit operates can vary from the nominal within a range Expulsion Fuse Unit (Expulsion Fuse). A vented fuse unit in that permits satisfactory operation of equipment. which the expulsion effect of gases produced by the arc and lin- Informational Note No. 2: See ANSI C84.1-2011, Volt- ing of the fuseholder, either alone or aided by a spring, extin- age Ratings for Electric Power Systems and Equipment guishes the arc. (60 Hz). Nonvented Power Fuse. A fuse without intentional provision for Informational Note No. 3: Certain battery units may be the escape of arc gases, liquids, or solid particles to the atmo- considered to be rated at nominal 48 volts dc, but may sphere during circuit interruption. have a charging float voltage up to 58 volts. In dc appli- cations, 60 volts is used to cover the entire range of float Power Fuse Unit. A vented, nonvented, or controlled vented voltages. fuse unit in which the arc is extinguished by being drawn through solid material, granular material, or liquid, either alone Voltage to Ground. For grounded circuits, the voltage between

or aided by a spring. the given conductor and that point or conductor of the circuit that is grounded; for ungrounded circuits, the greatest voltage Vented Power Fuse. A fuse with provision for the escape of arc between the given conductor and any other conductor of the gases, liquids, or solid particles to the surrounding atmosphere circuit. (CMP-1) during circuit interruption. Watertight. Constructed so that moisture will not enter the Multiple Fuse. An assembly of two or more single-pole enclosure under specified test conditions. (CMP-1) fuses. (CMP-10) Weatherproof. Constructed or protected so that exposure to the Substation. An assemblage of equipment (e.g., switches, weather will not interfere with successful operation. (CMP-1) interrupting devices, circuit breakers, buses, and transformers) through which electric energy is passed for the purpose of dis- Informational Note: Rainproof, raintight, or watertight tribution, switching, or modifying its characteristics. (CMP-9) equipment can fulfill the requirements for weatherproof

where varying weather conditions other than wetness, Switching Device. A device designed to close, open, or both, such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature extremes, are not one or more electrical circuits. (CMP-1) a factor. Circuit Breaker. A switching device capable of making, carry- ing, and interrupting currents under normal circuit conditions, Part II. Over 1000 Volts, Nominal and also of making, carrying for a specified time, and interrupt- Electronically Actuated Fuse. An overcurrent protective device ing currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions, such as that generally consists of a control module that provides cur- those of short circuit. rent sensing, electronically derived time–current characteris- Cutout. An assembly of a fuse support with either a fuseholder, tics, energy to initiate tripping, and an interrupting module that fuse carrier, or disconnecting blade. The fuseholder or fuse 70–38 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS CHAPTER 1 carrier may include a conducting element (fuse link) or may (1) Electrical apparatus that has an alternative type of pro- act as the disconnecting blade by the inclusion of a nonfusible tection for use in the appropriate hazardous (classified) member. location (2) Electrical apparatus not so protected that shall not be used Disconnecting Means. A device, group of devices, or other in a hazardous (classified) location means whereby the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their source of supply. Informational Note: Associated nonincendive field wir- ing apparatus has designated associated nonincendive Disconnecting (or Isolating) Switch (Disconnector, Isolator). field wiring apparatus connections for nonincendive field A mechanical switching device used for isolating a circuit or wiring apparatus and may also have connections for equipment from a source of power. other electrical apparatus. Interrupter Switch. A switch capable of making, carrying, and ∆ Combustible Dust. Dust particles that are 500 microns or

interrupting specified currents. smaller (i.e., material passing a U.S. No. 35 Standard Sieve as Oil Cutout (Oil-Filled Cutout). A cutout in which all or part defined in ASTM E11-2015, Standard Specification for Woven of the fuse support and its fuse link or disconnecting blade is Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test Sieves), and present a fire or mounted in oil with complete immersion of the contacts and the explosion hazard when dispersed and ignited in air. fusible portion of the conducting element (fuse link) so that arc interruption by severing of the fuse link or by opening of the Informational Note: See ASTM E1226-2012a, Stan- contacts will occur under oil. dard Test Method for Explosibility of Dust Clouds, or ISO 6184-1, Explosion protection systems — Part 1: Deter- Oil Switch. A switch having contacts that operate under oil (or mination of explosion indices of combustible dusts in air, askarel or other suitable liquid). for procedures for determining the explosibility of dusts. Regulator Bypass Switch. A specific device or combination of ∆ Combustible Gas Detection System.

A protection technique devices designed to bypass a regulator. utilizing stationary gas detectors in industrial establishments. N Part III. Hazardous (Classified) Locations (CMP-14). ∆ Control Drawing. A drawing or other document provided by the manufacturer of the intrinsically safe or associated appara- N Aircraft Painting Hangar. An aircraft hangar constructed for tus, or of the nonincendive field wiring apparatus or associated the express purpose of spray/coating/dipping applications and nonincendive field wiring apparatus, that details the allowed provided with dedicated ventilation supply and exhaust. interconnections between the intrinsically safe and associated ∆ Associated Apparatus. Apparatus in which the circuits are apparatus or between the nonincendive field wiring apparatus not necessarily intrinsically safe themselves but that affects or associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus. the energy in the intrinsically safe circuits and is relied on ∆ Cord Connector. A fitting intended to terminate a cord to a to maintain intrinsic safety. Such apparatus is one of the

box or similar device and reduce the strain at points of termina- following: tion and may include an explosionproof, a dust-ignitionproof, (1) Electrical apparatus that has an alternative type of pro- or a flameproof seal. tection for use in the appropriate hazardous (classified) N Different Intrinsically Safe Circuits. Intrinsically safe cir- location cuits in which the possible interconnections have not been eval- (2) Electrical apparatus not so protected that shall not be used uated and identified as intrinsically safe. within a hazardous (classified) location ∆ Dust-Ignitionproof. Equipment enclosed in a manner that Informational Note No. 1: Associated apparatus has excludes dusts and does not permit arcs, sparks, or heat other- identified intrinsically safe connections for intrinsically wise generated or liberated inside of the enclosure to cause safe apparatus and also may have connections for nonin- ignition of exterior accumulations or atmospheric suspensions trinsically safe apparatus. of a specified dust on or in the vicinity of the enclosure. Informational Note No.

2: An example of associated Informational Note No. 1: For further information on apparatus is an intrinsic safety barrier, which is a network dust-ignitionproof enclosures, see ANSI/UL 1203-2015, designed to limit the energy (voltage and current) avail- Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical able to the protected circuit in the hazardous (classified) Equipment for Hazardous (Classified) Locations. location, under specified fault conditions. Informational Note No. 2: Dust-ignitionproof enclosures ∆ Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus. Appara- are sometimes additionally marked Type 9 per NEMA tus in which the circuits are not necessarily nonincendive them- 250-2014, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. selves but that affect the energy in nonincendive field wiring circuits and are relied upon to maintain nonincendive energy ∆ Dusttight. Enclosures constructed so that dust will not enter levels. Such apparatus are one of the following: under specified test conditions. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–39

CHAPTER 1 ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS Informational Note No. 1: For further information, see example, soldering, brazing, welding, or the fusion of glass to ANSI/UL 121201-2017, Nonincendive Electrical Equip- metal. ment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2 and Class III, Informational Note: For further information, see ANSI/ Divisions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. ISA-12.12.01-2013, Nonincendive Electrical Equipment Informational Note No. 2: Enclosure Types 3, 3X, 3S, for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divi- 3SX, 4, 4X, 5, 6, 6P, 12, 12K, and 13, per NEMA 250- sions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 2014, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment and ANSI/UL N Increased Safety “e”. Type of protection applied to electri- 50E-2015, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environ- cal equipment that does not produce arcs or sparks in normal mental Considerations, are considered dusttight. service and under specified abnormal conditions, in which N Electrical Resistance Trace Heating “60079-30-1”.

Type of additional measures are applied so as to give increased secu- protection for the purpose of producing heat on the principle rity against the possibility of excessive temperatures and of the of electrical resistance and typically composed of one or more occurrence of arcs and sparks. metallic conductors and/or an electrically conductive material, suitably electrically insulated and protected. Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-7–2017, Explosive Atmospheres — Part 7: Equipment Protection Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-30-1-2017, by Increased Safety “e”. Explosive Atmospheres — Part 30-1: Electrical Resistance N Inherently Safe Optical Radiation “op is”. Type of protec- Trace Heating — General and Testing Requirements. tion to minimize the risk of ignition in explosive atmospheres N Encapsulation “m”. Type of protection where electrical parts from optical radiation where visible or infrared radiation is that could ignite an explosive atmosphere by either sparking incapable of producing sufficient energy under normal or speci-

or heating are enclosed in a compound in such a way that this fied fault conditions to ignite a specific explosive atmosphere. explosive atmosphere cannot be ignited. Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-28-2017, Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-18-2015, Explosive Atmospheres — Part 28: Protection of Equip- Explosive atmospheres — Part 18: Equipment protection ment and Transmission Systems Using Optical Radiation. by encapsulation “m”. N Intrinsic Safety “i”. Type of protection where any spark or Explosionproof Equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case thermal effect is incapable of causing ignition of a mixture of that is capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified gas flammable or combustible material in air under prescribed test or vapor that may occur within it and of preventing the igni- conditions. tion of a specified gas or vapor surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the gas or vapor within, and that Informational Note: See UL 913-2015, Intrinsically Safe

operates at such an external temperature that a surrounding Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use in Class I, flammable atmosphere will not be ignited thereby. (CMP-14) II, and III, Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations; and ANSI/UL 60079-11-2013, Explosive Atmospheres — Informational Note No. 1: For further information, see Part 11: Equipment protection by intrinsic safety “i”. ANSI/UL 1203-2015, Explosion-Proof and Dust-Igni- ∆ Intrinsically Safe Apparatus. Apparatus in which all the cir- tion-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous cuits are intrinsically safe. (Classified) Locations. Informational Note No. 2: Explosionproof enclosures N Intrinsically Safe Circuit. A circuit in which any spark or are sometimes additionally marked Type 7 per NEMA thermal effect is incapable of causing ignition of a mixture of 250-2014, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. flammable or combustible material in air under prescribed test conditions. N Flameproof “d”. Type of protection where the enclosure will

withstand an internal explosion of a flammable mixture that has Informational Note: Test conditions are described in penetrated into the interior, without suffering damage and with- ANSI/UL 913-2013, Standard for Safety, Intrinsically out causing ignition, through any joints or structural openings Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use in in the enclosure of an external explosive gas atmosphere con- Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) sisting of one or more of the gases or vapors for which it is Locations. designed. ∆ Intrinsically Safe System. An assembly of interconnected Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-1-2015, Explo- intrinsically safe apparatus, associated apparatus, and intercon- sive Atmospheres — Part 1: Equipment Protection by necting cables, in that those parts of the system that may be used Flameproof Enclosures “d”. in hazardous (classified) locations are intrinsically safe circuits. ∆ Hermetically Sealed. Equipment sealed against the entrance Informational Note: An intrinsically safe system may

of an external atmosphere where the seal is made by fusion, for include more than one intrinsically safe circuit. 70–40 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS CHAPTER 1 N Limited Finishing Workstation. An apparatus that is capa- ∆ Nonincendive Circuit. A circuit, other than field wiring, in ble of confining the vapors, mists, residues, dusts, or deposits which any arc or thermal effect produced under intended operat- that are generated by a spray application process but does not ing conditions of the equipment, is not capable, under specified meet the requirements of a spray booth or spray room, as herein test conditions, of igniting the flammable gas–air, vapor–air, or defined. [33:3.3.18.1] dust–air mixture. Informational Note: See Section 14.3 of NFPA 33, Stan- Informational Note: Conditions are described in ANSI/ dard for Spray Application Using Flammable or Com- ISA-12.12.01-2013, Nonincendive Electrical Equipment bustible Materials, for limited finishing workstations. for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divi- sions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. N Liquid Immersion “o”. Type of protection where electrical

equipment is immersed in a protective liquid in such a way that ∆ Nonincendive Component. A component having contacts an explosive atmosphere that may be above the liquid or outside for making or breaking an incendive circuit and the contacting the enclosure cannot be ignited. mechanism is constructed so that the component is incapable of igniting the specified flammable gas–air or vapor–air mixture. Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-6-2016, The housing of a nonincendive component is not intended to Explosive Atmospheres — Part 6: Equipment protection exclude the flammable atmosphere or contain an explosion. by liquid immersion “o”. Informational Note: For further information, see ANSI/ N Major Repair Garage. A building or portions of a building ISA-12.12.01-2013, Nonincendive Electrical Equipment where major repairs, such as engine overhauls, painting, body for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divi- and fender work, and repairs that require draining of the motor sions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

vehicle fuel tank are performed on motor vehicles, including associated floor space used for offices, parking, or showrooms. ∆ Nonincendive Equipment. Equipment having electrical/ [30A:3.3.12.1] electronic circuitry that is incapable, under normal operating conditions, of causing ignition of a specified flammable gas–air, N Membrane Enclosure. A temporary enclosure used for the vapor–air, or dust–air mixture due to arcing or thermal means. spraying of workpieces that cannot be moved into a spray booth where open spraying is not practical due to the proximity to Informational Note: For further information, see ANSI/ other operations, finish quality, or concerns such as the collec- ISA-12.12.01-2013, Nonincendive Electrical Equipment tion of overspray. for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divi- sions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Informational Note: See Chapter 18 of NFPA 33-2016, Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable or ∆ Nonincendive Field Wiring. Wiring that enters or leaves an

Combustible Materials, for information on the construc- equipment enclosure and, under normal operating conditions of tion and use of membrane enclosures. the equipment, is not capable, due to arcing or thermal effects, of igniting the flammable gas–air, vapor–air, or dust–air mixture. N Minor Repair Garage. A building or portions of a building Normal operation includes opening, shorting, or grounding the used for lubrication, inspection, and minor automotive main- field wiring. tenance work, such as engine tune-ups, replacement of parts, fluid changes (e.g., oil, antifreeze, transmission fluid, brake ∆ Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus. Apparatus intended to fluid, air-conditioning refrigerants), brake system repairs, be connected to nonincendive field wiring. tire rotation, and similar routine maintenance work, including Informational Note: For further information, see ANSI/ associated floor space used for offices, parking, or showrooms. ISA-12.12.01-2013, Nonincendive Electrical Equipment [30A:3.3.12.2] for Use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divi-

∆ Mobile Equipment. Equipment with electrical components sions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. suitable to be moved only with mechanical aids or is provided ∆ Oil Immersion. Electrical equipment immersed in a protective with wheels for movement by person(s) or powered devices. liquid in such a way that an explosive atmosphere that may be N Motor Fuel Dispensing Facility. That portion of a property above the liquid or outside the enclosure cannot be ignited. where motor fuels are stored and dispensed from fixed equip- N Optical Radiation. Electromagnetic radiation at wave- ment into the fuel tanks of motor vehicles or marine craft or into lengths in vacuum between the region of transition to X-rays and approved containers, including all equipment used in connec- the region of transition to radio waves, that is approximately tion therewith. [30A:3.3.11] between 1 nm and 1000 μm. Informational Note: Refer to Articles 510 and 511 with Informational Note: For additional information on respect to electrical wiring and equipment for other areas

types of protection that can be applied to minimize the used as lubritoriums, service rooms, repair rooms, offices, risk of ignition in explosive atmospheres from optical salesrooms, compressor rooms, and similar locations. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–41

CHAPTER 1 ARTICLE 100 — DEFINITIONS radiation in the wavelength range from 380 nm to Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-28-2017, 10 μm, see ANSI/UL 60079-28-2017, Explosive Atmo- Explosive Atmospheres — Part 28: Protection of Equip- spheres — Part 28: Protection of Equipment and Trans- ment and Transmission Systems Using Optical Radiation. mission Systems Using Optical Radiation. N Protected Optical Radiation “op pr”. Type of protection to N Optical System With Interlock “op sh”. Type of protection minimize the risk of ignition in explosive atmospheres from to minimize the risk of ignition in explosive atmospheres from optical radiation where visible or infrared radiation is confined optical radiation where visible or infrared radiation is confined inside optical fiber or other transmission medium under normal inside optical fiber or other transmission medium with interlock constructions or constructions with additional mechanical pro- cut-off provided to reliably reduce the unconfined beam strength tection based on the assumption that there is no escape of radia-

to safe levels within a specified time in case the confinement tion from the confinement. fails and the radiation becomes unconfined. Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-28-2017, Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-28-2017, Explosive Atmospheres — Part 28: Protection of Equip- Explosive Atmospheres — Part 28: Protection of Equip- ment and Transmission Systems Using Optical Radiation. ment and Transmission Systems Using Optical Radiation. N Protection by Enclosure “t”. Type of protection for explosive N Outdoor Spray Area. A spray area that is outside the confines dust atmospheres where electrical equipment is provided with of a building or that has a canopy or roof that does not limit an enclosure providing dust ingress protection and a means to the dissipation of the heat of a fire or dispersion of flammable limit surface temperatures. vapors and does not restrict fire-fighting access and control. Informational Note: For additional information, see ANSI/ For the purpose of this standard, an outdoor spray area can be UL 60079-31-2015, Explosive Atmospheres — Part 31:

treated as an unenclosed spray area. [33:3.3.2.3.1] Equipment Dust Ignition Protection by Enclosure “t”. ∆ Portable Equipment. Equipment with electrical components ∆ Purged and Pressurized. The process of (1) purging, supply- suitable to be moved by a single person without mechanical ing an enclosure with a protective gas at a sufficient flow and aids. positive pressure to reduce the concentration of any flammable N Powder Filling “q”. Type of protection where electrical parts gas or vapor initially present to an acceptable level; and (2) pres- capable of igniting an explosive atmosphere are fixed in posi- surization, supplying an enclosure with a protective gas with tion and completely surrounded by filling material (glass or or without continuous flow at sufficient pressure to prevent the quartz powder) to prevent the ignition of an external explosive entrance of a flammable gas or vapor, a combustible dust, or an atmosphere. ignitible fiber. Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-5-2016, Explo- Informational Note: For further information, see ANSI/

sive Atmospheres — Part 5: Equipment protection by pow- NFPA 496-2013, Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for der filling “q”. Electrical Equipment. ∆ Pressurized. The process of supplying an enclosure with a pro- ∆ Simple Apparatus. An electrical component or combina- tective gas with or without continuous flow, at sufficient pressure tion of components of simple construction with well-defined to prevent the entrance of combustible dust or ignitible fibers/ electrical parameters that does not generate more than 1.5 volts, flyings. 100 mA, and 25 mW, or a passive component that does not dis- sipate more than 1.3 watts and is compatible with the intrinsic N Pressurized Enclosure “p”. Type of protection for electrical safety of the circuit in which it is used. equipment that uses the technique of guarding against the ingress of the external atmosphere, which may be explosive, into an Informational Note No. 1: The following apparatus are enclosure by maintaining a protective gas therein at a pressure examples of simple apparatus: above that of the external atmosphere.

(1) Passive components; for example, switches, instrument Informational Note: See ANSI/UL-60079-2-2017, connectors, plugs and sockets, junction boxes, resistance Explosive Atmospheres — Part 2: Equipment protection temperature devices, and simple semiconductor devices by pressurized enclosures “p”. such as LEDs (2) Sources of stored energy consisting of single components ∆ Process Seal. A seal between electrical systems and flammable in simple circuits with well-defined parameters; for exam- or combustible process fluids where a failure could allow the ple, capacitors or inductors, whose values are considered migration of process fluids into the premises’ wiring system. when determining the overall safety of the system N Protected Optical Fiber Cable. Optical fiber cable pro- (3) Sources of generated energy; for example, thermocouples tected from releasing optical radiation into the atmosphere dur- and photocells, that do not generate more than 1.5 volts, ing normal operating conditions and foreseeable malfunctions 100 mA, and 25 mW

by additional armoring, conduit, cable tray, or raceway. 70–42 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 110.2 Informational Note No. 2: For further information, refer Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 60079-15-2013, to ANSI/UL 913-2013, Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Explosive Atmospheres — Part 15: Equipment Protection Associated Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, III, Divi- by Type of Protection “n”. sion 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations; and ANSI/ ∆ Unclassified Locations. Locations determined to be neither UL 60079-11-2013, Explosive Atmospheres — Part 11: Class I, Division 1; Class I, Division 2; Zone 0; Zone 1; Class I, Equipment Protection by Intrinsic Safety “i.” Zone 2; Class II, Division 1; Class II, Division 2; Class III, N Spray Area. Any fully enclosed, partly enclosed, or unen- Division 1; Class III, Division 2; Zone 20; Zone 21; Zone 22; closed area in which dangerous quantities of flammable or com- nor any combination thereof. bustible vapors, mists, residues, dusts, or deposits are present N Unenclosed Spray Area. Any spray area that is not confined by

due to the operation of spray processes, including (1) any area a limited finishing workstation, spray booth, or spray room, as in the direct path of a spray application process; (2) the inte- herein defined. [33:3.3.2.3.2] rior of a spray booth, spray room, or limited finishing worksta- tion, as herein defined; (3) the interior of any exhaust plenum, ∆ Ventilated. Provided with a means to permit circulation of air eliminator section, or scrubber section; (4) the interior of any sufficient to remove an excess of heat, fumes, or vapors. exhaust duct or exhaust stack leading from a spray application ∆ Volatile Flammable Liquid. A flammable liquid having a flash process; (5) the interior of any air recirculation path up to and point below 38°C (100°F), or a flammable liquid whose tempera- including recirculation particulate filters; (6) any solvent con- ture is above its flash point, or a Class II combustible liquid that centrator (pollution abatement) unit or solvent recovery (distil- has a vapor pressure not exceeding 276 kPa (40 psia) at 38°C

lation) unit; and (7) the inside of a membrane enclosure. The (100°F) and whose temperature is above its flash point. following are not part of the spray area: (1) fresh air make-up units; (2) air supply ducts and air supply plenums; (3) recircu- lation air supply ducts downstream of recirculation particulate filters; and (4) exhaust ducts from solvent concentrator (pollu- ARTICLE 110 tion abatement) units. [33:3.3.2.3] Requirements for Electrical Installations Informational Note: Unenclosed spray areas are locations outside of buildings or are localized operations within a Part I. General larger room or space. Such are normally provided with some local vapor extraction/ ventilation system. In auto- 110.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements for the mated operations, the area limits are the maximum area in examination and approval, installation and use, access to and the direct path of spray operations. In manual operations, spaces about electrical conductors and equipment; enclosures

the area limits are the maximum area of spray when intended for personnel entry; and tunnel installations. aimed at 90 degrees to the application surface. Informational Note: See Informative Annex J for infor- N Spray Booth. A power-ventilated enclosure for a spray mation regarding ADA accessibility design. application operation or process that confines and limits the 110.2 Approval. The conductors and equipment required or escape of the material being sprayed, including vapors, mists, permitted by this Code shall be acceptable only if approved. dusts, and residues that are produced by the spraying operation and conducts or directs these materials to an exhaust system. Informational Note: See 90.7, Examination of Equip- [33:3.3.15] ment for Safety, and 110.3, Examination, Identification, Installation, and Use of Equipment. See definitions of Informational Note: A spray booth is an enclosure or Approved, Identified, Labeled, and Listed. insert within a larger room used for spray/coating/dip- [OSHPD 1, 1R, 2, 3, 4 & 5] Equipment shall be approvable if ping applications.

A spray booth can be fully enclosed the equipment meets the following requirements: or have open front or face and can include separate con- veyor entrance and exit. The spray booth is provided with • Equipment is approved, listed, labeled or certified for its a dedicated ventilation exhaust with supply air from the use by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) larger room or from a dedicated air supply. as recognized by the U.S. department of Labor, Occupa- tional Safety and Health Administration. N Spray Room. A power-ventilated fully enclosed room used • When field evaluated, equipment is evaluated and labeled exclusively for open spraying of flammable or combustible by a Field Evaluation Body (FEB) that is accredited by materials. [33:3.3.16] International Accreditation Services (IAS) in accordance N Type of Protection “n”. Type of protection where electrical with NFPA 790. equipment, in normal operation, is not capable of igniting a sur- • Equipment has special seismic certifications when required rounding explosive gas atmosphere and a fault capable of caus-

by Sections 1705.13.3 and 1705A.13.3 of California Build- ing ignition is not likely to occur. ing Code. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–43

110.3 ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 110.3 Examination, Identification, Installation, Use, and electrical equipment shall not be less than the nominal voltage Listing (Product Certification) of Equipment. of a circuit to which it is connected. ∆ (A) Examination. In judging equipment, considerations ∆ 110.5 Conductors. Conductors used to carry current shall be such as the following shall be evaluated: of copper, aluminum, or copper-clad aluminum unless other- wise provided in this Code. Where the conductor material is not (1) Suitability for installation and use in conformity with this specified, the sizes given in this Code shall apply to copper Code conductors. Where other materials are used, the size shall be Informational Note No. 1: Equipment may be new, changed accordingly. reconditioned, refurbished, or remanufactured. 110.6 Conductor Sizes. Conductor sizes are expressed in Informational Note No. 2: Suitability of equipment use American Wire Gage (AWG) or in circular mils. may be identified by a description marked on or provided 110.7 Wiring Integrity.

Completed wiring installations shall with a product to identify the suitability of the product for be free from short circuits, ground faults, or any connections to a specific purpose, environment, or application. Special ground other than as required or permitted elsewhere in this Code. conditions of use or other limitations and other pertinent information may be marked on the equipment, included 110.8 Wiring Methods. Only wiring methods recognized as in the product instructions, or included in the appropri- suitable are included in this Code. The recognized methods of ate listing and labeling information. Suitability of equip- wiring shall be permitted to be installed in any type of building ment may be evidenced by listing or labeling. or occupancy, except as otherwise provided in this Code. (2) Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts 110.9 Interrupting Rating. Equipment intended to interrupt designed to enclose and protect other equipment, the ade- current at fault levels shall have an interrupting rating at nomi-

quacy of the protection thus provided nal circuit voltage at least equal to the current that is available (3) Wire-bending and connection space at the line terminals of the equipment. (4) Electrical insulation Equipment intended to interrupt current at other than fault (5) Heating effects under normal conditions of use and also levels shall have an interrupting rating at nominal circuit volt- under abnormal conditions likely to arise in service age at least equal to the current that must be interrupted. (6) Arcing effects (7) Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity, and 110.10 Circuit Impedance, Short-Circuit Current Rat- specific use ings, and Other Characteristics. The overcurrent protective (8) Other factors that contribute to the practical safeguard- devices, the total impedance, the equipment short-circuit cur- ing of persons using or likely to come in contact with the rent ratings, and other characteristics of the circuit to be pro- equipment tected shall be selected and coordinated to permit the circuit

protective devices used to clear a fault to do so without extensive (B) Installation and Use. Equipment that is listed, labeled, or damage to the electrical equipment of the circuit. This fault shall both shall be installed and used in accordance with any instruc- be assumed to be either between two or more of the circuit con- tions included in the listing or labeling. ductors or between any circuit conductor and the equipment (C) Listing. Product testing, evaluation, and listing (product grounding conductor(s) permitted in 250.118. Listed equip- certification) shall be performed by recognized qualified elec- ment applied in accordance with their listing shall be consid- trical testing laboratories and shall be in accordance with appli- ered to meet the requirements of this section. cable product standards recognized as achieving equivalent 110.11 Deteriorating Agents. Unless identified for use in and effective safety for equipment installed to comply with this the operating environment, no conductors or equipment shall Code.

be located in damp or wet locations; where exposed to gases, Informational Note: The Occupational Safety and Health fumes, vapors, liquids, or other agents that have a deteriorat- Administration (OSHA) recognizes qualified electrical ing effect on the conductors or equipment; or where exposed to testing laboratories that perform evaluations, testing, and excessive temperatures. certification of certain products to ensure that they meet the Informational Note No. 1: See 300.6 for protection requirements of both the construction and general industry against corrosion. OSHA electrical standards. If the listing (product certifi- cation) is done under a qualified electrical testing labora- Informational Note No. 2: Some cleaning and lubricat- tory program, this listing mark signifies that the tested and ing compounds can cause severe deterioration of many certified product complies with the requirements of one or plastic materials used for insulating and structural appli- more appropriate product safety test standards. cations in equipment. 110.4 Voltages.

Throughout this Code, the voltage considered Equipment not identified for outdoor use and equipment shall be that at which the circuit operates. The voltage rating of identified only for indoor use, such as “dry locations,” “indoor 70–44 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 110.14 use only,” “damp locations,” or enclosure Types 1, 2, 5, 12, 12K, Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, and/or 13, shall be protected against damage from the weather for discrete combustible components installed in accor- during construction. dance with 300.22(C). Informational Note No. 3: Paint, plaster, cleaners, abra- Informational Note No. 3: See Table 110.28 for appro- sives, corrosive residues, or other contaminants may priate enclosure-type designations. result in an undetermined alteration of optical fiber cable Informational Note No. 4: Minimum flood provisions are properties. provided in NFPA 5000-2015 Building Construction and Safety Code, the International Building Code (IBC), and 110.13 Mounting and Cooling of Equipment. the International Residential Code for One- and Two- (A) Mounting. Electrical equipment shall be firmly secured Family Dwellings (IRC). to the surface on which it is mounted. Wooden plugs driven 110.12 Mechanical Execution of Work.

Electrical equip- into holes in masonry, concrete, plaster, or similar materials shall ment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. not be used. C Informational Note: Accepted industry practices are Exception: [BSC, SFM, HCD 1 & HCD 2] Roof mounted bal- A described in ANSI/NECA 1-2015, Standard for Good lasted solar photovoltaic systems provided that the wiring and C Workmanship in Electrical Construction, and other ANSI- interconnections are designed to accommodate for maximum A approved installation standards. system displacement. C (A) Unused Openings. Unused openings, other than those (B) Cooling. Electrical equipment that depends on the natu- intended for the operation of equipment, those intended for ral circulation of air and convection principles for cooling of mounting purposes, or those permitted as part of the design for exposed surfaces shall be installed so that room airflow over listed equipment, shall be closed to afford protection substan- such surfaces is not prevented by walls or by adjacent installed tially equivalent to the wall of the equipment.

Where metallic equipment. For equipment designed for floor mounting, clear- plugs or plates are used with nonmetallic enclosures, they shall ance between top surfaces and adjacent surfaces shall be pro- be recessed at least 6 mm (1⁄4 in.) from the outer surface of the vided to dissipate rising warm air. enclosure. Electrical equipment provided with ventilating openings (B) Integrity of Electrical Equipment and Connections. shall be installed so that walls or other obstructions do not pre- Internal parts of electrical equipment, including busbars, wir- vent the free circulation of air through the equipment. ing terminals, insulators, and other surfaces, shall not be ∆ 110.14 Electrical Connections. Because of different character- damaged or contaminated by foreign materials such as paint, istics of dissimilar metals, devices such as pressure terminal or plaster, cleaners, abrasives, or corrosive residues. There shall pressure splicing connectors and soldering lugs shall be identified

be no damaged parts that may adversely affect safe operation for the material of the conductor and shall be properly installed or mechanical strength of the equipment such as parts that are and used. Conductors of dissimilar metals shall not be intermixed broken; bent; cut; or deteriorated by corrosion, chemical action, in a terminal or splicing connector where physical contact occurs or overheating. between dissimilar conductors (such as copper and aluminum or N (C) Cables and Conductors. Cables and conductors aluminum and copper-clad aluminum), unless the device is iden- installed exposed on the surfaces of ceilings and sidewalls shall tified for the purpose and conditions of use. Materials such as sol- be supported by the building structure in such a manner that the der, fluxes, inhibitors, and compounds, where employed, shall be cables and conductors will not be damaged by normal building suitable for the use and shall be of a type that will not adversely use. Such cables and conductors shall be secured by hardware affect the conductors, installation, or equipment.

including straps, staples, cable ties, hangers, or similar fittings Connectors and terminals for conductors more finely designed and installed so as not to damage the cable. The instal- stranded than Class B and Class C stranding as shown in Chap- lation shall also conform with 300.4 and 300.11. Nonmetallic ter 9, Table 10, shall be identified for the specific conductor cable ties and other nonmetallic cable accessories used to secure class or classes. and support cables in other spaces used for environmental air (A) Terminals. Connection of conductors to terminal parts (plenums) shall be listed as having low smoke and heat release shall ensure a thoroughly good connection without damaging properties. the conductors and shall be made by means of pressure connec- Informational Note No. 1: Accepted industry practices tors (including set-screw type), solder lugs, or splices to flexible are described in ANSI/NECA/FOA 301-2009, Standard leads. Connection by means of wire-binding screws or studs

for Installing and Testing Fiber Optic Cables, and other and nuts that have upturned lugs or the equivalent shall be per- ANSI-approved installation standards. mitted for 10 AWG or smaller conductors. Informational Note No. 2: See 4.3.11.2.6.5 and Terminals for more than one conductor and terminals used to 4.3.11.5.5.6 of NFPA 90A-2018, Standard for the connect aluminum shall be so identified. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–45

110.15 ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS (B) Splices. Conductors shall be spliced or joined with splic- additionally restrict the sizing and temperature ratings of ing devices identified for the use or by brazing, welding, or connected conductors. soldering with a fusible metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall ∆ (D) Terminal Connection Torque. Tightening torque values first be spliced or joined so as to be mechanically and electri- for terminal connections shall be as indicated on equipment cally secure without solder and then be soldered. All splices or in installation instructions provided by the manufacturer. An and joints and the free ends of conductors shall be covered with approved means shall be used to achieve the indicated torque an insulation equivalent to that of the conductors or with an value. identified insulating device. Informational Note No. 1: Examples of approved means Wire connectors or splicing means installed on conductors of achieving the indicated torque values include torque for direct burial shall be listed for such use.

tools or devices such as shear bolts or breakaway-style (C) Temperature Limitations. The temperature rating asso- devices with visual indicators that demonstrate that the ciated with the ampacity of a conductor shall be selected and proper torque has been applied. coordinated so as not to exceed the lowest temperature rating of Informational Note No. 2: The equipment manufacturer any connected termination, conductor, or device. Conductors can be contacted if numeric torque values are not indicated with temperature ratings higher than specified for terminations on the equipment or if the installation instructions are not shall be permitted to be used for ampacity adjustment, correc- available. Informative Annex I of UL Standard 486A-486B, tion, or both. Standard for Safety-Wire Connectors, provides torque val- (1) Equipment Provisions. The determination of termina- ues in the absence of manufacturer’s recommendations. tion provisions of equipment shall be based on 110.14(C)(1) Informational Note No. 3: Additional information for (a) or (C)(1)(b).

Unless the equipment is listed and marked torquing threaded connections and terminations can be otherwise, conductor ampacities used in determining equipment found in Section 8.11 of NFPA 70B-2019, Recommended termination provisions shall be based on Table 310.16 as appro- Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance. priately modified by 310.12. 110.15 High-Leg Marking. On a 4-wire, delta-connected (a) Termination provisions of equipment for circuits rated system where the midpoint of one phase winding is grounded, 100 amperes or less, or marked for 14 AWG through 1 AWG only the conductor or busbar having the higher phase voltage conductors, shall be used only for one of the following: to ground shall be durably and permanently marked by an outer (1) Conductors rated 60°C (140°F). finish that is orange in color or by other effective means. Such (2) Conductors with higher temperature ratings, provided the identification shall be placed at each point on the system where

ampacity of such conductors is determined based on the a connection is made if the grounded conductor is also present. 60°C (140°F) ampacity of the conductor size used. 110.16 Arc-Flash Hazard Warning. (3) Conductors with higher temperature ratings if the equip- ment is listed and identified for use with such conductors. (A) General. Electrical equipment, such as switchboards, (4) For motors marked with design letters B, C, or D, conduc- switchgear, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter tors having an insulation rating of 75°C (167°F) or higher socket enclosures, and motor control centers, that is in other shall be permitted to be used, provided the ampacity of such than dwelling units, and is likely to require examination, adjust- conductors does not exceed the 75°C (167°F) ampacity. ment, servicing, or maintenance while energized, shall be field or factory marked to warn qualified persons of potential elec- (b) Termination provisions of equipment for circuits rated tric arc flash hazards. The marking shall meet the requirements

over 100 amperes, or marked for conductors larger than 1 AWG, in 110.21(B) and shall be located so as to be clearly visible to shall be used only for one of the following: qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or (1) Conductors rated 75°C (167°F) maintenance of the equipment. (2) Conductors with higher temperature ratings, provided the ∆ (B) Service Equipment. In other than dwelling units, in ampacity of such conductors does not exceed the 75°C addition to the requirements in 110.16(A), a permanent label (167°F) ampacity of the conductor size used, or up to their shall be field or factory applied to service equipment rated ampacity if the equipment is listed and identified for use 1200 amps or more. The label shall meet the requirements of with such conductors 110.21(B) and contain the following information: (2) Separate Connector Provisions. Separately installed (1) Nominal system voltage pressure connectors shall be used with conductors at the (2) Available fault current at the service overcurrent protective

ampacities not exceeding the ampacity at the listed and identi- devices fied temperature rating of the connector. (3) The clearing time of service overcurrent protective devices Informational Note: With respect to 110.14(C)(1) and based on the available fault current at the service equipment (C)(2), equipment markings or listing information may (4) The date the label was applied 70–46 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 110.22 Exception: Service equipment labeling shall not be required Exception: In industrial occupancies, where conditions of if an arc flash label is applied in accordance with acceptable maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons industry practice. service the equipment, the markings indicated in 110.21(A)(2) shall not be required for equipment that is reconditioned by the Informational Note No. 1: NFPA 70E-2018, Standard owner or operator as part of a regular equipment maintenance for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, provides guidance, program. such as determining severity of potential exposure, plan- ning safe work practices, arc flash labeling, and selecting Informational Note No. 1: Industry standards are avail- personal protective equipment. able for application of reconditioned and refurbished Informational Note No. 2: ANSI Z535.4-2011, Product equipment. Safety Signs and Labels, provides guidelines for the design Informational Note No. 2: The term reconditioned may

of safety signs and labels for application to products. be interchangeable with the terms rebuilt, refurbished, or Informational Note No. 3: Acceptable industry practices remanufactured. for equipment labeling are described in NFPA 70E- Informational Note No. 3: The original listing mark may 2018, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. include the mark of the certifying body and not the entire This standard provides specific criteria for developing equipment label. arc-flash labels for equipment that provides nominal sys- (B) Field-Applied Hazard Markings. Where caution, warn- tem voltage, incident energy levels, arc-flash boundaries, ing, or danger signs or labels are required by this Code, the minimum required levels of personal protective equip- labels shall meet the following requirements: ment, and so forth. (1) The marking shall warn of the hazards using effective 110.18 Arcing Parts. Parts of electrical equipment that in words, colors, symbols, or any combination thereof. ordinary operation produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten metal

shall be enclosed or separated and isolated from all combustible Informational Note: ANSI Z535.4-2011, Product Safety material. Signs and Labels, provides guidelines for suitable font sizes, words, colors, symbols, and location requirements Informational Note: For hazardous (classified) locations, for labels. see Articles 500 through 517. For motors, see 430.14. (2) The label shall be permanently affixed to the equipment 110.19 Light and Power from Railway Conductors. Cir- or wiring method and shall not be handwritten. cuits for lighting and power shall not be connected to any sys- tem that contains trolley wires with a ground return. Exception to (2): Portions of labels or markings that are vari- able, or that could be subject to changes, shall be permitted to Exception: Such circuit connections shall be permitted in car be handwritten and shall be legible. houses, power houses, or passenger and freight stations oper- ated in connection with electric railways. (3) The label shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved. 110.21 Marking.

Informational Note: ANSI Z535.4-2011, Product Safety (A) Equipment Markings. Signs and Labels, provides guidelines for the design and (1) General. The manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other durability of safety signs and labels for application to elec- descriptive marking by which the organization responsible for trical equipment. the product can be identified shall be placed on all electrical 110.22 Identification of Disconnecting Means. equipment. Other markings that indicate voltage, current, watt- age, or other ratings shall be provided as specified elsewhere in (A) General. Each disconnecting means shall be legibly this Code. The marking or label shall be of sufficient durability to marked to indicate its purpose unless located and arranged so withstand the environment involved. the purpose is evident. In other than one- or two-family dwell- ings, the marking shall include the identification of the circuit ∆ (2) Reconditioned Equipment. Reconditioned equipment shall source that supplies the disconnecting means. The marking

be marked with the name, trademark, or other descriptive mark- shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment ing by which the organization responsible for reconditioning the involved. electrical equipment can be identified, along with the date of the reconditioning. (B) Engineered Series Combination Systems. Equipment enclosures for circuit breakers or fuses applied in compli- Reconditioned equipment shall be identified as “recondi- ance with series combination ratings selected under engineer- tioned” and the original listing mark removed. Approval of the ing supervision in accordance with 240.86(A) shall be legibly reconditioned equipment shall not be based solely on the equip- marked in the field as directed by the engineer to indicate the ment’s original listing. equipment has been applied with a series combination rating. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–47

110.23 ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS The marking shall meet the requirements in 110.21(B) and shall Exception: The field marking requirements in 110.24(A) and be readily visible and state the following: 110.24(B) shall not be required in industrial installations where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only CAUTION — ENGINEERED SERIES qualified persons service the equipment. COMBINATION SYSTEM RATED _______ AMPERES. IDENTIFIED REPLACEMENT 110.25 Lockable Disconnecting Means. If a disconnecting COMPONENTS REQUIRED. means is required to be lockable open elsewhere in this Code, it shall be capable of being locked in the open position. The (C) Tested Series Combination Systems. Equipment enclo- provisions for locking shall remain in place with or without the sures for circuit breakers or fuses applied in compliance with lock installed. the series combination ratings marked on the equipment by the manufacturer in accordance with 240.86(B) shall be legibly Exception: Locking provisions for a cord-and-plug connection

marked in the field to indicate the equipment has been applied shall not be required to remain in place without the lock installed. with a series combination rating. The marking shall meet the requirements in 110.21(B) and shall be readily visible and state Part II. 1000 Volts, Nominal, or Less the following: 110.26 Spaces About Electrical Equipment. Access and CAUTION — SERIES COMBINATION working space shall be provided and maintained about all elec- SYSTEM RATED ____ AMPERES. IDENTIFIED trical equipment to permit ready and safe operation and main- REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS REQUIRED. tenance of such equipment. Informational Note: See IEEE 3004.5-2014 Recom- (A) Working Space. Working space for equipment operating mended Practice for the Application of Low-Voltage at 1000 volts, nominal, or less to ground and likely to require Circuit Breakers in Industrial and Commercial Power examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while ener- Systems, for further information on series tested systems. gized shall comply with the dimensions of 110.26(A)(1), (A)(2),

(A)(3), and (A)(4) or as required or permitted elsewhere in this 110.23 Current Transformers. Unused current transform- Code. ers associated with potentially energized circuits shall be short-circuited. Informational Note: NFPA 70E-2018, Standard for Elec- trical Safety in the Workplace, provides guidance, such 110.24 Available Fault Current. as determining severity of potential exposure, planning ∆ (A) Field Marking. Service equipment at other than dwelling safe work practices including establishing an electrically units shall be legibly marked in the field with the available fault safe work condition, arc flash labeling, and selecting per- current. The field marking(s) shall include the date the fault- sonal protective equipment. current calculation was performed and be of sufficient dura- (1) Depth of Working Space. The depth of the working bility to withstand the environment involved. The calculation space in the direction of live parts shall not be less than that shall be documented and made available to those authorized to

specified in Table 110.26(A)(1) unless the requirements of design, install, inspect, maintain, or operate the system. 110.26(A)(1)(a), (A)(1)(b), or (A)(1)(c) are met. Distances shall Informational Note No. 1: The available fault-current be measured from the exposed live parts or from the enclosure marking(s) addressed in 110.24 is related to required or opening if the live parts are enclosed. short-circuit current and interrupting ratings of equip- ment. NFPA 70E-2018, Standard for Electrical Safety Table 110.26(A)(1) Working Spaces in the Workplace, provides assistance in determining the severity of potential exposure, planning safe work prac- Nominal Minimum Clear Distance tices, and selecting personal protective equipment. Voltage to Ground Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Informational Note No. 2: Values of available fault current for use in determining appropriate minimum short-circuit 0–150 900 mm (3 ft) 900 mm (3 ft) 900 mm (3 ft) current and interrupting ratings of service equipment are 151–600 900 mm (3 ft) 1.0 m (3 ft 6 in.) 1.2 m (4 ft)

available from electric utilities in published or other forms. 601–1000 900 mm (3 ft) 1.2 m (4 ft) 1.5 m (5 ft) ∆ (B) Modifications. When modifications to the electrical Note: Where the conditions are as follows: installation occur that affect the available fault current at the Condition 1 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working space and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed service, the available fault current shall be verified or recalcu- live parts on both sides of the working space that are effectively guarded by lated as necessary to ensure the service equipment ratings are insulating materials. sufficient for the available fault current at the line terminals of Condition 2 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working space and the equipment. The required field marking(s) in 110.24(A) shall grounded parts on the other side of the working space. Concrete, brick, or tile walls shall be considered as grounded. be adjusted to reflect the new level of available fault current.

Condition 3 — Exposed live parts on both sides of the working space. 70–48 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 110.26 (a) Dead-Front Assemblies. Working space shall not be (2) The width of the working space shall be the width of the required in the back or sides of assemblies, such as dead-front equipment enclosure or a minimum of 762 mm (30 in.), switchboards, switchgear, or motor control centers, where all whichever is greater. connections and all renewable or adjustable parts, such as fuses (3) All enclosure doors or hinged panels shall be capable of or switches, are accessible from locations other than the back opening a minimum of 90 degrees. or sides. Where rear access is required to work on nonelectrical (4) The space in front of the enclosure shall comply with the parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a minimum horizontal depth requirements of Table 110.26(A)(1). The maximum working space of 762 mm (30 in.) shall be provided. height of the working space shall be the height necessary (b) Low Voltage. By special permission, smaller working to install the equipment in the limited space. A horizontal

spaces shall be permitted where all exposed live parts operate at ceiling structural member or access panel shall be permit- not greater than 30 volts rms, 42 volts peak, or 60 volts dc. ted in this space. (c) Existing Buildings. In existing buildings where electri- (5) Separation from High-Voltage Equipment. Where cal equipment is being replaced, Condition 2 working clear- switches, cutouts, or other equipment operating at 1000 volts, ance shall be permitted between dead-front switchboards, nominal, or less are installed in a vault, room, or enclosure switchgear, panelboards, or motor control centers located across where there are exposed live parts or exposed wiring operat- the aisle from each other where conditions of maintenance and ing over 1000 volts, nominal, the high-voltage equipment shall supervision ensure that written procedures have been adopted to be effectively separated from the space occupied by the low- prohibit equipment on both sides of the aisle from being open voltage equipment by a suitable partition, fence, or screen.

at the same time and qualified persons who are authorized will service the installation. (B) Clear Spaces. Working space required by this section shall not be used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts (2) Width of Working Space. The width of the working are exposed for inspection or servicing, the working space, if in space in front of the electrical equipment shall be the width of a passageway or general open space, shall be suitably guarded. the equipment or 762 mm (30 in.), whichever is greater. In all cases, the work space shall permit at least a 90 degree opening (C) Entrance to and Egress from Working Space. of equipment doors or hinged panels. (1) Minimum Required. At least one entrance of sufficient ∆ (3) Height of Working Space. The work space shall be clear area shall be provided to give access to and egress from work- and extend from the grade, floor, or platform to a height of 2.0 m ing space about electrical equipment. (61⁄2 ft) or the height of the equipment, whichever is greater. (2) Large Equipment. For large equipment that contains over-

Within the height requirements of this section, other equip- current devices, switching devices, or control devices, there shall ment or support structures, such as concrete pads, associated be one entrance to and egress from the required working space with the electrical installation and located above or below the 1⁄2 ft) high at each not less than 610 mm (24 in.) wide and 2.0 m (6 electrical equipment shall be permitted to extend not more than end of the working space. This requirement shall apply to either 150 mm (6 in.) beyond the front of the electrical equipment. of the following conditions: Exception No. 1: On battery systems mounted on open racks, (1) For equipment rated 1200 amperes or more and over 1.8 m the top clearance shall comply with 480.10(D). (6 ft) wide Exception No. 2: In existing dwelling units, service equipment (2) For service disconnecting means installed in accor- or panelboards that do not exceed 200 amperes shall be permit- dance with 230.71 where the combined ampere rating is

ted in spaces where the height of the working space is less than 1200 amperes or more and over 1.8 m (6 ft) wide 2.0 m (6 1⁄2 ft). Open equipment doors shall not impede the entry to or egress Exception No. 3: Meters that are installed in meter sockets from the working space. shall be permitted to extend beyond the other equipment. The A single entrance to and egress from the required work- meter socket shall be required to follow the rules of this section. ing space shall be permitted where either of the conditions in (4) Limited Access. Where equipment operating at 1000 volts, 110.26(C)(2)(a) or (C)(2)(b) is met. nominal, or less to ground and likely to require examination, (a) Unobstructed Egress. Where the location permits adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized is a continuous and unobstructed way of egress travel, a single required by installation instructions or function to be located entrance to the working space shall be permitted. in a space with limited access, all of the following shall apply: (b) Extra Working Space. Where the depth of the working

space is twice that required by 110.26(A)(1), a single entrance (1) Where equipment is installed above a lay-in ceiling, there shall be permitted. It shall be located such that the distance from shall be an opening not smaller than 559 mm × 559 mm the equipment to the nearest edge of the entrance is not less (22 in. × 22 in.), or in a crawl space, there shall be an acces- than the minimum clear distance specified in Table 110.26(A) sible opening not smaller than 559 mm × 762 mm (22 in. (1) for equipment operating at that voltage and in that condition. × 30 in.). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–49

110.27 ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS (3) Personnel Doors. Where equipment rated 800 amperes or ∆ (2) Outdoor. Outdoor installations shall comply with 110.26(E) more that contains overcurrent devices, switching devices, or (2)(a) through (E)(2)(c). control devices is installed and there is a personnel door(s) (a) Installation Requirements. Outdoor electrical equip- intended for entrance to and egress from the working space less ment shall be the following: than 7.6 m (25 ft) from the nearest edge of the working space, (1) Installed in identified enclosures the door(s) shall open in the direction of egress and be equipped (2) Protected from accidental contact by unauthorized person- with listed panic hardware or listed fire exit hardware. nel or by vehicular traffic [OSHPD 1, 1R, 2, 3, 4 & 5]: See California Building Code, (3) Protected from accidental spillage or leakage from piping Section 1010.1.10 for additional exit door requirements for systems electrical room with equipment rated 800-amperes or more. (b) Work Space.

The working clearance space shall include Informational Note: For information on panic hardware, the zone described in 110.26(A). No architectural appurtenance see UL 305, Standard For Safety For Panic Hardware. or other equipment shall be located in this zone. For fire exit hardware, see UL 305, Standard For Panic (c) Dedicated Equipment Space. The space equal to the width Hardware, and UL 10C, Standard for Safety for Positive and depth of the equipment, and extending from grade to a Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. height of 1.8 m (6 ft) above the equipment, shall be dedicated to the electrical installation. No piping or other equipment foreign ∆ (D) Illumination. Illumination shall be provided for all work- to the electrical installation shall be located in this zone. ing spaces about service equipment, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, or motor control centers installed indoors. Control Exception: Structural overhangs or roof extensions shall be by automatic means shall not be permitted to control all illu- permitted in this zone. mination within the working space.

Additional lighting outlets (F) Locked Electrical Equipment Rooms or Enclosures. shall not be required where the work space is illuminated by an Electrical equipment rooms or enclosures housing electrical adjacent light source or as permitted by 210.70(A)(1), Excep- apparatus that are controlled by a lock(s) shall be considered tion No. 1, for switched receptacles. accessible to qualified persons. (E) Dedicated Equipment Space. All switchboards, switch- 110.27 Guarding of Live Parts. gear, panelboards, and motor control centers shall be located in dedicated spaces and protected from damage. (A) Live Parts Guarded Against Accidental Contact. Except as elsewhere required or permitted by this Code, live parts of Exception: Control equipment that by its very nature or because electrical equipment operating at 50 to 1000 volts, nominal shall of other rules of the Code must be adjacent to or within sight of be guarded against accidental contact by approved enclosures or its operating machinery shall be permitted in those locations. by any of the following means: (1) Indoor.

Indoor installations shall comply with 110.26(E) (1) By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is (1)(a) through (E)(1)(d). accessible only to qualified persons. (a) Dedicated Electrical Space. The space equal to the (2) By permanent, substantial partitions or screens arranged so width and depth of the equipment and extending from the floor that only qualified persons have access to the space within to a height of 1.8 m (6 ft) above the equipment or to the struc- reach of the live parts. Any openings in such partitions or tural ceiling, whichever is lower, shall be dedicated to the elec- screens shall be sized and located so that persons are not trical installation. No piping, ducts, leak protection apparatus, likely to come into accidental contact with the live parts or or other equipment foreign to the electrical installation shall be to bring conducting objects into contact with them. located in this zone. (3) By location on a balcony, gallery, or platform elevated

Exception: Suspended ceilings with removable panels shall be and arranged so as to exclude unqualified persons. permitted within the 1.8-m (6-ft) zone. (4) By elevation above the floor or other working surface as follows: (b) Foreign Systems. The area above the dedicated space required by 110.26(E)(1)(a) shall be permitted to contain for- a. A minimum of 2.5 m (8 ft) for 50 volts to 300 volts eign systems, provided protection is installed to avoid damage between ungrounded conductors to the electrical equipment from condensation, leaks, or breaks b. A minimum of 2.6 m (8 ft 6 in.) for 301 volts to in such foreign systems. 600 volts between ungrounded conductors (c) Sprinkler Protection. Sprinkler protection shall be per- c. A minimum of 2.62 m (8 ft 7 in.) for 601 volts to mitted for the dedicated space where the piping complies with 1000 volts between ungrounded conductors this section. (B) Prevent Physical Damage. In locations where electrical (d) Suspended Ceilings. A dropped, suspended, or similar equipment is likely to be exposed to physical damage, enclosures

ceiling that does not add strength to the building structure shall or guards shall be so arranged and of such strength as to prevent not be considered a structural ceiling. such damage. 70–50 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 110.28 (C) Warning Signs. Entrances to rooms and other guarded switches, portable power distribution equipment, termination locations that contain exposed live parts shall be marked with boxes, general-purpose transformers, fire pump controllers, fire conspicuous warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to pump motors, and motor controllers, rated not over 1000 volts enter. The marking shall meet the requirements in 110.21(B). nominal and intended for such locations, shall be marked with an enclosure-type number as shown in Table 110.28. Informational Note: For motors, see 430.232 and 430.233. For over 1000 volts, see 110.34. Table 110.28 shall be used for selecting these enclosures for use in specific locations other than hazardous (classified) loca- 110.28 Enclosure Types. Enclosures (other than surrounding tions. The enclosures are not intended to protect against condi- fences or walls covered in 110.31) of switchboards, switchgear, tions such as condensation, icing, corrosion, or contamination

panelboards, industrial control panels, motor control centers, that may occur within the enclosure or enter via the raceway or meter sockets, enclosed switches, transfer switches, power out- unsealed openings. lets, circuit breakers, adjustable-speed drive systems, pullout ∆ Table 110.28 Enclosure Selection For Outdoor Use Provides a Degree of Protection Against Enclosure Type Number the Following Environmental Conditions 3 3R 3S 3X 3RX 3SX 4 4X 6 6P Incidental contact with the enclosed X X X X X X X X X X equipment Rain, snow, and sleet X X X X X X X X X X Sleet* — — X — — X — — — — Windblown dust X — X X — X X X X X Hosedown — — — — — — X X X X Corrosive agents — — — X X X — X — X Temporary submersion — — — — — — — — X X Prolonged submersion — — — — — — — — — X For Indoor Use Provides a Degree of Protection Against Enclosure Type Number the Following Environmental Conditions 1 2 4 4X 5 6 6P 12 12K 13 Incidental contact with the enclosed X X X X X X X X X X equipment Falling dirt X X X X X X X X X X Falling liquids and light splashing — X X X X X X X X X

Circulating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings — — X X — X X X X X Settling airborne dust, lint, fibers, and — — X X X X X X X X flyings Hosedown and splashing water — — X X — X X — — — Oil and coolant seepage — — — — — — — X X X Oil or coolant spraying and splashing — — — — — — — — — X Corrosive agents — — — X — — X — — — Temporary submersion — — — — — X X — — — Prolonged submersion — — — — — — X — — — *Mechanism shall be operable when ice covered. Informational Note No. 1: The term raintight is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 3, 3S, 3SX, 3X, 4, 4X, 6, and 6P. The term rainproof is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 3R and 3RX. The term watertight is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 4, 4X, 6, and 6P. The term driptight is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 2, 5, 12, 12K, and 13. The term dusttight is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 3, 3S, 3SX, 3X, 4, 4X, 5, 6, 6P, 12, 12K, and 13. Informational Note No.

2: Ingress protection (IP) ratings may be found in ANSI/IEC 60529, Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures. IP ratings are not a substitute for Enclosure Type ratings. Informational Note No. 3: Dusttight enclosures are suitable for use in hazardous locations in accordance with 502.10(B)(4), 503.10(A)(2), and 506.15(C)(9). Informational Note No. 4: Dusttight enclosures are suitable for use in unclassified locations and in Class II, Division 2; Class III; and Zone 22 hazardous (classified) locations. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–51

110.30 ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS Part III. Over 1000 Volts, Nominal Exception to (1), (2), and (3): Where the vault is protected with automatic sprinkler, water spray, carbon dioxide, or halon, ∆ 110.30 General. Conductors and equipment used on circuits construction with a 1-hour rating shall be permitted. over 1000 volts, nominal, shall comply with Part I of this article and with 110.30 through 110.41, which supplement or (4) Locks. Doors shall be equipped with locks, and doors shall modify Part I. In no case shall this part apply to equipment on be kept locked, with access allowed only to qualified persons. the supply side of the service point. Personnel doors shall open in the direction of egress and be equipped with listed panic hardware or listed fire exit hardware. 110.31 Enclosure for Electrical Installations. Electrical installations in a vault, room, or closet or in an area surrounded by ∆ (5) Transformers. Where a transformer is installed in a

a wall, screen, or fence, access to which is controlled by a lock(s) vault as required by Article 450, the vault shall be constructed or other approved means, shall be considered to be accessible in accordance with the requirements of Part III of Article 450. to qualified persons only. The type of enclosure used in a given Informational Note No. 1: For additional information, case shall be designed and constructed according to the nature see ANSI/ASTM E119-2018a, Method for Fire Tests of and degree of the hazard(s) associated with the installation. Building Construction and Materials, and NFPA 80-2019, For installations other than equipment as described in Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. 110.31(D), a wall, screen, or fence shall be used to enclose an Informational Note No. 2: A typical 3-hour construction outdoor electrical installation to deter access by persons who is 150 mm (6 in.) thick reinforced concrete. are not qualified. A fence shall not be less than 2.1 m (7 ft) in

height or a combination of 1.8 m (6 ft) or more of fence fabric (B) Indoor Installations. and a 300 mm (1 ft) or more extension utilizing three or more (1) In Places Accessible to Unqualified Persons. Indoor strands of barbed wire or equivalent. The distance from the electrical installations that are accessible to unqualified per- fence to live parts shall be not less than given in Table 110.31. sons shall be made with metal-enclosed equipment. Switch- gear, transformers, pull boxes, connection boxes, and other Informational Note: See Article 450 for construction similar associated equipment shall be marked with appropriate requirements for transformer vaults. caution signs. Openings in ventilated dry-type transformers or (A) Electrical Vaults. Where an electrical vault is required or similar openings in other equipment shall be designed so that specified for conductors and equipment 110.31(A)(1) to (A)(5) foreign objects inserted through these openings are deflected shall apply. from energized parts. (1) Walls and Roof.

The walls and roof shall be constructed of (2) In Places Accessible to Qualified Persons Only. Indoor materials that have adequate structural strength for the conditions, electrical installations considered accessible only to quali- with a minimum fire rating of 3 hours. For the purpose of this fied persons in accordance with this section shall comply with section, studs and wallboard construction shall not be permitted. 110.34, 110.36, and 490.24. (2) Floors. The floors of vaults in contact with the earth shall (C) Outdoor Installations. be of concrete that is not less than 102 mm (4 in.) thick, but (1) In Places Accessible to Unqualified Persons. Outdoor where the vault is constructed with a vacant space or other sto- electrical installations that are open to unqualified persons shall ries below it, the floor shall have adequate structural strength for comply with Parts I, II, and III of Article 225. the load imposed on it and a minimum fire resistance of 3 hours. (2) In Places Accessible to Qualified Persons Only. Outdoor (3) Doors.

Each doorway leading into a vault from the build- electrical installations that have exposed live parts shall be ing interior shall be provided with a tight-fitting door that has a accessible to qualified persons only in accordance with the first minimum fire rating of 3 hours. The authority having jurisdiction paragraph of this section and shall comply with 110.34, 110.36, shall be permitted to require such a door for an exterior wall and 490.24. opening where conditions warrant. (D) Enclosed Equipment Accessible to Unqualified Persons. ∆ Table 110.31 Minimum Distance from Fence to Live Parts Ventilating or similar openings in equipment shall be designed such that foreign objects inserted through these openings are Minimum Distance to Live Parts deflected from energized parts. Where exposed to physical dam- age from vehicular traffic, suitable guards shall be provided. Nominal Voltage m ft Equipment located outdoors and accessible to unqualified per- sons shall be designed such that exposed nuts or bolts cannot be 1001–13,799 3.05 10

13,800–230,000 4.57 15 readily removed, permitting access to live parts. Where equip- Over 230,000 5.49 18 ment is accessible to unqualified persons and the bottom of the enclosure is less than 2.5 m (8 ft) above the floor or grade level, Note: For clearances of conductors for specific system voltages and typical the enclosure door or hinged cover shall be kept locked. Doors BIL ratings, see ANSI/IEEE C2-2017, National Electrical Safety Code. 70–52 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 110.34 and covers of enclosures used solely as pull boxes, splice equipment installed on platforms, balconies, or mezzanine floors boxes, or junction boxes shall be locked, bolted, or screwed on. or in attic or roof rooms or spaces. Underground box covers that weigh over 45.4 kg (100 lb) shall be 110.34 Work Space and Guarding. considered as meeting this requirement. (A) Working Space. Except as elsewhere required or per- 110.32 Work Space About Equipment. Sufficient space mitted in this Code, equipment likely to require examination, shall be provided and maintained about electrical equipment adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized shall have to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such clear working space in the direction of access to live parts of equipment. Where energized parts are exposed, the minimum the electrical equipment and shall be not less than specified in clear work space shall be not less than 2.0 m (61 ⁄ 2 ft) high Table 110.34(A). Distances shall be measured from the live

(measured vertically from the floor or platform) and the width parts, if such are exposed, or from the enclosure front or open- of the equipment or 914 mm (3 ft) wide (measured parallel ing if such are enclosed. to the equipment), whichever is greater. The depth shall be as required in 110.34(A). In all cases, the work space shall Exception: Working space shall not be required in back of equip- permit at least a 90-degree opening of doors or hinged panels. ment such as switchgear or control assemblies where there are Within the height requirements of this section, other equip- no renewable or adjustable parts (such as fuses or switches) on ment that is associated with the electrical installation and is the back and where all connections are accessible from locations located above or below the electrical equipment shall be per- other than the back. Where rear access is required to work on non- mitted to extend not more than 150 mm (6 in.) beyond the electrical parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a minimum front of the electrical equipment.

Working space required working space of 762 mm (30 in.) horizontally shall be provided. by this section shall not be used for storage. When normally (B) Separation from Low-Voltage Equipment. Where enclosed live parts are exposed for inspection or servicing, the switches, cutouts, or other equipment operating at 1000 volts, working space, if in a passageway or general open space, shall nominal, or less are installed in a vault, room, or enclosure where be suitably guarded. there are exposed live parts or exposed wiring operating at 110.33 Entrance to Enclosures and Access to Working Space. over 1000 volts, nominal, the high-voltage equipment shall be effectively separated from the space occupied by the low-volt- (A) Entrance. At least one entrance to enclosures for electrical age equipment by a suitable partition, fence, or screen. installations as described in 110.31 not less than 610 mm (24 in.) wide and 2.0 m (6 1⁄2 ft) high shall be provided to give access to the Exception: Switches or other equipment operating at 1000 volts, working space about electrical equipment.

nominal, or less and serving only equipment within the high- voltage vault, room, or enclosure shall be permitted to be (1) Large Equipment. On switchgear and control panels installed in the high-voltage vault, room, or enclosure without a exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) in width, there shall be one entrance at partition, fence, or screen if accessible to qualified persons only. each end of the equipment. A single entrance to the required working space shall be permitted where either of the conditions (C) Locked Rooms or Enclosures. The entrance to all build- in 110.33(A)(1)(a) or (A)(1)(b) is met. ings, vaults, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts (a) Unobstructed Exit. Where the location permits a con- tinuous and unobstructed way of exit travel, a single entrance to the working space shall be permitted. Table 110.34(A) Minimum Depth of Clear Working Space at (b) Extra Working Space. Where the depth of the working Electrical Equipment space is twice that required by 110.34(A), a single entrance shall be permitted.

It shall be located so that the distance from Nominal Minimum Clear Distance Voltage the equipment to the nearest edge of the entrance is not less to Ground Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 than the minimum clear distance specified in Table 110.34(A) for equipment operating at that voltage and in that condition. 1001–2500 V 900 mm (3 ft) 1.2 m (4 ft) 1.5 m (5 ft) 2501–9000 V 1.2 m (4 ft) 1.5 m (5 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) (2) Guarding. Where bare energized parts at any voltage or 9001–25,000 V 1.5 m (5 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) 2.8 m (9 ft) insulated energized parts above 1000 volts, nominal, are located 25,001 V–75 kV 1.8 m (6 ft) 2.5 m (8 ft) 3.0 m (10 ft) adjacent to such entrance, they shall be suitably guarded. Above 75 kV 2.5 m (8 ft) 3.0 m (10 ft) 3.7 m (12 ft) (3) Personnel Doors. Where there are personnel doors Note: Where the conditions are as follows: intended for entrance to and egress from the working space less (1) Condition 1 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working space and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed

than 7.6 m (25 ft) from the nearest edge of the working space, live parts on both sides of the working space that are effectively guarded by the doors shall open in the direction of egress and be equipped insulating materials. with listed panic hardware or listed fire exit hardware. (2) Condition 2 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working space and grounded parts on the other side of the working space. Concrete, brick, or tile (B) Access. Permanent ladders or stairways shall be pro- walls shall be considered as grounded. vided to give safe access to the working space around electrical (3) Condition 3 — Exposed live parts on both sides of the working space. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–53

110.36 ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS Table 110.34(E) Elevation of Unguarded Live Parts Above Exposed runs of insulated wires and cables that have a bare Working Space lead sheath or a braided outer covering shall be supported in a manner designed to prevent physical damage to the braid or Elevation sheath. Supports for lead-covered cables shall be designed to Nominal Voltage prevent electrolysis of the sheath. Between Phases m ft 110.40 Temperature Limitations at Terminations. Conduc- 1001–7500 V 2.7 9 tors shall be permitted to be terminated based on the 90°C (194°F) 7501–35,000 V 2.9 9 ft 6 in. temperature rating and ampacity as given in Table 311.60(C)(67) Over 35 kV Add 9.5 mm per kV Add 0.37 in. per kV through Table 311.60(C)(86), unless otherwise identified. above 35 kV above 35 kV 110.41 Inspections and Tests. (A) Pre-energization and Operating Tests. Where required elsewhere in this Code, the complete electrical system design, or exposed conductors operating at over 1000 volts, nominal,

including settings for protective, switching, and control circuits, shall be kept locked unless such entrances are under the observa- shall be prepared in advance and made available on request to tion of a qualified person at all times. the authority having jurisdiction and shall be tested when first Permanent and conspicuous danger signs shall be provided. installed on-site. The danger sign shall meet the requirements in 110.21(B) and (B) Test Report. A test report covering the results of the tests shall read as follows: required in 110.41(A) shall be available to the authority having DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT jurisdiction prior to energization and made available to those (D) Illumination. Illumination shall be provided for all authorized to install, operate, test, and maintain the system. working spaces about electrical equipment. Control by auto- Part IV. Tunnel Installations over 1000 Volts, Nominal matic means only shall not be permitted. The lighting outlets shall be arranged so that persons changing lamps or making 110.51 General.

repairs on the lighting system are not endangered by live parts (A) Covered. This part shall apply to the installation and use or other equipment. of high-voltage power distribution and utilization equipment The points of control shall be located so that persons are not that is portable, mobile, or both, such as substations, trailers, likely to come in contact with any live part or moving part of the cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, drills, dredges, compres- equipment while turning on the lights. sors, pumps, conveyors, underground excavators, and the like. (E) Elevation of Unguarded Live Parts. Unguarded live (B) Other Articles. The requirements of this part shall be parts above working space shall be maintained at elevations not additional to, or amendatory of, those prescribed in Articles 100 less than required by Table 110.34(E). through 490 of this Code. (F) Protection of Service Equipment, Switchgear, and (C) Protection Against Physical Damage. Conductors and Industrial Control Assemblies.

Pipes or ducts foreign to the cables in tunnels shall be located above the tunnel floor and electrical installation and requiring periodic maintenance or so placed or guarded to protect them from physical damage. whose malfunction would endanger the operation of the elec- 110.52 Overcurrent Protection. Motor-operated equipment trical system shall not be located in the vicinity of the service shall be protected from overcurrent in accordance with Parts III, equipment, switchgear, or industrial control assemblies. Pro- IV, and V of Article 430. Transformers shall be protected from tection shall be provided where necessary to avoid damage overcurrent in accordance with 450.3. from condensation leaks and breaks in such foreign systems. Piping and other facilities shall not be considered foreign if pro- 110.53 Conductors. High-voltage conductors in tunnels shall vided for fire protection of the electrical installation. be installed in metal conduit or other metal raceway, Type MC cable, or other approved multiconductor cable. Multiconductor 110.36 Circuit Conductors.

Circuit conductors shall be per- portable cable shall be permitted to supply mobile equipment. mitted to be installed in raceways; in cable trays; as metal-clad cable Type MC; as bare wire, cable, and busbars; or as Type MV 110.54 Bonding and Equipment Grounding Conductors. cables or conductors as provided in 300.37, 300.39, 300.40, and (A) Grounded and Bonded. All non–current-carrying metal 300.50. Bare live conductors shall comply with 490.24. parts of electrical equipment and all metal raceways and cable Insulators, together with their mounting and conductor sheaths shall be solidly grounded and bonded to all metal pipes attachments, where used as supports for wires, single-conductor and rails at the portal and at intervals not exceeding 300 m cables, or busbars, shall be capable of safely withstanding the (1000 ft) throughout the tunnel. maximum magnetic forces that would prevail if two or more (B) Equipment Grounding Conductors. An equipment conductors of a circuit were subjected to short-circuit current. grounding conductor shall be run with circuit conductors inside

70–54 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 110.75 the metal raceway or inside the multiconductor cable jacket. The the loading that can be expected to bear on underground equipment grounding conductor shall be permitted to be insu- enclosures. lated or bare. 110.72 Cabling Work Space. A clear work space not less 110.55 Transformers, Switches, and Electrical Equipment. than 900 mm (3 ft) wide shall be provided where cables are All transformers, switches, motor controllers, motors, rectifi- located on both sides, and not less than 750 mm (21⁄2 ft) where ers, and other equipment installed belowground shall be pro- cables are only on one side. The vertical headroom shall be not tected from physical damage by location or guarding. less than 1.8 m (6 ft) unless the opening is within 300 mm (1 ft), measured horizontally, of the adjacent interior side wall of the 110.56 Energized Parts. Bare terminals of transformers, enclosure. switches, motor controllers, and other equipment shall be enclosed to prevent accidental contact with energized parts.

Exception: A manhole containing only one or more of the fol- lowing shall be permitted to have one of the horizontal work 110.57 Ventilation System Controls. Electrical controls for space dimensions reduced to 600 mm (2 ft) where the other the ventilation system shall be arranged so that the airflow can horizontal clear work space is increased so the sum of the two be reversed. dimensions is not less than 1.8 m (6 ft): 110.58 Disconnecting Means. A switch or circuit breaker (1) Optical fiber cables as covered in Article 770 that simultaneously opens all ungrounded conductors of the cir- (2) Power-limited fire alarm circuits supplied in accordance cuit shall be installed within sight of each transformer or motor with 760.121 location for disconnecting the transformer or motor. The switch (3) Class 2 or Class 3 remote-control and signaling circuits, or circuit breaker for a transformer shall have an ampere rating or both, supplied in accordance with 725.121 not less than the ampacity of the transformer supply conductors.

The switch or circuit breaker for a motor shall comply with the 110.73 Equipment Work Space. Where electrical equip- applicable requirements of Article 430. ment with live parts that is likely to require examination, adjust- ment, servicing, or maintenance while energized is installed 110.59 Enclosures. Enclosures for use in tunnels shall be in a manhole, vault, or other enclosure designed for personnel dripproof, weatherproof, or submersible as required by the envi- access, the work space and associated requirements in 110.26 ronmental conditions. Switch or contactor enclosures shall not shall be met for installations operating at 1000 volts or less. be used as junction boxes or as raceways for conductors feeding Where the installation is over 1000 volts, the work space and through or tapping off to other switches, unless the enclosures associated requirements in 110.34 shall be met. A manhole comply with 312.8. access cover that weighs over 45.4 kg (100 lb) shall be consid- Part V. Manholes and Other Electrical Enclosures ered as meeting the requirements of 110.34(C).

Intended for Personnel Entry 110.74 Conductor Installation. Conductors installed in man- ∆ 110.70 General. Electrical enclosures intended for personnel holes and other enclosures intended for personnel entry shall entry and specifically fabricated for this purpose shall be of suf- be cabled, racked up, or arranged in an approved manner that ficient size to provide safe work space about electrical equipment provides ready and safe access for persons to enter for instal- with live parts that is likely to require examination, adjustment, lation and maintenance. The installation shall comply with servicing, or maintenance while energized. Such enclosures shall 110.74(A) or 110.74(B), as applicable. have sufficient size to permit ready installation or withdrawal of (A) 1000 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Wire bending space for the conductors employed without damage to the conductors or to conductors operating at 1000 volts or less shall be provided in their insulation. They shall comply with this part. accordance with the requirements of 314.28.

Exception: Where electrical enclosures covered by Part V of (B) Over 1000 Volts, Nominal. Conductors operating at this article are part of an industrial wiring system operating over 1000 volts shall be provided with bending space in accor- under conditions of maintenance and supervision that ensure dance with 314.71(A) and (B), as applicable. that only qualified persons monitor and supervise the system, Exception: Where 314.71(B) applies, each row or column of ducts they shall be permitted to be designed and installed in accor- on one wall of the enclosure shall be calculated individually, and dance with appropriate engineering practice. If required by the the single row or column that provides the maximum distance shall authority having jurisdiction, design documentation shall be be used. provided. 110.75 Access to Manholes. 110.71 Strength. Manholes, vaults, and their means of access shall be designed under qualified engineering supervision and (A) Dimensions. Rectangular access openings shall not be shall withstand all loads likely to be imposed on the structures.

less than 650 mm × 550 mm (26 in. × 22 in.). Round access openings in a manhole shall be not less than 650 mm (26 in.) in Informational Note: See ANSI C2-2007, National diameter. Electrical Safety Code, for additional information on 2022 California Electrical Code 70–55

110.76 ARTICLE 110 — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS Exception: A manhole that has a fixed ladder that does not 110.76 Access to Vaults and Tunnels. obstruct the opening or that contains only one or more of the fol- (A) Location. Access openings for personnel shall be lowing shall be permitted to reduce the minimum cover diameter located where they are not directly above electrical equipment to 600 mm (2 ft): or conductors in the enclosure. Other openings shall be permit- (1) Optical fiber cables as covered in Article 770 ted over equipment to facilitate installation, maintenance, or (2) Power-limited fire alarm circuits supplied in accordance replacement of equipment. with 760.121 (B) Locks. In addition to compliance with the requirements (3) Class 2 or Class 3 remote-control and signaling circuits, of 110.34, if applicable, access openings for personnel shall be or both, supplied in accordance with 725.121 arranged such that a person on the inside can exit when the (B) Obstructions.

Manhole openings shall be free of protru- access door is locked from the outside, or in the case of nor- sions that could injure personnel or prevent ready egress. mally locking by padlock, the locking arrangement shall be such that the padlock can be closed on the locking system to prevent (C) Location. Manhole openings for personnel shall be locking from the outside. located where they are not directly above electrical equipment or conductors in the enclosure. Where this is not practicable, 110.77 Ventilation. Where manholes, tunnels, and vaults have either a protective barrier or a fixed ladder shall be provided. communicating openings into enclosed areas used by the public, ventilation to open air shall be provided wherever practicable. (D) Covers. Covers shall be over 45 kg (100 lb) or otherwise designed to require the use of tools to open. They shall be 110.78 Guarding. Where conductors or equipment, or both, designed or restrained so they cannot fall into the manhole or could be contacted by objects falling or being pushed through

protrude sufficiently to contact electrical conductors or equip- a ventilating grating, both conductors and live parts shall be ment within the manhole. protected in accordance with the requirements of 110.27(A)(2) or 110.31(B)(1), depending on the voltage. (E) Marking. Manhole covers shall have an identifying mark or logo that prominently indicates their function, such 110.79 Fixed Ladders. Fixed ladders shall be corrosion as “electric.” resistant. 70–56 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 2 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 200 — USE AND IDENTIFICATION OF GROUNDED CONDUCTORS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended X sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed X below Article/Section 210.12(A) X 210.50(D), (E) X ARTICLE 215 — FEEDERS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5

Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended X sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section Table 220.42 X 2022 California Electrical Code 70–57

CHAPTER 2 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 225 — OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 242 — OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X

Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 70–58 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 2 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 2022 California Electrical Code 70–59

ARTICLE 200 — USE AND IDENTIFICATION OF GROUNDED CONDUCTORS CHAPTER 2 Chapter 2 Wiring and Protection (B) Multiple Circuits. Where more than one neutral conduc- ARTICLE 200 tor associated with different circuits is in an enclosure, grounded Use and Identification of circuit conductors of each circuit shall be identified or grouped to correspond with the ungrounded circuit conductor(s) by wire Grounded Conductors markers, cable ties, or similar means in at least one location within the enclosure. 200.1 Scope. This article provides requirements for the Exception No. 1: The requirement for grouping or identifying following: shall not apply if the branch-circuit or feeder conductors enter (1) Identification of terminals from a cable or a raceway unique to the circuit that makes the (2) Grounded conductors in premises wiring systems grouping obvious. (3) Identification of grounded conductors Exception No. 2: The requirement for grouping or identifying Informational Note: See Article 100 for definitions of shall not apply where branch-circuit conductors pass through a

Grounded Conductor, Equipment Grounding Conductor, box or conduit body without a loop as described in 314.16(B)(1) and Grounding Electrode Conductor. or without a splice or termination. 200.2 General. Grounded conductors shall comply with 200.6 Means of Identifying Grounded Conductors. 200.2(A) and (B). ∆ (A) Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. An insulated grounded conduc- (A) Insulation. The grounded conductor, if insulated, shall have tor of 6 AWG or smaller shall be identified by one of the fol- insulation that is (1) suitable, other than color, for any ungrounded lowing means: conductor of the same circuit for systems of 1000 volts or less, (1) The insulated conductor shall have a continuous white or impedance grounded neutral systems of over 1000 volts, or outer finish. (2) rated not less than 600 volts for solidly grounded neutral (2) The insulated conductor shall have a continuous gray outer systems of over 1000 volts as described in 250.184(A). finish. (B) Continuity. The continuity of a grounded conductor shall (3) The insulated conductor shall have three continuous white

not depend on a connection to a metallic enclosure, raceway, or or gray stripes along the conductor’s entire length on other cable armor. than green insulation. (4) Insulated conductors that have their outer covering fin- Informational Note: See 300.13(B) for the continuity of ished to show a white or gray color but have colored tracer grounded conductors used in multiwire branch circuits. threads in the braid identifying the source of manufacture ∆ 200.3 Connection to Grounded System. Grounded conduc- are acceptable means of identification. tors of premises wiring systems shall be electrically connected (5) A single-conductor, sunlight-resistant, outdoor-rated cable to the supply system grounded conductor to ensure a common, used as a solidly grounded conductor in photovoltaic continuous grounded system. For the purpose of this section, power systems, as permitted by 690.41, shall be identi- electrically connected shall mean making a direct electrical fied at the time of installation by markings at terminations

connection capable of carrying current, as distinguished from in accordance with 200.6(A)(1) through (A)(4). induced currents. (6) The grounded conductor of a mineral-insulated, metal- sheathed cable (Type MI) shall be identified at the time of Exception: Listed interactive inverters identified for use in installation by distinctive marking at its terminations. distributed resource generation systems such as photovoltaic (7) Fixture wire shall comply with the requirements for and fuel cell power systems shall be permitted to be connected grounded conductor identification as specified in 402.8. to premises wiring without a grounded conductor if the con- (8) For aerial cable, the identification shall comply with nected premises wiring or utility system includes a grounded one of the methods in 200.6(A)(1) through (A)(5), or by conductor. means of a ridge located on the exterior of the cable so as 200.4 Neutral Conductors. Neutral conductors shall be to identify it. installed in accordance with 200.4(A) and (B). (B) Sizes 4 AWG or Larger. An insulated grounded conduc- (A) Installation.

Neutral conductors shall not be used for tor 4 AWG or larger shall be identified by one of the following more than one branch circuit, for more than one multiwire means: branch circuit, or for more than one set of ungrounded feeder (1) A continuous white outer finish. conductors unless specifically permitted elsewhere in this (2) A continuous gray outer finish. Code. (3) Three continuous white or gray stripes along the conduc- tor’s entire length on other than green insulation. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–61

200.7 ARTICLE 200 — USE AND IDENTIFICATION OF GROUNDED CONDUCTORS (4) At the time of installation, by a distinctive white or gray (1) A conductor with continuous white or gray covering marking at its terminations. This marking shall encircle the (2) A conductor with three continuous white or gray stripes on conductor or insulation. other than green insulation (3) A marking of white or gray color at the termination (C) Flexible Cords. An insulated conductor that is intended for use as a grounded conductor, where contained within a flexible (B) Circuits of Less Than 50 Volts. A conductor with white or cord, shall be identified by a white or gray outer finish or by gray color insulation or three continuous white stripes or having methods permitted by 400.22. a marking of white or gray at the termination for circuits of less than 50 volts shall be required to be grounded only as required (D) Grounded Conductors of Different Systems. Where by 250.20(A). grounded conductors of different systems are installed in the same

raceway, cable, box, auxiliary gutter, or other type of enclosure, (C) Circuits of 50 Volts or More. The use of insulation that is each grounded conductor shall be identified by system. Identifi- white or gray or that has three continuous white or gray stripes cation that distinguishes each system grounded conductor shall for other than a grounded conductor for circuits of 50 volts or be permitted by one of the following means: more shall be permitted only as in (1) and (2). (1) One system grounded conductor shall have an outer cover- (1) If part of a cable assembly that has the insulation permanently ing conforming to 200.6(A) or (B). reidentified to indicate its use as an ungrounded conductor by (2) The grounded conductor(s) of other systems shall have a dif- marking tape, painting, or other effective means at its termina- ferent outer covering conforming to 200.6(A) or 200.6(B) tion and at each location where the conductor is visible and or by an outer covering of white or gray with a readily dis- accessible. Identification shall encircle the insulation and shall

tinguishable colored stripe other than green running along be a color other than white, gray, or green. If used for single- the insulation. pole, 3-way or 4-way switch loops, the reidentified conduc- (3) Other and different means of identification allowed by tor with white or gray insulation or three continuous white or 200.6(A) or (B) shall distinguish each system grounded gray stripes shall be used only for the supply to the switch, but conductor. not as a return conductor from the switch to the outlet. (2) A flexible cord having one conductor identified by a white The means of identification shall be documented in a man- or gray outer finish or three continuous white or gray ner that is readily available or shall be permanently posted stripes, or by any other means permitted by 400.22, that is where the conductors of different systems originate. used for connecting an appliance or equipment permitted (E) Grounded Conductors of Multiconductor Cables. The by 400.10. This shall apply to flexible cords connected to

insulated grounded conductor(s) in a multiconductor cable shall outlets whether or not the outlet is supplied by a circuit that be identified by a continuous white or gray outer finish or by has a grounded conductor. three continuous white or gray stripes on other than green insu- Informational Note: The color gray may have been used lation along its entire length. For conductors that are 4 AWG or in the past as an ungrounded conductor. Care should be larger in cables, identification of the grounded conductor shall taken when working on existing systems. be permitted to comply with 200.6(B). For multiconductor flat cable with conductors that are 4 AWG or larger, an external 200.9 Means of Identification of Terminals. In devices or ridge shall be permitted to identify the grounded conductor. utilization equipment with polarized connections, identification of terminals to which a grounded conductor is to be connected Exception No. 1: Conductors within multiconductor cables shall be substantially white or silver in color. The identification

shall be permitted to be re-identified at their terminations at the of other terminals shall be of a readily distinguishable different time of installation by a distinctive white or gray marking or color. other equally effective means. Exception: Where the conditions of maintenance and supervi- Exception No. 2: The grounded conductor of a multiconduc- sion ensure that only qualified persons service the installations, tor varnished-cloth-insulated cable shall be permitted to be terminals for grounded conductors shall be permitted to be per- identified at its terminations at the time of installation by a dis- manently identified at the time of installation by a distinctive tinctive white marking or other equally effective means. white marking or other equally effective means. Informational Note: The color gray may have been used 200.10 Identification of Terminals. in the past as an ungrounded conductor. Care should be taken when working on existing systems. (A) Device Terminals. All devices, excluding panelboards, provided with terminals for the attachment of conductors and

200.7 Use of Insulation of a White or Gray Color or with intended for connection to more than one side of the circuit Three Continuous White or Gray Stripes. shall have terminals properly marked for identification, unless (A) General. The following shall be used only for the grounded the electrical connection of the terminal intended to be con- circuit conductor, unless otherwise permitted in 200.7(B) and (C): nected to the grounded conductor is clearly evident. 70–62 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS 210.4 Exception: Terminal identification shall not be required for Table 210.3 Specific-Purpose Branch Circuits devices that have a normal current rating of over 30 amperes, other than polarized attachment plugs and polarized receptacles Equipment Article Section for attachment plugs as required in 200.10(B). Air-conditioning and refrigerating 440.6, 440.31, (B) Receptacles, Plugs, and Connectors. Receptacles, polarized equipment 440.32 attachment plugs, and cord connectors for plugs and polarized Busways 368.17 plugs shall have the terminal intended for connection to the Central heating equipment other 422.12 than fixed electric space-heating grounded conductor identified as follows: equipment (1) Identification shall be by a metal or metal coating that is Fixed electric heating equipment 427.4 for pipelines and vessels substantially white or silver in color or by the word “white” Fixed electric space-heating 424.3 or the letter “W” located adjacent to the identified terminal. equipment (2) If the terminal is not visible, the conductor entrance hole

Fixed outdoor electrical deicing and 426.4 for the connection shall be colored white or marked with snow-melting equipment the word “white” or the letter “W.” Infrared lamp industrial heating 422.48, 424.3 equipment Informational Note: See 250.126 for identification of Motors, motor circuits, and 430 wiring device equipment grounding conductor terminals. controllers Switchboards and panelboards 408.52 (C) Screw Shells. For devices with screw shells, the terminal for the grounded conductor shall be the one connected to the screw shell. 210.4 Multiwire Branch Circuits. (D) Screw Shell Devices with Leads. For screw shell devices with attached leads, the conductor attached to the screw shell (A) General. Branch circuits recognized by this article shall be shall have a white or gray finish. The outer finish of the other permitted as multiwire circuits. A multiwire circuit shall conductor shall be of a solid color that will not be confused with be permitted to be considered as multiple circuits. All conduc- the white or gray finish used to identify the grounded conductor.

tors of a multiwire branch circuit shall originate from the same panelboard or similar distribution equipment. Informational Note: The color gray may have been used in the past as an ungrounded conductor. Care should be Informational Note No. 1: A 3-phase, 4-wire, wye-con- taken when working on existing systems. nected power system used to supply power to nonlinear loads may necessitate that the power system design allow (E) Appliances. Appliances that have a single-pole switch or a for the possibility of high harmonic currents on the neu- single-pole overcurrent device in the line or any line-connected tral conductor. screw shell lampholders, and that are to be connected by (1) a permanent wiring method or (2) field-installed attachment Informational Note No. 2: See 300.13(B) for continuity plugs and cords with three or more wires (including the equip- of grounded conductors on multiwire circuits. ment grounding conductor), shall have means to identify the (B) Disconnecting Means. Each multiwire branch circuit shall terminal for the grounded circuit conductor (if any).

be provided with a means that will simultaneously disconnect 200.11 Polarity of Connections. No grounded conductor all ungrounded conductors at the point where the branch circuit shall be attached to any terminal or lead so as to reverse the des- originates. ignated polarity. Informational Note: See 240.15(B) for information on the use of single-pole circuit breakers as the disconnect- ing means. ARTICLE 210 (C) Line-to-Neutral Loads. Multiwire branch circuits shall Branch Circuits supply only line-to-neutral loads. Exception No. 1: A multiwire branch circuit that supplies only Part I. General Provisions one utilization equipment. 210.1 Scope. This article provides the general requirements Exception No. 2: Where all ungrounded conductors of the mul- for branch circuits. tiwire branch circuit are opened simultaneously by the branch- circuit overcurrent device. 210.3 Other Articles for Specific-Purpose Branch Circuits. Table 210.3 lists references for specific equipment and applica- (D) Grouping. The ungrounded and grounded circuit conduc-

tions not located in Chapters 5, 6, and 7 that amend or supple- tors of each multiwire branch circuit shall be grouped in accor- ment the requirements of this article. dance with 200.4(B). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–63

210.5 ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS 210.5 Identification for Branch Circuits. (a) Positive Polarity, Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. Where the positive polarity of a dc system does not serve as the connection (A) Grounded Conductor. The grounded conductor of a point for the grounded conductor, each positive ungrounded branch circuit shall be identified in accordance with 200.6. conductor shall be identified by one of the following means: (B) Equipment Grounding Conductor. The equipment gro- (1) A continuous red outer finish unding conductor shall be identified in accordance with 250.119. (2) A continuous red stripe durably marked along the conduc- (C) Identification of Ungrounded Conductors. Ungrounded tor’s entire length on insulation of a color other than green, conductors shall be identified in accordance with 210.5(C)(1) white, gray, or black or (2), as applicable. (3) Imprinted plus signs (+) or the word POSITIVE or POS (1) Branch Circuits Supplied from More Than One Nominal durably marked on insulation of a color other than green, Voltage System.

Where the premises wiring system has branch white, gray, or black and repeated at intervals not exceed- circuits supplied from more than one nominal voltage system, ing 610 mm (24 in.) in accordance with 310.8(B) each ungrounded conductor of a branch circuit shall be identi- (4) An approved permanent marking means such as sleeving or fied by phase or line and by system voltage class at all termina- shrink-tubing that is suitable for the conductor size, at all tion, connection, and splice points in compliance with 210.5(C) termination, connection, and splice points, with imprinted (1)(a) and (b). Different systems within the same premises that plus signs (+) or the word POSITIVE or POS durably have the same system voltage class shall be permitted to use the marked on insulation of a color other than green, white, same identification. gray, or black (a) Means of Identification. The means of identification (b) Negative Polarity, Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. Where the

shall be permitted to be by separate color coding, marking tape, negative polarity of a dc system does not serve as the connection tagging, or other approved means. point for the grounded conductor, each negative ungrounded (b) Posting of Identification Means. The method utilized conductor shall be identified by one of the following means: for conductors originating within each branch-circuit panel- (1) A continuous black outer finish board or similar branch-circuit distribution equipment shall (2) A continuous black stripe durably marked along the con- be documented in a manner that is readily available or shall be ductor’s entire length on insulation of a color other than permanently posted at each branch-circuit panelboard or simi- green, white, gray, or red lar branch-circuit distribution equipment. The label shall be of (3) Imprinted minus signs (–) or the word NEGATIVE or NEG sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved and durably marked on insulation of a color other than green, shall not be handwritten.

white, gray, or red and repeated at intervals not exceeding Exception: In existing installations where a voltage system(s) 610 mm (24 in.) in accordance with 310.8(B) already exists and a different voltage system is being added, it (4) An approved permanent marking means such as sleeving shall be permissible to mark only the new system voltage. Exist- or shrink-tubing that is suitable for the conductor size, at all ing unidentified systems shall not be required to be identified termination, connection, and splice points, with imprinted at each termination, connection, and splice point in compliance minus signs (–) or the word NEGATIVE or NEG durably with 210.5(C)(1)(a) and (b). Labeling shall be required at each marked on insulation of a color other than green, white, voltage system distribution equipment to identify that only one gray, or red voltage system has been marked for a new system(s). The new system label(s) shall include the words “other unidentified sys- 210.6 Branch-Circuit Voltage Limitations. The nominal

tems exist on the premises.” voltage of branch circuits shall not exceed the values permitted by 210.6(A) through (E). (2) Branch Circuits Supplied from Direct-Current Systems. Where a branch circuit is supplied from a dc system operating (A) Occupancy Limitation. In dwelling units and guest rooms at more than 60 volts, each ungrounded conductor of 4 AWG or guest suites of hotels, motels, and similar occupancies, the or larger shall be identified by polarity at all termination, con- voltage shall not exceed 120 volts, nominal, between conductors nection, and splice points by marking tape, tagging, or other that supply the terminals of the following: approved means; each ungrounded conductor of 6 AWG or (1) Luminaires smaller shall be identified by polarity at all termination, con- (2) Cord-and-plug-connected loads 1440 volt-amperes, nom- nection, and splice points in compliance with 210.5(C)(2)(a) inal, or less or less than 1⁄4 hp and (b). The identification methods utilized for conductors (B) 120 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits not exceeding

originating within each branch-circuit panelboard or similar 120 volts, nominal, between conductors shall be permitted to branch-circuit distribution equipment shall be documented in a supply the following: manner that is readily available or shall be permanently posted at each branch-circuit panelboard or similar branch-circuit dis- (1) The terminals of lampholders applied within their voltage tribution equipment. ratings 70–64 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS 210.8 (2) Auxiliary equipment of electric-discharge lamps Informational Note: See 410.137 for auxiliary equip- ment limitations. Informational Note: See 410.137 for auxiliary equip- ment limitations. (2) Cord-and-plug-connected or permanently connected utili- zation equipment other than luminaires (3) Cord-and-plug-connected or permanently connected utili- (3) Luminaires powered from direct-current systems where zation equipment either of the following apply: (C) 277 Volts to Ground. Circuits exceeding 120 volts, a. The luminaire contains a listed, dc-rated ballast that nominal, between conductors but not exceeding 277 volts, nom- provides isolation between the dc power source and the inal, to ground shall be permitted to supply cord-and-plug- lamp circuit and protection from electric shock when connected or permanently connected utilization equipment, or changing lamps. the following types of listed luminaires: b. The luminaire contains a listed, dc-rated ballast and has

(1) Electric-discharge luminaires with integral ballasts no provision for changing lamps. (2) LED luminaires with LED drivers between the branch cir- Exception No. 1 to (B), (C), and (D): For lampholders of infra- cuit and the lampholders red industrial heating appliances as provided in 425.14. (3) Incandescent or LED luminaires, equipped with medium- base or smaller screw shell lampholders, where the lamp- Exception No. 2 to (B), (C), and (D): For railway properties as holders are supplied at 120 volts or less from the output of described in 110.19. a stepdown autotransformer, LED driver, or other type of (E) Over 600 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits exceed- power supply that is an integral component of the luminaire ing 600 volts, nominal, between conductors shall be permitted to supply utilization equipment in installations where conditions Informational Note: See 410.90 for requirements regard- of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified per- ing the connection of screw shell lampholders to grounded sons service the installation. conductors.

210.7 Multiple Branch Circuits. Where two or more branch (4) Luminaires equipped with mogul-base screw shell circuits supply devices or equipment on the same yoke or mount- lampholders ing strap, a means to simultaneously disconnect the ungrounded (5) Luminaires equipped with lampholders, other than the screw supply conductors shall be provided at the point at which the shell type, when used within their voltage ratings of their branch circuits originate. lampholders (6) Luminaires without lampholders ∆ 210.8 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Informational Note: Luminaires with nonserviceable LEDs Personnel. Ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for per- are examples of luminaires without lampholders. sonnel shall be provided as required in 210.8(A) through (F). The ground-fault circuit interrupter shall be installed in a read- (7) Auxiliary equipment of electric-discharge or LED-type ily accessible location. lamps Informational Note No. 1: See 215.9 for ground-fault Informational Note: See 410.137 for auxiliary equip-

circuit-interrupter protection for personnel on feeders. ment limitations. Informational Note No. 2: See 422.5(A) for GFCI (8) Luminaires converted with listed retrofit kits incorporating requirements for appliances. integral LED light sources or accepting LED lamps that also Informational Note No. 3: See 555.9 for GFCI require- conforms with 210.6(C)(1), (C)(2), (C)(3), (C)(4), or (C)(5) ments for boat hoists. (D) 600 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits exceeding Informational Note No. 4: Additional GFCI require- 277 volts, nominal, to ground and not exceeding 600 volts, ments for specific circuits and equipment are contained nominal, between conductors shall be permitted to supply the in Chapters 4, 5, and 6. following: For the purposes of this section, when determining the dis- (1) The auxiliary equipment of electric-discharge lamps mounted tance from receptacles the distance shall be measured as the in permanently installed luminaires where the luminaires shortest path the supply cord of an appliance connected to the are mounted in accordance with one of the following:

receptacle would follow without piercing a floor, wall, ceiling, a. Not less than a height of 6.7 m (22 ft) on poles or similar or fixed barrier, or the shortest path without passing through a structures for the illumination of outdoor areas such window. as highways, roads, bridges, athletic fields, or parking ∆ (A) Dwelling Units. All 125-volt through 250-volt receptacles lots installed in the locations specified in 210.8(A)(1) through (A) b. Not less than a height of 5.5 m (18 ft) on other structures (11) and supplied by single-phase branch circuits rated 150 volts such as tunnels 2022 California Electrical Code 70–65

210.8 ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS or less to ground shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter pro- (3) Rooftops tection for personnel. Exception: Receptacles on rooftops shall not be required to be (1) Bathrooms readily accessible other than from the rooftop. (2) Garages and also accessory buildings that have a floor (4) Outdoors located at or below grade level not intended as habitable rooms and limited to storage areas, work areas, and areas Exception No. 1 to (3) and (4): Receptacles that are not read- of similar use ily accessible and are supplied by a branch circuit dedicated to (3) Outdoors electric snow-melting, deicing, or pipeline and vessel heating equipment shall be permitted to be installed in accordance with Exception to (3): Receptacles that are not readily accessible and 426.28 or 427.22, as applicable. are supplied by a branch circuit dedicated to electric snow-melt- ing, deicing, or pipeline and vessel heating equipment shall be Exception No. 2 to (4):In industrial establishments only,

permitted to be installed in accordance with 426.28 or 427.22, where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure as applicable. that only qualified personnel are involved, an assured equip- ment grounding conductor program as specified in 590.6(B)(2) (4) Crawl spaces — at or below grade level shall be permitted for only those receptacle outlets used to sup- (5) Basements ply equipment that would create a greater hazard if power is Exception to (5): A receptacle supplying only a permanently interrupted or having a design that is not compatible with GFCI installed fire alarm or burglar alarm system shall not be required protection. to have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection. (5) Sinks — where receptacles are installed within 1.8 m Informational Note: See 760.41(B) and 760.121(B) for (6 ft) from the top inside edge of the bowl of the sink power supply requirements for fire alarm systems. Exception No. 1 to (5): In industrial laboratories, receptacles Receptacles installed under the exception to 210.8(A)(5) used to supply equipment where removal of power would intro-

shall not be considered as meeting the requirements of duce a greater hazard shall be permitted to be installed without 210.52(G). GFCI protection. (6) Kitchens — where the receptacles are installed to serve the Exception No. 2 to (5): Receptacles located in patient bed loca- countertop surfaces tions of Category 2 (general care) or Category 1 (critical care) (7) Sinks — where receptacles are installed within 1.8 m spaces of health care facilities shall be permitted to comply with (6 ft) from the top inside edge of the bowl of the sink 517.21. (8) Boathouses (9) Bathtubs or shower stalls — where receptacles are (6) Indoor damp and wet locations installed within 1.8 m (6 ft) of the outside edge of the (7) Locker rooms with associated showering facilities bathtub or shower stall (8) Garages, accessory buildings, service bays, and similar (10) Laundry areas areas other than vehicle exhibition halls and showrooms (9) Crawl spaces — at or below grade level Exception to (1) through (3), (5) through (8), and (10): Listed (10) Unfinished areas of basements

locking support and mounting receptacles utilized in combina- tion with compatible attachment fittings installed for the pur- Exception to (1) through (5), (8), and (10): Listed locking sup- pose of serving a ceiling luminaire or ceiling fan shall not be port and mounting receptacles utilized in combination with required to be ground-fault circuit-interrupter protected. If a compatible attachment fittings installed for the purpose of general-purpose convenience receptacle is integral to the ceil- serving a ceiling luminaire or ceiling fan shall not be required ing luminaire or ceiling fan, GFCI protection shall be provided. to be ground-fault circuit-interrupter protected. If a general-pur- pose convenience receptacle is integral to the ceiling luminaire (11) Indoor damp and wet locations or ceiling fan, GFCI protection shall be provided. ∆ (B) Other Than Dwelling Units. All 125-volt through 250- (11) Laundry areas volt receptacles supplied by single-phase branch circuits rated (12) Bathtubs and shower stalls — where receptacles are

150 volts or less to ground, 50 amperes or less, and all recep- installed within 1.8 m (6 ft) of the outside edge of the tacles supplied by three-phase branch circuits rated 150 volts bathtub or shower stall or less to ground, 100 amperes or less, installed in the locations • specified in 210.8(B)(1) through (B)(12) shall have ground- (C) Crawl Space Lighting Outlets. GFCI protection shall be fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel. provided for lighting outlets not exceeding 120 volts installed in crawl spaces. (1) Bathrooms N (2) Kitchens or areas with a sink and permanent provisions (D) Specific Appliances. Unless GFCI protection is provided for either food preparation or cooking in accordance with 422.5(B)(3) through (B)(5), the outlets 70–66 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS 210.12 supplying the appliances specified in 422.5(A) shall have GFCI be provided to supply the loads calculated in accordance with protection in accordance with 422.5(B)(1) or (B)(2). 220.10. In addition, branch circuits shall be provided for spe- cific loads not covered by 220.10 where required elsewhere in Where the appliance is a vending machine as specified in this Code and for dwelling unit loads as specified in 210.11(C). 422.5(A)(5) and GFCI protection is not provided in accordance with 422.5(B)(3) or (B)(4), branch circuits supplying vend- (A) Number of Branch Circuits. The minimum number of ing machines shall have GFCI protection in accordance with branch circuits shall be determined from the total calculated 422.5(B)(1) or (B)(2). load and the size or rating of the circuits used. In all instal- lations, the number of circuits shall be sufficient to supply the N (E) Equipment Requiring Servicing. GFCI protection shall load served. In no case shall the load on any circuit exceed the be provided for the receptacles required by 210.63.

maximum specified by 220.18. N (F) Outdoor Outlets. All outdoor outlets for dwellings, (B) Load Evenly Proportioned Among Branch Circuits. other than those covered in 210.8(A)(3), Exception to (3), that Where the load is calculated on the basis of volt-amperes per are supplied by single-phase branch circuits rated 150 volts square meter or per square foot, the wiring system up to and to ground or less, 50 amperes or less, shall have ground-fault including the branch-circuit panelboard(s) shall be provided to circuit- interrupter protection for personnel. serve not less than the calculated load. This load shall be evenly Exception: Ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection shall not be proportioned among multioutlet branch circuits within the required on lighting outlets other than those covered in 210.8(C). panelboard(s). Branch-circuit overcurrent devices and circuits 210.9 Circuits Derived from Autotransformers. Branch shall be required to be installed only to serve the connected load. circuits shall not be derived from autotransformers unless the (C) Dwelling Units.

circuit supplied has a grounded conductor that is electrically (1) Small-Appliance Branch Circuits. In addition to the connected to a grounded conductor of the system supplying the number of branch circuits required by other parts of this section, autotransformer. two or more 20-ampere small-appliance branch circuits shall Exception No. 1: An autotransformer shall be permitted with- be provided for all receptacle outlets specified by 210.52(B). out the connection to a grounded conductor where transforming (2) Laundry Branch Circuits. In addition to the number of from a nominal 208 volts to a nominal 240-volt supply or simi- branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least larly from 240 volts to 208 volts. one additional 20-ampere branch circuit shall be provided to Exception No. 2: In industrial occupancies, where conditions supply the laundry receptacle outlet(s) required by 210.52(F). of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified per- This circuit shall have no other outlets. sons service the installation, autotransformers shall be permit-

∆ (3) Bathroom Branch Circuits. In addition to the number ted to supply nominal 600-volt loads from nominal 480-volt of branch circuits required by other parts of this section, one or systems, and 480-volt loads from nominal 600-volt systems, more 120-volt, 20-ampere branch circuit shall be provided to without the connection to a similar grounded conductor. supply bathroom(s) receptacle outlet(s) required by 210.52(D) 210.10 Ungrounded Conductors Tapped from Grounded and any countertop and similar work surface receptacle outlets. Systems. Two-wire dc circuits and ac circuits of two or more Such circuits shall have no other outlets. ungrounded conductors shall be permitted to be tapped from Exception: Where the 20-ampere circuit supplies a single the ungrounded conductors of circuits that have a grounded bathroom, outlets for other equipment within the same bath- neutral conductor. Switching devices in each tapped circuit room shall be permitted to be supplied in accordance with shall have a pole in each ungrounded conductor. All poles of 210.23(A)(1) and (A)(2).

multipole switching devices shall manually switch together where such switching devices also serve as a disconnecting (4) Garage Branch Circuits. In addition to the number of means as required by the following: branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one 120-volt, 20-ampere branch circuit shall be installed to sup- (1) 410.93 for double-pole switched lampholders ply receptacle outlets required by 210.52(G)(1) for attached (2) 410.104(B) for electric-discharge lamp auxiliary equip- garages and in detached garages with electric power. This cir- ment switching devices cuit shall have no other outlets. (3) 422.31(B) for an appliance (4) 424.20 for a fixed electric space-heating unit Exception: This circuit shall be permitted to supply readily (5) 426.51 for electric deicing and snow-melting equipment accessible outdoor receptacle outlets. (6) 430.85 for a motor controller 210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. Arc-fault (7) 430.103 for a motor circuit-interrupter protection shall be provided as required in 210.11 Branch Circuits Required.

Branch circuits for lighting 210.12(A), (B), (C), and (D). The arc-fault circuit interrupter and for appliances, including motor-operated appliances, shall shall be installed in a readily accessible location. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–67

210.12 ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS ∆ (A) Dwelling Units. All 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and and the first outlet, it shall be permitted to install a listed 20-ampere branch circuits supplying outlets or devices installed outlet branch-circuit-type AFCI at the first outlet to provide in dwelling unit kitchens, family rooms, dining rooms, living rooms, protection for the remaining portion of the branch circuit. parlors, libraries, dens, bedrooms, sunrooms, recreation rooms, (6) Where a listed metal or nonmetallic conduit or tubing or closets, hallways, laundry areas, or similar rooms or areas shall Type MC cable is encased in not less than 50 mm (2 in.) be protected by any of the means described in 210.12(A)(1) of concrete for the portion of the branch circuit between through (6): the branch-circuit overcurrent device and the first outlet, it shall be permitted to install a listed outlet branch-circuit- (1) A listed combination-type arc-fault circuit interrupter type AFCI at the first outlet to provide protection for the installed to provide protection of the entire branch circuit

remaining portion of the branch circuit. (2) A listed branch/feeder-type AFCI installed at the origin of the branch-circuit in combination with a listed outlet Exception: AFCI protection shall not be required for an indi- branch-circuit-type arc-fault circuit interrupter installed vidual branch circuit supplying a fire alarm system installed in at the first outlet box on the branch circuit. The first outlet accordance with 760.41(B) or 760.121(B). The branch circuit box in the branch circuit shall be marked to indicate that shall be installed in a metal raceway, metal auxiliary gutter, it is the first outlet of the circuit. steel-armored cable, Type MC or Type AC, meeting the appli- (3) A listed supplemental arc protection circuit breaker installed cable requirements of 250.118, with metal boxes, conduit bod- at the origin of the branch circuit in combination with a ies, and enclosures. listed outlet branch-circuit-type arc-fault circuit interrupter Informational Note No. 1:For information on installed at the first outlet box on the branch circuit where

combination-type and branch/feeder-type arc-fault cir- all of the following conditions are met: cuit interrupters, see UL 1699-2011, Standard for Arc- a. The branch-circuit wiring shall be continuous from the Fault Circuit Interrupters. For information on outlet branch-circuit overcurrent device to the outlet branch- branch-circuit-type arc-fault circuit interrupters, see circuit arc-fault circuit interrupter. UL Subject 1699A, Outline of Investigation for Outlet b. The maximum length of the branch-circuit wiring from Branch Circuit Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. the branch-circuit overcurrent device to the first outlet C Informational Note No. 2: See 29.6.3(5) of NFPA 72-2016, shall not exceed 15.2 m (50 ft) for a 14 AWG conduc- A National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, for information tor or 21.3 m (70 ft) for a 12 AWG conductor. related to secondary power-supply requirements for smoke c. The first outlet box in the branch circuit shall be marked alarms installed in dwelling units. to indicate that it is the first outlet of the circuit. Informational Note No.

3: See 760.41(B) and 760.121(B) (4) A listed outlet branch-circuit-type arc-fault circuit inter- for power-supply requirements for fire alarm systems. rupter installed at the first outlet on the branch circuit in (B) Dormitory Units. All 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and combination with a listed branch-circuit overcurrent pro- 20-ampere branch circuits supplying outlets and devices installed tective device where all of the following conditions are in dormitory unit bedrooms, living rooms, hallways, closets, bath- met: rooms, and similar rooms shall be protected by any of the means a. The branch-circuit wiring shall be continuous from the described in 210.12(A)(1) through (6). branch-circuit overcurrent device to the outlet branch- (C) Guest Rooms, Guest Suites, and Patient Sleeping Rooms circuit arc-fault circuit interrupter. in Nursing Homes and Limited-Care Facilities. All 120- b. The maximum length of the branch-circuit wiring from volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere branch circuits supply- the branch-circuit overcurrent device to the first outlet

ing outlets and devices installed in guest rooms and guest suites shall not exceed 15.2 m (50 ft) for a 14 AWG conduc- of hotels and motels and patient sleeping rooms in nursing tor or 21.3 m (70 ft) for a 12 AWG conductor. homes and limited-care facilities shall be protected by any of c. The first outlet box in the branch circuit shall be marked the means described in 210.12(A)(1) through (6). to indicate that it is the first outlet of the circuit. d. The combination of the branch-circuit overcurrent device (D) Branch Circuit Extensions or Modifications — Dwell- and outlet branch-circuit AFCI shall be identified as ing Units, Dormitory Units, and Guest Rooms and Guest meeting the requirements for a system combination-type Suites. Where branch circuit wiring for any of the areas AFCI and shall be listed as such. specified in 210.12(A), (B), or (C) is modified, replaced, or extended, the branch circuit shall be protected by one of the (5) If metal raceway, metal wireways, metal auxiliary gutters, or following: Type MC, or Type AC cable meeting the applicable require-

ments of 250.118, with metal boxes, metal conduit bodies, (1) By any of the means described in 210.12(A)(1) through (A)(6) and metal enclosures are installed for the portion of the (2) A listed outlet branch-circuit-type AFCI located at the first branch circuit between the branch-circuit overcurrent device receptacle outlet of the existing branch circuit 70–68 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS 210.19 Exception: AFCI protection shall not be required where the Informational Note No. 2: See Part II of Article 430 for extension of the existing branch circuit conductors is not more minimum rating of motor branch-circuit conductors. than 1.8 m (6 ft) and does not include any additional outlets or Informational Note No. 3: Conductors for branch cir- devices, other than splicing devices. This measurement shall not cuits as defined in Article 100, sized to prevent a voltage include the conductors inside an enclosure, cabinet, or junction drop exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, box. heating, and lighting loads, or combinations of such ∆ 210.13 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Each loads, and where the maximum total voltage drop on branch-circuit disconnect rated 1000 A or more and installed on both feeders and branch circuits to the farthest outlet does solidly grounded wye electrical systems of more than 150 volts not exceed 5 percent, provide reasonable efficiency of

to ground, but not exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase, shall be operation. See Informational Note No. 2 of 215.2(A)(1) provided with ground-fault protection of equipment in accor- for voltage drop on feeder conductors. dance with 230.95. ∆ (1) General. Branch-circuit conductors shall have an ampac- Informational Note: For buildings that contain health care ity not less than the larger of 210.19(A)(1)(a) or (A)(1)(b) and occupancies, see the requirements of 517.17. comply with 110.14(C) for equipment terminations. (a) Where a branch circuit supplies continuous loads or Exception No. 1: This section shall not apply to a disconnect- any combination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, the ing means for a continuous industrial process where a nonor- minimum branch-circuit conductor size shall have an ampac- derly shutdown will introduce additional or increased hazards. ity not less than the noncontinuous load plus 125 percent of the Exception No. 2: This section shall not apply if ground-fault continuous load in accordance with 310.14.

protection of equipment is provided on the supply side of the (b) The minimum branch-circuit conductor size shall have branch circuit and on the load side of any transformer supplying an ampacity not less than the maximum load to be served after the branch circuit. the application of any adjustment or correction factors in accor- dance with 310.15. N 210.15 Reconditioned Equipment. The following shall not be reconditioned: Exception No. 1 to (1)(a): If the assembly, including the overcurrent devices protecting the branch circuit(s), is listed (1) Equipment that provides ground-fault circuit-interrupter for operation at 100 percent of its rating, the ampacity of the protection for personnel branch-circuit conductors shall be permitted to be not less than (2) Equipment that provides arc-fault circuit-interrupter the sum of the continuous load plus the noncontinuous load in protection accordance with 110.14(C). (3) Equipment that provides ground-fault protection of equipment Exception No. 2 to (1)(a) and (1)(b): Where a portion of a

branch circuit is connected at both its supply and load ends 210.17 Guest Rooms and Guest Suites. Guest rooms and to separately installed pressure connections as covered in guest suites that are provided with permanent provisions for 110.14(C)(2), it shall be permitted to have an allowable ampac- cooking shall have branch circuits installed to meet the rules for ity, in accordance with 310.15(B), not less than the sum of the dwelling units. continuous load plus the noncontinuous load. No portion of a branch circuit installed under this exception shall extend into Part II. Branch-Circuit Ratings an enclosure containing either the branch-circuit supply or the 210.18 Rating. Branch circuits recognized by this article branch-circuit load terminations. shall be rated in accordance with the maximum permitted (2) Branch Circuits with More than One Receptacle. Con- ampere rating or setting of the overcurrent device. The rating ductors of branch circuits supplying more than one receptacle for for other than individual branch circuits shall be 15, 20, 30,

cord-and-plug-connected portable loads shall have an ampacity 40, and 50 amperes. Where conductors of higher ampacity are of not less than the rating of the branch circuit. used for any reason, the ampere rating or setting of the specified overcurrent device shall determine the circuit rating. ∆ (3) Household Ranges and Cooking Appliances. Branch- circuit conductors supplying household ranges, wall-mounted Exception: Multioutlet branch circuits greater than 50 amperes ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, and other household shall be permitted to supply nonlighting outlet loads on indus- cooking appliances shall have an ampacity not less than the rat- trial premises where conditions of maintenance and supervision ing of the branch circuit and not less than the maximum load to ensure that only qualified persons service the equipment. 3 be served. For ranges of 8 ⁄4 kW or more rating, the minimum 210.19 Conductors — Minimum Ampacity and Size. branch-circuit rating shall be 40 amperes. ∆ (A) Branch Circuits Not More Than 600 Volts. Exception No.

1: Conductors tapped from a branch circuit not Informational Note No. 1: See 310.14 for ampacity and exceeding 50 amperes supplying electric ranges, wall-mounted temperature limitations of conductors. electric ovens, and counter-mounted electric cooking units shall 2022 California Electrical Code 70–69

210.20 ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS have an ampacity of not less than 20 amperes and shall be suf- 210.20 Overcurrent Protection. Branch-circuit conductors and ficient for the load to be served. These tap conductors include any equipment shall be protected by overcurrent protective devices conductors that are a part of the leads supplied with the appliance that have a rating or setting that complies with 210.20(A) that are smaller than the branch-circuit conductors. The taps shall through (D). not be longer than necessary for servicing the appliance. (A) Continuous and Noncontinuous Loads. Where a branch Exception No. 2:The neutral conductor of a 3-wire branch circuit supplies continuous loads or any combination of con- circuit supplying a household electric range, a wall-mounted tinuous and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the overcur- oven, or a counter-mounted cooking unit shall be permitted to rent device shall not be less than the noncontinuous load plus be smaller than the ungrounded conductors where the maximum 125 percent of the continuous load. 3

demand of a range of 8 ⁄4 kW or more rating has been calculated Exception: Where the assembly, including the overcurrent according to Column C of Table 220.55, but such conductor devices protecting the branch circuit(s), is listed for operation shall have an ampacity of not less than 70 percent of the branch- at 100 percent of its rating, the ampere rating of the overcurrent circuit rating and shall not be smaller than 10 AWG. device shall be permitted to be not less than the sum of the con- (4) Other Loads. Branch-circuit conductors that supply loads tinuous load plus the noncontinuous load. other than those specified in 210.3 and other than cooking (B) Conductor Protection. Conductors shall be protected in appliances as covered in 210.19(A)(3) shall have an ampac- accordance with 240.4. Flexible cords and fixture wires shall be ity sufficient for the loads served and shall not be smaller than protected in accordance with 240.5. 14 AWG. (C) Equipment. The rating or setting of the overcurrent pro- Exception No. 1: Tap conductors shall have an ampacity suffi-

tective device shall not exceed that specified in the applicable cient for the load served. In addition, they shall have an ampacity articles referenced in Table 240.3 for equipment. of not less than 15 for circuits rated less than 40 amperes and not less than 20 for circuits rated at 40 or 50 amperes and only where (D) Outlet Devices. The rating or setting shall not exceed that these tap conductors supply any of the following loads: specified in 210.21 for outlet devices. (1) Individual lampholders or luminaires with taps extending 210.21 Outlet Devices. Outlet devices shall have an ampere not longer than 450 mm (18 in.) beyond any portion of the rating that is not less than the load to be served and shall comply lampholder or luminaire with 210.21(A) and (B). (2) A luminaire having tap conductors as provided in 410.117 (A) Lampholders. Where connected to a branch circuit hav- (3) Individual outlets, other than receptacle outlets, with taps ing a rating in excess of 20 amperes, lampholders shall be of the not over 450 mm (18 in.) long heavy-duty type.

A heavy-duty lampholder shall have a rating (4) Infrared lamp industrial heating appliances of not less than 660 watts if of the admedium type, or not less (5) Nonheating leads of deicing and snow-melting cables and than 750 watts if of any other type. mats (B) Receptacles. Exception No. 2: Fixture wires and flexible cords shall be per- (1) Single Receptacle on an Individual Branch Circuit. A mitted to be smaller than 14 AWG as permitted by 240.5. single receptacle installed on an individual branch circuit shall (B) Branch Circuits Over 600 Volts. The ampacity of con- have an ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. ductors shall be in accordance with 310.14 and 311.60, as appli- Exception No. 1: A receptacle installed in accordance with cable. Branch-circuit conductors over 600 volts shall be sized in 430.81(B). accordance with 210.19(B)(1) or (B)(2). Exception No. 2: A receptacle installed exclusively for the use (1) General. The ampacity of branch-circuit conductors of a cord-and-plug-connected arc welder shall be permitted to

shall not be less than 125 percent of the designed potential load have an ampere rating not less than the minimum branch-circuit of utilization equipment that will be operated simultaneously. conductor ampacity determined by 630.11(A) for arc welders. (2) Supervised Installations. For supervised installations, branch- circuit conductor sizing shall be permitted to be determined by Informational Note: See the definition of receptacle in qualified persons under engineering supervision. Supervised Article 100. installations are defined as those portions of a facility where (2) Total Cord-and-Plug-Connected Load. Where connected both of the following conditions are met: to a branch circuit supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, a (1) Conditions of design and installation are provided under receptacle shall not supply a total cord-and-plug-connected load engineering supervision. in excess of the maximum specified in Table 210.21(B)(2). (2) Qualified persons with documented training and experience (3) Receptacle Ratings. Where connected to a branch circuit

in over 600-volt systems provide maintenance, monitoring, supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, receptacle ratings and servicing of the system. shall conform to the values listed in Table 210.21(B)(3), or, 70–70 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS 210.50 Table 210.21(B)(2) Maximum Cord-and-Plug-Connected Load (1) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Equipment Not Fastened in to Receptacle Place. The rating of any one cord-and-plug-connected utiliza- tion equipment not fastened in place shall not exceed 80 percent Circuit Rating Receptacle Rating Maximum Load of the branch-circuit ampere rating. (Amperes) (Amperes) (Amperes) (2) Utilization Equipment Fastened in Place. The total rat- 15 or 20 15 12 ing of utilization equipment fastened in place, other than lumi- 20 20 16 naires, shall not exceed 50 percent of the branch-circuit ampere 30 30 24 rating where lighting units, cord-and-plug-connected utilization equipment not fastened in place, or both, are also supplied. (B) 30-Ampere Branch Circuits. A 30-ampere branch cir- Table 210.21(B)(3) Receptacle Ratings for Various Size Circuits cuit shall be permitted to supply fixed lighting units with heavy- duty lampholders in other than a dwelling unit(s) or utilization Circuit Rating (Amperes) Receptacle Rating (Amperes) equipment in any occupancy.

A rating of any one cord-and- plug-connected utilization equipment shall not exceed 80 per- 15 Not over 15 20 15 or 20 cent of the branch-circuit ampere rating. 30 30 (C) 40- and 50-Ampere Branch Circuits. A 40- or 50-ampere 40 40 or 50 branch circuit shall be permitted to supply cooking appliances 50 50 that are fastened in place in any occupancy. In other than dwell- ing units, such circuits shall be permitted to supply fixed light- ing units with heavy-duty lampholders, infrared heating units, where rated higher than 50 amperes, the receptacle rating shall or other utilization equipment. not be less than the branch-circuit rating. (D) Branch Circuits Larger Than 50 Amperes. Branch cir- Exception No. 1: Receptacles installed exclusively for the use of cuits larger than 50 amperes shall supply only nonlighting out- one or more cord-and-plug-connected arc welders shall be per- let loads. mitted to have ampere ratings not less than the minimum branch- circuit conductor ampacity determined by 630.11(A) or (B) for 210.24 Branch-Circuit Requirements — Summary. The arc welders.

requirements for circuits that have two or more outlets or recep- tacles, other than the receptacle circuits of 210.11(C)(1), (C)(2), Exception No. 2: The ampere rating of a receptacle installed and (C)(3), are summarized in Table 210.24. This table pro- for electric discharge lighting shall be permitted to be based on vides only a summary of minimum requirements. See 210.19, 410.62(C). 210.20, and 210.21 for the specific requirements applying to (4) Range Receptacle Rating. The ampere rating of a range branch circuits. receptacle shall be permitted to be based on a single range 210.25 Branch Circuits in Buildings with More Than One demand load as specified in Table 220.55. Occupancy. 210.22 Permissible Loads, Individual Branch Circuits. An (A) Dwelling Unit Branch Circuits. Branch circuits in each individual branch circuit shall be permitted to supply any load dwelling unit shall supply only loads within that dwelling unit for which it is rated, but in no case shall the load exceed the or loads associated only with that dwelling unit. branch-circuit ampere rating.

∆ (B) Common Area Branch Circuits. Branch circuits installed 210.23 Permissible Loads, Multiple-Outlet Branch Cir- for lighting, central alarm, signal, communications, or other cuits. In no case shall the load exceed the branch-circuit purposes for public or common areas of a two-family dwelling, ampere rating. A branch circuit supplying two or more outlets a multifamily dwelling, or a multi-occupancy building shall not or receptacles shall supply only the loads specified according be supplied from equipment that supplies an individual dwell- to its size as specified in 210.23(A) through (D) and as sum- ing unit or tenant space. marized in 210.24 and Table 210.24. Informational Note: Examples of public or common (A) 15- and 20-Ampere Branch Circuits. A 15- or 20-ampere areas include, but are not limited to, lobbies, corridors, branch circuit shall be permitted to supply lighting units or stairways, laundry rooms, roofs, elevators, washrooms, other utilization equipment, or a combination of both, and shall store rooms, driveways (parking), and mechanical rooms.

comply with 210.23(A)(1) and (A)(2). Exception: The small-appliance branch circuits, laundry Part III. Required Outlets branch circuits, and bathroom branch circuits required in a 210.50 Receptacle Outlets. Receptacle outlets shall be dwelling unit(s) by 210.11(C)(1), (C)(2), and (C)(3) shall sup- installed as specified in 210.52 through 210.65. ply only the receptacle outlets specified in that section. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–71

210.52 ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS Table 210.24 Summary of Branch-Circuit Requirements Circuit Rating 15 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A Conductors (min. size): Circuit wires1 14 12 10 8 6 Taps 14 14 14 12 12 Fixture wires and cords — see 240.5 Overcurrent Protection 15 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A Outlet devices: Lampholders permitted Any type Any type Heavy duty Heavy duty Heavy duty Receptacle rating2 15 max. A 15 or 20 A 30 A 40 or 50 A 50 A Maximum Load 15 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A Permissible load See 210.23(A) See 210.23(A) See 210.23(B) See 210.23(C) See 210.23(C) 1These gauges are for copper conductors. 2For receptacle rating of cord-connected electric-discharge luminaires, see 410.62(C). Informational Note: See Informative Annex J for infor- (1) Part of a luminaire or appliance, or mation regarding ADA accessibility design. (2) Controlled by a listed wall-mounted control device in accordance with 210.70(A)(1), Exception No. 1, or (A) Cord Pendants. A cord connector that is supplied by a per- (3) Located within cabinets or cupboards, or

manently connected cord pendant shall be considered a recep- 1 (4) Located more than 1.7 m (5 ⁄2 ft) above the floor tacle outlet. Permanently installed electric baseboard heaters equipped (B) Cord Connections. A receptacle outlet shall be installed with factory-installed receptacle outlets or outlets provided as wherever flexible cords with attachment plugs are used. Where a separate assembly by the manufacturer shall be permitted as flexible cords are permitted to be permanently connected, recep- the required outlet or outlets for the wall space utilized by such tacles shall be permitted to be omitted for such cords. permanently installed heaters. Such receptacle outlets shall not (C) Appliance Receptacle Outlets. Appliance receptacle be connected to the heater circuits. outlets installed in a dwelling unit for specific appliances, such as laundry equipment, shall be installed within 1.8 m (6 ft) of Informational Note: Listed baseboard heaters include the intended location of the appliance. instructions that may not permit their installation below receptacle outlets.

C (D) [DPH] Commissary Service Outlet. A commissary which A services food preparation units shall provide one outlet for each (A) General Provisions. In every kitchen, family room, dining C vehicle requiring electrical power for mechanical refrigeration. room, living room, parlor, library, den, sunroom, bedroom, rec- A reation room, or similar room or area of dwelling units, recep- C (E) [DPH w/ exceptions] Installation Height. The center of tacle outlets shall be installed in accordance with the general A 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacle outlets required by sec- C provisions specified in 210.52(A)(1) through (A)(4). tions 210-52(A), (B), and (C) shall be installed not less than 12 A C inches above the floor or working platform. (1) Spacing. Receptacles shall be installed such that no point measured horizontally along the floor line of any wall space is C Exception No. 1: Receptacle outlets installed as part of perma- more than 1.8 m (6 ft) from a receptacle outlet. A nently installed baseboard heaters are exempt. C (2) Wall Space. As used in this section, a wall space shall

A Exception No. 2: Required receptacle outlets shall be permitted include the following: C in floors when adjacent to sliding panels or walls. A (1) Any space 600 mm (2 ft) or more in width (including space C Exception No. 3: Baseboard electrical outlets used in relocatable measured around corners) and unbroken along the floor line A partitions, window walls or other electrical convenience floor by doorways and similar openings, fireplaces, and fixed cab- C outlets are not subject to the minimum height requirements. inets that do not have countertops or similar work surfaces 210.52 Dwelling Unit Receptacle Outlets. This section pro- (2) The space occupied by fixed panels in walls, excluding vides requirements for 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere receptacle sliding panels outlets. The receptacles required by this section shall be in addi- (3) The space afforded by fixed room dividers, such as free- tion to any receptacle that is as follows: standing bar-type counters or railings 70–72 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS 210.52 (3) Floor Receptacles. Receptacle outlets in or on floors shall continuous lengths shall be considered to be one receptacle not be counted as part of the required number of receptacle outlet. outlets unless located within 450 mm (18 in.) of the wall. ∆ (1) Wall Spaces. Receptacle outlets shall be installed so that no (4) Countertop and Similar Work Surface Receptacle point along the wall line is more than 600 mm (24 in.) measured Outlets. Receptacles installed for countertop and similar work horizontally from a receptacle outlet in that space. surfaces as specified in 210.52(C) shall not be considered as the Exception: Receptacle outlets shall not be required directly receptacle outlets required by 210.52(A). behind a range, counter-mounted cooking unit, or sink in the (B) Small Appliances. installation described in Figure 210.52(C)(1). (1) Receptacle Outlets Served. In the kitchen, pantry, N (2) Island and Peninsular Countertops and Work Surfaces.

breakfast room, dining room, or similar area of a dwelling Receptacle outlets shall be installed in accordance with unit, the two or more 20-ampere small-appliance branch cir- 210.52(C)(2)(a) and (C)(2)(b). cuits required by 210.11(C)(1) shall serve all wall and floor (a) At least one receptacle outlet shall be provided for the receptacle outlets covered by 210.52(A), all countertop outlets first 0.84 m2 (9 ft2), or fraction thereof, of the countertop or covered by 210.52(C), and receptacle outlets for refrigeration work surface. A receptacle outlet shall be provided for every equipment. additional 1.7 m2 (18 ft2), or fraction thereof, of the countertop or work surface. Exception No. 1: In addition to the required receptacles speci- fied by 210.52, switched receptacles supplied from a general- purpose 15- or 20-ampere branch circuit as required in Space exempt from wall Outlet within Outlet within 210.70(A)(1), Exception No. 1, shall be permitted. line if X < 300 mm (12 in.) 600 mm (24 in.) 600 mm (24 in.) Exception No. 2: In addition to the required receptacles speci-

fied by 210.52, a receptacle outlet to serve a specific appliance X shall be permitted to be supplied from an individual branch cir- cuit rated 15 amperes or greater. (2) No Other Outlets. The two or more small-appliance branch circuits specified in 210.52(B)(1) shall have no other outlets. Exception No. 1: A receptacle installed solely for the electri- cal supply to and support of an electric clock in any of the rooms specified in 210.52(B)(1). Range, counter-mounted cooking unit, or sink extending from face of counter Exception No. 2: Receptacles installed to provide power for sup- plemental equipment and lighting on gas-fired ranges, ovens, or counter-mounted cooking units. Space exempt from wall line Outlet within 600 mm (24 in.) if X < 450 mm (18 in.) (3) Kitchen Receptacle Requirements. Receptacles installed in a kitchen to serve countertop surfaces shall be supplied by not fewer than two small-appliance branch circuits, either or both X of which shall also be permitted to supply receptacle outlets in the same kitchen and in other rooms specified in 210.52(B) (1).

Additional small-appliance branch circuits shall be permit- ted to supply receptacle outlets in the kitchen and other rooms specified in 210.52(B)(1). No small-appliance branch circuit shall serve more than one kitchen. Outlet within (C) Countertops and Work Surfaces. In kitchens, pantries, 600 mm (24 in.) breakfast rooms, dining rooms, and similar areas of dwelling units, receptacle outlets for countertop and work surfaces that are 300 mm (12 in.) or wider shall be installed in accordance with 210.52(C)(1)through (C)(3) and shall not be considered as the receptacle outlets required by 210.52(A). Range, counter-mounted cooking unit, or sink mounted in corner For the purposes of this section, where using multiout- let assemblies, each 300 mm (12 in.) of multioutlet assembly ∆ FIGURE 210.52(C)(1) Determination of Area Behind a Range, containing two or more receptacles installed in individual or Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit, or Sink. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–73

210.52 ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS (b) At least one receptacle outlet shall be located within 600 (2) Multifamily Dwellings. For each dwelling unit of a mul- mm (2 ft) of the outer end of a peninsular countertop or work tifamily dwelling where the dwelling unit is located at grade surface. Additional required receptacle outlets shall be permitted level and provided with individual exterior entrance/egress, to be located as determined by the installer, designer, or building at least one receptacle outlet readily accessible from grade owner. The location of the receptacle outlets shall be in accor- and not more than 2.0 m (61 ⁄ 2 ft) above grade level shall be dance with 210.52(C)(3). installed. (3) Receptacle Outlet Location. Receptacle outlets shall be (3) Balconies, Decks, and Porches. Balconies, decks, and located in one or more of the following: porches that are within 102 mm (4 in.) horizontally of the dwelling unit shall have at least one receptacle outlet accessible (1) On or above countertop or work surfaces: On or above, but from the balcony, deck, or porch.

The receptacle outlet shall not not more than 500 mm (20 in.) above, the countertop or 1 be located more than 2.0 m (6 ⁄2 ft) above the balcony, deck, or work surface. porch walking surface. (2) In countertop or work surfaces: Receptacle outlet assem- blies listed for use in countertops or work surfaces shall be (F) Laundry Areas. In dwelling units, at least one receptacle permitted to be installed in countertops or work surfaces. outlet shall be installed in areas designated for the installation of (3) Below countertop or works surfaces: Not more than 300 mm laundry equipment. (12 in.) below the countertop or work surface. Receptacles Exception No. 1: A receptacle for laundry equipment shall not installed below a countertop or work surface shall not be be required in a dwelling unit of a multifamily building where located where the countertop or work surface extends more laundry facilities are provided on the premises for use by all than 150 mm (6 in.) beyond its support base. building occupants. Receptacle outlets rendered not readily accessible by appli- Exception No.

2: A receptacle for laundry equipment shall not ances fastened in place, appliance garages, sinks, or rangetops be required in other than one-family dwellings where laundry as covered in 210.52(C)(1), Exception, or appliances occupy- facilities are not to be installed or permitted. ing assigned spaces shall not be considered as these required outlets. (G) Basements, Garages, and Accessory Buildings. For one- and two-family dwellings, and multifamily dwellings, at least Informational Note No. 1: See 406.5(E) and 406.5(G) for one receptacle outlet shall be installed in the areas specified installation of receptacles in countertops and 406.5(F) in 210.52(G)(1) through (G)(3). These receptacles shall be in and 406.5(G) for installation of receptacles in work sur- addition to receptacles required for specific equipment. faces. See 380.10 for installation of multioutlet assemblies. (1) Garages. In each attached garage and in each detached Informational Note No. 2: See Annex J and ANSI/ICC garage with electric power, at least one receptacle outlet shall

A117.1-2009, Standard on Accessible and Usable Build- be installed in each vehicle bay and not more than 1.7 m ings and Facilities. 1 • (5 ⁄2 ft) above the floor. (D) Bathrooms. At least one receptacle outlet shall be Exception: Garage spaces not attached to an individual dwell- installed in bathrooms within 900 mm (3 ft) of the outside edge ing unit of a multifamily dwelling shall not require a receptacle of each basin. The receptacle outlet shall be located on a wall outlet in each vehicle bay. or partition that is adjacent to the basin or basin countertop, located on the countertop, or installed on the side or face of the (2) Accessory Buildings. In each accessory building with basin cabinet. In no case shall the receptacle be located more electric power. than 300 mm (12 in.) below the top of the basin or basin coun- (3) Basements. In each separate unfinished portion of a tertop. Receptacle outlet assemblies listed for use in counter- basement. tops shall be permitted to be installed in the countertop. (H) Hallways. In dwelling units, hallways of 3.0 m (10 ft) or

Informational Note: See 406.5(E) and 406.5(G) for more in length shall have at least one receptacle outlet. requirements for installation of receptacles in countertops. As used in this subsection, the hallway length shall be con- (E) Outdoor Outlets. Outdoor receptacle outlets shall be sidered the length along the centerline of the hallway without installed in accordance with 210.52(E)(1) through (E)(3). passing through a doorway. Informational Note: See 210.8(A)(3). (I) Foyers. Foyers that are not part of a hallway in accordance with 210.52(H) and that have an area that is greater than 5.6 m 2 (1) One-Family and Two-Family Dwellings. For a one- (60 ft 2) shall have a receptacle(s) located in each wall space family dwelling and each unit of a two-family dwelling that is 900 mm (3 ft) or more in width. Doorways, door-side windows at grade level, at least one receptacle outlet readily accessible that extend to the floor, and similar openings shall not be con- from grade and not more than 2.0 m (61⁄2 ft) above grade level sidered wall space.

shall be installed at the front and back of the dwelling. 70–74 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 210 — BRANCH CIRCUITS 210.70 210.60 Guest Rooms, Guest Suites, Dormitory Units, nonlocking-type, 125-volt, 15- or 20-ampere receptacles. The and Similar Occupancies. outlets shall be installed in accordance with 210.65(B). Where a room or space is provided with movable partition(s), each room (A) General. Guest rooms or guest suites in hotels or motels, size shall be determined with the partition in the position that sleeping rooms in dormitory units, and similar occupancies results in the smallest size meeting room. shall have receptacle outlets installed in accordance with 210.52(A) and (D). Guest rooms or guest suites provided with Informational Note No. 1: For the purposes of this sec- permanent provisions for cooking shall have receptacle out- tion, meeting rooms are typically designed or intended lets installed in accordance with all of the applicable rules in for the gathering of seated occupants for such purposes 210.52. as conferences, deliberations, or similar purposes, where portable electronic equipment such as computers, pro- ∆ (B) Receptacle Placement.

The total number of receptacle jectors, or similar equipment is likely to be used. outlets shall not be less than required in 210.52(A). These receptacle outlets shall be permitted to be located conveniently Informational Note No. 2: Examples of rooms that are for permanent furniture layout. At least two receptacle outlets not meeting rooms include auditoriums, schoolrooms, shall be readily accessible. Where receptacles are installed and coffee shops. behind the bed, the receptacle shall be located to prevent the bed ∆ (B) Receptacle Outlets Required. The total number of from contacting any attachment plug that may be installed or receptacle outlets, including floor outlets and receptacle out- the receptacle shall be provided with a suitable guard. lets in fixed furniture, shall not be less than as determined in 210.62 Show Windows. At least one 125-volt, single-phase, (1) and (2). 15- or 20-ampere-rated receptacle outlet shall be installed (1) Receptacle Outlets in Fixed Walls. The required number within 450 mm (18 in.) of the top of a show window for each

of receptacle outlets shall be determined in accordance with 3.7 linear m (12 linear ft) or major fraction thereof of show win- 210.52(A)(1) through (A)(4). These receptacle outlets shall be dow area measured horizontally at its maximum width. permitted to be located as determined by the installer, designer, ∆ 210.63 Equipment Requiring Servicing. A 125-volt, sin- or building owner. gle-phase, 15- or 20-ampere-rated receptacle outlet shall be ∆ (2) Floor Outlets. A meeting room with any floor dimen- installed at an accessible location within 7.5 m (25 ft) of the sion that is 3.7 m (12 ft) or greater in any direction and that equipment as specified in 210.63(A) and (B). 2 2 has a floor area of at least 20 m (215 ft) shall have at least N (A) Heating, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Equip- one floor receptacle outlet, or at least one floor outlet to serve ment. The required receptacle outlet shall be located on the receptacle(s), located at a distance not less than 1.8 m (6 ft) 2 2

same level as the heating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration from any fixed wall for each 20 m (215 ft) or major portion equipment. The receptacle outlet shall not be connected to the of floor space. load side of the equipment’s branch-circuit disconnecting means. Informational Note No. 1: See 314.27(B) for floor Exception: A receptacle outlet shall not be required at one- and boxes used for receptacles located in the floor. two-family dwellings for the service of evaporative coolers. Informational Note No. 2: See Article 518 for assembly ∆ (B) Other Electrical Equipment. In other than one- and occupancies designed for 100 or more persons. two-family dwellings, a receptacle outlet shall be located as 210.70 Lighting Outlets Required. Lighting outlets shall specified in 210.63(B)(1) and (B)(2). be installed where specified in 210.70(A), (B), and (C). N (1) Indoor Service Equipment. The required receptacle out- (A) Dwelling Units. In dwelling units, lighting outlets shall be

let shall be located within the same room or area as the service installed in accordance with 210.70(A)(1), (A)(2), and (A)(3). equipment. (1) Habitable Rooms. At least one lighting outlet controlled N (2) Indoor Equipment Requiring Dedicated Equipment by a listed wall-mounted control device shall be installed Spaces. Where equipment, other than service equipment, in every habitable room, kitchen, and bathroom. The wall- requires dedicated equipment space as specified in 110.26(E), mounted control device shall be located near an entrance to the the required receptacle outlet shall be located within the same room on a wall. room or area as the electrical equipment and shall not be con- Exception No. 1: In other than kitchens and bathrooms, one nected to the load side of the equipment’s branch-circuit dis- or more receptacles controlled by a listed wall-mounted control connecting means. device shall be permitted in lieu of lighting outlets. 210.65 Meeting Rooms. Exception No. 2: Lighting outlets shall be permitted to be 2 (A) General.

Each meeting room of not more than 93 m controlled by occupancy sensors that are (1) in addition to listed (1000 ft2) in other than dwelling units shall have outlets for wall-mounted control devices or (2) located at a customary wall 2022 California Electrical Code 70–75

215.1 ARTICLE 215 — FEEDERS switch location and equipped with a manual override that will allow the sensor to function as a wall switch. ARTICLE 215 ∆ (2) Additional Locations. Additional lighting outlets shall be Feeders installed in accordance with the following: (1) At least one lighting outlet controlled by a listed wall- 215.1 Scope. This article covers the installation require- mounted control device shall be installed in hallways, stair- ments, overcurrent protection requirements, minimum size, and ways, attached garages, and detached garages with electric ampacity of conductors for feeders. power. Exception: Feeders for electrolytic cells as covered in 668.3(C) (2) For dwelling units, attached garages, and detached garages (1) and (C)(4). with electric power, at least one lighting outlet controlled by a listed wall-mounted control device shall be installed 215.2 Minimum Rating and Size. to provide illumination on the exterior side of outdoor (A) Feeders Not More Than 1000 Volts. entrances or exits with grade-level access. A vehicle door

in a garage shall not be considered as an outdoor entrance ∆ (1) General. Feeder conductors shall have an ampacity not less or exit. than the larger of 215.2(A)(1)(a) or (A)(1)(b) and shall comply (3) Where one or more lighting outlet(s) are installed for inte- with 110.14(C). rior stairways, there shall be a listed wall-mounted control (a) Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or any com- device at each floor level and landing level that includes an bination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, the minimum entryway to control the lighting outlet(s) where the stair- feeder conductor size shall have an ampacity not less than the way between floor levels has six risers or more. noncontinuous load plus 125 percent of the continuous load. Exception No. 1: If the assembly, including the overcurrent devices Exception to (A)(2)(1), (A)(2)(2), and (A)(2)(3): In hallways, protecting the feeder(s), is listed for operation at 100 percent of its in stairways, and at outdoor entrances, remote, central, or auto- rating, the ampacity of the feeder conductors shall be permitted to

matic control of lighting shall be permitted. be not less than the sum of the continuous load plus the noncontinu- (4) Lighting outlets controlled in accordance with 210.70(A) ous load. (2)(3) shall not be controlled by use of listed wall-mounted Exception No. 2: Where a portion of a feeder is connected at control devices unless they provide the full range of dim- both its supply and load ends to separately installed pressure ming control at each location. • connections as covered in 110.14(C)(2), it shall be permitted (B) Guest Rooms or Guest Suites. In hotels, motels, or similar to have an ampacity not less than the sum of the continuous load occupancies, guest rooms or guest suites shall have at least one plus the noncontinuous load. No portion of a feeder installed lighting outlet controlled by a listed wall-mounted control device under this exception shall extend into an enclosure containing installed in every habitable room and bathroom. either the feeder supply or the feeder load terminations, as cov- Exception No.

1: In other than bathrooms and kitchens where ered in 110.14(C)(1). provided, one or more receptacles controlled by a listed wall- Exception No. 3:Grounded conductors that are not con- mounted control device shall be permitted in lieu of lighting nected to an overcurrent device shall be permitted to be sized at outlets. 100 percent of the continuous and noncontinuous load. Exception No. 2: Lighting outlets shall be permitted to be (b) The minimum feeder conductor size shall have an controlled by occupancy sensors that are (1) in addition to listed ampacity not less than the maximum load to be served after wall-mounted control devices or (2) located at a customary wall the application of any adjustment or correction factors in accor- switch location and equipped with a manual override that allows dance with 310.14. the sensor to function as a wall switch. Informational Note No. 1: See Examples D1 through ∆ (C) All Occupancies. For attics and underfloor spaces, utility D11 in Informative Annex D. rooms, and basements, at least one lighting outlet containing Informational Note No.

2: Conductors for feeders, as a switch or controlled by a wall switch or listed wall-mounted defined in Article 100, sized to prevent a voltage drop control device shall be installed where these spaces are used exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, heat- for storage or contain equipment requiring servicing. A point ing, and lighting loads, or combinations of such loads, and of control shall be at each entry that permits access to the attic where the maximum total voltage drop on both feeders and underfloor space, utility room, or basement. Where a and branch circuits to the farthest outlet does not exceed lighting outlet is installed for equipment requiring service, the 5 percent, will provide reasonable efficiency of operation. lighting outlet shall be installed at or near the equipment. Informational Note No. 3: See 210.19(A), Informa- tional Note No. 4, for voltage drop for branch circuits. 70–76 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 215 — FEEDERS 215.10 (2) Grounded Conductor. The size of the feeder circuit 215.4 Feeders with Common Neutral Conductor. grounded conductor shall not be smaller than that required by (A) Feeders with Common Neutral. Up to three sets of 250.122, except that 250.122(F) shall not apply where grounded 3-wire feeders or two sets of 4-wire or 5-wire feeders shall be conductors are run in parallel. permitted to utilize a common neutral. Additional minimum sizes shall be as specified in 215.2(A) (B) In Metal Raceway or Enclosure. Where installed in a (3) under the conditions stipulated. metal raceway or other metal enclosure, all conductors of all (3) Ampacity Relative to Service Conductors. The feeder feeders using a common neutral conductor shall be enclosed conductor ampacity shall not be less than that of the service within the same raceway or other enclosure as required in conductors where the feeder conductors carry the total load sup- 300.20. plied by service conductors with an ampacity of 55 amperes or 215.5 Diagrams of Feeders. If required by the authority less.

having jurisdiction, a diagram showing feeder details shall be (B) Feeders over 1000 Volts. The ampacity of conductors provided prior to the installation of the feeders. Such a diagram shall be in accordance with 310.14 and 311.60 as applicable. shall show the area in square feet of the building or other struc- Where installed, the size of the feeder-circuit grounded conduc- ture supplied by each feeder, the total calculated load before tor shall not be smaller than that required by 250.122, except applying demand factors, the demand factors used, the calcu- that 250.122(F) shall not apply where grounded conductors lated load after applying demand factors, and the size and type are run in parallel. Feeder conductors over 1000 volts shall be of conductors to be used. sized in accordance with 215.2(B)(1), (B)(2), or (B)(3). ∆ 215.6 Feeder Equipment Grounding Conductor. Where a (1) Feeders Supplying Transformers. The ampacity of feeder supplies branch circuits in which equipment grounding

feeder conductors shall not be less than the sum of the name- conductors are required, the feeder shall include or provide an plate ratings of the transformers supplied when only transform- equipment grounding conductor, to which the equipment ground- ers are supplied. ing conductors of the branch circuits shall be connected. Where the feeder supplies a separate building or structure, the require- (2) Feeders Supplying Transformers and Utilization Equip- ments of 250.32 shall apply. ment. The ampacity of feeders supplying a combination of transformers and utilization equipment shall not be less than the 215.7 Ungrounded Conductors Tapped from Grounded sum of the nameplate ratings of the transformers and 125 per- Systems. Two-wire dc circuits and ac circuits of two or more cent of the designed potential load of the utilization equipment ungrounded conductors shall be permitted to be tapped from that will be operated simultaneously. the ungrounded conductors of circuits having a grounded neu- tral conductor. Switching devices in each tapped circuit shall (3) Supervised Installations.

For supervised installations, have a pole in each ungrounded conductor. feeder conductor sizing shall be permitted to be determined by qualified persons under engineering supervision in accor- ∆ 215.9 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Per- dance with 310.14(B) or 311.60(B). Supervised installations are sonnel. Feeders shall be permitted to be protected by a ground- defined as those portions of a facility where all of the following fault circuit interrupter installed in a readily accessible location conditions are met: in lieu of the provisions for such interrupters as specified in 210.8 and 590.6(A). (1) Conditions of design and installation are provided under engineering supervision. ∆ 215.10 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Each (2) Qualified persons with documented training and experience feeder disconnect rated 1000 amperes or more and installed on in over 1000-volt systems provide maintenance, monitor- solidly grounded wye electrical systems of more than 150 volts ing, and servicing of the system. to ground, but not exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase, shall be

provided with ground-fault protection of equipment in accor- ∆ 215.3 Overcurrent Protection. Feeders shall be protected dance with 230.95. against overcurrent in accordance with Part I of Article 240. Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or any combination of Informational Note: For buildings that contain health care continuous and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the overcur- occupancies, see 517.17. rent device shall not be less than the noncontinuous load plus Exception No. 1: This section shall not apply to a disconnect- 125 percent of the continuous load. ing means for a continuous industrial process where a nonor- Exception: Where the assembly, including the overcur- derly shutdown will introduce additional or increased hazards. rent devices protecting the feeder(s), is listed for operation at Exception No. 2: This section shall not apply if ground-fault pro- 100 percent of its rating, the ampere rating of the overcurrent tection of equipment is provided on the supply side of the feeder device shall be permitted to be not less than the sum of the con-

and on the load side of any transformer supplying the feeder. tinuous load plus the noncontinuous load. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–77

215.11 ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE LOAD CALCULATIONS Exception No. 3: If temporary feeder conductors are used to con- The identification methods utilized for conductors originat- nect a generator to a facility for repair, maintenance, or emergen- ing within each feeder panelboard or similar feeder distribu- cies, ground-fault protection of equipment shall not be required. tion equipment shall be documented in a manner that is readily Temporary feeders without ground-fault protection shall be per- available or shall be permanently posted at each feeder panel- mitted for the time period necessary but shall not exceed 90 days. board or similar feeder distribution equipment. (a) Positive Polarity, Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. Where the 215.11 Circuits Derived from Autotransformers. Feeders positive polarity of a dc system does not serve as the connection shall not be derived from autotransformers unless the system for the grounded conductor, each positive ungrounded conductor supplied has a grounded conductor that is electrically con-

shall be identified by one of the following means: nected to a grounded conductor of the system supplying the autotransformer. (1) A continuous red outer finish (2) A continuous red stripe durably marked along the conduc- Exception No. 1: An autotransformer shall be permitted with- tor’s entire length on insulation of a color other than green, out the connection to a grounded conductor where transforming white, gray, or black from a nominal 208 volts to a nominal 240-volt supply or simi- (3) Imprinted plus signs (+) or the word POSITIVE or POS larly from 240 volts to 208 volts. durably marked on insulation of a color other than green, Exception No. 2: In industrial occupancies, where conditions white, gray, or black, and repeated at intervals not exceeding of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified per- 610 mm (24 in.) in accordance with 310.8(B) sons service the installation, autotransformers shall be permit- (4) An approved permanent marking means such as sleeving or

ted to supply nominal 600-volt loads from nominal 480-volt shrink-tubing that is suitable for the conductor size, at all systems, and 480-volt loads from nominal 600-volt systems, termination, connection, and splice points, with imprinted without the connection to a similar grounded conductor. plus signs (+) or the word POSITIVE or POS durably 215.12 Identification for Feeders. marked on insulation of a color other than green, white, gray, or black (A) Grounded Conductor. The grounded conductor of a feeder, if insulated, shall be identified in accordance with 200.6. (b) Negative Polarity, Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. Where the negative polarity of a dc system does not serve as the connection (B) Equipment Grounding Conductor. The equipment for the grounded conductor, each negative ungrounded conductor grounding conductor shall be identified in accordance with shall be identified by one of the following means: 250.119. (1) A continuous black outer finish (C) Identification of Ungrounded Conductors. Ungrounded (2) A continuous black stripe durably marked along the con-

conductors shall be identified in accordance with 215.12(C)(1) ductor’s entire length on insulation of a color other than or (C)(2), as applicable. green, white, gray, or red (1) Feeders Supplied from More Than One Nominal Voltage (3) Imprinted minus signs (–) or the word NEGATIVE or NEG System. Where the premises wiring system has feeders supplied durably marked on insulation of a color other than green, from more than one nominal voltage system, each ungrounded white, gray, or red, and repeated at intervals not exceeding conductor of a feeder shall be identified by phase or line and 610 mm (24 in.) in accordance with 310.8(B) system at all termination, connection, and splice points in com- (4) An approved permanent marking means such as sleeving or pliance with 215.12(C)(1)(a) and (b). shrink-tubing that is suitable for the conductor size, at all (a) Means of Identification. The means of identification termination, connection, and splice points, with imprinted shall be permitted to be by separate color coding, marking tape, minus signs (–) or the word NEGATIVE or NEG durably

tagging, or other approved means. marked on insulation of a color other than green, white, (b) Posting of Identification Means. The method utilized for gray, or red conductors originating within each feeder panelboard or similar feeder distribution equipment shall be documented in a manner that is readily available or shall be permanently posted at each ARTICLE 220 feeder panelboard or similar feeder distribution equipment. Branch-Circuit, Feeder, (2) Feeders Supplied from Direct-Current Systems. Where and Service Load Calculations a feeder is supplied from a dc system operating at more than 60 volts, each ungrounded conductor of 4 AWG or larger shall be identified by polarity at all termination, connection, and Part I. General splice points by marking tape, tagging, or other approved 220.1 Scope. This article provides requirements for calcu- means; each ungrounded conductor of 6 AWG or smaller lating branch-circuit, feeder, and service loads. Part I provides shall be identified by polarity at all termination, connection, general requirements for calculation methods. Part II provides

and splice points in compliance with 215.12(C)(2)(a) and (b). 70–78 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE LOAD CALCULATIONS 220.14 Table 220.3 Specific-Purpose Calculation References Part I General Calculation Article Section (or Part) Part II Branch-circuit load calculations Air-conditioning and refrigerating 440 Part IV equipment, branch-circuit conductor sizing Fixed electric heating equipment for 427 427.4 Part IV Part III pipelines and vessels, branch- 220.61 Optional Feeder and circuit sizing Neutral feeder and service load Fixed electric space-heating 424 424.3 Loads service load calculations equipment, branch-circuit sizing calculations Fixed outdoor electric deicing and 426 426.4 snow-melting equipment, branch- Farm dwellings Farm dwellings circuit sizing only only Motors, feeder demand factor 430 430.26 Motors, multimotor and 430 430.25 combination-load equipment Part V Farm load calculations Motors, several motors or a 430 430.24 motor(s) and other load(s) Over 600-volt branch-circuit 210 210.19(B) FIGURE 220.1 Branch-Circuit, Feeder, and Service Load calculations Calculation Methods.

Over 600-volt feeder calculations 215 215.2(B) Phase converters, conductors 455 455.6 Storage-type water heaters 422 422.11(E) calculation methods for branch-circuit loads. Parts III and IV provide calculation methods for feeder and service loads. ∆ 220.12 Lighting Load for Non-Dwelling Occupancies. Part V provides calculation methods for farm loads. N (A) General. A unit load of not less than that specified in Informational Note No. 1: See examples in Informative Table 220.12 for non-dwelling occupancies and the floor area Annex D. determined in 220.11 shall be used to calculate the minimum lighting load. Motors rated less than 1⁄8 HP and connected to a Informational Note No. 2: See Figure 220.1 for informa- lighting circuit shall be considered general lighting load. tion on the organization of Article 220. Informational Note: The unit values of Table 220.12 220.3 Other Articles for Specific-Purpose Calculations. are based on minimum load conditions and 100 percent Table 220.3 shall provide references for specific-purpose cal- power factor and may not provide sufficient capacity for

culation requirements not located in Chapters 5, 6, or 7 that the installation contemplated. amend or supplement the requirements of this article. N (B) Energy Code. Where the building is designed and con- 220.5 Calculations. structed to comply with an energy code adopted by the local (A) Voltages. Unless other voltages are specified, for purposes authority, the lighting load shall be permitted to be calculated of calculating branch-circuit and feeder loads, nominal system using the unit values specified in the energy code where the fol- voltages of 120, 120/240, 208Y/120, 240, 347, 480Y/277, lowing conditions are met: 480, 600Y/347, and 600 volts shall be used. (1) A power monitoring system is installed that will provide (B) Fractions of an Ampere. Calculations shall be permitted continuous information regarding the total general light- to be rounded to the nearest whole ampere, with decimal frac- ing load of the building. tions smaller than 0.5 dropped. (2) The power monitoring system will be set with alarm values to alert the building owner or manager if the lighting load Part II.

Branch-Circuit Load Calculations exceeds the values set by the energy code. Automatic means 220.10 General. Branch-circuit loads shall be calculated as to take action to reduce the connected load shall be permitted. shown in 220.12, 220.14, and 220.16. (3) The demand factors specified in 220.42 are not applied to the general lighting load. N 220.11 Floor Area. The floor area for each floor shall be calcu- (4) The continuous load multiplier of 125 percent shall be lated from the outside dimensions of the building, dwelling unit, applied. or other area involved. For dwelling units, the calculated floor area shall not include open porches, garages, or unused or unfinished 220.14 Other Loads — All Occupancies. In all occupancies, spaces not adaptable for future use. the minimum load for each outlet for general-use receptacles 2022 California Electrical Code 70–79

220.14 ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE LOAD CALCULATIONS ∆ Table 220.12 General Lighting Loads by Non-Dwelling shall be calculated based on the ampere rating of the appliance Occupancy or load served. (B) Electric Dryers and Electric Cooking Appliances in Unit Load Dwellings and Household Cooking Appliances Used in Volt-amperes/ Volt-amperes/ Instructional Programs. Load calculations shall be permitted 2 2 Type of Occupancy m ft as specified in 220.54 for electric dryers and in 220.55 for elec- tric ranges and other cooking appliances. Automotive facility 16 1.5 Convention center 15 1.4 (C) Motor Outlets. Loads for motor outlets shall be calcu- Courthouse 15 1.4 lated in accordance with the requirements in 430.22, 430.24, Dormitory 16 1.5 and 440.6. Exercise center 15 1.4 Fire station 14 1.3 (D) Luminaires. An outlet supplying luminaire(s) shall be cal- a Gymnasium 18 1.7 culated based on the maximum volt-ampere rating of the equip- Health care clinic 17 1.6 ment and lamps for which the luminaire(s) is rated. Hospital 17 1.6

Hotels and motels, including 18 1.7 (E) Heavy-Duty Lampholders. Outlets for heavy-duty lamp- apartment houses without holders shall be calculated at a minimum of 600 volt-amperes. provisions for cooking by tenants b (F) Sign and Outline Lighting. Sign and outline lighting out- Library 16 1.5 lets shall be calculated at a minimum of 1200 volt-amperes for Manufacturing facility c 24 2.2 each required branch circuit specified in 600.5(A). Motion picture theater 17 1.6 Museum 17 1.6 (G) Show Windows. Show windows shall be calculated in d Office 14 1.3 accordance with either of the following: Parking garage e 3 0.3 Penitentiary 13 1.2 (1) The unit load per outlet as required in other provisions of Performing arts theater 16 1.5 this section Police station 14 1.3 (2) At 200 volt-amperes per linear 300 mm (1 ft) of show Post office 17 1.6 window Religious facility 24 2.2 f Restaurant 16 1.5 (H) Fixed Multioutlet Assemblies. Fixed multioutlet Retail g,h 20 1.9 assemblies used in other than dwelling units or the guest rooms School/university 33 3

or guest suites of hotels or motels shall be calculated in accor- Sports arena 33 3 Town hall 15 1.4 dance with (H)(1) or (H)(2). For the purposes of this section, Transportation 13 1.2 the calculation shall be permitted to be based on the portion that Warehouse 13 1.2 contains receptacle outlets. Workshop 18 1.7 (1) Where appliances are unlikely to be used simultaneously, Note: The 125 percent multiplier for a continuous load as specified in each 1.5 m (5 ft) or fraction thereof of each separate and 210.20(A) is included when using the unit loads in this table for calculating continuous length shall be considered as one outlet of not the minimum lighting load for a specified occupancy. a Armories and auditoriums are considered gymnasium-type occupancies. less than 180 volt-amperes. bLodge rooms are similar to hotels and motels. (2) Where appliances are likely to be used simultaneously, c Industrial commercial loft buildings are considered manufacturing-type each 300 mm (1 ft) or fraction thereof shall be considered occupancies. d as an outlet of not less than 180 volt-amperes.

Banks are office-type occupancies. e Garages — commercial (storage) are considered parking garage occupancies. (I) Receptacle Outlets. Except as covered in 220.14(J) and (K), fClubs are considered restaurant occupancies. g receptacle outlets shall be calculated at not less than 180 volt- Barber shops and beauty parlors are considered retail occupancies. h amperes for each single or for each multiple receptacle on one Stores are considered retail occupancies. yoke. A single piece of equipment consisting of a multiple receptacle comprised of four or more receptacles shall be cal- and outlets not used for general illumination shall not be less than culated at not less than 90 volt-amperes per receptacle. This that calculated in 220.14(A) through (M), the loads shown being provision shall not be applicable to the receptacle outlets speci- based on nominal branch-circuit voltages. fied in 210.11(C)(1) and (C)(2). Exception: The loads of outlets serving switchboards and ∆ ( J) Dwelling Units. In one-family, two-family, and multi- switching frames in telephone exchanges shall be waived from

family dwellings, the minimum unit load shall be not less than the calculations. 2 2 33 volt-amperes/m (3 volt-amperes/ft). The lighting and (A) Specific Appliances or Loads. An outlet for a specific receptacle outlets specified in 220.14( J)(1), ( J)(2), and ( J) appliance or other load not covered in 220.14(B) through (M) (3) are included in the minimum unit load. No additional load 70–80 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE LOAD CALCULATIONS 220.42 calculations shall be required for such outlets. The minimum refrigerating equipment, or both, Article 440 shall apply. For lighting load shall be determined using the minimum unit load circuits supplying loads consisting of motor-operated utilization and the floor area as determined in 220.11 for dwelling occu- equipment that is fastened in place and has a motor larger than pancies. Motors rated less than 1⁄8 hp and connected to a lighting 1 ⁄ 8 hp in combination with other loads, the total calculated load circuit shall be considered part of the minimum lighting load. shall be based on 125 percent of the largest motor load plus the sum of the other loads. (1) All general-use receptacle outlets of 20-ampere rating or less, including receptacles connected to the circuits in 210.11(C) (B) Inductive and LED Lighting Loads. For circuits sup- (3) and 210.11(C)(4) plying lighting units that have ballasts, transformers, autotrans-

(2) The receptacle outlets specified in 210.52(E) and (G) formers, or LED drivers, the calculated load shall be based on (3) The lighting outlets specified in 210.70 the total ampere ratings of such units and not on the total watts of the lamps. ∆ (K) Office Buildings. In office buildings, the receptacle loads shall be calculated to be the larger of (1) or (2): (C) Range Loads. It shall be permissible to apply demand factors for range loads in accordance with Table 220.55, (1) The calculated load from 220.14(I) after all demand factors including Note 4. have been applied (2) 11 volt-amperes/m 2 or 1 volt-ampere/ft2 Part III. Feeder and Service Load Calculations (L) Other Outlets. Other outlets not covered in 220.14(A) 220.40 General. The calculated load of a feeder or service through (K) shall be calculated based on 180 volt-amperes per shall not be less than the sum of the loads on the branch cir- outlet. cuits supplied, as determined by Part II of this article, after N (M) Hotel and Motel Occupancies.

In guest rooms or guest any applicable demand factors permitted by Part III or IV or suites of hotels and motels, the lighting and receptacle outlets required by Part V have been applied. specified in 220.14(M)(1), (M)(2), and (M)(3) are included in the Informational Note: See Examples D1(a) through D10 minimum unit load in Table 220.12. No additional load calcula- in Informative Annex D. See 220.18(B) for the maximum tions shall be required for such outlets. The minimum lighting load in amperes permitted for lighting units operating at load shall be determined using the minimum unit load and the less than 100 percent power factor. floor area as determined in 220.11 for hotel and motel occupancies. 220.42 General Lighting. The demand factors specified in (1) All general-use receptacle outlets of 20-ampere rating or less, Table 220.42 shall apply to that portion of the total branch- including receptacles connected to the circuits in 210.11(C) circuit load calculated for general illumination. They shall not (3) and 210.11(C)(4) (2) The receptacle outlets specified in 210.52(E)(3)

(3) The lighting outlets specified in 210.70 220.16 Loads for Additions to Existing Installations. ∆ Table 220.42 Lighting Load Demand Factors ∆ (A) Dwelling Units. Loads added to an existing dwelling Portion of unit(s) shall comply with the following as applicable: Lighting Load (1) Loads for structural additions to an existing dwelling unit to Which Demand Demand Factor Applies Factor or for a previously unwired portion of an existing dwelling Type of Occupancy (Volt-Amperes) (%) unit shall be calculated in accordance with 220.14. (2) Loads for new circuits or extended circuits in previously Dwelling units First 3000 at 100 wired dwelling units shall be calculated in accordance with From 3001 to 120,000 at 35 220.14. Remainder over 120,000 at 25 Hotels and motels, First 20,000 or less at 60 (B) Other Than Dwelling Units. Loads for new circuits or including From 20,001 to 100,000 at 50 extended circuits in other than dwelling units shall be calcu- apartment houses Remainder over 100,000 at 35 lated in accordance with either 220.12 or 220.14, as applicable. without provision

for cooking by 220.18 Maximum Loads. The total load shall not exceed the tenants* rating of the branch circuit, and it shall not exceed the maxi- Warehouses First 12,500 or less at 100 mum loads specified in 220.18(A) through (C) under the condi- (storage) Remainder over 12,500 at 50 tions specified therein. All others Total volt-amperes 100 (A) Motor-Operated and Combination Loads. Where a cir- *The demand factors of this table shall not apply to the calculated load of cuit supplies only motor-operated loads, Article 430 shall apply. feeders or services supplying areas in hotels and motels where the entire Where a circuit supplies only air-conditioning equipment, lighting is likely to be used at one time, as in ballrooms or dining rooms. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–81

220.43 ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE LOAD CALCULATIONS be applied in determining the number of branch circuits for units not operating at the same time, the authority having juris- general illumination. diction may grant permission for feeder and service conductors to have an ampacity less than 100 percent, provided the conductors C [OSHPD 1] The factors of Table 220.42 shall not be applied in have an ampacity for the load so determined. A the following areas: surgery suite, including recovery; emer- C gency department, kitchen, food service, dining, critical care 220.52 Small-Appliance and Laundry Loads — Dwelling A areas as defined in Article 517, elevator lobbies, corridors, Unit. C A inpatient nurse stations, and loads connected to the life safety (A) Small-Appliance Circuit Load. In each dwelling unit, the branch or the critical branch of the essential electrical system. load shall be calculated at 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire C Administrative areas shall be included in “All others” Type of small-appliance branch circuit as covered by 210.11(C)(1).

A Occupancy. Where the load is subdivided through two or more feeders, the 220.43 Show-Window and Track Lighting. calculated load for each shall include not less than 1500 volt- amperes for each 2-wire small-appliance branch circuit. These (A) Show Windows. For show-window lighting, a load of not loads shall be permitted to be included with the general light- less than 660 volt-amperes/linear meter or 200 volt-amperes/lin- ing load and subjected to the demand factors provided in Table ear foot shall be included for a show window, measured hori- 220.42. zontally along its base. Exception: The individual branch circuit permitted by 210.52(B) Informational Note: See 220.14(G) for branch circuits (1), Exception No. 2, shall be permitted to be excluded from the supplying show windows. calculation required by 220.52. (B) Track Lighting. For track lighting in other than dwell- (B) Laundry Circuit Load. A load of not less than 1500 volt- ing units or guest rooms or guest suites of hotels or motels, an amperes shall be included for each 2-wire laundry branch cir-

additional load of 150 volt-amperes shall be included for every cuit installed as covered by 210.11(C)(2). This load shall be 600 mm (2 ft) of lighting track or fraction thereof. Where mul- permitted to be included with the general lighting load and shall ticircuit track is installed, the load shall be considered to be be subjected to the demand factors provided in Table 220.42. divided equally between the track circuits. 220.53 Appliance Load — Dwelling Unit(s). It shall be per- Exception: If the track lighting is supplied through a device that missible to apply a demand factor of 75 percent to the name- limits the current to the track, the load shall be permitted to be plate rating load of four or more appliances rated 1 ⁄4 hp or calculated based on the rating of the device used to limit the greater, or 500 watts or greater, that are fastened in place, and current. that are served by the same feeder or service in a one-family, 220.44 Receptacle Loads — Other Than Dwelling Units. two-family, or multifamily dwelling. This demand factor shall

Receptacle loads calculated in accordance with 220.14(H) and not apply to: (I) shall be permitted to be made subject to the demand factors (1) Household electric cooking equipment that is fastened in given in Table 220.42 or Table 220.44. place 220.50 Motors. Motor loads shall be calculated in accordance (2) Clothes dryers with 430.24, 430.25, and 430.26 and with 440.6 for hermetic (3) Space heating equipment refrigerant motor-compressors. (4) Air-conditioning equipment 220.51 Fixed Electric Space Heating. Fixed electric space- 220.54 Electric Clothes Dryers — Dwelling Unit(s). The heating loads shall be calculated at 100 percent of the total con- load for household electric clothes dryers in a dwelling unit(s) nected load. However, in no case shall a feeder or service load shall be either 5000 watts (volt-amperes) or the nameplate rat- current rating be less than the rating of the largest branch circuit ing, whichever is larger, for each dryer served. The use of the supplied. demand factors in Table 220.54 shall be permitted. Where two

or more single-phase dryers are supplied by a 3-phase, 4-wire Exception: Where reduced loading of the conductors results feeder or service, the total load shall be calculated on the basis from units operating on duty-cycle, intermittently, or from all of twice the maximum number connected between any two Table 220.44 Demand Factors for Non-Dwelling Receptacle phases. Kilovolt-amperes (kVA) shall be considered equivalent Loads to kilowatts (kW) for loads calculated in this section. 220.55 Electric Cooking Appliances in Dwelling Units and Portion of Receptacle Load Household Cooking Appliances Used in Instructional Pro- to Which Demand Factor Applies (Volt-Amperes) Demand Factor (%) grams. The load for household electric ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, and other household cooking First 10 kVA or less at 100 appliances individually rated in excess of 13⁄4 kW shall be permitted Remainder over 10 kVA at 50 to be calculated in accordance with Table 220.55. Kilovolt-amperes 70–82 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE LOAD CALCULATIONS 220.82 Table 220.54 Demand Factors for Household Electric Clothes Exception: For 3-wire, 2-phase or 5-wire, 2-phase systems, the Dryers maximum unbalanced load shall be the maximum net calculated load between the neutral conductor and any one ungrounded Number of Dryers Demand Factor (%) conductor multiplied by 140 percent. (B) Permitted Reductions. A service or feeder supplying the 1–4 100 5 85 following loads shall be permitted to have an additional demand 6 75 factor of 70 percent applied to the amount in 220.61(B)(1) or 7 65 portion of the amount in 220.61(B)(2) determined by the fol- 8 60 lowing basic calculations: 9 55 10 50 (1) A feeder or service supplying household electric ranges, 11 47 wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, and 12–23 47% minus 1% for each dryer electric dryers, where the maximum unbalanced load has exceeding 11 been determined in accordance with Table 220.55 for 35% minus 0.5% for each dryer 24–42 ranges and Table 220.54 for dryers exceeding 23

(2) That portion of the unbalanced load in excess of 43 and over 25% 200 amperes where the feeder or service is supplied from a 3-wire dc or single-phase ac system; or a 4-wire, 3-phase system; or a 3-wire, 2-phase system; or a 5-wire, 2-phase (kVA) shall be considered equivalent to kilowatts (kW) for loads cal- system culated under this section. Informational Note: See Examples D1(a), D1(b), Where two or more single-phase ranges are supplied by a D2(b), D4(a), and D5(a) in Informative Annex D. 3-phase, 4-wire feeder or service, the total load shall be cal- culated on the basis of twice the maximum number connected (C) Prohibited Reductions. There shall be no reduction of the between any two phases. neutral or grounded conductor capacity applied to the amount in 220.61(C)(1), or portion of the amount in (C)(2), from that deter- Informational Note No. 1: See the examples in Informa- mined by the basic calculation: tive Annex D. (1) Any portion of a 3-wire circuit consisting of 2 ungrounded Informational Note No. 2: See Table 220.56 for commer-

conductors and the neutral conductor of a 4-wire, 3-phase, cial cooking equipment. wye-connected system 220.56 Kitchen Equipment — Other Than Dwelling (2) That portion consisting of nonlinear loads supplied from Unit(s). It shall be permissible to calculate the load for com- a 4-wire, wye-connected, 3-phase system mercial electric cooking equipment, dishwasher booster heat- Informational Note: A 3-phase, 4-wire, wye-connected ers, water heaters, and other kitchen equipment in accordance power system used to supply power to nonlinear loads with Table 220.56. These demand factors shall be applied to all may necessitate that the power system design allow for the equipment that has either thermostatic control or intermittent possibility of high harmonic neutral conductor currents. use as kitchen equipment. These demand factors shall not apply to space-heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment. Part IV. Optional Feeder and Service Load Calculations However, in no case shall the feeder or service calculated load 220.80 General. Optional feeder and service load calcula-

be less than the sum of the largest two kitchen equipment loads. tions shall be permitted in accordance with Part IV. 220.60 Noncoincident Loads. Where it is unlikely that two or 220.82 Dwelling Unit. more noncoincident loads will be in use simultaneously, it shall be permissible to use only the largest load(s) that will be used (A) Feeder and Service Load. This section applies to at one time for calculating the total load of a feeder or service. a dwelling unit having the total connected load served by a Where a motor is part of the noncoincident load and is not the single 120/240-volt or 208Y/120-volt set of 3-wire service or largest of the noncoincident loads, 125 percent of the motor feeder conductors with an ampacity of 100 or greater. It shall load shall be used in the calculation if it is the largest motor. be permissible to calculate the feeder and service loads in accordance with this section instead of the method specified in 220.61 Feeder or Service Neutral Load. Part III of this article. The calculated load shall be the result of (A) Basic Calculation.

The feeder or service neutral load adding the loads from 220.82(B) and (C). Feeder and service- shall be the maximum unbalance of the load determined by this entrance conductors whose calculated load is determined by article. The maximum unbalanced load shall be the maximum this optional calculation shall be permitted to have the neutral net calculated load between the neutral conductor and any one load determined by 220.61. ungrounded conductor. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–83

220.82 ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE LOAD CALCULATIONS Table 220.55 Demand Factors and Loads for Household Electric Ranges, Wall-Mounted Ovens, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units, and Other Household Cooking Appliances over 13⁄4 kW Rating (Column C to be used in all cases except as otherwise permitted in Note 3.) Demand Factor (%) (See Notes) Column C Maximum Demand (kW) Number of Column A Column B (See Notes) Appliances (Less than 31⁄2 kW Rating) (31⁄2 kW through 83⁄4 kW Rating) (Not over 12 kW Rating) 1 80 80 8 2 75 65 11 3 70 55 14 4 66 50 17 5 62 45 20 6 59 43 21 7 56 40 22 8 53 36 23 9 51 35 24 10 49 34 25 11 47 32 26 12 45 32 27 13 43 32 28 14 41 32 29 15 40 32 30 16 39 28 31 17 38 28 32 18 37 28 33 19 36 28 34 20 35 28 35 21 34 26 36 22 33 26 37 23 32 26 38 24 31 26 39 25 30 26 40 26–30 30 24 15 kW + 1 kW for each range 31–40 30 22 41–50 30 20 51–60 30 18 25 kW + 3⁄4 kW for each range 61 and over 30 16 Notes: 1. Over 12 kW through 27 kW ranges all of same rating. For ranges individually rated more than 12 kW but not more than 27 kW, the maximum demand in

Column C shall be increased 5 percent for each additional kilowatt of rating or major fraction thereof by which the rating of individual ranges exceeds 12 kW. 2. Over 83⁄4 kW through 27 kW ranges of unequal ratings. For ranges individually rated more than 83⁄4 kW and of different ratings, but none exceeding 27 kW, an average value of rating shall be calculated by adding together the ratings of all ranges to obtain the total connected load (using 12 kW for any range rated less than 12 kW) and dividing by the total number of ranges. Then the maximum demand in Column C shall be increased 5 percent for each kilowatt or major fraction thereof by which this average value exceeds 12 kW. 3. Over 13⁄4 kW through 83⁄4 kW. In lieu of the method provided in Column C, it shall be permissible to add the nameplate ratings of all household cooking appliances rated more than 1 3⁄4 kW but not more than 83⁄4 kW and multiply the sum by the demand factors specified in Column A or Column B for the given number of appliances.

Where the rating of cooking appliances falls under both Column A and Column B, the demand factors for each column shall be applied to the appliances for that column, and the results added together. 4. Branch-Circuit Load. It shall be permissible to calculate the branch-circuit load for one range in accordance with Table 220.55. The branch-circuit load for one wall-mounted oven or one counter-mounted cooking unit shall be the nameplate rating of the appliance. The branch-circuit load for a counter-mounted cooking unit and not more than two wall-mounted ovens, all supplied from a single branch circuit and located in the same room, shall be calculated by adding the nameplate rating of the individual appliances and treating this total as equivalent to one range. 5. This table shall also apply to household cooking appliances rated over 1 3⁄4 kW and used in instructional programs. 70–84 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE LOAD CALCULATIONS 220.83 Table 220.56 Demand Factors for Kitchen Equipment — Other expected to be continuous at the full nameplate value. Sys- Than Dwelling Unit(s) tems qualifying under this selection shall not be calculated under any other selection in 220.82(C). Number of Units Demand Factor of Equipment (%) 220.83 Existing Dwelling Unit. This section shall be permit- ted to be used to determine if the existing service or feeder 1 100 is of sufficient capacity to serve additional loads. Where the 2 100 dwelling unit is served by a 120/240-volt or 208Y/120-volt, 3 90 3-wire service, it shall be permissible to calculate the total load 4 80 in accordance with 220.83(A) or (B). 5 70 6 and over 65 (A) Where Additional Air-Conditioning Equipment or Elec- tric Space-Heating Equipment Is Not to Be Installed. The (B) General Loads. The general calculated load shall be not following percentages shall be used for existing and additional less than 100 percent of the first 10 kVA plus 40 percent of the new loads.

remainder of the following loads: Load (kVA) Percent of Load (1) 33volt-amperes/m 2 or 3 volt-amperes/ft 2 for general light- ing and general-use receptacles. The floor area for each First 8 kVA of load at 100 floor shall be calculated from the outside dimensions of the Remainder of load at 40 dwelling unit. The calculated floor area shall not include Load calculations shall include the following: open porches, garages, or unused or unfinished spaces not adaptable for future use. (1) General lighting and general-use receptacles at 33 volt- 2 2 (2) 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small- amperes/m or 3 volt-amperes/ft as determined by 220.12 appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch circuit (2) 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small- covered in 210.11(C)(1) and (C)(2). appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch circuit (3) The nameplate rating of the following: covered in 210.11(C)(1) and (C)(2) (3) The nameplate rating of the following: a. All appliances that are fastened in place, permanently connected, or located to be on a specific circuit a.

All appliances that are fastened in place, permanently b. Ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking connected, or located to be on a specific circuit units b. Ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking c. Clothes dryers that are not connected to the laundry units branch circuit specified in item (2) c. Clothes dryers that are not connected to the laundry d. Water heaters branch circuit specified in item (2) d. Water heaters (4) The nameplate ampere or kVA rating of all permanently connected motors not included in item (3). (B) Where Additional Air-Conditioning Equipment or Elec- tric Space-Heating Equipment Is to Be Installed. The fol- (C) Heating and Air-Conditioning Load. The largest of the lowing percentages shall be used for existing and additional following six selections (load in kVA) shall be included: new loads. The larger connected load of air conditioning or (1) 100 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of the air condition- space heating, but not both, shall be used. ing and cooling. Load Percent of Load

(2) 100 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of the heat pump when the heat pump is used without any supplemental elec- Air-conditioning equipment 100 tric heating. Central electric space heating 100 (3) 100 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of the heat pump com- Less than four separately controlled 100 pressor and 65 percent of the supplemental electric heating space-heating units First 8 kVA of all other loads 100 for central electric space-heating systems. If the heat pump Remainder of all other loads 40 compressor is prevented from operating at the same time as the supplementary heat, it does not need to be added to the Other loads shall include the following: supplementary heat for the total central space heating load. (1) General lighting and general-use receptacles at 33 volt- (4) 65 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of electric space heat- amperes/m2 or 3 volt-amperes/ft2 as determined by 220.12 ing if less than four separately controlled units. (2) 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small- (5) 40 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of electric space heat-

appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch circuit ing if four or more separately controlled units. covered in 210.11(C)(1) and (C)(2) (6) 100 percent of the nameplate ratings of electric thermal storage and other heating systems where the usual load is 2022 California Electrical Code 70–85

220.84 ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE LOAD CALCULATIONS (3) The nameplate rating of the following: optional calculation shall be permitted to have the neutral load determined by 220.61. a. All appliances that are fastened in place, permanently connected, or located to be on a specific circuit (B) House Loads. House loads shall be calculated in accor- b. Ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking dance with Part III of this article and shall be in addition to the units dwelling unit loads calculated in accordance with Table 220.84. c. Clothes dryers that are not connected to the laundry (C) Calculated Loads. The calculated load to which the branch circuit specified in item (2) demand factors of Table 220.84 apply shall include the d. Water heaters following: 220.84 Multifamily Dwelling. 2 2 (1) 33volt-amperes/m or 3 volt-amperes/ft for general light- (A) Feeder or Service Load. It shall be permissible to calcu- ing and general-use receptacles

late the load of a feeder or service that supplies three or more (2) 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small- dwelling units of a multifamily dwelling in accordance with appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch circuit Table 220.84 instead of Part III of this article if all the follow- covered in 210.11(C)(1) and (C)(2) ing conditions are met: (3) The nameplate rating of the following: (1) No dwelling unit is supplied by more than one feeder. a. All appliances that are fastened in place, permanently (2) Each dwelling unit is equipped with electric cooking connected, or located to be on a specific circuit equipment. b. Ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units Exception: When the calculated load for multifamily dwellings c. Clothes dryers that are not connected to the laundry without electric cooking in Part III of this article exceeds that cal- branch circuit specified in item (2) culated under Part IV for the identical load plus electric cooking d. Water heaters (based on 8 kW per unit), the lesser of the two loads shall be per- mitted to be used.

(4) The nameplate ampere or kVA rating of all permanently connected motors not included in item (3) (3) Each dwelling unit is equipped with either electric space (5) The larger of the air-conditioning load or the fixed electric heating or air conditioning, or both. Feeders and service space-heating load conductors whose calculated load is determined by this 220.85 Two Dwelling Units. Where two dwelling units are supplied by a single feeder and the calculated load under Part III of this article exceeds that for three identical units calculated Table 220.84 Optional Calculations — Demand Factors under 220.84, the lesser of the two loads shall be permitted to for Three or More Multifamily Dwelling Units be used. Number of Dwelling Units Demand Factor (%) 220.86 Schools. The calculation of a feeder or service load for schools shall be permitted in accordance with Table 220.86 in 3–5 45 lieu of Part III of this article where equipped with electric space 6–7 44 heating, air conditioning, or both. The connected load to which 8–10 43

the demand factors of Table 220.86 apply shall include all of 11 42 12–13 41 the interior and exterior lighting, power, water heating, cook- 14–15 40 ing, other loads, and the larger of the air-conditioning load or 16–17 39 space-heating load within the building or structure. 18–20 38 21 37 22–23 36 24–25 35 Table 220.86 Optional Method — Demand Factors 26–27 34 for Feeders and Service Conductors for Schools 28–30 33 31 32 32–33 31 Demand 34–36 30 Factor 37–38 29 Connected Load (Percent) 39–42 28 2 2 43–45 27 First 33 VA/m Plus, (3 VA/ft) at 100 2 46–50 26 Over 33 through (3 through 20 VA/ft) at 75 2 51–55 25 220 VA/m Plus, 2 56–61 24 Remainder over (20 VA/ft) at 25 62 and over 23 220 VA/m 2 70–86 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 220 — BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE LOAD CALCULATIONS 220.103 Table 220.88 Optional Method — Permitted Load Calculations for Service and Feeder Conductors for New Restaurants All Electric Restaurant Not All Electric Restaurant Total Connected Load (kVA) Calculated Loads (kVA) Calculated Loads (kVA) 0–200 80% 100% 201–325 10% (amount over 200) + 160.0 50% (amount over 200) + 200.0 326–800 50% (amount over 325) + 172.5 45% (amount over 325) + 262.5 Over 800 50% (amount over 800) + 410.0 20% (amount over 800) + 476.3 Note: Add all electrical loads, including both heating and cooling loads, to calculate the total connected load. Select the one demand factor that applies from the table, then multiply the total connected load by this single demand factor. Feeders and service conductors whose calculated load is shall be permitted in accordance with Table 220.88 in lieu of determined by this optional calculation shall be permitted to Part III of this article. have the neutral load determined by 220.61. Where the building

The overload protection of the service conductors shall be in or structure load is calculated by this optional method, feeders accordance with 230.90 and 240.4. within the building or structure shall have ampacity as permitted Feeder conductors shall not be required to be of greater in Part III of this article; however, the ampacity of an individual ampacity than the service conductors. feeder shall not be required to be larger than the ampacity for the entire building. Service or feeder conductors whose calculated load is determined by this optional calculation shall be permitted to This section shall not apply to portable classroom buildings. have the neutral load determined by 220.61. 220.87 Determining Existing Loads. The calculation of a feeder or service load for existing installations shall be permit- Part V. Farm Load Calculations ted to use actual maximum demand to determine the existing 220.100 General. Farm loads shall be calculated in accor- load under all of the following conditions: dance with Part V. (1) The maximum demand data is available for a 1-year period.

220.102 Farm Loads — Buildings and Other Loads. Exception: If the maximum demand data for a 1-year period is (A) Dwelling Unit. The feeder or service load of a farm not available, the calculated load shall be permitted to be based dwelling unit shall be calculated in accordance with the provi- on the maximum demand (the highest average kilowatts reached sions for dwellings in Part III or IV of this article. Where the and maintained for a 15-minute interval) continuously recorded dwelling has electric heat and the farm has electric grain-drying over a minimum 30-day period using a recording ammeter or systems, Part IV of this article shall not be used to calculate the power meter connected to the highest loaded phase of the feeder dwelling load where the dwelling and farm loads are supplied or service, based on the initial loading at the start of the recording. by a common service. The recording shall reflect the maximum demand of the feeder or service by being taken when the building or space is occupied (B) Other Than Dwelling Unit. Where a feeder or service

and shall include by measurement or calculation the larger of the supplies a farm building or other load having two or more sepa- heating or cooling equipment load, and other loads that may be rate branch circuits, the load for feeders, service conductors, periodic in nature due to seasonal or similar conditions. and service equipment shall be calculated in accordance with demand factors not less than indicated in Table 220.102. (2) The maximum demand at 125 percent plus the new load does not exceed the ampacity of the feeder or rating of the 220.103 Farm Loads — Total. Where supplied by a com- service. mon service, the total load of the farm for service conductors (3) The feeder has overcurrent protection in accordance with and service equipment shall be calculated in accordance with 240.4, and the service has overload protection in accor- the farm dwelling unit load and demand factors specified in dance with 230.90. Table 220.103. Where there is equipment in two or more farm equipment buildings or for loads having the same function,

Exception: If the feeder or service has any renewable energy such loads shall be calculated in accordance with Table 220.102 system (i.e., solar photovoltaic systems or wind electric sys- and shall be permitted to be combined as a single load in Table tems) or employs any form of peak load shaving, this calcula- 220.103 for calculating the total load. tion method shall not be permitted. 220.88 New Restaurants. Calculation of a service or feeder load, where the feeder serves the total load, for a new restaurant 2022 California Electrical Code 70–87

225.1 ARTICLE 225 — OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS Table 220.102 Method for Calculating Farm Loads for Other ∆ Table 225.3 Other Articles Than Dwelling Unit Equipment/Conductors Article Demand Factor Ampere Load at 240 Volts Maximum (%) Branch circuits 210 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, 725 The greater of the following: and power-limited circuits All loads that are expected to operate 100 Communications circuits 805 simultaneously, or Community antenna television and radio distribution 820 125 percent of the full load current systems of the largest motor, or Conductors for general wiring 310 First 60 amperes of the load Electrically driven or controlled irrigation machines 675 Next 60 amperes of all other loads 50 Electric signs and outline lighting 600 Remainder of other loads 25 Feeders 215 Fire alarm systems 760 Fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow-melting 426 equipment Table 220.103 Method for Calculating Total Farm Load Floating buildings 553 Grounding and bonding 250

Individual Loads Calculated in Demand Factor Hazardous (classified) locations 500 Accordance with Table 220.102 (%) Hazardous (classified) locations — specific 510 Marinas and boatyards 555 Largest load 100 Medium-voltage conductors and cable 311 Second largest load 75 Messenger-supported wiring 396 Third largest load 65 Mobile homes, manufactured homes, and mobile home 550 Remaining loads 50 parks Open wiring on insulators 398 Note: To this total load, add the load of the farm dwelling unit calculated in Over 1000 volts, general 490 accordance with Part III or IV of this article. Where the dwelling has electric Overcurrent protection 240 heat and the farm has electric grain-drying systems, Part IV of this article shall not be used to calculate the dwelling load. Radio and television equipment 810 Services 230 Solar photovoltaic systems 690 Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations 680 Use and identification of grounded conductors 200 ARTICLE 225 Outside Branch Circuits and Feeders Exception: Equipment grounding conductors and grounded cir- 225.1 Scope.

This article covers requirements for outside cuit conductors shall be permitted to be bare or covered as spe- branch circuits and feeders run on or between buildings, struc- cifically permitted elsewhere in this Code. tures, or poles on the premises; and electrical equipment and 225.5 Size of Conductors 1000 Volts, Nominal, or Less. The wiring for the supply of utilization equipment that is located ampacity of outdoor branch-circuit and feeder conductors shall on or attached to the outside of buildings, structures, or poles. be in accordance with 310.14 based on loads as determined Informational Note: For additional information on under 220.10 and Part III of Article 220. wiring over 1000 volts, see ANSI/IEEE C2-2017, National 225.6 Conductor Size and Support. Electrical Safety Code. (A) Overhead Spans. Open individual conductors shall not 225.3 Other Articles. Application of other articles, including be smaller than the following: additional requirements to specific cases of equipment and con- (1) For 1000 volts, nominal, or less, 10 AWG copper or ductors, is shown in Table 225.3.

8 AWG aluminum for spans up to 15 m (50 ft) in length, Part I. General and 8 AWG copper or 6 AWG aluminum for a longer span unless supported by a messenger wire 225.4 Conductor Covering. Where within 3.0 m (10 ft) of (2) For over 1000 volts, nominal, 6 AWG copper or 4 AWG any building or structure other than supporting poles or tow- aluminum where open individual conductors, and 8 AWG ers, open individual (aerial) overhead conductors shall be insu- copper or 6 AWG aluminum where in cable lated for the nominal voltage. The insulation of conductors in cables or raceways, except Type MI cable, shall be of thermoset (B) Festoon Lighting. Overhead conductors for festoon or thermoplastic type and, in wet locations, shall comply with lighting shall not be smaller than 12 AWG unless the conduc- 310.10(C). The insulation of conductors for festoon lighting tors are supported by messenger wires. In all spans exceeding shall be of the thermoset or thermoplastic type. 12 m (40 ft), the conductors shall be supported by messenger 70–88 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 225 — OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 225.17 wire. The messenger wire shall be supported by strain insulators. of 230.52. Overhead branch circuits and feeders attached to Conductors or messenger wires shall not be attached to any buildings or structures shall be installed in accordance with the fire escape, downspout, or plumbing equipment. requirements of 230.54. 225.7 Lighting Equipment Installed Outdoors. 225.12 Open-Conductor Supports. Open conductors shall be supported on knobs, racks, brackets, or strain insulators, that (A) General. For the supply of lighting equipment installed are made of glass, porcelain, or other approved materials. outdoors, the branch circuits shall comply with Article 210 and 225.7(B) through (D). 225.14 Open-Conductor Spacings. (B) Common Neutral. The ampacity of the neutral conduc- (A) 1000 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Conductors of 1000 volts, tor shall not be less than the maximum net calculated load nominal, or less, shall comply with the spacings provided in current between the neutral conductor and all ungrounded Table 230.51(C).

conductors connected to any one phase of the circuit. (B) Over 1000 Volts, Nominal. Conductors of over 1000 volts, (C) 277 Volts to Ground. Circuits exceeding 120 volts, nom- nominal, shall comply with the spacings provided in 110.36 inal, between conductors and not exceeding 277 volts, nominal, and 490.24. to ground shall be permitted to supply luminaires for illumina- (C) Separation from Other Circuits. Open conductors shall tion of outdoor areas of industrial establishments, office build- be separated from open conductors of other circuits or systems ings, schools, stores, and other commercial or public buildings. by not less than 100 mm (4 in.). (D) 1000 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits exceeding (D) Conductors on Poles. Conductors on poles shall have a 277 volts, nominal, to ground and not exceeding 1000 volts, separation of not less than 300 mm (1 ft) where not placed on nominal, between conductors shall be permitted to supply racks or brackets. Conductors supported on poles shall provide a the auxiliary equipment of electric-discharge lamps in accor-

horizontal climbing space not less than the following: dance with 210.6(D)(1). • (1) Power conductors below communications conductors — ∆ 225.10 Wiring on Buildings (or Other Structures). The 750 mm (30 in.) installation of outside wiring on surfaces of buildings (or other (2) Power conductors alone or above communications structures) shall be permitted for circuits not exceeding 1000 volts, conductors: nominal, as the following: a. 300 volts or less — 600 mm (24 in.) (1) Auxiliary gutters b. Over 300 volts — 750 mm (30 in.) (2) Busways (3) Cable trays (3) Communications conductors below power conductors — (4) Cablebus same as power conductors (5) Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) (4) Communications conductors alone — no requirement (6) Flexible metal conduit (FMC) ∆ 225.15 Supports over Buildings. Outside branch-circuit (7) Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) and feeder conductors passing over a building shall be securely (8) Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) supported. (9) Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC)

(10) Messenger-supported wiring 225.16 Attachment to Buildings. (11) Open wiring on insulators (A) Point of Attachment. The point of attachment to a (12) Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) building shall be in accordance with 230.26. (13) Rigid metal conduit (RMC) (B) Means of Attachment. The means of attachment to a (14) Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) building shall be in accordance with 230.27. (15) Type MC cable (16) Type MI cable 225.17 Masts as Supports. Only feeder or branch-circuit (17) Type SE cable conductors specified within this section shall be permitted to (18) Type TC-ER cable be attached to the feeder and/or branch-circuit mast. Masts used (19) Type UF cable for the support of final spans of feeders or branch circuits shall (20) Wireways be installed in accordance with 225.17(A) and (B). Circuits of over 1000 volts, nominal, shall be installed as (A) Strength. The mast shall have adequate strength or be provided in 300.37. supported by braces or guy wires to safely withstand the strain imposed by the overhead feeder or branch-circuit conductors.

225.11 Feeder and Branch-Circuit Conductors Enter- Hubs intended for use with a conduit serving as a mast for sup- ing, Exiting, or Attached to Buildings or Structures. Feeder port of feeder or branch-circuit conductors shall be identified and branch-circuit conductors entering or exiting buildings or for use with a mast. structures shall be installed in accordance with the requirements 2022 California Electrical Code 70–89

225.18 ARTICLE 225 — OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS (B) Attachment. Feeder and/or branch-circuit conductors (B) From Nonbuilding or Nonbridge Structures. From shall not be attached to a mast where the connection is between signs, chimneys, radio and television antennas, tanks, and other a weatherhead or the end of the conduit and a coupling where nonbuilding or nonbridge structures, clearances — vertical, the coupling is located above the last point of securement to diagonal, and horizontal — shall not be less than 900 mm (3 ft). the building or other structure, or where the coupling is located (C) Horizontal Clearances. Clearances shall not be less above the building or other structure. than 900 mm (3 ft). 225.18 Clearance for Overhead Conductors and Cables. (D) Final Spans. Final spans of feeders or branch circuits Overhead spans of open conductors and open multiconductor shall comply with 225.19(D)(1), (D)(2), and (D)(3). cables of not over 1000 volts, nominal, shall have a clearance of not less than the following: (1) Clearance from Windows. Final spans to the building

they supply, or from which they are fed, shall be permitted to (1) 3.0 m (10 ft) — above finished grade, sidewalks, or from any be attached to the building, but they shall be kept not less than platform or projection that will permit personal contact 900 mm (3 ft) from windows that are designed to be opened, where the voltage does not exceed 150 volts to ground and and from doors, porches, balconies, ladders, stairs, fire escapes, accessible to pedestrians only or similar locations. (2) 3.7 m (12 ft) — over residential property and driveways, and those commercial areas not subject to truck traffic where Exception: Conductors run above the top level of a window the voltage does not exceed 300 volts to ground shall be permitted to be less than the 900 mm (3 ft) requirement. (3) 4.5 m (15 ft) — for those areas listed in the 3.7 m (12 ft) clas - (2) Vertical Clearance. The vertical clearance of final spans sification where the voltage exceeds 300 volts to ground above or within 900 mm (3 ft) measured horizontally of plat-

(4) 5.5 m (18 ft) — over public streets, alleys, roads, park- forms, projections, or surfaces that will permit personal contact ing areas subject to truck traffic, driveways on other than shall be maintained in accordance with 225.18. residential property, and other land traversed by vehicles, (3) Building Openings. The overhead branch-circuit and feeder such as cultivated, grazing, forest, and orchard conductors shall not be installed beneath openings through (5) 7.5 m (24 1⁄2 ft) — over track rails of railroads which materials may be moved, such as openings in farm and 225.19 Clearances from Buildings for Conductors of Not commercial buildings, and shall not be installed where they over 1000 Volts, Nominal. Overhead spans of open con- obstruct entrance to these openings. ductors and open multiconductor cables shall comply with (E) Zone for Fire Ladders. Where buildings exceed three sto- 225.19(A), (B), (C), and (D). ries or 15 m (50 ft) in height, overhead lines shall be arranged, (A) Above Roofs.

Overhead spans of open conductors and open where practicable, so that a clear space (or zone) at least 1.8 m multiconductor cables shall have a vertical clearance of not less (6 ft) wide will be left either adjacent to the buildings or begin- than 2.7 m (8 ft 6 in.) above the roof surface. The vertical clear- ning not over 2.5 m (8 ft) from them to facilitate the raising of ance above the roof level shall be maintained for a distance not ladders when necessary for fire fighting. less than 900 mm (3 ft) in all directions from the edge of the roof. 225.20 Protection Against Physical Damage. Conductors Exception No. 1: The area above a roof surface subject to installed on buildings, structures, or poles shall be protected pedestrian or vehicular traffic shall have a vertical clearance against physical damage as provided for services in 230.50. from the roof surface in accordance with the clearance require- 225.21 Multiconductor Cables on Exterior Surfaces of ments of 225.18. Buildings (or Other Structures). Supports for multiconduc- Exception No.

2: Where the voltage between conductors does tor cables on exterior surfaces of buildings (or other structures) not exceed 300, and the roof has a slope of 100 mm in 300 mm shall be as provided in 230.51. (4 in. in 12 in.) or greater, a reduction in clearance to 900 mm 225.22 Raceways on Exterior Surfaces of Buildings or Other (3 ft) shall be permitted. Structures. Raceways on exteriors of buildings or other structures Exception No. 3: Where the voltage between conductors does not shall be arranged to drain and shall be listed or approved for exceed 300, a reduction in clearance above only the overhanging use in wet locations. portion of the roof to not less than 450 mm (18 in.) shall be per- 225.24 Outdoor Lampholders. Where outdoor lampholders mitted if (1) not more than 1.8 m (6 ft) of the conductors, 1.2 m are attached as pendants, the connections to the circuit wires (4 ft) horizontally, pass above the roof overhang, and (2) they are shall be staggered. Where such lampholders have terminals of terminated at a through-the-roof raceway or approved support.

a type that puncture the insulation and make contact with the Exception No. 4: The requirement for maintaining the verti- conductors, they shall be attached only to conductors of the cal clearance 900 mm (3 ft) from the edge of the roof shall stranded type. not apply to the final conductor span where the conductors are 225.25 Location of Outdoor Lamps. Locations of lamps attached to the side of a building. for outdoor lighting shall be below all energized conductors, 70–90 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 225 — OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 225.33 transformers, or other electric utilization equipment, unless (1) Multiple-occupancy buildings where there is no space either of the following apply: available for supply equipment accessible to all occupants (2) A single building or other structure sufficiently large to (1) Clearances or other safeguards are provided for relamping make two or more supplies necessary operations. (2) Equipment is controlled by a disconnecting means that is (D) Capacity Requirements. Additional feeders or branch cir- lockable open in accordance with 110.25. cuits shall be permitted where the capacity requirements are in excess of 2000 amperes at a supply voltage of 1000 volts or less. 225.26 Vegetation as Support. Vegetation such as trees shall not be used for support of overhead conductor spans. (E) Different Characteristics. Additional feeders or branch circuits shall be permitted for different voltages, frequencies, or 225.27 Raceway Seal. Where a raceway enters a building or phases, or for different uses such as control of outside lighting

structure from outside, it shall be sealed. Spare or unused race- from multiple locations. ways shall also be sealed. Sealants shall be identified for use with cable insulation, conductor insulation, bare conductor, (F) Documented Switching Procedures. Additional feed- shield, or other components. ers or branch circuits shall be permitted to supply installations under single management where documented safe switching Part II. Buildings or Other Structures Supplied by a procedures are established and maintained for disconnection. Feeder(s) or Branch Circuit(s) 225.31 Disconnecting Means. Means shall be provided for 225.30 Number of Supplies. A building or other structure that disconnecting all ungrounded conductors that supply or pass is served by a branch circuit or feeder on the load side of a ser- through the building or structure. vice disconnecting means shall be supplied by only one feeder ∆ 225.32 Location. The disconnecting means shall be installed or branch circuit unless permitted in 225.30(A) through (F). For either inside or outside of the building or structure served or

the purpose of this section, a multiwire branch circuit shall be where the conductors pass through the building or structure. The considered a single circuit. disconnecting means shall be at a readily accessible location Where a branch circuit or feeder originates in these nearest the point of entrance of the conductors. For the purposes additional buildings or other structures, only one feeder or of this section, the requirements in 230.6 shall be utilized. branch circuit shall be permitted to supply power back to the Exception No. 1: For installations under single management, original building or structure, unless permitted in 225.30(A) where documented safe switching procedures are established through (F). and maintained for disconnection, and where the installation (A) Special Conditions. Additional feeders or branch circuits is monitored by qualified individuals, the disconnecting means shall be permitted to supply the following: shall be permitted to be located elsewhere on the premises. (1) Fire pumps Exception No. 2: For buildings or other structures qualifying

(2) Emergency systems under Article 685, the disconnecting means shall be permitted to (3) Legally required standby systems be located elsewhere on the premises. (4) Optional standby systems Exception No. 3: For towers or poles used as lighting standards, (5) Parallel power production systems the disconnecting means shall be permitted to be located else- (6) Systems designed for connection to multiple sources of where on the premises. supply for the purpose of enhanced reliability (7) Electric vehicle charging systems listed, labeled, and Exception No. 4: For poles or similar structures used only for identified for more than a single branch circuit or feeder support of signs installed in accordance with Article 600, the (8) Docking facilities and piers disconnecting means shall be permitted to be located elsewhere on the premises. N (B) Common Supply Equipment. Where feeder conductors originate in the same panelboard, switchboard, or other distribu- 225.33 Maximum Number of Disconnects. tion equipment, and each feeder terminates in a single discon- (A) General.

The disconnecting means for each supply permit- necting means, not more than six feeders shall be permitted. ted by 225.30 shall consist of not more than six switches or six Where more than one feeder is installed in accordance with this circuit breakers mounted in a single enclosure, in a group of section, all feeder disconnects supplying the building or structure separate enclosures, or in or on a switchboard or switchgear. shall be grouped in the same location, and the requirements of There shall be no more than six disconnects per supply grouped 225.33 shall not apply. Each disconnect shall be marked to indi- in any one location. cate the load served. Exception: For the purposes of this section, disconnecting (C) Special Occupancies. By special permission, additional means used solely for the control circuit of the ground-fault feeders or branch circuits shall be permitted for either of the protection system, or the control circuit of the power-operated following: 2022 California Electrical Code 70–91

225.34 ARTICLE 225 — OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS supply disconnecting means, installed as part of the listed equip- Exception No. 2: This identification shall not be required for ment, shall not be considered a supply disconnecting means. branch circuits installed from a dwelling unit to a second building or structure. (B) Single-Pole Units. Two or three single-pole switches or breakers capable of individual operation shall be permitted 225.38 Disconnect Construction. Disconnecting means on multiwire circuits, one pole for each ungrounded conduc- shall meet the requirements of 225.38(A) through (D). tor, as one multipole disconnect, provided they are equipped (A) Manually or Power Operable. The disconnecting with identified handle ties or a master handle to disconnect all means shall consist of either (1) a manually operable switch or a ungrounded conductors with no more than six operations of circuit breaker equipped with a handle or other suitable operat- the hand. ing means or (2) a power-operable switch or circuit breaker, 225.34 Grouping of Disconnects.

provided the switch or circuit breaker can be opened by hand in the event of a power failure. (A) General. The two to six disconnects as permitted in 225.33 shall be grouped. Each disconnect shall be marked to (B) Simultaneous Opening of Poles. Each building or struc- indicate the load served. ture disconnecting means shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded supply conductors that it controls from the building Exception: One of the two to six disconnecting means permitted or structure wiring system. in 225.33, where used only for a water pump also intended to provide fire protection, shall be permitted to be located remote (C) Disconnection of Grounded Conductor. Where the from the other disconnecting means. building or structure disconnecting means does not disconnect the grounded conductor from the grounded conductors in the (B) Additional Disconnecting Means. The one or more building or structure wiring, other means shall be provided for additional disconnecting means for fire pumps or for emergency, this purpose at the location of the disconnecting means. A ter-

legally required standby or optional standby system permitted minal or bus to which all grounded conductors can be attached by 225.30 shall be installed sufficiently remote from the one to by means of pressure connectors shall be permitted for this six disconnecting means for normal supply to minimize the pos- purpose. sibility of simultaneous interruption of supply. In a multisection switchboard or switchgear, disconnects for 225.35 Access to Occupants. In a multiple-occupancy the grounded conductor shall be permitted to be in any section building, each occupant shall have access to the occupant’s sup- of the switchboard or switchgear, if the switchboard section or ply disconnecting means. switchgear section is marked to indicate a grounded conductor Exception: In a multiple-occupancy building where electric disconnect is contained within the equipment. supply and electrical maintenance are provided by the build- (D) Indicating. The building or structure disconnecting ing management and where these are under continuous building

means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the open or closed management supervision, the supply disconnecting means sup- position. plying more than one occupancy shall be permitted to be acces- sible to authorized management personnel only. 225.39 Rating of Disconnect. The feeder or branch-circuit disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than the 225.36 Type of Disconnecting Means. The disconnecting calculated load to be supplied, determined in accordance with means specified in 225.31 shall be comprised of a circuit Parts I and II of Article 220 for branch circuits, Part III or IV breaker, molded case switch, general-use switch, snap switch, of Article 220 for feeders, or Part V of Article 220 for farm or other approved means. Where applied in accordance with loads. Where the branch circuit or feeder disconnecting means 250.32(B), Exception No. 1, the disconnecting means shall be consists of more than one switch or circuit breaker, as permitted suitable for use as service equipment. by 225.33, combining the ratings of all the switches or circuit 225.37 Identification.

Where a building or structure has any breakers for determining the rating of the disconnecting means combination of feeders, branch circuits, or services passing shall be permitted. In no case shall the rating be lower than through it or supplying it, a permanent plaque or directory shall specified in 225.39(A), (B), (C), or (D). be installed at each feeder and branch-circuit disconnect loca- (A) One-Circuit Installation. For installations to supply tion denoting all other services, feeders, or branch circuits sup- only limited loads of a single branch circuit, the branch cir- plying that building or structure or passing through that building cuit disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than or structure and the area served by each. 15 amperes. Exception No. 1: A plaque or directory shall not be required (B) Two-Circuit Installations. For installations consisting of for large-capacity multibuilding industrial installations under not more than two 2-wire branch circuits, the feeder or branch- single management, where it is ensured that disconnection can

circuit disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than be accomplished by establishing and maintaining safe switch- 30 amperes. ing procedures. 70–92 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 225 — OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 225.56 (C) One-Family Dwelling. For a one-family dwelling, the (C) Locking. Disconnecting means shall be lockable open in feeder disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than accordance with 110.25. 100 amperes, 3-wire. Exception: Where an individual disconnecting means consists (D) All Others. For all other installations, the feeder or of fused cutouts, a suitable enclosure capable of being locked branch-circuit disconnecting means shall have a rating of not and sized to contain all cutout fuse holders shall be installed at less than 60 amperes. a convenient location to the fused cutouts. 225.40 Access to Overcurrent Protective Devices. Where (D) Indicating. Disconnecting means shall clearly indicate a feeder overcurrent device is not readily accessible, branch- whether they are in the open “off” or closed “on” position. circuit overcurrent devices shall be installed on the load side, (E) Uniform Position. Where disconnecting means handles shall be mounted in a readily accessible location, and shall be of

are operated vertically, the “up” position of the handle shall be a lower ampere rating than the feeder overcurrent device. the “on” position. Exception: A switching device having more than one “on” Part III. Over 1000 Volts. position, such as a double throw switch, shall not be required to 225.50 Sizing of Conductors. The sizing of conductors over comply with this requirement. 1000 volts shall be in accordance with 210.19(B) for branch (F) Identification. Where a building or structure has any circuits and 215.2(B) for feeders. combination of feeders, branch circuits, or services passing 225.51 Isolating Switches. Where oil switches or air, oil, vac- through or supplying it, a permanent plaque or directory shall be uum, or sulfur hexafluoride circuit breakers constitute a building installed at each feeder and branch-circuit disconnect location disconnecting means, an isolating switch with visible break con- that denotes all other services, feeders, or branch circuits supply-

tacts and meeting the requirements of 230.204(B), (C), and (D) ing that building or structure or passing through that building or shall be installed on the supply side of the disconnecting means structure and the area served by each. and all associated equipment. 225.56 Inspections and Tests. Exception: The isolating switch shall not be required where the (A) Pre-Energization and Operating Tests. The complete disconnecting means is mounted on removable truck panels or electrical system design, including settings for protective, switchgear units that cannot be opened unless the circuit is dis- switching, and control circuits, shall be prepared in advance connected and that, when removed from the normal operating and made available on request to the authority having juris- position, automatically disconnect the circuit breaker or switch diction and shall be performance tested when first installed from all energized parts. on-site. Each protective, switching, and control circuit shall 225.52 Disconnecting Means. be adjusted in accordance with the system design and tested (A) Location.

A building or structure disconnecting means by actual operation using current injection or equivalent meth- shall be located in accordance with 225.32, or, if not readily ods as necessary to ensure that each and every such circuit accessible, it shall be operable by mechanical linkage from operates correctly to the satisfaction of the authority having a readily accessible point. For multibuilding industrial installa- jurisdiction. tions under single management, it shall be permitted to be elec- (1) Instrument Transformers. All instrument transformers trically operated by a readily accessible, remote-control device shall be tested to verify correct polarity and burden. in a separate building or structure. (2) Protective Relays. Each protective relay shall be dem- (B) Type. Each building or structure disconnect shall simul- onstrated to operate by injecting current or voltage, or both, taneously disconnect all ungrounded supply conductors it at the associated instrument transformer output terminal and

controls and shall have a fault-closing rating not less than the observing that the associated switching and signaling functions available fault current at its supply terminals. occur correctly and in proper time and sequence to accomplish Exception: Where the individual disconnecting means con- the protective function intended. sists of fused cutouts, the simultaneous disconnection of all (3) Switching Circuits. Each switching circuit shall be observed ungrounded supply conductors shall not be required if there is to operate the associated equipment being switched. a means to disconnect the load before opening the cutouts. A (4) Control and Signal Circuits. Each control or signal cir- permanent legible sign shall be installed adjacent to the fused cuit shall be observed to perform its proper control function or cutouts and shall read DISCONNECT LOAD BEFORE OPEN- produce a correct signal output. ING CUTOUTS. (5) Metering Circuits. All metering circuits shall be verified Where fused switches or separately mounted fuses are

to operate correctly from voltage and current sources in a simi- installed, the fuse characteristics shall be permitted to contribute lar manner to protective relay circuits. to the fault-closing rating of the disconnecting means. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–93

225.60 ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES (6) Acceptance Tests. Complete acceptance tests shall be Table 225.61 Clearances over Buildings and Other Structures performed, after the substation installation is completed, on all assemblies, equipment, conductors, and control and protective Horizontal Vertical Clearance from Conductors systems, as applicable, to verify the integrity of all the systems. or Live Parts from: m ft m ft (7) Relays and Metering Utilizing Phase Differences. All Building walls, projections, and 2.3 7.5 — — relays and metering that use phase differences for operation windows shall be verified by measuring phase angles at the relay under Balconies, catwalks, and similar 2.3 7.5 4.1 13.5 actual load conditions after operation commences. areas accessible to people Over or under roofs or projections — — 3.8 12.5 (B) Test Report. A test report covering the results of the tests not readily accessible to people required in 225.56(A) shall be delivered to the authority having Over roofs accessible to vehicles — — 4.1 13.5 jurisdiction prior to energization. but not trucks

Over roofs accessible to trucks — — 5.6 18.5 Informational Note: For an example of acceptance Other structures 2.3 7.5 — — specifications, see ANSI/NETA ATS-2013, Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems, published by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association. 22 kV, nominal, to ground or less shall be not less than the values 225.60 Clearances over Roadways, Walkways, Rail, Water, shown in Table 225.61. and Open Land. (B) Over 22 kV Nominal to Ground. Clearances for the (A) 22 kV, Nominal, to Ground or Less. The clearances categories shown in Table 225.61 shall be increased by 10 mm over roadways, walkways, rail, water, and open land for con- (0.4 in.) per kV above 22,000 volts. ductors and live parts up to 22 kV, nominal, to ground or less Informational Note: For additional information, see shall be not less than the values shown in Table 225.60. ANSI/IEEE C2-2017, National Electrical Safety Code. (B) Over 22 kV Nominal to Ground. Clearances for the categories shown in Table 225.60 shall be increased by 10 mm

(0.4 in.) per kV above 22,000 volts. ARTICLE 230 (C) Special Cases. For special cases, such as where crossings Services will be made over lakes, rivers, or areas using large vehicles such as mining operations, specific designs shall be engi- neered considering the special circumstances and shall be 230.1 Scope. This article covers service conductors and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. equipment for control and protection of services and their installation requirements. Informational Note: For additional information, see ANSI/IEEE C2-2017, National Electrical Safety Code. Informational Note: See Figure 230.1. 225.61 Clearances over Buildings and Other Structures. Part I. General (A) 22 kV Nominal to Ground or Less. The clearances over 230.2 Number of Services. A building or other structure buildings and other structures for conductors and live parts up to served shall be supplied by only one service unless permitted in 230.2(A) through (D). For the purpose of 230.40, Excep- tion No. 2 only, underground sets of conductors, 1/0 AWG and

Table 225.60 Clearances over Roadways, Walkways, Rail, Water, larger, running to the same location and connected together at and Open Land their supply end but not connected together at their load end shall be considered to be supplying one service. Clearance (A) Special Conditions. Additional services shall be permit- Location m ft ted to supply the following: (1) Fire pumps Open land subject to vehicles, cultivation, 5.6 18.5 or grazing (2) Emergency systems Roadways, driveways, parking lots, and alleys 5.6 18.5 (3) Legally required standby systems Walkways 4.1 13.5 (4) Optional standby systems Rails 8.1 26.5 (5) Parallel power production systems Spaces and ways for pedestrians and restricted traffic 4.4 14.5 (6) Systems designed for connection to multiple sources of Water areas not suitable for boating 5.2 17.0 supply for the purpose of enhanced reliability 70–94 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES 230.9 (E) Identification. Where a building or structure is supplied General Part I Overhead Service Conductors Part II by more than one service, or any combination of branch cir- Underground Service Conductors Part III cuits, feeders, and services, a permanent plaque or directory Service-Entrance Conductors Part IV Service Equipment—General Part V shall be installed at each service disconnect location denoting Service Equipment—Disconnecting Means Part VI all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying that Service Equipment—Overcurrent Protection Part VII Services Exceeding 1000 Volts, Nominal Part VIII building or structure and the area served by each. See 225.37. Serving Utility 230.3 One Building or Other Structure Not to Be Supplied Through Another. Service conductors supplying a building Overhead Underground Last pole Street main or other structure shall not pass through the interior of another building or other structure. Part II Overhead Underground Part III

service conductors service conductors 230.6 Conductors Considered Outside the Building. Con- 230.24 Clearances Depth of burial 230.32 ductors shall be considered outside of a building or other struc- and protection ture under any of the following conditions: Service head Terminal box, (1) Where installed under not less than 50 mm (2 in.) of con- meter, or other enclosure crete beneath a building or other structure (2) Where installed within a building or other structure in a raceway that is encased in concrete or brick not less than Service-entrance Part IV 50 mm (2 in.) thick conductors (3) Where installed in any vault that meets the construction requirements of Article 450, Part III Service equipment—general Part V (4) Where installed in conduit and under not less than 450 mm Grounding and bonding Article 250 (18 in.) of earth beneath a building or other structure Service equipment— (5) Where installed within rigid metal conduit (Type RMC) or disconnecting means Part VI intermediate metal conduit (Type IMC) used to accom-

Service equipment— modate the clearance requirements in 230.24 and routed overcurrent protection Part VII directly through an eave but not a wall of a building Branch circuits Articles 210, 225 230.7 Other Conductors in Raceway or Cable. Conductors Feeders Articles 215, 225 other than service conductors shall not be installed in the same service raceway or service cable in which the service conduc- tors are installed. FIGURE 230.1 Services. Exception No. 1: Grounding electrode conductors or supply side bonding jumpers or conductors shall be permitted within service raceways. (B) Special Occupancies. By special permission, additional Exception No. 2: Load management control conductors hav- services shall be permitted for either of the following: ing overcurrent protection shall be permitted within service raceways. (1) Multiple-occupancy buildings where there is no available space for service equipment accessible to all occupants 230.8 Raceway Seal. Where a service raceway enters a

(2) A single building or other structure sufficiently large to building or structure from an underground distribution system, make two or more services necessary it shall be sealed in accordance with 300.5(G). Spare or unused raceways shall also be sealed. Sealants shall be identified for (C) Capacity Requirements. Additional services shall be use with the cable insulation, shield, or other components. permitted under any of the following: 230.9 Clearances on Buildings. Service conductors and (1) Where the capacity requirements are in excess of 2000 final spans shall comply with 230.9(A), (B), and (C). amperes at a supply voltage of 1000 volts or less (2) Where the load requirements of a single-phase installa- (A) Clearances. Service conductors installed as open con- tion are greater than the serving agency normally supplies ductors or multiconductor cable without an overall outer jacket through one service shall have a clearance of not less than 900 mm (3 ft) from win- (3) By special permission dows that are designed to be opened, doors, porches, balconies,

ladders, stairs, fire escapes, or similar locations. (D) Different Characteristics. Additional services shall be permitted for different voltages, frequencies, or phases, or for Exception: Conductors run above the top level of a window different uses, such as for different rate schedules. shall be permitted to be less than the 900 mm (3 ft) requirement. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–95

230.10 ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES (B) Vertical Clearance. The vertical clearance of final spans be permitted if (1) not more than 1.8 m (6 ft) of overhead service above, or within 900 mm (3 ft) measured horizontally of plat- conductors, 1.2 m (4 ft) horizontally, pass above the roof over- forms, projections, or surfaces that will permit personal contact hang, and (2) they are terminated at a through-the-roof raceway shall be maintained in accordance with 230.24(B). or approved support. (C) Building Openings. Overhead service conductors shall not Informational Note: See 230.28 for mast supports. be installed beneath openings through which materials may be Exception No. 4: The requirement for maintaining the verti- moved, such as openings in farm and commercial buildings, cal clearance 900 mm (3 ft) from the edge of the roof shall and shall not be installed where they obstruct entrance to these not apply to the final conductor span where the service drop building openings. or overhead service conductors are attached to the side of a 230.10 Vegetation as Support.

Vegetation such as trees shall building. not be used for support of overhead service conductors or ser- Exception No. 5: Where the voltage between conductors does vice equipment. not exceed 300 and the roof area is guarded or isolated, a reduc- tion in clearance to 900 mm (3 ft) shall be permitted. Part II. Overhead Service Conductors (B) Vertical Clearance for Overhead Service Conductors. 230.22 Insulation or Covering. Individual conductors shall be Overhead service conductors, where not in excess of insulated or covered. 1000 volts, nominal, shall have the following minimum clear- Exception: The grounded conductor of a multiconductor cable ance from final grade: shall be permitted to be bare. (1) 3.0 m (10 ft) — at the electrical service entrance to build- 230.23 Size and Ampacity. ings, also at the lowest point of the drip loop of the building (A) General. Conductors shall have sufficient ampacity to electrical entrance, and above areas or sidewalks acces- carry the current for the load as calculated in accordance with sible only to pedestrians, measured from final grade or

Article 220 and shall have adequate mechanical strength. other accessible surface only for overhead service conduc- tors supported on and cabled together with a grounded bare (B) Minimum Size. The conductors shall not be smaller than messenger where the voltage does not exceed 150 volts to 8 AWG copper or 6 AWG aluminum or copper-clad aluminum. ground Exception: Conductors supplying only limited loads of a sin- (2) 3.7 m (12 ft) — over residential property and driveways, and gle branch circuit — such as small polyphase power, controlled those commercial areas not subject to truck traffic where water heaters, and similar loads — shall not be smaller than the voltage does not exceed 300 volts to ground 12 AWG hard-drawn copper or equivalent. (3) 4.5 m (15 ft) — for those areas listed in the 3.7 m (12 ft) clas - sification where the voltage exceeds 300 volts to ground (C) Grounded Conductors. The grounded conductor shall not (4) 5.5 m (18 ft) — over public streets, alleys, roads, parking be less than the minimum size as required by 250.24(C).

areas subject to truck traffic, driveways on other than resi- 230.24 Clearances. Overhead service conductors shall not dential property, and other land such as cultivated, grazing, be readily accessible and shall comply with 230.24(A) through forest, and orchard (E) for services not over 1000 volts, nominal. (5) 7.5 m (24 1⁄2 ft) over tracks of railroads (A) Above Roofs. Conductors shall have a vertical clearance (C) Clearance from Building Openings. See 230.9. of not less than 2.5 m (8 ft) above the roof surface. The vertical (D) Clearance from Swimming Pools. See 680.9. clearance above the roof level shall be maintained for a distance of not less than 900 mm (3 ft) in all directions from the edge (E) Clearance from Communication Wires and Cables. of the roof. Clearance from communication wires and cables shall be in accordance with 800.44(A)(4). Exception No. 1: The area above a roof surface subject to pedestrian or vehicular traffic shall have a vertical clearance 230.26 Point of Attachment. The point of attachment of the

from the roof surface in accordance with the clearance require- overhead service conductors to a building or other structure ments of 230.24(B). shall provide the minimum clearances as specified in 230.9 and 230.24. In no case shall this point of attachment be less than Exception No. 2: Where the voltage between conductors does 3.0 m (10 ft) above finished grade. not exceed 300 and the roof has a slope of 100 mm in 300 mm (4 in. in 12 in.) or greater, a reduction in clearance to 900 mm 230.27 Means of Attachment. Multiconductor cables used (3 ft) shall be permitted. for overhead service conductors shall be attached to build- ings or other structures by fittings identified for use with ser- Exception No. 3: Where the voltage between conductors does vice conductors. Open conductors shall be attached to fittings not exceed 300, a reduction in clearance above only the over- identified for use with service conductors or to noncombustible, hanging portion of the roof to not less than 450 mm (18 in.) shall 70–96 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES 230.40 nonabsorbent insulators securely attached to the building or (5) Type PVC conduit other structure. (6) Type RTRC conduit (7) Type IGS cable 230.28 Service Masts as Supports. Only power service- (8) Type USE conductors or cables drop or overhead service conductors shall be permitted to be (9) Type MV or Type MC cable identified for direct burial attached to a service mast. Service masts used for the support of applications service-drop or overhead service conductors shall be installed (10) Type MI cable, where suitably protected against physical in accordance with 230.28(A) and (B). damage and corrosive conditions (A) Strength. The service mast shall be of adequate strength 230.31 Size and Ampacity. or be supported by braces or guy wires to withstand safely the strain imposed by the service-drop or overhead service con- (A) General. Underground service conductors shall have suf- ductors. Hubs intended for use with a conduit that serves as a ficient ampacity to carry the current for the load as calculated in

service mast shall be identified for use with service-entrance accordance with Article 220 and shall have adequate mechani- equipment. cal strength. (B) Attachment. Service-drop or overhead service conduc- (B) Minimum Size. The conductors shall not be smaller than tors shall not be attached to a service mast between a weath- 8 AWG copper or 6 AWG aluminum or copper-clad aluminum. erhead or the end of the conduit and a coupling, where the Exception: Conductors supplying only limited loads of a coupling is located above the last point of securement to the single branch circuit — such as small polyphase power, con- building or other structure or is located above the building or trolled water heaters, and similar loads — shall not be smaller other structure. than 12 AWG copper or 10 AWG aluminum or copper-clad 230.29 Supports over Buildings. Service conductors passing aluminum. over a roof shall be securely supported by substantial struc- (C) Grounded Conductors. The grounded conductor shall not tures. For a grounded system, where the substantial structure

be less than the minimum size required by 250.24(C). is metal, it shall be bonded by means of a bonding jumper and listed connector to the grounded overhead service conductor. 230.32 Protection Against Damage. Underground service Where practicable, such supports shall be independent of the conductors shall be protected against damage in accordance building. with 300.5. Service conductors entering a building or other structure shall be installed in accordance with 230.6 or pro- Part III. Underground Service Conductors tected by a raceway wiring method identified in 230.43. 230.30 Installation. 230.33 Spliced Conductors. Service conductors shall be permit- ted to be spliced or tapped in accordance with 110.14, 300.5(E), (A) Insulation. Underground service conductors shall be 300.13, and 300.15. insulated for the applied voltage. Exception: A grounded conductor shall be permitted to be Part IV. Service-Entrance Conductors uninsulated as follows: ∆ 230.40 Number of Service-Entrance Conductor Sets. Each

(1) Bare copper used in a raceway service drop, set of overhead service conductors, set of under- (2) Bare copper for direct burial where bare copper is approved ground service conductors, or service lateral shall supply only for the soil conditions one set of service-entrance conductors. (3) Bare copper for direct burial without regard to soil condi- Exception No. 1: A building with more than one occupancy tions where part of a cable assembly identified for under- shall be permitted to have one set of service-entrance conductors ground use for each service, as permitted in 230.2, run to each occupancy (4) Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum without individual or group of occupancies. If the number of service disconnect insulation or covering where part of a cable assembly iden- locations for any given classification of service does not exceed tified for underground use in a raceway or for direct burial six, the requirements of 230.2(E) shall apply at each location. (B) Wiring Methods. Underground service conductors shall If the number of service disconnect locations exceeds six for

be installed in accordance with the applicable requirements of any given supply classification, all service disconnect locations this Code covering the type of wiring method used and shall be for all supply characteristics, together with any branch circuit limited to the following methods: or feeder supply sources, if applicable, shall be clearly described using graphics or text, or both, on one or more plaques located (1) Type RMC conduit in an approved, readily accessible location(s) on the building (2) Type IMC conduit or structure served and as near as practicable to the point(s) of (3) Type NUCC conduit attachment or entry(ies) for each service drop or service lateral (4) Type HDPE conduit and for each set of overhead or underground service conductors. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–97

230.41 ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES Exception No. 2: Where two to six service disconnecting means have an ampacity not less than the sum of the noncontinu- in separate enclosures are grouped at one location and supply ous loads plus 125 percent of continuous loads. separate loads from one service drop, set of overhead service Exception No. 1: Grounded conductors that are not connected conductors, set of underground service conductors, or service to an overcurrent device shall be permitted to be sized at lateral, one set of service-entrance conductors shall be permit- 100 percent of the sum of the continuous and noncontinuous ted to supply each or several such service equipment enclosures. load. Exception No. 3: A one-family dwelling unit and its accessory Exception No. 2: The sum of the noncontinuous load and the structures shall be permitted to have one set of service-entrance continuous load if the service-entrance conductors terminate in conductors run to each from a single service drop, set of over- an overcurrent device where both the overcurrent device and its

head service conductors, set of underground service conductors, assembly are listed for operation at 100 percent of their rating or service lateral. shall be permitted. Exception No. 4: Two-family dwellings, multifamily dwell- (2) The minimum service-entrance conductor size shall have ings, and multiple occupancy buildings shall be permitted to an ampacity not less than the maximum load to be served have one set of service-entrance conductors installed to supply after the application of any adjustment or correction the circuits covered in 210.25. factors. Exception No. 5: One set of service-entrance conductors con- (B) Specific Installations. In addition to the requirements of nected to the supply side of the normal service disconnecting 230.42(A), the minimum ampacity for ungrounded conduc- means shall be permitted to supply each or several systems cov- tors for specific installations shall not be less than the rat- ered by 230.82(5) or 230.82(6). ing of the service disconnecting means specified in 230.79(A) 230.41 Insulation of Service-Entrance Conductors. Service- through (D).

entrance conductors entering or on the exterior of buildings (C) Grounded Conductors. The grounded conductor shall or other structures shall be insulated. not be smaller than the minimum size as required by 250.24(C). Exception: A grounded conductor shall be permitted to be ∆ 230.43 Wiring Methods for 1000 Volts, Nominal, or Less. uninsulated as follows: Service-entrance conductors shall be installed in accordance (1) Bare copper used in a raceway or part of a service cable with the applicable requirements of this Code covering the type assembly of wiring method used and shall be limited to the following (2) Bare copper for direct burial where bare copper is approved methods: for the soil conditions (1) Open wiring on insulators (3) Bare copper for direct burial without regard to soil condi- (2) Type IGS cable tions where part of a cable assembly identified for under- (3) Rigid metal conduit (RMC) ground use (4) Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) (4) Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum without individual (5) Electrical metallic tubing (EMT)

insulation or covering where part of a cable assembly or (6) Electrical nonmetallic tubing identified for underground use in a raceway, or for direct (7) Service-entrance cables burial (8) Wireways (5) Bare conductors used in an auxiliary gutter (9) Busways 230.42 Minimum Size and Ampacity. (10) Auxiliary gutters (11) Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) ∆ (A) General. Service-entrance conductors shall have an (12) Cablebus ampacity of not less than the maximum load to be served. Con- (13) Type MC cable ductors shall be sized not less than the largest of 230.42(A)(1) (14) Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI or (A)(2). Loads shall be determined in accordance with (15) Flexible metal conduit (FMC) not over 1.8 m (6 ft) long Part III, IV, or V of Article 220, as applicable. Ampacity shall or liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) not over be determined from 310.14 and shall comply with 110.14(C). 1.8 m (6 ft) long between a raceway, or between a race- The maximum current of busways shall be that value for which way and service equipment, with a supply-side bonding

the busway has been listed or labeled. jumper routed with the flexible metal conduit (FMC) or Informational Note: For information on busways, see UL the liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) according 857, Standard for Safety for Busways. to 250.102(A), (B), (C), and (E) (1) Where the service-entrance conductors supply continuous (16) Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC) loads or any combination of noncontinuous and continuous (17) High density polyethylene conduit (HDPE) loads, the minimum service-entrance conductor size shall (18) Nonmetallic underground conduit with conductors (NUCC) 70–98 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES 230.54 (19) Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) (3) Schedule 80 PVC conduit (20) Type TC-ER cable (4) Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) (5) Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) 230.44 Cable Trays. Cable tray systems shall be permitted to (6) Other approved means support service-entrance conductors. Cable trays used to sup- port service-entrance conductors shall contain only service- (2) Other Than Service-Entrance Cables. Individual open entrance conductors and shall be limited to the following conductors and cables, other than service-entrance cables, shall methods: not be installed within 3.0 m (10 ft) of grade level or where exposed to physical damage. (1) Type SE cable (2) Type MC cable Exception: Type MI and Type MC cable shall be permitted (3) Type MI cable within 3.0 m (10 ft) of grade level where not exposed to physi- (4) Type IGS cable cal damage or where protected in accordance with 300.5(D). (5) Single conductors 1/0 and larger that are listed for use in 230.51 Mounting Supports. Service-entrance cables or cable tray

individual open service-entrance conductors shall be supported (6) Type TC-ER cable as specified in 230.51(A), (B), or (C). Such cable trays shall be identified with permanently (A) Service-Entrance Cables. Service-entrance cables shall affixed labels with the wording “Service-Entrance Conductors.” be supported by straps or other approved means within The labels shall be located so as to be visible after installation 300 mm (12 in.) of every service head, gooseneck, or connec- with a spacing not to exceed 3 m (10 ft) so that the service- tion to a raceway or enclosure and at intervals not exceeding entrance conductors are able to be readily traced through the 750 mm (30 in.). entire length of the cable tray. (B) Other Cables. Cables that are not approved for mounting Exception: Conductors, other than service-entrance conduc- in contact with a building or other structure shall be mounted tors, shall be permitted to be installed in a cable tray with on insulating supports installed at intervals not exceeding 4.5 m service-entrance conductors, provided a solid fixed barrier of

(15 ft) and in a manner that maintains a clearance of not less a material compatible with the cable tray is installed to sepa- than 50 mm (2 in.) from the surface over which they pass. rate the service-entrance conductors from other conductors installed in the cable tray. (C) Individual Open Conductors. Individual open conductors shall be installed in accordance with Table 230.51(C). Where 230.46 Spliced and Tapped Conductors. Service-entrance exposed to the weather, the conductors shall be mounted on conductors shall be permitted to be spliced or tapped in accor- insulators or on insulating supports attached to racks, brackets, dance with 110.14, 300.5(E), 300.13, and 300.15. Power dis- or other approved means. Where not exposed to the weather, tribution blocks, pressure connectors, and devices for splices the conductors shall be mounted on glass or porcelain knobs. and taps shall be listed. Power distribution blocks installed on service conductors shall be marked “suitable for use on the line 230.52 Individual Conductors Entering Buildings or Other

side of the service equipment” or equivalent. Structures. Where individual open conductors enter a build- ing or other structure, they shall enter through roof bushings Effective January 1, 2023, pressure connectors and devices or through the wall in an upward slant through individual, non- for splices and taps installed on service conductors shall be combustible, nonabsorbent insulating tubes. Drip loops shall be marked “suitable for use on the line side of the service equip- formed on the conductors before they enter the tubes. ment” or equivalent. 230.53 Raceways to Drain. Where exposed to the weather, 230.50 Protection Against Physical Damage. raceways enclosing service-entrance conductors shall be (A) Underground Service-Entrance Conductors. Under- listed or approved for use in wet locations and arranged to ground service-entrance conductors shall be protected against drain. Where embedded in masonry, raceways shall be arranged physical damage in accordance with 300.5. to drain. (B) All Other Service-Entrance Conductors. All other service- 230.54 Overhead Service Locations.

entrance conductors, other than underground service entrance (A) Service Head. Service raceways shall be equipped with a conductors, shall be protected against physical damage as spec- service head at the point of connection to service-drop or over- ified in 230.50(B)(1) or (B)(2). head service conductors. The service head shall be listed for use (1) Service-Entrance Cables. Service-entrance cables, where in wet locations. subject to physical damage, shall be protected by any of the (B) Service-Entrance Cables Equipped with Service Head following: or Gooseneck. Service-entrance cables shall be equipped with (1) Rigid metal conduit (RMC) a service head. The service head shall be listed for use in wet (2) Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) locations. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–99

230.56 ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES Table 230.51(C) Supports Minimum Clearance Maximum Distance Between Supports Between Conductors From Surface Maximum Volts m ft mm in. mm in. 1000 2.7 9 150 6 50 2 1000 4.5 15 300 12 50 2 300 1.4 4 1⁄2 75 3 50 2 1000* 1.4* 4 1⁄2* 65* 2 1⁄2* 25* 1* *Where not exposed to weather. Exception: Type SE cable shall be permitted to be formed in Part V. Service Equipment — General a gooseneck and taped with a self-sealing weather-resistant 230.62 Service Equipment — Enclosed or Guarded. Ener- thermoplastic. gized parts of service equipment shall be enclosed as specified (C) Service Heads and Goosenecks Above Service-Drop or in 230.62(A) or guarded as specified in 230.62(B). Overhead Service Attachment. Service heads on raceways (A) Enclosed. Energized parts shall be enclosed so that they or service-entrance cables and goosenecks in service-entrance will not be exposed to accidental contact or shall be guarded as cables shall be located above the point of attachment of the in 230.62(B). service-drop or overhead service conductors to the building or

other structure. (B) Guarded. Energized parts that are not enclosed shall be installed on a switchboard, panelboard, or control board and Exception: Where it is impracticable to locate the service head guarded in accordance with 110.18 and 110.27. Where ener- or gooseneck above the point of attachment, the service head or gized parts are guarded as provided in 110.27(A)(1) and (A)(2), gooseneck location shall be permitted not farther than 600 mm a means for locking or sealing doors providing access to ener- (24 in.) from the point of attachment. gized parts shall be provided. (D) Secured. Service-entrance cables shall be held securely in N (C) Barriers. Barriers shall be placed in service equipment place. such that no uninsulated, ungrounded service busbar or service (E) Separately Bushed Openings. Service heads shall have terminal is exposed to inadvertent contact by persons or main- conductors of different potential brought out through separately tenance equipment while servicing load terminations. bushed openings. ∆ 230.66 Marking.

Exception: For jacketed multiconductor service-entrance cable N (A) General. Service equipment rated at 1000 volts or less without splice. shall be marked to identify it as being suitable for use as ser- (F) Drip Loops. Drip loops shall be formed on individual con- vice equipment. All service equipment shall be listed or field ductors. To prevent the entrance of moisture, service-entrance evaluated. conductors shall be connected to the service-drop or overhead N (B) Meter Sockets. Meter sockets shall not be considered ser- service conductors either (1) below the level of the service head vice equipment but shall be listed and rated for the voltage and or (2) below the level of the termination of the service-entrance current rating of the service. cable sheath. Exception: Meter sockets supplied by and under the exclusive (G) Arranged That Water Will Not Enter Service Raceway control of an electric utility shall not be required to be listed. or Equipment. Service-entrance and overhead service con- ductors shall be arranged so that water will not enter service N 230.67 Surge Protection.

raceway or equipment. N (A) Surge-Protective Device. All services supplying dwell- 230.56 Service Conductor with the Higher Voltage to ing units shall be provided with a surge-protective device (SPD). Ground. On a 4-wire, delta-connected service where the mid- N (B) Location. The SPD shall be an integral part of the service point of one phase winding is grounded, the service conductor equipment or shall be located immediately adjacent thereto. having the higher phase voltage to ground shall be durably and Exception: The SPD shall not be required to be located in the permanently marked by an outer finish that is orange in color, or service equipment as required in (B) if located at each next level by other effective means, at each termination or junction point. distribution equipment downstream toward the load. 70–100 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES 230.75 N (C) Type. The SPD shall be a Type 1 or Type 2 SPD. (4) Service disconnects in switchgear or metering centers where each disconnect is located in a separate compartment N (D) Replacement. Where service equipment is replaced, all of the requirements of this section shall apply. Informational Note No. 1: Metering centers are addressed in UL 67, Standard for Panelboards. Part VI. Service Equipment — Disconnecting Means Informational Note No. 2: Examples of separate enclo- ∆ 230.70 General. Means shall be provided to disconnect all sures with a main service disconnecting means in each ungrounded conductors in a building or other structure from the enclosure include but are not limited to motor control service conductors. centers, fused disconnects, circuit breaker enclosures, (A) Location. The service disconnecting means shall be and transfer switches that are suitable for use as service installed in accordance with 230.70(A)(1), (A)(2), and (A)(3). equipment. (1) Readily Accessible Location. The service disconnecting 230.72 Grouping of Disconnects.

means shall be installed at a readily accessible location either (A) General. The two to six disconnects, if permitted in outside of a building or structure or inside nearest the point of 230.71, shall be grouped. Each disconnect shall be marked to entrance of the service conductors. indicate the load served. (2) Bathrooms. Service disconnecting means shall not be Exception: One of the two to six service disconnecting means installed in bathrooms. permitted in 230.71, where used only for a water pump also (3) Remote Control. Where a remote control device(s) is used intended to provide fire protection, shall be permitted to be to actuate the service disconnecting means, the service discon- located remote from the other disconnecting means. If remotely necting means shall be located in accordance with 230.70(A)(1). installed in accordance with this exception, a plaque shall be posted at the location of the remaining grouped disconnects (B) Marking. Each service disconnect shall be permanently denoting its location. marked to identify it as a service disconnect.

(B) Additional Service Disconnecting Means. The one or (C) Suitable for Use. Each service disconnecting means more additional service disconnecting means for fire pumps, shall be suitable for the prevailing conditions. Service equipment emergency systems, legally required standby, or optional installed in hazardous (classified) locations shall comply with standby services permitted by 230.2 shall be installed remote the requirements of Articles 500 through 517. from the one to six service disconnecting means for normal ser- 230.71 Maximum Number of Disconnects. Each service vice to minimize the possibility of simultaneous interruption of shall have only one disconnecting means unless the require- supply. ments of 230.71(B) are met. (C) Access to Occupants. In a multiple-occupancy building, ∆ (A) General. For the purpose of this section, disconnecting each occupant shall have access to the occupant’s service dis- means installed as part of listed equipment and used solely for connecting means. the following shall not be considered a service disconnecting

Exception: In a multiple-occupancy building where electric means: service and electrical maintenance are provided by the building (1) Power monitoring equipment management and where these are under continuous building (2) Surge-protective device(s) management supervision, the service disconnecting means sup- (3) Control circuit of the ground-fault protection system plying more than one occupancy shall be permitted to be acces- (4) Power-operable service disconnecting means sible to authorized management personnel only. ∆ (B) Two to Six Service Disconnecting Means. Two to six 230.74 Simultaneous Opening of Poles. Each service discon- service disconnects shall be permitted for each service permit- nect shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded service ted by 230.2 or for each set of service-entrance conductors per- conductors that it controls from the premises wiring system. mitted by 230.40, Exception No. 1, 3, 4, or 5. The two to six ∆ 230.75 Disconnection of Grounded Conductor. Where the

service disconnecting means shall be permitted to consist of a service disconnecting means does not disconnect the grounded combination of any of the following: conductor from the premises wiring, other means shall be pro- (1) Separate enclosures with a main service disconnecting vided for this purpose in the service equipment. A terminal or means in each enclosure bus to which all grounded conductors can be attached by means (2) Panelboards with a main service disconnecting means in of pressure connectors shall be permitted for this purpose. In each panelboard enclosure a multisection switchboard or switchgear, disconnects for the (3) Switchboard(s) where there is only one service disconnect grounded conductor shall be permitted to be in any section of in each separate vertical section where there are barriers the switchboard or switchgear. separating each vertical section 2022 California Electrical Code 70–101

230.76 ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES Informational Note: In switchgear or multisection (3) Meter disconnect switches nominally rated not in excess switchboards, the disconnecting means provided for of 1000 volts that have a short-circuit current rating equal the grounded conductor is typically identified as a neu- to or greater than the available fault current, if all metal tral disconnect link and is typically located in the bus to housings and service enclosures are grounded in accor- which the service grounded conductor is connected. dance with Part VII and bonded in accordance with Part V of Article 250. A meter disconnect switch shall be capable 230.76 Manually or Power Operable. The service dis- of interrupting the load served. A meter disconnect shall connecting means for ungrounded service conductors shall con- be legibly field marked on its exterior in a manner suit- sist of one of the following: able for the environment as follows: (1) A manually operable switch or circuit breaker equipped with METER DISCONNECT a handle or other suitable operating means NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT

(2) A power-operated switch or circuit breaker, provided (4) Instrument transformers (current and voltage), imped- the switch or circuit breaker can be opened by hand in the ance shunts, load management devices, surge arresters, event of a power supply failure and Type 1 surge-protective devices. (5) Conductors used to supply load management devices, cir- 230.77 Indicating. The service disconnecting means shall cuits for standby power systems, fire pump equipment, plainly indicate whether it is in the open (off) or closed (on) and fire and sprinkler alarms, if provided with service position. equipment and installed in accordance with requirements 230.79 Rating of Service Disconnecting Means. The service for service-entrance conductors. disconnecting means shall have a rating not less than the calcu- (6) Solar photovoltaic systems, fuel cell systems, wind elec- lated load to be carried, determined in accordance with Part III, IV, tric systems, energy storage systems, or interconnected or V of Article 220, as applicable.

In no case shall the rating be electric power production sources, if provided with a lower than specified in 230.79(A), (B), (C), or (D). disconnecting means listed as suitable for use as service (A) One-Circuit Installations. For installations to supply equipment, and overcurrent protection as specified in only limited loads of a single branch circuit, the service discon- Part VII of Article 230. necting means shall have a rating of not less than 15 amperes. (7) Control circuits for power-operable service disconnect- ing means, if suitable overcurrent protection and discon- (B) Two-Circuit Installations. For installations consisting of necting means are provided. not more than two 2-wire branch circuits, the service discon- (8) Ground-fault protection systems or Type 2 surge- necting means shall have a rating of not less than 30 amperes. protective devices, where installed as part of listed equip- (C) One-Family Dwellings. For a one-family dwelling, the ment, if suitable overcurrent protection and disconnecting

service disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than means are provided. 100 amperes, 3-wire. (9) Connections used only to supply listed communica- tions equipment under the exclusive control of the serving (D) All Others. For all other installations, the service discon- electric utility, if suitable overcurrent protection and dis- necting means shall have a rating of not less than 60 amperes. connecting means are provided. For installations of equip- 230.80 Combined Rating of Disconnects. Where the service ment by the serving electric utility, a disconnecting means disconnecting means consists of more than one switch or circuit is not required if the supply is installed as part of a meter breaker, as permitted by 230.71, the combined ratings of all the socket, such that access can only be gained with the meter switches or circuit breakers used shall not be less than the rating removed. required by 230.79. (10) Emergency disconnects in accordance with 230.85, if all 230.81 Connection to Terminals.

The service conductors metal housings and service enclosures are grounded in shall be connected to the service disconnecting means by pres- accordance with Part VII and bonded in accordance with sure connectors, clamps, or other approved means. Connec- Part V of Article 250. tions that depend on solder shall not be used. (11) Meter-mounted transfer switches nominally rated not in excess of 1000 volts that have a short-circuit current rat- ∆ 230.82 Equipment Connected to the Supply Side of Service ing equal to or greater than the available fault current. Disconnect. Only the following equipment shall be permitted to A meter-mounted transfer switch shall be listed and be be connected to the supply side of the service disconnecting capable of transferring the load served. A meter-mounted means: transfer switch shall be marked on its exterior with both of (1) Cable limiters. the following: (2) Meters and meter sockets nominally rated not in excess a. Meter-mounted transfer switch of 1000 volts, if all metal housings and service enclosures b. Not service equipment

are grounded in accordance with Part VII and bonded in accordance with Part V of Article 250. 70–102 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES 230.95 N 230.85 Emergency Disconnects. For one- and two-family breaker that simultaneously opens all conductors of the dwelling units, all service conductors shall terminate in dis- circuit. connecting means having a short-circuit current rating equal 230.91 Location. The service overcurrent device shall be an to or greater than the available fault current, installed in a read- integral part of the service disconnecting means or shall be ily accessible outdoor location. If more than one disconnect is located immediately adjacent thereto. Where fuses are used as provided, they shall be grouped. Each disconnect shall be one the service overcurrent device, the disconnecting means shall be of the following: located ahead of the supply side of the fuses. (1) Service disconnects marked as follows: 230.92 Locked Service Overcurrent Devices. Where the EMERGENCY DISCONNECT, service overcurrent devices are locked or sealed or are not read- SERVICE DISCONNECT ily accessible to the occupant, branch-circuit or feeder overcur-

(2) Meter disconnects installed per 230.82(3) and marked as rent devices shall be installed on the load side, shall be mounted follows: in a readily accessible location, and shall be of lower ampere EMERGENCY DISCONNECT, rating than the service overcurrent device. METER DISCONNECT, NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT 230.93 Protection of Specific Circuits. Where necessary to (3) Other listed disconnect switches or circuit breakers on the prevent tampering, an automatic overcurrent device that pro- supply side of each service disconnect that are suitable for tects service conductors supplying only a specific load, such as use as service equipment and marked as follows: a water heater, shall be permitted to be locked or sealed where EMERGENCY DISCONNECT, located so as to be accessible. NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT 230.94 Relative Location of Overcurrent Device and Other Markings shall comply with 110.21(B). Service Equipment. The overcurrent device shall protect all circuits and devices. Part VII. Service Equipment — Overcurrent Protection Exception No. 1: The service switch shall be permitted on the

230.90 Where Required. Each ungrounded service conduc- supply side. tor shall have overload protection. Exception No. 2: High-impedance shunt circuits, surge arrest- ∆ (A) Ungrounded Conductor. Such protection shall be pro- ers, Type 1 surge-protective devices, surge-protective capaci- vided by an overcurrent device in series with each ungrounded tors, and instrument transformers (current and voltage) shall be service conductor that has a rating or setting not higher than the permitted to be connected and installed on the supply side of the ampacity of the conductor. A set of fuses shall be considered all service disconnecting means as permitted by 230.82. the fuses required to protect all the ungrounded conductors of Exception No. 3: Circuits for load management devices shall a circuit. Single-pole circuit breakers, grouped in accordance be permitted to be connected on the supply side of the service with 230.71(B), shall be considered as one protective device. overcurrent device where separately provided with overcurrent Exception No.

1: For motor-starting currents, ratings that com- protection. ply with 430.52, 430.62, and 430.63 shall be permitted. Exception No. 4: Circuits used only for the operation of fire Exception No. 2: Fuses and circuit breakers with a rating or alarm, other protective signaling systems, or the supply to fire setting that complies with 240.4(B) or (C) and 240.6 shall be pump equipment shall be permitted to be connected on the sup- permitted. ply side of the service overcurrent device where separately pro- vided with overcurrent protection. Exception No. 3: Two to six circuit breakers or sets of fuses shall be permitted as the overcurrent device to provide the over- Exception No. 5:Meters nominally rated not in excess of load protection. The sum of the ratings of the circuit breakers or 600 volts shall be permitted, provided all metal housings and fuses shall be permitted to exceed the ampacity of the service service enclosures are grounded. conductors, provided the calculated load does not exceed the Exception No. 6: Where service equipment is power operable,

ampacity of the service conductors. the control circuit shall be permitted to be connected ahead of Exception No. 4: Overload protection for fire pump supply con- the service equipment if suitable overcurrent protection and dis- ductors shall comply with 695.4(B)(2)(a). connecting means are provided. Exception No. 5: Overload protection for 120/240-volt, 3-wire, 230.95 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Ground- single-phase dwelling services shall be permitted in accordance fault protection of equipment shall be provided for solidly with the requirements of 310.12. grounded wye electric services of more than 150 volts to ground but not exceeding 1000 volts phase-to-phase for each (B) Not in Grounded Conductor. No overcurrent device shall service disconnect rated 1000 amperes or more. The grounded be inserted in a grounded service conductor except a circuit conductor for the solidly grounded wye system shall be connected 2022 California Electrical Code 70–103

230.200 ARTICLE 230 — SERVICES directly to ground through a grounding electrode system, as Part VIII. Services Exceeding 1000 Volts, Nominal specified in 250.50, without inserting any resistor or impedance ∆ 230.200 General. Service conductors and equipment used on device. circuits exceeding 1000 volts, nominal, shall comply with all the The rating of the service disconnect shall be considered to be applicable preceding sections of this article and with the follow- the rating of the largest fuse that can be installed or the highest ing sections that supplement or modify the preceding sections. continuous current trip setting for which the actual overcurrent In no case shall the provisions of Part VIII apply to equipment device installed in a circuit breaker is rated or can be adjusted. on the supply side of the service point. Exception: The ground-fault protection provisions of this sec- Informational Note: For clearances of conductors of over tion shall not apply to a service disconnect for a continuous 1000 volts, nominal, see ANSI/IEEE C2-2017, National

industrial process where a nonorderly shutdown will introduce Electrical Safety Code. additional or increased hazards. 230.202 Service-Entrance Conductors. Service-entrance (A) Setting. The ground-fault protection system shall operate conductors to buildings or enclosures shall be installed to con- to cause the service disconnect to open all ungrounded conduc- form to 230.202(A) and (B). tors of the faulted circuit. The maximum setting of the ground- (A) Conductor Size. Service-entrance conductors shall not be fault protection shall be 1200 amperes, and the maximum time smaller than 6 AWG unless in multiconductor cable. Multicon- delay shall be one second for ground-fault currents equal to or ductor cable shall not be smaller than 8 AWG. greater than 3000 amperes. (B) Wiring Methods. Service-entrance conductors shall be (B) Fuses. If a switch and fuse combination is used, the fuses installed by one of the wiring methods covered in 300.37 and employed shall be capable of interrupting any current higher 300.50. than the interrupting capacity of the switch during a time that the

ground-fault protective system will not cause the switch to open. 230.204 Isolating Switches. (C) Performance Testing. The ground-fault protection system (A) Where Required. Where oil switches or air, oil, vacuum, shall be performance tested when first installed on site. This or sulfur hexafluoride circuit breakers constitute the service dis- testing shall be conducted by a qualified person(s) using a connecting means, an isolating switch with visible break con- test process of primary current injection, in accordance with tacts shall be installed on the supply side of the disconnecting instructions that shall be provided with the equipment. A writ- means and all associated service equipment. ten record of this testing shall be made and shall be available to Exception: An isolating switch shall not be required where the the authority having jurisdiction. circuit breaker or switch is mounted on removable truck panels Informational Note No. 1: Ground-fault protection that or switchgear units where both of the following conditions apply:

functions to open the service disconnect affords no pro- (1) Cannot be opened unless the circuit is disconnected tection from faults on the line side of the protective ele- (2) Where all energized parts are automatically disconnected ment. It serves only to limit damage to conductors and when the circuit breaker or switch is removed from the nor- equipment on the load side in the event of an arcing mal operating position ground fault on the load side of the protective element. (B) Fuses as Isolating Switch. Where fuses are of the type Informational Note No. 2: This added protective equip- that can be operated as a disconnecting switch, a set of such ment at the service equipment may make it necessary fuses shall be permitted as the isolating switch. to review the overall wiring system for proper selective overcurrent protection coordination. Additional instal- (C) Accessible to Qualified Persons Only. The isolating lations of ground-fault protective equipment may be switch shall be accessible to qualified persons only.

needed on feeders and branch circuits where maximum (D) Connection to Ground. Isolating switches shall be pro- continuity of electric service is necessary. vided with a means for readily connecting the load side con- Informational Note No. 3: Where ground-fault protec- ductors to a grounding electrode system, equipment ground tion is provided for the service disconnect and intercon- busbar, or grounded steel structure when disconnected from the nection is made with another supply system by a transfer source of supply. device, means or devices may be needed to ensure proper A means for grounding the load side conductors to a ground- ground-fault sensing by the ground-fault protection ing electrode system, equipment grounding busbar, or grounded equipment. structural steel shall not be required for any duplicate isolating Informational Note No. 4: See 517.17(A) for informa- switch installed and maintained by the electric supply company. tion on where an additional step of ground-fault protec- 230.205 Disconnecting Means. tion is required for hospitals and other buildings with

critical areas or life support equipment. (A) Location. The service disconnecting means shall be located in accordance with 230.70. 70–104 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 240.2 For either overhead or underground primary distribution sys- 230.210 Service Equipment — General Provisions. Service tems on private property, the service disconnect shall be permit- equipment, including instrument transformers, shall conform to ted to be located in a location that is not readily accessible, if the Article 490, Part I. disconnecting means can be operated by mechanical linkage from 230.211 Switchgear. Switchgear shall consist of a substantial a readily accessible point, or electronically in accordance with metal structure and a sheet metal enclosure. Where installed 230.205(C), where applicable. over a combustible floor, suitable protection thereto shall be (B) Type. Each service disconnect shall simultaneously discon- provided. nect all ungrounded service conductors that it controls and shall 230.212 Over 35,000 Volts. Where the voltage exceeds have a fault-closing rating that is not less than the available fault 35,000 volts between conductors that enter a building, they shall current at its supply terminals.

terminate in a switchgear compartment or a vault conforming to Where fused switches or separately mounted fuses are the requirements of 450.41 through 450.48. installed, the fuse characteristics shall be permitted to contrib- ute to the fault-closing rating of the disconnecting means. (C) Remote Control. For multibuilding, industrial installations ARTICLE 240 under single management, the service disconnecting means Overcurrent Protection shall be permitted to be located at a separate building or struc- ture. In such cases, the service disconnecting means shall be permitted to be electrically operated by a readily accessible, Part I. General remote-control device. 240.1 Scope. Parts I through VII of this article provide the 230.206 Overcurrent Devices as Disconnecting Means. general requirements for overcurrent protection and overcur- Where the circuit breaker or alternative for it, as specified in rent protective devices not more than 1000 volts, nominal. 230.208 for service overcurrent devices, meets the requirements Part VIII covers overcurrent protection for those portions of

specified in 230.205, it shall constitute the service disconnecting supervised industrial installations operating at voltages of not means. more than 1000 volts, nominal. Part IX covers overcurrent pro- tection over 1000 volts, nominal. 230.208 Protection Requirements. A short-circuit protective device shall be provided on the load side of, or as an integral part Informational Note: Overcurrent protection for conduc- of, the service disconnect, and shall protect all ungrounded con- tors and equipment is provided to open the circuit if the ductors that it supplies. The protective device shall be capable current reaches a value that will cause an excessive or of detecting and interrupting all values of current, in excess of dangerous temperature in conductors or conductor insula- its trip setting or melting point, that can occur at its location. A tion. See also 110.9 for requirements for interrupting ratings fuse rated in continuous amperes not to exceed three times the and 110.10 for requirements for protection against fault

ampacity of the conductor, or a circuit breaker with a trip setting currents. of not more than six times the ampacity of the conductors, shall 240.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply be considered as providing the required short-circuit protection. only within this article. Informational Note: See Table 311.60(C)(67) through Current-Limiting Overcurrent Protective Device. A device that, Table 311.60(C)(86) for ampacities of conductors rated when interrupting currents in its current-limiting range, reduces 2001 volts to 35,000 volts. the current flowing in the faulted circuit to a magnitude substan- Overcurrent devices shall conform to 230.208(A) and (B). tially less than that obtainable in the same circuit if the device were replaced with a solid conductor having comparable impedance. (A) Equipment Type. Equipment used to protect service- entrance conductors shall meet the requirements of Article 490, Supervised Industrial Installation. For the purposes of Part II. Part VIII, the industrial portions of a facility where all of the following conditions are met:

(B) Enclosed Overcurrent Devices. The restriction to 80 percent of the rating for an enclosed overcurrent device for (1) Conditions of maintenance and engineering supervision continuous loads shall not apply to overcurrent devices installed ensure that only qualified persons monitor and service the in systems operating at over 1000 volts. system. (2) The premises wiring system has 2500 kVA or greater of 230.209 Surge Arresters. Surge arresters installed in accor- load used in industrial process(es), manufacturing activi- dance with the requirements of Article 242 shall be permitted ties, or both, as calculated in accordance with Article 220. on each ungrounded overhead service conductor. (3) The premises has at least one service or feeder that is Informational Note: Surge arresters may be referred to as more than 150 volts to ground and more than 300 volts lightning arresters in older documents. phase-to-phase. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–105

240.3 ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION This definition excludes installations in buildings used by the Table 240.3 Other Articles industrial facility for offices, warehouses, garages, machine shops, and recreational facilities that are not an integral part of Equipment Article the industrial plant, substation, or control center. Air-conditioning and refrigerating equipment 440 Tap Conductor. A conductor, other than a service conductor, Appliances 422 that has overcurrent protection ahead of its point of supply Assembly occupancies 518 that exceeds the value permitted for similar conductors that are Audio signal processing, amplification, 640 and reproduction equipment protected as described elsewhere in 240.4. Branch circuits 210 240.3 Other Articles. Equipment shall be protected against Busways 368 overcurrent in accordance with the article in this Code that cov- Capacitors 460 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, ers the type of equipment specified in Table 240.3. 725 and power-limited circuits 240.4 Protection of Conductors.

Conductors, other than Cranes and hoists 610 Electric signs and outline lighting 600 flexible cords, flexible cables, and fixture wires, shall be pro- Electric welders 630 tected against overcurrent in accordance with their ampacities Electrolytic cells 668 specified in 310.14, unless otherwise permitted or required in Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, 620 240.4(A) through (G). wheelchair lifts, and stairway chairlifts Emergency systems 700 Informational Note: See ICEA P-32-382-2007 (R2013), Fire alarm systems 760 Short Circuit Characteristics of Insulated Cables, for Fire pumps 695 information on allowable short-circuit currents for insu- Fixed electric heating equipment for pipelines 427 lated copper and aluminum conductors. and vessels Fixed electric space-heating equipment 424 (A) Power Loss Hazard. Conductor overload protection Fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow-melting 426 shall not be required where the interruption of the circuit would equipment create a hazard, such as in a material-handling magnet circuit Generators 445 Health care facilities 517

or fire pump circuit. Short-circuit protection shall be provided. Induction and dielectric heating equipment 665 Informational Note: See NFPA 20-2013, Standard for Industrial machinery 670 Luminaires, lampholders, and lamps 410 the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection. Motion picture and television studios and similar locations 530 (B) Overcurrent Devices Rated 800 Amperes or Less. The Motors, motor circuits, and controllers 430 next higher standard overcurrent device rating (above the Phase converters 455 Pipe organs 650 ampacity of the conductors being protected) shall be permitted Receptacles 406 to be used, provided all of the following conditions are met: Services 230 Solar photovoltaic systems 690 (1) The conductors being protected are not part of a branch Switchboards and panelboards 408 circuit supplying more than one receptacle for cord-and- Theaters, audience areas of motion picture 520 plug-connected portable loads. and television studios, and similar locations (2) The ampacity of the conductors does not correspond Transformers and transformer vaults 450

with the standard ampere rating of a fuse or a circuit X-ray equipment 660 breaker without overload trip adjustments above its rating (but that shall be permitted to have other trip or rating (1) Continuous loads do not exceed 5.6 amperes. adjustments). (2) Overcurrent protection is provided by one of the following: (3) The next higher standard rating selected does not exceed 800 amperes. a. Branch-circuit-rated circuit breakers listed and marked for use with 18 AWG copper wire (C) Overcurrent Devices Rated over 800 Amperes. Where b. Branch-circuit-rated fuses listed and marked for use the overcurrent device is rated over 800 amperes, the ampacity with 18 AWG copper wire of the conductors it protects shall be equal to or greater than the c. Class CC, Class J, or Class T fuses rating of the overcurrent device defined in 240.6. (2) 16 AWG Copper. 10 amperes, provided all the following (D) Small Conductors. Unless specifically permitted in 240.4(E) conditions are met: or (G), the overcurrent protection shall not exceed that required

by (D)(1) through (D)(7) after any correction factors for ambient (1) Continuous loads do not exceed 8 amperes. temperature and number of conductors have been applied. (2) Overcurrent protection is provided by one of the following: (1) 18 AWG Copper. 7 amperes, provided all the following a. Branch-circuit-rated circuit breakers listed and marked conditions are met: for use with 16 AWG copper wire 70–106 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 240.5 b. Branch-circuit-rated fuses listed and marked for use ∆ Table 240.4(G) Specific Conductor Applications with 16 AWG copper wire c. Class CC, Class J, or Class T fuses Conductor Article Section (3) 14 AWG Copper. 15 amperes Air-conditioning and 440, Parts III, VI (4) 12 AWG Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum. refrigeration equipment circuit conductors 15 amperes Capacitor circuit 460 460.8(B) and (5) 12 AWG Copper. 20 amperes conductors 460.25 Control and 727 727.9 (6) 10 AWG Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum. instrumentation circuit 25 amperes conductors (Type ITC) Electric welder circuit 630 630.12 and (7) 10 AWG Copper. 30 amperes conductors 630.32 Fire alarm system circuit 760 760.43, 760.45, (E) Tap Conductors. Tap conductors shall be permitted to be conductors 760.121, and protected against overcurrent in accordance with the following: Chapter 9, Tables 12(A) (1) 210.19(A)(3) and (A)(4), Household Ranges and Cooking and 12(B) Appliances and Other Loads Motor-operated appliance 422, Part II

(2) 240.5(B)(2), Fixture Wire circuit conductors (3) 240.21, Location in Circuit Motor and motor-control 430, Parts II, III, IV, (4) 368.17(B), Reduction in Ampacity Size of Busway circuit conductors V, VI, VII (5) 368.17(C), Feeder or Branch Circuits (busway taps) Phase converter supply 455 455.7 conductors (6) 430.53(D), Single Motor Taps Remote-control, signaling, 725 725.43, 725.45, (F) Transformer Secondary Conductors. Single-phase (other and power-limited circuit 725.121, and conductors Chapter 9, than 2-wire) and multiphase (other than delta-delta, 3-wire) Tables 11(A) transformer secondary conductors shall not be considered to and 11(B) be protected by the primary overcurrent protective device. Secondary tie 450 450.6 Conductors supplied by the secondary side of a single-phase conductors transformer having a 2-wire (single-voltage) secondary, or a three-phase, delta-delta connected transformer having a 3-wire (single-voltage) secondary, shall be permitted to be protected by with one of the methods described in 240.5(B)(1), (B)(3), or

overcurrent protection provided on the primary (supply) side of (B)(4). Fixture wire shall be protected, where supplied by a the transformer, provided this protection is in accordance with branch circuit, in accordance with 240.5(B)(2). 450.3 and does not exceed the value determined by multiplying (1) Supply Cord of Listed Appliance or Luminaire. Where the secondary conductor ampacity by the secondary-to-primary flexible cord or tinsel cord is approved for and used with a spe- transformer voltage ratio. cific listed appliance or luminaire, it shall be considered to be (G) Overcurrent Protection for Specific Conductor Applica- protected when applied within the appliance or luminaire list- tions. Overcurrent protection for the specific conductors shall ing requirements. For the purposes of this section, a luminaire be permitted to be provided as referenced in Table 240.4(G). may be either portable or permanent. 240.5 Protection of Flexible Cords, Flexible Cables, and (2) Fixture Wire. Fixture wire shall be permitted to be Fixture Wires.

Flexible cord and flexible cable, including tin- tapped to the branch-circuit conductor of a branch circuit in sel cord and extension cords, and fixture wires shall be pro- accordance with the following: tected against overcurrent by either 240.5(A) or (B). (1) 15- or 20-ampere circuits — 18 AWG, up to 15 m (50 ft) of (A) Ampacities. Flexible cord and flexible cable shall be run length protected by an overcurrent device in accordance with their (2) 15- or 20-ampere circuits — 16 AWG, up to 30 m (100 ft) of ampacity as specified in Table 400.5(A)(a) and Table 400.5(A)(b). run length Fixture wire shall be protected against overcurrent in accor- (3) 20-ampere circuits — 14 AWG and larger dance with its ampacity as specified in Table 402.5. Supple- (4) 30-ampere circuits — 14 AWG and larger mentary overcurrent protection, as covered in 240.10, shall (5) 40-ampere circuits — 12 AWG and larger be permitted to be an acceptable means for providing this (6) 50-ampere circuits — 12 AWG and larger protection. (3) Extension Cord Sets. Flexible cord used in listed exten-

(B) Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Device. Flexible cord shall sion cord sets shall be considered to be protected when applied be protected, where supplied by a branch circuit, in accordance within the extension cord listing requirements. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–107

240.6 ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION Table 240.6(A) Standard Ampere Ratings for Fuses and Inverse short circuits or ground faults, but the use of such devices shall Time Circuit Breakers be permitted to protect motor branch-circuit conductors from overload if protected in accordance with 430.40. Standard Ampere Ratings 240.10 Supplementary Overcurrent Protection. Where 15 20 25 30 35 supplementary overcurrent protection is used for luminaires, 40 45 50 60 70 appliances, and other equipment or for internal circuits and 80 90 100 110 125 components of equipment, it shall not be used as a substitute 150 175 200 225 250 for required branch-circuit overcurrent devices or in place of the 300 350 400 450 500 required branch-circuit protection. Supplementary overcurrent 600 700 800 1000 1200 devices shall not be required to be readily accessible. 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 6000 — — — 240.12 Electrical System Coordination. Where an orderly shutdown is required to minimize the hazard(s) to personnel and equipment, a system of coordination based on the following

two conditions shall be permitted: (4) Field Assembled Extension Cord Sets. Flexible cord (1) Coordinated short-circuit protection used in extension cords made with separately listed and installed (2) Overload indication based on monitoring systems or components shall be permitted to be supplied by a branch cir- devices cuit in accordance with the following: 20-ampere circuits — 16 AWG and larger Informational Note: The monitoring system may cause the condition to go to alarm, allowing corrective action or 240.6 Standard Ampere Ratings. an orderly shutdown, thereby minimizing personnel haz- (A) Fuses and Fixed-Trip Circuit Breakers. The standard ard and equipment damage. ampere ratings for fuses and inverse time circuit breakers shall ∆ 240.13 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Ground- be considered as shown in Table 240.6(A). Additional standard fault protection of equipment shall be provided in accordance ampere ratings for fuses shall be 1, 3, 6, 10, and 601. The use with 230.95 for solidly grounded wye electrical systems of

of fuses and inverse time circuit breakers with nonstandard more than 150 volts to ground but not exceeding 1000 volts ampere ratings shall be permitted. phase-to-phase for each individual device used as a building (B) Adjustable-Trip Circuit Breakers. The rating of or structure main disconnecting means rated 1000 amperes or adjustable- trip circuit breakers having external means for more. adjusting the current setting (long-time pickup setting), not meet- This section shall not apply to the disconnecting means for ing the requirements of 240.6(C), shall be the maximum setting the following: possible. (1) Continuous industrial processes where a nonorderly shut- (C) Restricted Access Adjustable-Trip Circuit Breakers. A down will introduce additional or increased hazards circuit breaker(s) that has restricted access to the adjusting means (2) Installations where ground-fault protection is provided by shall be permitted to have an ampere rating(s) that is equal to the other requirements for services or feeders adjusted current setting (long-time pickup setting). Restricted

(3) Fire pumps access shall be achieved by one of the following methods: 240.15 Ungrounded Conductors. (1) Located behind removable and sealable covers over the adjusting means (A) Overcurrent Device Required. A fuse or an overcur- (2) Located behind bolted equipment enclosure doors rent trip unit of a circuit breaker shall be connected in series (3) Located behind locked doors accessible only to qualified with each ungrounded conductor. A combination of a current personnel transformer and overcurrent relay shall be considered equiva- (4) Password protected, with password accessible only to lent to an overcurrent trip unit. qualified personnel Informational Note: For motor circuits, see Parts III, IV, V, 240.8 Fuses or Circuit Breakers in Parallel. Fuses and and XI of Article 430. circuit breakers shall be permitted to be connected in parallel (B) Circuit Breaker as Overcurrent Device. Circuit breakers where they are factory assembled in parallel and listed as a unit. shall open all ungrounded conductors of the circuit both manually

Individual fuses, circuit breakers, or combinations thereof shall and automatically unless otherwise permitted in 240.15(B)(1), not otherwise be connected in parallel. (B)(2), (B)(3), and (B)(4). 240.9 Thermal Devices. Thermal relays and other devices not (1) Multiwire Branch Circuits. Individual single-pole cir- designed to open short circuits or ground faults shall not be cuit breakers, with identified handle ties, shall be permitted used for the protection of conductors against overcurrent due to 70–108 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 240.21 as the protection for each ungrounded conductor of multiwire (2) The tap conductors do not extend beyond the switchboard, branch circuits that serve only single-phase line-to-neutral loads. switchgear, panelboard, disconnecting means, or control devices they supply. (2) Grounded Single-Phase Alternating-Current Circuits. In (3) Except at the point of connection to the feeder, the tap con- grounded systems, individual single-pole circuit breakers rated ductors are enclosed in a raceway, which extends from the 120/240 volts ac, with identified handle ties, shall be permitted tap to the enclosure of an enclosed switchboard, switch- as the protection for each ungrounded conductor for line-to-line gear, a panelboard, or control devices, or to the back of an connected loads for single-phase circuits. open switchboard. (3) 3-Phase and 2-Phase Systems. For line-to-line loads in (4) For field installations, if the tap conductors leave the enclo-

4-wire, 3-phase systems or 5-wire, 2-phase systems, individual sure or vault in which the tap is made, the ampacity of the single-pole circuit breakers rated 120/240 volts ac with identi- tap conductors is not less than one-tenth of the rating of fied handle ties shall be permitted as the protection for each the overcurrent device protecting the feeder conductors. ungrounded conductor, if the systems have a grounded neutral Informational Note: For overcurrent protection require- point and the voltage to ground does not exceed 120 volts. ments for panelboards, see 408.36. (4) 3-Wire Direct-Current Circuits. Individual single-pole (2) Taps Not over 7.5 m (25 ft) Long. Where the length of circuit breakers rated 125/250 volts dc with identified handle the tap conductors does not exceed 7.5 m (25 ft) and the tap ties shall be permitted as the protection for each ungrounded conductors comply with all the following: conductor for line-to-line connected loads for 3-wire, direct-

current circuits supplied from a system with a grounded neutral (1) The ampacity of the tap conductors is not less than one-third where the voltage to ground does not exceed 125 volts. of the rating of the overcurrent device protecting the feeder conductors. Part II. Location (2) The tap conductors terminate in a single circuit breaker ∆ 240.21 Location in Circuit. Overcurrent protection shall or a single set of fuses that limit the load to the ampacity be provided in each ungrounded circuit conductor and shall of the tap conductors. This device shall be permitted to be located at the point where the conductors receive their sup- supply any number of additional overcurrent devices on its ply except as specified in 240.21(A) through (H). Conductors load side. supplied under 240.21(A) through (H) shall not supply another (3) The tap conductors are protected from physical damage conductor except through an overcurrent protective device by being enclosed in an approved raceway or by other meeting the requirements of 240.4. approved means. (A) Branch-Circuit Conductors.

Branch-circuit tap con- (3) Taps Supplying a Transformer [Primary Plus Secondary ductors meeting the requirements specified in 210.19 shall be Not over 7.5 m (25 ft) Long]. Where the tap conductors supply a permitted to have overcurrent protection as specified in 210.20. transformer and comply with all the following conditions: (B) Feeder Taps. Conductors shall be permitted to be tapped, (1) The conductors supplying the primary of a transformer without overcurrent protection at the tap, to a feeder as specified have an ampacity at least one-third the rating of the in 240.21(B)(1) through (B)(5). The tap shall be permitted at any overcurrent device protecting the feeder conductors. point on the load side of the feeder overcurrent protective device. (2) The conductors supplied by the secondary of the trans- Section 240.4(B) shall not be permitted for tap conductors. former shall have an ampacity that is not less than the value of the primary-to-secondary voltage ratio multiplied by ∆ (1) Taps Not over 3 m (10 ft) Long. If the length of the tap

one-third of the rating of the overcurrent device protecting conductors does not exceed 3 m (10 ft) and the tap conductors the feeder conductors. comply with all of the following: (3) The total length of one primary plus one secondary con- (1) The ampacity of the tap conductors is ductor, excluding any portion of the primary conductor that is protected at its ampacity, is not over 7.5 m (25 ft). a. Not less than the combined calculated loads on the cir- (4) The primary and secondary conductors are protected from cuits supplied by the tap conductors physical damage by being enclosed in an approved race- b. Not less than the rating of the equipment containing an way or by other approved means. overcurrent device(s) supplied by the tap conductors (5) The secondary conductors terminate in a single circuit or not less than the rating of the overcurrent protective breaker or set of fuses that limit the load current to not more device at the termination of the tap conductors than the conductor ampacity that is permitted by 310.14. Exception to b: Where listed equipment, such as a surge-

protective device(s) [SPD(s)], is provided with specific (4) Taps over 7.5 m (25 ft) Long. Where the feeder is in instructions on minimum conductor sizing, the ampacity of the a high bay manufacturing building over 11 m (35 ft) high at tap conductors supplying that equipment shall be permitted to walls and the installation complies with all the following be determined based on the manufacturer’s instructions. conditions: 2022 California Electrical Code 70–109

240.21 ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (1) Conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that (1) Protection by Primary Overcurrent Device. Conductors only qualified persons service the systems. supplied by the secondary side of a single-phase transformer hav- (2) The tap conductors are not over 7.5 m (25 ft) long horizon- ing a 2-wire (single-voltage) secondary, or a three-phase, delta- tally and not over 30 m (100 ft) total length. delta connected transformer having a 3-wire (single-voltage) (3) The ampacity of the tap conductors is not less than one-third secondary, shall be permitted to be protected by overcurrent the rating of the overcurrent device protecting the feeder protection provided on the primary (supply) side of the trans- conductors. former, provided this protection is in accordance with 450.3 and (4) The tap conductors terminate at a single circuit breaker or does not exceed the value determined by multiplying the sec- a single set of fuses that limit the load to the ampacity of ondary conductor ampacity by the secondary-to-primary trans- the tap conductors.

This single overcurrent device shall be former voltage ratio. permitted to supply any number of additional overcurrent Single-phase (other than 2-wire) and multiphase (other than devices on its load side. delta-delta, 3-wire) transformer secondary conductors are not (5) The tap conductors are protected from physical damage considered to be protected by the primary overcurrent protec- by being enclosed in an approved raceway or by other tive device. approved means. (6) The tap conductors are continuous from end-to-end and (2) Transformer Secondary Conductors Not over 3 m (10 ft) contain no splices. Long. If the length of secondary conductor does not exceed 3 m (7) The tap conductors are sized 6 AWG copper or 4 AWG (10 ft) and complies with all of the following: aluminum or larger. (1) The ampacity of the secondary conductors is (8) The tap conductors do not penetrate walls, floors, or a. Not less than the combined calculated loads on the cir- ceilings. cuits supplied by the secondary conductors, and (9) The tap is made no less than 9 m (30 ft) from the floor. b.

Not less than the rating of the equipment containing an (5) Outside Taps of Unlimited Length. Where the conduc- overcurrent device(s) supplied by the secondary conduc- tors are located outside of a building or structure, except at the tors or not less than the rating of the overcurrent protective point of load termination, and comply with all of the following device at the termination of the secondary conductors. conditions: Exception: Where listed equipment, such as a surge protec- (1) The tap conductors are protected from physical damage in tive device(s) [SPD(s)], is provided with specific instructions an approved manner. on minimum conductor sizing, the ampacity of the tap conduc- (2) The tap conductors terminate at a single circuit breaker or tors supplying that equipment shall be permitted to be deter- a single set of fuses that limits the load to the ampacity of mined based on the manufacturer’s instructions. the tap conductors. This single overcurrent device shall be (2) The secondary conductors do not extend beyond the permitted to supply any number of additional overcurrent

switchboard, switchgear, panelboard, disconnecting devices on its load side. means, or control devices they supply. (3) The overcurrent device for the tap conductors is an inte- (3) The secondary conductors are enclosed in a raceway, which gral part of a disconnecting means or shall be located shall extend from the transformer to the enclosure of an immediately adjacent thereto. enclosed switchboard, switchgear, a panelboard, or control (4) The disconnecting means for the tap conductors is devices or to the back of an open switchboard. installed at a readily accessible location complying with (4) For field installations where the secondary conductors one of the following: leave the enclosure or vault in which the supply connec- a. Outside of a building or structure tion is made, the rating of the overcurrent device protecting b. Inside, nearest the point of entrance of the tap the primary of the transformer, multiplied by the primary conductors to secondary transformer voltage ratio, shall not exceed c.

Where installed in accordance with 230.6, nearest the 10 times the ampacity of the secondary conductor. point of entrance of the tap conductors Informational Note: For overcurrent protection require- (C) Transformer Secondary Conductors. A set of conduc- ments for panelboards, see 408.36. tors feeding a single load, or each set of conductors feeding sep- arate loads, shall be permitted to be connected to a transformer (3) Industrial Installation Secondary Conductors Not over secondary, without overcurrent protection at the secondary, as 7.5 m (25 ft) Long. For the supply of switchgear or switch- specified in 240.21(C)(1) through (C)(6). Section 240.4(B) shall boards in industrial installations only, where the length of the not be permitted for transformer secondary conductors. secondary conductors does not exceed 7.5 m (25 ft) and com- plies with all of the following: Informational Note: For overcurrent protection require- (1) Conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that ments for transformers, see 450.3. only qualified persons service the systems.

70–110 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 240.24 (2) The ampacity of the secondary conductors is not less than (F) Motor Circuit Taps. Motor-feeder and branch-circuit the secondary current rating of the transformer, and the conductors shall be permitted to be protected against overcur- sum of the ratings of the overcurrent devices does not rent in accordance with 430.28 and 430.53, respectively. exceed the ampacity of the secondary conductors. (G) Conductors from Generator Terminals. Conductors (3) All overcurrent devices are grouped. from generator terminals that meet the size requirement in (4) The secondary conductors are protected from physical 445.13 shall be permitted to be protected against overload by damage by being enclosed in an approved raceway or by the generator overload protective device(s) required by 445.12. other approved means. (H) Battery Conductors. Overcurrent protection shall be per- (4) Outside Secondary Conductors. Where the conduc- mitted to be installed as close as practicable to the storage bat- tors are located outside of a building or structure, except at the

tery terminals in an unclassified location. Installation of the point of load termination, and comply with all of the following overcurrent protection within a hazardous (classified) location conditions: shall also be permitted. (1) The conductors are protected from physical damage in an 240.22 Grounded Conductor. No overcurrent device shall approved manner. be connected in series with any conductor that is intentionally (2) The conductors terminate at a single circuit breaker or a grounded, unless one of the following two conditions is met: single set of fuses that limit the load to the ampacity of the conductors. This single overcurrent device shall be permit- (1) The overcurrent device opens all conductors of the cir- ted to supply any number of additional overcurrent devices cuit, including the grounded conductor, and is designed on its load side. so that no pole can operate independently. (3) The overcurrent device for the conductors is an integral (2) Where required by 430.36 or 430.37 for motor overload part of a disconnecting means or shall be located immedi- • protection.

ately adjacent thereto. 240.24 Location in or on Premises. (4) The disconnecting means for the conductors is installed at (A) Accessibility. Circuit breakers and switches containing a readily accessible location complying with one of the fuses shall be readily accessible and installed so that the cen- following: ter of the grip of the operating handle of the switch or circuit a. Outside of a building or structure breaker, when in its highest position, is not more than 2.0 m b. Inside, nearest the point of entrance of the conductors (6 ft 7 in.) above the floor or working platform, unless one of c. Where installed in accordance with 230.6, nearest the the following applies: point of entrance of the conductors (1) For busways, as provided in 368.17(C). (5) Secondary Conductors from a Feeder Tapped Trans- (2) For supplementary overcurrent protection, as described in former. Transformer secondary conductors installed in accor- 240.10. dance with 240.21(B)(3) shall be permitted to have overcurrent (3) For overcurrent devices, as described in 225.40 and

protection as specified in that section. 230.92. (6) Secondary Conductors Not over 7.5 m (25 ft) Long. (4) For overcurrent devices adjacent to utilization equipment Where the length of secondary conductor does not exceed that they supply, access shall be permitted to be by portable 7.5 m (25 ft) and complies with all of the following: means. (1) The secondary conductors shall have an ampacity that is Exception: The use of a tool shall be permitted to access over- not less than the value of the primary-to-secondary voltage current devices located within listed industrial control panels or ratio multiplied by one-third of the rating of the overcur- similar enclosures. rent device protecting the primary of the transformer. (B) Occupancy. Each occupant shall have ready access to (2) The secondary conductors terminate in a single circuit all overcurrent devices protecting the conductors supplying that breaker or set of fuses that limit the load current to not more occupancy, unless otherwise permitted in 240.24(B)(1) and (B)(2). than the conductor ampacity that is permitted by 310.14.

(3) The secondary conductors are protected from physical (1) Service and Feeder Overcurrent Devices. Where electric damage by being enclosed in an approved raceway or by service and electrical maintenance are provided by the build- other approved means. ing management and where these are under continuous building management supervision, the service overcurrent devices and (D) Service Conductors. Service conductors shall be permit- feeder overcurrent devices supplying more than one occupancy ted to be protected by overcurrent devices in accordance with shall be permitted to be accessible only to authorized manage- 230.91. ment personnel in the following: (E) Busway Taps. Busways and busway taps shall be permitted (1) Multiple-occupancy buildings to be protected against overcurrent in accordance with 368.17. (2) Guest rooms or guest suites 2022 California Electrical Code 70–111

240.30 ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (2) Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Devices. Where electric limiter without a disconnecting means shall be permitted on service and electrical maintenance are provided by the build- the supply side of the service disconnecting means as permitted ing management and where these are under continuous building by 230.82. A single disconnecting means shall be permitted on management supervision, the branch-circuit overcurrent devices the supply side of more than one set of fuses as permitted by supplying any guest rooms or guest suites without permanent 430.112, Exception, for group operation of motors, 424.22(C) provisions for cooking shall be permitted to be accessible only to for fixed electric space-heating equipment, and 425.22(C) for authorized management personnel. fixed resistance and electrode industrial process heating equip- ment, or where specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code. (C) Not Exposed to Physical Damage. Overcurrent devices shall be located where they will not be exposed to physical 240.41 Arcing or Suddenly Moving Parts.

Arcing or sud- damage. denly moving parts shall comply with 240.41(A) and (B). Informational Note: See 110.11, Deteriorating Agents. (A) Location. Fuses and circuit breakers shall be located or shielded so that persons will not be burned or otherwise injured (D) Not in Vicinity of Easily Ignitible Material. Overcur- by their operation. rent devices shall not be located in the vicinity of easily ignitible material, such as in clothes closets. (B) Suddenly Moving Parts. Handles or levers of circuit breakers, and similar parts that may move suddenly in such a (E) Not Located in Bathrooms. In dwelling units, dormi- way that persons in the vicinity are likely to be injured by being tory units, and guest rooms or guest suites, overcurrent devices, struck by them, shall be guarded or isolated. other than supplementary overcurrent protection, shall not be located in bathrooms. Part V. Plug Fuses, Fuseholders, and Adapters (F) Not Located over Steps. Overcurrent devices shall not be 240.50 General. located over steps of a stairway. (A) Maximum Voltage. Plug fuses shall be permitted to be

Part III. Enclosures used in the following circuits: 240.30 General. (1) Circuits not exceeding 125 volts between conductors (2) Circuits supplied by a system having a grounded neutral (A) Protection from Physical Damage. Overcurrent devices point where the line-to-neutral voltage does not exceed shall be protected from physical damage by one of the 150 volts following: (B) Marking. Each fuse, fuseholder, and adapter shall be (1) Installation in enclosures, cabinets, cutout boxes, or marked with its ampere rating. equipment assemblies (2) Mounting on open-type switchboards, panelboards, or con- (C) Hexagonal Configuration. Plug fuses of 15-ampere and trol boards that are in rooms or enclosures free from damp- lower rating shall be identified by a hexagonal configuration of ness and easily ignitible material and are accessible only the window, cap, or other prominent part to distinguish them to qualified personnel from fuses of higher ampere ratings. (B) Operating Handle. The operating handle of a circuit (D) No Energized Parts. Plug fuses, fuseholders, and adapt-

breaker shall be permitted to be accessible without opening a ers shall have no exposed energized parts after fuses or fuses door or cover. and adapters have been installed. 240.32 Damp or Wet Locations. Enclosures for overcurrent (E) Screw Shell. The screw shell of a plug-type fuseholder devices in damp or wet locations shall comply with 312.2. shall be connected to the load side of the circuit. ∆ 240.33 Vertical Position. Enclosures for overcurrent devices 240.51 Edison-Base Fuses. shall be mounted in a vertical position. Circuit breaker enclo- (A) Classification. Plug fuses of the Edison-base type shall be sures shall be permitted to be installed horizontally where the classified at not over 125 volts and 30 amperes and below. circuit breaker is installed in accordance with 240.81. Listed busway plug-in units shall be permitted to be mounted in orien- (B) Replacement Only. Plug fuses of the Edison-base type tations corresponding to the busway mounting position. shall be used only for replacements in existing installations where there is no evidence of overfusing or tampering.

Part IV. Disconnecting and Guarding 240.52 Edison-Base Fuseholders. Fuseholders of the Edi- ∆ 240.40 Disconnecting Means for Fuses. Cartridge fuses in son-base type shall be installed only where they are made to circuits of any voltage, and all fuses in circuits over 150 volts accept Type S fuses by the use of adapters. to ground, shall be provided with a disconnecting means on 240.53 Type S Fuses. Type S fuses shall be of the plug type their supply side so that each circuit containing fuses can be and shall comply with 240.53(A) and (B). independently disconnected from the source of power. A cable 70–112 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 240.67 (A) Classification. Type S fuses shall be classified at not (D) Renewable Fuses. Class H cartridge fuses of the renew- over 125 volts and 0 to 15 amperes, 16 to 20 amperes, and 21 able type shall be permitted to be used only for replacement in to 30 amperes. existing installations where there is no evidence of overfusing or tampering. (B) Noninterchangeable. Type S fuses of an ampere classifi- cation as specified in 240.53(A) shall not be interchangeable 240.61 Classification. Cartridge fuses and fuseholders shall with a lower ampere classification. They shall be designed so be classified according to voltage and amperage ranges. Fuses that they cannot be used in any fuseholder other than a Type S rated 1000 volts, nominal, or less shall be permitted to be used fuseholder or a fuseholder with a Type S adapter inserted. for voltages at or below their ratings. 240.54 Type S Fuses, Adapters, and Fuseholders. N 240.62 Reconditioned Equipment. Low-voltage fuseholders and low-voltage nonrenewable fuses shall not be permitted to be

(A) To Fit Edison-Base Fuseholders. Type S adapters shall reconditioned. fit Edison-base fuseholders. 240.67 Arc Energy Reduction. Where fuses rated 1200 A (B) To Fit Type S Fuses Only. Type S fuseholders and or higher are installed, 240.67(A) and (B) shall apply. This adapters shall be designed so that either the fuseholder itself requirement shall become effective January 1, 2020. or the fuseholder with a Type S adapter inserted cannot be used for any fuse other than a Type S fuse. (A) Documentation. Documentation shall be available to those authorized to design, install, operate, or inspect the instal- (C) Nonremovable. Type S adapters shall be designed so that lation as to the location of the fuses. once inserted in a fuseholder, they cannot be removed. Documentation shall also be provided to demonstrate that (D) Nontamperable. Type S fuses, fuseholders, and adapt- the method chosen to reduce clearing time is set to operate at ers shall be designed so that tampering or shunting (bridging) a value below the available arcing current. would be difficult.

(B) Method to Reduce Clearing Time. A fuse shall have a (E) Interchangeability. Dimensions of Type S fuses, fuse- clearing time of 0.07 seconds or less at the available arcing cur- holders, and adapters shall be standardized to permit inter- rent, or one of the following means shall be provided and shall changeability regardless of the manufacturer. be set to operate at less than the available arcing current: Part VI. Cartridge Fuses and Fuseholders (1) Differential relaying 240.60 General. (2) Energy-reducing maintenance switching with local status indicator (A) Maximum Voltage — 300-Volt Type. Cartridge fuses (3) Energy-reducing active arc-flash mitigation system and fuseholders of the 300-volt type shall be permitted to be (4) Current-limiting, electronically actuated fuses used in the following circuits: (5) An approved equivalent means (1) Circuits not exceeding 300 volts between conductors Informational Note No. 1: An energy-reducing mainte- (2) Single-phase line-to-neutral circuits supplied from a nance switch allows a worker to set a disconnect switch

3-phase, 4-wire, solidly grounded neutral source where the to reduce the clearing time while the worker is working line-to-neutral voltage does not exceed 300 volts within an arc-flash boundary as defined in NFPA 70E- (B) Noninterchangeable — 0–6000-Ampere Cartridge Fuse- 2018, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, and holders. Fuseholders shall be designed so that it will be difficult then to set the disconnect switch back to a normal setting to put a fuse of any given class into a fuseholder that is designed after the potentially hazardous work is complete. for a current lower, or voltage higher, than that of the class to Informational Note No. 2: An energy-reducing active arc- which the fuse belongs. Fuseholders for current-limiting fuses flash mitigation system helps in reducing arcing duration shall not permit insertion of fuses that are not current-limiting. in the electrical distribution system. No change in the dis- (C) Marking. Fuses shall be plainly marked, either by printing connect switch or the settings of other devices is required

on the fuse barrel or by a label attached to the barrel showing during maintenance when a worker is working within an the following: arc-flash boundary as defined in NFPA 70E-2018, Stan- dard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. (1) Ampere rating Informational Note No. 3: IEEE 1584-2002, IEEE (2) Voltage rating Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations, is (3) Interrupting rating where other than 10,000 amperes one of the available methods that provides guidance in (4) Current limiting where applicable determining arcing current. (5) The name or trademark of the manufacturer N (C) Performance Testing. The arc energy reduction protec- The interrupting rating shall not be required to be marked tion system shall be performance tested by primary current on fuses used for supplementary protection. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–113

240.80 ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION injection testing or another approved method when first installed 240.85 Applications. A circuit breaker with a straight voltage on site. This testing shall be conducted by a qualified person(s) rating, such as 240V or 480V, shall be permitted to be applied in in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. a circuit in which the nominal voltage between any two conduc- tors does not exceed the circuit breaker’s voltage rating. A two- A written record of this testing shall be made and shall be pole circuit breaker shall not be used for protecting a 3-phase, available to the authority having jurisdiction. corner-grounded delta circuit unless the circuit breaker is Informational Note: Some energy reduction protection marked 1ϕ–3ϕ to indicate such suitability. systems cannot be tested using a test process of primary A circuit breaker with a slash rating, such as 120/240V current injection due to either the protection method or 480Y/277V, shall be permitted to be applied in a solidly being damaged such as with the use of fuse technol-

grounded circuit where the nominal voltage of any conductor to ogy or because current is not the primary method of arc ground does not exceed the lower of the two values of the cir- detection. cuit breaker’s voltage rating and the nominal voltage between Part VII. Circuit Breakers any two conductors does not exceed the higher value of the cir- cuit breaker’s voltage rating. 240.80 Method of Operation. Circuit breakers shall be trip free and capable of being closed and opened by manual operation. Informational Note: Proper application of molded Their normal method of operation by other than manual means, case circuit breakers on 3-phase systems, other than such as electrical or pneumatic, shall be permitted if means for solidly grounded wye, particularly on corner grounded delta manual operation are also provided. systems, considers the circuit breakers’ individual pole- interrupting capability. 240.81 Indicating. Circuit breakers shall clearly indicate whether they are in the open “off” or closed “on” position. ∆ 240.86 Series Ratings. Where a circuit breaker is used on a

circuit having an available fault current higher than the marked Where circuit breaker handles are operated vertically rather interrupting rating by being connected on the load side of an than rotationally or horizontally, the “up” position of the handle approved overcurrent protective device having a higher rating, shall be the “on” position. the circuit breaker shall meet the requirements specified in 240.82 Nontamperable. A circuit breaker shall be of such 240.86(A) or (B), and (C). design that any alteration of its trip point (calibration) or the (A) Selected Under Engineering Supervision in Existing time required for its operation requires dismantling of the Installations. The series rated combination devices shall be device or breaking of a seal for other than intended adjustments. selected by a licensed professional engineer engaged primar- 240.83 Marking. ily in the design or maintenance of electrical installations. The selection shall be documented and stamped by the professional (A) Durable and Visible. Circuit breakers shall be marked engineer.

This documentation shall be available to those autho- with their ampere rating in a manner that will be durable and rized to design, install, inspect, maintain, and operate the system. visible after installation. Such marking shall be permitted to be This series combination rating, including identification of the made visible by removal of a trim or cover. upstream device, shall be field marked on the end use equipment. (B) Location. Circuit breakers rated at 100 amperes or less For calculated applications, the engineer shall ensure that and 1000 volts or less shall have the ampere rating molded, the downstream circuit breaker(s) that are part of the series stamped, etched, or similarly marked into their handles or combination remain passive during the interruption period of escutcheon areas. the line side fully rated, current-limiting device. (C) Interrupting Rating. Every circuit breaker having an (B) Tested Combinations. The combination of line-side over- interrupting rating other than 5000 amperes shall have its inter- current device and load-side circuit breaker(s) is tested and

rupting rating shown on the circuit breaker. The interrupting rat- marked on the end use equipment, such as switchboards and ing shall not be required to be marked on circuit breakers used panelboards. for supplementary protection. Informational Note to (A) and (B): See 110.22 for (D) Used as Switches. Circuit breakers used as switches in marking of series combination systems. 120-volt and 277-volt fluorescent lighting circuits shall be listed and shall be marked SWD or HID. Circuit breakers used (C) Motor Contribution. Series ratings shall not be used as switches in high-intensity discharge lighting circuits shall be where listed and shall be marked as HID. (1) Motor circuits are connected between the higher-rated (E) Voltage Marking. Circuit breakers shall be marked with a overcurrent device of a series-rated combination and on the voltage rating not less than the nominal system voltage that is lower-rated circuit breaker, and indicative of their capability to interrupt fault currents between (2) The sum of these motor full-load currents exceeds 1 percent phases or phase to ground.

of the interrupting rating of the lower-rated circuit breaker. 70–114 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 240.91 240.87 Arc Energy Reduction. Where the highest continu- installed on site. This testing shall be conducted by a qualified ous current trip setting for which the actual overcurrent device person(s) in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. installed in a circuit breaker is rated or can be adjusted is 1200 A A written record of this testing shall be made and shall be or higher, 240.87(A) and (B) shall apply. available to the authority having jurisdiction. (A) Documentation. Documentation shall be available to Informational Note: Some energy reduction protection those authorized to design, install, operate, or inspect the instal- systems cannot be tested using a test process of primary lation as to the location of the circuit breaker(s). Documentation current injection due to either the protection method shall also be provided to demonstrate that the method chosen to being damaged such as with the use of fuse technol- reduce clearing time is set to operate at a value below the avail-

ogy or because current is not the primary method of arc able arcing current. detection. ∆ (B) Method to Reduce Clearing Time. One of the following N 240.88 Reconditioned Equipment. Reconditioned equipment means shall be provided and shall be set to operate at less than shall be listed as “reconditioned” and the original listing mark the available arcing current: removed. (1) Zone-selective interlocking N (A) Circuit Breakers. The use of reconditioned circuit (2) Differential relaying breakers shall comply with (1) through (3): (3) Energy-reducing maintenance switching with local status indicator (1) Molded-case circuit breakers shall not be permitted to be (4) Energy-reducing active arc flash mitigation system reconditioned. (5) An instantaneous trip setting. Temporary adjustment of the (2) Low- and medium-voltage power circuit breakers shall be instantaneous trip setting to achieve arc energy reduction permitted to be reconditioned. shall not be permitted. (3) High-voltage circuit breakers shall be permitted to be (6) An instantaneous override reconditioned.

(7) An approved equivalent means N (B) Components. The use of reconditioned trip units, pro- Informational Note No. 1: An energy-reducing mainte- tective relays, and current transformers shall comply with (1) nance switch allows a worker to set a circuit breaker trip and (2): unit to “no intentional delay” to reduce the clearing time (1) Low-voltage power circuit breaker electronic trip units while the worker is working within an arc-flash boundary shall not be permitted to be reconditioned. as defined in NFPA 70E-2018, Standard for Electrical (2) Electromechanical protective relays and current transform- Safety in the Workplace, and then to set the trip unit back ers shall be permitted to be reconditioned. to a normal setting after the potentially hazardous work is complete. Part VIII. Supervised Industrial Installations Informational Note No. 2: An energy-reducing active ∆ 240.90 General. Overcurrent protection in areas of supervised arc-flash mitigation system helps in reducing arcing industrial installations shall comply with all of the other appli-

duration in the electrical distribution system. No change cable provisions of this article, except as provided in Part VIII. in the circuit breaker or the settings of other devices is Part VIII shall be permitted to apply only to those portions of required during maintenance when a worker is working the electrical system in the supervised industrial installation within an arc-flash boundary as defined in NFPA 70E- used exclusively for manufacturing or process control activities. 2018, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 240.91 Protection of Conductors. Conductors shall be pro- Informational Note No. 3: An instantaneous trip is a tected in accordance with 240.91(A) or 240.91(B). function that causes a circuit breaker to trip with no inten- tional delay when currents exceed the instantaneous trip (A) General. Conductors shall be protected in accordance with setting or current level. If arcing currents are above the 240.4. instantaneous trip level, the circuit breaker will trip in ∆ (B) Devices Rated Over 800 Amperes. Where the overcurrent the minimum possible time.

device is rated over 800 amperes, the ampacity of the conductors Informational Note No. 4: IEEE 1584-2002, IEEE it protects shall be equal to or greater than 95 percent of the rat- Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations, ing of the overcurrent device in accordance with the following: is one of the available methods that provide guidance in (1) The conductors are protected within recognized time vs. determining arcing current. current limits for short-circuit currents N (C) Performance Testing. The arc energy reduction pro- Informational Note: Table 240.92(B) provides time vs. tection system shall be performance tested by primary cur- short-circuit current formulas to determine limits for cop- rent injection testing or another approved method when first per and aluminum conductors. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–115

240.92 ARTICLE 240 — OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (2) All equipment in which the conductors terminate is listed Table 240.92(B) Tap Conductor Short-Circuit Current Ratings and marked for the application. Tap conductors are considered to be protected under short-circuit 240.92 Location in Circuit. An overcurrent device shall be conditions when their short-circuit temperature limit is not connected in each ungrounded circuit conductor as required in exceeded. Conductor heating under short-circuit conditions is 240.92(A) through (E). determined by (1) or (2): (1) Short-Circuit Formula for Copper Conductors (A) Feeder and Branch-Circuit Conductors. Feeder and (I 2 /A2)t = 0.0297 log [(T + 234)/(T + 234)] 10 2 1 branch-circuit conductors shall be protected at the point the (2) Short-Circuit Formula for Aluminum Conductors 2 2 conductors receive their supply as permitted in 240.21 or as (I /A)t = 0.0125 log10 [(T2 + 228)/(T1 + 228)] where: otherwise permitted in 240.92(B), (C), (D), or (E). I = short-circuit current in amperes (B) Feeder Taps. For feeder taps specified in 240.21(B)(2),

A = conductor area in circular mils (B)(3), and (B)(4), the tap conductors shall be permitted to be t = time of short circuit in seconds (for times less than or equal to sized in accordance with Table 240.92(B). 10 seconds) (C) Transformer Secondary Conductors of Separately T1 = initial conductor temperature in degrees Celsius Derived Systems. Conductors shall be permitted to be con- T2 = final conductor temperature in degrees Celsius nected to a transformer secondary of a separately derived sys- Copper conductor with paper, rubber, varnished cloth insulation, T = 200 tem, without overcurrent protection at the connection, where 2 the conditions of 240.92(C)(1), (C)(2), and (C)(3) are met. Copper conductor with thermoplastic insulation, T2 = 150 Copper conductor with cross-linked polyethylene insulation, (1) Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protection. The T2 = 250 conductors shall be protected from short-circuit and ground- Copper conductor with ethylene propylene rubber insulation, T = 250 fault conditions by complying with one of the following 2

Aluminum conductor with paper, rubber, varnished cloth insulation, conditions: T2 = 200 (1) The length of the secondary conductors does not exceed Aluminum conductor with thermoplastic insulation, T2 = 150 30 m (100 ft), and the transformer primary overcurrent Aluminum conductor with cross-linked polyethylene insulation, T = 250 device has a rating or setting that does not exceed 150 per- 2 Aluminum conductor with ethylene propylene rubber insulation, cent of the value determined by multiplying the secondary T2 = 250 conductor ampacity by the secondary-to-primary trans- former voltage ratio. (2) The conductors are protected by a differential relay with or switchgear. There shall be no more than six overcurrent a trip setting equal to or less than the conductor ampacity. devices grouped in any one location. Informational Note: A differential relay is connected to (3) Overcurrent relaying is connected [with a current trans- be sensitive only to short-circuit or fault currents within former(s), if needed] to sense all of the secondary conduc-

the protected zone and is normally set much lower than tor current and limit the load to the conductor ampacity by the conductor ampacity. The differential relay is connected opening upstream or downstream devices. to trip protective devices that de-energize the protected (4) Conductors shall be considered to be protected if calcula- conductors if a short-circuit condition occurs. tions, made under engineering supervision, determine that the system overcurrent devices will protect the conductors (3) The conductors shall be considered to be protected if cal- from overload conditions. culations, made under engineering supervision, determine that the system overcurrent devices will protect the conduc- (3) Physical Protection. The secondary conductors are pro- tors within recognized time vs. current limits for all short- tected from physical damage by being enclosed in an approved circuit and ground-fault conditions. raceway or by other approved means. (2) Overload Protection. The conductors shall be protected (D) Outside Feeder Taps. Outside conductors shall be permit-

against overload conditions by complying with one of the ted to be tapped to a feeder or to be connected at a transformer following: secondary, without overcurrent protection at the tap or connec- tion, where all the following conditions are met: (1) The conductors terminate in a single overcurrent device that will limit the load to the conductor ampacity. (1) The conductors are protected from physical damage in an (2) The sum of the overcurrent devices at the conductor ter- approved manner. mination limits the load to the conductor ampacity. The (2) The sum of the overcurrent devices at the conductor ter- overcurrent devices shall consist of not more than six cir- mination limits the load to the conductor ampacity. The cuit breakers or sets of fuses mounted in a single enclosure, overcurrent devices shall consist of not more than six cir- in a group of separate enclosures, or in or on a switchboard cuit breakers or sets of fuses mounted in a single enclosure, 70–116 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 242 — OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION 242.3 in a group of separate enclosures, or in or on a switchboard (2) Fuses. A fuse shall be connected in series with each or switchgear. There shall be no more than six overcurrent ungrounded conductor. devices grouped in any one location. (B) Protective Devices. The protective device(s) shall be (3) The tap conductors are installed outdoors of a building or capable of detecting and interrupting all values of current that structure except at the point of load termination. can occur at their location in excess of their trip-setting or melt- (4) The overcurrent device for the conductors is an integral ing point. part of a disconnecting means or is located immediately adjacent thereto. (C) Conductor Protection. The operating time of the protec- (5) The disconnecting means for the conductors are installed tive device, the available short-circuit current, and the conduc- at a readily accessible location complying with one of the tor used shall be coordinated to prevent damaging or dangerous

following: temperatures in conductors or conductor insulation under short- circuit conditions. a. Outside of a building or structure b. Inside, nearest the point of entrance of the conductors 240.101 Additional Requirements for Feeders. c. Where installed in accordance with 230.6, nearest the (A) Rating or Setting of Overcurrent Protective Devices. point of entrance of the conductors The continuous ampere rating of a fuse shall not exceed three (E) Protection by Primary Overcurrent Device. Conduc- times the ampacity of the conductors. The long-time trip tors supplied by the secondary side of a transformer shall be element setting of a breaker or the minimum trip setting of permitted to be protected by overcurrent protection provided an electronically actuated fuse shall not exceed six times the on the primary (supply) side of the transformer, provided the pri- ampacity of the conductor. For fire pumps, conductors shall be mary device time–current protection characteristic, multiplied permitted to be protected for overcurrent in accordance with

by the maximum effective primary-to-secondary transformer 695.4(B)(2). voltage ratio, effectively protects the secondary conductors. (B) Feeder Taps. Conductors tapped to a feeder shall be per- mitted to be protected by the feeder overcurrent device where Part IX. Overcurrent Protection over 1000 Volts, Nominal that overcurrent device also protects the tap conductor. 240.100 Feeders and Branch Circuits. N 240.102 Reconditioned Equipment. Medium-voltage fuse- (A) Location and Type of Protection. Feeder and branch- holders and medium-voltage nonrenewable fuses shall not be circuit conductors shall have overcurrent protection in each permitted to be reconditioned. ungrounded conductor located at the point where the con- ductor receives its supply or at an alternative location in the N circuit when designed under engineering supervision that ARTICLE 242 includes but is not limited to considering the appropriate fault Overvoltage Protection studies and time–current coordination analysis of the protec- tive devices and the conductor damage curves. The overcur-

rent protection shall be permitted to be provided by either N Part I. General 240.100(A)(1) or (A)(2). N 242.1 Scope. This article provides the general requirements, (1) Overcurrent Relays and Current Transformers. Cir- installation requirements, and connection requirements for over- cuit breakers used for overcurrent protection of 3-phase circuits voltage protection and overvoltage protective devices. Part II shall have a minimum of three overcurrent relay elements covers surge-protective devices (SPDs) permanently installed operated from three current transformers. The separate over- on premises wiring systems of not more than 1000 volts, nomi- current relay elements (or protective functions) shall be per- nal, while Part III covers surge arresters permanently installed mitted to be part of a single electronic protective relay unit. on premises wiring systems over 1000 volts, nominal. On 3-phase, 3-wire circuits, an overcurrent relay element in Informational Note: Article 242 combines and replaces

the residual circuit of the current transformers shall be permit- Articles 280 and 285 in NFPA 70-2017. ted to replace one of the phase relay elements. N 242.3 Other Articles. Equipment shall be protected against An overcurrent relay element, operated from a current overvoltage in accordance with the article in this Code that cov- transformer that links all phases of a 3-phase, 3-wire circuit, ers the type of equipment or location specified in Table 242.3. shall be permitted to replace the residual relay element and one of the phase-conductor current transformers. Where the N Part II. Surge-Protective Devices (SPDs), 1000 Volts neutral conductor is not regrounded on the load side of the cir- or Less cuit as permitted in 250.184(B), the current transformer shall Informational Note: Surge arresters 1000 volts or less are be permitted to link all 3-phase conductors and the grounded also known as Type 1 SPDs. circuit conductor (neutral). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–117

242.6 ARTICLE 242 — OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION N Table 242.3 Other Articles N (A) Service-Supplied Building or Structure. Type 2 SPDs shall be connected anywhere on the load side of a service dis- Equipment Article connect overcurrent device required in 230.91 unless installed in accordance with 230.82(8). Class I locations 501 Class II locations 502 N (B) Feeder-Supplied Building or Structure. Type 2 SPDs Community antenna television and radio distribution 820 shall be connected at the building or structure anywhere on the systems load side of the first overcurrent device at the building or structure. Critical operations power systems 708 Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, 620 N (C) Separately Derived System. The SPD shall be con- platform lifts, and stairway chairlifts nected on the load side of the first overcurrent device in a sepa- Emergency systems 700 rately derived system. Equipment over 1000 volts, nominal 490 Fire pumps 695 N 242.16 Type 3 SPDs. Type 3 SPDs shall be permitted to be

Industrial machinery 670 installed on the load side of branch-circuit overcurrent protection Information technology equipment 645 up to the equipment served. If included in the manufacturer’s Modular data centers 646 instructions, the Type 3 SPD connection shall be a minimum Outdoor overhead conductors over 1000 volts 399 10 m (30 ft) of conductor distance from the service or sepa- Radio and television equipment 810 Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs (caps) 406 rately derived system disconnect. Wind electric systems 694 N 242.18 Type 4 and Other Component Type SPDs. Type 4 component assemblies and other component type SPDs shall only be installed by the equipment manufacturer. N 242.6 Uses Not Permitted. An SPD device shall not be N 242.20 Number Required. Where used at a point on a cir- installed in the following: cuit, the SPD shall be connected to each ungrounded conductor. (1) Circuits over 1000 volts N 242.22 Location. SPDs shall be permitted to be located (2) On ungrounded systems, impedance grounded systems, indoors or outdoors and shall be made inaccessible to

or corner grounded delta systems unless listed specifically unqualified persons unless listed for installation in accessible for use on these systems locations. (3) Where the rating of the SPD is less than the maximum con- N 242.24 Routing of Connections. The conductors used to con- tinuous phase-to-ground voltage at the power frequency nect the SPD to the line or bus and to ground shall not be any available at the point of application longer than necessary and shall avoid unnecessary bends. N 242.8 Listing. An SPD shall be a listed device. N 242.26 Connection. Where an SPD device is installed, it N 242.10 Short-Circuit Current Rating. The SPD shall be shall comply with 242.12, 242.14, 242.16, 242.28. and 242.30. marked with a short-circuit current rating and shall not be N 242.28 Conductor Size. Line and grounding conductors installed at a point on the system where the available fault cur- shall not be smaller than 14 AWG copper or 12 AWG aluminum. rent is in excess of that rating. This marking requirement shall not apply to receptacles. N 242.30 Connection Between Conductors.

An SPD shall be permitted to be connected between any two conductors — N 242.12 Type 1 SPDs. Type 1 SPDs shall be installed in ungrounded conductor(s), grounded conductor, equipment accordance with 242.12(A) and (B). grounding conductor, or grounding electrode conductor. N (A) Installation. Type 1 SPDs shall be permitted to be con- The grounded conductor and the equipment grounding con- nected in accordance with one of the following: ductor shall be interconnected only by the normal operation of (1) To the supply side of the service disconnect as permitted in the SPD during a surge. 230.82(4) N 242.32 Grounding Electrode Conductor Connections and (2) As specified in 242.14 Enclosures. Except as indicated in this article, SPD ground- ing connections shall be made as specified in Article 250, Part III. N (B) At the Service. When installed at services, Type 1 SPDs Grounding electrode conductors installed in metal enclosures shall be connected to one of the following: shall comply with 250.64(E). (1) Grounded service conductor (2) Grounding electrode conductor N Part III.

Surge Arresters, Over 1000 Volts (3) Grounding electrode for the service N 242.40 Uses Not Permitted. A surge arrester shall not be (4) Equipment grounding terminal in the service equipment installed where the rating of the surge arrester is less than the N 242.14 Type 2 SPDs. Type 2 SPDs shall be installed in maximum continuous phase-to-ground voltage at the power fre- accordance with 242.14(A) through (C). quency available at the point of application. 70–118 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 242 — OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION 242.54 N 242.42 Surge Arrester Selection. The surge arresters shall N 242.52 Surge-Arrester Conductors. The conductor between comply with 242.42(A) and (B). the surge arrester and the line, and the surge arrester and the grounding connection, shall not be smaller than 6 AWG copper N (A) Rating. The rating of a surge arrester shall be equal to or or aluminum. greater than the maximum continuous operating voltage avail- able at the point of application. N 242.54 Interconnections. The surge arrester protecting a transformer that supplies a secondary distribution system shall N (1) Solidly Grounded Systems. The maximum continuous be interconnected as specified in 242.54(A), (B), or (C). operating voltage shall be the phase-to-ground voltage of the system. N (A) Metal Interconnections. A metal interconnection shall be made to the secondary grounded circuit conductor or the sec- N (2) Impedance or Ungrounded System. The maximum ondary circuit grounding electrode conductor, if, in addition to continuous operating voltage shall be the phase-to-phase volt-

the direct grounding connection at the surge arrester, the con- age of the system. nection complies with 242.54(A)(1) or (A)(2). N (B) Silicon Carbide Types. The rating of a silicon carbide- N (1) Additional Grounding Connection. The grounded con- type surge arrester shall be not less than 125 percent of the rat- ductor of the secondary has a grounding connection elsewhere ing specified in 242.42(A). to a continuous metal underground water piping system. In Informational Note No. 1: For further information on urban water-pipe areas where there are at least four water-pipe surge arresters, see IEEE C62.11-2012, Standard for connections on the neutral conductor and not fewer than four Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating-Current such connections in each mile of neutral conductor, the metal Power Circuits (>1 kV), and IEEE C62.22-2009, Guide interconnection shall be permitted to be made to the secondary for the Application of Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for neutral conductor with omission of the direct grounding con- Alternating-Current Systems. nection at the surge arrester.

Informational Note No. 2: The selection of a properly rated N (2) Multigrounded Neutral System Connection. The metal oxide arrester is based on considerations of maxi- grounded conductor of the secondary system is part of a mul- mum continuous operating voltage and the magnitude and tigrounded neutral system or static wire of which the primary duration of overvoltages at the arrester location as affected neutral conductor or static wire has at least four grounding con- by phase-to-ground faults, system grounding techniques, nections in each 1.6 km (1 mile) of line in addition to a ground- switching surges, and other causes. See the manufacturer’s ing connection at each service. application rules for selection of the specific arrester to be N (B) Through Spark Gap or Device. Where the surge used at a particular location. arrester grounding electrode conductor is not connected as in N 242.44 Number Required. Where used at a point on a cir- 242.54(A), or where the secondary is not grounded as in 242.54(A)

cuit, a surge arrester shall be connected to each ungrounded but is otherwise grounded as in 250.52, an interconnection shall conductor. A single installation of such surge arresters shall be be made through a spark gap or listed device as required by permitted to protect a number of interconnected circuits if no 242.54(B)(1) or (B)(2). circuit is exposed to surges while disconnected from the surge N (1) Ungrounded or Unigrounded Primary System. For arresters. ungrounded or unigrounded primary systems, the spark gap N 242.46 Location. Surge arresters shall be permitted to be for a listed device shall have a 60-Hz breakdown voltage of located indoors or outdoors. Surge arresters shall be made inac- at least twice the primary circuit voltage but not necessarily cessible to unqualified persons unless listed for installation in more than 10 kV, and there shall be at least one other ground accessible locations. on the grounded conductor of the secondary that is not less N 242.48 Routing of Surge Arrester Equipment Grounding than 6.0 m (20 ft) distant from the surge-arrester grounding

Conductors. The conductor used to connect the surge arrester electrode. to line, bus, or equipment and to an equipment grounding con- N (2) Multigrounded Neutral Primary System. For multi- ductor or grounding electrode connection point as provided in grounded neutral primary systems, the spark gap or listed device 242.50 shall not be any longer than necessary and shall avoid shall have a 60-Hz breakdown of not more than 3 kV, and there unnecessary bends. shall be at least one other ground on the grounded conductor of N 242.50 Connection. The arrester shall be connected to one the secondary that is not less than 6.0 m (20 ft) distant from the of the following: surge-arrester grounding electrode. (1) Grounded service conductor N (C) By Special Permission. An interconnection of the surge- (2) Grounding electrode conductor arrester ground and the secondary neutral conductor, other than (3) Grounding electrode for the service as provided in 242.54(A) or (B), shall be permitted to be made (4) Equipment grounding terminal in the service equipment only by special permission.

2022 California Electrical Code 70–119

242.56 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING N 242.56 Grounding Electrode Conductor Connections and Enclosures. Except as indicated in this article, surge-arrester Part I General grounding electrode conductor connections shall be made as specified in Article 250, Parts III and X. Grounding electrode conductors installed in metal enclosures shall comply with Part II System grounding 250.64(E). Part VIII Direct-current systems ARTICLE 250 Part X Grounding of systems and circuits of Grounding and Bonding over 1000 volts Part III Grounding electrode Part I. General system and grounding Part V Bonding electrode conductor 250.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements for grounding and bonding of electrical installations, and the spe- Part IV Enclosure, cific requirements in (1) through (6). raceway, and service cable connections (1) Systems, circuits, and equipment required, permitted, or not permitted to be grounded Part VI Equipment (2) Circuit conductor to be grounded on grounded systems grounding and equipment (3) Location of grounding connections grounding conductors

(4) Types and sizes of grounding and bonding conductors and electrodes Part VII Methods of equipment (5) Methods of grounding and bonding grounding conductor connections (6) Conditions under which guards, isolation, or insulation may be substituted for grounding Part IX Instruments, Informational Note: See Figure 250.1 for information on meters, and relays the organization of Article 250 covering grounding and bonding requirements. ∆ FIGURE 250.1 Grounding and Bonding. • 250.3 Application of Other Articles. For other articles applying to particular cases of installation of conductors and Informational Note No. 2: See NFPA 780-2017, Stan- equipment, grounding and bonding requirements are identified dard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems, in Table 250.3 that are in addition to, or modifications of, those for information on installation of grounding and bonding of this article. for lightning protection systems. 250.4 General Requirements for Grounding and Bonding. (2) Grounding of Electrical Equipment. Normally non–

The following general requirements identify what grounding current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical con- and bonding of electrical systems are required to accomplish. ductors or equipment, or forming part of such equipment, shall The prescriptive methods contained in Article 250 shall be fol- be connected to earth so as to limit the voltage to ground on lowed to comply with the performance requirements of this these materials. section. (3) Bonding of Electrical Equipment. Normally non– (A) Grounded Systems. current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical con- ductors or equipment, or forming part of such equipment, shall (1) Electrical System Grounding. Electrical systems that be connected together and to the electrical supply source in a are grounded shall be connected to earth in a manner that will manner that establishes an effective ground-fault current path. limit the voltage imposed by lightning, line surges, or uninten- tional contact with higher-voltage lines and that will stabilize the (4) Bonding of Electrically Conductive Materials and Other

voltage to earth during normal operation. Equipment. Normally non–current-carrying electrically con- ductive materials that are likely to become energized shall be Informational Note No. 1: An important consideration connected together and to the electrical supply source in a for limiting the imposed voltage is the routing of bond- manner that establishes an effective ground-fault current path. ing and grounding electrode conductors so that they are not any longer than necessary to complete the connection (5) Effective Ground-Fault Current Path. Electrical equip- without disturbing the permanent parts of the installation ment and wiring and other electrically conductive material and so that unnecessary bends and loops are avoided. likely to become energized shall be installed in a manner that 70–120 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.4 ∆ Table 250.3 Additional Grounding and Bonding Requirements Conductor/Equipment Article Section Agricultural buildings 547.9 and 547.10 Audio signal processing, amplification, and reproduction equipment 640.7 Branch circuits 210.5, 210.6, 406.3 Cablebus 370.60 Cable trays 392 392.60 Capacitors 460.10, 460.27 Circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 volts 720 Communications circuits 800 Community antenna television and radio distribution systems 820.93, 820.100, 820.103, 800.106, 800.100 Conductors for general wiring 310 Medium voltage conductors and cables 311 Cranes and hoists 610 Electrically driven or controlled irrigation machines 675.11(C), 675.12, 675.13, 675.14, 675.15 Electric signs and outline lighting 600 Electrolytic cells 668 Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, 620 and stairway chairlifts Fixed electric heating equipment for pipelines and vessels 427.29, 427.48 Fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow-melting equipment 426.27 Flexible cords and cables 400.22, 400.23

Floating buildings 555.54, 555.55, 555.56 Grounding-type receptacles, adapters, cord connectors, and attachment 406.10 plugs Hazardous (classified) locations 500–517 Health care facilities 517 Induction and dielectric heating equipment 665 Industrial machinery 670 Information technology equipment 645.14, 645.15 Intrinsically safe systems 504.50 Luminaires and lighting equipment 410.40, 410.42, 410.46, 410.155(B) Luminaires, lampholders, and lamps 410 Marinas and boatyards 555.37, 555.38 Mobile homes and mobile home park 550 Motion picture and television studios and similar locations 530.20, 530.64(B) Motors, motor circuits, and controllers 430 Natural and artificially made bodies of water 682 682.30, 682.31, 682.32, 682.33 Network powered broadband communications circuits 800.100, 800.106, 830.93 Optical fiber cables 770.100 Outlet, device, pull, and junction boxes; conduit bodies; and fittings 314.4, 314.25 Over 600 volts, nominal, underground wiring methods 300.50(C) Panelboards 408.40 Pipe organs 650 Radio and television equipment 810 Receptacles and cord connectors 406.3

Recreational vehicles and recreational vehicle parks 551 Services 230 Solar photovoltaic systems 690.41, 690.42, 690.43, 690.45, 690.47 Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations 680 Switchboards and panelboards 408.18(C) Switches 404.12 Theaters, audience areas of motion picture and television studios, 520.81 and similar locations Transformers and transformer vaults 450.10 Use and identification of grounded conductors 200 X-ray equipment 660 517.78 2022 California Electrical Code 70–121

250.6 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING creates a low-impedance circuit facilitating the operation of (1) Discontinue one or more but not all of such grounding the overcurrent device or ground detector for high-impedance connections. grounded systems. It shall be capable of safely carrying the (2) Change the locations of the grounding connections. maximum ground-fault current likely to be imposed on it from (3) Interrupt the continuity of the conductor or conductive path any point on the wiring system where a ground fault may occur causing the objectionable current. to the electrical supply source. The earth shall not be considered (4) Take other suitable remedial and approved action. as an effective ground-fault current path. (C) Temporary Currents Not Classified as Objection- (B) Ungrounded Systems. able Currents. Temporary currents resulting from abnormal conditions, such as ground faults, shall not be classified as (1) Grounding Electrical Equipment. Non–current-carrying objectionable current for the purposes specified in 250.6(A)

conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors or equip- and (B). ment, or forming part of such equipment, shall be connected to earth in a manner that will limit the voltage imposed by light- (D) Limitations to Permissible Alterations. This section ning or unintentional contact with higher-voltage lines and shall not be considered as permitting electronic equipment to be limit the voltage to ground on these materials. operated on ac systems or branch circuits that are not connected to an equipment grounding conductor as required by this arti- Informational Note: See NFPA 780-2017, Standard cle. Currents that introduce electromagnetic interference or for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems, for data errors in electronic equipment shall not be considered the information on installation of grounding and bonding for objectionable currents addressed in this section. lightning protection systems. (E) Isolation of Objectionable Direct-Current Ground Cur- (2) Bonding of Electrical Equipment. Non–current-carrying rents. Where isolation of objectionable dc ground currents

conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors or equip- from cathodic protection systems is required, a listed ac cou- ment, or forming part of such equipment, shall be connected pling/dc isolating device shall be permitted in the equipment together and to the supply system grounded equipment in a man- grounding conductor path to provide an effective return path for ner that creates a low-impedance path for ground-fault current ac ground-fault current while blocking dc current. that is capable of carrying the maximum fault current likely to be imposed on it. 250.8 Connection of Grounding and Bonding Equipment. (3) Bonding of Electrically Conductive Materials and Other (A) Permitted Methods. Equipment grounding conductors, Equipment. Electrically conductive materials that are likely grounding electrode conductors, and bonding jumpers shall be to become energized shall be connected together and to the connected by one or more of the following means: supply system grounded equipment in a manner that creates a (1) Listed pressure connectors

low-impedance path for ground-fault current that is capable of (2) Terminal bars carrying the maximum fault current likely to be imposed on it. (3) Pressure connectors listed as grounding and bonding (4) Path for Fault Current. Electrical equipment, wiring, equipment and other electrically conductive material likely to become (4) Exothermic welding process energized shall be installed in a manner that creates a low- (5) Machine screw-type fasteners that engage not less than two impedance circuit from any point on the wiring system to the threads or are secured with a nut electrical supply source to facilitate the operation of overcur- (6) Thread-forming machine screws that engage not less than rent devices should a second ground fault from a different phase two threads in the enclosure occur on the wiring system. The earth shall not be considered as (7) Connections that are part of a listed assembly an effective fault-current path. (8) Other listed means 250.6 Objectionable Current. (B) Methods Not Permitted. Connection devices or fittings

that depend solely on solder shall not be used. (A) Arrangement to Prevent Objectionable Current. The grounding of electrical systems, circuit conductors, surge arrest- 250.10 Protection of Ground Clamps and Fittings. Ground ers, surge-protective devices, and conductive normally non– clamps or other fittings exposed to physical damage shall be current-carrying metal parts of equipment shall be installed enclosed in metal, wood, or equivalent protective covering. and arranged in a manner that will prevent objectionable 250.12 Clean Surfaces. Nonconductive coatings (such as current. paint, lacquer, and enamel) on equipment to be grounded or (B) Alterations to Stop Objectionable Current. If the use of bonded shall be removed from threads and other contact sur- multiple grounding connections results in objectionable current faces to ensure good electrical continuity or shall be connected and the requirements of 250.4(A)(5) or (B)(4) are met, one or by means of fittings designed so as to make such removal more of the following alterations shall be permitted: unnecessary.

70–122 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.24 Part II. System Grounding (2) Separately derived systems used exclusively for rectifiers that supply only adjustable-speed industrial drives 250.20 Alternating-Current Systems to Be Grounded. (3) Separately derived systems supplied by transformers that Alternating-current systems shall be grounded as provided for have a primary voltage rating of 1000 volts or less if all the in 250.20(A), (B), (C), or (D). Other systems shall be permitted following conditions are met: to be grounded. If such systems are grounded, they shall com- ply with the applicable provisions of this article. a. The system is used exclusively for control circuits. b. The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure Informational Note: An example of a system permitted that only qualified persons service the installation. to be grounded is a corner-grounded delta transformer c. Continuity of control power is required. connection. See 250.26(4) for conductor to be grounded. (4) Other systems that are not required to be grounded in

(A) Alternating-Current Systems of Less Than 50 Volts. accordance with the requirements of 250.20(B) Alternating-current systems of less than 50 volts shall be grounded under any of the following conditions: (B) Ground Detectors. Ground detectors shall be installed in accordance with 250.21(B)(1) and (B)(2). (1) Where supplied by transformers, if the transformer supply system exceeds 150 volts to ground (1) Ungrounded ac systems as permitted in 250.21(A)(1) (2) Where supplied by transformers, if the transformer supply through (A)(4) operating at not less than 120 volts and at system is ungrounded 1000 volts or less shall have ground detectors installed on (3) Where installed outside as overhead conductors the system. (2) The ground detection sensing equipment shall be connected (B) Alternating-Current Systems of 50 Volts to 1000 Volts. as close as practicable to where the system receives its Alternating-current systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts that supply supply. premises wiring and premises wiring systems shall be grounded under any of the following conditions: (C) Marking.

Ungrounded systems shall be legibly marked “Caution: Ungrounded System Operating — _____Volts (1) Where the system can be grounded so that the maximum Between Conductors” at the source or first disconnecting means voltage to ground on the ungrounded conductors does not of the system. The marking shall be of sufficient durability to exceed 150 volts withstand the environment involved. (2) Where the system is 3-phase, 4-wire, wye connected in which the neutral conductor is used as a circuit conductor 250.22 Circuits Not to Be Grounded. The following cir- (3) Where the system is 3-phase, 4-wire, delta connected in cuits shall not be grounded: which the midpoint of one phase winding is used as a cir- (1) Circuits for electric cranes operating over combustible cuit conductor fibers in Class III locations, as provided in 503.155 Informational Note: According to Annex O of NFPA (2) Circuits in health care facilities as provided in 517.61 and 70E-2018, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Work- 517.160

place, high impedance grounding is an effective tool to (3) Circuits for equipment within electrolytic cell line working reduce arc flash hazards. zones as provided in Article 668 (4) Secondary circuits of lighting systems as provided in (C) Alternating-Current Systems of over 1000 Volts. Alter- 411.6(A) nating-current systems supplying mobile or portable equipment (5) Secondary circuits of lighting systems as provided in shall be grounded as specified in 250.188. Where supplying 680.23(A)(2) other than mobile or portable equipment, such systems shall be (6) Class 2 load side circuits for suspended ceiling low- permitted to be grounded. voltage power grid distribution systems as provided in (D) Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. Impedance 393.60(B) grounded neutral systems shall be grounded in accordance with 250.24 Grounding of Service-Supplied Alternating-Current 250.36 or 250.187. Systems. 250.21 Alternating-Current Systems of 50 Volts to (A) System Grounding Connections. A premises wiring sys- 1000 Volts Not Required to Be Grounded.

tem supplied by a grounded ac service shall have a grounding (A) General. The following ac systems of 50 volts to electrode conductor connected to the grounded service conduc- 1000 volts shall be permitted to be grounded but shall not be tor, at each service, in accordance with 250.24(A)(1) through required to be grounded: (A)(5). (1) Electrical systems used exclusively to supply industrial (1) General. The grounding electrode conductor connection electric furnaces for melting, refining, tempering, and the shall be made at any accessible point from the load end of the like overhead service conductors, service drop, underground service 2022 California Electrical Code 70–123

250.25 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING conductors, or service lateral to, including the terminal or bus and shall be connected to each disconnecting means grounded to which the grounded service conductor is connected at the conductor(s) terminal or bus. A main bonding jumper shall con- service disconnecting means. nect the grounded conductor(s) to each service disconnecting means enclosure. The grounded conductor(s) shall be installed Informational Note: See definitions of Service Conduc- in accordance with 250.24(C)(1) through (C)(4). tors, Overhead; Service Conductors, Underground; Ser- vice Drop; and Service Lateral in Article 100. Exception: Where two or more service disconnecting means are located in a single assembly listed for use as service equip- (2) Outdoor Transformer. Where the transformer supply- ment, it shall be permitted to connect the grounded conductor(s) ing the service is located outside the building, at least one addi- to the assembly common grounded conductor(s) terminal or bus. tional grounding connection shall be made from the grounded

The assembly shall include a main bonding jumper for connect- service conductor to a grounding electrode, either at the trans- ing the grounded conductor(s) to the assembly enclosure. former or elsewhere outside the building. (1) Sizing for a Single Raceway or Cable. The grounded Exception: The additional grounding electrode conductor con- conductor shall not be smaller than specified in Table nection shall not be made on high-impedance grounded neutral 250.102(C)(1). systems. The system shall meet the requirements of 250.36. (2) Parallel Conductors in Two or More Raceways or Cables. (3) Dual-Fed Services. For services that are dual fed (double If the ungrounded service-entrance conductors are installed ended) in a common enclosure or grouped together in separate in parallel in two or more raceways or cables, the grounded con- enclosures and employing a secondary tie, a single grounding ductor shall also be installed in parallel. The size of the grounded electrode conductor connection to the tie point of the grounded conductor in each raceway or cable shall be based on the total

conductor(s) from each power source shall be permitted. circular mil area of the parallel ungrounded conductors in the (4) Main Bonding Jumper as Wire or Busbar. Where the raceway or cable, as indicated in 250.24(C)(1), but not smaller main bonding jumper specified in 250.28 is a wire or busbar than 1/0 AWG. and is installed from the grounded conductor terminal bar or bus Informational Note: See 310.10(G) for grounded con- to the equipment grounding terminal bar or bus in the service ductors connected in parallel. equipment, the grounding electrode conductor shall be permit- ted to be connected to the equipment grounding terminal, bar, (3) Delta-Connected Service. The grounded conductor of a or bus to which the main bonding jumper is connected. 3-phase, 3-wire delta service shall have an ampacity not less than that of the ungrounded conductors. (5) Load-Side Grounding Connections. A grounded con- ductor shall not be connected to normally non–current-carrying (4) High Impedance. The grounded conductor on a high-

metal parts of equipment, to equipment grounding conductor(s), impedance grounded neutral system shall be grounded in accor- or be reconnected to ground on the load side of the service dis- dance with 250.36. connecting means except as otherwise permitted in this article. (D) Grounding Electrode Conductor. A grounding elec- Informational Note: See 250.30 for separately derived trode conductor shall be used to connect the equipment ground- systems, 250.32 for connections at separate buildings ing conductors, the service-equipment enclosures, and, where or structures, and 250.142 for use of the grounded circuit the system is grounded, the grounded service conductor to the conductor for grounding equipment. grounding electrode(s) required by Part III of this article. This con- ductor shall be sized in accordance with 250.66. (B) Main Bonding Jumper. For a grounded system, an unspliced main bonding jumper shall be used to connect the equipment High-impedance grounded neutral system connections shall

grounding conductor(s) and the service-disconnect enclosure to be made as covered in 250.36. the grounded conductor within the enclosure for each service dis- (E) Ungrounded System Grounding Connections. A prem- connect in accordance with 250.28. ises wiring system that is supplied by an ac service that is Exception No. 1: Where more than one service disconnect- ungrounded shall have, at each service, a grounding electrode ing means is located in an assembly listed for use as service conductor connected to the grounding electrode(s) required by equipment, an unspliced main bonding jumper shall bond the Part III of this article. The grounding electrode conductor shall grounded conductor(s) to the assembly enclosure. be connected to a metal enclosure of the service conductors at any accessible point from the load end of the overhead service Exception No. 2: Impedance grounded neutral systems shall be conductors, service drop, underground service conductors, or permitted to be connected as provided in 250.36 and 250.187. service lateral to the service disconnecting means.

(C) Grounded Conductor Brought to Service Equipment. N 250.25 Grounding Systems Permitted to Be Connected Where an ac system operating at 1000 volts or less is grounded on the Supply Side of the Disconnect. The grounding of sys- at any point, the grounded conductor(s) shall be routed with tems connected on the supply side of the service disconnect, as the ungrounded conductors to each service disconnecting means 70–124 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.30 permitted in 230.82, that are in enclosures separate from the ser- (3) Separately Derived System with More Than One Enclo- vice equipment enclosure shall comply with 250.25(A)or (B). sure. Where a separately derived system supplies more than a single enclosure, the system bonding jumper for each enclosure N (A) Grounded System. If the utility supply system is shall be sized in accordance with 250.28(D)(1) based on the grounded, the grounding of systems permitted to be connected largest ungrounded feeder conductor serving that enclosure, or on the supply side of the service disconnect and are installed in a single system bonding jumper shall be installed at the source one or more separate enclosures from the service equipment and sized in accordance with 250.28(D)(1) based on the equiva- enclosure shall comply with the requirements of 250.24(A) lent size of the largest supply conductor determined by the larg- through (D). est sum of the areas of the corresponding conductors of each set. N (B) Ungrounded Systems.

If the utility supply system is 250.30 Grounding Separately Derived Alternating-Cur- ungrounded, the grounding of systems permitted to be con- rent Systems. In addition to complying with 250.30(A) for nected on the supply side of the service disconnect and are grounded systems, or as provided in 250.30(B) for ungrounded installed in one or more separate enclosures from the service systems, separately derived systems shall comply with 250.20, equipment enclosure shall comply with the requirements of 250.21, 250.22, or 250.26, as applicable. Multiple power 250.24(E). sources of the same type that are connected in parallel to form 250.26 Conductor to Be Grounded — Alternating-Current one system that supplies premises wiring shall be considered Systems. For grounded ac premises wiring systems, the conduc- as a single separately derived system and shall be installed in tor to be grounded shall be as specified in the following: accordance with 250.30. (1) Single-phase, 2-wire — one conductor Informational Note No. 1: An alternate ac power source,

(2) Single-phase, 3-wire — the neutral conductor such as an on-site generator, is not a separately derived (3) Multiphase systems having one wire common to all system if the grounded conductor is solidly intercon- phases — the neutral conductor nected to a service-supplied system grounded conductor. (4) Multiphase systems where one phase is grounded — that An example of such a situation is where alternate source phase conductor transfer equipment does not include a switching action in (5) Multiphase systems in which one phase is used as in the grounded conductor and allows it to remain solidly (2) — the neutral conductor connected to the service-supplied grounded conductor 250.28 Main Bonding Jumper and System Bonding when the alternate source is operational and supplying Jumper. For a grounded system, main bonding jumpers and the load served. system bonding jumpers shall be installed as follows: Informational Note No. 2: See 445.13 for the minimum size of conductors that carry fault current. (A) Material. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding

jumpers shall be of copper, aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, (A) Grounded Systems. A separately derived ac system or other corrosion-resistant material. A main bonding jumper that is grounded shall comply with 250.30(A)(1) through (A) and a system bonding jumper shall be a wire, bus, screw, or (8). Except as otherwise permitted in this article, a grounded similar suitable conductor. conductor shall not be connected to normally non–current- carrying metal parts of equipment, be connected to equipment (B) Construction. Where a main bonding jumper or a sys- grounding conductors, or be reconnected to ground on the load tem bonding jumper is a screw only, the screw shall be iden- side of the system bonding jumper. tified with a green finish that shall be visible with the screw installed. Informational Note: See 250.32 for connections at sep- arate buildings or structures and 250.142 for use of the (C) Attachment. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding grounded circuit conductor for grounding equipment. jumpers shall be connected in the manner specified in 250.8.

Exception: Impedance grounded neutral system grounding (D) Size. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding jumpers connections shall be made as specified in 250.36 or 250.187, shall be sized in accordance with 250.28(D)(1) through (D)(3). as applicable. (1) General. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding jump- (1) System Bonding Jumper. An unspliced system bonding ers shall not be smaller than specified in Table 250.102(C)(1). jumper shall comply with 250.28(A) through (D). This connec- (2) Main Bonding Jumper for Service with More Than tion shall be made at any single point on the separately derived One Enclosure. If a service consists of more than a single system from the source to the first system disconnecting means enclosure as permitted in 230.71(B), the main bonding jumper or overcurrent device, or it shall be made at the source of a for each enclosure shall be sized in accordance with 250.28(D) separately derived system that has no disconnecting means or (1) based on the largest ungrounded service conductor serving overcurrent devices, in accordance with 250.30(A)(1)(a) or

that enclosure. (A)(1)(b). The system bonding jumper shall remain within the 2022 California Electrical Code 70–125

250.30 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING enclosure where it originates. If the source is located outside the Exception: A supply-side bonding jumper shall not be building or structure supplied, a system bonding jumper shall required between enclosures for installations made in compli- be installed at the grounding electrode connection in compli- ance with 250.30(A)(1), Exception No. 2. ance with 250.30(C). (3) Grounded Conductor. If a grounded conductor is Exception No. 1:For systems installed in accordance with installed and the system bonding jumper connection is not 450.6, a single system bonding jumper connection to the tie located at the source, 250.30(A)(3)(a) through (A)(3)(d) shall point of the grounded circuit conductors from each power source apply. The grounded conductor shall not be required to be shall be permitted. larger than the derived ungrounded conductors. (a) Sizing for a Single Raceway. The grounded conductor Exception No. 2: If a building or structure is supplied by a shall not be smaller than specified in Table 250.102(C)(1).

feeder from an outdoor separately derived system, a system (b) Parallel Conductors in Two or More Raceways. If the bonding jumper at both the source and the first disconnecting ungrounded conductors are installed in parallel in two or more means shall be permitted if doing so does not establish a paral- raceways, the grounded conductor shall also be installed in par- lel path for the grounded conductor. If a grounded conductor is allel. The size of the grounded conductor in each raceway shall used in this manner, it shall not be smaller than the size speci- be based on the total circular mil area of the parallel derived fied for the system bonding jumper but shall not be required to ungrounded conductors in the raceway as indicated in 250.30(A) be larger than the ungrounded conductor(s). For the purposes of (3)(a), but not smaller than 1/0 AWG. this exception, connection through the earth shall not be consid- ered as providing a parallel path. Informational Note: See 310.10(G) for grounded con- ductors connected in parallel. Exception No.

3: The size of the system bonding jumper for a system that supplies a Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3 circuit, and is (c) Delta-Connected System. The grounded conductor of a derived from a transformer rated not more than 1000 volt-amperes, 3-phase, 3-wire delta system shall have an ampacity not less than shall not be smaller than the derived ungrounded conductors and that of the ungrounded conductors. shall not be smaller than 14 AWG copper or 12 AWG aluminum. (d) Impedance Grounded System. The grounded conductor of an impedance grounded neutral system shall be installed in (a) Installed at the Source. The system bonding jumper accordance with 250.36 or 250.187, as applicable. shall connect the grounded conductor to the supply-side bonding jumper and the normally non–current-carrying metal enclosure. (4) Grounding Electrode. The building or structure ground- ing electrode system shall be used as the grounding electrode (b) Installed at the First Disconnecting Means. The system for the separately derived system. If located outdoors, the

bonding jumper shall connect the grounded conductor to the grounding electrode shall be in accordance with 250.30(C). supply-side bonding jumper, the disconnecting means enclo- sure, and the equipment grounding conductor(s). Exception: If a separately derived system originates in equip- ment that is listed and identified as suitable for use as service Exception: Separately derived systems consisting of multiple equipment, the grounding electrode used for the service or sources of the same type that are connected in parallel shall be feeder equipment shall be permitted to be used as the grounding permitted to have the system bonding jumper installed at the electrode for the separately derived system. paralleling switchgear, switchboard, or other paralleling con- nection point instead of at the disconnecting means located at Informational Note No. 1: See 250.104(D) for bonding each separate source. requirements for interior metal water piping in the area (2) Supply-Side Bonding Jumper. If the source of a sepa- served by separately derived systems.

rately derived system and the first disconnecting means are Informational Note No. 2: See 250.50 and 250.58 for located in separate enclosures, a supply-side bonding jumper requirements for bonding all electrodes together if located shall be installed with the circuit conductors from the source at the same building or structure. enclosure to the first disconnecting means enclosure. A supply- (5) Grounding Electrode Conductor, Single Separately side bonding jumper shall not be required to be larger than the Derived System. A grounding electrode conductor for a single sep- derived ungrounded conductors. The supply-side bonding jumper arately derived system shall be sized in accordance with 250.66 for shall be permitted to be of nonflexible metal raceway type or of the the derived ungrounded conductors. It shall be used to connect the wire or bus type as follows: grounded conductor of the derived system to the grounding elec- (1) A supply-side bonding jumper of the wire type shall trode in accordance with 250.30(A)(4), or as permitted in 250.68(C)

comply with 250.102(C), based on the size of the derived (1) and (C)(2). This connection shall be made at the same point on ungrounded conductors. the separately derived system where the system bonding jumper is (2) A supply-side bonding jumper of the bus type shall have a connected. cross-sectional area not smaller than a supply-side bonding Exception No. 1: If the system bonding jumper specified in jumper of the wire type as determined in 250.102(C). 250.30(A)(1) is a wire or busbar, it shall be permitted to connect 70–126 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.30 the grounding electrode conductor to the equipment grounding use as service equipment, the grounding electrode conductor terminal, bar, or bus if the equipment grounding terminal, bar, from the service or feeder equipment to the grounding elec- or bus is of sufficient size for the separately derived system. trode shall be permitted as the grounding electrode conductor for the separately derived system, if the grounding electrode Exception No. 2: If the source of a separately derived system conductor is of sufficient size for the separately derived system. is located within equipment listed and identified as suitable for If the equipment grounding bus internal to the equipment is not use as service equipment, the grounding electrode conductor smaller than the required grounding electrode conductor for the from the service or feeder equipment to the grounding elec- separately derived system, the grounding electrode connection trode shall be permitted as the grounding electrode conductor

for the separately derived system shall be permitted to be made for the separately derived system, if the grounding electrode to the bus. conductor is of sufficient size for the separately derived system. If the equipment grounding bus internal to the equipment is not (a) Common Grounding Electrode Conductor. The common smaller than the required grounding electrode conductor for the grounding electrode conductor shall be permitted to be one of separately derived system, the grounding electrode connection the following: for the separately derived system shall be permitted to be made (1) A conductor of the wire type not smaller than 3/0 AWG to the bus. copper or 250 kcmil aluminum Exception No. 3: A grounding electrode conductor shall not (2) A metal water pipe that complies with 250.68(C)(1) be required for a system that supplies a Class 1, Class 2, or (3) The metal structural frame of the building or structure that Class 3 circuit and is derived from a transformer rated not complies with 250.68(C)(2) or is connected to the ground-

more than 1000 volt-amperes, provided the grounded conduc- ing electrode system by a conductor not smaller than tor is bonded to the transformer frame or enclosure by a jumper 3/0 AWG copper or 250 kcmil aluminum sized in accordance with 250.30(A)(1), Exception No. 3, and (b) Tap Conductor Size. Each tap conductor shall be sized the transformer frame or enclosure is grounded by one of the in accordance with 250.66 based on the derived ungrounded means specified in 250.134. conductors of the separately derived system it serves. (6) Grounding Electrode Conductor, Multiple Separately Exception to (a)(1) and (b): If the only electrodes that are pres- Derived Systems. A common grounding electrode conduc- ent are of the types in 250.66(A), (B), or (C), the size of the tor for multiple separately derived systems shall be permit- common grounding electrode conductor shall not be required to ted. If installed, the common grounding electrode conductor be larger than the largest conductor required by 250.66(A), (B), shall be used to connect the grounded conductor of each sepa-

or (C) for the type of electrode that is present. rately derived system to the grounding electrode as specified in 250.30(A)(4). A grounding electrode conductor tap shall then (c) Connections. All tap connections to the common be installed from each separately derived system to the common grounding electrode conductor shall be made at an accessible grounding electrode conductor. Each tap conductor shall con- location by one of the following methods: nect the grounded conductor of the separately derived system (1) A connector listed as grounding and bonding equipment. to the common grounding electrode conductor. This connection (2) Listed connections to aluminum or copper busbars not shall be made at the same point on the separately derived sys- 1 smaller than 6 mm thick × 50 mm wide ( ⁄4 in. thick × 2 in. tem where the system bonding jumper is connected. wide) and of sufficient length to accommodate the number Exception No. 1: If the system bonding jumper specified in of terminations necessary for the installation. If aluminum

250.30(A)(1) is a wire or busbar, it shall be permitted to connect busbars are used, the installation shall also comply with the grounding electrode conductor tap to the equipment ground- 250.64(A). ing terminal, bar, or bus, provided the equipment grounding ter- (3) The exothermic welding process. minal, bar, or bus is of sufficient size for the separately derived Tap conductors shall be connected to the common ground- system. ing electrode conductor in such a manner that the common Exception No. 2: A grounding electrode conductor shall not grounding electrode conductor remains without a splice or joint. be required for a system that supplies a Class 1, Class 2, or (7) Installation. The installation of all grounding electrode Class 3 circuit and is derived from a transformer rated not conductors shall comply with 250.64(A), (B), (C), and (E). more than 1000 volt-amperes, provided the system grounded conductor is bonded to the transformer frame or enclosure by (8) Bonding. Structural steel and metal piping shall be con-

a jumper sized in accordance with 250.30(A)(1), Exception nected to the grounded conductor of a separately derived sys- No. 3, and the transformer frame or enclosure is grounded by tem in accordance with 250.104(D). one of the means specified in 250.134. (B) Ungrounded Systems. The equipment of an ungrounded Exception No. 3: If the source of a separately derived system separately derived system shall be grounded and bonded as is located within equipment listed and identified as suitable for specified in 250.30(B)(1) through (B)(3). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–127

250.32 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING (1) Grounding Electrode Conductor. A grounding elec- Exception No. 1: For installations made in compliance with trode conductor, sized in accordance with 250.66 for the largest previous editions of this Code that permitted such connection, derived ungrounded conductor(s) or set of derived ungrounded the grounded conductor run with the supply to the building or conductors, shall be used to connect the metal enclosures of structure shall be permitted to serve as the ground-fault return the derived system to the grounding electrode as specified in path if all of the following requirements continue to be met: 250.30(A)(5) or (A)(6), as applicable. This connection shall be (1) An equipment grounding conductor is not run with the sup- made at any point on the separately derived system from the ply to the building or structure. source to the first system disconnecting means. If the source is (2) There are no continuous metallic paths bonded to the located outside the building or structure supplied, a ground-

grounding system in each building or structure involved. ing electrode connection shall be made in compliance with (3) Ground-fault protection of equipment has not been installed 250.30(C). on the supply side of the feeder(s). (2) Grounding Electrode. Except as permitted by 250.34 for If the grounded conductor is used for grounding in accordance portable and vehicle-mounted generators, the grounding elec- with the provision of this exception, the size of the grounded trode shall comply with 250.30(A)(4). conductor shall not be smaller than the larger of either of the (3) Bonding Path and Conductor. A supply-side bonding following: jumper shall be installed from the source of a separately derived (1) That required by 220.61 system to the first disconnecting means in compliance with (2) That required by 250.122 250.30(A)(2). Exception No. 2: If system bonding jumpers are installed in (C) Outdoor Source. If the source of the separately derived accordance with 250.30(A)(1), Exception No. 2, the feeder system is located outside the building or structure supplied, a

grounded circuit conductor at the building or structure served grounding electrode connection shall be made at the source loca- shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductors, tion to one or more grounding electrodes in compliance with grounding electrode conductor, and the enclosure for the first 250.50. In addition, the installation shall comply with 250.30(A) disconnecting means. for grounded systems or with 250.30(B) for ungrounded systems. (2) Supplied by Separately Derived System. Exception: The grounding electrode conductor connection (a) With Overcurrent Protection. If overcurrent protection is for impedance grounded neutral systems shall comply with provided where the conductors originate, the installation shall 250.36 or 250.187, as applicable. comply with 250.32(B)(1). 250.32 Buildings or Structures Supplied by a Feeder(s) (b) Without Overcurrent Protection. If overcurrent protec- or Branch Circuit(s). tion is not provided where the conductors originate, the instal- lation shall comply with 250.30(A). If installed, the supply-side ∆ (A) Grounding Electrode.

A building(s) or structure(s) sup- bonding jumper shall be connected to the building or structure plied by a feeder(s) or branch circuit(s) shall have a grounding disconnecting means and to the grounding electrode(s). electrode system and grounding electrode conductor installed in accordance with Part III of Article 250. Where there is no exist- (C) Ungrounded Systems. ing grounding electrode, the grounding electrode(s) required in (1) Supplied by a Feeder or Branch Circuit. An equipment 250.50 shall be installed. grounding conductor, as described in 250.118, shall be installed Exception: A grounding electrode shall not be required where with the supply conductors and be connected to the building or only a single branch circuit, including a multiwire branch cir- structure disconnecting means and to the grounding electrode(s). cuit, supplies the building or structure and the branch circuit The grounding electrode(s) shall also be connected to the build- includes an equipment grounding conductor for grounding the ing or structure disconnecting means.

normally non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment. ∆ (2) Supplied by a Separately Derived System. (B) Grounded Systems. (a) With Overcurrent Protection. If overcurrent protection is provided where the conductors originate, the installation shall (1) Supplied by a Feeder or Branch Circuit. An equipment comply with 250.32(C)(1). grounding conductor, as described in 250.118, shall be run with (b) Without Overcurrent Protection. If overcurrent protec- the supply conductors and be connected to the building or struc- tion is not provided where the conductors originate, the instal- ture disconnecting means and to the grounding electrode(s). lation shall comply with 250.30(B). If installed, the supply-side The equipment grounding conductor shall be used for ground- bonding jumper shall be connected to the building or structure ing or bonding of equipment, structures, or frames required to disconnecting means and to the grounding electrode(s). be grounded or bonded. The equipment grounding conduc- tor shall be sized in accordance with 250.122.

Any installed ∆ (D) Disconnecting Means Located in Separate Building or grounded conductor shall not be connected to the equipment Structure on the Same Premises. Where one or more dis- grounding conductor or to the grounding electrode(s). connecting means supply one or more additional buildings or 70–128 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.36 structures under single management, and where these discon- equipment located on the vehicle or trailer and cord-and- necting means are located remote from those buildings or struc- plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted tures in accordance with 225.32, Exception No. 1 and No. 2, on the vehicle, trailer, or on the generator. 700.12(D)(5), 701.12(D)(5), or 702.12, all of the following con- (3) The normally non–current-carrying metal parts of ditions shall be met: equipment and the equipment grounding conductor ter- minals of the receptacles are connected to the generator (1) The connection of the grounded conductor to the ground- frame. ing electrode, to normally non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment, or to the equipment grounding conductor at (C) Grounded Conductor Bonding. A system conductor a separate building or structure shall not be made. that is required to be grounded by 250.26 shall be connected (2) An equipment grounding conductor for grounding and to the generator frame where the generator is a component of a

bonding any normally non–current-carrying metal parts of separately derived system. equipment, interior metal piping systems, and building or Informational Note: For grounding portable generators structural metal frames is run with the circuit conductors to supplying fixed wiring systems, see 250.30. a separate building or structure and connected to existing grounding electrode(s) required in Part III of this article, ∆ 250.35 Permanently Installed Generators. A conductor that or, where there are no existing electrodes, the ground- provides an effective ground-fault current path shall be installed ing electrode(s) required in Part III of this article shall be with the supply conductors from a permanently installed installed where a separate building or structure is supplied generator(s) to the first disconnecting mean(s) in accordance by more than one branch circuit. with 250.35(A) or (B). (3) The connection between the equipment grounding con- (A) Separately Derived System. If the generator is installed as ductor and the grounding electrode at a separate building

a separately derived system, the requirements in 250.30 shall or structure shall be made in a junction box, panelboard, or apply. similar enclosure located immediately inside or outside the separate building or structure. (B) Nonseparately Derived System. If the generator is installed as a nonseparately derived system, and overcurrent pro- (E) Grounding Electrode Conductor. The size of the tection is not integral with the generator assembly, a supply-side grounding electrode conductor to the grounding electrode(s) bonding jumper shall be installed between the generator equip- shall not be smaller than given in 250.66, based on the largest ment grounding terminal and the equipment grounding terminal, ungrounded supply conductor. The installation shall comply bar, or bus of the disconnecting mean(s). It shall be sized in accor- with Part III of this article. dance with 250.102(C) based on the size of the conductors sup- 250.34 Portable, Vehicle-Mounted, and Trailer-Mounted plied by the generator. Generators. ∆ 250.36 High-Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. High-

(A) Portable Generators. The frame of a portable generator impedance grounded neutral systems in which a grounding shall not be required to be connected to a grounding electrode impedance, usually a resistor, limits the ground-fault current as defined in 250.52 for a system supplied by the generator to a low value shall be permitted for 3-phase ac systems of under both of the following conditions: 480 volts to 1000 volts if all the following conditions are met: (1) The generator supplies only equipment mounted on the (1) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that generator, cord-and-plug-connected equipment through only qualified persons service the installation. receptacles mounted on the generator, or both. (2) Ground detectors are installed on the system. (2) The normally non–current-carrying metal parts of equip- (3) Line-to-neutral loads are not served. ment and the equipment grounding conductor terminals of High-impedance grounded neutral systems shall comply the receptacles are connected to the generator frame. with 250.36(A) through (G).

(B) Vehicle-Mounted and Trailer-Mounted Generators. The Informational Note: According to Annex O of NFPA frame of a vehicle or trailer shall not be required to be con- 70E-2018, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Work- nected to a grounding electrode as defined in 250.52 for a sys- place, high-impedance grounding is an effective tool to tem supplied by a generator located on this vehicle or trailer reduce arc flash hazards. under all of the following conditions: (A) Location. The grounding impedance shall be installed (1) The frame of the generator is bonded to the vehicle or between the grounding electrode conductor and the system trailer frame. neutral point. If a neutral point is not available, the ground- (2) The generator supplies only equipment located on the ing impedance shall be installed between the grounding elec- vehicle or trailer; cord-and-plug-connected equipment trode conductor and the neutral point derived from a grounding through receptacles mounted on the vehicle; or both transformer. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–129

250.50 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING (B) Conductor Insulation and Ampacity. The grounded Part III. Grounding Electrode System and Grounding system conductor from the neutral point of the transformer or Electrode Conductor generator to its connection point to the grounding impedance 250.50 Grounding Electrode System. All grounding elec- shall be fully insulated. trodes as described in 250.52(A)(1) through (A)(7) that are The grounded system conductor shall have an ampacity present at each building or structure served shall be bonded of not less than the maximum current rating of the grounding together to form the grounding electrode system. Where none impedance but in no case shall the grounded system conductor of these grounding electrodes exist, one or more of the ground- be smaller than 8 AWG copper or 6 AWG aluminum or copper- ing electrodes specified in 250.52(A)(4) through (A)(8) shall be clad aluminum. installed and used. (C) System Grounding Connection. The system shall Exception: Concrete-encased electrodes of existing buildings

not be connected to ground except through the grounding or structures shall not be required to be part of the grounding impedance. electrode system where the steel reinforcing bars or rods are not accessible for use without disturbing the concrete. Informational Note: The impedance is normally selected to limit the ground-fault current to a value slightly greater 250.52 Grounding Electrodes. than or equal to the capacitive charging current of the sys- (A) Electrodes Permitted for Grounding. tem. This value of impedance will also limit transient over- voltages to safe values. For guidance, refer to criteria for (1) Metal Underground Water Pipe. A metal underground limiting transient overvoltages in ANSI/IEEE 142-2007, water pipe in direct contact with the earth for 3.0 m (10 ft) or Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and more (including any metal well casing bonded to the pipe) and Commercial Power Systems. electrically continuous (or made electrically continuous by bond- ing around insulating joints or insulating pipe) to the points of (D) Conductor Routing.

The conductor connecting the neutral connection of the grounding electrode conductor and the bonding point of the transformer or generator to the grounding impedance conductor(s) or jumper(s), if installed. shall be permitted to be installed in a separate raceway from the ungrounded conductors. It shall not be required to run this (2) Metal In-ground Support Structure(s). One or more conductor with the phase conductors to the first system discon- metal in-ground support structure(s) in direct contact with the necting means or overcurrent device. earth vertically for 3.0 m (10 ft) or more, with or without con- crete encasement. If multiple metal in-ground support structures (E) Equipment Bonding Jumper. The equipment bonding are present at a building or a structure, it shall be permissible to jumper (the connection between the equipment grounding con- bond only one into the grounding electrode system. ductors and the grounding impedance) shall be an unspliced conductor run from the first system disconnecting means Informational Note: Metal in-ground support structures

or overcurrent device to the grounded side of the grounding include, but are not limited to, pilings, casings, and other impedance. structural metal. (F) Grounding Electrode Conductor Connection Location. (3) Concrete-Encased Electrode. A concrete-encased elec- For services or separately derived systems, the grounding elec- trode shall consist of at least 6.0 m (20 ft) of either (1) or (2): trode conductor shall be connected at any point from the (1) One or more bare or zinc galvanized or other electrically grounded side of the grounding impedance to the equipment conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods of not less grounding connection at the service equipment or the first sys- than 13 mm (1⁄2 in.) in diameter, installed in one continu- tem disconnecting means of a separately derived system. ous 6.0 m (20 ft) length, or if in multiple pieces connected (G) Equipment Bonding Jumper Size. The equipment together by the usual steel tie wires, exothermic welding,

bonding jumper shall be sized in accordance with (1) or (2) as welding, or other effective means to create a 6.0 m (20 ft) follows: or greater length; or (2) Bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG (1) If the grounding electrode conductor connection is made at the grounding impedance, the equipment bonding jumper Metallic components shall be encased by at least 50 mm (2 in.) shall be sized in accordance with 250.66, based on the size of concrete and shall be located horizontally within that portion of the service entrance conductors for a service or the derived of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with phase conductors for a separately derived system. the earth or within vertical foundations or structural components (2) If the grounding electrode conductor is connected at the or members that are in direct contact with the earth. If multiple first system disconnecting means or overcurrent device, concrete-encased electrodes are present at a building or structure,

the equipment bonding jumper shall be sized the same as the it shall be permissible to bond only one into the grounding elec- neutral conductor in 250.36(B). trode system. 70–130 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.53 Informational Note: Concrete installed with insulation, The supplemental electrode shall be permitted to be bonded to vapor barriers, films or similar items separating the con- one of the following: crete from the earth is not considered to be in “direct con- (1) Rod, pipe, or plate electrode tact” with the earth. (2) Grounding electrode conductor (4) Ground Ring. A ground ring encircling the building or (3) Grounded service-entrance conductor structure, in direct contact with the earth, consisting of at least (4) Nonflexible grounded service raceway 6.0 m (20 ft) of bare copper conductor not smaller than 2 AWG. (5) Any grounded service enclosure (5) Rod and Pipe Electrodes. Rod and pipe electrodes shall Exception: If a single rod, pipe, or plate grounding electrode not be less than 2.44 m (8 ft) in length and shall consist of the has a resistance to earth of 25 ohms or less, the supplemental following materials. electrode shall not be required. (a) Grounding electrodes of pipe or conduit shall not be (3) Supplemental Electrode.

If multiple rod, pipe, or plate smaller than metric designator 21 (trade size 3 ⁄ 4) and, where electrodes are installed to meet the requirements of this section, of steel, shall have the outer surface galvanized or otherwise they shall not be less than 1.8 m (6 ft) apart. metal- coated for corrosion protection. (b) Rod-type grounding electrodes of stainless steel and cop- Informational Note: The paralleling efficiency of rods 5 per or zinc coated steel shall be at least 15.87 mm ( ⁄8 in.) in diam- is increased by spacing them twice the length of the lon- eter, unless listed. gest rod. (6) Other Listed Electrodes. Other listed grounding elec- (4) Rod and Pipe Electrodes. The electrode shall be trodes shall be permitted. installed such that at least 2.44 m (8 ft) of length is in con- tact with the soil. It shall be driven to a depth of not less than (7) Plate Electrodes. Each plate electrode shall expose not 2 2 2.44 m (8 ft) except that, where rock bottom is encountered, the less than 0.186 m (2 ft) of surface to exterior soil. Electrodes

electrode shall be driven at an oblique angle not to exceed 45 of bare or electrically conductive coated iron or steel plates shall degrees from the vertical or, where rock bottom is encountered be at least 6.4 mm (1⁄4 in.) in thickness. Solid, uncoated elec- at an angle up to 45 degrees, the electrode shall be permitted to trodes of nonferrous metal shall be at least 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) be buried in a trench that is at least 750 mm (30 in.) deep. The in thickness. upper end of the electrode shall be flush with or below ground (8) Other Local Metal Underground Systems or Structures. level unless the aboveground end and the grounding electrode Other local metal underground systems or structures such as pip- conductor attachment are protected against physical damage as ing systems, underground tanks, and underground metal well specified in 250.10. casings that are not bonded to a metal water pipe. (5) Plate Electrode. Plate electrodes shall be installed not less (B) Not Permitted for Use as Grounding Electrodes. The than 750 mm (30 in.) below the surface of the earth.

following systems and materials shall not be used as grounding (B) Electrode Spacing. Where more than one of the elec- electrodes: trodes of the type specified in 250.52(A)(5) or (A)(7) are used, (1) Metal underground gas piping systems each electrode of one grounding system (including that used for (2) Aluminum strike termination devices) shall not be less than 1.83 m (6 ft) (3) The structures and structural reinforcing steel described in from any other electrode of another grounding system. Two 680.26(B)(1) and (B)(2) or more grounding electrodes that are bonded together shall be considered a single grounding electrode system. Informational Note: See 250.104(B) for bonding requirements of gas piping. (C) Bonding Jumper. The bonding jumper(s) used to con- nect the grounding electrodes together to form the ground- 250.53 Grounding Electrode System Installation. ing electrode system shall be installed in accordance with (A) Rod, Pipe, and Plate Electrodes. Rod, pipe, and plate 250.64(A), (B), and (E), shall be sized in accordance with 250.66,

electrodes shall meet the requirements of 250.53(A)(1) through and shall be connected in the manner specified in 250.70. Rebar (A)(3). shall not be used as a conductor to interconnect the electrodes of (1) Below Permanent Moisture Level. If practicable, rod, grounding electrode systems. pipe, and plate electrodes shall be embedded below permanent (D) Metal Underground Water Pipe. If used as a grounding moisture level. Rod, pipe, and plate electrodes shall be free from electrode, metal underground water pipe shall meet the require- nonconductive coatings such as paint or enamel. ments of 250.53(D)(1) and (D)(2). (2) Supplemental Electrode Required. A single rod, pipe, (1) Continuity. Continuity of the grounding path or the or plate electrode shall be supplemented by an additional bonding connection to interior piping shall not rely on water electrode of a type specified in 250.52(A)(2) through (A)(8). meters or filtering devices and similar equipment. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–131

250.54 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING ∆ (2) Supplemental Electrode Required. A metal under- Informational Note No. 2: Bonding together of all ground water pipe shall be supplemented by an additional separate grounding electrodes will limit voltage differ- electrode of a type specified in 250.52(A)(2) through (A)(8). ences between them and between their associated wiring If the supplemental electrode is of the rod, pipe, or plate type, systems. it shall comply with 250.53(A). The supplemental electrode 250.62 Grounding Electrode Conductor Material. The shall be bonded to one of the following: grounding electrode conductor shall be of copper, aluminum, (1) Grounding electrode conductor copper-clad aluminum, or the items as permitted in 250.68(C). (2) Grounded service-entrance conductor The material selected shall be resistant to any corrosive condi- (3) Nonflexible grounded service raceway tion existing at the installation or shall be protected against (4) Any grounded service enclosure corrosion. Conductors of the wire type shall be solid or

(5) As provided by 250.32(B) stranded, insulated, covered, or bare. Exception: The supplemental electrode shall be permitted 250.64 Grounding Electrode Conductor Installation. to be bonded to the interior metal water piping as specified in Grounding electrode conductors at the service, at each building 250.68(C)(1). or structure where supplied by a feeder(s) or branch circuit(s), or at a separately derived system shall be installed as specified (E) Supplemental Electrode Bonding Connection Size. in 250.64(A) through (F). Where the supplemental electrode is a rod, pipe, or plate elec- trode, that portion of the bonding jumper that is the sole con- (A) Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors. nection to the supplemental grounding electrode shall not be Grounding electrode conductors of bare, covered, or insu- required to be larger than 6 AWG copper wire or 4 AWG alu- lated aluminum or copper-clad aluminum shall comply with the minum wire. following: (F) Ground Ring. The ground ring shall be installed not less (1) Bare or covered conductors without an extruded polymeric

than 750 mm (30 in.) below the surface of the earth. covering shall not be installed where subject to corrosive conditions or be installed in direct contact with concrete. 250.54 Auxiliary Grounding Electrodes. One or more (2) Terminations made within outdoor enclosures that are grounding electrodes shall be permitted to be connected to the listed and identified for the environment shall be permitted equipment grounding conductors specified in 250.118 and within 450 mm (18 in.) of the bottom of the enclosure. shall not be required to comply with the electrode bonding (3) Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum conductors external to requirements of 250.50 or 250.53(C) or the resistance require- buildings or equipment enclosures shall not be terminated ments of 250.53(A)(2) Exception, but the earth shall not be within 450 mm (18 in.) of the earth. used as an effective ground-fault current path as specified in 250.4(A)(5) and 250.4(B)(4). (B) Securing and Protection Against Physical Damage. Where exposed, a grounding electrode conductor or its enclo- 250.58 Common Grounding Electrode.

Where an ac sure shall be securely fastened to the surface on which it is car- system is connected to a grounding electrode in or at a build- ried. Grounding electrode conductors shall be permitted to be ing or structure, the same electrode shall be used to ground installed on or through framing members. conductor enclosures and equipment in or on that building or structure. Where separate services, feeders, or branch circuits (1) Not Exposed to Physical Damage. A 6 AWG or larger supply a building and are required to be connected to a ground- copper or aluminum grounding electrode conductor not exposed ing electrode(s), the same grounding electrode(s) shall be used. to physical damage shall be permitted to be run along the sur- face of the building construction without metal covering or Two or more grounding electrodes that are bonded together protection. shall be considered as a single grounding electrode system in this sense. (2) Exposed to Physical Damage. A 6 AWG or larger copper or aluminum grounding electrode conductor exposed to physi- 250.60 Use of Strike Termination Devices.

Conductors and cal damage shall be protected in rigid metal conduit (RMC), driven pipes, rods, or plate electrodes used for grounding strike intermediate metal conduit (IMC), Schedule 80 rigid polyvinyl termination devices shall not be used in lieu of the grounding chloride conduit (PVC), reinforced thermosetting resin conduit electrodes required by 250.50 for grounding wiring systems and Type XW (RTRC-XW), electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or equipment. This provision shall not prohibit the required bond- cable armor. ing together of grounding electrodes of different systems. (3) Smaller Than 6 AWG. Grounding electrode conductors Informational Note No. 1: See 250.106 for the bonding smaller than 6 AWG shall be protected in RMC, IMC, Sched- requirement of the lightning protection system compo- ule 80 PVC, RTRC-XW, EMT, or cable armor. nents to the building or structure grounding electrode system. (4) In Contact with the Earth. Grounding electrode conduc- tors and grounding electrode bonding jumpers in contact with 70–132 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.64 the earth shall not be required to comply with 300.5, but shall aluminum busbars are used, the installation shall comply be buried or otherwise protected if subject to physical damage. with 250.64(A). (C) Continuous. Except as provided in 250.30(A)(5) and (2) Individual Grounding Electrode Conductors. A ground- (A)(6), 250.30(B)(1), and 250.68(C), grounding electrode ing electrode conductor shall be connected between the conductor(s) shall be installed in one continuous length with- grounding electrode system and one or more of the following, out a splice or joint. If necessary, splices or connections shall be as applicable: made as permitted in (1) through (4): (1) Grounded conductor in each service equipment discon- (1) Splicing of the wire-type grounding electrode conductor necting means enclosure shall be permitted only by irreversible compression-type (2) Equipment grounding conductor installed with the feeder connectors listed as grounding and bonding equipment or (3) Supply-side bonding jumper by the exothermic welding process.

Each grounding electrode conductor shall be sized in accor- (2) Sections of busbars shall be permitted to be connected dance with 250.66 based on the service-entrance or feeder together to form a grounding electrode conductor. conductor(s) supplying the individual disconnecting means. (3) Bolted, riveted, or welded connections of structural metal frames of buildings or structures. (3) Common Location. A grounding electrode conductor (4) Threaded, welded, brazed, soldered or bolted-flange con- shall be connected in a wireway or other accessible enclosure nections of metal water piping. on the supply side of the disconnecting means to one or more of the following, as applicable: (D) Building or Structure with Multiple Disconnecting Means in Separate Enclosures. If a building or structure (1) Grounded service conductor(s) is supplied by a service or feeder with two or more discon- (2) Equipment grounding conductor installed with the feeder necting means in separate enclosures, the grounding electrode (3) Supply-side bonding jumper

connections shall be made in accordance with 250.64(D)(1), The connection shall be made with exothermic welding or 250.64(D)(2), or 250.64(D)(3). a connector listed as grounding and bonding equipment. The (1) Common Grounding Electrode Conductor and Taps. grounding electrode conductor shall be sized in accordance with A common grounding electrode conductor and grounding 250.66 based on the service-entrance or feeder conductor(s) at electrode conductor taps shall be installed. The common the common location where the connection is made. grounding electrode conductor shall be sized in accordance (E) Raceways and Enclosures for Grounding Electrode with 250.66, based on the sum of the circular mil area of the Conductors. largest ungrounded conductor(s) of each set of conductors that supplies the disconnecting means. If the service-entrance con- (1) General. Ferrous metal raceways, enclosures, and cable ductors connect directly to the overhead service conductors, armor for grounding electrode conductors shall be electrically

service drop, underground service conductors, or service lat- continuous from the point of attachment to cabinets or equip- eral, the common grounding electrode conductor shall be sized ment to the grounding electrode and shall be securely fastened in accordance with Table 250.66, note 1. to the ground clamp or fitting. Ferrous metal raceways, enclo- sures, and cable armor shall be bonded at each end of the raceway A grounding electrode conductor tap shall extend to the or enclosure to the grounding electrode or grounding electrode inside of each disconnecting means enclosure. The ground- conductor to create an electrically parallel path. Nonferrous metal ing electrode conductor taps shall be sized in accordance with raceways, enclosures, and cable armor shall not be required to be 250.66 for the largest service-entrance or feeder conductor electrically continuous. serving the individual enclosure. The tap conductors shall be connected to the common grounding electrode conductor by (2) Methods. Bonding shall be in compliance with

one of the following methods in such a manner that the com- 250.92(B) and ensured by one of the methods in 250.92(B)(2) mon grounding electrode conductor remains without a splice through (B)(4). or joint: (3) Size. The bonding jumper for a grounding electrode (1) Exothermic welding. conductor(s), raceway(s), enclosure(s), or cable armor shall (2) Connectors listed as grounding and bonding equipment. be the same size as, or larger than, the largest enclosed grounding (3) Connections to an aluminum or copper busbar not less than electrode conductor. 6 mm thick × 50 mm wide (1 ⁄ 4 in. thick × 2 in. wide) (4) Wiring Methods. If a raceway is used as protection for and of sufficient length to accommodate the number a grounding electrode conductor, the installation shall comply of terminations necessary for the installation. The bus- with the requirements of the appropriate raceway article. bar shall be securely fastened and shall be installed in (F) Installation to Electrode(s). Grounding electrode an accessible location. Connections shall be made by a

conductor(s) and bonding jumpers interconnecting grounding listed connector or by the exothermic welding process. If 2022 California Electrical Code 70–133

250.66 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING electrodes shall be installed in accordance with (1), (2), or (3). ∆ Table 250.66 Grounding Electrode Conductor for Alternating- The grounding electrode conductor shall be sized for the larg- Current Systems est grounding electrode conductor required among all the elec- trodes connected to it. Size of Largest Ungrounded Conductor or Equivalent Size of Grounding (1) The grounding electrode conductor shall be permitted Area for Parallel Conductors Electrode Conductor to be run to any convenient grounding electrode avail- (AWG/kcmil) (AWG/kcmil) able in the grounding electrode system where the other Aluminum or Aluminum or electrode(s), if any, is connected by bonding jumpers that Copper-Clad Copper-Clad are installed in accordance with 250.53(C). Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum (2) Grounding electrode conductor(s) shall be permitted to be run to one or more grounding electrode(s) individually. 2 or smaller 1/0 or smaller 8 6 (3) Bonding jumper(s) from grounding electrode(s) shall be 1 or 1/0 2/0 or 3/0 6 4 2/0 or 3/0 4/0 or 250 4 2

permitted to be connected to an aluminum or copper bus- Over 3/0 through Over 250 2 1/0 bar not less than 6 mm thick × 50 mm wide (1⁄4 in. thick × 350 through 500 2 in wide.) and of sufficient length to accommodate the Over 350 Over 500 1/0 3/0 number of terminations necessary for the installation. The through 600 through 900 busbar shall be securely fastened and shall be installed in Over 600 Over 900 2/0 4/0 through 1100 through 1750 an accessible location. Connections shall be made by a Over 1100 Over 1750 3/0 250 listed connector or by the exothermic welding process. The grounding electrode conductor shall be permitted to be run Notes: to the busbar. Where aluminum busbars are used, the instal- 1. If multiple sets of service-entrance conductors connect directly to a service drop, set of overhead service conductors, set of underground service lation shall comply with 250.64(A). conductors, or service lateral, the equivalent size of the largest service- entrance conductor shall be determined by the largest sum of the areas of the

250.66 Size of Alternating-Current Grounding Electrode corresponding conductors of each set. Conductor. The size of the grounding electrode conductor at 2. Where there are no service-entrance conductors, the grounding electrode the service, at each building or structure where supplied by a conductor size shall be determined by the equivalent size of the largest service-entrance conductor required for the load to be served. feeder(s) or branch circuit(s), or at a separately derived system of 3. See installation restrictions in 250.64. a grounded or ungrounded ac system shall not be less than given in Table 250.66, except as permitted in 250.66(A) through (C). (A) Connections to a Rod, Pipe, or Plate Electrode(s). If the each building or structure where supplied by a feeder(s) or grounding electrode conductor or bonding jumper connected branch circuit(s), or at a separately derived system and associ- to a single or multiple rod, pipe, or plate electrode(s), or any ated bonding jumper(s) shall be made as specified 250.68(A) combination thereof, as described in 250.52(A)(5) or (A)(7),

through (C). does not extend on to other types of electrodes that require a larger size conductor, the grounding electrode conductor (A) Accessibility. All mechanical elements used to termi- shall not be required to be larger than 6 AWG copper wire or nate a grounding electrode conductor or bonding jumper to a 4 AWG aluminum wire. grounding electrode shall be accessible. (B) Connections to Concrete-Encased Electrodes. If the ExceptionNo.1: An encased or buried connection to a concrete- grounding electrode conductor or bonding jumper connected to encased, driven, or buried grounding electrode shall not be a single or multiple concrete-encased electrode(s), as described required to be accessible. in 250.52(A)(3), does not extend on to other types of electrodes Exception No. 2:Exothermic or irreversible compression that require a larger size of conductor, the grounding electrode connections used at terminations, together with the mechanical conductor shall not be required to be larger than 4 AWG copper means used to attach such terminations to fireproofed struc- wire.

tural metal whether or not the mechanical means is reversible, (C) Connections to Ground Rings. If the grounding elec- shall not be required to be accessible. trode conductor or bonding jumper connected to a ground ring, (B) Effective Grounding Path. The connection of a ground- as described in 250.52(A)(4), does not extend on to other types ing electrode conductor or bonding jumper to a grounding of electrodes that require a larger size of conductor, the ground- electrode shall be made in a manner that will ensure an effec- ing electrode conductor shall not be required to be larger than tive grounding path. Where necessary to ensure the grounding the conductor used for the ground ring. path for a metal piping system used as a grounding electrode, 250.68 Grounding Electrode Conductor and Bonding bonding shall be provided around insulated joints and around Jumper Connection to Grounding Electrodes. The con- any equipment likely to be disconnected for repairs or replace- nection of a grounding electrode conductor at the service, at ment.

Bonding jumpers shall be of sufficient length to permit 70–134 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.84 removal of such equipment while retaining the integrity of the 250.70 Methods of Grounding and Bonding Conductor grounding path. Connection to Electrodes. The grounding or bonding conduc- tor shall be connected to the grounding electrode by exothermic ∆ (C) Grounding Electrode Conductor Connections. Grounding welding, listed lugs, listed pressure connectors, listed clamps, or electrode conductors and bonding jumpers shall be permitted to other listed means. Connections depending on solder shall not be connected at the following locations and used to extend the be used. Ground clamps shall be listed for the materials of the connection to an electrode(s): grounding electrode and the grounding electrode conductor (1) Interior metal water piping that is electrically continu- and, where used on pipe, rod, or other buried electrodes, shall ous with a metal underground water pipe electrode and is also be listed for direct soil burial or concrete encasement. Not

located not more than 1.52 m (5 ft) from the point of more than one conductor shall be connected to the grounding entrance to the building shall be permitted to extend the electrode by a single clamp or fitting unless the clamp or fitting connection to an electrode(s). Interior metal water piping is listed for multiple conductors. One of the following methods located more than 1.52 m (5 ft) from the point of entrance shall be used: to the building shall not be used as a conductor to intercon- (1) A pipe fitting, pipe plug, or other approved device screwed nect electrodes of the grounding electrode system. into a pipe or pipe fitting Exception: In industrial, commercial, and institutional build- (2) A listed bolted clamp of cast bronze or brass, or plain or ings or structures, if conditions of maintenance and supervision malleable iron ensure that only qualified persons service the installation, inte- (3) For indoor communications purposes only, a listed sheet rior metal water piping located more than 1.52 m (5 ft) from the metal strap-type ground clamp having a rigid metal base

point of entrance to the building shall be permitted as a bonding that seats on the electrode and having a strap of such conductor to interconnect electrodes that are part of the ground- material and dimensions that it is not likely to stretch dur- ing electrode system, or as a grounding electrode conductor, if ing or after installation the entire length, other than short sections passing perpendic- (4) An equally substantial approved means ularly through walls, floors, or ceilings, of the interior metal water pipe that is being used for the conductor is exposed. Part IV. Enclosure, Raceway, and Service Cable Connections (2) The metal structural frame of a building shall be permitted to be used as a conductor to interconnect electrodes that are 250.80 Service Raceways and Enclosures. Metal enclo- part of the grounding electrode system, or as a grounding sures and raceways for service conductors and equipment shall electrode conductor. Hold-down bolts securing the struc- be connected to the grounded system conductor if the electrical

tural steel column that are connected to a concrete-encased system is grounded or to the grounding electrode conductor for electrode complying with 250.52(A)(3) and located in the electrical systems that are not grounded. support footing or foundation shall be permitted to con- Exception: Metal components that are installed in a run of nect the metal structural frame of a building or structure to underground nonmetallic raceway(s) and are isolated from pos- the concrete encased grounding electrode. The hold-down sible contact by a minimum cover of 450 mm (18 in.) to all bolts shall be connected to the concrete-encased electrode parts of the metal components shall not be required to be con- by welding, exothermic welding, the usual steel tie wires, nected to the grounded system conductor, supply side bonding or other approved means. jumper, or grounding electrode conductor. (3) A rebar-type concrete-encased electrode installed in accordance with 250.52(A)(3) with an additional rebar sec- 250.84 Underground Service Cable or Raceway.

tion extended from its location within the concrete founda- (A) Underground Service Cable. The sheath or armor of a tion or footing to an accessible location that is not subject continuous underground metal-sheathed or armored service to corrosion shall be permitted for connection of grounding cable system that is connected to the grounded system conduc- electrode conductors and bonding jumpers in accordance tor on the supply side shall not be required to be connected with the following: to the grounded system conductor at the building or structure. The sheath or armor shall be permitted to be insulated from the a. The additional rebar section shall be continuous with the interior metal raceway or piping. grounding electrode rebar or shall be connected to the grounding electrode rebar and connected together by (B) Underground Service Raceway Containing Cable. An the usual steel tie wires, exothermic welding, welding, underground metal service raceway that contains a metal- or other effective means. sheathed or armored cable connected to the grounded system b.

The rebar extension shall not be exposed to contact with conductor shall not be required to be connected to the grounded the earth without corrosion protection. system conductor at the building or structure. The sheath or c. Rebar shall not be used as a conductor to interconnect armor shall be permitted to be insulated from the interior metal the electrodes of grounding electrode systems. raceway or piping. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–135

250.86 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.86 Other Conductor Enclosures and Raceways. Except this section but shall be permitted to be installed to make a as permitted by 250.112(I), metal enclosures and raceways for mechanical connection of the raceway(s). other than service conductors shall be connected to the equip- Electrical continuity at service equipment, service raceways, ment grounding conductor. and service conductor enclosures shall be ensured by one of the Exception No. 1: Metal enclosures and raceways for conduc- following methods: tors added to existing installations of open wire, knob-and-tube (1) Bonding equipment to the grounded service conductor in a wiring, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable shall not be required manner provided in 250.8 to be connected to the equipment grounding conductor where (2) Connections using threaded couplings or listed threaded these enclosures or wiring methods comply with (1) through hubs on enclosures if made up wrenchtight (4) as follows: (3) Threadless couplings and connectors if made up tight for

(1) Do not provide an equipment ground metal raceways and metal-clad cables (2) Are in runs of less than 7.5 m (25 ft) (4) Other listed devices, such as bonding-type locknuts, bush- (3) Are free from probable contact with ground, grounded ings, or bushings with bonding jumpers metal, metal lath, or other conductive material ∆ 250.94 Bonding for Communication Systems. Com- (4) Are guarded against contact by persons munications system bonding terminations shall be connected in Exception No. 2: Short sections of metal enclosures or raceways accordance with 250.94(A) or (B). used to provide support or protection of cable assemblies from ∆ (A) The Intersystem Bonding Termination Device. An physical damage shall not be required to be connected to the intersystem bonding termination (IBT) for connecting inter- equipment grounding conductor. system bonding conductors shall be provided external to Exception No. 3: Metal components shall not be required to be enclosures at the service equipment or metering equipment

connected to the equipment grounding conductor or supply-side enclosure and at the disconnecting means for any additional bonding jumper where either of the following conditions exist: buildings or structures. If an IBT is used, it shall comply with the following: (1) The metal components are installed in a run of nonme- tallic raceway(s) and isolated from possible contact by a (1) Be accessible for connection and inspection. minimum cover of 450 mm (18 in.) to any part of the metal (2) Consist of a set of terminals with the capacity for connec- components. tion of not less than three intersystem bonding conductors. (2) The metal components are part of an installation of nonme- (3) Not interfere with opening the enclosure for a service, tallic raceway(s) and are isolated from possible contact to building or structure disconnecting means, or metering any part of the metal components by being encased in not equipment. less than 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete. (4) At the service equipment, be securely mounted and elec- trically connected to an enclosure for the service equip- Part V.

Bonding ment, to the meter enclosure, or to an exposed nonflexible 250.90 General. Bonding shall be provided where neces- metallic service raceway, or be mounted at one of these sary to ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct enclosures and be connected to the enclosure or to the safely any fault current likely to be imposed. grounding electrode conductor with a minimum 6 AWG copper conductor. 250.92 Services. (5) At the disconnecting means for a building or structure, be (A) Bonding of Equipment for Services. The normally securely mounted and electrically connected to the metal- non– current-carrying metal parts of equipment indicated in lic enclosure for the building or structure disconnecting 250.92(A)(1) and (A)(2) shall be bonded together. means, or be mounted at the disconnecting means and be connected to the metallic enclosure or to the ground- (1) All raceways, cable trays, cablebus framework, auxiliary ing electrode conductor with a minimum 6 AWG copper gutters, or service cable armor or sheath that enclose, con- conductor.

tain, or support service conductors, except as permitted in (6) The terminals shall be listed as grounding and bonding 250.80 equipment. (2) All enclosures containing service conductors, including meter fittings, boxes, or the like, interposed in the service Exception: In existing buildings or structures where any of the raceway or armor intersystem bonding and grounding electrode conductors required by 770.100(B)(2), 800.100(B)(2), 810.21(F)(2), 820.100, and (B) Method of Bonding at the Service. Bonding jumpers 830.100 exist, installation of the intersystem bonding termina- meeting the requirements of this article shall be used around tion is not required. An accessible means external to enclosures impaired connections, such as reducing washers or oversized, for connecting intersystem bonding and grounding electrode concentric, or eccentric knockouts. Standard locknuts or bush- conductors shall be permitted at the service equipment and at the ings shall not be the only means for the bonding required by 70–136 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.102 disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures shall comply with this article and shall be supplemented by an by at least one of the following means: internal insulated equipment grounding conductor installed in accordance with 250.146(D) to ground the equipment (1) Exposed nonflexible metallic raceways enclosure. (2) An exposed grounding electrode conductor (3) Approved means for the external connection of a copper or Informational Note: Use of an isolated equipment other corrosion-resistant bonding or grounding electrode grounding conductor does not relieve the requirement conductor to the grounded raceway or equipment for grounding the raceway system. Informational Note No. 1: A 6 AWG copper conductor 250.97 Bonding for Over 250 Volts. For circuits of over with one end bonded to the grounded nonflexible metallic 250 volts to ground, the electrical continuity of metal raceways raceway or equipment and with 150 mm (6 in.) or more and cables with metal sheaths that contain any conductor other

of the other end made accessible on the outside wall is than service conductors shall be ensured by one or more of an example of the approved means covered in 250.94, the methods specified for services in 250.92(B), except for Exception item (3). (B)(1). Informational Note No. 2:See 770.100, 800.100, Exception: Where oversized, concentric, or eccentric knock- 810.21, 820.100, and 830.100 for intersystem bonding outs are not encountered, or where a box or enclosure with and grounding requirements for conductive optical fiber concentric or eccentric knockouts is listed to provide a reliable cables, communications circuits, radio and television bonding connection, the following methods shall be permitted: equipment, CATV circuits and network-powered broad- (1) Threadless couplings and connectors for cables with band communications systems, respectively. metal sheaths (B) Other Means. Connections to an aluminum or copper (2) Two locknuts, on rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal busbar not less than 6 mm thick × 50 mm wide (1⁄4 in.

thick × conduit, one inside and one outside of boxes and cabinets 2 in. wide) and of sufficient length to accommodate at least three (3) Fittings with shoulders that seat firmly against the box or terminations for communication systems in addition to other cabinet, such as electrical metallic tubing connectors, flex- connections. The busbar shall be securely fastened and shall be ible metal conduit connectors, and cable connectors, with installed in an accessible location. Connections shall be made by one locknut on the inside of boxes and cabinets a listed connector. If aluminum busbars are used, the installation (4) Listed fittings shall also comply with 250.64(A). 250.98 Bonding Loosely Jointed Metal Raceways. Expan- Exception to (A) and (B): Means for connecting intersystem sion, expansion-deflection, or deflection fittings and telescoping bonding conductors are not required where communications sections of metal raceways shall be made electrically continuous systems are not likely to be used. by equipment bonding jumpers or other means.

Informational Note: The use of an IBT can reduce elec- 250.100 Bonding in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. trical noise on communication systems. Regardless of the voltage of the electrical system, the electrical 250.96 Bonding Other Enclosures. continuity of non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures in any hazardous (classified) (A) General. Metal raceways, cable trays, cable armor, cable location, as defined in 500.5, 505.5, and 506.5, shall be ensured sheath, enclosures, frames, fittings, and other metal non– by any of the bonding methods specified in 250.92(B)(2) through current-carrying parts that are to serve as equipment ground- (B)(4). One or more of these bonding methods shall be used ing conductors, with or without the use of supplementary whether or not equipment grounding conductors of the wire type equipment grounding conductors, shall be bonded where nec- are installed. essary to ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to con- duct safely any fault current likely to be imposed on them.

Informational Note: See 501.30, 502.30, 503.30, Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be 505.25, or 506.25 for specific bonding requirements. removed at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces or shall 250.102 Grounded Conductor, Bonding Conductors, and be connected by means of fittings designed so as to make such Jumpers. removal unnecessary. (A) Material. Bonding jumpers shall be of copper, aluminum, ∆ (B) Isolated Grounding Circuits. Where installed for the copper-clad aluminum, or other corrosion-resistant material. A reduction of electromagnetic interference on the grounding bonding jumper shall be a wire, bus, screw, or similar suitable circuit, an equipment enclosure supplied by a branch circuit conductor. shall be permitted to be isolated from a raceway containing (B) Attachment. Bonding jumpers shall be attached in the circuits supplying only that equipment by one or more listed manner specified in 250.8 for circuits and equipment and in nonmetallic raceway fittings located at the point of attachment 250.70 for grounding electrodes.

of the raceway to the equipment enclosure. The metal raceway 2022 California Electrical Code 70–137

250.102 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING Table 250.102(C)(1) Grounded Conductor, Main Bonding Jumper, System Bonding Jumper, and Supply-Side Bonding Jumper for Alternating-Current Systems Size of Largest Ungrounded Conductor Size of Grounded Conductor or Equivalent Area for Parallel Conductors or Bonding Jumper* (AWG/kcmil) (AWG/kcmil) Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum or Copper-Clad Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum 2 or smaller 1/0 or smaller 8 6 1 or 1/0 2/0 or 3/0 6 4 2/0 or 3/0 4/0 or 250 4 2 Over 3/0 through 350 Over 250 through 500 2 1/0 Over 350 through 600 Over 500 through 900 1/0 3/0 Over 600 through 1100 Over 900 through 1750 2/0 4/0 Over 1100 Over 1750 See Notes 1 and 2. Notes: 1. If the ungrounded supply conductors are larger than 1100 kcmil copper or 1750 kcmil aluminum, the grounded conductor or bonding jumper shall have an area not less than 121⁄2 percent of the area of the largest ungrounded supply conductor or equivalent area for parallel supply conductors. The grounded conductor or bonding jumper shall not be

required to be larger than the largest ungrounded conductor or set of ungrounded conductors. 2. If the ungrounded supply conductors are larger than 1100 kcmil copper or 1750 kcmil aluminum and if the ungrounded supply conductors and the bonding jumper are of different materials (copper, aluminum, or copper-clad aluminum), the minimum size of the grounded conductor or bonding jumper shall be based on the assumed use of ungrounded supply conductors of the same material as the grounded conductor or bonding jumper and will have an ampacity equivalent to that of the installed ungrounded supply conductors. 3. If multiple sets of service-entrance conductors are used as permitted in 230.40, Exception No. 2, or if multiple sets of ungrounded supply conductors are installed for a separately derived system, the equivalent size of the largest ungrounded supply conductor(s) shall be determined by the largest sum of the areas of the corresponding conductors of each set. 4. If there are no service-entrance conductors, the supply conductor size shall be determined by the equivalent size of

the largest service-entrance conductor required for the load to be served. *For the purposes of applying this table and its notes, the term bonding jumper refers to main bonding jumpers, system bonding jumpers, and supply-side bonding jumpers. (C) Size — Supply-Side Bonding Jumper. (D) Size — Equipment Bonding Jumper on Load Side of an Overcurrent Device. The equipment bonding jumper on (1) Size for Supply Conductors in a Single Raceway or the load side of an overcurrent device(s) shall be sized in accor- Cable. The supply-side bonding jumper shall not be smaller dance with 250.122. than specified in Table 250.102(C)(1). A single common continuous equipment bonding jumper (2) Size for Parallel Conductor Installations in Two or shall be permitted to connect two or more raceways or cables if More Raceways or Cables. Where the ungrounded supply the bonding jumper is sized in accordance with 250.122 for the conductors are paralleled in two or more raceways or cables, largest overcurrent device supplying circuits therein. and an individual supply-side bonding jumper is used for bond-

ing these raceways or cables, the size of the supply-side bond- (E) Installation. Bonding jumpers or conductors and equipment ing jumper for each raceway or cable shall be selected from bonding jumpers shall be permitted to be installed inside or out- Table 250.102(C)(1) based on the size of the ungrounded sup- side of a raceway or an enclosure. ply conductors in each raceway or cable. A single supply-side (1) Inside a Raceway or an Enclosure. If installed inside a bonding jumper installed for bonding two or more raceways or raceway, equipment bonding jumpers and bonding jumpers or cables shall be sized in accordance with 250.102(C)(1). conductors shall comply with the requirements of 250.119 and Informational Note No. 1: The term supply conductors 250.148. includes ungrounded conductors that do not have over- (2) Outside a Raceway or an Enclosure. If installed on the current protection on their supply side and terminate at outside, the length of the bonding jumper or conductor or equip- service equipment or the first disconnecting means of a

ment bonding jumper shall not exceed 1.8 m (6 ft) and shall be separately derived system. routed with the raceway or enclosure. Informational Note No. 2: See Chapter 9, Table 8, for the Exception: An equipment bonding jumper or supply-side bond- circular mil area of conductors 18 AWG through 4/0 AWG. ing jumper longer than 1.8 m (6 ft) shall be permitted at outside 70–138 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.104 pole locations for the purpose of bonding or grounding isolated larger than the largest ungrounded feeder or branch-circuit con- sections of metal raceways or elbows installed in exposed ris- ductor supplying the building or structure. ers of metal conduit or other metal raceway, and for bonding ∆ (B) Other Metal Piping. If installed in or attached to a build- grounding electrodes, and shall not be required to be routed ing or structure, a metal piping system(s), including gas piping, with a raceway or enclosure. that is likely to become energized shall be bonded to any of the (3) Protection. Bonding jumpers or conductors and equip- following: ment bonding jumpers shall be installed in accordance with (1) Equipment grounding conductor for the circuit that is 250.64(A) and (B). likely to energize the piping system 250.104 Bonding of Piping Systems and Exposed Struc- (2) Service equipment enclosure tural Metal. (3) Grounded conductor at the service (4) Grounding electrode conductor, if of sufficient size ∆ (A) Metal Water Piping.

The metal water piping system (5) One or more grounding electrodes used, if the grounding shall be bonded as required in 250.104(A)(1), (A)(2), or (A)(3). electrode conductor or bonding jumper to the grounding elec- (1) General. Metal water piping system(s) installed in or trode is of sufficient size attached to a building or structure shall be bonded to any of the The bonding conductor(s) or jumper(s) shall be sized in following: accordance with Table 250.122, and equipment grounding con- (1) Service equipment enclosure ductors shall be sized in accordance with Table 250.122 using (2) Grounded conductor at the service the rating of the circuit that is likely to energize the piping (3) Grounding electrode conductor, if of sufficient size system(s). The points of attachment of the bonding jumper(s) (4) One or more grounding electrodes used, if the grounding shall be accessible. electrode conductor or bonding jumper to the grounding elec- trode is of sufficient size Informational Note No. 1: Bonding all piping and metal air ducts within the premises will provide additional

The bonding jumper(s) shall be installed in accordance with safety. 250.64(A), 250.64(B), and 250.64(E). The points of attach- Informational Note No. 2:Additional information ment of the bonding jumper(s) shall be accessible. The bonding for gas piping systems can be found in NFPA 54-2018, jumper(s) shall be sized in accordance with Table 250.102(C) National Fuel Gas Code, and NFPA 780-2017, Standard (1) except that it shall not be required to be larger than 3/0 for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. copper or 250 kcmil aluminum or copper-clad aluminum and except as permitted in 250.104(A)(2) and 250.104(A)(3). (C) Structural Metal. Exposed structural metal that is inter- connected to form a metal building frame, is not intentionally (2) Buildings of Multiple Occupancy. In buildings of multi- grounded or bonded, and is likely to become energized shall be ple occupancy where the metal water piping system(s) installed bonded to any of the following: in or attached to a building or structure for the individual occu-

pancies is metallically isolated from all other occupancies by use (1) Service equipment enclosure of nonmetallic water piping, the metal water piping system(s) (2) Grounded conductor at the service for each occupancy shall be permitted to be bonded to the (3) Disconnecting means for buildings or structures supplied equipment grounding terminal of the switchgear, switchboard, by a feeder or branch circuit or panelboard enclosure (other than service equipment) sup- (4) Grounding electrode conductor, if of sufficient size plying that occupancy. The bonding jumper shall be sized in (5) One or more grounding electrodes used, if the grounding accordance with 250.102(D). electrode conductor or bonding jumper to the grounding elec- trode is of sufficient size ∆ (3) Buildings or Structures Supplied by a Feeder(s) or Branch Circuit(s). The metal water piping system(s) The bonding conductor(s) or jumper(s) shall be sized in installed in or attached to a building or structure shall be bonded accordance with Table 250.102(C)(1), except that it shall not

to any of the following: be required to be larger than 3/0 copper or 250 kcmil aluminum or copper-clad aluminum, and installed in accordance with (1) Building or structure disconnecting means enclosure where 250.64(A), 250.64(B), and 250.64(E). The points of attachment located at the building or structure of the bonding jumper(s) shall be accessible unless installed in (2) Equipment grounding conductor run with the supply compliance with 250.68(A) Exception No. 2. conductors (3) One or more grounding electrodes used (D) Separately Derived Systems. Metal water piping systems and structural metal that is interconnected to form a The bonding jumper(s) shall be sized in accordance with building frame shall be bonded to separately derived systems 250.102(D). The bonding jumper shall not be required to be in accordance with 250.104(D)(1) through 250.104(D)(3). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–139

250.106 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING (1) Metal Water Piping System(s). The grounded conductor of derived system are bonded to the common grounding electrode each separately derived system shall be bonded to the nearest avail- conductor. able point of the metal water piping system(s) in the area served by 250.106 Lightning Protection Systems. The lightning pro- each separately derived system. This connection shall be made at tection system ground terminals shall be bonded to the building the same point on the separately derived system where the ground- or structure grounding electrode system. ing electrode conductor is connected. Each bonding jumper shall be sized in accordance with Table 250.102(C)(1) based on the Informational Note No. 1: See 250.60 for use of strike largest ungrounded conductor of the separately derived system termination devices. For further information, see NFPA except that it shall not be required to be larger than 3/0 copper or 780-2017, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Pro- 250 kcmil aluminum or copper-clad aluminum.

tection Systems, which contains detailed information on grounding, bonding, and sideflash distance from light- Exception No. 1: A separate bonding jumper to the metal water ning protection systems. piping system shall not be required if the metal water piping system is used as the grounding electrode for the separately Informational Note No. 2: Metal raceways, enclosures, derived system and the water piping system is in the area served. frames, and other non–current-carrying metal parts of elec- trical equipment installed on a building equipped with a Exception No. 2: A separate water piping bonding jumper shall lightning protection system may require bonding or spac- not be required if the metal frame of a building or structure is ing from the lightning protection conductors in accordance used as the grounding electrode for a separately derived system with NFPA 780-2017, Standard for the Installation of and is bonded to the metal water piping in the area served by the Lightning Protection Systems. separately derived system. (2) Structural Metal.

If exposed structural metal that is Part VI. Equipment Grounding and Equipment Grounding interconnected to form the building frame exists in the area Conductors served by the separately derived system, it shall be bonded to N 250.109 Metal Enclosures. Metal enclosures shall be per- the grounded conductor of each separately derived system. This mitted to be used to connect bonding jumpers or equipment connection shall be made at the same point on the separately grounding conductors, or both, together to become a part of derived system where the grounding electrode conductor is an effective ground-fault current path. Metal covers and metal connected. Each bonding jumper shall be sized in accordance fittings attached to these metal enclosures shall be considered with Table 250.102(C)(1) based on the largest ungrounded con- as being connected to bonding jumpers or equipment grounding ductor of the separately derived system except that it shall not conductors, or both. be required to be larger than 3/0 copper or 250 kcmil alumi- 250.110 Equipment Fastened in Place (Fixed) or Connected

num or copper-clad aluminum. by Permanent Wiring Methods. Exposed, normally non– Exception No. 1: A separate bonding jumper to the building current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment supplied by or structural metal shall not be required if the metal frame of a enclosing conductors or components that are likely to become building or structure is used as the grounding electrode for the energized shall be connected to an equipment grounding conduc- separately derived system. tor under any of the following conditions: Exception No. 2: A separate bonding jumper to the building (1) Where within 2.5 m (8 ft) vertically or 1.5 m (5 ft) horizon- structural metal shall not be required if the water piping of a tally of ground or grounded metal objects and subject to building or structure is used as the grounding electrode for a contact by persons separately derived system and is bonded to the building struc- (2) Where located in a wet or damp location and not isolated tural metal in the area served by the separately derived system. (3) Where in electrical contact with metal

(3) Common Grounding Electrode Conductor. If a common (4) Where in a hazardous (classified) location as covered by grounding electrode conductor is installed for multiple separately Articles 500 through 517 derived systems as permitted by 250.30(A)(6), and exposed struc- (5) Where supplied by a wiring method that provides an equip- tural metal that is interconnected to form the building frame or ment grounding conductor, except as permitted by 250.86, interior metal piping exists in the area served by the separately Exception No. 2, for short sections of metal enclosures derived system, the metal piping and the structural metal mem- (6) Where equipment operates with any terminal at over ber shall be bonded to the common grounding electrode conduc- 150 volts to ground tor in the area served by the separately derived system. Exception No. 1: If exempted by special permission, the metal Exception: A separate bonding jumper from each derived frame of electrically heated appliances that have the frame per-

system to metal water piping and to structural metal mem- manently and effectively insulated from ground shall not be bers shall not be required if the metal water piping and the required to be grounded. structural metal members in the area served by the separately Exception No. 2: Distribution apparatus, such as transformer and capacitor cases, mounted on wooden poles at a height 70–140 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.114 exceeding 2.5 m (8 ft) above ground or grade level shall not be (L) Motor-Operated Water Pumps. Motor-operated water required to be grounded. pumps, including the submersible type. Exception No. 3: Listed equipment protected by a system of (M) Metal Well Casings. Where a submersible pump is used double insulation, or its equivalent, shall not be required to in a metal well casing, the well casing shall be connected to the be connected to the equipment grounding conductor. Where pump circuit equipment grounding conductor. such a system is employed, the equipment shall be distinctively ∆ 250.114 Equipment Connected by Cord and Plug. Exposed, marked. normally non–current-carrying metal parts of cord-and-plug- 250.112 Specific Equipment Fastened in Place (Fixed) or connected equipment shall be connected to the equipment Connected by Permanent Wiring Methods. Except as per- grounding conductor under any of the following conditions: mitted in 250.112(F) and (I), exposed, normally non–current-

Exception: Listed tools, listed appliances, and listed equip- carrying metal parts of equipment described in 250.112(A) ment covered in 250.114(2) through (4) shall not be required to through (K), and normally non–current-carrying metal parts be connected to an equipment grounding conductor where pro- of equipment and enclosures described in 250.112(L) and tected by a system of double insulation or its equivalent. Double (M), shall be connected to an equipment grounding conductor, insulated equipment shall be distinctively marked. regardless of voltage. (1) In hazardous (classified) locations (see Articles 500 (A) Switchgear and Switchboard Frames and Structures. through 517) Switchgear or switchboard frames and structures supporting (2) Where operated at over 150 volts to ground switching equipment, except frames of 2-wire dc switchgear or switchboards where effectively insulated from ground. Exception No. 1 to (2): Motors, where guarded, shall not be required to be connected to an equipment grounding conductor. (B) Pipe Organs. Generator and motor frames in an electri-

cally operated pipe organ, unless effectively insulated from Exception No. 2 to (2): Metal frames of electrically heated ground and the motor driving it. appliances, exempted by special permission, shall not be required to be connected to an equipment grounding conduc- (C) Motor Frames. Motor frames, as provided by 430.242. tor, in which case the frames shall be permanently and effec- (D) Enclosures for Motor Controllers. Enclosures for tively insulated from ground. motor controllers unless attached to ungrounded portable (3) In residential occupancies: equipment. a. Refrigerators, freezers, and air conditioners (E) Elevators and Cranes. Electrical equipment for elevators b. Clothes-washing, clothes-drying, and dish-washing and cranes. machines; ranges; kitchen waste disposers; informa- (F) Garages, Theaters, and Motion Picture Studios. Elec- tion technology equipment; sump pumps; and electrical trical equipment in commercial garages, theaters, and motion aquarium equipment picture studios, except pendant lampholders supplied by cir- c.

Hand-held motor-operated tools, stationary and fixed cuits not over 150 volts to ground. motor-operated tools, and light industrial motor- operated tools (G) Electric Signs. Electric signs, outline lighting, and asso- d. Motor-operated appliances of the following types: ciated equipment as provided in 600.7. hedge clippers, lawn mowers, snow blowers, and wet (H) Motion Picture Projection Equipment. Motion picture scrubbers projection equipment. e. Portable handlamps and portable luminaires (I) Remote-Control, Signaling, and Fire Alarm Circuits. (4) In other than residential occupancies: Equipment supplied by Class 1 circuits shall be grounded a. Refrigerators, freezers, and air conditioners unless operating at less than 50 volts. Equipment supplied by b. Clothes-washing, clothes-drying, and dish-washing Class 1 power-limited circuits, by Class 2 and Class 3 remote- machines; information technology equipment; sump control and signaling circuits, and by fire alarm circuits shall pumps; and electrical aquarium equipment be grounded where system grounding is required by Part II or c.

Hand-held motor-operated tools, stationary and fixed Part VIII of this article. motor-operated tools, and light industrial motor- ( J) Luminaires. Luminaires as provided in Part V of operated tools Article 410. d. Motor-operated appliances of the following types: (K) Skid-Mounted Equipment. Permanently mounted elec- hedge clippers, lawn mowers, snow blowers, and wet trical equipment and skids shall be connected to the equip- scrubbers ment grounding conductor. Wire-type equipment grounding e. Portable handlamps and portable luminaires conductors shall be sized as required by 250.122. f. Cord-and-plug-connected appliances used in damp or wet locations or by persons standing on the ground, 2022 California Electrical Code 70–141

250.116 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING standing on metal floors, or working inside of metal a. The conduit is terminated in listed fittings. tanks or boilers b. For metric designators 12 through 16 (trade sizes g. Tools likely to be used in wet or conductive locations 3⁄8 through 1⁄2), the circuit conductors contained in the conduit are protected by overcurrent devices rated at Exception: Tools and portable handlamps and portable lumi- 20 amperes or less. naires likely to be used in wet or conductive locations shall not c. For metric designators 21 through 35 (trade sizes be required to be connected to an equipment grounding con- 3⁄4 through 11⁄4), the circuit conductors contained in the ductor where supplied through an isolating transformer with an conduit are protected by overcurrent devices rated not ungrounded secondary of not over 50 volts. more than 60 amperes and there is no flexible metal 250.116 Nonelectrical Equipment. The metal parts of the conduit, flexible metallic tubing, or liquidtight flex-

following nonelectrical equipment described in this section ible metal conduit in metric designators 12 through 16 shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor: (trade sizes 3⁄8 through 1⁄2) in the effective ground-fault (1) Frames and tracks of electrically operated cranes and hoists current path. (2) Frames of nonelectrically driven elevator cars to which d. The combined length of flexible metal conduit, flex- electrical conductors are attached ible metallic tubing, and liquidtight flexible metal (3) Hand-operated metal shifting ropes or cables of electric conduit in the same effective ground-fault current elevators path does not exceed 1.8 m (6 ft). e. If used to connect equipment where flexibility is nec- Informational Note: Where extensive metal in or on essary to minimize the transmission of vibration from buildings or structures may become energized and is sub- equipment or to provide flexibility for equipment ject to personal contact, adequate bonding and grounding that requires movement after installation, a wire-type will provide additional safety.

equipment grounding conductor shall be installed. ∆ 250.118 Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors. (7) Flexible metallic tubing where the tubing is terminated The equipment grounding conductor run with or enclosing the in listed fittings and meeting the following conditions: circuit conductors shall be one or more or a combination of the a. The circuit conductors contained in the tubing are pro- following: tected by overcurrent devices rated at 20 amperes or less. (1) A copper, aluminum, or copper-clad aluminum conductor. b. The combined length of flexible metal conduit, flex- This conductor shall be solid or stranded; insulated, cov- ible metallic tubing, and liquidtight flexible metal ered, or bare; and in the form of a wire or a busbar of any conduit in the same effective ground-fault current shape. path does not exceed 1.8 m (6 ft). (2) Rigid metal conduit. (8) Armor of Type AC cable as provided in 320.108. (3) Intermediate metal conduit. (9) The copper sheath of mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed (4) Electrical metallic tubing. cable Type MI.

(5) Listed flexible metal conduit meeting all the following (10) Type MC cable that provides an effective ground-fault cur- conditions: rent path in accordance with one or more of the following: a. The conduit is terminated in listed fittings. a. It contains an insulated or uninsulated equipment b. The circuit conductors contained in the conduit are pro- grounding conductor in compliance with 250.118(1). tected by overcurrent devices rated at 20 amperes b. The combined metallic sheath and uninsulated equip- or less. ment grounding/bonding conductor of interlocked c. The size of the conduit does not exceed metric desig- metal tape–type MC cable that is listed and identi- nator 35 (trade size 11⁄4). fied as an equipment grounding conductor d. The combined length of flexible metal conduit, flex- c. The metallic sheath or the combined metallic sheath ible metallic tubing, and liquidtight flexible metal and equipment grounding conductors of the smooth or conduit in the same effective ground-fault current corrugated tube-type MC cable that is listed and iden-

path does not exceed 1.8 m (6 ft). tified as an equipment grounding conductor e. If used to connect equipment where flexibility is necessary to minimize the transmission of vibration (11) Cable trays as permitted in 392.10 and 392.60. from equipment or to provide flexibility for equip- (12) Cablebus framework as permitted in 370.60(1). ment that requires movement after installation, a (13) Other listed electrically continuous metal raceways and wire-type equipment grounding conductor shall be listed auxiliary gutters. installed. (14) Surface metal raceways listed for grounding. (6) Listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit meeting all the Informational Note: For a definition of effective ground- following conditions: fault current path, see Article 100. 70–142 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.120 ∆ 250.119 Identification of Equipment Grounding Con- permitted to be permanently identified as equipment grounding ductors. Unless required elsewhere in this Code, equipment conductors at each end and at every point where the conductors grounding conductors shall be permitted to be bare, covered, or are accessible by one of the following means: insulated. Individually covered or insulated equipment ground- (1) Stripping the insulation from the entire exposed length. ing conductors shall have a continuous outer finish that is either (2) Coloring the exposed insulation green. green or green with one or more yellow stripes except as per- (3) Marking the exposed insulation with green tape or green mitted in this section. Conductors with insulation or individual adhesive labels. Identification shall encircle the conductor. covering that is green, green with one or more yellow stripes, or otherwise identified as permitted by this section shall not be used (C) Flexible Cord. Equipment grounding conductors in

for ungrounded or grounded circuit conductors. flexible cords shall be insulated and shall have a continuous outer finish that is either green or green with one or more yel- Exception No. 1: Power-limited Class 2 or Class 3 cables, low stripes. power-limited fire alarm cables, or communications cables containing only circuits operating at less than 50 volts ac or 250.120 Equipment Grounding Conductor Installation. An 60 volts dc where connected to equipment not required to be equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in accordance grounded shall be permitted to use a conductor with green with 250.120(A), (B), and (C). insulation or green with one or more yellow stripes for other (A) Raceway, Cable Trays, Cable Armor, Cablebus, or Cable than equipment grounding purposes. Sheaths. Where it consists of a raceway, cable tray, cable armor, Exception No. 2: Flexible cords having an integral insulation cablebus framework, or cable sheath or where it is a wire within

and jacket without an equipment grounding conductor shall be a raceway or cable, it shall be installed in accordance with the permitted to have a continuous outer finish that is green. applicable provisions in this Code using fittings for joints and ter- minations approved for use with the type raceway or cable used. Informational Note: An example of a flexible cord with All connections, joints, and fittings shall be made tight using suit- integral-type insulation is Type SPT-2, 2 conductor. able tools. Exception No. 3: Conductors with green insulation shall be Informational Note: See the UL guide information permitted to be used as ungrounded signal conductors where on FHIT systems for equipment grounding conductors installed between the output terminations of traffic signal control installed in a raceway that are part of an electrical circuit and traffic signal indicating heads. Signaling circuits installed protective system or a fire-rated cable listed to maintain in accordance with this exception shall include an equipment circuit integrity.

grounding conductor in accordance with 250.118. Wire-type equipment grounding conductors shall be bare or have insula- (B) Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum Conduc- tion or covering that is green with one or more yellow stripes. tors. Equipment grounding conductors of bare, covered, or insulated aluminum or copper-clad aluminum shall comply with (A) Conductors 4 AWG and Larger. Equipment grounding the following: conductors 4 AWG and larger shall comply with 250.119(A)(1) and (A)(2). (1) Unless part of a suitable Chapter 3 cable wiring method, bare or covered conductors shall not be installed where (1) An insulated or covered conductor 4 AWG and larger shall subject to corrosive conditions or be installed in direct be permitted, at the time of installation, to be permanently contact with concrete, masonry, or the earth. identified as an equipment grounding conductor at each (2) Terminations made within outdoor enclosures that are end and at every point where the conductor is accessible. listed and identified for the environment shall be permitted

Exception: Conductors 4 AWG and larger shall not be within 450 mm (18 in.) of the bottom of the enclosure. required to be marked in conduit bodies that contain no splices (3) Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum conductors external or unused hubs. to buildings or enclosures shall not be terminated within 450 mm (18 in.) of the earth, unless terminated within a (2) Identification shall encircle the conductor and shall be listed wire connector system. accomplished by one of the following: (C) Equipment Grounding Conductors Smaller Than a. Stripping the insulation or covering from the entire 6 AWG. Where not routed with circuit conductors as permit- exposed length ted in 250.130(C) and 250.134(A) Exception No. 2, equipment b. Coloring the insulation or covering green at the grounding conductors smaller than 6 AWG shall be protected termination from physical damage by an identified raceway or cable armor c. Marking the insulation or covering with green tape or unless installed within hollow spaces of the framing members green adhesive labels at the termination

of buildings or structures and where not subject to physical (B) Multiconductor Cable. One or more insulated conductors damage. in a multiconductor cable, at the time of installation, shall be 2022 California Electrical Code 70–143

250.121 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING ∆ 250.121 Restricted Use of Equipment Grounding ∆ Table 250.122 Minimum Size Equipment Grounding Conductors Conductors. for Grounding Raceway and Equipment N (A) Grounding Electrode Conductor. An equipment Size (AWG or kcmil) grounding conductor shall not be used as a grounding elec- Rating or Setting of Automatic trode conductor. Overcurrent Device in Circuit Aluminum Ahead of Equipment, Conduit, or Copper-Clad Exception: A wire-type equipment grounding conductor installed etc., Not Exceeding (Amperes) Copper Aluminum* in compliance with 250.6(A) and the applicable requirements for both the equipment grounding conductor and the grounding elec- 15 14 12 trode conductor in Parts II, III, and VI of this article shall be per- 20 12 10 60 10 8 mitted to serve as both an equipment grounding conductor and a 100 8 6 grounding electrode conductor. 200 6 4 N (B) Metal Frame of Building or Structure. The structural 300 4 2 metal frame of a building or structure shall not be used as an 400 3 1 equipment grounding conductor. 500 2 1/0 600 1 2/0

250.122 Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors. 800 1/0 3/0 1000 2/0 4/0 ∆ (A) General. Copper, aluminum, or copper-clad aluminum 1200 3/0 250 equipment grounding conductors of the wire type shall not be 1600 4/0 350 smaller than shown in Table 250.122. The equipment ground- 2000 250 400 ing conductor shall not be required to be larger than the circuit 2500 350 600 conductors supplying the equipment. If a cable tray, a raceway, 3000 400 600 or a cable armor or sheath is used as the equipment grounding 4000 500 750 conductor, as provided in 250.118 and 250.134(1), it shall com- 5000 700 1250 ply with 250.4(A)(5) or (B)(4). 6000 800 1250 Equipment grounding conductors shall be permitted to be Note: Where necessary to comply with 250.4(A)(5) or (B)(4), the equipment grounding conductor shall be sized larger than given in this table. sectioned within a multiconductor cable, provided the com- *See installation restrictions in 250.120. bined circular mil area complies with Table 250.122. • N (B) Increased in Size. If ungrounded conductors are increased

in size for any reason other than as required in 310.15(B) or equipment grounding conductor shall be sized not smaller than 310.15(C), wire-type equipment grounding conductors, if that given by 250.122(A) using the maximum permitted rating installed, shall be increased in size proportionately to the of a dual element time-delay fuse selected for branch-circuit increase in circular mil area of the ungrounded conductors. short-circuit and ground-fault protection in accordance with Exception: Equipment grounding conductors shall be permitted 430.52(C)(1), Exception No. 1. to be sized by a qualified person to provide an effective ground (E) Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire. The equipment fault current path in accordance with 250.4(A)(5) or (B)(4). grounding conductor in a flexible cord with the largest circuit (C) Multiple Circuits. A single equipment grounding con- conductor 10 AWG or smaller, and the equipment grounding ductor shall be permitted to be installed for multiple circuits conductor used with fixture wires of any size in accordance with

that are installed in the same raceway, cable, trench, or cable 240.5, shall not be smaller than 18 AWG copper and shall not tray. It shall be sized from Table 250.122 for the largest over- be smaller than the circuit conductors. The equipment ground- current device protecting circuit conductors in the raceway, ing conductor in a flexible cord with a circuit conductor larger cable, trench, or cable tray. Equipment grounding conductors than 10 AWG shall be sized in accordance with Table 250.122. installed in cable trays shall meet the minimum requirements of ∆ (F) Conductors in Parallel. For circuits of parallel conductors 392.10(B)(1)(c). as permitted in 310.10(G), the equipment grounding conductor ∆ (D) Motor Circuits. Equipment grounding conductors for motor shall be installed in accordance with 250.122(F)(1) or (F)(2). circuits shall be sized in accordance with 250.122(D)(1) or (D)(2). ∆ (1) Conductor Installations in Raceways, Auxiliary Gutters, (1) General. The equipment grounding conductor size shall not or Cable Trays.

be smaller than determined by 250.122(A) based on the rating of (a) Single Raceway or Cable Tray, Auxiliary Gutter, or Cable the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device. Tray. If circuit conductors are connected in parallel in the same (2) Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breaker and Motor Short- raceway, auxiliary gutter, or cable tray, a single wire-type con- Circuit Protector. If the overcurrent device is an instantaneous- ductor shall be permitted as the equipment grounding conductor. trip circuit breaker or a motor short-circuit protector, the The wire-type equipment grounding conductor shall be sized 70–144 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.130 in accordance with 250.122, based on the overcurrent protective system unless the opening of the cutout or switch disconnects device for the feeder or branch circuit. all sources of energy. (b) Multiple Raceways. If conductors are installed in multiple 250.126 Identification of Wiring Device Terminals. The raceways and are connected in parallel, a wire-type equipment terminal for the connection of the equipment grounding con- grounding conductor, if used, shall be installed in each raceway ductor shall be identified by one of the following: and shall be connected in parallel. The equipment grounding con- ductor installed in each raceway shall be sized in accordance with (1) A green, not readily removable terminal screw with a hex- 250.122 based on the rating of the overcurrent protective device for agonal head. the feeder or branch circuit. (2) A green, hexagonal, not readily removable terminal nut. (c) Wire-TypeEquipmentGroundingConductorsinCableTrays. (3) A green pressure wire connector. If the terminal for the

Wire-type equipment grounding conductors installed in cable equipment grounding conductor is not visible, the con- trays shall meet the minimum requirements of 392.10(B)(1) ductor entrance hole shall be marked with the word green (c). or ground, the letters G or GR, a grounding symbol, or oth- (d) Metal Raceways, Auxiliary Gutters, or Cable Trays. erwise identified by a distinctive green color. If the ter- Metal raceways or auxiliary gutters in accordance with minal for the equipment grounding conductor is readily 250.118 or cable trays complying with 392.60(B) shall be per- removable, the area adjacent to the terminal shall be simi- mitted as the equipment grounding conductor. larly marked. ∆ (2) Multiconductor Cables. Informational Note: See Informational Note Figure (a) Except as provided in 250.122(F)(2)(c) for raceway 250.126. or cable tray installations, the equipment grounding conduc- tor in each multiconductor cable shall be sized in accordance with 250.122 based on the overcurrent protective device for the feeder or branch circuit.

INFORMATIONAL NOTE FIGURE 250.126 One Example of a (b) If circuit conductors of multiconductor cables are con- Symbol Used to Identify the Grounding Termination Point for an nected in parallel, the equipment grounding conductor(s) in Equipment Grounding Conductor. each cable shall be connected in parallel. (c) If multiconductor cables are paralleled in the same race- Part VII. Methods of Equipment Grounding Conductor way, auxiliary gutter, or cable tray, a single equipment ground- Connections ing conductor that is sized in accordance with 250.122 shall be permitted in combination with the equipment grounding con- 250.130 Equipment Grounding Conductor Connections. ductors provided within the multiconductor cables and shall all Equipment grounding conductor connections at the source of be connected together. separately derived systems shall be made in accordance with (d) Equipment grounding conductors installed in cable trays 250.30(A)(1). Equipment grounding conductor connections at shall meet the minimum requirements of 392.10(B)(1)(c).

service equipment shall be made as indicated in 250.130(A) or Cable trays complying with 392.60(B), metal raceways in (B). For replacement of non–grounding-type receptacles with accordance with 250.118, or auxiliary gutters shall be permit- grounding-type receptacles and for branch-circuit extensions ted as the equipment grounding conductor. only in existing installations that do not have an equipment grounding conductor in the branch circuit, connections shall be (G) Feeder Taps. Equipment grounding conductors installed permitted as indicated in 250.130(C). with feeder taps shall not be smaller than shown in Table 250.122 based on the rating of the overcurrent device ahead of (A) For Grounded Systems. The connection shall be made by the feeder on the supply side ahead of the tap but shall not be bonding the equipment grounding conductor to the grounded required to be larger than the tap conductors. service conductor and the grounding electrode conductor. 250.124 Equipment Grounding Conductor Continuity. (B) For Ungrounded Systems. The connection shall be made

by bonding the equipment grounding conductor to the ground- (A) Separable Connections. Separable connections such as ing electrode conductor. those provided in drawout equipment or attachment plugs and mating connectors and receptacles shall provide for first-make, (C) Nongrounding Receptacle Replacement or Branch Cir- last-break of the equipment grounding conductor. First-make, last- cuit Extensions. The equipment grounding conductor of a break shall not be required where interlocked equipment, plugs, grounding-type receptacle or a branch-circuit extension shall receptacles, and connectors preclude energization without be permitted to be connected to any of the following: grounding continuity. (1) Any accessible point on the grounding electrode system as (B) Switches. No automatic cutout or switch shall be placed described in 250.50 in the equipment grounding conductor of a premises wiring (2) Any accessible point on the grounding electrode conductor 2022 California Electrical Code 70–145

250.132 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING (3) The equipment grounding terminal bar within the enclo- (A) By Means of an Equipment Grounding Conductor. By sure where the branch circuit for the receptacle or branch means of an equipment grounding conductor run with the power circuit originates supply conductors in a cable assembly or flexible cord properly (4) An equipment grounding conductor that is part of another terminated in a grounding-type attachment plug with one fixed branch circuit that originates from the enclosure where grounding contact. the branch circuit for the receptacle or branch circuit Exception: The grounding contacting pole of grounding-type originates plug-in ground-fault circuit interrupters shall be permitted to be (5) For grounded systems, the grounded service conductor of the movable, self-restoring type on circuits operating at not within the service equipment enclosure over 150 volts between any two conductors or over 150 volts (6) For ungrounded systems, the grounding terminal bar within between any conductor and ground. the service equipment enclosure

(B) By Means of a Separate Flexible Wire or Strap. By means Informational Note: See 406.4(D) for the use of a of a separate flexible wire or strap, insulated or bare, connected ground-fault circuit-interrupting type of receptacle. to an equipment grounding conductor, and protected as well as ∆ 250.132 Short Sections of Raceway. Isolated sections of practicable against physical damage, where part of equipment. metal raceway or cable armor, if required to be connected to an 250.140 Frames of Ranges and Clothes Dryers. Frames of equipment grounding conductor, shall be connected in accor- electric ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cook- dance with 250.134. ing units, clothes dryers, and outlet or junction boxes that are ∆ 250.134 Equipment Fastened in Place or Connected by part of the circuit for these appliances shall be connected to the Permanent Wiring Methods (Fixed). Unless connected to the equipment grounding conductor in the manner specified by grounded circuit conductor as permitted by 250.32, 250.140, 250.134 or 250.138.

and 250.142, non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment, Exception: For existing branch-circuit installations only where raceways, and other enclosures, if grounded, shall be connected an equipment grounding conductor is not present in the outlet to an equipment grounding conductor by one of the following or junction box, the frames of electric ranges, wall-mounted methods: ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, clothes dryers, and out- (1) By connecting to any of the equipment grounding conduc- let or junction boxes that are part of the circuit for these appli- tors permitted by 250.118(2) through (14) ances shall be permitted to be connected to the grounded circuit (2) By connecting to an equipment grounding conductor of conductor if all the following conditions are met. the wire type that is contained within the same raceway, (1) The supply circuit is 120/240-volt, single-phase, 3-wire; contained within the same cable, or otherwise run with the or 208Y/120-volt derived from a 3-phase, 4-wire, wye- circuit conductors connected system. Exception No.

1: As provided in 250.130(C), the equipment (2) The grounded conductor is not smaller than 10 AWG cop- grounding conductor shall be permitted to be run separately per or 8 AWG aluminum. from the circuit conductors. (3) The grounded conductor is insulated, or the grounded conductor is uninsulated and part of a Type SE service- Exception No. 2: For dc circuits, the equipment grounding conduc- entrance cable and the branch circuit originates at the ser- tor shall be permitted to be run separately from the circuit conductors vice equipment. Informational Note No. 1: See 250.102 and 250.168 for (4) Grounding contacts of receptacles furnished as part of the equipment bonding jumper requirements. equipment are bonded to the equipment. Informational Note No. 2: See 400.10 for use of flexible 250.142 Use of Grounded Circuit Conductor for Ground- cords and flexible cables for fixed equipment. ing Equipment. • 250.136 Equipment Secured to Grounded Metal Supports. (A) Supply-Side Equipment. A grounded circuit conductor

Electrical equipment secured to and in electrical contact with shall be permitted to be connected to non–current-carrying metal a metal rack or structure provided for its support shall be per- parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures at any of the mitted to be considered as being connected to an equipment following locations: grounding conductor if the metal rack or structure is connected (1) On the supply side or within the enclosure of the ac ser- to an equipment grounding conductor by one of the means indi- vice disconnecting means cated in 250.134. (2) On the supply side or within the enclosure of the main • 250.138 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Equipment. Non–current- disconnecting means for separate buildings as provided in carrying metal parts of cord-and-plug-connected equipment, if 250.32(B)(1) Exception No. 1 required to be connected to an equipment grounding conductor, (3) On the supply side or within the enclosure of the main dis- shall be connected by one of the methods in 250.138(A) or (B). connecting means or overcurrent devices of a separately

derived system where permitted by 250.30(A)(1) 70–146 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.148 ∆ (B) Load-Side Equipment. Except as permitted in 250.30(A) (B) Contact Devices or Yokes. Contact devices or yokes (1), 250.32(B)(1), Exception No. 1, and Part X of Article 250, a designed and listed as self-grounding shall be permitted in con- grounded circuit conductor shall not be connected to non–current- junction with the supporting screws to establish equipment bond- carrying metal parts of equipment on the load side of the service ing between the device yoke and flush-type boxes. disconnecting means or on the load side of a separately derived ∆ (C) Floor Boxes. Floor boxes designed for and listed as pro- system disconnecting means or the overcurrent devices for a sep- viding satisfactory continuity between the box and the device arately derived system not having a main disconnecting means. shall be permitted. Exception No. 1: The frames of ranges, wall-mounted ovens, ∆ (D) Isolated Ground Receptacles. Where installed for the counter-mounted cooking units, and clothes dryers under the

reduction of electromagnetic interference on the equipment conditions permitted for existing installations by 250.140 shall grounding conductor, a receptacle in which the grounding terminal be permitted to be connected to the grounded circuit conductor. is purposely insulated from the receptacle mounting means shall Exception No. 2:It shall be permissible to connect meter be permitted. The receptacle grounding terminal shall be con- enclosures to the grounded circuit conductor on the load side of nected to an insulated equipment grounding conductor run with the service disconnect if all of the following conditions apply: the circuit conductors. This equipment grounding conductor shall be permitted to pass through one or more panelboards without a (1) Ground-fault protection of equipment is not installed. connection to the panelboard grounding terminal bar as permitted (2) All meter enclosures are located immediately adjacent to the in 408.40, Exception, so as to terminate within the same building service disconnecting means.

or structure directly at an equipment grounding conductor termi- (3) The size of the grounded circuit conductor is not smaller nal of the applicable derived system or service. Where installed in than the size specified in Table 250.122 for equipment accordance with this section, this equipment grounding conductor grounding conductors. shall also be permitted to pass through boxes, wireways, or other Exception No. 3: Electrode-type boilers operating at over 1000 enclosures without being connected to such enclosures. volts shall be grounded as required in 490.72(E)(1) and 490.74. Informational Note: Use of an isolated equipment 250.144 Multiple Circuit Connections. Where equipment is grounding conductor does not relieve the requirement grounded and is supplied by separate connection to more than for connecting the raceway system and outlet box to an one circuit or grounded premises wiring system, an equipment equipment grounding conductor. grounding conductor termination shall be provided for each ∆ 250.148 Continuity of Equipment Grounding Conductors

such connection as specified in 250.134 and 250.138. and Attachment in Boxes. If circuit conductors are spliced ∆ 250.146 Connecting Receptacle Grounding Terminal to an within a box or terminated on equipment within or supported Equipment Grounding Conductor. An equipment bonding by a box, all wire-type equipment grounding conductor(s) asso- jumper shall be used to connect the grounding terminal of ciated with any of those circuit conductors shall be connected a grounding-type receptacle to a metal box that is connected within the box or to the box in accordance with 250.8 and to an equipment grounding conductor, except as permitted in 250.148(A) through (D). 250.146(A) through (D). The equipment bonding jumper shall Exception: The equipment grounding conductor permitted in be sized in accordance with Table 250.122. 250.146(D) shall not be required to be connected to the other ∆ (A) Surface-Mounted Box. If a metal box is mounted on the equipment grounding conductors or to the box. surface, the direct metal-to-metal contact between the device (A) Connections and Splices.

Connections and splices shall yoke or strap to the box shall be permitted to provide the be made in accordance with 110.14(B) except that insulation required effective ground fault current path. At least one of shall not be required. the insulating washers shall be removed from receptacles that do not have a contact yoke or device to ensure direct metal- (B) Equipment Grounding Conductor Continuity. The to-metal contact. Direct metal-to-metal contact for providing arrangement of grounding connections shall be such that the continuity applies to cover-mounted receptacles if the box and disconnection or the removal of a luminaire, receptacle, or other cover combination are listed as providing satisfactory continu- device fed from the box does not interrupt the electrical continu- ity between the box and the receptacle. A listed exposed work ity of the equipment grounding conductor(s) providing an effec- cover shall be permitted to be the grounding and bonding means tive ground-fault current path. under both of the following conditions: (C) Metal Boxes.

A connection used for no other purpose shall (1) The device is attached to the cover with at least two fasten- be made between the metal box and the equipment grounding ers that are permanent (such as a rivet) or have a thread conductor(s) in accordance with 250.8. locking or screw or nut locking means (D) Nonmetallic Boxes. One or more equipment ground- (2) The cover mounting holes are located on a flat non-raised ing conductors brought into a nonmetallic outlet box shall be portion of the cover arranged such that a connection can be made to any fitting 2022 California Electrical Code 70–147

250.160 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING or device in that box requiring connection to an equipment overcurrent protection as provided in 445.12(D), the ground- grounding conductor. ing electrode conductor shall not be smaller than the neutral • conductor and not smaller than 8 AWG copper or 6 AWG Part VIII. Direct-Current Systems aluminum. 250.160 General. Direct-current systems shall comply with (B) Not Smaller Than the Largest Conductor. Where the dc Part VIII and other sections of Article 250 not specifically system is other than as in 250.166(A), the grounding electrode intended for ac systems. conductor shall not be smaller than the largest conductor sup- 250.162 Direct-Current Circuits and Systems to Be plied by the system, and not smaller than 8 AWG copper or Grounded. Direct-current circuits and systems shall be 6 AWG aluminum. grounded as provided for in 250.162(A) and (B). (C) Connected to Rod, Pipe, or Plate Electrodes. Where (A) Two-Wire, Direct-Current Systems. A 2-wire, dc sys- connected to rod, pipe, or plate electrodes as in 250.52(A)(5)

tem supplying premises wiring and operating at greater than or (A)(7), that portion of the grounding electrode conductor 60 volts but not greater than 300 volts shall be grounded. that is the sole connection to the grounding electrode shall not be required to be larger than 6 AWG copper wire or 4 AWG Exception No. 1: A system equipped with a ground detector aluminum wire. and supplying only industrial equipment in limited areas shall not be required to be grounded where installed adjacent to or (D) Connected to a Concrete-Encased Electrode. Where integral with the source of supply. connected to a concrete-encased electrode as in 250.52(A)(3), that portion of the grounding electrode conductor that is the sole Exception No. 2: A rectifier-derived dc system supplied from connection to the grounding electrode shall not be required to an ac system complying with 250.20 shall not be required to be be larger than 4 AWG copper wire. grounded. (E) Connected to a Ground Ring. Where connected to a Exception No. 3: Direct-current fire alarm circuits having a

ground ring as in 250.52(A)(4), that portion of the grounding elec- maximum current of 0.030 ampere as specified in Article 760, trode conductor that is the sole connection to the grounding Part III, shall not be required to be grounded. electrode shall not be required to be larger than the conductor (B) Three-Wire, Direct-Current Systems. The neutral con- used for the ground ring. ductor of all 3-wire, dc systems supplying premises wiring shall 250.167 Direct-Current Ground-Fault Detection. be grounded. (A) Ungrounded Systems. Ground-fault detection systems 250.164 Point of Connection for Direct-Current Systems. shall be required for ungrounded systems. (A) Off-Premises Source. Direct-current systems to be (B) Grounded Systems. Ground-fault detection shall be grounded and supplied from an off-premises source shall have permitted for grounded systems. the grounding connection made at one or more supply stations. A grounding connection shall not be made at individual services or (C) Marking. Direct-current systems shall be legibly at any point on the premises wiring.

marked to indicate the grounding type at the dc source or the first disconnecting means of the system. The marking shall be (B) On-Premises Source. Where the dc system source is of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved. located on the premises, a grounding connection shall be made at one of the following: Informational Note: NFPA 70E-2018, Standard for Elec- trical Safety in the Workplace, identifies four dc ground- (1) The source ing types in detail. (2) The first system disconnection means or overcurrent device ∆ 250.168 Direct-Current System Bonding Jumper. For (3) By other means that accomplish equivalent system protection direct-current systems that are to be grounded, an unspliced and that utilize equipment listed and identified for the use bonding jumper shall be used to connect the equipment grounding conductor(s) to the grounded conductor at the 250.166 Size of the Direct-Current Grounding Electrode source or to the first system disconnecting means where the Conductor. The size of the grounding electrode conductor for a system is grounded.

The size of the bonding jumper shall dc system shall be as specified in 250.166(A) and (B), except as not be smaller than the system grounding electrode conductor permitted by 250.166(C) through (E). The grounding electrode specified in 250.166 and shall comply with 250.28(A), (B), conductor for a dc system shall meet the sizing requirements in and (C). this section but shall not be required to be larger than 3/0 copper or 250 kcmil aluminum. 250.169 Ungrounded Direct-Current Separately Derived Systems. Except as otherwise permitted in 250.34 for por- (A) Not Smaller Than the Neutral Conductor. Where the table and vehicle-mounted generators, an ungrounded dc dc system consists of a 3-wire balancer set or a balancer winding with separately derived system supplied from a stand-alone power 70–148 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.184 source (such as an engine–generator set) shall have a grounding (C) On Live-Front Switchboards. Instruments, meters, and electrode conductor connected to an electrode that complies relays (whether operated from current and potential trans- with Part III of this article to provide for grounding of metal formers or connected directly in the circuit) on switchboards enclosures, raceways, cables, and exposed non–current-carry- having exposed live parts on the front of panels shall not have ing metal parts of equipment. The grounding electrode con- their cases connected to the equipment grounding conductor. ductor connection shall be to the metal enclosure at any point Mats of insulating rubber or other suitable floor insulation on the separately derived system from the source to the first shall be provided for the operator where the voltage to ground system disconnecting means or overcurrent device, or it shall exceeds 150 volts. be made at the source of a separately derived system that has ∆ 250.176 Cases of Instruments, Meters, and Relays —

no disconnecting means or overcurrent devices. Operating at Over 1000 Volts. Where instruments, meters, The size of the grounding electrode conductor shall be in and relays have current-carrying parts of over 1000 volts to accordance with 250.166. ground, they shall be isolated by elevation or protected by suit- able barriers, grounded metal, or insulating covers or guards. Part IX. Instruments, Meters, and Relays Their cases shall not be connected to the equipment grounding 250.170 Instrument Transformer Circuits. Secondary cir- conductor. cuits of current and potential instrument transformers shall be Exception: Cases of electrostatic ground detectors shall be per- grounded where the primary windings are connected to circuits mitted to be connected to an equipment grounding conductor of 300 volts or more to ground and, where installed on or in if the internal ground segments of the instrument are connected switchgear and on switchboards, shall be grounded irrespective to the instrument case and grounded and the ground detector is of voltage. isolated by elevation. Exception No.

1: Circuits where the primary windings are con- 250.178 Instrument Equipment Grounding Conductor. nected to circuits of 1000 volts or less with no live parts or wir- The equipment grounding conductor for secondary circuits of ing exposed or accessible to other than qualified persons. instrument transformers and for instrument cases shall not be Exception No. 2: Current transformer secondaries connected smaller than 12 AWG copper or 10 AWG aluminum. Cases of in a three-phase delta configuration shall not be required to be instrument transformers, instruments, meters, and relays that grounded. are mounted directly on grounded metal surfaces of enclosures or grounded metal of switchgear or switchboard panels shall 250.172 Instrument Transformer Cases. Cases or frames of be considered to be grounded, and no additional equipment instrument transformers shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor shall be required. grounding conductor where accessible to other than qualified persons. Part X. Grounding of Systems and Circuits of over

Exception: Cases or frames of current transformers, the prima- 1000 Volts ries of which are not over 150 volts to ground and that are used 250.180 General. If systems over 1000 volts are grounded, exclusively to supply current to meters. they shall comply with all applicable requirements of 250.1 250.174 Cases of Instruments, Meters, and Relays Oper- through 250.178 and with 250.182 through 250.194, which ating at 1000 Volts or Less. Instruments, meters, and relays supplement and modify the preceding sections. operating with windings or working parts at 1000 volts or less 250.182 Derived Neutral Systems. A system neutral point shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor as derived from a grounding transformer shall be permitted to be specified in 250.174(A), (B), or (C). used for grounding systems over 1 kV. (A) Not on Switchgear or Switchboards. Instruments, 250.184 Solidly Grounded Neutral Systems. Solidly meters, and relays not located on switchgear or switchboards grounded neutral systems shall be permitted to be either single

operating with windings or working parts at 300 volts or more point grounded or multigrounded neutral. to ground, and accessible to other than qualified persons, shall (A) Neutral Conductor. have the cases and other exposed metal parts connected to the equipment grounding conductor. (1) Insulation Level. The minimum insulation level for neu- tral conductors of solidly grounded systems shall be 600 volts. (B) On Switchgear or Dead-Front Switchboards. Instru- ments, meters, and relays (whether operated from current and Exception No. 1: For multigrounded neutral systems as permit- potential transformers or connected directly in the circuit) on ted in 250.184(C), bare copper conductors shall be permitted to switchgear or switchboards having no live parts on the front be used for the neutral conductor of the following: of the panels shall have the cases connected to the equipment (1) Service-entrance conductors grounding conductor. (2) Service laterals or underground service conductors (3) Direct-buried portions of feeders 2022 California Electrical Code 70–149

250.186 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING Exception No. 2: Bare conductors shall be permitted for the b. Underground circuits where the neutral conductor is neutral conductor of overhead portions installed outdoors. exposed c. Overhead circuits installed outdoors Exception No. 3: The grounded neutral conductor shall be per- mitted to be a bare conductor if isolated from phase conductors (2) The multigrounded neutral conductor shall be grounded at and protected from physical damage. each transformer and at other additional locations by con- nection to a grounding electrode. Informational Note: See 225.4 for conductor cover- (3) At least one grounding electrode shall be installed and ing where within 3.0 m (10 ft) of any building or other connected to the multigrounded neutral conductor every structure. 400 m (1300 ft). (2) Ampacity. The neutral conductor shall be of sufficient (4) The maximum distance between any two adjacent elec- ampacity for the load imposed on the conductor but not less than trodes shall not be more than 400 m (1300 ft).

331⁄3 percent of the ampacity of the phase conductors. (5) In a multigrounded shielded cable system, the shielding shall be grounded at each cable joint that is exposed to per- Exception: In industrial and commercial premises under engi- sonnel contact. neering supervision, it shall be permissible to size the ampac- ity of the neutral conductor to not less than 20 percent of the Exception: In a multipoint grounded system, a grounding elec- ampacity of the phase conductor. trode shall not be required to bond the neutral conductor in an (B) Single-Point Grounded Neutral System. Where a sin- uninterrupted conductor exceeding 400 m (1300 ft) if the only gle-point grounded neutral system is used, the following shall purpose for removing the cable jacket is for bonding the neutral apply: conductor to a grounding electrode. (1) A single-point grounded neutral system shall be permitted 250.186 Grounding Service-Supplied Alternating-Current to be supplied from (a) or (b): Systems. a. A separately derived system (A) Systems with a Grounded Conductor at the Service b.

A multigrounded neutral system with an equipment Point. Where an ac system is grounded at any point and is pro- grounding conductor connected to the multigrounded vided with a grounded conductor at the service point, a grounded neutral conductor at the source of the single-point conductor(s) shall be installed and routed with the ungrounded grounded neutral system conductors to each service disconnecting means and shall be connected to each disconnecting means grounded conductor(s) (2) A grounding electrode shall be provided for the system. terminal or bus. A main bonding jumper shall connect the (3) A grounding electrode conductor shall connect the ground- grounded conductor(s) to each service disconnecting means’s ing electrode to the system neutral conductor. enclosure. The grounded conductor(s) shall be installed in (4) A bonding jumper shall connect the equipment ground- accordance with 250.186(A)(1) through (A)(4). The size of the ing conductor to the grounding electrode conductor. solidly grounded circuit conductor(s) shall be the larger of that

(5) An equipment grounding conductor shall be provided to determined by 250.184 or 250.186(A)(1) or (A)(2). each building, structure, and equipment enclosure. (6) A neutral conductor shall only be required where phase- Exception: Where two or more service disconnecting means to-neutral loads are supplied. are located in a single assembly listed for use as service equip- (7) The neutral conductor, where provided, shall be insulated ment, it shall be permitted to connect the grounded conductor(s) and isolated from earth except at one location. to the assembly common grounded conductor(s) terminal or bus. (8) An equipment grounding conductor shall be run with the The assembly shall include a main bonding jumper for connect- phase conductors and shall comply with (a), (b), and (c): ing the grounded conductor(s) to the assembly enclosure. a. Shall not carry continuous load (1) Sizing for a Single Raceway or Overhead Conductor. b. May be bare or insulated The grounded conductor shall not be smaller than the required c.

Shall have sufficient ampacity for fault current duty grounding electrode conductor specified in Table 250.102(C)(1) but shall not be required to be larger than the largest ungrounded (C) Multigrounded Neutral Systems. Where a multi- service-entrance conductor(s). grounded neutral system is used, the following shall apply: (2) Parallel Conductors in Two or More Raceways or Over- (1) The neutral conductor of a solidly grounded neutral system head Conductors. If the ungrounded service-entrance con- shall be permitted to be grounded at more than one point. ductors are installed in parallel in two or more raceways or as Grounding shall be permitted at one or more of the follow- overhead parallel conductors, the grounded conductors shall also ing locations: be installed in parallel. The size of the grounded conductor in each a. Transformers supplying conductors to a building or raceway or overhead shall be based on the total circular mil area of other structure the parallel ungrounded conductors in the raceway or overhead, as indicated in 250.186(A)(1), but not smaller than 1/0 AWG.

70–150 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.188 Informational Note: See 310.10(G) for grounded con- electrode of the supply system and the neutral point of the ductors connected in parallel. supply transformer or generator. (3) Delta-Connected Service. The grounded conductor of a ∆ (B) Insulated. The grounded conductor shall be insulated for 3-phase, 3-wire delta service shall have an ampacity not less the maximum neutral voltage. than that of the ungrounded conductors. Informational Note: The maximum neutral voltage in a (4) Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. Impedance 3-phase wye system is 57.7 percent of the phase-to-phase grounded neutral systems shall be installed in accordance with voltage. 250.187. ∆ (C) Grounded System Conductor Connection. The system (B) Systems Without a Grounded Conductor at the Service grounded conductor shall not be connected to ground, except Point. Where an ac system is grounded at any point and is through the grounding impedance. not provided with a grounded conductor at the service point, a (D) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Equipment ground-

supply- side bonding jumper shall be installed and routed with ing conductors shall be permitted to be bare and shall be elec- the ungrounded conductors to each service disconnecting means trically connected to the ground bus and grounding electrode and shall be connected to each disconnecting means equipment conductor. grounding conductor terminal or bus. The supply-side bond- ing jumper shall be installed in accordance with 250.186(B)(1) 250.188 Grounding of Systems Supplying Portable or through (B)(3). Mobile Equipment. Systems supplying portable or mobile equipment over 1000 volts, other than substations installed on a Exception: Where two or more service disconnecting means are temporary basis, shall comply with 250.188(A) through (F). located in a single assembly listed for use as service equipment, it shall be permitted to connect the supply-side bonding jumper (A) Portable or Mobile Equipment. Portable or mobile to the assembly common equipment grounding terminal or bus. equipment over 1000 volts shall be supplied from a system

having its neutral conductor grounded through an impedance. (1) Sizing for a Single Raceway or Overhead Conductor. Where a delta-connected system over 1000 volts is used to sup- The supply-side bonding jumper shall not be smaller than ply portable or mobile equipment, a system neutral point and the required grounding electrode conductor specified associated neutral conductor shall be derived. in Table 250.102(C)(1) but shall not be required to be larger than the largest ungrounded service-entrance conductor(s). (B) Exposed Non–Current-Carrying Metal Parts. Exposed non–current-carrying metal parts of portable or mobile equip- (2) Parallel Conductors in Two or More Raceways or ment shall be connected by an equipment grounding conductor Overhead Conductors. If the ungrounded service-entrance to the point at which the system neutral impedance is grounded. conductors are installed in parallel in two or more raceways or overhead conductors, the supply-side bonding jumper shall (C) Ground-Fault Current. The voltage developed between also be installed in parallel.

The size of the supply-side bond- the portable or mobile equipment frame and ground by the flow ing jumper in each raceway or overhead shall be based on the of maximum ground-fault current shall not exceed 100 volts. total circular mil area of the parallel ungrounded conductors (D) Ground-Fault Detection and Relaying. Ground-fault in the raceway or overhead, as indicated in 250.186(A)(1), but detection and relaying shall be provided to automatically de- not smaller than 1/0 AWG. energize any component of a system over 1000 volts that has (3) Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. Impedance developed a ground fault. The continuity of the equipment grounded neutral systems shall be installed in accordance with grounding conductor shall be continuously monitored so as 250.187. to automatically de-energize the circuit of the system over 1000 volts to the portable or mobile equipment upon loss of ∆ 250.187 Impedance Grounded Systems. Impedance groun- continuity of the equipment grounding conductor. ded systems in which a grounding impedance, usually a resis-

tor, limits the ground-fault current shall be permitted where all (E) Isolation. The grounding electrode to which the por- of the following conditions are met: table or mobile equipment system neutral impedance is con- nected shall be isolated from and separated in the ground (1) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that by at least 6.0 m (20 ft) from any other system or equipment only qualified persons service the installation. grounding electrode, and there shall be no direct connection (2) Ground detectors are installed on the system. between the grounding electrodes, such as buried pipe and (3) Line-to-neutral loads are not served. fence, and so forth. Impedance grounded systems shall comply with 250.187(A) (F) Trailing Cable and Couplers. Trailing cable and cou- through (D). plers of systems over 1000 volts for interconnection of por- (A) Location. The grounding impedance shall be inserted table or mobile equipment shall meet the requirements of in the grounding electrode conductor between the grounding Part III of Article 400 for cables and 490.55 for couplers.

2022 California Electrical Code 70–151

250.190 ARTICLE 250 — GROUNDING AND BONDING 250.190 Grounding of Equipment. Informational Note: For further information on outdoor ac substation grounding, see IEEE 80-2013, IEEE (A) Equipment Grounding. All non–current-carrying metal Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding. parts of fixed, portable, and mobile equipment and associated fences, housings, enclosures, and supporting structures shall 250.194 Grounding and Bonding of Fences and Other Metal be grounded. Structures. Metallic fences enclosing, and other metal structures in or surrounding, a substation with exposed electri- Exception: Where isolated from ground and located such that cal conductors and equipment shall be grounded and bonded any person in contact with ground cannot contact such metal to limit step, touch, and transfer voltages. parts when the equipment is energized, the metal parts shall not be required to be grounded. (A) Metal Fences. Where metal fences are located within 5 m (16 ft) of the exposed electrical conductors or equipment, the Informational Note: See 250.110, Exception No. 2, for

fence shall be bonded to the grounding electrode system with pole-mounted distribution apparatus. wire-type bonding jumpers as follows: (B) Grounding Electrode Conductor. If a grounding elec- (1) Bonding jumpers shall be installed at each fence corner trode conductor connects non–current-carrying metal parts to and at maximum 50 m (160 ft) intervals along the fence. ground, the grounding electrode conductor shall be sized in (2) Where bare overhead conductors cross the fence, bonding accordance with Table 250.66, based on the size of the largest jumpers shall be installed on each side of the crossing. ungrounded service, feeder, or branch-circuit conductors sup- (3) Gates shall be bonded to the gate support post, and each plying the equipment. The grounding electrode conductor shall gate support post shall be bonded to the grounding electrode not be smaller than 6 AWG copper or 4 AWG aluminum. system. (C) Equipment Grounding Conductor. Equipment ground- (4) Any gate or other opening in the fence shall be bonded ing conductors shall comply with 250.190(C)(1) through (C)(3).

across the opening by a buried bonding jumper. (5) The grounding grid or grounding electrode systems shall (1) General. Equipment grounding conductors that are not be extended to cover the swing of all gates. an integral part of a cable assembly shall not be smaller than (6) The barbed wire strands above the fence shall be bonded 6 AWG copper or 4 AWG aluminum. to the grounding electrode system. (2) Shielded Cables. The metallic insulation shield encircling the current carrying conductors shall be permitted to be used Alternate designs performed under engineering supervision as an equipment grounding conductor, if it is rated for clearing shall be permitted for grounding or bonding of metal fences. time of ground-fault current protective device operation with- Informational Note No. 1: A nonconducting fence or sec- out damaging the metallic shield. The metallic tape insulation tion may provide isolation for transfer of voltage to other shield and drain wire insulation shield shall not be used as an areas. equipment grounding conductor for solidly grounded systems.

Informational Note No. 2: See IEEE 80-2013, IEEE (3) Sizing. Equipment grounding conductors shall be sized Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding, for design in accordance with Table 250.122 based on the current rating of and installation of fence grounding. the fuse or the overcurrent setting of the protective relay. (B) Metal Structures. All exposed conductive metal struc- Informational Note: The overcurrent rating for a circuit tures, including guy wires within 2.5 m (8 ft) vertically or 5 m breaker is the combination of the current transformer ratio (16 ft) horizontally of exposed conductors or equipment and and the current pickup setting of the protective relay. subject to contact by persons, shall be bonded to the grounding electrode systems in the area. 250.191 Grounding System at Alternating-Current Sub- • stations. For ac substations, the grounding system shall be in accordance with Part III of Article 250. 70–152 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 312 — CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC-

Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 2022 California Electrical Code 70–153

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 314 — OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES; FITTINGS; AND HANDHOLE ENCLOSURES HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 320 — ARMORED CABLE: TYPE AC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 322 — FLAT CABLE ASSEMBLIES: TYPE FC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 324 — FLAT CONDUCTOR CABLE: TYPE FCC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC-

Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 70–154 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 326 — INTEGRATED GAS SPACER CABLE: TYPE IGS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 330 — METAL-CLAD CABLE: TYPE MC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 332 — MINERAL-INSULATED, METAL-SHEATHED CABLE: TYPE MI HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 334 — NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE: TYPES NM AND NMC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5

Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended X X (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 334.10 (Note) X X 2022 California Electrical Code 70–155

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 336 — POWER AND CONTROL TRAY CABLE: TYPE TC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 337 — TYPE P CABLE HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 338 — SERVICE-ENTRANCE CABLE: TYPES SE AND USE HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 340 — UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE: TYPE UF HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5

Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 70–156 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 342 — INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT: TYPE IMC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 344 — RIGID METAL CONDUIT: TYPE RMC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 348 — FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: TYPE FMC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 350 — LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: TYPE LFMC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5

Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 2022 California Electrical Code 70–157

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 352— RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT: TYPE PVC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 353 — HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONDUIT: TYPE HDPE CONDUIT HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 354 — NONMETALLIC UNDERGROUND CONDUIT WITH CONDUCTORS: TYPE NUCC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 355 — REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN CONDUIT: TYPE RTRC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC-

Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 70–158 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 356 — LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: TYPE LFNC HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 358 — ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING: TYPE EMT HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 360 — FLEXIBLE METALLIC TUBING: TYPE FMT HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 362 — ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC TUBING: TYPE ENT HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5

Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 2022 California Electrical Code 70–159

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 366 — AUXILLARY GUTTERS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 368 — BUSWAYS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 370 — CABLEBUS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 372 — CELLULAR CONCRETE FLOOR RACEWAYS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended

(amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 70–160 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 374 — CELLULAR METAL FLOOR RACEWAYS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 376 — METAL WIREWAYS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 378 — NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 380 — MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended

(amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 2022 California Electrical Code 70–161

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 382 — NONMETALLIC EXTENSIONS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 384 — STRUT-TYPE CHANNEL RACEWAY HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 386 — SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 388 — SURFACE NONMETALLIC RACEWAYS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X

Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 70–162 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 390 — UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 392 — CABLE TRAYS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 393 — LOW VOLTAGE SUSPENDED CEILING POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 394 — CONCEALED KNOB-AND-TUBE WIRING HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X

Adopt entire Article as amended (amended X X sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 394.12 Exceptions X X 2022 California Electrical Code 70–163

CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 396 — MESSENGER-SUPPORTED WIRING HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 398 — OPEN WIRING ON INSULATORS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 399 — OUTDOOR OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS OVER 1000 VOLTS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 70–164 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS CHAPTER 3 Chapter 3 Wiring Methods and Materials Exception: Individual conductors shall be permitted where ARTICLE 300 installed as separate overhead conductors in accordance with General Requirements for Wiring 225.6. Methods and Materials (B) Conductors of the Same Circuit. All conductors of the same circuit and, where used, the grounded conductor and all equipment grounding conductors and bonding conductors Part I. General Requirements shall be contained within the same raceway, auxiliary gut- 300.1 Scope. ter, cable tray, cablebus assembly, trench, cable, or cord, unless otherwise permitted in accordance with 300.3(B)(1) through (A) All Wiring Installations. This article covers general (B)(4). requirements for wiring methods and materials for all wiring installations unless modified by other articles in Chapter 3. ∆ (1) Paralleled Installations. Conductors shall be permit- ted to be run in parallel in accordance with the provisions of (B) Integral Parts of Equipment. The provisions of this 310.10(G).

The requirement to run all circuit conductors within article are not intended to apply to the conductors that form an the same raceway, auxiliary gutter, cable tray, trench, cable, integral part of equipment, such as motors, controllers, motor or cord shall apply separately to each portion of the paralleled control centers, or factory-assembled control equipment or listed installation, and the equipment grounding conductors shall com- utilization equipment. ply with 250.122. Connections, taps, or extensions made from (C) Metric Designators and Trade Sizes. Metric designators paralleled conductors shall connect to all conductors of the par- and trade sizes for conduit, tubing, and associated fittings and alleled set, grounded and ungrounded, as applicable. Parallel accessories shall be as designated in Table 300.1(C). runs in cable trays shall comply with 392.20(C). 300.2 Limitations. Exception: Conductors installed in nonmetallic raceways run underground shall be permitted to be arranged as isolated (A) Voltage. Wiring methods specified in Chapter 3 shall be

phase, neutral, and grounded conductor installations. The race- used for 1000 volts, nominal, or less where not specifically lim- ways shall be installed in close proximity, and the isolated ited in some section of Chapter 3. They shall be permitted for phase, neutral, and grounded conductors shall comply with over 1000 volts, nominal, where specifically permitted else- 300.20(B). where in this Code. ∆ (2) Grounding and Bonding Conductors. Equipment ground- (B) Temperature. Temperature limitation of conductors shall ing conductors shall be permitted to be installed outside a race- be in accordance with 310.14(A)(3). way or cable assembly where in accordance with the provisions 300.3 Conductors. of 250.130(C) for certain existing installations or in accordance (A) Single Conductors. Single conductors specified in with 250.134, Exception No. 2, for dc circuits. Equipment bond- Table 310.4(A) shall only be installed where part of a recognized ing conductors shall be permitted to be installed on the outside wiring method of Chapter 3. of raceways in accordance with 250.102(E).

∆ (3) Nonferrous Wiring Methods. Conductors in wiring meth- Table 300.1(C) Metric Designators and Trade Sizes ods with a nonmetallic or other nonmagnetic sheath, where run in different raceways, auxiliary gutters, cable trays, trenches, Metric Designator Trade Size cables, or cords, shall comply with 300.20(B). Conductors in 3 single-conductor Type MI cable with a nonmagnetic sheath 12 ⁄8 16 1⁄2 shall comply with 332.31. Conductors of single-conductor Type 21 3⁄4 MC cable with a nonmagnetic sheath shall comply with 330.31, 27 1 330.116, and 300.20(B). 35 1 1⁄4 41 11⁄2 (4) Column-Width Panelboard Enclosures. Where an aux- 53 2 iliary gutter runs between a column-width panelboard and a pull 1 63 2 ⁄2 box, and the pull box includes neutral terminations, the neutral 78 3 conductors of circuits supplied from the panelboard shall be 91 31⁄2 permitted to originate in the pull box. 103 4 129 5 (C) Conductors of Different Systems. 155 6 (1) 1000 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Conductors of ac and dc Note: The metric designators and trade sizes are for identification purposes

circuits, rated 1000 volts, nominal, or less, shall be permitted only and are not actual dimensions. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–165

300.4 ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS to occupy the same equipment wiring enclosure, cable, or Exception No. 1: Steel plates shall not be required to protect raceway. All conductors shall have an insulation rating equal rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetal- to at least the maximum circuit voltage applied to any conduc- lic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. tor within the enclosure, cable, or raceway. Exception No. 2: A listed and marked steel plate less than Secondary wiring to electric-discharge lamps of 1000 volts or 1.6 mm (1 ⁄16 in.) thick that provides equal or better protection less, if insulated for the secondary voltage involved, shall be against nail or screw penetration shall be permitted. permitted to occupy the same luminaire, sign, or outline light- (2) Notches in Wood. Where there is no objection because of ing enclosure as the branch-circuit conductors. weakening the building structure, in both exposed and concealed Informational Note No.

1: See 725.136(A) for Class 2 locations, cables or raceways shall be permitted to be laid in and Class 3 circuit conductors. notches in wood studs, joists, rafters, or other wood members where the cable or raceway at those points is protected against Informational Note No. 2: See 690.31(B) for photovoltaic nails or screws by a steel plate at least 1.6 mm ( 1⁄16 in.) thick, and source and output circuits. of appropriate length and width, installed to cover the area of (2) Over 1000 Volts, Nominal. Conductors of circuits rated the wiring. The steel plate shall be installed before the building over 1000 volts, nominal, shall not occupy the same equipment finish is applied. wiring enclosure, cable, or raceway with conductors of circuits Exception No. 1: Steel plates shall not be required to protect rated 1000 volts, nominal, or less unless otherwise permitted in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetal- 300.3(C)(2)(a) through 300.3(C)(2)(d). lic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. (a) Primary leads of electric-discharge lamp ballasts insu-

lated for the primary voltage of the ballast, where contained Exception No. 2: A listed and marked steel plate less than 1.6 mm within the individual wiring enclosure, shall be permitted to (1⁄16 in.) thick that provides equal or better protection against nail occupy the same luminaire, sign, or outline lighting enclosure or screw penetration shall be permitted. as the branch-circuit conductors. (B) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables and Electrical Nonmetal- (b) Excitation, control, relay, and ammeter conductors used lic Tubing Through Metal Framing Members. in connection with any individual motor or starter shall be permitted to occupy the same enclosure as the motor-circuit (1) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable. In both exposed and con- conductors. cealed locations where nonmetallic-sheathed cables pass (c) In motors, transformers, switchgear, switchboards, con- through either factory- or field-punched, cut, or drilled slots or trol assemblies, and similar equipment, conductors of different holes in metal members, the cable shall be protected by listed voltage ratings shall be permitted.

bushings or listed grommets covering all metal edges that are (d) In manholes, if the conductors of each system are per- securely fastened in the opening prior to installation of the cable. manently and effectively separated from the conductors of the (2) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable and Electrical Nonmetal- other systems and securely fastened to racks, insulators, or other lic Tubing. Where nails or screws are likely to penetrate non- approved supports, conductors of different voltage ratings shall metallic-sheathed cable or electrical nonmetallic tubing, a steel be permitted. 1 sleeve, steel plate, or steel clip not less than 1.6 mm ( ⁄16 in.) in Conductors having nonshielded insulation and operating at thickness shall be used to protect the cable or tubing. different voltage levels shall not occupy the same enclosure, Exception: A listed and marked steel plate less than 1.6 mm cable, or raceway. 1 ( ⁄16 in.) thick that provides equal or better protection against nail 300.4 Protection Against Physical Damage. Where subject or screw penetration shall be permitted.

to physical damage, conductors, raceways, and cables shall be (C) Cables Through Spaces Behind Panels Designed to protected. Allow Access. Cables or raceway-type wiring methods, installed (A) Cables and Raceways Through Wood Members. behind panels designed to allow access, shall be supported according to their applicable articles. (1) Bored Holes. In both exposed and concealed locations, where a cable- or raceway-type wiring method is installed (D) Cables and Raceways Parallel to Framing Members and through bored holes in joists, rafters, or wood members, holes Furring Strips. In both exposed and concealed locations, where shall be bored so that the edge of the hole is not less than a cable- or raceway-type wiring method is installed parallel to 32 mm (11⁄4 in.) from the nearest edge of the wood member. framing members, such as joists, rafters, or studs, or is installed Where this distance cannot be maintained, the cable or race- parallel to furring strips, the cable or raceway shall be installed

way shall be protected from penetration by screws or nails by and supported so that the nearest outside surface of the cable or 1 a steel plate(s) or bushing(s), at least 1.6 mm (1⁄16 in.) thick, raceway is not less than 32 mm (1 ⁄4 in.) from the nearest edge and of appropriate length and width installed to cover the area of the framing member or furring strips where nails or screws of the wiring. are likely to penetrate. Where this distance cannot be maintained, 70–166 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS 300.5 the cable or raceway shall be protected from penetration by nails (3) Separation from the fitting or raceway using an identified or screws by a steel plate, sleeve, or equivalent at least 1.6 mm insulating material that is securely fastened in place (1⁄16 in.) thick. (4) Threaded hubs or bosses that are an integral part of a cabi- net, box, enclosure, or raceway providing a smoothly Exception No. 1: Steel plates, sleeves, or the equivalent shall not rounded or flared entry for conductors be required to protect rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. Conduit bushings constructed wholly of insulating material shall not be used to secure a fitting or raceway. The insulating Exception No. 2: For concealed work in finished buildings, or fitting or insulating material shall have a temperature rating finished panels for prefabricated buildings where such support- not less than the insulation temperature rating of the installed

ing is impracticable, it shall be permissible to fish the cables conductors. between access points. (H) Structural Joints. A listed expansion/deflection fitting Exception No. 3: A listed and marked steel plate less than 1.6 mm or other approved means shall be used where a raceway crosses (1⁄16 in.) thick that provides equal or better protection against nail a structural joint intended for expansion, contraction or deflec- or screw penetration shall be permitted. tion, used in buildings, bridges, parking garages, or other (E) Cables, Raceways, or Boxes Installed in or Under structures. Roof Decking. A cable, raceway, or box, installed in exposed 300.5 Underground Installations. or concealed locations under metal-corrugated sheet roof decking, shall be installed and supported so there is not less (A) Minimum Cover Requirements. Direct-buried cable, than 38 mm (11 ⁄ 2 in.) measured from the lowest surface of the conduit, or other raceways shall be installed to meet the mini- roof decking to the top of the cable, raceway, or box. A cable, mum cover requirements of Table 300.5.

raceway, or box shall not be installed in concealed locations in (B) Wet Locations. The interior of enclosures or raceways metal-corrugated, sheet decking–type roof. installed underground shall be considered to be a wet location. Informational Note: Roof decking material is often Insulated conductors and cables installed in these enclosures repaired or replaced after the initial raceway or cabling and or raceways in underground installations shall comply with roofing installation and may be penetrated by the screws 310.10(C). or other mechanical devices designed to provide “hold (C) Underground Cables and Conductors Under Build- down” strength of the waterproof membrane or roof ings. Underground cable and conductors installed under a insulating material. building shall be in a raceway. Exception: Rigid metal conduit and intermediate metal con- Exception No. 1: Type MI cable shall be permitted under a duit shall not be required to comply with 300.4(E). building without installation in a raceway where embedded in (F) Cables and Raceways Installed in Shallow Grooves.

concrete, fill, or other masonry in accordance with 332.10(6) Cable- or raceway-type wiring methods installed in a groove, to or in underground runs where suitably protected against be covered by wallboard, siding, paneling, carpeting, or similar physical damage and corrosive conditions in accordance with 1 finish, shall be protected by 1.6 mm ( ⁄16 in.) thick steel plate, 332.10(10). 1 sleeve, or equivalent or by not less than 32-mm (1 ⁄4 -in.) free Exception No. 2: Type MC cable listed for direct burial or con- space for the full length of the groove in which the cable or race- crete encasement shall be permitted under a building without way is installed. installation in a raceway in accordance with 330.10(A)(5) and Exception No. 1: Steel plates, sleeves, or the equivalent shall in wet locations in accordance with 330.10(A)(11). not be required to protect rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal (D) Protection from Damage. Direct-buried conductors and conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. cables shall be protected from damage in accordance with

Exception No. 2: A listed and marked steel plate less than 300.5(D)(1) through (D)(4). 1 1.6 mm ( ⁄16 in.) thick that provides equal or better protection (1) Emerging from Grade. Direct-buried conductors and against nail or screw penetration shall be permitted. cables emerging from grade and specified in columns 1 and 4 of ∆ (G) Fittings. Where raceways contain 4 AWG or larger insu- Table 300.5 shall be protected by enclosures or raceways extend- lated circuit conductors, and these conductors enter a cabinet, ing from the minimum cover distance below grade required by a box, an enclosure, or a raceway, the conductors shall be pro- 300.5(A) to a point at least 2.5 m (8 ft) above finished grade. tected in accordance with any of the following: In no case shall the protection be required to exceed 450 mm (18 in.) below finished grade. (1) An identified fitting providing a smoothly rounded insu- lating surface (2) Conductors Entering Buildings. Conductors entering a (2) A listed metal fitting that has smoothly rounded edges building shall be protected to the point of entrance.

2022 California Electrical Code 70–167

300.5 ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS Table 300.5 Minimum Cover Requirements, 0 to 1000 Volts, Nominal, Burial in Millimeters (Inches) Type of Wiring Method or Circuit Column 5 Column 4 Circuits for Residential Branch Control of Column 3 Circuits Rated Irrigation and Nonmetallic 120 Volts or Less Landscape Lighting Raceways Listed with GFCI Limited to Not Column 2 for Direct Burial Protection and More Than 30 Volts Column 1 Rigid Metal Without Concrete Maximum and Installed with Direct Burial Conduit or Encasement or Overcurrent Type UF or in Cables or Intermediate Other Approved Protection of Other Identified Conductors Metal Conduit Raceways 20 Amperes Cable or Raceway Location of Wiring Method or Circuit mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. All locations not specified 600 24 150 6 450 18 300 12 150a,b 6a,b below In trench below 50 mm (2 in.) 450 18 150 6 300 12 150 6 150 6 thick concrete or equivalent Under a building 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (in raceway or (in raceway or Type (in raceway or Type MC or MC or Type MI Type MC or Type

Type MI cable cable identified MI cable identified identified for for direct burial) for direct burial) direct burial) Under minimum of 102 mm 450 18 100 4 100 4 150 6 150 6 (4 in.) thick concrete exterior (direct burial) (direct burial) slab with no vehicular traffic 100 4 100 4 and the slab extending not less (in raceway) (in raceway) than 152 mm (6 in.) beyond the underground installation Under streets, highways, roads, 600 24 600 24 600 24 600 24 600 24 alleys, driveways, and parking lots One- and two-family dwelling 450 18 450 18 450 18 300 12 450 18 driveways and outdoor parking areas, and used only for dwelling-related purposes In or under airport runways, 450 18 450 18 450 18 450 18 450 18 including adjacent areas where trespassing prohibited aA lesser depth shall be permitted where specified in the installation instructions of a listed low-voltage lighting system. bA depth of 150 mm (6 in.) shall be permitted for pool, spa, and fountain lighting, installed in a nonmetallic raceway, limited to not more than 30 volts where part of a listed low-voltage lighting system. Notes:

1. Cover is defined as the shortest distance in mm (in.) measured between a point on the top surface of any direct-buried conductor, cable, conduit, or other raceway and the top surface of finished grade, concrete, or similar cover. 2. Raceways approved for burial only where concrete encased shall require concrete envelope not less than 50 mm (2 in.) thick. 3. Lesser depths shall be permitted where cables and conductors rise for terminations or splices or where access is otherwise required. 4. Where one of the wiring method types listed in Columns 1 through 3 is used for one of the circuit types in Columns 4 and 5, the shallowest depth of burial shall be permitted. 5. Where solid rock prevents compliance with the cover depths specified in this table, the wiring shall be installed in a metal raceway, or a nonmetallic raceway permitted for direct burial. The raceways shall be covered by a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete extending down to rock. 70–168 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS 300.6 (3) Service Conductors. Underground service conductors conductors in the circuit, including equipment grounding that are not encased in concrete and that are buried 450 mm conductors. (18 in.) or more below grade shall have their location identified Exception No. 2: Isolated phase, polarity, grounded conductor, by a warning ribbon that is placed in the trench at least 300 mm and equipment grounding and bonding conductor installations (12 in.) above the underground installation. shall be permitted in nonmetallic raceways or cables with a (4) Enclosure or Raceway Damage. Where the enclosure or nonmetallic covering or nonmagnetic sheath in close proximity raceway is subject to physical damage, the conductors shall be where conductors are paralleled as permitted in 310.10(G), and installed in electrical metallic tubing, rigid metal conduit, inter- where the conditions of 300.20(B) are met. mediate metal conduit, RTRC-XW, Schedule 80 PVC conduit, (J) Earth Movement. Where direct-buried conductors, or equivalent.

raceways, or cables are subject to movement by settlement or (E) Splices and Taps. Direct-buried conductors or cables shall frost, direct-buried conductors, raceways, or cables shall be be permitted to be spliced or tapped without the use of splice arranged so as to prevent damage to the enclosed conductors boxes. The splices or taps shall be made in accordance with or to equipment connected to the raceways. 110.14(B). Informational Note: This section recognizes “S” loops in (F) Backfill. Backfill that contains large rocks, paving mate- underground direct burial cables and conductors to race- rials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, or corrosive way transitions, expansion fittings in raceway risers to material shall not be placed in an excavation where materials fixed equipment, and, generally, the provision of flexible may damage raceways, cables, conductors, or other substruc- connections to equipment subject to settlement or frost tures or prevent adequate compaction of fill or contribute to cor- heaves. rosion of raceways, cables, or other substructures.

(K) Directional Boring. Cables or raceways installed using Where necessary to prevent physical damage to the raceway, directional boring equipment shall be approved for the purpose. cable, or conductor, protection shall be provided in the form of 300.6 Protection Against Corrosion and Deterioration. granular or selected material, suitable running boards, suitable Raceways, cable trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable armor, sleeves, or other approved means. boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, fittings, (G) Raceway Seals. Conduits or raceways through which mois- supports, and support hardware shall be of materials suitable ture may contact live parts shall be sealed or plugged at either or for the environment in which they are to be installed. both ends. Spare or unused raceways shall also be sealed. Seal- (A) Ferrous Metal Equipment. Ferrous metal raceways, cable ants shall be identified for use with the cable insulation, conduc- trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable armor, boxes, cable tor insulation, bare conductor, shield, or other components.

sheathing, cabinets, metal elbows, couplings, nipples, fittings, Informational Note: Presence of hazardous gases or supports, and support hardware shall be suitably protected vapors may also necessitate sealing of underground con- against corrosion inside and outside (except threads at joints) duits or raceways entering buildings. by a coating of approved corrosion-resistant material. Where cor- rosion protection is necessary and the conduit is threaded in the (H) Bushing. A bushing, or terminal fitting, with an integral field, the threads shall be coated with an approved electrically bushed opening shall be used at the end of a conduit or other conductive, corrosion-resistant compound. raceway that terminates underground where the conductors or cables emerge as a direct burial wiring method. A seal incorpo- Informational Note: Field-cut threads are those threads rating the physical protection characteristics of a bushing shall that are cut in conduit, elbows, or nipples anywhere be permitted to be used in lieu of a bushing. other than at the factory where the product is listed.

(I) Conductors of the Same Circuit. All conductors of the Exception: Stainless steel shall not be required to have protec- same circuit and, where used, the grounded conductor and all tive coatings. equipment grounding conductors shall be installed in the same (1) Protected from Corrosion Solely by Enamel. Where pro- raceway or cable or shall be installed in close proximity in the tected from corrosion solely by enamel, ferrous metal raceways, same trench. cable trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable armor, boxes, Exception No. 1: Conductors shall be permitted to be installed cable sheathing, cabinets, metal elbows, couplings, nipples, fit- in parallel in raceways, multiconductor cables, or direct-buried tings, supports, and support hardware shall not be used outdoors single conductor cables. Each raceway or multiconductor cable or in wet locations as described in 300.6(D). shall contain all conductors of the same circuit, including equip- (2) Organic Coatings on Boxes or Cabinets. Where boxes ment grounding conductors. Each direct-buried single conduc-

or cabinets have an approved system of organic coatings and tor cable shall be located in close proximity in the trench to are marked “Raintight,” “Rainproof,” or “Outdoor Type,” they the other single conductor cables in the same parallel set of shall be permitted outdoors. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–169

300.7 ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS (3) In Concrete or in Direct Contact with the Earth. Ferrous or where passing from the interior to the exterior of a building, metal raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, the raceway or sleeve shall be sealed to prevent the circulation elbows, couplings, nipples, fittings, supports, and support hard- of warm air to a colder section of the raceway or sleeve. Seal- ware shall be permitted to be installed in concrete or in direct ants shall be identified for use with cable insulation, conductor contact with the earth, or in areas subject to severe corrosive influ- insulation, a bare conductor, a shield, or other components. An ences where made of material approved for the condition, or where explosionproof seal shall not be required for this purpose. provided with corrosion protection approved for the condition. (B) Expansion, Expansion-Deflection, and Deflection Fit- (B) Aluminum Metal Equipment. Aluminum raceways, cable tings. Raceways shall be provided with expansion, expansion-

trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable armor, boxes, cable deflection, or deflection fittings where necessary to compensate sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, nipples, fittings, sup- for thermal expansion, deflection, and contraction. ports, and support hardware embedded or encased in concrete or Informational Note: Table 352.44 and Table 355.44 in direct contact with the earth shall be provided with supplemen- provide the expansion information for polyvinyl chlo- tary corrosion protection. ride (PVC) and for reinforced thermosetting resin conduit ∆ (C) Nonmetallic Equipment. Nonmetallic raceways, cable (RTRC), respectively. A nominal number for steel conduit trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, boxes, cables with a nonmetal- can be determined by multiplying the expansion length lic outer jacket and internal metal armor or jacket, cable sheath- in Table 352.44 by 0.20. The coefficient of expansion for ing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, nipples, fittings, supports, and steel electrical metallic tubing, intermediate metal conduit,

support hardware shall be made of material approved for the and rigid metal conduit is 1.170 × 10 –5 (0.0000117 mm condition and shall comply with 300.6(C)(1) and (C)(2) as appli- per mm of conduit for each °C in temperature change) cable to the specific installation. [0.650 × 10–5 (0.0000065 in. per inch of conduit for each °F in temperature change)]. (1) Exposed to Sunlight. Where exposed to sunlight, the mate- A nominal number for aluminum conduit and alumi- rials shall be listed as sunlight resistant or shall be identified as num electrical metallic tubing can be determined by mul- sunlight resistant. tiplying the expansion length in Table 352.44 by 0.40. The (2) Chemical Exposure. Where subject to exposure to chemi- coefficient of expansion for aluminum electrical metallic cal solvents, vapors, splashing, or immersion, materials or coat- tubing and aluminum rigid metal conduit is 2.34 × 10 –5 ings shall either be inherently resistant to chemicals based on (0.0000234 mm per mm of conduit for each °C in tem- their listing or be identified for the specific chemical reagent.

perature change) [1.30 × 10 –5 (0.000013 in. per inch of (D) Indoor Wet Locations. In portions of dairy processing conduit for each °F in temperature change)]. facilities, laundries, canneries, and other indoor wet locations, 300.8 Installation of Conductors with Other Systems. Race- and in locations where walls are frequently washed or where ways or cable trays containing electrical conductors shall not there are surfaces of absorbent materials, such as damp paper contain any pipe, tube, or equal for steam, water, air, gas, drain- or wood, the entire wiring system, where installed exposed, age, or any service other than electrical. including all boxes, fittings, raceways, and cable used there- 300.9 Raceways in Wet Locations Abovegrade. Where race- with, shall be mounted so that there is at least a 6-mm ( 1⁄4-in.) ways are installed in wet locations abovegrade, the interior of airspace between it and the wall or supporting surface. these raceways shall be considered to be a wet location. Insu-

Exception: Nonmetallic raceways, boxes, and fittings shall be lated conductors and cables installed in raceways in wet loca- permitted to be installed without the airspace on a concrete, tions abovegrade shall comply with 310.10(C). masonry, tile, or similar surface. 300.10 Electrical Continuity of Metal Raceways and Enclo- Informational Note: In general, areas where acids and sures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and other metal enclo- alkali chemicals are handled and stored may present such sures for conductors shall be metallically joined together into corrosive conditions, particularly when wet or damp. a continuous electrical conductor and shall be connected to all Severe corrosive conditions may also be present in portions boxes, fittings, and cabinets so as to provide effective electrical of meatpacking plants, tanneries, glue houses, and some continuity. Unless specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code, stables; in installations immediately adjacent to a seashore raceways and cable assemblies shall be mechanically secured

and swimming pool areas; in areas where chemical deic- to boxes, fittings, cabinets, and other enclosures. ers are used; and in storage cellars or rooms for hides, cas- Exception No. 1: Short sections of raceways used to provide ings, fertilizer, salt, and bulk chemicals. support or protection of cable assemblies from physical damage 300.7 Raceways Exposed to Different Temperatures. shall not be required to be made electrically continuous. (A) Sealing. Where portions of a raceway or sleeve are known Exception No. 2: Equipment enclosures to be isolated, as per- to be subjected to different temperatures, and where condensation mitted by 250.96(B), shall not be required to be metallically is known to be a problem, as in cold storage areas of buildings joined to the metal raceway. 70–170 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS 300.15 300.11 Securing and Supporting. (D) Cables Not Used as Means of Support. Cable wiring methods shall not be used as a means of support for other cables, (A) Secured in Place. Raceways, cable assemblies, boxes, cab- raceways, or nonelectrical equipment. inets, and fittings shall be securely fastened in place. 300.12 Mechanical Continuity — Raceways and Cables. (B) Wiring Systems Installed Above Suspended Ceilings. Raceways, cable armors, and cable sheaths shall be continu- Support wires that do not provide secure support shall not be per- ous between cabinets, boxes, fittings, or other enclosures or mitted as the sole support. Support wires and associated fittings outlets. that provide secure support and that are installed in addition to the ceiling grid support wires shall be permitted as the sole Exception No. 1: Short sections of raceways used to provide support. Where independent support wires are used, they shall support or protection of cable assemblies from physical damage be secured at both ends.

Cables and raceways shall not be sup- shall not be required to be mechanically continuous. ported by ceiling grids. Exception No. 2: Raceways and cables installed into the bot- ∆ (1) Fire-Rated Assemblies. Wiring located within the cavity tom of open bottom equipment, such as switchboards, motor of a fire-rated floor–ceiling or roof–ceiling assembly shall not control centers, and floor or pad-mounted transformers, shall be secured to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly, including not be required to be mechanically secured to the equipment. the ceiling support wires. An independent means of secure sup- 300.13 Mechanical and Electrical port shall be provided and shall be permitted to be attached to Continuity — Conductors. the assembly. Where independent support wires are used, they shall be distinguishable by color, tagging, or other effective (A) General. Conductors in raceways shall be continuous means from those that are part of the fire-rated design. between outlets, boxes, devices, and so forth. There shall be no splice or tap within a raceway unless permitted by 300.15,

Exception: The ceiling support system shall be permitted to 368.56(A), 376.56, 378.56, 384.56, 386.56, 388.56, or 390.56. support wiring and equipment that have been tested as part of the fire-rated assembly. (B) Device Removal. In multiwire branch circuits, the conti- nuity of a grounded conductor shall not depend on device con- Informational Note: One method of determining fire nections such as lampholders, receptacles, and so forth, where rating is testing in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E119- the removal of such devices would interrupt the continuity. 18b, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Con- struction and Materials. 300.14 Length of Free Conductors at Outlets, Junctions, and Switch Points. At least 150 mm (6 in.) of free conductor, mea- (2) Non–Fire-Rated Assemblies. Wiring located within the sured from the point in the box where it emerges from its raceway cavity of a non–fire-rated floor–ceiling or roof–ceiling assem- or cable sheath, shall be left at each outlet, junction, and switch bly shall not be secured to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly,

point for splices or the connection of luminaires or devices. including the ceiling support wires. An independent means of Where the opening to an outlet, junction, or switch point is less secure support shall be provided and shall be permitted to be than 200 mm (8 in.) in any dimension, each conductor shall be attached to the assembly. Where independent support wires are long enough to extend at least 75 mm (3 in.) outside the opening. used, they shall be distinguishable by color, tagging, or other effective means. Exception: Conductors that are not spliced or terminated at the outlet, junction, or switch point shall not be required to comply Exception: The ceiling support system shall be permitted to with 300.14. support branch-circuit wiring and associated equipment where installed in accordance with the ceiling system manu- 300.15 Boxes, Conduit Bodies, or Fittings — Where Required. facturer’s instructions. A box shall be installed at each outlet and switch point for con- cealed knob-and-tube wiring. (C) Raceways Used as Means of Support. Raceways

shall be used only as a means of support for other raceways, Fittings and connectors shall be used only with the specific cables, or nonelectrical equipment under any of the following wiring methods for which they are designed and listed. conditions: Where the wiring method is conduit, tubing, Type AC cable, (1) Where the raceway or means of support is identified as a Type MC cable, Type MI cable, nonmetallic-sheathed cable, or means of support other cables, a box or conduit body shall be installed at each (2) Where the raceway contains power supply conductors for conductor splice point, outlet point, switch point, junction point, electrically controlled equipment and is used to support termination point, or pull point, unless otherwise permitted in Class 2 circuit conductors or cables that are solely for the 300.15(A) through (L). purpose of connection to the equipment control circuits (A) Wiring Methods with Interior Access. A box or conduit (3) Where the raceway is used to support boxes or conduit bod- body shall not be required for each splice, junction, switch, pull,

ies in accordance with 314.23 or to support luminaires in termination, or outlet points in wiring methods with removable accordance with 410.36(E) covers, such as wireways, multioutlet assemblies, auxiliary 2022 California Electrical Code 70–171

300.16 ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS gutters, and surface raceways. The covers shall be accessible conductor shall be used wherever a change is made from con- after installation. duit, electrical metallic tubing, electrical nonmetallic tubing, nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type AC cable, Type MC cable, (B) Equipment. An integral junction box or wiring compart- or mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable and surface raceway ment as part of approved equipment shall be permitted in lieu wiring to open wiring or to concealed knob-and-tube wiring. of a box. A fitting used for this purpose shall contain no taps or splices (C) Protection. A box or conduit body shall not be required and shall not be used at luminaire outlets. A conduit body used where cables enter or exit from conduit or tubing that is used for this purpose shall contain no taps or splices, unless it com- to provide cable support or protection against physical damage. plies with 314.16(C)(2). A fitting shall be provided on the end(s) of the conduit or tubing (B) Bushing.

A bushing shall be permitted in lieu of a box or to protect the cable from abrasion. terminal where the conductors emerge from a raceway and enter (D) Type MI Cable. A box or conduit body shall not be or terminate at equipment, such as open switchboards, unen- required where accessible fittings are used for straight-through closed control equipment, or similar equipment. The bushing splices in mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable. shall be of the insulating type for other than lead-sheathed (E) Integral Enclosure. A wiring device with integral enclo- conductors. sure identified for the use, having brackets that securely fas- 300.17 Number and Size of Conductors in Raceway. The ten the device to walls or ceilings of conventional on-site frame number and size of conductors in any raceway shall not be more construction, for use with nonmetallic-sheathed cable, shall be than will permit dissipation of the heat and ready installation or permitted in lieu of a box or conduit body. withdrawal of the conductors without damage to the conductors or to their insulation.

Informational Note: See 334.30(C); 545.10; 550.15(I); 551.47(E), Exception No. 1; and 552.48(E), Exception Informational Note: See the following sections of this No. 1. Code: intermediate metal conduit, 342.22; rigid metal (F) Fitting. A fitting identified for the use shall be permitted in conduit, 344.22; flexible metal conduit, 348.22; liq- lieu of a box or conduit body where conductors are not spliced uidtight flexible metal conduit, 350.22; PVC conduit, or terminated within the fitting. The fitting shall be accessible 352.22; HDPE conduit, 353.22; RTRC, 355.22; liquid- after installation, unless listed for concealed installation. tight nonmetallic flexible conduit, 356.22; electrical metallic tubing, 358.22; flexible metallic tubing, 360.22; (G) Direct-Buried Conductors. As permitted in 300.5(E), a electrical nonmetallic tubing, 362.22; cellular concrete box or conduit body shall not be required for splices and taps in floor raceways, 372.22; cellular metal floor raceways, direct-buried conductors and cables. 374.22; metal wireways, 376.22; nonmetallic wireways,

(H) Insulated Devices. As permitted in 334.40(B), a box or 378.22; surface metal raceways, 386.22; surface nonme- conduit body shall not be required for insulated devices supplied tallic raceways, 388.22; underfloor raceways, 390.22; by nonmetallic-sheathed cable. fixture wire, 402.7; theaters, 520.6; signs, 600.31(C); elevators, 620.33; audio signal processing, amplification, (I) Enclosures. A box or conduit body shall not be required and reproduction equipment, 640.23(A) and 640.24; where a splice, switch, terminal, or pull point is in a cabinet or Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 circuits, Article 725; fire cutout box, in an enclosure for a switch or overcurrent device alarm circuits, Article 760; and optical fiber cables and as permitted in 312.8, in a motor controller as permitted in raceways, Article 770. 430.10(A), or in a motor control center. 300.18 Raceway Installations. (J) Luminaires. A box or conduit body shall not be required where a luminaire is used as a raceway as permitted in 410.64. (A) Complete Runs. Raceways, other than busways or

exposed raceways having hinged or removable covers, shall be (K) Embedded. A box or conduit body shall not be required installed complete between outlet, junction, or splicing points for splices where conductors are embedded as permitted in prior to the installation of conductors. Where required to facilitate 424.40, 424.41(D), 426.22(C), 426.24(A), and 427.19(A). the installation of utilization equipment, the raceway shall be per- (L) Manholes and Handhole Enclosures. A box or conduit mitted to be initially installed without a terminating connection at body shall not be required for conductors in manholes or hand- the equipment. Prewired raceway assemblies shall be permitted hole enclosures, except where connecting to electrical equipment. only where specifically permitted in this Code for the applicable The installation shall comply with the provisions of Part V of wiring method. Article 110 for manholes, and 314.30 for handhole enclosures. Exception: Short sections of raceways used to contain conduc- 300.16 Raceway or Cable to Open or Concealed Wiring.

tors or cable assemblies for protection from physical damage shall not be required to be installed complete between outlet, (A) Box, Conduit Body, or Fitting. A box, conduit body, junction, or splicing points. or terminal fitting having a separately bushed hole for each 70–172 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS 300.20 Table 300.19(A) Spacings for Conductor Supports Conductors Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum Copper Support of Conductors Conductor Size in Vertical Raceways m ft m ft 18 AWG through 8 AWG Not greater than 30 100 30 100 6 AWG through 1/0 AWG Not greater than 60 200 30 100 2/0 AWG through 4/0 AWG Not greater than 55 180 25 80 Over 4/0 AWG through 350 kcmil Not greater than 41 135 18 60 Over 350 kcmil through 500 kcmil Not greater than 36 120 15 50 Over 500 kcmil through 750 kcmil Not greater than 28 95 12 40 Over 750 kcmil Not greater than 26 85 11 35 (B) Welding. Metal raceways shall not be supported, termi- not less than twice the diameter of the cable, the cables nated, or connected by welding to the raceway unless specifically being carried on two or more insulating supports and addi- designed to be or otherwise specifically permitted to be in this tionally secured thereto by tie wires, if desired. Where this Code. method is used, cables shall be supported at intervals not

greater than 20 percent of the support spacing in Table 300.19 Supporting Conductors in Vertical Raceways. 300.19(A). (A) Spacing Intervals — Maximum. Conductors in vertical (4) Other approved means. raceways shall be supported if the vertical rise exceeds the val- 300.20 Induced Currents in Ferrous Metal Enclosures or ues in Table 300.19(A). At least one support method shall be Ferrous Metal Raceways. provided for each conductor at the top of the vertical raceway or as close to the top as practical. Intermediate supports shall be (A) Conductors Grouped Together. Where conductors car- provided as necessary to limit supported conductor lengths to rying alternating current are installed in ferrous metal enclosures not greater than those values specified in Table 300.19(A). or ferrous metal raceways, they shall be arranged so as to avoid heating the surrounding ferrous metal by induction. To accom- Exception: Steel wire armor cable shall be supported at the top plish this, all phase conductors and, where used, the grounded

of the riser with a cable support that clamps the steel wire armor. conductor and all equipment grounding conductors shall be A safety device shall be permitted at the lower end of the riser grouped together. to hold the cable in the event there is slippage of the cable in the wire-armored cable support. Additional wedge-type supports Exception No. 1: Equipment grounding conductors for cer- shall be permitted to relieve the strain on the equipment terminals tain existing installations shall be permitted to be installed caused by expansion of the cable under load. separate from their associated circuit conductors where run in accordance with the provisions of 250.130(C). (B) Fire-Rated Cables and Conductors. Support methods and spacing intervals for fire-rated cables and conductors shall Exception No. 2: A single conductor shall be permitted to comply with any restrictions provided in the listing of the elec- be installed in a ferromagnetic enclosure and used for skin-

trical circuit protective system used and in no case shall exceed effect heating in accordance with the provisions of 426.42 and the values in Table 300.19(A). 427.47. ∆ (C) Support Methods. One of the following methods of (B) Individual Conductors. Where a single conductor car- support shall be used: rying alternating current passes through metal with magnetic properties, the inductive effect shall be minimized by (1) cutting (1) Clamping devices constructed of or employing insulating slots in the metal between the individual holes through which wedges inserted in the ends of the raceways. Where clamp- the individual conductors pass or (2) passing all the conductors ing of insulation does not adequately support the cable, the in the circuit through an insulating wall sufficiently large for all conductor also shall be clamped. of the conductors of the circuit. (2) Inserting boxes at the required intervals in which insu- lating supports are installed and secured in an approved Exception: In the case of circuits supplying vacuum or electric-

manner to withstand the weight of the conductors attached discharge lighting systems or signs or X-ray apparatus, the cur- thereto, the boxes being provided with covers. rents carried by the conductors are so small that the inductive (3) In junction boxes, deflecting the cables not less than heating effect can be ignored where these conductors are placed 90 degrees and carrying them horizontally to a distance in metal enclosures or pass through metal. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–173

300.21 ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS Informational Note: Because aluminum is not a magnetic metallic tubing, intermediate metal conduit, or rigid metal con- metal, there will be no heating due to hysteresis; however, duit without an overall nonmetallic covering shall be installed induced currents will be present. They will not be of suffi- in ducts specifically fabricated to transport environmental air. cient magnitude to require grouping of conductors or spe- Flexible metal conduit shall be permitted, in lengths not to cial treatment in passing conductors through aluminum exceed 1.2 m (4 ft), to connect physically adjustable equipment wall sections. and devices permitted to be in these fabricated ducts. The con- nectors used with flexible metal conduit shall effectively close 300.21 Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion. Electri- any openings in the connection. cal installations in hollow spaces, vertical shafts, and venti-

lation or air-handling ducts shall be made so that the possible Exception: Wiring methods and cabling systems, listed for spread of fire or products of combustion will not be substan- use in other spaces used for environmental air (plenums), tially increased. Openings around electrical penetrations into shall be permitted to be installed in ducts specifically fabri- or through fire-resistant-rated walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings cated for environmental air-handling purposes under the fol- shall be firestopped using approved methods to maintain the fire lowing conditions: resistance rating. (1) The wiring methods or cabling systems shall be permit- Informational Note: Directories of electrical construc- ted only if necessary to connect to equipment or devices tion materials published by qualified testing laboratories associated with the direct action upon or sensing of the contain many listing installation restrictions necessary to contained air, and maintain the fire-resistive rating of assemblies where pen- (2) The total length of such wiring methods or cabling systems

etrations or openings are made. Building codes also con- shall not exceed 1.2 m (4 ft). tain restrictions on membrane penetrations on opposite ∆ (C) Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air (Plenums). sides of a fire-resistance-rated wall assembly. An example This section shall apply to spaces not specifically fabricated for is the 600-mm (24-in.) minimum horizontal separation that environmental air-handling purposes but used for air-handling usually applies between boxes installed on opposite sides purposes as a plenum. This section shall not apply to habitable of the wall. Assistance in complying with 300.21 can be rooms or areas of buildings, the prime purpose of which is not found in building codes, fire resistance directories, and air handling. product listings. Informational Note No. 1: The space over a hung ceiling 300.22 Wiring in Ducts Not Used for Air Handling, Fabri- used for environmental air-handling purposes is an exam- cated Ducts for Environmental Air, and Other Spaces for ple of the type of other space to which this section applies. Environmental Air (Plenums).

The provisions of this section Informational Note No. 2: The phrase other spaces shall apply to the installation and uses of electrical wiring and used for environmental air (plenum) as used in this sec- equipment in ducts used for dust, loose stock, or vapor removal; tion correlates with the use of the term plenum in NFPA ducts specifically fabricated for environmental air; and other 90A-2018, Standard for the Installation of Air-Condi- spaces used for environmental air (plenums). tioning and Ventilating Systems, and other mechanical Informational Note: See Article 424, Part VI, for duct codes where the plenum is used for return air purposes, heaters. as well as some other air-handling spaces. (A) Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or Vapor Removal. No Exception: This section shall not apply to the joist or stud spaces wiring systems of any type shall be installed in ducts used to of dwelling units where the wiring passes through such spaces transport dust, loose stock, or flammable vapors. No wiring perpendicular to the long dimension of such spaces.

system of any type shall be installed in any duct, or shaft con- (1) Wiring Methods. The wiring methods for such other space taining only such ducts, used for vapor removal or for ventila- shall be limited to totally enclosed, nonventilated, insulated tion of commercial-type cooking equipment. busway having no provisions for plug-in connections, Type MI (B) Ducts Specifically Fabricated for Environmental Air. cable without an overall nonmetallic covering, Type MC cable Equipment, devices, and the wiring methods specified in this sec- without an overall nonmetallic covering, Type AC cable, or other tion shall be permitted within such ducts only if necessary for factory-assembled multiconductor control or power cable that is the direct action upon, or sensing of, the contained air. Where specifically listed for use within an air-handling space, or listed equipment or devices are installed and illumination is neces- prefabricated cable assemblies of metallic manufactured wir- sary to facilitate maintenance and repair, enclosed gasketed- ing systems without nonmetallic sheath.

Other types of cables, type luminaires shall be permitted. conductors, and raceways shall be permitted to be installed in Only wiring methods consisting of Type MI cable without electrical metallic tubing, flexible metallic tubing, intermediate an overall nonmetallic covering, Type MC cable employing metal conduit, rigid metal conduit without an overall nonmetal- a smooth or corrugated impervious metal sheath without an lic covering, flexible metal conduit, or, where accessible, surface overall nonmetallic covering, electrical metallic tubing, flexible metal raceway or metal wireway with metal covers. 70–174 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS 300.39 Nonmetallic cable ties and other nonmetallic cable accesso- wiring methods serving equipment permitted by the authority ries used to secure and support cables shall be listed as having having jurisdiction in the exit enclosure shall be installed within low smoke and heat release properties. the exit enclosure. Informational Note: One method to determine low Informational Note: For more information, refer to NFPA smoke and heat release properties is that the nonmetal- 101-2018, Life Safety Code, 7.1.3.2.1(10)(b). lic cable ties and other nonmetallic cable accessories exhibit a maximum peak optical density of 0.50 or less, Part II. Requirements for over 1000 Volts, Nominal an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a peak 300.31 Covers Required. Suitable covers shall be installed on heat release rate of 100 kW or less when tested in accor- all boxes, fittings, and similar enclosures to prevent acciden-

dance with ANSI/UL 2043-2008, Fire Test for Heat and tal contact with energized parts or physical damage to parts or Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their insulation. Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces. 300.32 Conductors of Different Systems. See 300.3(C)(2). (2) Cable Tray Systems. The provisions in 300.22(C)(2)(a) or 300.34 Conductor Bending Radius. The conductor shall not (C)(2)(b) shall apply to the use of metallic cable tray systems be bent to a radius less than 8 times the overall diameter for non- in other spaces used for environmental air (plenums), where shielded conductors or 12 times the overall diameter for shielded accessible, as follows: or lead-covered conductors during or after installation. For mul- (a) Metal Cable Tray Systems. Metal cable tray systems shall ticonductor or multiplexed single-conductor cables having indi- be permitted to support the wiring methods in 300.22(C)(1). vidually shielded conductors, the minimum bending radius is (b) Solid Side and Bottom Metal Cable Tray Systems. Solid

12 times the diameter of the individually shielded conductors or side and bottom metal cable tray systems with solid metal cov- 7 times the overall diameter, whichever is greater. ers shall be permitted to enclose wiring methods and cables, not already covered in 300.22(C)(1), in accordance with 392.10(A) 300.35 Protection Against Induction Heating. Metallic and (B). raceways and associated conductors shall be arranged so as to avoid heating of the raceway in accordance with the applicable (3) Equipment. Electrical equipment with a metal enclosure, provisions of 300.20. or electrical equipment with a nonmetallic enclosure listed for use within an air-handling space and having low smoke and heat 300.37 Aboveground Wiring Methods. Aboveground con- release properties, and associated wiring material suitable for the ductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, in intermedi- ambient temperature shall be permitted to be installed in such ate metal conduit, in electrical metallic tubing, in RTRC and other space unless prohibited elsewhere in this Code.

PVC conduit, in cable trays, in auxiliary gutters, as busways, as cablebus, in other identified raceways, or as exposed runs of Informational Note: One method to determine low metal-clad cable suitable for the use and purpose. In locations smoke and heat release properties is that the equipment accessible to qualified persons only, exposed runs of Type MV exhibits a maximum peak optical density of 0.50 or less, cables, bare conductors, and bare busbars shall also be permit- an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a peak heat ted. Busbars shall be permitted to be either copper or aluminum. release rate of 100 kW or less when tested in accordance with ANSI/UL 2043-2013, Fire Test for Heat and Visible Exception: Airfield lighting cable used in series circuits that are Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Acces- powered by regulators and installed in restricted airport lighting sories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces. vaults shall be permitted as exposed cable installations.

Exception: Integral fan systems shall be permitted where spe- Informational Note: FAA L-824 cables installed as cifically identified for use within an air-handling space. exposed runs within a restricted vault area are common applications. ∆ (D) Information Technology Equipment. Where the installa- tion complies with the special requirements in 645.4, electrical 300.38 Raceways in Wet Locations Above Grade. Where wiring in air-handling areas beneath raised floors for informa- raceways are installed in wet locations above grade, the inte- tion technology equipment shall be permitted in accordance with rior of these raceways shall be considered to be a wet location. 645.5(E). Insulated conductors and cables installed in raceways in wet locations above grade shall comply with 310.10(C). 300.23 Panels Designed to Allow Access. Cables, race- ways, and equipment installed behind panels designed to allow 300.39 Braid-Covered Insulated Conductors — Exposed access, including suspended ceiling panels, shall be arranged and Installation. Exposed runs of braid-covered insulated con-

secured so as to allow the removal of panels and access to the ductors shall have a flame-retardant braid. If the conductors equipment. used do not have this protection, a flame-retardant saturant shall be applied to the braid covering after installation. This N 300.25 Exit Enclosures (Stair Towers). Where an exit enclo- treated braid covering shall be stripped back a safe distance at sure is required to be separated from the building, only electrical 2022 California Electrical Code 70–175

300.40 ARTICLE 300 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS conductor terminals, according to the operating voltage. Where DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT practicable, this distance shall not be less than 25 mm (1 in.) for 300.50 Underground Installations. each kilovolt of the conductor-to-ground voltage of the circuit. (A) General. Underground conductors shall be identified for 300.40 Insulation Shielding. Metallic and semiconducting the voltage and conditions under which they are installed. Direct- insulation shielding components of shielded cables shall be burial cables shall comply with the provisions of 310.10(E). removed for a distance dependent on the circuit voltage and insu- Underground cables shall be installed in accordance with lation. Stress reduction means shall be provided at all termina- 300.50(A)(1), (A)(2), or (A)(3), and the installation shall meet tions of factory-applied shielding. the depth requirements of Table 300.50. Metallic shielding components such as tapes, wires, or braids, (1) Shielded Cables and Nonshielded Cables in Metal-

or combinations thereof, shall be connected to an equipment Sheathed Cable Assemblies. Underground cables, including grounding conductor, an equipment grounding busbar, or a nonshielded, Type MC and moisture-impervious metal sheath grounding electrode. cables, shall have those sheaths grounded through an effective 300.42 Moisture or Mechanical Protection for Metal- grounding path meeting the requirements of 250.4(A)(5) or (B)(4). Sheathed Cables. Where cable conductors emerge from a They shall be direct buried or installed in raceways identified metal sheath and where protection against moisture or physi- for the use. cal damage is necessary, the insulation of the conductors shall (2) Industrial Establishments. In industrial establishments, be protected by a cable sheath terminating device. where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that ∆ 300.45 Danger Signs. Danger signs shall be conspicuously only qualified persons service the installed cable, nonshielded

posted at points of access to conductors in all raceway systems single-conductor cables with insulation types up to 2000 volts and cable systems. The sign(s) shall meet the requirements in that are listed for direct burial shall be permitted to be directly 110.21(B), shall be readily visible, and shall state the following: buried. Table 300.50 Minimum Covera Requirements General Conditions (not otherwise specified) Special Conditions (use if applicable) Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 Raceways Under Buildings Cables in Areas Subject or Exterior Airport to Vehicular Rigid Metal Concrete Slabs, Runways or Traffic, Such as RTRC, PVC, Conduit and 100 mm (4 in.) Adjacent Areas Thoroughfares Direct-Buried and HDPE Intermediate Minimum Where Trespass and Commercial Cables b Conduit c Metal Conduit Thickness d Is Prohibited Parking Areas Circuit Voltage mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. Over 1000 V 750 30 450 18 150 6 100 4 450 18 600 24 through 22 kV Over 22 kV 900 36 600 24 150 6 100 4 450 18 600 24 through 40 kV

Over 40 kV 1000 42 750 30 150 6 100 4 450 18 600 24 General Notes: 1. Lesser depths shall be permitted where cables and conductors rise for terminations or splices or where access is otherwise required. 2. Where solid rock prevents compliance with the cover depths specified in this table, the wiring shall be installed in a metal or nonmetallic raceway permitted for direct burial. The raceways shall be covered by a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete extending down to rock. 3. In industrial establishments, where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that qualified persons will service the installation, the minimum cover requirements, for other than rigid metal conduit and intermediate metal conduit, shall be permitted to be reduced 150 mm (6 in.) for each 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete or equivalent placed entirely within the trench over the underground installation. Specific Footnotes: aCover is defined as the shortest distance in millimeters (inches) measured between a point on the top surface of any direct-buried conductor, cable, conduit, or

other raceway and the top surface of finished grade, concrete, or similar cover. bUnderground direct-buried cables that are not encased or protected by concrete and are buried 750 mm (30 in.) or more below grade shall have their location identified by a warning ribbon that is placed in the trench at least 300 mm (12 in.) above the cables. cListed by a qualified testing agency as suitable for direct burial without encasement. All other nonmetallic systems shall require 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete or equivalent above conduit in addition to the table depth. dThe slab shall extend a minimum of 150 mm (6 in.) beyond the underground installation, and a warning ribbon or other effective means suitable for the conditions shall be placed above the underground installation. 70–176 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 310.6 (3) Other Nonshielded Cables. Other nonshielded cables not covered in 300.50(A)(1) or (A)(2) shall be installed in ARTICLE 310 rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or rigid non- Conductors for General Wiring metallic conduit encased in not less than 75 mm (3 in.) of concrete. Part I. General (B) Wet Locations. The interior of enclosures or raceways installed underground shall be considered to be a wet location. 310.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements for Insulated conductors and cables installed in these enclosures conductors rated up to and including 2000 volts and their or raceways in underground installations shall be listed for type designations, insulations, markings, mechanical strengths, use in wet locations and shall comply with 310.10(C). Any ampacity ratings, and uses. These requirements do not apply to connections or splices in an underground installation shall be conductors that form an integral part of equipment, such as approved for wet locations.

motors, motor controllers, and similar equipment, or to conduc- tors specifically provided for elsewhere in this Code. (C) Protection from Damage. Conductors emerging from the ground shall be enclosed in listed raceways. Raceways Informational Note: For flexible cords and cables, see installed on poles shall be of rigid metal conduit, intermedi- Article 400. For fixture wires, see Article 402. • ate metal conduit, RTRC-XW, Schedule 80 PVC conduit, or 310.3 Conductors. equivalent, extending from the minimum cover depth specified in Table 300.50 to a point 2.5 m (8 ft) above finished grade. Con- (A) Minimum Size of Conductors. The minimum size of con- ductors entering a building shall be protected by an approved ductors for voltage ratings up to and including 2000 volts shall enclosure or raceway from the minimum cover depth to the point be 14 AWG copper or 12 AWG aluminum or copper-clad alumi- of entrance. Where direct-buried conductors, raceways, or cables num, except as permitted elsewhere in this Code. are subject to movement by settlement or frost, they shall be

(B) Conductor Material. Conductors in this article shall be installed to prevent damage to the enclosed conductors or to of aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, or copper unless otherwise the equipment connected to the raceways. Metallic enclosures specified. shall be grounded. Solid aluminum conductors 8, 10, and 12 AWG shall be (D) Splices. Direct burial cables shall be permitted to be made of an AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum alloy spliced or tapped without the use of splice boxes, provided conductor material. Stranded aluminum conductors 8 AWG they are installed using materials suitable for the application. through 1000 kcmil marked as Type RHH, RHW, XHHW, THW, The taps and splices shall be watertight and protected from THHW, THWN, THHN, service-entrance Type SE Style U, mechanical damage. Where cables are shielded, the shielding and SE Style R shall be made of an AA-8000 series electrical shall be continuous across the splice or tap. grade aluminum alloy conductor material. Exception: At splices of an engineered cabling system, ∆ (C) Stranded Conductors.

Where installed in raceways, metallic shields of direct-buried single-conductor cables with conductors 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded, unless specifi- maintained spacing between phases shall be permitted to be cally permitted or required elsewhere in this Code to be solid. interrupted and overlapped. Where shields are interrupted and overlapped, each shield section shall be grounded at one point. ∆ (D) Insulated. Conductors not specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code to be covered or bare shall be insulated. (E) Backfill. Backfill containing large rocks, paving materi- als, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, or corrosive Informational Note: See 250.184 for insulation of neu- materials shall not be placed in an excavation where materials tral conductors of a solidly grounded high-voltage system. can damage or contribute to the corrosion of raceways, cables, Part II. Construction Specifications or other substructures or where it may prevent adequate com- paction of fill. ∆ 310.4 Conductor Constructions and Applications. Insulated

conductors shall comply with Table 310.4(A) and Table 310.4(B). Protection in the form of granular or selected material or suit- able sleeves shall be provided to prevent physical damage to the Informational Note: Thermoplastic insulation may stiffen raceway or cable. at temperatures lower than −10°C (+14°F). Thermoplas- tic insulation may also be deformed at normal temperatures (F) Raceway Seal. Where a raceway enters from an under- where subjected to pressure, such as at points of support. ground system, the end within the building shall be sealed with an identified compound so as to prevent the entrance of mois- 310.6 Conductor Identification. ture or gases, or it shall be so arranged to prevent moisture from (A) Grounded Conductors. Insulated or covered grounded contacting live parts. conductors shall be identified in accordance with 200.6. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–177

310.6 ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING ∆ Table 310.4(A) Conductor Applications and Insulations Rated 600 Volts1 Maximum Thickness of Insulation Type Operating Application Trade Name Letter Temperature Provisions Insulation AWG or kcmil mm mils Outer Covering2 Fluorinated ethylene FEP or 90°C Dry and damp locations Fluorinated 14–10 0.51 20 None propylene FEPB (194°F) ethylene 8–2 0.76 30 propylene Dry locations — 200°C special applications3 Fluorinated 14–8 0.36 14 Glass braid (392°F) ethylene 6–2 0.36 14 Glass or other propylene suitable braid material Mineral insulation MI 90°C Dry and wet locations Magnesium oxide 18–164 0.58 23 Copper or alloy (metal sheathed) (194°F) 16–10 0.91 36 steel 250°C For special 9–4 1.27 50 (482°F) applications3 3–500 1.40 55 Moisture-, heat-, MTW 60°C Machine tool wiring in Flame-retardant, (A) (B) (A) (B) (A) None and oil-resistant (140°F) wet locations moisture-, 22–12 0.76 0.38 30 15 (B) Nylon jacket thermoplastic 90°C Machine tool wiring in heat-, and 10 0.76 0.51 30 20 or equivalent (194°F) dry locations. oil-resistant 8 1.14 0.76 45 30

thermoplastic 6 1.52 0.76 60 30 Informational Note: 4–2 1.52 1.02 60 40 See NFPA 79. 1–4/0 2.03 1.27 80 50 213–500 2.41 1.52 95 60 501–1000 2.79 1.78 110 70 Paper 85°C For underground Paper Lead sheath (185°F) service conductors, or by special permission Perfluoro-alkoxy PFA 90°C Dry and damp locations Perfluoro-alkoxy 14–10 0.51 20 None (194°F) Dry locations — 8–2 0.76 30 200°C special applications3 1–4/0 1.14 45 (392°F) Perfluoro-alkoxy PFAH 250°C Dry locations only. Perfluoro-alkoxy 14–10 0.51 20 None (482°F) Only for leads 8–2 0.76 30 within apparatus 1–4/0 1.14 45 or within raceways connected to apparatus (nickel or nickel-coated copper only) Thermoset RHH 90°C Dry and damp locations 14–10 1.14 45 Moisture-resistant, (194°F) 8–2 1.52 60 flame-retardant, 1–4/0 2.03 80 nonmetallic 213–500 2.41 95 covering2 501–1000 2.79 110 1001–2000 3.18 125 Moisture-resistant RHW 75°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, 14–10 1.14 45 Moisture-resistant, thermoset (167°F) moisture- 8–2 1.52 60 flame-retardant, 90°C resistant 1–4/0 2.03 80 nonmetallic RHW-2

(194°F) thermoset 213–500 2.41 95 covering 501–1000 2.79 110 1001–2000 3.18 125 Silicone SA 90°C Dry and damp locations Silicone rubber 14–10 1.14 45 Glass or other (194°F) 8–2 1.52 60 suitable braid For special application3 1–4/0 2.03 80 material 200°C 213–500 2.41 95 (392°F) 501–1000 2.79 110 1001–2000 3.18 125 Thermoset SIS 90°C Switchboard and Flame-retardant 14–10 0.76 30 None (194°F) switchgear wiring thermoset 8–2 1.14 45 only 1–4/0 1.40 55 (continues) 70–178 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 310.6 ∆ Table 310.4(A) Continued Maximum Thickness of Insulation Type Operating Application Trade Name Letter Temperature Provisions Insulation AWG or kcmil mm mils Outer Covering2 Thermoplastic and TBS 90°C Switchboard and Thermoplastic 14–10 0.76 30 Flame-retardant, fibrous outer braid (194°F) switchgear wiring 8 1.14 45 nonmetallic only 6–2 1.52 60 covering 1–4/0 2.03 80 Extended polytetra- TFE 250°C Dry locations only. Extruded 14–10 0.51 20 None fluoroethylene (482°F) Only for leads polytetra- 8–2 0.76 30 within apparatus fluoroethylene 1–4/0 1.14 45 or within raceways connected to apparatus, or as open wiring (nickel or nickel-coated copper only) Heat-resistant THHN 90°C Dry and damp locations Flame-retardant, 14–12 0.38 15 Nylon jacket or thermoplastic (194°F) heat-resistant 10 0.51 20 equivalent thermoplastic 8–6 0.76 30 4–2 1.02 40 1–4/0 1.27 50 250–500 1.52 60 501–1000 1.78 70 Moisture- and THHW 75°C Wet location Flame-retardant, 14–10 0.76 30 None heat-resistant (167°F) moisture- and 8 1.14 45

thermoplastic heat-resistant 6–2 1.52 60 90°C Dry location thermoplastic 1–4/0 2.03 80 (194°F) 213–500 2.41 95 501–1000 2.79 110 1001–2000 3.18 125 Moisture- and THW 75°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, 14–10 0.76 30 None heat-resistant (167°F) moisture- and 8 1.14 45 thermoplastic 90°C Special applications heat-resistant 6–2 1.52 60 (194°F) within electric thermoplastic 1–4/0 2.03 80 discharge lighting 213–500 2.41 95 equipment. Limited 501–1000 2.79 110 to 1000 open- 1001–2000 3.18 125 circuit volts or less. (Size 14-8 only as permitted in 410.68.) THW-2 90°C Dry and wet locations (194°F) Moisture- and THWN 75°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, 14–12 0.38 15 Nylon jacket or heat-resistant (167°F) moisture- and 10 0.51 20 equivalent thermoplastic 90°C heat-resistant 8–6 0.76 30 THWN-2 (194°F) thermoplastic 4–2 1.02 40 1–4/0 1.27 50 250–500 1.52 60 501–1000 1.78 70 Moisture-resistant TW 60°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, 14–10 0.76 30 None thermoplastic (140°F) moisture- 8 1.14 45 resistant 6–2 1.52 60 thermoplastic 1–4/0 2.03 80 213–500 2.41 95

501–1000 2.79 110 1001–2000 3.18 125 Underground feeder UF 60°C See Article 340. Moisture-resistant 14–10 1.52 606 Integral with and branch-circuit (140°F) 8–2 2.03 806 insulation cable — single 75°C Moisture- and 1–4/0 2.41 956 conductor (for (167°F)5 heat-resistant Type UF cable employing more than one conductor, see Article 340). (continues) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–179

310.6 ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING ∆ Table 310.4(A) Continued Maximum Thickness of Insulation Type Operating Application Trade Name Letter Temperature Provisions Insulation AWG or kcmil mm mils Outer Covering2 Underground service- USE 75°C See Article 338. Heat- and 14–10 1.14 45 Moisture-resistant entrance cable — (167°F)5 moisture- 8–2 1.52 60 nonmetallic single conductor resistant 1–4/0 2.03 80 covering (See (for Type USE 213–500 2.41 957 338.2.) USE-2 90°C Dry and wet locations cable employing 501–1000 2.79 110 (194°F) more than one 1001–2000 3.18 125 conductor, see Article 338). Thermoset XHH 90°C Dry and damp locations Flame-retardant 14–10 0.76 30 None (194°F) thermoset 8–2 1.14 45 1–4/0 1.40 55 213–500 1.65 65 501–1000 2.03 80 1001–2000 2.41 95 Thermoset XHHN 90°C Dry and damp locations Flame-retardant 14–12 0.38 15 Nylon jacket or (194°F) thermoset 10 0.51 20 equivalent 8–6 0.76 30 4–2 1.02 40 1–4/0 1.27 50 250–500 1.52 60 501–1000 1.78 70 Moisture-resistant XHHW 90°C Dry and damp locations Flame-retardant, 14–10 0.76 30 None

thermoset (194°F) Wet locations moisture- 8–2 1.14 45 75°C resistant 1–4/0 1.40 55 (167°F) thermoset 213–500 1.65 65 501–1000 2.03 80 1001–2000 2.41 95 Moisture-resistant XHHW-2 90°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, 14–10 0.76 30 None thermoset (194°F) moisture- 8–2 1.14 45 resistant 1–4/0 1.40 55 thermoset 213–500 1.65 65 501–1000 2.03 80 1001–2000 2.41 95 Moisture-resistant XHWN 75°C Dry and wet locations Flame-retardant, 14–12 0.38 15 Nylon jacket or thermoset (167°F) moisture- 10 0.51 20 equivalent resistant 8–6 0.76 30 90°C thermoset 4–2 1.02 40 XHWN-2 (194°F) 1–4/0 1.27 50 250–500 1.52 60 501–1000 1.78 70 Modified ethylene Z 90°C Dry and damp locations Modified ethylene 14–12 0.38 15 None tetrafluoro-ethylene (194°F) tetrafluoro- 10 0.51 20 150°C Dry locations — ethylene 8–4 0.64 25 (302°F) special applications3 3–1 0.89 35 1/0–4/0 1.14 45 Modified ethylene ZW 75°C Wet locations Modified ethylene 14–10 0.76 30 None tetrafluoro-ethylene (167°F) tetrafluoro- 8–2 1.14 45 90°C Dry and damp locations ethylene (194°F) Dry locations — 150°C special applications3 (302°F)

ZW-2 90°C Dry and wet locations (194°F) 1Conductors shall be permitted to be rated up to 1000 volts if listed and marked. 2Outer coverings shall not be required where listed without a covering. 3Higher temperature rated constructions shall be permitted where design conditions require maximum conductor operating temperatures above 90°C (194°F). 4Conductor sizes shall be permitted for signaling circuits permitting 300-volt insulation. 5The ampacity of Type UF cable shall be limited in accordance with 340.80. 6Type UF insulation thickness shall include the integral jacket. 7Insulation thickness shall be permitted to be 2.03 mm (80 mils) for listed Type USE conductors that have been subjected to special investigations. The nonmetallic covering over individual rubber-covered conductors of aluminum-sheathed cable and of lead-sheathed or multiconductor cable shall not be required to be flame retardant. 70–180 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 310.8 ∆ Table 310.4(B) Thickness of Insulation for Nonshielded Types RHH and RHW Solid Dielectric Insulated Conductors Rated 2000 Volts Column A 1 Column B2 Conductor Size (AWG or kcmil) mm mils mm mils 14–10 2.03 80 1.52 60 8 2.03 80 1.78 70 6–2 2.41 95 1.78 70 1–2/0 2.79 110 2.29 90 3/0–4/0 2.79 110 2.29 90 213–500 3.18 125 2.67 105 501–1000 3.56 140 3.05 120 1001–2000 3.56 140 3.56 140 1Column A insulations shall be limited to natural, SBR, and butyl rubbers. 2Column B insulations shall be materials such as cross-linked polyethylene, ethylene propylene rubber, and com-posites thereof. (B) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Equipment ground- (2) Nonmetallic-sheathed cable ing conductors shall be identified in accordance with 250.119. (3) Service-entrance cable (4) Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable (C) Ungrounded Conductors. Conductors that are intended for (5) Tray cable use as ungrounded conductors, whether used as a single conductor (6) Irrigation cable or in multiconductor cables, shall be finished to be clearly distin-

(7) Power-limited tray cable guishable from grounded and equipment grounding conductors. (8) Instrumentation tray cable Distinguishing markings shall not conflict in any manner with the surface markings required by 310.8(B)(1). Branch-circuit The AWG size or circular mil area shall be repeated at inter- ungrounded conductors shall be identified in accordance with vals not exceeding 610 mm (24 in.). All other markings shall be 210.5(C). Feeders shall be identified in accordance with 215.12. repeated at intervals not exceeding 1.0 m (40 in.). Exception: Conductor identification shall be permitted in (2) Marker Tape. Metal-covered multiconductor cables shall accordance with 200.7. employ a marker tape located within the cable and running for its complete length. 310.8 Marking. Exception No. 1: Type MI cable shall not require a marker tape. ∆ (A) Required Information. All conductors and cables shall be marked to indicate the following information, using the appli- Exception No. 2: Type AC cable shall not require a marker tape. cable method described in 310.8(B): Exception No.

3: The information required in 310.8(A) shall (1) The maximum rated voltage. be permitted to be durably marked on the outer nonmetallic (2) The proper type letter or letters for the type of wire or cable covering of Type MC, Type ITC, or Type PLTC cables at inter- as specified elsewhere in this Code. vals not exceeding 1.0 m (40 in.). (3) The manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other distinctive Exception No. 4: The information required in 310.8(A) shall marking by which the organization responsible for the prod- be permitted to be durably marked on a nonmetallic covering uct can be readily identified. under the metallic sheath of Type ITC or Type PLTC cable at (4) The AWG size or circular mil area. intervals not exceeding 1.0 m (40 in.). Informational Note: See Chapter 9, Table 8, Conductor Informational Note: Included in the group of metal-cov- Properties, for conductor area expressed in SI units for ered cables are Type AC cable (Article 320), Type MC conductor sizes specified in AWG or circular mil area. cable (Article 330), and lead-sheathed cable.

(5) Cable assemblies where the neutral conductor is smaller (3) Tag Marking. The following conductors and cables shall than the ungrounded conductors shall be so marked. be marked by means of a printed tag attached to the coil, reel, (B) Method of Marking. or carton: ∆ (1) Surface Marking. The following conductors and cables (1) Type MI cable shall be durably marked on the surface: (2) Switchboard wires (3) Metal-covered, single-conductor cables (1) Single-conductor and multiconductor thermoset and (4) Type AC cable thermoplastic-insulated wire and cable 2022 California Electrical Code 70–181

310.10 ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING (4) Optional Marking of Wire Size. The information required ∆ (E) Direct-Burial Conductors. Conductors used for direct- in 310.8(A)(4) shall be permitted to be marked on the surface of burial applications shall be of a type identified for such use. the individual insulated conductors for the following multicon- (F) Corrosive Conditions. Conductors exposed to oils, greases, ductor cables: vapors, gases, fumes, liquids, or other substances having a delete- (1) Type MC cable rious effect on the conductor or insulation shall be of a type suit- (2) Tray cable able for the application. (3) Irrigation cable (G) Conductors in Parallel. (4) Power-limited tray cable (5) Power-limited fire alarm cable ∆ (1) General. Aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, or copper con- (6) Instrumentation tray cable ductors for each phase, polarity, neutral, or grounded circuit shall be permitted to be connected in parallel (electrically joined at (C) Suffixes to Designate Number of Conductors. A type both ends) only in sizes 1/0 AWG and larger where installed in

letter or letters used alone shall indicate a single insulated accordance with 310.10(G)(2) through (G)(6). conductor. The letter suffixes shall be indicated as follows: Exception No. 1: Conductors in sizes smaller than 1/0 AWG (1) D — For two insulated conductors laid parallel within an shall be permitted to be run in parallel to supply control power outer nonmetallic covering to indicating instruments, contactors, relays, solenoids, and (2) M — For an assembly of two or more insulated conduc- similar control devices, or for frequencies of 360 Hz and higher, tors twisted spirally within an outer nonmetallic covering provided all of the following apply: (D) Optional Markings. All conductors and cables contained (1) They are contained within the same raceway or cable. in Chapter 3 shall be permitted to be surface marked to indicate (2) The ampacity of each individual conductor is sufficient special characteristics of the cable materials. These markings to carry the entire load current shared by the parallel include, but are not limited to, markings for limited smoke, sun- conductors.

light resistant, and so forth. (3) The overcurrent protection is such that the ampacity of each individual conductor will not be exceeded if one Part III. Installation or more of the parallel conductors become inadvertently 310.10 Uses Permitted. The conductors described in 310.4 disconnected. shall be permitted for use in any of the wiring methods covered Exception No. 2: Under engineering supervision, 2 AWG and in Chapter 3 and as specified in their respective tables or as per- 1 AWG grounded neutral conductors shall be permitted to be mitted elsewhere in this Code. installed in parallel for existing installations. (A) Dry Locations. Insulated conductors and cables used in Informational Note to Exception No. 2: Exception No. 2 dry locations shall be any of the types identified in this Code. can be used to alleviate overheating of neutral conduc- (B) Dry and Damp Locations. Insulated conductors and tors in existing installations due to high content of triplen cables used in dry and damp locations shall be Types FEP, FEPB, harmonic currents.

MTW, PFA, RHH, RHW, RHW-2, SA, THHN, THW, THW-2, ∆ (2) Conductor and Installation Characteristics. The par- THHW, THWN, THWN-2, TW, XHH, XHHW, XHHW-2, alleled conductors in each phase, polarity, neutral, grounded XHHN, XHWN, XHWN-2, Z, or ZW. circuit conductor, equipment grounding conductor, or equip- (C) Wet Locations. Insulated conductors and cables used in ment bonding jumper shall comply with all of the following: wet locations shall comply with one of the following: (1) Be the same length (1) Be moisture-impervious metal-sheathed (2) Consist of the same conductor material (2) Be types MTW, RHW, RHW-2, TW, THW, THW-2, THHW, (3) Be the same size in circular mil area THWN, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, XHWN, XHWN-2 (4) Have the same insulation type or ZW (5) Be terminated in the same manner (3) Be of a type listed for use in wet locations (3) Separate Cables or Raceways. Where run in separate (D) Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight. Insulated conduc- cables or raceways, the cables or raceways with conductors

tors or cables used where exposed to direct rays of the sun shall shall have the same number of conductors and shall have comply with (D)(1) or (D)(2): the same electrical characteristics. Conductors of one phase, polarity, neutral, grounded circuit conductor, or equipment (1) Conductors and cables shall be listed, or listed and marked, grounding conductor shall not be required to have the same as being sunlight resistant physical characteristics as those of another phase, polarity, (2) Conductors and cables shall be covered with insulating neutral, grounded circuit conductor, or equipment grounding material, such as tape or sleeving, that is listed, or listed and conductor. marked, as being sunlight resistant 70–182 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 310.14 ∆ (4) Ampacity Adjustment. Conductors installed in parallel dwelling unit in a two-family or multifamily dwelling, shall shall comply with the provisions of 310.15(C)(1). be permitted to have an ampacity not less than 83 percent of the feeder rating. If no adjustment or correction factors are required, (5) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Where parallel equip- Table 310.12 shall be permitted to be applied. ment grounding conductors are used, they shall be sized in accor- dance with 250.122. Sectioned equipment grounding conductors N (C) Feeder Ampacities. In no case shall a feeder for an indi- smaller than 1/0 AWG shall be permitted in multiconductor vidual dwelling unit be required to have an ampacity greater than cables, if the combined circular mil area of the sectioned equip- that specified in 310.12(A) or (B). ment grounding conductors in each cable complies with 250.122. N (D) Grounded Conductors. Grounded conductors shall be (6) Bonding Jumpers.

Where parallel equipment bonding permitted to be sized smaller than the ungrounded conductors, jumpers or supply-side bonding jumpers are installed in raceways, if the requirements of 220.61 and 230.42 for service conduc- they shall be sized and installed in accordance with 250.102. tors or the requirements of 215.2 and 220.61 for feeder con- ductors are met. ∆ 310.12 Single-Phase Dwelling Services and Feeders. For one-family dwellings and the individual dwelling units of two- Where correction or adjustment factors are required by family and multifamily dwellings, service and feeder conductors 310.15(B) or (C), they shall be permitted to be applied to the supplied by a single-phase, 120/240-volt system shall be permit- ampacity associated with the temperature rating of the conductor. ted to be sized in accordance with 310.12(A) through (D). Informational Note No. 1: The service or feeder ratings For one-family dwellings and the individual dwelling units addressed by this section are based on the standard ampere

of two-family and multifamily dwellings, single-phase feeder ratings for fuses and inverse time circuit breakers from conductors consisting of two ungrounded conductors and the 240.6(A). neutral conductor from a 208Y/120 volt system shall be permit- Informational Note No. 2: See Example D7 in Annex D. ted to be sized in accordance with 310.12(A) through (C). 310.14 Ampacities for Conductors Rated 0 Volts–2000 Volts. N (A) Services. For a service rated 100 amperes through 400 amperes, the service conductors supplying the entire load (A) General. associated with a one-family dwelling, or the service conductors ∆ (1) Tables or Engineering Supervision. Ampacities for con- supplying the entire load associated with an individual dwelling ductors shall be permitted to be determined by tables as pro- unit in a two-family or multifamily dwelling, shall be permitted vided in 310.15 or under engineering supervision, as provided in to have an ampacity not less than 83 percent of the service rat- 310.14(B). ing. If no adjustment or correction factors are required, Table Informational Note No.

1: Ampacities provided by this 310.12 shall be permitted to be applied. section do not take voltage drop into consideration. See N (B) Feeders. For a feeder rated 100 amperes through 210.19(A), Informational Note No. 4, for branch circuits 400 amperes, the feeder conductors supplying the entire load and 215.2(A), Informational Note No. 2, for feeders. associated with a one-family dwelling, or the feeder conduc- Informational Note No. 2: For the allowable ampacities tors supplying the entire load associated with an individual of Type MTW wire, see Table 12.5.1 in NFPA 79-2018, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery. N Table 310.12 Single-Phase Dwelling Services and Feeders (2) Selection of Ampacity. Where more than one ampacity applies for a given circuit length, the lowest value shall be Conductor (AWG or kcmil) Service or used. Feeder Rating Aluminum or Copper-Clad Exception: Where different ampacities apply to portions of (Amperes) Copper Aluminum a circuit, the higher ampacity shall be permitted to be used if the total portion(s) of the circuit with lower ampacity does not

100 4 2 110 3 1 exceed the lesser of 3.0 m (10 ft) or 10 percent of the total circuit. 125 2 1/0 Informational Note: See 110.14(C) for conductor temper- 150 1 2/0 175 1/0 3/0 ature limitations due to termination provisions. 200 2/0 4/0 ∆ (3) Temperature Limitation of Conductors. No conduc- 225 3/0 250 tor shall be used in such a manner that its operating tempera- 250 4/0 300 300 250 350 ture exceeds that designated for the type of insulated conductor 350 350 500 involved. In no case shall conductors be associated together in 400 400 600 such a way, with respect to type of circuit, the wiring method employed, or the number of conductors, that the limiting tem- Note: If no adjustment or correction factors are required, this table shall be permitted to be applied. perature of any conductor is exceeded. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–183

310.15 ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING Informational Note No. 1: The temperature rating of a does not exceed the ampacity for the temperature rating of the conductor [see Table 310.4(A) and Table 311.10(A)] is the termination in accordance with the provisions of 110.14(C). maximum temperature, at any location along its length, that Informational Note No. 1: Table 310.16 through Table the conductor can withstand over a prolonged time period 310.19 are application tables for use in determining con- without serious degradation. The ampacity tables of Article ductor sizes on loads calculated in accordance with Article 310 and the ampacity tables of Informative Annex B, the 220. Ampacities result from consideration of one or more ambient temperature correction factors in 310.15(B), and of the following: the notes to the tables provide guidance for coordinating conductor sizes, types, ampacities, ambient temperatures, (1) Temperature compatibility with connected equip- and number of associated conductors. The principal deter- ment, especially the connection points.

minants of operating temperature are as follows: (2) Coordination with circuit and system overcurrent protection. (1) Ambient temperature — ambient temperature may (3) Compliance with the requirements of product listings vary along the conductor length as well as from time or certifications. See 110.3(B). to time. (4) Preservation of the safety benefits of established (2) Heat generated internally in the conductor as the industry practices and standardized procedures. result of load current flow, including fundamental and harmonic currents. Informational Note No. 2: For conductor area see Chap- (3) The rate at which generated heat dissipates into the ter 9, Table 8, Conductor Properties. Interpolation is based ambient medium. Thermal insulation that covers or sur- on the conductor area and not the conductor overall area. rounds conductors affects the rate of heat dissipation. Informational Note No. 3: For the ampacities of flexible (4) Adjacent load-carrying conductors — adjacent con- cords and cables, see 400.5. For the ampacities of fixture

ductors have the dual effect of raising the ambient wires, see 402.5. temperature and impeding heat dissipation. Informational Note No. 4: For explanation of type let- Informational Note No. 2: Refer to 110.14(C) for the ters used in tables and for recognized sizes of conduc- temperature limitation of terminations. tors for the various conductor insulations, see Table (B) Engineering Supervision. Under engineering supervi- 310.4(A) and Table 310.4(B). For installation require- sion, conductor ampacities shall be permitted to be calculated ments, see 310.1 through 310.14 and the various arti- by means of Equation 310.14(B). cles of this Code. For flexible cords, see Table 400.4, Table 400.5(A)(a), and Table 400.5(A)(b). ∆ (B) Ambient Temperature Correction Factors. Tc − Ta 3 I = × 10 amperes [310.14(B)] Rdc (1 + Yc)Rca N (1) General. Ampacities for ambient temperatures other than those shown in the ampacity tables shall be corrected in accor- where: dance with Table 310.15(B)(1) or Table 310.15(B)(2), or shall

Tc = conductor temperature in degrees Celsius (°C) be permitted to be calculated using Equation 310.15(B). Ta = ambient temperature in degrees Celsius (°C) T − T' Rdc = dc resistance of 305 mm (1 ft) of conductor in I' = I c a [310.15(B)] T − T microohms at temperature, T c c a Y c = component ac resistance resulting from skin effect where: and proximity effect I′ = ampacity corrected for ambient temperature Rca = effective thermal resistance between conductor and I = ampacity shown in the tables surrounding ambient T c = temperature rating of conductor (°C) ∆ 310.15 Ampacity Tables. Ta′ = new ambient temperature (°C) T = ambient temperature used in the table (°C) N (A) General. Ampacities for conductors rated 0 volts to a 2000 volts shall be as specified in the Ampacity Table 310.16 N (2) Rooftop. For raceways or cables exposed to direct sun- through Table 310.21, as modified by 310.15(A) through (F) and light on or above rooftops where the distance above the roof 310.12. Under engineering supervision, ampacities of sizes not to the bottom of the raceway or cable is less than 23 mm

shown in ampacity tables for conductors meeting the general wir- ( 7⁄ 8 in.), a temperature adder of 33°C (60°F) shall be added to ing requirements shall be permitted to be determined by interpo- the outdoor temperature to determine the applicable ambient lation of the adjacent conductors based on the conductor’s area. temperature for application of the correction factors in Table 310.15(B)(1) or Table 310.15(B)(2). The temperature correction and adjustment factors shall be permitted to be applied to the ampacity for the temperature Exception: Type XHHW-2 insulated conductors shall not be rating of the conductor, if the corrected and adjusted ampacity subject to this ampacity adjustment. 70–184 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 310.15 ∆ Table 310.15(B)(1) Ambient Temperature Correction Factors Based on 30°C (86°F) For ambient temperatures other than 30°C (86°F), multiply the ampacities specified in the ampacity tables by the appropriate correction factor shown below. Ambient Temperature Rating of Conductor Ambient Temperature Temperature (°C) 60°C 75°C 90°C (°F) 10 or less 1.29 1.20 1.15 50 or less 11–15 1.22 1.15 1.12 51–59 16–20 1.15 1.11 1.08 60–68 21–25 1.08 1.05 1.04 69–77 26–30 1.00 1.00 1.00 78–86 31–35 0.91 0.94 0.96 87–95 36–40 0.82 0.88 0.91 96–104 41–45 0.71 0.82 0.87 105–113 46–50 0.58 0.75 0.82 114–122 51–55 0.41 0.67 0.76 123–131 56–60 — 0.58 0.71 132–140 61–65 — 0.47 0.65 141–149 66–70 — 0.33 0.58 150–158 71–75 — — 0.50 159–167 76–80 — — 0.41 168–176 81–85 — — 0.29 177–185 ∆ Table 310.15(B)(2) Ambient Temperature Correction Factors Based on 40ºC (104ºF) For ambient temperatures other than 40°C (104°F), multiply the ampacities specified in the ampacity tables by the appropriate correction factor shown below.

Ambient Temperature Rating of Conductor Ambient Temperature Temperature (°C) 60°C 75°C 90°C 150°C 200°C 250°C (ºF) 10 or less 1.58 1.36 1.26 1.13 1.09 1.07 50 or less 11–15 1.50 1.31 1.22 1.11 1.08 1.06 51–59 16–20 1.41 1.25 1.18 1.09 1.06 1.05 60–68 21–25 1.32 1.2 1.14 1.07 1.05 1.04 69–77 26–30 1.22 1.13 1.10 1.04 1.03 1.02 78–86 31–35 1.12 1.07 1.05 1.02 1.02 1.01 87–95 36–40 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 96–104 41–45 0.87 0.93 0.95 0.98 0.98 0.99 105–113 46–50 0.71 0.85 0.89 0.95 0.97 0.98 114–122 51–55 0.50 0.76 0.84 0.93 0.95 0.96 123–131 56–60 — 0.65 0.77 0.90 0.94 0.95 132–140 61–65 — 0.53 0.71 0.88 0.92 0.94 141–149 66–70 — 0.38 0.63 0.85 0.90 0.93 150–158 71–75 — — 0.55 0.83 0.88 0.91 159–167 76–80 — — 0.45 0.80 0.87 0.90 168–176 81–90 — — — 0.74 0.83 0.87 177–194 91–100 — — — 0.67 0.79 0.85 195–212 101–110 — — — 0.60 0.75 0.82 213–230 111–120 — — — 0.52 0.71 0.79 231–248 121–130 — — — 0.43 0.66 0.76 249–266 131–140 — — — 0.30 0.61 0.72 267–284 141–160 — — — — 0.50 0.65 285–320 161–180 — — — — 0.35 0.58 321–356 181–200 — — — — — 0.49 357–392 201–225 — — — — — 0.35 393–437

2022 California Electrical Code 70–185

310.16 ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING ∆ Table 310.15(C)(1) Adjustment Factors for More Than Three (d) Adjustment factors shall not apply to Type AC cable or Current-Carrying Conductors to Type MC cable under the following conditions: (1) The cables do not have an overall outer jacket. Percent of Values in Table 310.16 Through (2) Each cable has not more than three current-carrying Table 310.19 as conductors. Adjusted for Ambient (3) The conductors are 12 AWG copper. Number of Conductors* Temperature if Necessary (4) Not more than 20 current-carrying conductors are installed without maintaining spacing, are stacked, or are supported 4–6 80 on “bridle rings.” 7–9 70 10–20 50 Exception to (4): If cables meeting the requirements in 310.15(C) 21–30 45 (1)(d)(1) through (C)(1)(d)(3) with more than 20 current-carrying 31–40 40 conductors are installed longer than 600 mm (24 in.) without 41 and above 35 maintaining spacing, are stacked, or are supported on bridle

*Number of conductors is the total number of conductors in the raceway or rings, a 60 percent adjustment factor shall be applied. cable, including spare conductors. The count shall be adjusted in accordance with 310.15(E) and (F). The count shall not include conductors that are N (2) Raceway Spacing. Spacing between raceways shall be connected to electrical components that cannot be simultaneously energized. maintained. Informational Note: One source for the ambient tempera- (D) Bare or Covered Conductors. Where bare or covered con- tures in various locations is the ASHRAE Handbook — ductors are installed with insulated conductors, the tempera- Fundamentals. ture rating of the bare or covered conductor shall be equal to the lowest temperature rating of the insulated conductors for ∆ (C) Adjustment Factors. the purpose of determining ampacity. N (1) More than Three Current-Carrying Conductors. The ∆ (E) Neutral Conductor. Neutral conductors shall be consid- ampacity of each conductor shall be reduced as shown in ered current carrying in accordance with any of the following:

Table 310.15(C)(1) where the number of current-carrying con- ductors in a raceway or cable exceeds three, or where single (1) A neutral conductor that carries only the unbalanced current conductors or multiconductor cables not installed in raceways from other conductors of the same circuit shall not be required are installed without maintaining spacing for a continuous to be counted when applying the provisions of 310.15(C)(1). length longer than 600 mm (24 in.). Each current-carrying (2) In a 3-wire circuit consisting of two phase conductors conductor of a paralleled set of conductors shall be counted as and the neutral conductor of a 4-wire, 3-phase, wye-con- a current-carrying conductor. nected system, a common conductor carries approximately the same current as the line-to-neutral load currents of the Where conductors of different systems, as provided in 300.3, other conductors and shall be counted when applying the are installed in a common raceway or cable, the adjustment factors provisions of 310.15(C)(1). shown in Table 310.15(C)(1) shall apply only to the number of

(3) On a 4-wire, 3-phase wye circuit where the major portion power and lighting conductors (Articles 210, 215, 220, and 230). of the load consists of nonlinear loads, harmonic currents Informational Note No. 1: See Annex B for adjustment are present in the neutral conductor; the neutral conductor factors for more than three current-carrying conductors shall therefore be considered a current-carrying conductor. in a raceway or cable with load diversity. ∆ (F) Grounding or Bonding Conductor. A grounding or Informational Note No. 2: See 366.23 for adjustment bonding conductor shall not be counted when applying the pro- factors for conductors and ampacity for bare copper and visions of 310.15(C)(1). aluminum bars in auxiliary gutters and 376.22(B) for • adjustment factors for conductors in metal wireways. N 310.16 Ampacities of Insulated Conductors in Raceway, Cable, or Earth (Directly Buried). The maximum ampacities (a) Where conductors are installed in cable trays, the pro- shall be as specified in Table 310.16 where all of the following visions of 392.80 shall apply. conditions apply:

(b) Adjustment factors shall not apply to conductors in raceways having a length not exceeding 600 mm (24 in.). (1) Conductors are rated 0 volts through 2000 volts. (c) Adjustment factors shall not apply to underground con- (2) Conductors are rated 60°C (140°F), 75°C (167°F), or 90°C ductors entering or leaving an outdoor trench if those conduc- (194°F). tors have physical protection in the form of rigid metal conduit, (3) Wiring is installed in a 30°C (86°F) ambient temperature. intermediate metal conduit, rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (4) There are not more than three current-carrying conductors. (PVC), or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) hav- N 310.17 Ampacities of Single-Insulated Conductors in Free ing a length not exceeding 3.05 m (10 ft), and if the number of Air. The maximum ampacities shall be as specified in conductors does not exceed four. Table 310.17 where all of the following conditions apply: 70–186 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 310.17 ∆ Table 310.16 Ampacities of Insulated Conductors with Not More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in Raceway, Cable, or Earth (Directly Buried) Temperature Rating of Conductor [See Table 310.4(A)] 60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) 60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) Types TBS, SA, Types TBS, SA, SIS, FEP, FEPB, SIS, THHN, MI, PFA, RHH, THHW, THW-2, RHW-2, THHN, THWN-2, RHH, THHW, THW-2, RHW-2, USE-2, Types RHW, THWN-2, USE-2, XHH, XHHW, THHW, THW, XHH, XHHW, Types RHW, XHHW-2, THWN, XHHW, XHHW-2, XHWN, THHW, THW, XHWN, XHWN, XHWN-2, XHHN, Types TW, THWN, XHHW, XHWN-2, Size Types TW, UF USE, ZW Z, ZW-2 UF XHWN, USE XHHN AWG Size AWG or kcmil COPPER ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM or kcmil 18* — — 14 — — — — 16* — — 18 — — — — 14* 15 20 25 — — — — 12* 20 25 30 15 20 25 12* 10* 30 35 40 25 30 35 10* 8 40 50 55 35 40 45 8 6 55 65 75 40 50 55 6 4 70 85 95 55 65 75 4 3 85 100 115 65 75 85 3 2 95 115 130 75 90 100 2 1 110 130 145 85 100 115 1 1/0 125 150 170 100 120 135 1/0 2/0 145 175 195 115 135 150 2/0

3/0 165 200 225 130 155 175 3/0 4/0 195 230 260 150 180 205 4/0 250 215 255 290 170 205 230 250 300 240 285 320 195 230 260 300 350 260 310 350 210 250 280 350 400 280 335 380 225 270 305 400 500 320 380 430 260 310 350 500 600 350 420 475 285 340 385 600 700 385 460 520 315 375 425 700 750 400 475 535 320 385 435 750 800 410 490 555 330 395 445 800 900 435 520 585 355 425 480 900 1000 455 545 615 375 445 500 1000 1250 495 590 665 405 485 545 1250 1500 525 625 705 435 520 585 1500 1750 545 650 735 455 545 615 1750 2000 555 665 750 470 560 630 2000 Notes: 1. Section 310.15(B) shall be referenced for ampacity correction factors where the ambient temperature is other than 30°C (86°F). 2. Section 310.15(C)(1) shall be referenced for more than three current-carrying conductors. 3. Section 310.16 shall be referenced for conditions of use. *Section 240.4(D) shall be referenced for conductor overcurrent protection limitations, except as modified elsewhere in the Code. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–187

310.18 ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING ∆ Table 310.17 Ampacities of Single-Insulated Conductors in Free Air Temperature Rating of Conductor [See Table 310.4(A)] 60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) 60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) Types TBS, SA, SIS, Types TBS, SA, FEP, FEPB, MI, SIS, THHN, PFA, RHH, THHW, THW-2, RHW-2, THHN, THWN-2, RHH, THHW, THW-2, RHW-2, USE-2, THWN-2, XHH, XHHW, Types RHW, USE-2, XHH, Types RHW, XHHW-2, THHW, THW, XHHW, XHHW-2, THHW, THW, XHWN, THWN, XHHW, XHWN, XHWN-2, THWN, XHHW, XHWN-2, Types TW, UF XHWN, ZW XHHN, Z, ZW-2 Types TW, UF XHWN XHHN Size AWG Size AWG or kcmil COPPER ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM or kcmil 18 — — 18 — — — — 16 — — 24 — — — — 14* 25 30 35 — — — — 12* 30 35 40 25 30 35 12* 10* 40 50 55 35 40 45 10* 8 60 70 80 45 55 60 8 6 80 95 105 60 75 85 6 4 105 125 140 80 100 115 4 3 120 145 165 95 115 130 3 2 140 170 190 110 135 150 2 1 165 195 220 130 155 175 1 1/0 195 230 260 150 180 205 1/0 2/0 225 265 300 175 210 235 2/0 3/0 260 310 350 200 240 270 3/0 4/0 300 360 405 235 280 315 4/0 250 340 405 455 265 315 355 250

300 375 445 500 290 350 395 300 350 420 505 570 330 395 445 350 400 455 545 615 355 425 480 400 500 515 620 700 405 485 545 500 600 575 690 780 455 545 615 600 700 630 755 850 500 595 670 700 750 655 785 885 515 620 700 750 800 680 815 920 535 645 725 800 900 730 870 980 580 700 790 900 1000 780 935 1055 625 750 845 1000 1250 890 1065 1200 710 855 965 1250 1500 980 1175 1325 795 950 1070 1500 1750 1070 1280 1445 875 1050 1185 1750 2000 1155 1385 1560 960 1150 1295 2000 Notes: 1. Section 310.15(B) shall be referenced for ampacity correction factors where the ambient temperature is other than 30°C (86°F). 2. Section 310.17 shall be referenced for conditions of use. *Section 240.4(D) shall be referenced for conductor overcurrent protection limitations, except as modified elsewhere in the Code. (1) Conductors are rated 0 volts through 2000 volts. (1) Conductors are rated 0 volts through 2000 volts. (2) Conductors are rated 60°C (140°F), 75°C (167°F), or 90°C (2) Conductors are rated 150°C (302°F), 200°C (392°F), or (194°F). 250°C (482°F).

(3) Wiring is installed in a 30°C (86°F) ambient temperature. (3) Wiring is installed in a 40°C (104°F) ambient temperature. (4) There are not more than three current-carrying conductors. N 310.18 Ampacities of Insulated Conductors in Raceway or Cable. The maximum ampacities shall be as specified N 310.19 Ampacities of Single-Insulated Conductors in in Table 310.18 where all of the following conditions apply: Free Air. The maximum ampacities shall be as specified in Table 310.19 where all of the following conditions apply: 70–188 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 310.19 ∆ Table 310.18 Ampacities of Insulated Conductors with Not More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in Raceway or Cable Temperature Rating of Conductor [See Table 310.4(A)] 150°C (302°F) 200°C (392°F) 250°C (482°F) 150°C (302°F) Types FEP, FEPB, Type Z PFA, SA Types PFAH, TFE Type Z NICKEL ALUMINUM OR NICKEL- OR COPPER-CLAD Size AWG or kcmil COPPER COATED COPPER ALUMINUM Size AWG or kcmil 14 34 36 39 — 14 12 43 45 54 30 12 10 55 60 73 44 10 8 76 83 93 57 8 6 96 110 117 75 6 4 120 125 148 94 4 3 143 152 166 109 3 2 160 171 191 124 2 1 186 197 215 145 1 1/0 215 229 244 169 1/0 2/0 251 260 273 198 2/0 3/0 288 297 308 227 3/0 4/0 332 346 361 260 4/0 Notes: 1. Section 310.15(B) shall be referenced for ampacity correction factors where the ambient temperature is other than 40°C (104°F). 2. Section 310.15(C)(1) shall be referenced for more than three current-carrying conductors. 3. Section 310.18 shall be referenced for conditions of use. ∆ Table 310.19 Ampacities of Single-Insulated Conductors in Free Air

Temperature Rating of Conductor [See Table 310.4(A)] 150°C (302°F) 200°C (392°F) 250°C (482°F) 150°C (302°F) Types FEP, FEPB, Type Z PFA, SA Types PFAH, TFE Type Z NICKEL, ALUMINUM OR NICKEL- OR COPPER-CLAD Size AWG or kcmil COPPER COATED COPPER ALUMINUM Size AWG or kcmil 14 46 54 59 — 14 12 60 68 78 47 12 10 80 90 107 63 10 8 106 124 142 83 8 6 155 165 205 112 6 4 190 220 278 148 4 3 214 252 327 170 3 2 255 293 381 198 2 1 293 344 440 228 1 1/0 339 399 532 263 1/0 2/0 390 467 591 305 2/0 3/0 451 546 708 351 3/0 4/0 529 629 830 411 4/0 Notes: 1. Section 310.15(B) shall be referenced for ampacity correction factors where the ambient temperature is other than 40°C (104°F). 2. Section 310.19 shall be referenced for conditions of use. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–189

310.20 ARTICLE 310 — CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING ∆ Table 310.20 Ampacities of Conductors on a Messenger Temperature Rating of Conductor [See Table 310.4(A)] 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) Types MI, THHN, THHW, THW-2, Types THHN, THHW, THWN-2, RHH, RHH, XHHW, RHW-2, USE-2, RHW-2, XHHW-2, Types RHW, THHW, XHHW, XHHW-2, Types RHW, THW, THW-2, THWN-2, THW, THWN, XHWN, XHWN-2, THWN, THHW, XHWN, XHWN-2, XHHW, XHWN, ZW ZW-2 XHHW, XHWN USE-2, ZW-2 ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD Size AWG or kcmil COPPER ALUMINUM Size AWG or kcmil 8 57 66 44 51 8 6 76 89 59 69 6 4 101 117 78 91 4 3 118 138 92 107 3 2 135 158 106 123 2 1 158 185 123 144 1 1/0 183 214 143 167 1/0 2/0 212 247 165 193 2/0 3/0 245 287 192 224 3/0 4/0 287 335 224 262 4/0 250 320 374 251 292 250 300 359 419 282 328 300 350 397 464 312 364 350 400 430 503 339 395 400 500 496 580 392 458 500 600 553 647 440 514 600 700 610 714 488 570 700 750 638 747 512 598 750 800 660 773 532 622 800 900 704 826 572 669 900 1000 748 879 612 716 1000 Notes: 1.

Section 310.15(B) shall be referenced for ampacity correction factors where the ambient temperature is other than 40°C (104°F). 2. Section 310.15(C)(1) shall be referenced for more than three current-carrying conductors. 3. Section 310.20 shall be referenced for conditions of use. (1) Conductors are rated 0 volts through 2000 volts. (3) Wiring is installed in a 40°C (104°F) ambient temperature. (2) Conductors are rated up to 250°C (482°F). (4) There are not more than three single-insulated conductors. (3) Wiring is installed in a 40°C (104°F) ambient temperature. N 310.21 Ampacities of Bare or Covered Conductors in Free Air. N 310.20 Ampacities of Conductors Supported on a Messenger. The maximum ampacities shall be as specified in Table 310.21 The maximum ampacities shall be as specified in Table 310.20 where all of the following conditions apply: where all of the following conditions apply: (1) Wind velocity is 610 mm/sec (2 ft/sec). (1) Conductors are rated 0 volts through 2000 volts. (2) Conductors are 80°C (176°F) total conductor temperature.

(2) Conductors are rated 75°C (167°F) or 90°C (194°F). (3) Wiring is installed in a 40°C (104°F) ambient temperature. 70–190 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 311.10 ∆ Table 310.21 Ampacities of Bare or Covered Conductors in Free Air Copper Conductors AAC Aluminum Conductors Bare Covered Bare Covered AWG or kcmil Amperes AWG or kcmil Amperes AWG or kcmil Amperes AWG or kcmil Amperes 8 98 8 103 8 76 8 80 6 124 6 130 6 96 6 101 4 155 4 163 4 121 4 127 2 209 2 219 2 163 2 171 1/0 282 1/0 297 1/0 220 1/0 231 2/0 329 2/0 344 2/0 255 2/0 268 3/0 382 3/0 401 3/0 297 3/0 312 4/0 444 4/0 466 4/0 346 4/0 364 250 494 250 519 266.8 403 266.8 423 300 556 300 584 336.4 468 336.4 492 500 773 500 812 397.5 522 397.5 548 750 1000 750 1050 477.0 588 477.0 617 1000 1193 1000 1253 556.5 650 556.5 682 — — — — 636.0 709 636.0 744 — — — — 795.0 819 795.0 860 — — — — 954.0 920 — — — — — — 1033.5 968 1033.5 1017 — — — — 1272 1103 1272 1201 — — — — 1590 1267 1590 1381 — — — — 2000 1454 2000 1527 Note: Section 310.21 shall be referenced for conditions of use. N N• Part II. Construction Specifications ARTICLE 311 N 311.10 Constructions and Applications. Type MV cables

Medium Voltage Conductors and Cable shall comply with the applicable provisions in 311.10(A) through (C). NN Part I. General N (A) Conductor Application and Insulation. Conductor appli- cation and insulation shall comply with Table 311.10(A). ∆ 311.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, con- struction specifications, and ampacities for Type MV medium N (B) Thickness of Insulation and Jacket for Nonshielded voltage conductors and cable. Insulated Conductors. Thickness of insulation and jacket for • nonshielded solid dielectric insulated conductors rated 2001 N 311.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply volts to 5000 volts shall comply with Table 311.10(B). within this article and throughout the Code. N (C) Thickness of Insulation for Shielded Insulated Conduc- Electrical Ducts. Electrical conduits, or other raceways round tors. Thickness of insulation for shielded solid dielectric insu- in cross section, that are suitable for use underground or embed- lated conductors rated 2001 volts to 35,000 volts shall comply ded in concrete.

with Table 311.10(C) and 311.10(C)(1) through (C)(3). Medium Voltage Cable, Type MV. A single or multiconductor N (1) 100 Percent Insulation Level. Cables shall be permitted to solid dielectric insulated cable rated 2001 volts up to and be applied where the system is provided with relay protection including 35,000 volts, nominal. such that ground faults will be cleared as rapidly as possible Thermal Resistivity. As used in this Code, the heat transfer but, in any case, within 1 minute. These cables are applicable to capability through a substance by conduction. cable installations that are on grounded systems and shall be per- mitted to be used on other systems provided the above clearing Informational Note: Thermal resistivity is the reciprocal requirements are met in completely de-energizing the faulted of thermal conductivity and is designated Rho, which is section. expressed in the units °C-cm/W. N (2) 133 Percent Insulation Level. Cables shall be permitted 311.6 Listing Requirements. Type MV cables and associ- to be applied in situations where the clearing time requirements

ated fittings shall be listed. • 2022 California Electrical Code 70–191

311.10 ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE Table 311.10(A) Conductor Application and Insulation Rated 2001 Volts and Higher Maximum Operating Application Trade Name Type Letter Temperature Provision Insulation Outer Covering Medium voltage MV-90 90°C Dry or wet locations Thermoplastic or Jacket, sheath, or armor solid dielectric MV-105* 105°C thermosetting *Where design conditions require maximum conductor temperatures above 90°C. Table 311.10(B) Thickness of Insulation and Jacket for Nonshielded Solid Dielectric Insulated Conductors Rated 2001 Volts to 5000 Volts Dry Locations, Single Conductor Wet or Dry Locations Without With Jacket Single Conductor Jacket Multiconductor Insulation Insulation Jacket Insulation Jacket Insulation* Conductor Size (AWG or kcmil) mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils 8 2.79 110 2.29 90 0.76 30 3.18 125 2.03 80 2.29 90 6 2.79 110 2.29 90 0.76 30 3.18 125 2.03 80 2.29 90 4–2 2.79 110 2.29 90 1.14 45 3.18 125 2.03 80 2.29 90 1–2/0 2.79 110 2.29 90 1.14 45 3.18 125 2.03 80 2.29 90

3/0–4/0 2.79 110 2.29 90 1.65 65 3.18 125 2.41 95 2.29 90 213–500 3.05 120 2.29 90 1.65 65 3.56 140 2.79 110 2.29 90 501–750 3.30 130 2.29 90 1.65 65 3.94 155 3.18 125 2.29 90 751–1000 3.30 130 2.29 90 1.65 65 3.94 155 3.18 125 2.29 90 1001–1250 3.56 140 2.92 115 1.65 65 4.32 170 3.56 140 2.92 115 1251–1500 3.56 140 2.92 115 2.03 80 4.32 170 3.56 140 2.92 115 1501–2000 3.56 140 2.92 115 2.03 80 4.32 170 3.94 155 3.56 140 *Under a common overall covering such as a jacket, sheath, or armor. ∆ Table 311.10(C) Thickness of Insulation for Shielded Solid Dielectric Insulated Conductors Rated 2001 Volts to 35,000 Volts 2001–5000 Volts 5001–8000 Volts 8001–15,000 Volts 15,001–25,000 Volts 100 100 133 173 100 133 173 100 133 173 Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Conductor Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Size (AWG or kcmil) mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils

8 2.29 90 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 6–4 2.29 90 2.92 115 3.56 140 4.45 175 — — — — — — — — — — — — 2 2.29 90 2.92 115 3.56 140 4.45 175 4.45 175 5.59 220 6.60 260 — — — — — — 1 2.29 90 2.92 115 3.56 140 4.45 175 4.45 175 5.59 220 6.60 260 6.60 260 8.13 320 10.67 420 1/0–2000 2.29 90 2.92 115 3.56 140 4.45 175 4.45 175 5.59 220 6.60 260 6.60 260 8.13 320 10.67 420 25,001–28,000 Volts 28,001–35,000 Volts 100 Percent 133 Percent 173 Percent 100 Percent 133 Percent 173 Percent Insulation Level Insulation Level Insulation Level Insulation Level Insulation Level Insulation Level Conductor Size (AWG or kcmil) mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils mm mils 1 7.11 280 8.76 345 11.30 445 — — — — — — 1/0–2000 7.11 280 8.76 345 11.30 445 8.76 345 10.67 420 14.73 580 70–192 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 311.30 of the 100 percent level category cannot be met and the faulted N 311.16 Marking. section will be de-energized in a time not exceeding 1 hour. N (A) Required Information. All conductors and cables shall be Cable shall be permitted to be used in 100 percent insulation marked to indicate the following information, using the appli- level applications where the installation requires additional cable method described in 311.16(B): insulation. (1) The maximum rated voltage N (3) 173 Percent Insulation Level. Cables shall be permitted to (2) The proper type letter or letters for the type of wire or cable be applied under all of the following conditions: as specified elsewhere in this Code (1) In industrial establishments where the conditions of (3) The manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other distinctive maintenance and supervision ensure only qualified per- marking by which the organization responsible for the prod- sons service the installation uct can be readily identified

(2) Where the fault clearing time requirements of the 133 per- (4) The AWG size or circular mil area cent level category cannot be met Informational Note: See Chapter 9, Table 8, Conductor (3) Where an orderly shutdown is required to protect equip- Properties, for conductor area expressed in SI units for ment and personnel conductor sizes specified in AWG or circular mil area. (4) Where the faulted section will be de-energized in an orderly shutdown N (B) Method of Marking. One or more of the methods in 311.16(B)(1) through (B)(4) shall be used for marking of Cables shall be permitted to be used in 100 percent or 133 per- cable. cent insulation level applications where the installation requires additional insulation. N (1) Surface Marking. Cables shall be durably marked on the surface. The AWG size or circular mil area shall be repeated at N 311.12 Conductors. intervals not exceeding 610 mm (24 in.). All other markings N (A) Minimum Size of Conductors. The minimum size of con- shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding 1.0 m (40 in.).

ductors shall be as shown in Table 311.12(A), except as permit- N (2) Marker Tape. Metal-covered multiconductor cables shall ted elsewhere in this Code. employ a marker tape located within the cable and along its N (B) Conductor Material. Conductors shall be of aluminum, complete length. copper-clad aluminum, or copper unless otherwise specified. N (3) Tag Marking. Metal-covered, single-conductor cables shall N (C) Stranded Conductors. Where installed in raceways, con- be marked by means of a printed tag attached to the reel. ductors not specifically permitted or required elsewhere in this N (4) Optional Marking of Wire Size. The information Code to be solid shall be stranded. required in 311.16(A)(4) shall be permitted to be marked on the N 311.14 Conductor Identification. Conductors that are intended surface of the individual insulated conductors for multiconduc- for use as ungrounded conductors, whether used as a single con- tor Type MC cable. ductor or in multiconductor cables, shall be finished to be N (C) Optional Markings. Cables shall be permitted to be

clearly distinguishable from grounded and grounding conduc- marked to indicate special characteristics of the cable materials, tors. Distinguishing markings shall not conflict in any manner such as limited smoke and sunlight resistance. with the surface markings required by 311.16(B)(1). Branch- circuit ungrounded conductors shall be identified in accordance N Part III. Installation with 210.5(C). Feeders shall be identified in accordance with ∆ 215.12. 311.30 Installation. Type MV cable shall be installed, termi- nated, and tested by qualified persons. Informational Note No. 1: Information about accepted ∆ Table 311.12(A) Minimum Size of Conductors industry practices and installation procedures for medium- voltage cable are described in ANSI/NECA/NCSCB 600, Minimum Conductor Size (AWG) Standard for Installing and Maintaining Medium-Voltage Cable, and in IEEE 576, Recommended Practice for Instal- Conductor Voltage Copper, Aluminum, lation, Termination, and Testing of Insulated Power Cables Rating (Volts) or Copper-Clad Aluminum as Used in Industrial and Commercial Applications.

2001–5000 8 Informational Note No. 2: Where medium-voltage cable 5001–8000 6 is used for dc circuits, low frequency polarization can cre- 8001–15,000 2 ate hazardous voltages. When handling the cable these 15,001–28,000 1 voltages may be present or may develop on dc stressed 28,001–35,000 1/0 cable while the circuit is energized. Solidly grounding the 2022 California Electrical Code 70–193

311.32 ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE cable prior to contacting, cutting or disconnecting cables 1.5 m (5 ft) from terminations or a maximum of 1.8 m (6 ft) in dc circuits is a method to discharge these voltages. between supports. • ∆ 311.32 Uses Permitted. Type MV cable shall be permitted for 311.44 Shielding. Nonshielded, ozone-resistant insulated con- use on power systems rated up to and including 35,000 volts, ductors with a maximum phase-to-phase voltage of 5000 volts nominal, as follows: shall be permitted in Type MC cables in industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure (1) In wet or dry locations. that only qualified persons service the installation. For other (2) In raceways. establishments, solid dielectric insulated conductors operated (3) In cable trays, where identified for the use, in accor- above 2000 volts in permanent installations shall have ozone- dance with 392.10, 392.20(B), (C), and (D), 392.22(C), resistant insulation and shall be shielded. All metallic insulation

392.30(B)(1), 392.46, 392.56, and 392.60. Type MV cable shields shall be connected to a grounding electrode conductor, that has an overall metallic sheath or armor, complies with a grounding busbar, an equipment grounding conductor, or a the requirements for Type MC cable, and is identified as grounding electrode. “MV or MC” shall be permitted to be installed in cable trays in accordance with 392.10(B)(2). Informational Note: The primary purposes of shielding (4) In messenger-supported wiring in accordance with Part II are to confine the voltage stresses to the insulation, dis- of Article 396. sipate insulation leakage current, drain off the capacitive (5) As exposed runs in accordance with 300.37. Type MV cable charging current, and carry ground-fault current to facili- that has an overall metallic sheath or armor, complies with tate operation of ground-fault protective devices in the the requirements for Type MC cable, and is identified as event of an electrical cable fault. “MV or MC” shall be permitted to be installed as exposed Exception No.

1: Nonshielded insulated conductors listed by runs of metal-clad cable in accordance with 300.37. a qualified testing laboratory shall be permitted for use up to (6) Corrosive conditions where exposed to oils, greases, 2400 volts under the following conditions: vapors, gases, fumes, liquids, or other substances having a deleterious effect on the conductor or insulation shall be of (1) Conductors shall have insulation resistant to electric dis- a type suitable for the application. charge and surface tracking, or the insulated conductor(s) (7) Conductors in parallel in accordance with 310.10(G). shall be covered with a material resistant to ozone, electric (8) Type MV cable used where exposed to direct sunlight shall discharge, and surface tracking. be identified for the use. (2) Where used in wet locations, the insulated conductor(s) shall have an overall nonmetallic jacket or a continuous Informational Note: The “uses permitted” is not an all- metallic sheath. • inclusive list. (3) Insulation and jacket thicknesses shall be in accordance N 311.36 Direct-Burial Conductors.

Type MV conductors with Table 311.10(B). and cables used for direct burial applications shall be shielded, Exception No. 2: Nonshielded insulated conductors listed by identified for such use, and installed in accordance with a qualified testing laboratory shall be permitted for use up to 300.50. 5000 volts to replace existing nonshielded conductors, on exist- Exception No. 1: Nonshielded multiconductor cables rated 2001 ing equipment in industrial establishments only, under the fol- volts to 2400 volts shall be permitted if the cable has an overall lowing conditions: metallic sheath or armor. (1) Where the condition of maintenance and supervision ensures The metallic shield, sheath, or armor shall be connected to a that only qualified personnel install and service the installation. grounding electrode conductor, a grounding busbar, or a ground- (2) Conductors shall have insulation resistant to electric dis- ing electrode. charge and surface tracking, or the insulated conductor(s) shall be covered with a material resistant to ozone, electric Exception No.

2: Airfield lighting cable used in series circuits discharge, and surface tracking. that are rated up to 5000 volts and are powered by regulators (3) Where used in wet locations, the insulated conductor(s) shall be permitted to be nonshielded. shall have an overall nonmetallic jacket or a continuous Informational Note to Exception No. 2: Federal Aviation metallic sheath. Administration (FAA) Advisory Circulars (ACs) provide (4) Insulation and jacket thicknesses shall be in accordance additional practices and methods for airport lighting. with Table 311.10(B). 311.40 Support. Type MV cable terminated in equipment or Informational Note: Relocation or replacement of equip- installed in pull boxes or vaults shall be secured and supported ment may not comply with the term existing as related to by metallic or nonmetallic supports suitable to withstand the this exception. weight by cable ties listed and identified for securement and Exception No. 3: Where permitted in 311.36, Exception No. 2. support, or other approved means, at intervals not exceeding

70–194 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 311.60 N Part IV. Ampacities ∆ Table 311.60(C)(67) Ampacities of Insulated Single Copper Conductor Cables Triplexed in Air ∆ 311.60 Ampacities of Conductors. N (A) General. Temperature Rating of Conductor 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts ∆ (1) Tables or Engineering Supervision. Ampacities for solid Ampacity Ampacity dielectric-insulated conductors shall be permitted to be deter- mined by tables or under engineering supervision, as provided 105°C 105°C Conductor 90°C (221°F) 90°C (221°F) in 311.60(B) and (C). Size (AWG (194°F) Type (194°F) Type The ampacity of Type MV cable installed in cable tray shall or kcmil) Type MV-90 MV-105 Type MV-90 MV-105 be determined in accordance with 392.80(B). 8 65 74 — — 6 90 99 100 110 ∆ (2) Selection of Ampacity. Where more than one calculated 4 120 130 130 140 or tabulated ampacity could apply for a given circuit length, the 2 160 175 170 195 lowest value shall be used. 1 185 205 195 225 1/0 215 240 225 255 Exception: Where different ampacities apply to portions of a 2/0 250 275 260 295

circuit, the higher ampacity shall be permitted to be used if the 3/0 290 320 300 340 total portion(s) of the circuit with the lower ampacity does not 4/0 335 375 345 390 exceed the lesser of 3.0 m (10 ft) or 10 percent of thetotal 250 375 415 380 430 circuit. 350 465 515 470 525 500 580 645 580 650 Informational Note: See 110.40 for conductor tempera- 750 750 835 730 820 ture limitations due to termination provisions. 1000 880 980 850 950 (B) Engineering Supervision. Under engineering supervi- Note: Refer to 311.60(E) for the basis of ampacities, 311.10(A) for conductor sion, conductor ampacities shall be permitted to be calculated maximum operating temperature and application, and 311.60(D)(4) for the ampacity correction factors where the ambient air temperature is other than by using the following general equation: 40°C (104°F). [311.60(B)] Tc − (Ta + ∆Td) 3 I = × 10 amperes Rdc (1 + Yc)Rca where: ∆ Table 311.60(C)(68) Ampacities of Insulated Single Aluminum T c = conductor temperature (°C) Conductor Cables Triplexed in Air Ta = ambient temperature (°C)

∆Td = dielectric loss temperature rise Temperature Rating of Conductor R dc = dc resistance of conductor at temperature, Tc 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Y c = component ac resistance resulting from skin effect and Ampacity Ampacity proximity effect 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Rca = effective thermal resistance between conductor and Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) surrounding ambient Size (AWG Type Type Type Type or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 Informational Note: The dielectric loss temperature rise 8 50 57 — — (∆Td) is negligible for single circuit extruded dielectric 6 70 77 75 84 cables rated below 46 kilovolts. 4 90 100 100 110 2 125 135 130 150 ∆ (C) Tables. Ampacities for conductors rated 2001 volts to 1 145 160 150 175 35,000 volts shall be as specified in Table 311.60(C)(67) through 1/0 170 185 175 200 Table 311.60(C)(86). Ampacities for ambient temperatures other 2/0 195 215 200 230 than those specified in the ampacity tables shall be corrected in 3/0 225 250 230 265 accordance with 311.60(D)(4). 4/0 265 290 270 305 250 295 325 300 335 Informational Note No.

1: For ampacities calculated in 350 365 405 370 415 accordance with 311.60(A), reference IEEE 835, Standard 500 460 510 460 515 Power Cable Ampacity Tables, and the references therein 750 600 665 590 660 for availability of all factors and constants. 1000 715 800 700 780 Informational Note No. 2: Ampacities provided by this Note: Refer to 311.60(E) for basis of ampacities, 311.10(A) for conductor section do not take voltage drop into consideration. See maximum operating temperature and application, and 311.60(D)(4) for the ampacity correction factors where the ambient air temperature is other than 210.19(A), Informational Note No. 4, for branch circuits 40°C (104°F). and 215.2(A), Informational Note No. 2, for feeders. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–195

311.60 ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE ∆ Table 311.60(C)(69) Ampacities of Insulated Single Copper Conductor Isolated in Air Temperature Rating of Conductor 2001–5000 Volts Ampacity 5001–15,000 Volts Ampacity 15,001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Conductor Size 90°C (194°F) 105°C (221°F) 90°C (194°F) 105°C (221°F) 90°C (194°F) 105°C (221°F) (AWG or kcmil) Type MV-90 Type MV-105 Type MV-90 Type MV-105 Type MV-90 Type MV-105 8 83 93 — — — — 6 110 120 110 125 — — 4 145 160 150 165 — — 2 190 215 195 215 — — 1 225 250 225 250 225 250 1/0 260 290 260 290 260 290 2/0 300 330 300 335 300 330 3/0 345 385 345 385 345 380 4/0 400 445 400 445 395 445 250 445 495 445 495 440 490 350 550 615 550 610 545 605 500 695 775 685 765 680 755 750 900 1000 885 990 870 970 1000 1075 1200 1060 1185 1040 1160 1250 1230 1370 1210 1350 1185 1320 1500 1365 1525 1345 1500 1315 1465 1750 1495 1665 1470 1640 1430 1595 2000 1605 1790 1575 1755 1535 1710

Note: Refer to 311.60(E) for the basis of ampacities, 311.10(A) for conductor maximum operating temperature and application, and 311.60(D)(4) for the ampacity correction factors where the ambient air temperature is other than 40°C (104°F). ∆ Table 311.60(C)(70) Ampacities of Insulated Single Aluminum Conductor Isolated in Air Temperature Rating of Conductor 2001–5000 Volts Ampacity 5001–15,000 Volts Ampacity 15,001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Conductor Size (AWG 90°C (194°F) 105°C (221°F) 90°C (194°F) 105°C (221°F) 90°C (194°F) 105°C (221°F) or kcmil) Type MV-90 Type MV-105 Type MV-90 Type MV-105 Type MV-90 Type MV-105 8 64 71 — — — — 6 85 95 87 97 — — 4 115 125 115 130 — — 2 150 165 150 170 — — 1 175 195 175 195 175 195 1/0 200 225 200 225 200 225 2/0 230 260 235 260 230 260 3/0 270 300 270 300 270 300 4/0 310 350 310 350 310 345 250 345 385 345 385 345 380 350 430 480 430 480 430 475 500 545 605 535 600 530 590 750 710 790 700 780 685 765 1000 855 950 840 940 825 920 1250 980 1095 970 1080 950 1055 1500 1105 1230 1085 1215 1060 1180 1750 1215 1355 1195 1335 1165 1300

2000 1320 1475 1295 1445 1265 1410 Note: Refer to 311.60(E) for the basis of ampacities, 311.10(A) for conductor maximum operating temperature and application, and 311.60(D)(4) for the ampacity correction factors where the ambient air temperature is other than 40°C (104°F). 70–196 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 311.60 ∆ Table 311.60(C)(71) Ampacities of an Insulated Three-Conductor ∆ Table 311.60(C)(73) Ampacities of an Insulated Triplexed or Three Copper Cable Isolated in Air Single-Conductor Copper Cables in Isolated Conduit in Air Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) Size (AWG Type Type Type Type Size (AWG Type Type Type Type or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 8 59 66 — — 8 55 61 — — 6 79 88 93 105 6 75 84 83 93 4 105 115 120 135 4 97 110 110 120 2 140 154 165 185 2 130 145 150 165 1 160 180 185 210 1 155 175 170 190 1/0 185 205 215 240 1/0 180 200 195 215 2/0 215 240 245 275 2/0 205 225 225 255 3/0 250 280 285 315 3/0 240 270 260 290 4/0 285 320 325 360 4/0 280 305 295 330 250 320 355 360 400 250 315 355 330 365

350 395 440 435 490 350 385 430 395 440 500 485 545 535 600 500 475 530 480 535 750 615 685 670 745 750 600 665 585 655 1000 705 790 770 860 1000 690 770 675 755 Note: Refer to 311.60(E) for the basis of ampacities, 311.10(A) for conductor Note: Refer to 311.60(E) for the basis of ampacities, 311.10(A) for conductor maximum operating temperature and application, and 311.60(D)(4) for the maximum operating temperature and application, and 311.60(D)(4) for the ampacity correction factors where the ambient air temperature is other than ampacity correction factors where the ambient air temperature is other than 40°C (104°F). 40°C (104°F). ∆ Table 311.60(C)(72) Ampacities of an Insulated Three-Conductor ∆ Table 311.60(C)(74) Ampacities of an Insulated Triplexed or Three Aluminum Cable Isolated in Air Single-Conductor Aluminum Cables in Isolated Conduit in Air Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C

Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) Size (AWG Type Type Type Type Size (AWG Type Type Type Type or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 8 46 51 — — 8 43 48 — — 6 61 68 72 80 6 58 65 65 72 4 81 90 95 105 4 76 85 84 94 2 110 120 125 145 2 100 115 115 130 1 125 140 145 165 1 120 135 130 150 1/0 145 160 170 185 1/0 140 155 150 170 2/0 170 185 190 215 2/0 160 175 175 200 3/0 195 215 220 245 3/0 190 210 200 225 4/0 225 250 255 285 4/0 215 240 230 260 250 250 280 280 315 250 250 280 255 290 350 310 345 345 385 350 305 340 310 350 500 385 430 425 475 500 380 425 385 430 750 495 550 540 600 750 490 545 485 540 1000 585 650 635 705 1000 580 645 565 640 Note: Refer to 311.60(E) for the basis of ampacities, 311.10(A) for conductor Note: Refer to 311.60(E) for the basis of ampacities, 311.10(A) for conductor maximum operating temperature and application, and 311.60(D)(4) for the maximum operating temperature and application, and 311.60(D)(4) for the

ampacity correction factors where the ambient air temperature is other than ampacity correction factors where the ambient air temperature is other than 40°C (104°F). 40°C (104°F). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–197

311.60 ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE ∆ Table 311.60(C)(75) Ampacities of an Insulated Three-Conductor ∆ Table 311.60(C)(77) Ampacities of Three Single-Insulated Copper Cable in Isolated Conduit in Air Copper Conductors in Underground Electrical Ducts (Three Conductors per Electrical Duct) Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Ampacity 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Ampacity 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Size (AWG Type Type Type Type Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 Size (AWG Type Type Type Type or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 8 52 58 — — 6 69 77 83 92 One Circuit [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 1.] 4 91 100 105 120 8 64 69 — — 2 125 135 145 165 6 85 92 90 97 1 140 155 165 185 4 110 120 115 125 1/0 165 185 195 215 2 145 155 155 165 1 170 180 175 185 2/0 190 210 220 245 3/0 220 245 250 280 1/0 195 210 200 215 4/0 255 285 290 320 2/0 220 235 230 245 3/0 250 270 260 275

250 280 315 315 350 4/0 290 310 295 315 350 350 390 385 430 250 320 345 325 345 500 425 475 470 525 350 385 415 390 415 750 525 585 570 635 500 470 505 465 500 1000 590 660 650 725 750 585 630 565 610 1000 670 720 640 690 Note: Refer to 311.60(E) for the basis of ampacities, 311.10(A) for conductor Three Circuits [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 2.] maximum operating temperature and application, and 311.60(D)(4) for the ampacity correction factors where the ambient air temperature is other than 8 56 60 — — 40°C (104°F). 6 73 79 77 83 4 95 100 99 105 2 125 130 130 135 1 140 150 145 155 ∆ Table 311.60(C)(76) Ampacities of an Insulated Three-Conductor Aluminum Cable in Isolated Conduit in Air 1/0 160 175 165 175 2/0 185 195 185 200 3/0 210 225 210 225 Temperature Rating of Conductor 4/0 235 255 240 255 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 250 260 280 260 280 350 315 335 310 330 Ampacity Ampacity 500 375 405 370 395 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C 750 460 495 440 475 1000 525 565 495 535 Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F)

Size (AWG Type Type Type Type Six Circuits [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 3.] or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 8 48 52 — — 6 62 67 64 68 8 41 46 — — 4 80 86 82 88 6 53 59 64 71 2 105 110 105 115 4 71 79 84 94 1 115 125 120 125 2 96 105 115 125 1/0 135 145 135 145 1 110 125 130 145 2/0 150 160 150 165 1/0 130 145 150 170 3/0 170 185 170 185 2/0 150 165 170 190 4/0 195 210 190 205 3/0 170 190 195 220 250 210 225 210 225 4/0 200 225 225 255 350 250 270 245 265 250 220 245 250 280 500 300 325 290 310 350 275 305 305 340 750 365 395 350 375 500 340 380 380 425 1000 410 445 390 415 750 430 480 470 520 Note: Refer to 311.60(F) for basis of ampacities and Table 311.10(A) for the 1000 505 560 550 615 temperature rating of the conductor. Note: Refer to 311.60(E) for the basis of ampacities, 311.10(A) for conductor maximum operating temperature and application, and 311.60(D)(4) for the ampacity correction factors where the ambient air temperature is other than 40°C (104°F). 70–198 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 311.60 ∆ Table 311.60(C)(78) Ampacities of Three Single-Insulated ∆ Table 311.60(C)(79) Ampacities of Three Insulated Copper Aluminum Conductors in Underground Electrical Ducts Conductors Cabled Within an Overall Covering (Three- (Three Conductors per Electrical Duct) Conductor Cable) in Underground Electrical Ducts (One Cable per Electrical Duct) Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Ampacity 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Ampacity 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Size (AWG Type Type Type Type Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 Size (AWG Type Type Type Type or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 One Circuit [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 1.] One Circuit [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 1.] 8 50 54 — — 6 66 71 70 75 8 59 64 — — 4 86 93 91 98 6 78 84 88 95 2 115 125 120 130 4 100 110 115 125 1 130 140 135 145 2 135 145 150 160

1/0 150 160 155 165 1 155 165 170 185 2/0 170 185 175 190 1/0 175 190 195 210 3/0 195 210 200 215 2/0 200 220 220 235 4/0 225 245 230 245 3/0 230 250 250 270 250 250 270 250 270 4/0 265 285 285 305 350 305 325 305 330 250 290 315 310 335 500 370 400 370 400 350 355 380 375 400 750 470 505 455 490 500 430 460 450 485 1000 545 590 525 565 750 530 570 545 585 Three Circuits [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 2.] 1000 600 645 615 660 8 44 47 — — Three Circuits [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 2.] 6 57 61 60 65 8 53 57 — — 4 74 80 77 83 6 69 74 75 81 2 96 105 100 105 4 89 96 97 105 1 110 120 110 120 2 115 125 125 135 1/0 125 135 125 140 1 135 145 140 155 2/0 145 155 145 155 1/0 150 165 160 175 3/0 160 175 165 175 2/0 170 185 185 195 4/0 185 200 185 200 3/0 195 210 205 220 250 205 220 200 220 4/0 225 240 230 250 350 245 265 245 260 250 245 265 255 270 500 295 320 290 315 350 295 315 305 325 750 370 395 355 385 500 355 380 360 385 1000 425 460 405 440 750 430 465 430 465 Six Circuits [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 3.] 1000 485 520 485 515

8 38 41 — — Six Circuits [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 3.] 6 48 52 50 54 8 46 50 — — 4 62 67 64 69 6 60 65 63 68 2 80 86 80 88 4 77 83 81 87 1 91 98 90 99 2 98 105 105 110 1/0 105 110 105 110 1 110 120 115 125 2/0 115 125 115 125 1/0 125 135 130 145 3/0 135 145 130 145 2/0 145 155 150 160 4/0 150 165 150 160 3/0 165 175 170 180 250 165 180 165 175 4/0 185 200 190 200 350 195 210 195 210 250 200 220 205 220 500 240 255 230 250 350 240 270 245 275 750 290 315 280 305 500 290 310 290 305 1000 335 360 320 345 750 350 375 340 365 1000 390 420 380 405 Note: Refer to 311.60(F) for basis of ampacities and Table 311.10(A) for the temperature rating of the conductor. Note: Refer to 311.60(F) for basis of ampacities and Table 311.10(A) for the temperature rating of the conductor. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–199

311.60 ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE ∆ Table 311.60(C)(80) Ampacities of Three Insulated Aluminum ∆ Table 311.60(C)(81) Ampacities of Single Insulated Copper Conductors Cabled Within an Overall Covering (Three- Conductors Directly Buried in Earth Conductor Cable) in Underground Electrical Ducts (One Cable per Electrical Duct) Temperature Rating of Conductor 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Temperature Rating of Conductor Ampacity Ampacity 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Ampacity Ampacity Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Size (AWG Type Type Type Type Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 Size (AWG Type Type Type Type One Circuit, Three Conductors [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 Detail 9.] One Circuit [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 1.] 8 110 115 — — 8 46 50 — — 6 140 150 130 140 6 61 66 69 74 4 180 195 170 180 4 80 86 89 96 2 230 250 210 225 2 105 110 115 125 1 260 280 240 260 1 120 130 135 145 1/0 295 320 275 295

1/0 140 150 150 165 2/0 335 365 310 335 2/0 160 170 170 185 3/0 385 415 355 380 3/0 180 195 195 210 4/0 435 465 405 435 4/0 205 220 220 240 250 470 510 440 475 250 230 245 245 265 350 570 615 535 575 350 280 310 295 315 500 690 745 650 700 500 340 365 355 385 750 845 910 805 865 750 425 460 440 475 1000 980 1055 930 1005 1000 495 535 510 545 Two Circuits, Six Conductors [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Three Circuits [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 2.] Detail 10.] 8 41 44 — — 8 100 110 — — 6 54 58 59 64 6 130 140 120 130 4 70 75 75 81 4 165 180 160 170 2 90 97 100 105 2 215 230 195 210 1 105 110 110 120 1 240 260 225 240 1/0 120 125 125 135 1/0 275 295 255 275 2/0 135 145 140 155 2/0 310 335 290 315 3/0 155 165 160 175 3/0 355 380 330 355 4/0 175 185 180 195 4/0 400 430 375 405 250 190 205 200 215 250 435 470 410 440 350 230 250 240 255 350 520 560 495 530 500 280 300 285 305 500 630 680 600 645 750 345 375 350 375 750 775 835 740 795 1000 400 430 400 430 1000 890 960 855 920 Six Circuits [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 3.]

Note: Refer to 311.60(F) for basis of ampacities and Table 311.10(A) for the 8 36 39 — — temperature rating of the conductor. 6 46 50 49 53 4 60 65 63 68 2 77 83 80 86 1 87 94 90 98 1/0 99 105 105 110 2/0 110 120 115 125 3/0 130 140 130 140 4/0 145 155 150 160 250 160 170 160 170 350 190 205 190 205 500 230 245 230 245 750 280 305 275 295 1000 320 345 315 335 Note: Refer to 311.60(F) for basis of ampacities and Table 311.10(A) for the temperature rating of the conductor. 70–200 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 311.60 ∆ Table 311.60(C)(82) Ampacities of Single Insulated Aluminum ∆ Table 311.60(C)(83) Ampacities of Three Insulated Copper Conductors Directly Buried in Earth Conductors Cabled Within an Overall Covering (Three- Conductor Cable), Directly Buried in Earth Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Ampacity 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Ampacity 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Size (AWG Type Type Type Type Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 Size (AWG Type Type Type Type or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 One Circuit, Three Conductors [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 9.] One Circuit [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 5.] 8 85 90 — — 8 85 89 — — 6 110 115 100 110 6 105 115 115 120 4 140 150 130 140 4 135 150 145 155 2 180 195 165 175 2 180 190 185 200 1 205 220 185 200 1 200 215 210 225 1/0 230 250 215 230 1/0 230 245 240 255

2/0 265 285 245 260 2/0 260 280 270 290 3/0 300 320 275 295 3/0 295 320 305 330 4/0 340 365 315 340 4/0 335 360 350 375 250 370 395 345 370 250 365 395 380 410 350 445 480 415 450 350 440 475 460 495 500 540 580 510 545 500 530 570 550 590 750 665 720 635 680 750 650 700 665 720 1000 780 840 740 795 1000 730 785 750 810 Two Circuits, Six Conductors [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Two Circuits [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 6.] Detail 10.] 8 80 84 — — 8 80 85 — — 6 100 105 105 115 6 100 110 95 100 4 130 140 135 145 4 130 140 125 130 2 165 180 170 185 2 165 180 155 165 1 185 200 195 210 1 190 200 175 190 1/0 215 230 220 235 1/0 215 230 200 215 2/0 240 260 250 270 2/0 245 260 225 245 3/0 275 295 280 305 3/0 275 295 255 275 4/0 310 335 320 345 4/0 310 335 290 315 250 340 365 350 375 250 340 365 320 345 350 410 440 420 450 350 410 440 385 415 500 490 525 500 535 500 495 530 470 505 750 595 640 605 650 750 610 655 580 625 1000 665 715 675 730 1000 710 765 680 730 Note: Refer to 311.60(F) for basis of ampacities and Table 311.10(A) for the

Note: Refer to 311.60(F) for basis of ampacities and Table 311.10(A) for the temperature rating of the conductor. temperature rating of the conductor. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–201

311.60 ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE ∆ Table 311.60(C)(84) Ampacities of Three Insulated Aluminum ∆ Table 311.60(C)(85) Ampacities of Three Triplexed Single Conductors Cabled Within an Overall Covering Insulated Copper Conductors Directly Buried in Earth (Three-Conductor Cable), Directly Buried in Earth Temperature Rating of Conductor Temperature Rating of Conductor 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) Size (AWG Type Type Type Type Size (AWG Type Type Type Type or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 One Circuit, Three Conductors [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), One Circuit [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 5.] Detail 7.] 8 65 70 — — 8 90 95 — — 6 80 88 90 95 6 120 130 115 120 4 105 115 115 125 4 150 165 150 160 2 140 150 145 155 2 195 205 190 205 1 155 170 165 175 1 225 240 215 230 1/0 180 190 185 200 1/0 255 270 245 260

2/0 205 220 210 225 2/0 290 310 275 295 3/0 230 250 240 260 3/0 330 360 315 340 4/0 260 280 270 295 4/0 375 405 360 385 250 285 310 300 320 250 410 445 390 410 350 345 375 360 390 350 490 580 470 505 500 420 450 435 470 500 590 635 565 605 750 520 560 540 580 750 725 780 685 740 1000 600 650 620 665 1000 825 885 770 830 Two Circuits [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 6.] Two Circuits, Six Conductors [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 8.] 8 60 66 — — 6 75 83 80 95 8 85 90 — — 4 100 110 105 115 6 110 115 105 115 2 130 140 135 145 4 140 150 140 150 1 145 155 150 165 2 180 195 175 190 1 205 220 200 215 1/0 165 180 170 185 2/0 190 205 195 210 1/0 235 250 225 240 3/0 215 230 220 240 2/0 265 285 255 275 4/0 245 260 250 270 3/0 300 320 290 315 4/0 340 365 325 350 250 265 285 275 295 350 320 345 330 355 250 370 395 355 380 500 385 415 395 425 350 445 480 425 455 750 480 515 485 525 500 535 575 510 545 1000 550 590 560 600 750 650 700 615 660 1000 740 795 690 745 Note: Refer to 311.60(F) for basis of ampacities and Table 311.10(A) for the temperature rating of the conductor.

Note: Refer to 311.60(F) for basis of ampacities and Table 311.10(A) for the temperature rating of the conductor. 70–202 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 311.60 ∆ Table 311.60(C)(86) Ampacities of Three Triplexed Single Informational Note: Tables other than those listed con- Insulated Aluminum Conductors Directly Buried in Earth tain the ampacity of cables with shields grounded at mul- tiple points. Temperature Rating of Conductor ∆ (2) Burial Depth. Where the burial depth of direct burial or 2001–5000 Volts 5001–35,000 Volts electrical duct bank circuits is modified from the values shown Ampacity Ampacity in a figure or table, ampacities shall be permitted to be modi- 90°C 105°C 90°C 105°C fied as indicated in 311.60(D)(2)(a) and (D)(2)(b). No ampac- Conductor (194°F) (221°F) (194°F) (221°F) ity adjustments shall be required where the burial depth is Size (AWG Type Type Type Type decreased. or kcmil) MV-90 MV-105 MV-90 MV-105 (a) Where burial depths are increased in part(s) of an elec- One Circuit, Three Conductors [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), trical duct run, a decrease in ampacity of the conductors shall Detail 7.] not be required, provided the total length of parts of the duct

8 70 75 — — run increased in depth is less than 25 percent of the total run 6 90 100 90 95 length. 4 120 130 115 125 (b) Where burial depths are deeper than shown in a specific 2 155 165 145 155 1 175 190 165 175 underground ampacity table or figure, an ampacity derating fac- 1/0 200 210 190 205 tor of 6 percent per 300 mm (1 ft) increase in depth for all val- 2/0 225 240 215 230 ues of rho shall be permitted. 3/0 255 275 245 265 (3) Electrical Ducts Entering Equipment Enclosures. At 4/0 290 310 280 305 locations where electrical ducts enter equipment enclosures 250 320 350 305 325 350 385 420 370 400 from underground, spacing between such ducts, as shown in 500 465 500 445 480 Figure 311.60(D)(3), shall be permitted to be reduced without 750 580 625 550 590 requiring the ampacity of conductors therein to be reduced. 1000 670 725 635 680 (4) Ambient Temperature Correction. Ampacities for ambi- Two Circuits, Six Conductors [See Figure 311.60(D)(3), Detail 8.] ent temperatures other than those specified in the ampacity tables

8 65 70 — — shall be corrected in accordance with Table 311.60(D)(4) or shall 6 85 95 85 90 be permitted to be calculated using the following equation: 4 110 120 105 115 2 140 150 135 145 Tc − T'a I' = I [311.60(D)(4)] 1 160 170 155 170 Tc − Ta 1/0 180 195 175 190 2/0 205 220 200 215 where: 3/0 235 250 225 245 I′ = ampacity corrected for ambient temperature 4/0 265 285 255 275 I = ampacity shown in the table for Tc and Ta 250 290 310 280 300 T c = temperature rating of conductor (°C) 350 350 375 335 360 Ta′ = new ambient temperature (°C) 500 420 455 405 435 T = ambient temperature used in the table (°C) 750 520 560 485 525 a 1000 600 645 565 605 N (E) Ampacity in Air. Ampacities for conductors and cables Note: Refer to 311.60(F) for basis of ampacities and Table 311.10(A) for the in air shall be as specified in Table 311.60(C)(67) through temperature rating of the conductor. Table 311.60(C)(76). Ampacities shall be based on the following: (1) Conductor temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) (2) Ambient air temperature of 40°C (104°F)

Informational Note: See 311.60(D)(4) where the ambi- N (D) Ampacity Adjustment. ent air temperature is other than 40°C (104°F). (1) Grounded Shields. Ampacities shown in Table N (F) Ampacity in Underground Electrical Ducts and Direct 311.60(C)(69), Table 311.60(C)(70), Table 311.60(C)(81), and Buried in Earth. Ampacities for conductors and cables in Table 311.60(C)(82) shall apply for cables with shields grounded underground electrical ducts and direct buried in earth shall at one point only. Where shields for these cables are grounded be as specified in Table 311.60(C)(77) through Table 311.60(C) at more than one point, ampacities shall be adjusted to take into (86). Ampacities shall be based on the following: consideration the heating due to shield currents. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–203

311.60 ARTICLE 311 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 190 mm(7.5 in.) Detail 1 290 mm × 290 mm 190 mm (7.5 in.) (11.5 in. × 11.5 in.) 190 mm (7.5 in.) 190 mm(7.5 in.) Electrical duct bank Detail 2 One electrical duct 475 mm × 475 mm (19 in. × 19 in.) 190 mm (7.5 in.) Electrical duct bank Three electrical ducts Detail 3 or 475 mm × 675 mm (19 in. × 27 in.) Electrical duct bank Six electrical ducts or 190 mm 190 mm (7.5 in.) (7.5 in.) 675 mm × 290 mm (27 in. × 11.5 in.) Electrical duct bank Three electrical ducts 190 mm (7.5 in.) 190 mm 190 mm (7.5 in.) (7.5 in.) 675 mm × 475 mm (27 in. × 19 in.) Electrical duct bank Six electrical ducts 600 mm 600 mm (24 in.) (24 in.) Detail 5 Detail 6 Detail 7 Detail 8 Buried 3 Buried 3 Buried triplexed Buried triplexed conductor conductor cables (1 circuit) cables (2 circuits) cable cables 190 mm 190 mm 190 mm 190 mm 190 mm 190 mm (7.5 in.) (7.5 in.) (7.5 in.) (7.5 in.) 600 mm (7.5 in.) (7.5 in.) (24 in.) Detail 9 Detail 10 Buried single-conductor Buried single-conductor cables (1 circuit) cables (2 circuits) Legend

Note: Minimum burial depths to top electrical ducts or cables shall be Backfill (earth or concrete) in accordance with 300.50. Maximum depth to the top of electrical duct banks shall be 750 mm (30 in.) and maximum depth to the top Electrical duct of direct-buried cables shall be 900 mm (36 in.). Cable or cables ∆ FIGURE 311.60(D)(3) Cable Installation Dimensions for Use with Table 311.60(C)(77) Through Table 311.60(C)(86). (1) Ambient earth temperature of 20°C (68°F) (6) Minimum burial depths to the top electrical ducts or cables (2) Arrangement in accordance with Figure 311.60(D)(3) shall be in accordance with 300.50. (3) 100 percent load factor (7) Maximum depth to the top of electrical duct banks shall (4) Thermal resistance (Rho) of 90 be 750 mm (30 in.), and maximum depth to the top of direct- (5) Conductor temperatures 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) buried cables shall be 900 mm (36 in.). 70–204 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 312 — CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES 312.5 Table 311.60(D)(4) Ambient Temperature Correction Factors Informational Note: For protection against corrosion, see 300.6. For ambient temperatures other than 40°C (104°F), multi- ply the allowable ampacities specified in the ampacity tables 312.3 Position in Wall. In walls of concrete, tile, or other non- by the appropriate factor shown below. combustible material, cabinets shall be installed so that the front edge of the cabinet is not set back of the finished surface more Temperature Rating than 6 mm (1⁄4 in.). In walls constructed of wood or other com- Ambient of Conductor Ambient Temperature Temperature bustible material, cabinets shall be flush with the finished sur- (°C) 90°C 105°C (°F) face or project therefrom. 312.4 Repairing Noncombustible Surfaces. Noncombus- 10 or less 1.26 1.21 50 or less 11–15 1.22 1.18 51–59 tible surfaces that are broken or incomplete shall be repaired so 16–20 1.18 1.14 60–68 there will be no gaps or open spaces greater than 3 mm ( 1⁄8 in.)

21–25 1.14 1.11 69–77 at the edge of the cabinet or cutout box employing a flush-type 26–30 1.10 1.07 78–86 cover. 31–35 1.05 1.04 87–95 36–40 1.00 1.00 96–104 312.5 Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket Enclosures. 41–45 0.95 0.96 105–113 Conductors entering enclosures within the scope of this article 46–50 0.89 0.92 114–122 shall be protected from abrasion and shall comply with 312.5(A) 51–55 0.84 0.88 123–131 through (C). 56–60 0.77 0.83 132–140 61–65 0.71 0.78 141–149 (A) Openings to Be Closed. Openings through which conduc- 66–70 0.63 0.73 150–158 tors enter shall be closed in an approved manner. 71–75 0.55 0.68 159–167 76–80 0.45 0.62 168–176 (B) Metal Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket 81–85 0.32 0.55 177–185 Enclosures. Where metal enclosures within the scope of this 86–90 — 0.48 186–194 article are installed with messenger-supported wiring, open wir- 91–95 — 0.39 195–203 ing on insulators, or concealed knob-and-tube wiring, conduc- 96–100 — 0.28 204–212 tors shall enter through insulating bushings or, in dry locations,

through flexible tubing extending from the last insulating sup- port and firmly secured to the enclosure. (C) Cables. Where cable is used, each cable shall be secured to ARTICLE 312 the cabinet, cutout box, or meter socket enclosure. Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, Exception No. 1: Cables with entirely nonmetallic sheaths shall and Meter Socket Enclosures be permitted to enter the top of a surface-mounted enclosure through one or more nonflexible raceways not less than 450 mm (18 in.) and not more than 3.0 m (10 ft) in length, provided all of Part I. Scope and Installation the following conditions are met: 312.1 Scope. This article covers the installation and construc- (1) Each cable is fastened within 300 mm (12 in.), measured tion specifications of cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter socket along the sheath, of the outer end of the raceway. enclosures. It does not apply to equipment operating at over (2) The raceway extends directly above the enclosure and does 1000 volts, except as specifically referenced elsewhere in the not penetrate a structural ceiling. Code.

(3) A fitting is provided on each end of the raceway to protect 312.2 Damp and Wet Locations. In damp or wet locations, the cable(s) from abrasion and the fittings remain accessible surface-type enclosures within the scope of this article shall after installation. be placed or equipped so as to prevent moisture or water from (4) The raceway is sealed or plugged at the outer end using entering and accumulating within the cabinet or cutout box, approved means so as to prevent access to the enclosure and shall be mounted so there is at least 6-mm (1⁄4-in.) airspace through the raceway. between the enclosure and the wall or other supporting surface. (5) The cable sheath is continuous through the raceway and Enclosures installed in wet locations shall be weatherproof. For extends into the enclosure beyond the fitting not less than 1 enclosures in wet locations, raceways or cables entering above 6 mm ( ⁄4 in.). the level of uninsulated live parts shall use fittings listed for wet (6) The raceway is fastened at its outer end and at other points locations.

in accordance with the applicable article. (7) Where installed as conduit or tubing, the cable fill does not Exception: Nonmetallic enclosures shall be permitted to be exceed the amount that would be permitted for complete installed without the airspace on a concrete, masonry, tile, or conduit or tubing systems by Table 1 of Chapter 9 of this similar surface. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–205

312.6 ARTICLE 312 — CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES Code and all applicable notes thereto. Note 2 to the tables in (1) Conductors Not Entering or Leaving Opposite Wall. Chapter 9 does not apply to this condition. Table 312.6(A) shall apply where the conductor does not enter or leave the enclosure through the wall opposite its terminal. Informational Note: See Table 1 in Chapter 9, including Note 9, for allowable cable fill in circular raceways. See (2) Conductors Entering or Leaving Opposite Wall. 310.15(C)(1) for required ampacity reductions for mul- Table 312.6(B) shall apply where the conductor does enter or tiple cables installed in a common raceway. leave the enclosure through the wall opposite its terminal. Exception No. 2: Single conductors and multiconductor cables Exception No. 1: Where the distance between the wall and shall be permitted to enter enclosures in accordance with its terminal is in accordance with Table 312.6(A), a conductor 392.46(A) or (B). shall be permitted to enter or leave an enclosure through the

wall opposite its terminal, provided the conductor enters or 312.6 Deflection of Conductors. Conductors at terminals or leaves the enclosure where the gutter joins an adjacent gut- conductors entering or leaving cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter ter that has a width that conforms to Table 312.6(B) for the socket enclosures shall comply with 312.6(A) through (C). conductor. Exception: Wire-bending space in enclosures for motor con- Exception No. 2: A conductor not larger than 350 kcmil shall trollers with provisions for one or two wires per terminal shall be permitted to enter or leave an enclosure containing only a comply with 430.10(B). meter socket(s) through the wall opposite its terminal, provided (A) Width of Wiring Gutters. Conductors shall not be the distance between the terminal and the opposite wall is not deflected within a cabinet or cutout box unless a gutter having a less than that specified in Table 312.6(A) and the terminal is width in accordance with Table 312.6(A) is provided. Conduc- a lay-in type or removable lug with integral mounting tang,

tors in parallel in accordance with 310.10(G) shall be judged on where the terminal is either of the following: the basis of the number of conductors in parallel. (1) Directed toward the opening in the enclosure and within a (B) Wire-Bending Space at Terminals. Wire-bending space at 45-degree angle of directly facing the enclosure wall each terminal shall be provided in accordance with 312.6(B) (2) Directly facing the enclosure wall and offset not greater than (1) or (B)(2). 50 percent of the bending space specified in Table 312.6(A) ∆ Table 312.6(A) Minimum Wire-Bending Space at Terminals and Minimum Width of Wiring Gutters Wire Size (AWG or kcmil) Wires per Terminal Compact Stranded AA-8000 Aluminum Alloy 1 2 3 4 5 All Other Conductors Conductors (see Note 2) mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. 14–10 12–8 Not specified — — — — — — — — 8–6 6–4 38.1 1 1⁄2 — — — — — — — — 4–3 2–1 50.8 2 — — — — — — — — 2 1/0 63.5 2 1⁄2 — — — — — — — — 1 2/0 76.2 3 — — — — — — — — 1/0–2/0 3/0–4/0 88.9 3 1⁄2 127 5 178 7 — — — — 3/0–4/0 250–300 102 4 152 6 203 8 — — — —

250 350 114 4 1⁄2 152 6 203 8 254 10 — — 300–350 400–500 127 5 203 8 254 10 305 12 — — 400–500 600–750 152 6 203 8 254 10 305 12 356 14 600–700 800–1000 203 8 254 10 305 12 356 14 406 16 750–900 — 203 8 305 12 356 14 406 16 457 18 1000–1250 — 254 10 — — — — — — — — 1500–2000 — 305 12 — — — — — — — — Notes: 1. Bending space at terminals shall be measured in a straight line from the end of the lug or wire connector (in the direction that the wire leaves the terminal) to the wall, barrier, or obstruction. 2. This column shall be permitted to be used to determine the minimum wire-bending space for compact stranded aluminum conductors in sizes up to 1000 kcmil and manufactured using AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum alloy conductor material in accordance with 310.3(B). The minimum width of the wire gutter space shall be determined using the all other conductors value in this table. 70–206 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 312 — CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES 312.8 ∆ Table 312.6(B) Minimum Wire-Bending Space at Terminals Wire Size (AWG or kcmil) Wires per Terminal Compact 1 2 3 4 or More Stranded AA-8000 Aluminum Alloy All Other Conductors Conductors (See Note 3.) mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. 14–10 12–8 Not specified — — — — — 8 6 38.1 1 1⁄2 — — — — — 6 4 50.8 2 — — — — — 4 2 76.2 3 — — — — — 3 1 76.2 3 — — — — — 2 1/0 88.9 3 1⁄2 — — — — — 1 2/0 114 4 1⁄2 — — — — — 1/0 3/0 140 5 1⁄2 140 5 1⁄2 178 7 — — 2/0 4/0 152 6 152 6 190 7 1⁄2 — — 3/0 250 165 a 61⁄2a 165a 61⁄2a 203 8 — — 4/0 300 178b 7b 190c 71⁄2c 216a 81⁄2a — — 250 350 216 d 81⁄2d 216d 81⁄2d 229b 9b 254 10 300 400 254 e 10e 254d 10d 279b 11b 305 12 350 500 305 e 12e 305e 12e 330e 13e 356d 14d 400 600 330 e 13e 330e 13e 356e 14e 381e 15e 500 700–750 356 e 14e 356e 14e 381e 15e 406e 16e 600 800–900 381 e 15e 406e 16e 457e 18e 483e 19e 700 1000 406 e 16e 457e 18e 508e 20e 559e 22e 750 — 432e 17e 483e 19e 559e 22e 610e 24e 800 — 457 18 508 20 559 22 610 24 900 — 483 19 559 22 610 24 610 24 1000 — 508 20 — — — —

1250 — 559 22 — — — — 1500 — 610 24 — — — — 1750 — 610 24 — — — — 2000 — 610 24 — — — — Notes: 1. Bending space at terminals shall be measured in a straight line from the end of the lug or wire connector in a direction perpendicular to the enclosure wall. 2. For removable and lay-in wire terminals intended for only one wire, bending space shall be permitted to be reduced by the following number of millimeters (inches): a12.7 mm (1⁄2 in.) b25.4 mm (1 in.) c38.1 mm (11⁄2 in.) d50.8 mm (2 in.) e76.2 mm (3 in.) 3. This column shall be permitted to determine the required wire-bending space for compact stranded aluminum conductors in sizes up to 1000 kcmil and manufactured using AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum alloy conductor material in accordance with 310.3(B). Informational Note: Offset is the distance measured along ∆ 312.8 Switch and Overcurrent Device Enclosures. The the enclosure wall from the axis of the centerline of the wiring space within enclosures for switches and overcurrent

terminal to a line passing through the center of the opening devices shall be permitted for other wiring and equipment subject in the enclosure. to limitations for specific equipment as provided in 312.8(A) and (B). (C) Conductors 4 AWG or Larger. Installation shall comply with 300.4(G). (A) Splices, Taps, and Feed-Through Conductors. The wiring space of enclosures for switches or overcurrent devices shall be 312.7 Space in Enclosures. Cabinets and cutout boxes shall permitted for conductors feeding through, spliced, or tapping off have approved space to accommodate all conductors installed to other enclosures, switches, or overcurrent devices where all in them without crowding. of the following conditions are met: 2022 California Electrical Code 70–207

312.9 ARTICLE 312 — CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES (1) The total of all conductors installed at any cross section of (C) Nonmetallic Cabinets. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be the wiring space does not exceed 40 percent of the cross- listed, or they shall be submitted for approval prior to installation. sectional area of that space. 312.11 Spacing. The spacing within cabinets and cutout (2) The total area of all conductors, splices, and taps installed boxes shall comply with 312.11(A) through (D). at any cross section of the wiring space does not exceed 75 percent of the cross-sectional area of that space. (A) General. Spacing within cabinets and cutout boxes shall (3) A warning label complying with 110.21(B) is applied to the provide approved spacing for the distribution of wires and enclosure that identifies the closest disconnecting means for cables placed in them and for a separation between metal parts any feed-through conductors. of devices and apparatus mounted within them in accordance with 312.11(A)(1), (A)(2), and (A)(3).

∆ (B) Power Monitoring or Energy Management Equip- (1) Base. Other than at points of support, there shall be an air- ment. The wiring space of enclosures for switches or overcur- space of at least 1.59 mm (0.0625 in.) between the base of the rent devices shall be permitted to contain power monitoring or device and the wall of any metal cabinet or cutout box in which energy management equipment in accordance with 312.8(B) the device is mounted. (1) through (B)(3). (2) Doors. There shall be an airspace of at least 25.4 mm N (1) Identification. The power monitoring or energy manage- (1.00 in.) between any live metal part, including live metal parts ment equipment shall be identified as a field installable acces- of enclosed fuses, and the door. sory as part of the listed equipment or is a listed kit evaluated for field installation in switch or overcurrent device enclosures. Exception: Where the door is lined with an approved insulat- ing material or is of a thickness of metal not less than 2.36 mm N (2) Area. The total area of all conductors, splices, taps, and

(0.093 in.) uncoated, the airspace shall not be less than 12.7 mm equipment at any cross section of the wiring space shall not (0.500 in.). exceed 75 percent of the cross-sectional area of that space. (3) Live Parts. There shall be an airspace of at least 12.7 mm N (3) Conductors. Conductors used exclusively for control or (0.500 in.) between the walls, back, gutter partition, if of metal, instrumentation circuits shall comply with either 312.8(B)(3)(a) or door of any cabinet or cutout box and the nearest exposed or (B)(3)(b). current-carrying part of devices mounted within the cabinet (a) Conductors shall comply with 725.49. where the voltage does not exceed 250. This spacing shall be (b) Conductors smaller than 18 AWG, but not smaller than increased to at least 25.4 mm (1.00 in.) for voltages of 251 to 22 AWG for a single conductor and 26 AWG for a multiconduc- 1000, nominal. tor cable, shall be permitted to be used where the conductors and cable assemblies meet all of the following conditions: Exception: Where the conditions in 312.11(A)(2), Exception,

are met, the airspace for nominal voltages from 251 to 600 shall (1) Are enclosed within raceways or routed along one or more be permitted to be not less than 12.7 mm (0.500 in.). walls of the enclosure and secured at intervals that do not exceed 250 mm (10 in.) (B) Switch Clearance. Cabinets and cutout boxes shall be (2) Are secured within 250 mm (10 in.) of terminations deep enough to allow the closing of the doors when 30-ampere (3) Are secured to prevent contact with current carrying com- branch-circuit panelboard switches are in any position, when ponents within the enclosure combination cutout switches are in any position, or when other (4) Are rated for the system voltage and not less than 600 volts single-throw switches are opened as far as their construction (5) Have a minimum insulation temperature rating of 90°C permits. 312.9 Side or Back Wiring Spaces or Gutters. Cabinets and (C) Wiring Space. Cabinets and cutout boxes that contain cutout boxes shall be provided with back-wiring spaces, gutters, devices or apparatus connected within the cabinet or box to more

or wiring compartments as required by 312.11(C) and (D). than eight conductors, including those of branch circuits, meter loops, feeder circuits, power circuits, and similar circuits, but not Part II. Construction Specifications including the supply circuit or a continuation thereof, shall have 312.10 Material. Cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter socket back-wiring spaces or one or more side-wiring spaces, side gut- enclosures shall comply with 312.10(A) through (C). ters, or wiring compartments. (A) Metal Cabinets and Cutout Boxes. Metal enclosures (D) Wiring Space — Enclosure. Side-wiring spaces, side within the scope of this article shall be protected both inside and gutters, or side-wiring compartments of cabinets and cutout outside against corrosion. boxes shall be made tight enclosures by means of covers, bar- riers, or partitions extending from the bases of the devices con- (B) Strength. The design and construction of enclosures tained in the cabinet, to the door, frame, or sides of the cabinet. within the scope of this article shall be such as to secure ample

strength and rigidity. If constructed of sheet steel, the metal Exception: Side-wiring spaces, side gutters, and side-wiring thickness shall not be less than 1.35 mm (0.053 in.) uncoated. compartments of cabinets shall not be required to be made tight 70–208 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 314 — OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL, & JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES; FITTINGS; & HANDHOLES 314.16 enclosures where those side spaces contain only conductors that locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. Approved enter the cabinet directly opposite to the devices where they drainage openings not smaller than 3 mm ( 1⁄8 in.) and not larger terminate. than 6 mm ( 1⁄4 in.) in diameter shall be permitted to be installed in the field in boxes or conduit bodies listed for use in damp or Partially enclosed back-wiring spaces shall be provided wet locations. For installation of listed drain fittings, larger open- with covers to complete the enclosure. Wiring spaces that are ings are permitted to be installed in the field in accordance with required by 312.11(C) and are exposed when doors are open manufacturer’s instructions. shall be provided with covers to complete the enclosure. Where space is provided for feed-through conductors and for splices as Informational Note No. 1: For boxes in floors, see required in 312.8, additional barriers shall not be required. 314.27(B).

Informational Note No. 2: For protection against corro- sion, see 300.6. ARTICLE 314 314.16 Number of Conductors in Outlet, Device, and Junc- Outlet, Device, Pull, and Junction tion Boxes, and Conduit Bodies. Boxes and conduit bodies Boxes; Conduit Bodies; Fittings; shall be of an approved size to provide free space for all enclosed and Handhole Enclosures conductors. In no case shall the volume of the box, as calculated in 314.16(A), be less than the fill calculation as calculated in 314.16(B). The minimum volume for conduit bodies shall be as Part I. Scope and General calculated in 314.16(C). 314.1 Scope. This article covers the installation and use of all The provisions of this section shall not apply to terminal hous- boxes and conduit bodies used as outlet, device, junction, or pull ings supplied with motors or generators. boxes, depending on their use, and handhole enclosures. Cast Informational Note: For volume requirements of motor metal, sheet metal, nonmetallic, and other boxes such as FS, or generator terminal housings, see 430.12.

FD, and larger boxes are not classified as conduit bodies. This article also includes installation requirements for fittings used Boxes and conduit bodies enclosing conductors 4 AWG or to join raceways and to connect raceways and cables to boxes larger shall also comply with the provisions of 314.28. Outlet and conduit bodies. and device boxes shall also comply with 314.24. 314.2 Round Boxes. Round boxes shall not be used where (A) Box Volume Calculations. The volume of a wiring conduits or connectors requiring the use of locknuts or bush- enclosure (box) shall be the total volume of the assembled sec- ings are to be connected to the side of the box. tions and, where used, the space provided by plaster rings, domed covers, extension rings, and so forth, that are marked 314.3 Nonmetallic Boxes. Nonmetallic boxes shall be per- with their volume or are made from boxes the dimensions of mitted only with open wiring on insulators, concealed knob-and- which are listed in Table 314.16(A). Where a box is provided tube wiring, cabled wiring methods with entirely nonmetallic

with one or more securely installed barriers, the volume shall be sheaths, flexible cords, and nonmetallic raceways. apportioned to each of the resulting spaces. Each barrier, if not Exception No. 1: Where internal bonding means are provided 3 marked with its volume, shall be considered to take up 8.2 cm between all entries, nonmetallic boxes shall be permitted to be 1 3 3 3 ( ⁄2 in.) if metal, and 16.4 cm (1.0 in.) if nonmetallic. used with metal raceways or metal-armored cables. (1) Standard Boxes. The volumes of standard boxes that are not Exception No. 2: Where integral bonding means with a provi- marked with their volume shall be as given in Table 314.16(A). sion for attaching an equipment bonding jumper inside the box (2) Other Boxes. Boxes 1650 cm 3 (100 in. 3) or less, other than are provided between all threaded entries in nonmetallic boxes those described in Table 314.16(A), and nonmetallic boxes shall listed for the purpose, nonmetallic boxes shall be permitted to be durably and legibly marked by the manufacturer with their

be used with metal raceways or metal-armored cables. volume(s). Boxes described in Table 314.16(A) that have a 314.4 Metal Boxes. Metal boxes shall be grounded and volume larger than is designated in the table shall be permitted bonded in accordance with Parts I, IV, V, VI, VII, and X of Arti- to have their volume marked as required by this section. cle 250 as applicable, except as permitted in 250.112(I). (B) Box Fill Calculations. The volumes in paragraphs 314.16(B) Part II. Installation (1) through (B)(5), as applicable, shall be added together. No allowance shall be required for small fittings such as locknuts 314.15 Damp or Wet Locations. In damp or wet locations, and bushings. Each space within a box installed with a barrier boxes, conduit bodies, outlet box hoods, and fittings shall be shall be calculated separately. placed or equipped so as to prevent moisture from entering or accumulating within the box, conduit body, or fitting. Boxes, (1) Conductor Fill. Each conductor that originates outside the

conduit bodies, outlet box hoods, and fittings installed in wet box and terminates or is spliced within the box shall be counted 2022 California Electrical Code 70–209

314.16 ARTICLE 314 — OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL, & JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES; FITTINGS; & HANDHOLES ∆ Table 314.16(A) Metal Boxes Minimum Maximum Number of Conductors* Box Trade Size Volume (arranged by AWG size) mm in. cm 3 in. 3 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 100 × 32 (4 × 11⁄4) round/octagonal 205 12.5 8 7 6 5 5 5 2 100 × 38 (4 × 11⁄2) round/octagonal 254 15.5 10 8 7 6 6 5 3 100 × 54 (4 × 21⁄8) round/octagonal 353 21.5 14 12 10 9 8 7 4 100 × 32 (4× 11⁄4) square 295 18.0 12 10 9 8 7 6 3 100 × 38 (4 × 11⁄2) square 344 21.0 14 12 10 9 8 7 4 100 × 54 (4 × 21⁄8) square 497 30.3 20 17 15 13 12 10 6 120 × 32 (411⁄16 × 11⁄4) square 418 25.5 17 14 12 11 10 8 5 120 × 38 (411⁄16 × 11⁄2) square 484 29.5 19 16 14 13 11 9 5 120 × 54 (411⁄16 × 21⁄8) square 689 42.0 28 24 21 18 16 14 8 75 × 50 × 38 (3 × 2 × 11⁄2) device 123 7.5 5 4 3 3 3 2 1 75 × 50 × 50 (3 × 2 × 2) device 164 10.0 6 5 5 4 4 3 2 75× 50 × 57 (3× 2 × 21⁄4) device 172 10.5 7 6 5 4 4 3 2 75 × 50 × 65 (3 × 2 × 21⁄2) device 205 12.5 8 7 6 5 5 4 2 75 × 50 × 70 (3 × 2 × 23⁄4) device 230 14.0 9 8 7 6 5 4 2

75 × 50 × 90 (3 × 2 × 31⁄2) device 295 18.0 12 10 9 8 7 6 3 100 × 54 × 38 (4 × 21⁄8 × 11⁄2) device 169 10.3 6 5 5 4 4 3 2 100 × 54 × 48 (4 × 21⁄8 × 17⁄8) device 213 13.0 8 7 6 5 5 4 2 100 × 54 × 54 (4 × 21⁄8 × 21⁄8) device 238 14.5 9 8 7 6 5 4 2 95 × 50 × 65 (33⁄4 × 2 × 21⁄2) masonry box/gang 230 14.0 9 8 7 6 5 4 2 95 × 50 × 90 (33⁄4 × 2 × 31⁄2) masonry box/gang 344 21.0 14 12 10 9 8 7 4 min. 44.5 depth FS — single cover/gang (13⁄4) 221 13.5 9 7 6 6 5 4 2 min. 60.3 depth FD — single cover/gang (23⁄8) 295 18.0 12 10 9 8 7 6 3 min. 44.5 depth FS — multiple cover/gang (13⁄4) 295 18.0 12 10 9 8 7 6 3 min. 60.3 depth FD — multiple cover/gang (23⁄8) 395 24.0 16 13 12 10 9 8 4 *Where no volume allowances are required by 314.16(B)(2) through (B)(5). Table 314.16(B) Volume Allowance Required per Conductor shall be permitted to be omitted from the calculations where they enter a box from a domed luminaire or similar canopy and Free Space Within Box terminate within that box. Size of for Each Conductor Conductor (2) Clamp Fill. Where one or more internal cable clamps, 3 3 (AWG) cm in.

whether factory or field supplied, are present in the box, a sin- gle volume allowance in accordance with Table 314.16(B) shall 18 24.6 1.50 be made based on the largest conductor present in the box. No 16 28.7 1.75 allowance shall be required for a cable connector with its clamp- 14 32.8 2.00 12 36.9 2.25 ing mechanism outside the box. 10 41.0 2.50 A clamp assembly that incorporates a cable termination for 8 49.2 3.00 the cable conductors shall be listed and marked for use with spe- 6 81.9 5.00 cific nonmetallic boxes. Conductors that originate within the clamp assembly shall be included in conductor fill calculations covered in 314.16(B)(1) as though they entered from outside the once, and each conductor that passes through the box without box. The clamp assembly shall not require a fill allowance, but splice or termination shall be counted once. Each loop or coil the volume of the portion of the assembly that remains within of unbroken conductor not less than twice the minimum length the box after installation shall be excluded from the box volume

required for free conductors in 300.14 shall be counted twice. as marked in 314.16(A)(2). The conductor fill shall be calculated using Table 314.16(B). A (3) Support Fittings Fill. Where one or more luminaire studs conductor, no part of which leaves the box, shall not be counted. or hickeys are present in the box, a single volume allowance in Exception: An equipment grounding conductor or conductors accordance with Table 314.16(B) shall be made for each type of or not over four fixture wires smaller than 14 AWG, or both, fitting based on the largest conductor present in the box. 70–210 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 314 — OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL, & JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES; FITTINGS; & HANDHOLES 314.20 (4) Device or Equipment Fill. For each yoke or strap con- the conductors shall enter the box through individual holes. taining one or more devices or equipment, a double volume In installations where metal boxes or conduit bodies are used allowance in accordance with Table 314.16(B) shall be made for with conductors unprotected by flexible tubing, the individual each yoke or strap based on the largest conductor connected to a openings shall be provided with insulating bushings. Where device(s) or equipment supported by that yoke or strap. A device flexible tubing is used to enclose the conductors, the tubing or utilization equipment wider than a single 50 mm (2 in.) device shall extend from the last insulating support to not less than box as described in Table 314.16(A) shall have double volume 6 mm (1 ⁄4 in.) inside the box or conduit body and beyond any allowances provided for each gang required for mounting. cable clamp. The wiring method shall be secured to the box or conduit body.

∆ (5) Equipment Grounding Conductor Fill. Where up to four equipment grounding conductors or equipment bonding jump- N (2) Conductors Entering Through Cable Clamps. Where ers enter a box, a single volume allowance in accordance with cable assemblies with nonmetallic sheathes are used, the Table 314.16(B) shall be made based on the largest equipment sheath shall extend not less than 6 mm (1⁄4 in.) inside the box grounding conductor or equipment bonding jumper entering the and beyond any cable clamp. Except as provided in 300.15(C), box. A 1⁄4 volume allowance shall be made for each additional the wiring method shall be secured to the box or conduit body. equipment grounding conductor or equipment bonding jumper Exception: Where nonmetallic-sheathed cable is used with that enters the box, based on the largest equipment grounding single gang nonmetallic boxes not larger than a nominal size conductor or equipment bonding conductor. 1 57 mm × 100 mm (2 ⁄4 in. × 4 in.) mounted in walls or ceilings, (C) Conduit Bodies. and where the cable is fastened within 200 mm (8 in.) of the

box measured along the sheath and where the sheath extends (1) General. Conduit bodies enclosing 6 AWG conductors through a cable knockout not less than 6 mm (1⁄4 in.), securing or smaller, other than short-radius conduit bodies as described the cable to the box shall not be required. Multiple cable entries in 314.16(C)(3), shall have a cross-sectional area not less than shall be permitted in a single cable knockout opening. twice the cross-sectional area of the largest conduit or tubing to which they can be attached. The maximum number of conduc- N (3) Conductors Entering Through Raceways. Where the tors permitted shall be the maximum number permitted by Table 1 raceway is complete between boxes, conduit bodies, or both of Chapter 9 for the conduit or tubing to which it is attached. and encloses individual conductors or nonmetallic cable assemblies or both, the conductors or cable assemblies shall (2) With Splices, Taps, or Devices. Only those conduit bod- not be required to be additionally secured. Where raceways ies that are durably and legibly marked by the manufacturer

enclose cable assemblies as provided in 300.15(C), the cable with their volume shall be permitted to contain splices, taps, or assembly shall not be required to be additionally secured devices. The maximum number of conductors shall be cal- within the box or conduit body. culated in accordance with 314.16(B). Conduit bodies shall be supported in a rigid and secure manner. N (4) Temperature Limitation. Nonmetallic boxes and conduit bodies shall be suitable for the lowest temperature-rated con- (3) Short Radius Conduit Bodies. Conduit bodies such as ductor entering the box or conduit body. capped elbows and service-entrance elbows that enclose con- ductors 6 AWG or smaller, and are only intended to enable the (C) Conductors 4 AWG or Larger. Installation shall comply installation of the raceway and the contained conductors, shall with 300.4(G). not contain splices, taps, or devices and shall be of an approved Informational Note: See 110.12(A) for requirements on size to provide free space for all conductors enclosed in the closing unused cable and raceway knockout openings.

conduit body. 314.19 Boxes Enclosing Flush Devices or Flush Equipment. 314.17 Conductors Entering Boxes, Conduit Bodies, or Boxes used to enclose flush devices or flush equipment shall be Fittings. Conductors entering boxes, conduit bodies, or fit- of such design that the devices or equipment will be completely tings shall be protected from abrasion and shall comply with enclosed on the back and sides, and substantial support for the 314.17(A) through (D). devices or equipment will be provided. Screws for supporting (A) Openings to Be Closed. Openings through which con- the box shall not also be used to attach a device or equipment. ductors enter shall be closed in a manner identified for the 314.20 Flush-Mounted Installations. Installations within or application. behind a surface of concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, or other ∆ (B) Boxes and Conduit Bodies. The installation of the con- noncombustible material, including boxes employing a flush- ductors in boxes and conduit bodies shall comply with 314.17(B) type cover or faceplate, shall be made so that the front edge

(1) through (B)(4). of the box, plaster ring, extension ring, or listed extender will not be set back of the finished surface more than 6 mm (1⁄4 in.). ∆ (1) Conductors Entering Through Individual Holes or Through Flexible Tubing. For messenger-supported wiring, Installations within a surface of wood or other combusti- open wiring on insulators, or concealed knob-and-tube wiring, ble surface material, boxes, plaster rings, extension rings, or 2022 California Electrical Code 70–211

314.21 ARTICLE 314 — OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL, & JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES; FITTINGS; & HANDHOLES listed extenders shall extend to the finished surface or project (1) Framing Members. An enclosure shall be fastened to the therefrom. framing members by mechanical means such as bolts, screws, or rivets, or by the use of clips or other securing means iden- 314.21 Repairing Noncombustible Surfaces. Noncombusti- tified for use with the type of ceiling framing member(s) and ble surfaces that are broken or incomplete around boxes employ- enclosure(s) employed. The framing members shall be supported ing a flush-type cover or faceplate shall be repaired so there will in an approved manner and securely fastened to each other and to be no gaps or open spaces greater than 3 mm (1⁄8 in.) at the edge the building structure. of the box. ∆ (2) Support Wires. The installation shall comply with 300.11(A). 314.22 Surface Extensions. Surface extensions shall be The enclosure shall be secured, using identified methods, to ceil- made by mounting and mechanically securing an extension ring

ing support wire(s), including any additional support wire(s) over the box. Equipment grounding shall be in accordance with installed for ceiling support. Support wire(s) used for enclosure Part VI of Article 250. support shall be fastened at each end so as to be taut within the Exception: A surface extension shall be permitted to be made ceiling cavity. from the cover of a box where the cover is designed so it is unlikely (E) Raceway-Supported Enclosure, Without Devices, Lumi- to fall off or be removed if its securing means becomes loose. naires, or Lampholders. An enclosure that does not contain a The wiring method shall be flexible for an approved length that device(s), other than splicing devices, or supports a luminaire(s), permits removal of the cover and provides access to the box a lampholder, or other equipment and is supported by entering interior and shall be arranged so that any grounding continuity 3 3 raceways shall not exceed 1650 cm (100 in.) in size. It shall is independent of the connection between the box and cover. have threaded entries or identified hubs.

It shall be supported by 314.23 Supports. Enclosures within the scope of this article two or more conduits threaded wrenchtight into the enclosure shall be supported in accordance with one or more of the provi- or hubs. Each conduit shall be secured within 900 mm (3 ft) of sions in 314.23(A) through (H). the enclosure, or within 450 mm (18 in.) of the enclosure if all conduit entries are on the same side. (A) Surface Mounting. An enclosure mounted on a building or other surface shall be rigidly and securely fastened in place. Exception: The following wiring methods shall be permitted to If the surface does not provide rigid and secure support, addi- support a conduit body of any size, including a conduit body tional support in accordance with other provisions of this sec- constructed with only one conduit entry, provided that the trade tion shall be provided. size of the conduit body is not larger than the largest trade size of the conduit or tubing: (B) Structural Mounting. An enclosure supported from a

structural member or from grade shall be rigidly supported (1) Intermediate metal conduit, Type IMC either directly or by using a metal, polymeric, or wood brace. (2) Rigid metal conduit, Type RMC (3) Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit, Type PVC (1) Nails and Screws. Nails and screws, where used as a fas- (4) Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit, Type RTRC tening means, shall secure boxes by using brackets on the out- (5) Electrical metallic tubing, Type EMT side of the enclosure, or by using mounting holes in the back or in one or more sides of the enclosure, or they shall pass through (F) Raceway-Supported Enclosures, with Devices, Lumi- the interior within 6 mm ( 1⁄4 in.) of the back or ends of the enclo- naires, or Lampholders. An enclosure that contains a device(s), sure. Screws shall not be permitted to pass through the box other than splicing devices, or supports a luminaire(s), a lamp- unless exposed threads in the box are protected using approved holder, or other equipment and is supported by entering raceways means to avoid abrasion of conductor insulation.

Mounting holes shall not exceed 1650 cm 3 (100 in. 3) in size. It shall have threaded made in the field shall be approved. entries or identified hubs. It shall be supported by two or more (2) Braces. Metal braces shall be protected against corrosion conduits threaded wrenchtight into the enclosure or hubs. Each and formed from metal that is not less than 0.51 mm (0.020 in.) conduit shall be secured within 450 mm (18 in.) of the enclosure. thick uncoated. Wood braces shall have a cross section not less Exception No. 1: Rigid metal or intermediate metal conduit shall than nominal 25 mm × 50 mm (1 in. × 2 in.). Wood braces be permitted to support a conduit body of any size, including a in wet locations shall be treated for the conditions. Polymeric conduit body constructed with only one conduit entry, provided braces shall be identified as being suitable for the use. the trade size of the conduit body is not larger than the largest (C) Mounting in Finished Surfaces. An enclosure mounted trade size of the conduit.

in a finished surface shall be rigidly secured thereto by clamps, Exception No. 2: An unbroken length(s) of rigid or intermedi- anchors, or fittings identified for the application. ate metal conduit shall be permitted to support a box used for (D) Suspended Ceilings. An enclosure mounted to structural luminaire or lampholder support, or to support a wiring enclo- or supporting elements of a suspended ceiling shall be not more sure that is an integral part of a luminaire and used in lieu of than 1650 cm 3 (100 in. 3) in size and shall be securely fastened a box in accordance with 300.15(B), where all of the following in place in accordance with either 314.23(D)(1) or (D)(2). conditions are met: 70–212 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 314 — OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL, & JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES; FITTINGS; & HANDHOLES 314.25 (1) The conduit is securely fastened at a point so that the length be mounted properly and without likelihood of damage to con- of conduit beyond the last point of conduit support does not ductors within the box. exceed 900 mm (3 ft). (A) Outlet Boxes Without Enclosed Devices or Utilization (2) The unbroken conduit length before the last point of con- Equipment. Outlet boxes that do not enclose devices or uti- duit support is 300 mm (12 in.) or greater, and that portion lization equipment shall have a minimum internal depth of of the conduit is securely fastened at some point not less 1 12.7 mm ( ⁄2 in.). than 300 mm (12 in.) from its last point of support. (3) Where accessible to unqualified persons, the luminaire or (B) Outlet and Device Boxes with Enclosed Devices or Uti- lampholder, measured to its lowest point, is at least 2.5 m lization Equipment. Outlet and device boxes that enclose

(8 ft) above grade or standing area and at least 900 mm devices or utilization equipment shall have a minimum inter- (3 ft) measured horizontally to the 2.5 m (8 ft) elevation from nal depth that accommodates the rearward projection of the windows, doors, porches, fire escapes, or similar locations. equipment and the size of the conductors that supply the equip- (4) A luminaire supported by a single conduit does not exceed ment. The internal depth shall include, where used, that of any 300 mm (12 in.) in any direction from the point of conduit extension boxes, plaster rings, or raised covers. The internal entry. depth shall comply with all applicable provisions of 314.24(B)(1) (5) The weight supported by any single conduit does not exceed through (B)(5). 9 kg (20 lb). (1) Large Equipment. Boxes that enclose devices or utiliza- (6) At the luminaire or lampholder end, the conduit(s) is tion equipment that projects more than 48 mm (17⁄8 in.) rear- threaded wrenchtight into the box, conduit body, integral ward from the mounting plane of the box shall have a depth that

wiring enclosure, or identified hubs. Where a box or con- is not less than the depth of the equipment plus 6 mm (1⁄4 in.). duit body is used for support, the luminaire shall be secured (2) Conductors Larger Than 4 AWG. Boxes that enclose directly to the box or conduit body, or through a threaded devices or utilization equipment supplied by conductors larger conduit nipple not over 75 mm (3 in.) long. than 4 AWG shall be identified for their specific function. (G) Enclosures in Concrete or Masonry. An enclosure Exception to (2): Devices or utilization equipment supplied supported by embedment shall be identified as suitably pro- by conductors larger than 4 AWG shall be permitted to be tected from corrosion and securely embedded in concrete or mounted on or in junction and pull boxes larger than 1650 cm 3 masonry. (100 in. 3) if the spacing at the terminals meets the requirements (H) Pendant Boxes. An enclosure supported by a pendant of 312.6. shall comply with 314.23(H)(1) or (H)(2). (3) Conductors 8, 6, or 4 AWG. Boxes that enclose devices (1) Flexible Cord.

A box shall be supported from a multi- or utilization equipment supplied by 8, 6, or 4 AWG conduc- conductor cord or cable in an approved manner that protects tors shall have an internal depth that is not less than 52.4 mm the conductors against strain, such as a strain-relief connector (21⁄16 in.). threaded into a box with a hub. (4) Conductors 12 or 10 AWG. Boxes that enclose devices (2) Conduit. A box supporting lampholders or luminaires, or or utilization equipment supplied by 12 or 10 AWG conduc- wiring enclosures within luminaires used in lieu of boxes in tors shall have an internal depth that is not less than 30.2 mm accordance with 300.15(B), shall be supported by rigid or inter- (13⁄16 in.). Where the equipment projects rearward from the mediate metal conduit stems. For stems longer than 450 mm mounting plane of the box by more than 25 mm (1 in.), the box (18 in.), the stems shall be connected to the wiring system with shall have a depth not less than that of the equipment plus 6 mm listed swivel hangers suitable for the location. At the luminaire (1⁄4 in.).

end, the conduit(s) shall be threaded wrenchtight into the box, (5) Conductors 14 AWG and Smaller. Boxes that enclose wiring enclosure, or identified hubs. devices or utilization equipment supplied by 14 AWG or Where supported by only a single conduit, the threaded smaller conductors shall have a depth that is not less than joints shall be prevented from loosening by the use of set- 23.8 mm ( 15⁄16 in.). screws or other effective means, or the luminaire, at any point, Exception to (1) through (5): Devices or utilization equip- shall be at least 2.5 m (8 ft) above grade or standing area and ment that is listed to be installed with specified boxes shall be at least 900 mm (3 ft) measured horizontally to the 2.5 m (8 ft) permitted. elevation from windows, doors, porches, fire escapes, or simi- lar locations. A luminaire supported by a single conduit shall 314.25 Covers and Canopies. In completed installations, not exceed 300 mm (12 in.) in any horizontal direction from each box shall have a cover, faceplate, lampholder, or luminaire the point of conduit entry.

canopy, except where the installation complies with 410.24(B). Screws used for the purpose of attaching covers, or other equip- 314.24 Depth of Boxes. Outlet and device boxes shall have an ment, to the box shall be either machine screws matching the approved depth to allow equipment installed within them to 2022 California Electrical Code 70–213

314.27 ARTICLE 314 — OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL, & JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES; FITTINGS; & HANDHOLES thread gauge and size that is integral to the box or shall be in similar locations shall be permitted to be other than those listed accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. for floor applications. Receptacles and covers shall be listed as an assembly for this type of location. (A) Nonmetallic or Metal Covers and Plates. Nonmetal- lic or metal covers and plates shall be permitted. Where metal (C) Boxes at Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fan Outlets. covers or plates are used, they shall comply with the grounding Outlet boxes or outlet box systems used as the sole support of a requirements of 250.110. ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan shall be listed, shall be marked by their manufacturer as suitable for this purpose, and shall not Informational Note: For additional grounding require- support ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans that weigh more than ments, see 410.42 for metal luminaire canopies, and 32 kg (70 lb). For outlet boxes or outlet box systems designed

404.12 and 406.6(B) for metal faceplates. to support ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans that weigh more (B) Exposed Combustible Wall or Ceiling Finish. Where a than 16 kg (35 lb), the required marking shall include the maxi- luminaire canopy or pan is used, any combustible wall or ceil- mum weight to be supported. ing finish exposed between the edge of the canopy or pan and Outlet boxes mounted in the ceilings of habitable rooms of the outlet box shall be covered with noncombustible material if dwelling occupancies in a location acceptable for the installa- required by 410.23. tion of a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan shall comply with one (C) Flexible Cord Pendants. Covers of outlet boxes and of the following: conduit bodies having holes through which flexible cord pen- (1) Listed for the sole support of ceiling-suspended (paddle) dants pass shall be provided with identified bushings or shall fans have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on which the cords may (2) An outlet box complying with the applicable requirements bear. So-called hard rubber or composition bushings shall not

of 314.27 and providing access to structural framing be used. capable of supporting of a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan 314.27 Outlet Boxes. bracket or equivalent (A) Boxes at Luminaire or Lampholder Outlets. Outlet (D) Utilization Equipment. Boxes used for the support of boxes or fittings designed for the support of luminaires and lamp- utilization equipment other than ceiling-suspended (paddle) holders, and installed as required by 314.23, shall be permitted fans shall meet the requirements of 314.27(A) for the support to support a luminaire or lampholder. of a luminaire that is the same size and weight. (1) Vertical Surface Outlets. Boxes used at luminaire or Exception: Utilization equipment weighing not more than lamp holder outlets in or on a vertical surface shall be identified 3 kg (6 lb) shall be permitted to be supported on other boxes or and marked on the interior of the box to indicate the maximum plaster rings that are secured to other boxes, provided the equip-

weight of the luminaire that is permitted to be supported by the ment or its supporting yoke is secured to the box with no fewer box if other than 23 kg (50 lb). than two No. 6 or larger screws. Exception: A vertically mounted luminaire or lampholder (E) Separable Attachment Fittings. Outlet boxes required weighing not more than 3 kg (6 lb) shall be permitted to be sup- in 314.27 shall be permitted to support listed locking support ported on other boxes or plaster rings that are secured to other and mounting receptacles used in combination with compatible boxes, provided that the luminaire or its supporting yoke, or the attachment fittings. The combination shall be identified for the lampholder, is secured to the box with no fewer than two No. 6 support of equipment within the weight and mounting orienta- or larger screws. tion limits of the listing. Where the supporting receptacle is (2) Ceiling Outlets. At every outlet used exclusively for installed within a box, it shall be included in the fill calculation

lighting, the box shall be designed or installed so that a lumi- covered in 314.16(B)(4). naire or lampholder may be attached. Boxes shall be required 314.28 Pull and Junction Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Boxes to support a luminaire weighing a minimum of 23 kg (50 lb). and conduit bodies used as pull or junction boxes shall comply A luminaire that weighs more than 23 kg (50 lb) shall be sup- with 314.28(A) through (E). ported independently of the outlet box, unless the outlet box is Exception: Terminal housings supplied with motors shall com- listed for not less than the weight to be supported. The interior ply with the provisions of 430.12. of the box shall be marked by the manufacturer to indicate the maximum weight the box shall be permitted to support. (A) Minimum Size. For raceways containing conductors of 4 AWG or larger that are required to be insulated, and for (B) Floor Boxes. Boxes listed specifically for this application cables containing conductors of 4 AWG or larger, the minimum shall be used for receptacles located in the floor.

dimensions of pull or junction boxes installed in a raceway Exception: Where the authority having jurisdiction judges them or cable run shall comply with 314.28(A)(1)through (A)(3). free from likely exposure to physical damage, moisture, and Where an enclosure dimension is to be calculated based on the dirt, boxes located in elevated floors of show windows and diameter of entering raceways, the diameter shall be the metric 70–214 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 314 — OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL, & JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES; FITTINGS; & HANDHOLES 314.29 designator (trade size) expressed in the units of measurement (B) Conductors in Pull or Junction Boxes. In pull boxes or employed. junction boxes having any dimension over 1.8 m (6 ft), all con- ductors shall be cabled or racked up in an approved manner. (1) Straight Pulls. In straight pulls, the length of the box or conduit body shall not be less than eight times the metric desig- (C) Covers. All pull boxes, junction boxes, and conduit bod- nator (trade size) of the largest raceway. ies shall be provided with covers compatible with the box or conduit body construction and suitable for the conditions of (2) Angle or U Pulls, or Splices. Where splices or where angle use. Where used, metal covers shall comply with the grounding or U pulls are made, the distance between each raceway entry requirements of 250.110. inside the box or conduit body and the opposite wall of the box or conduit body shall not be less than six times the metric desig- (D) Permanent Barriers.

Where permanent barriers are nator (trade size) of the largest raceway in a row. This distance installed in a box, each section shall be considered as a sepa- shall be increased for additional entries by the amount of the rate box. sum of the diameters of all other raceway entries in the same (E) Power Distribution Blocks. Power distribution blocks row on the same wall of the box. Each row shall be calculated 3 shall be permitted in pull and junction boxes over 1650 cm individually, and the single row that provides the maximum dis- 3 (100 in.) for connections of conductors where installed in tance shall be used. boxes and where the installation complies with 314.28(E)(1) Exception: Where a raceway or cable entry is in the wall of a through (E)(5). box or conduit body opposite a removable cover, the distance Exception: Equipment grounding terminal bars shall be permit- from that wall to the cover shall be permitted to comply with the ted in smaller enclosures. distance required for one wire per terminal in Table 312.6(A). ∆ (1) Installation.

Power distribution blocks installed in boxes The distance between raceway entries enclosing the same shall be listed. conductor shall not be less than six times the metric designator (trade size) of the larger raceway. (2) Size. In addition to the overall size requirement in the first sentence of 314.28(A)(2), the power distribution block shall be When transposing cable size into raceway size in 314.28(A)(1) installed in a box with dimensions not smaller than specified and (A)(2), the minimum metric designator (trade size) raceway in the installation instructions of the power distribution block. required for the number and size of conductors in the cable shall be used. (3) Wire Bending Space. Wire bending space at the termi- nals of power distribution blocks shall comply with 312.6. (3) Smaller Dimensions. Listed boxes or listed conduit bod- ies of dimensions less than those required in 314.28(A)(1) and (4) Live Parts. Power distribution blocks shall not have unin-

(A)(2) shall be permitted for installations of combinations of sulated live parts exposed within a box, whether or not the box conductors that are less than the maximum conduit or tubing cover is installed. fill (of conduits or tubing being used) permitted by Table 1 of (5) Through Conductors. Where the pull or junction boxes Chapter 9. are used for conductors that do not terminate on the power dis- Listed conduit bodies of dimensions less than those required tribution block(s), the through conductors shall be arranged so in 314.28(A)(2), and having a radius of the curve to the centerline the power distribution block terminals are unobstructed follow- not less than that indicated in Table 2 of Chapter 9 for one-shot ing installation. and full-shoe benders, shall be permitted for installations of ∆ 314.29 Boxes, Conduit Bodies, and Handhole Enclosures to combinations of conductors permitted by Table 1 of Chapter 9. Be Accessible. Boxes, conduit bodies, and handhole enclosures

These conduit bodies shall be marked to show they have been shall be installed so that wiring contained in them can be ren- specifically evaluated in accordance with this provision. dered accessible in accordance with 314.29(A) and (B). Where the permitted combinations of conductors for which N (A) In Buildings and Other Structures. Boxes and conduit the box or conduit body has been listed are less than the maxi- bodies shall be installed so the contained wiring can be accessed mum conduit or tubing fill permitted by Table 1 of Chapter 9, without removing any part of the building or structure. the box or conduit body shall be permanently marked with the N (B) Underground. Underground boxes and handhole enclo- maximum number and maximum size of conductors permitted. sures shall be installed so they are accessible without excavat- For other conductor sizes and combinations, the total cross- ing sidewalks, paving, earth, or other substance that is to be sectional area of the fill shall not exceed the cross-sectional area used to establish the finished grade.

of the conductors specified in the marking, based on the type of conductor identified as part of the product listing. Exception: Listed boxes and handhole enclosures shall be per- mitted where covered by gravel, light aggregate, or noncohe- Informational Note: Unless otherwise specified, the appli- sive granulated soil if their location is effectively identified and cable product standards evaluate the fill markings covered accessible for excavation. here based on conductors with Type XHHW insulation. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–215

314.30 ARTICLE 314 — OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL, & JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES; FITTINGS; & HANDHOLES 314.30 Handhole Enclosures. Handhole enclosures shall be Exception No. 2: The walls of listed short radius conduit bod- designed and installed to withstand all loads likely to be ies, as covered in 314.16(C)(2), shall be permitted to be made imposed on them. They shall be identified for use in under- of thinner metal. ground systems. 3 3 (C) Metal Boxes Over 1650 cm (100 in.). Metal boxes over 3 3 Informational Note: See ANSI/SCTE 77-2013, Specifica- 1650 cm (100 in.) in size shall be constructed so as to be of tion for Underground Enclosure Integrity, for additional ample strength and rigidity. If of sheet steel, the metal thickness information on deliberate and nondeliberate traffic load- shall not be less than 1.35 mm (0.053 in.) uncoated. ing that can be expected to bear on underground enclosures. (D) Equipment Grounding Conductor Provisions. A (A) Size. Handhole enclosures shall be sized in accordance with means shall be provided in each metal box for the connection

314.28(A) for conductors operating at 1000 volts or below, of an equipment grounding conductor. The means shall be per- and in accordance with 314.71 for conductors operating at over mitted to be a tapped hole or equivalent. 1000 volts. For handhole enclosures without bottoms where the 314.41 Covers. Metal covers shall be of the same material as provisions of 314.28(A)(2), Exception, or 314.71(B)(1), Excep- the box or conduit body with which they are used, or they shall tion No. 1, apply, the measurement to the removable cover shall be lined with firmly attached insulating material that is not less be taken from the end of the conduit or cable assembly. 1 than 0.79 mm ( ⁄32 in.) thick, or they shall be listed for the pur- (B) Wiring Entries. Underground raceways and cable pose. Metal covers shall be the same thickness as the boxes or assemblies entering a handhole enclosure shall extend into the conduit body for which they are used, or they shall be listed for enclosure, but they shall not be required to be mechanically the purpose. Covers of porcelain or other approved insulating

connected to the enclosure. materials shall be permitted if of such form and thickness as to afford the required protection and strength. (C) Enclosed Wiring. All enclosed conductors and any splices or terminations, if present, shall be listed as suitable for wet 314.42 Bushings. Covers of outlet boxes and conduit bodies locations. having holes through which flexible cord pendants may pass shall be provided with approved bushings or shall have smooth, well- (D) Covers. Handhole enclosure covers shall have an iden- rounded surfaces on which the cord may bear. Where individual tifying mark or logo that prominently identifies the function conductors pass through a metal cover, a separate hole equipped of the enclosure, such as “electric.” Handhole enclosure covers with a bushing of suitable insulating material shall be provided shall require the use of tools to open, or they shall weigh over for each conductor. Such separate holes shall be connected by a 45 kg (100 lb). Metal covers and other exposed conductive sur- slot as required by 300.20.

faces shall be bonded in accordance with 250.92 if the conduc- tors in the handhole are service conductors, or in accordance 314.43 Nonmetallic Boxes. Provisions for supports or other with 250.96(A) if the conductors in the handhole are feeder or mounting means for nonmetallic boxes shall be outside of the branch-circuit conductors. box, or the box shall be constructed so as to prevent contact between the conductors in the box and the supporting screws. Part III. Construction Specifications 314.44 Marking. All boxes and conduit bodies, covers, exten- 314.40 Metal Boxes, Conduit Bodies, and Fittings. sion rings, plaster rings, and the like shall be durably and leg- ibly marked with the manufacturer’s name or trademark. (A) Corrosion Resistant. Metal boxes, conduit bodies, and fit- tings shall be corrosion resistant or shall be well-galvanized, enameled, or otherwise properly coated inside and out to pre- Part IV. Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Bodies, and vent corrosion. Handhole Enclosures for Use on Systems over 1000 Volts, Nominal

Informational Note: See 300.6 for limitation in the use of boxes and fittings protected from corrosion solely by 314.70 General. enamel. (A) Pull and Junction Boxes. Where pull and junction 3 (B) Thickness of Metal. Sheet steel boxes not over 1650 cm boxes are used on systems over 1000 volts, the installation shall (100 in.3) in size shall be made from steel not less than 1.59 mm comply with the provisions of Part IV and with the following (0.0625 in.) thick. The wall of a malleable iron box or conduit general provisions of this article: body and a die-cast or permanent-mold cast aluminum, brass, (1) Part I, 314.2; 314.3; and 314.4 bronze, or zinc box or conduit body shall not be less than (2) Part II, 314.15; 314.17; 314.20; 314.23(A), (B), or (G); 2.38 mm ( 3 ⁄ 32 in.) thick. Other cast metal boxes or conduit bod- 314.28(B); and 314.29 ies shall have a wall thickness not less than 3.17 mm ( 1⁄8 in.). (3) Part III, 314.40(A) and (C); and 314.41 Exception No. 1: Listed boxes and conduit bodies shown to have (B) Conduit Bodies. Where conduit bodies are used on sys-

equivalent strength and characteristics shall be permitted to be tems over 1000 volts, the installation shall comply with the made of thinner or other metals. 70–216 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 320 — ARMORED CABLE: TYPE AC 320.10 provisions of Part IV and with the following general provisions 314.72 Construction and Installation Requirements. of this article: (A) Corrosion Protection. Boxes shall be made of material (1) Part I, 314.4 inherently resistant to corrosion or shall be suitably protected, (2) Part II, 314.15; 314.17; 314.23(A), (E), or (G); 314.28(A) both internally and externally, by enameling, galvanizing, plat- (3); and 314.29 ing, or other means. (3) Part III, 314.40(A) and 314.41 (B) Passing Through Partitions. Suitable bushings, shields, or (C) Handhole Enclosures. Where handhole enclosures are fittings having smooth, rounded edges shall be provided where used on systems over 1000 volts, the installation shall comply conductors or cables pass through partitions and at other loca- with the provisions of Part IV and with the following general tions where necessary. provisions of this article: (C) Complete Enclosure. Boxes shall provide a complete (1) Part I, 314.3 and 314.4 enclosure for the contained conductors or cables.

(2) Part II, 314.15; 314.17; 314.23(G); 314.28(B); 314.29; and (D) Wiring Is Accessible. Boxes and conduit bodies shall be 314.30 installed so that the conductors are accessible without remov- 314.71 Size of Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Bodies, ing any fixed part of the building or structure. Working space and Handhole Enclosures. Pull and junction boxes and hand- shall be provided in accordance with 110.34. hole enclosures shall provide approved space and dimensions (E) Suitable Covers. Boxes shall be closed by suitable covers for the installation of conductors, and they shall comply with securely fastened in place. Underground box covers that weigh the specific requirements of this section. Conduit bodies shall over 45 kg (100 lb) shall be considered meeting this requirement. be permitted if they meet the dimensional requirements for Covers for boxes shall be permanently marked “DANGER — boxes. HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT.” The marking shall be on (A) For Straight Pulls. The length of the box shall not be less the outside of the box cover and shall be readily visible. Letters 1

than 48 times the outside diameter, over sheath, of the largest shall be block type and at least 13 mm ( ⁄2 in.) in height. shielded or lead-covered conductor or cable entering the box. (F) Suitable for Expected Handling. Boxes and their covers The length shall not be less than 32 times the outside diameter shall be capable of withstanding the handling to which they are of the largest nonshielded conductor or cable. likely to be subjected. (B) For Angle or U Pulls. (1) Distance to Opposite Wall. The distance between each cable or conductor entry inside the box and the opposite wall ARTICLE 320 of the box shall not be less than 36 times the outside diameter, Armored Cable: Type AC over sheath, of the largest cable or conductor. This distance shall be increased for additional entries by the amount of the sum of the outside diameters, over sheath, of all other cables or Part I. General conductor entries through the same wall of the box. 320.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- Exception No.

1: Where a conductor or cable entry is in the wall struction specifications for armored cable, Type AC. of a box opposite a removable cover, the distance from that wall 320.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply to the cover shall be permitted to be not less than the bending within this article and throughout the Code. radius for the conductors as provided in 300.34. Armored Cable, Type AC. A fabricated assembly of insu- Exception No. 2: Where cables are nonshielded and not lead lated conductors in a flexible interlocked metallic armor. See covered, the distance of 36 times the outside diameter shall be 320.100. permitted to be reduced to 24 times the outside diameter. 320.6 Listing Requirements. Type AC cable and associated (2) Distance Between Entry and Exit. The distance between fittings shall be listed. a cable or conductor entry and its exit from the box shall not be less than 36 times the outside diameter, over sheath, of that Part II. Installation cable or conductor. 320.10 Uses Permitted. Type AC cable shall be permitted as

Exception: Where cables are nonshielded and not lead covered, follows: the distance of 36 times the outside diameter shall be permitted (1) For feeders and branch circuits in both exposed and con- to be reduced to 24 times the outside diameter. cealed installations (C) Removable Sides. One or more sides of any pull box shall (2) In cable trays be removable. (3) In dry locations 2022 California Electrical Code 70–217

320.12 ARTICLE 320 — ARMORED CABLE: TYPE AC (4) Embedded in plaster finish on brick or other masonry, except junction box, cabinet, or fitting and at intervals not exceeding in damp or wet locations 1.4 m (41⁄2 ft). (5) To be run or fished in the air voids of masonry block or tile (C) Supporting. Unless otherwise permitted, Type AC cable walls where such walls are not exposed or subject to exces- 1 shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 1.4 m (4 ⁄2 ft). sive moisture or dampness Horizontal runs of Type AC cable installed in wooden or Informational Note: The “Uses Permitted” is not an all- metal framing members or similar supporting means shall be inclusive list. considered supported and secured where such support does not 1 320.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type AC cable shall not be exceed 1.4 m (4 ⁄2 ft) intervals. used as follows: (D) Unsupported Cables. Type AC cable shall be permitted to (1) Where subject to physical damage be unsupported and unsecured where the cable complies with (2) In damp or wet locations any of the following:

(3) In air voids of masonry block or tile walls where such walls (1) Is fished between access points through concealed spaces are exposed or subject to excessive moisture or dampness in finished buildings or structures and supporting is (4) Where exposed to corrosive conditions impracticable (5) Embedded in plaster finish on brick or other masonry in (2) Is not more than 600 mm (2 ft) in length at terminals where damp or wet locations flexibility is necessary 320.15 Exposed Work. Exposed runs of cable, except as pro- (3) Is not more than 1.8 m (6 ft) in length from the last point of vided in 300.11(B), shall closely follow the surface of the building cable support to the point of connection to a luminaire(s) finish or of running boards. Exposed runs shall also be permitted or other electrical equipment and the cable and point of con- to be installed on the underside of joists where supported at each nection are within an accessible ceiling joist and located so as not to be subject to physical damage. For the purposes of this section, Type AC cable fittings shall

320.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Type AC be permitted as a means of cable support. cable shall be protected in accordance with 300.4(A), (C), and (D) 320.40 Boxes and Fittings. At all points where the armor of where installed through or parallel to framing members. AC cable terminates, a fitting shall be provided to protect wires 320.23 In Accessible Attics. Type AC cables in accessible from abrasion, unless the design of the outlet boxes or fit- attics or roof spaces shall be installed as specified in 320.23(A) tings is such as to afford equivalent protection, and, in addi- and (B). tion, an insulating bushing or its equivalent protection shall be provided between the conductors and the armor. The connector (A) Cables Run Across the Top of Floor Joists. Where run or clamp by which the Type AC cable is fastened to boxes or across the top of floor joists, or within 2.1 m (7 ft) of the floor or cabinets shall be of such design that the insulating bushing or its floor joists across the face of rafters or studding, the cable shall equivalent will be visible for inspection.

Where change is made be protected by guard strips that are at least as high as the cable. from Type AC cable to other cable or raceway wiring methods, Where this space is not accessible by permanently installed stairs a box, fitting, or conduit body shall be installed at junction or ladders, protection shall only be required within 1.8 m (6 ft) points as required in 300.15. of the nearest edge of the scuttle hole or attic entrance. 320.80 Ampacity. The ampacity shall be determined in accor- (B) Cable Installed Parallel to Framing Members. Where the dance with 310.14. cable is installed parallel to the sides of rafters, studs, or ceiling or floor joists, neither guard strips nor running boards shall be (A) Thermal Insulation. Armored cable installed in ther- required, and the installation shall also comply with 300.4(D). mal insulation shall have conductors rated at 90°C (194°F). The ampacity of cable installed in these applications shall not exceed 320.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Type AC cable shall be made that of a 60°C (140°F) rated conductor. The 90°C (194°F) rat-

such that the cable is not damaged. The radius of the curve of ing shall be permitted to be used for ampacity adjustment and the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than five times the correction calculations; however, the ampacity shall not exceed diameter of the Type AC cable. that of a 60°C (140°F) rated conductor. ∆ 320.30 Securing and Supporting. Where more than two Type AC cables containing two or (A) General. Type AC cable shall be supported and secured more current-carrying conductors in each cable are installed in by staples; cable ties listed and identified for securement and contact with thermal insulation, caulk, or sealing foam without support; straps, hangers, or similar fittings; or other approved maintaining spacing between cables, the ampacity of each con- means designed and installed so as not to damage the cable. ductor shall be adjusted in accordance with Table 310.15(C)(1). (B) Securing. Unless otherwise permitted, Type AC cable (B) Cable Tray. The ampacity of Type AC cable installed in

shall be secured within 300 mm (12 in.) of every outlet box, cable tray shall be determined in accordance with 392.80(A). 70–218 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 322 — FLAT CABLE ASSEMBLIES: TYPE FC 322.112 Part III. Construction Specifications installed as complete systems before the flat cable assem- blies are pulled into the raceways. 320.100 Construction. Type AC cable shall have an armor of flexible metal tape and shall have an internal bonding strip of 322.12 Uses Not Permitted. Flat cable assemblies shall not be copper or aluminum in intimate contact with the armor for its used as follows: entire length. (1) Where exposed to corrosive conditions, unless suitable for 320.104 Conductors. Insulated conductors shall be of a type the application listed in Table 310.4(A) or those identified for use in this cable. (2) In hoistways or on elevators or escalators In addition, the conductors shall have an overall moisture- (3) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as specifically resistant and fire-retardant fibrous covering. For Type ACT, a permitted by other articles in this Code moisture-resistant fibrous covering shall be required only on the (4) Outdoors or in wet or damp locations unless identified for

individual conductors. the use 320.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. Type AC cable 322.30 Securing and Supporting. The flat cable assemblies shall provide an adequate path for fault current as required shall be supported by means of their special design features, by 250.4(A)(5) or (B)(4) to act as an equipment grounding within the surface metal raceways. conductor. The surface metal raceways shall be supported as required 320.120 Marking. The cable shall be marked in accordance for the specific raceway to be installed. with 310.8, except that Type AC shall have ready identification 322.40 Boxes and Fittings. of the manufacturer by distinctive external markings on the cable armor throughout its entire length. (A) Dead Ends. Each flat cable assembly dead end shall be terminated in an end-cap device identified for the use. The dead-end fitting for the enclosing surface metal race- ARTICLE 322 way shall be identified for the use. Flat Cable Assemblies: Type FC (B) Luminaire Hangers. Luminaire hangers installed with the flat cable assemblies shall be identified for the use. Part I.

General (C) Fittings. Fittings to be installed with flat cable assemblies shall be designed and installed to prevent physical damage to 322.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and the cable assemblies. construction specifications for flat cable assemblies, Type FC. (D) Extensions. All extensions from flat cable assemblies 322.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply shall be made by approved wiring methods, within the junc- within this article and throughout the Code. tion boxes, installed at either end of the flat cable assembly Flat Cable Assembly, Type FC. An assembly of parallel runs. conductors formed integrally with an insulating material web 322.56 Splices and Taps. specifically designed for field installation in surface metal raceway. (A) Splices. Splices shall be made in listed junction boxes. 322.6 Listing Requirements. Type FC and associated fit- (B) Taps. Taps shall be made between any phase conductor and tings shall be listed. the grounded conductor or any other phase conductor by means of devices and fittings identified for the use.

Tap devices shall Part II. Installation be rated at not less than 15 amperes, or more than 300 volts to ground, and shall be color-coded in accordance with the require- 322.10 Uses Permitted. Flat cable assemblies shall be permit- ments of 322.120(C). ted only as follows: (1) As branch circuits to supply suitable tap devices for lighting, Part III. Construction Specifications small appliances, or small power loads. The rating of the 322.100 Construction. Flat cable assemblies shall consist of branch circuit shall not exceed 30 amperes. two, three, four, or five conductors. (2) Where installed for exposed work. (3) In locations where they will not be subjected to physical 322.104 Conductors. Flat cable assemblies shall have conduc- damage. Where a flat cable assembly is installed less than tors of 10 AWG special stranded copper wires. 2.5 m (8 ft) above the floor or fixed working platform, it 322.112 Insulation. The entire flat cable assembly shall be shall be protected by a cover identified for the use. formed to provide a suitable insulation covering all the conduc-

(4) In surface metal raceways identified for the use. The chan- tors and using one of the materials recognized in Table 310.4(A) nel portion of the surface metal raceway systems shall be for general branch-circuit wiring. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–219

322.120 ARTICLE 324 — FLAT CONDUCTOR CABLE: TYPE FCC 322.120 Marking. Top Shield. A grounded metal shield covering under-carpet components of the FCC system for the purposes of providing (A) Temperature Rating. In addition to the provisions of protection against physical damage. 310.8, Type FC cable shall have the temperature rating durably marked on the surface at intervals not exceeding 600 mm (24 in.). Transition Assembly. An assembly to facilitate connection of the FCC system to other wiring systems, incorporating (1) a (B) Identification of Grounded Conductor. The grounded means of electrical interconnection and (2) a suitable box or conductor shall be identified throughout its length by means covering for providing electrical safety and protection against of a distinctive and durable white or gray marking. physical damage. Informational Note: The color gray may have been used Type FCC Cable. Three or more flat copper conductors in the past as an ungrounded conductor. Care should be placed edge-to-edge and separated and enclosed within an insu-

taken when working on existing systems. lating assembly. (C) Terminal Block Identification. Terminal blocks identified 324.6 Listing Requirements. Type FCC cable and associ- for the use shall have distinctive and durable markings for color ated fittings shall be listed. or word coding. The grounded conductor section shall have a white marking or other suitable designation. The next adjacent Part II. Installation section of the terminal block shall have a black marking or other suitable designation. The next section shall have a red mark- 324.10 Uses Permitted. ing or other suitable designation. The final or outer section, (A) Branch Circuits. Use of FCC systems shall be permitted opposite the grounded conductor section of the terminal block, both for general-purpose and appliance branch circuits and for shall have a blue marking or other suitable designation. individual branch circuits. (B) Branch-Circuit Ratings. (1) Voltage. Voltage between ungrounded conductors shall ARTICLE 324 not exceed 300 volts. Voltage between ungrounded conductors Flat Conductor Cable: Type FCC

and the grounded conductor shall not exceed 150 volts. (2) Current. General-purpose and appliance branch circuits Part I. General shall have ratings not exceeding 20 amperes. Individual branch circuits shall have ratings not exceeding 30 amperes. 324.1 Scope. This article covers a field-installed wiring sys- tem for branch circuits incorporating Type FCC cable and asso- (C) Floors. Use of FCC systems shall be permitted on hard, ciated accessories as defined by the article. The wiring system sound, smooth, continuous floor surfaces made of concrete, is designed for installation under carpet squares. ceramic, or composition flooring, wood, and similar materials. 324.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply (D) Walls. Use of FCC systems shall be permitted on wall sur- only within this article. faces in surface metal raceways. Bottom Shield. A protective layer that is installed between the (E) Damp Locations. Use of FCC systems in damp loca- floor and Type FCC flat conductor cable to protect the cable tions shall be permitted.

from physical damage and may or may not be incorporated as (F) Heated Floors. Materials used for floors heated in an integral part of the cable. excess of 30°C (86°F) shall be identified as suitable for use at Cable Connector. A connector designed to join Type FCC these temperatures. cables without using a junction box. (G) System Height. Any portion of an FCC system with a FCC System. A complete wiring system for branch circuits that height above floor level exceeding 2.3 mm (0.090 in.) shall be is designed for installation under carpet squares. tapered or feathered at the edges to floor level. Informational Note: The FCC system includes Type FCC 324.12 Uses Not Permitted. FCC systems shall not be used in cable and associated shielding, connectors, terminators, the following locations: adapters, boxes, and receptacles. (1) Outdoors or in wet locations Insulating End. An insulator designed to electrically insulate (2) Where subject to corrosive vapors the end of a Type FCC cable. (3) In any hazardous (classified) location (4) In residential buildings Metal Shield Connections.

Means of connection designed to (5) In school and hospital buildings, other than administrative electrically and mechanically connect a metal shield to another office areas metal shield, to a receptacle housing or self-contained device, or to a transition assembly. 70–220 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 324 — FLAT CONDUCTOR CABLE: TYPE FCC 324.101 324.18 Crossings. Crossings of more than two Type FCC (B) Receptacles and Housings. Receptacle housings and self- cable runs shall not be permitted at any one point. Crossings contained devices designed either for floor mounting or for in- of a Type FCC cable over or under a flat communications or wall or on-wall mounting shall be permitted for use with the signal cable shall be permitted. In each case, a grounded layer FCC system. Receptacle housings and self-contained devices of metal shielding shall separate the two cables, and crossings shall incorporate means for facilitating entry and termination of of more than two flat cables shall not be permitted at any one Type FCC cable and for electrically connecting the housing or point. device with the metal shield. Receptacles and self-contained devices shall comply with 406.4. Power and communications 324.30 Securing and Supporting. All FCC system com- outlets installed together in common housing shall be permitted ponents shall be firmly anchored to the floor or wall using an

in accordance with 805.133(A)(1)(c), Exception No. 2. adhesive or mechanical anchoring system identified for this use. Floors shall be prepared to ensure adherence of the FCC system 324.56 Splices and Taps. to the floor until the carpet squares are placed. (A) FCC Systems Alterations. Alterations to FCC systems 324.40 Boxes and Fittings. shall be permitted. New cable connectors shall be used at new connection points to make alterations. It shall be permitted to (A) Cable Connections and Insulating Ends. All Type FCC leave unused cable runs and associated cable connectors in cable connections shall use connectors identified for their use, place and energized. All cable ends shall be covered with insu- installed such that electrical continuity, insulation, and sealing lating ends. against dampness and liquid spillage are provided. All bare cable ends shall be insulated and sealed against dampness and (B) Transition Assemblies. All transition assemblies shall be liquid spillage using listed insulating ends. identified for their use. Each assembly shall incorporate means

for facilitating entry of the Type FCC cable into the assembly, (B) Polarization of Connections. All receptacles and connec- for connecting the Type FCC cable to grounded conductors, tions shall be constructed and installed so as to maintain proper and for electrically connecting the assembly to the metal cable polarization of the system. shields and to equipment grounding conductors. (C) Shields. 324.60 Grounding and Bonding. All metal shields, boxes, (1) Top Shield. A metal top shield shall be installed over all receptacle housings, and self-contained devices shall be elec- floor-mounted Type FCC cable, connectors, and insulating trically continuous to the equipment grounding conductor of ends. The top shield shall completely cover all cable runs, cor- the supplying branch circuit. All such electrical connections ners, connectors, and ends. shall be made with connectors identified for this use. The (2) Bottom Shield. A bottom shield shall be installed beneath electrical resistivity of such shield system shall not be more all Type FCC cable, connectors, and insulating ends.

than that of one conductor of the Type FCC cable used in the installation. (D) Connection to Other Systems. Power feed, grounding connection, and shield system connection between the FCC sys- Part III. Construction Specifications tem and other wiring systems shall be accomplished in a transi- 324.100 Construction. tion assembly identified for this use. (A) Type FCC Cable. Type FCC cable shall be listed for use (E) Metal-Shield Connectors. Metal shields shall be con- with the FCC system and shall consist of three, four, or five flat nected to each other and to boxes, receptacle housings, self- copper conductors, one of which shall be an equipment ground- contained devices, and transition assemblies using metal-shield ing conductor. connectors. (B) Shields. 324.41 Floor Coverings. Floor-mounted Type FCC cable, cable connectors, and insulating ends shall be covered with carpet (1) Materials and Dimensions. All top and bottom shields squares not larger than 1.0 m (39.37 in.) square. Carpet squares shall be of designs and materials identified for their use. Top

that are adhered to the floor shall be attached with release-type shields shall be metal. Both metallic and nonmetallic materials adhesives. shall be permitted for bottom shields. 324.42 Devices. (2) Resistivity. Metal shields shall have cross-sectional areas that provide for electrical resistivity of not more than that of one (A) Receptacles. All receptacles, receptacle housings, and conductor of the Type FCC cable used in the installation. self-contained devices used with the FCC system shall be iden- tified for this use and shall be connected to the Type FCC cable 324.101 Corrosion Resistance. Metal components of the and metal shields. Connection from any equipment grounding system shall be either corrosion resistant, coated with corro- conductor of the Type FCC cable shall be made to the shield sion-resistant materials, or insulated from contact with cor- system at each receptacle. rosive substances. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–221

324.112 ARTICLE 326 — INTEGRATED GAS SPACER CABLE: TYPE IGS 324.112 Insulation. The insulating material of the cable shall Table 326.24 Minimum Radii of Bends be moisture resistant and flame retardant. All insulating materi- als in the FCC systems shall be identified for their use. Conduit Size Minimum Radii 324.120 Markings. Metric Designator Trade Size mm in. (A) Cable Marking. Type FCC cable shall be clearly and 53 2 600 24 durably marked on both sides at intervals of not more than 78 3 900 35 610 mm (24 in.) with the information required by 310.8(A) 103 4 1150 45 and with the following additional information: (1) Material of conductors Table 326.80 Ampacity of Type IGS Cable (2) Maximum temperature rating (3) Ampacity Size (kcmil) Amperes Size (kcmil) Amperes (B) Conductor Identification. Conductors shall be clearly and durably identified on both sides throughout their length as speci- 250 119 2500 376 fied in 310.6. 500 168 3000 412 750 206 3250 429 1000 238 3500 445 1250 266 3750 461 1500 292 4000 476 ARTICLE 326 1750 315 4250 491

Integrated Gas Spacer Cable: Type IGS 2000 336 4500 505 2250 357 4750 519 Part I. General Table 326.112 Paper Spacer Thickness 326.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- struction specifications for integrated gas spacer cable, Type IGS. Thickness 326.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply Size (kcmil) mm in. within this article and throughout the Code. Integrated Gas Spacer Cable, Type IGS. A factory assem- 250–1000 1.02 0.040 bly of one or more conductors, each individually insulated and 1250–4750 1.52 0.060 enclosed in a loose fit, nonmetallic flexible conduit as an inte- grated gas spacer cable rated 0 volts through 600 volts. 326.40 Fittings. Terminations and splices for Type IGS Part II. Installation cable shall be identified as a type that is suitable for maintain- 326.10 Uses Permitted. Type IGS cable shall be permitted ing the gas pressure within the conduit. A valve and cap shall be for use underground, including direct burial in the earth, as the provided for each length of the cable and conduit to check the

following: gas pressure or to inject gas into the conduit. (1) Service-entrance conductors 326.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type IGS cable shall not (2) Feeder or branch-circuit conductors exceed the values shown in Table 326.80. (3) Service conductors, underground Part III. Construction Specifications 326.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type IGS cable shall not be 326.104 Conductors. The conductors shall be solid alumi- used as interior wiring or be exposed in contact with buildings. num rods, laid parallel, consisting of one to nineteen 12.7 mm 326.24 Bending Radius. Where the coilable nonmetallic (1⁄2 in.) diameter rods. The minimum conductor size shall be 250 conduit and cable are bent for installation purposes or are flexed kcmil, and the maximum size shall be 4750 kcmil. or bent during shipment or installation, the radius of the curve 326.112 Insulation. The insulation shall be dry kraft paper of the inner edge measured to the inside of the bend shall not be tapes and a pressurized sulfur hexafluoride gas (SF 6), both less than specified in Table 326.24. approved for electrical use.

The nominal gas pressure shall be 326.26 Bends. A run of Type IGS cable between pull boxes or 138 kPa gauge (20 lb/in.2 gauge). The thickness of the paper terminations shall not contain more than the equivalent of four spacer shall be as specified in Table 326.112. quarter bends (360 degrees total), including those bends located 326.116 Conduit. The conduit shall be a medium density immediately at the pull box or terminations. polyethylene identified as suitable for use with natural gas 70–222 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 330 — METAL-CLAD CABLE: TYPE MC 330.15 Table 326.116 Conduit Dimensions (9) In hazardous (classified) locations where specifically per- mitted by other articles in this Code. Actual Outside Actual Inside (10) In dry locations and embedded in plaster finish on brick Conduit Size Diameter Diameter or other masonry except in damp or wet locations. (11) In wet locations where a corrosion-resistant jacket is pro- Metric Trade Designator Size mm in. mm in. vided over the metallic covering and any of the following conditions are met: 53 2 60 2.375 49.46 1.947 a. The metallic covering is impervious to moisture. 78 3 89 3.500 73.30 2.886 103 4 114 4.500 94.23 3.710 b. A jacket resistant to moisture is provided under the metal covering. c. The insulated conductors under the metallic covering are listed for use in wet locations. rated pipe in metric designator 53, 78, or 103 (trade size 2, 3, (12) Where single-conductor cables are used, all phase con- or 4). The percent fill dimensions for the conduit are shown in ductors and, where used, the grounded conductor shall be Table 326.116.

grouped together to minimize induced voltage on the sheath. The size of the conduit permitted for each conductor size (B) Specific Uses. Type MC cable shall be permitted to be shall be calculated for a percent fill not to exceed those found in installed in compliance with Parts II and III of Article 725 and Table 1, Chapter 9. 770.133 as applicable and in accordance with 330.10(B)(1) through (B)(4). 326.120 Marking. The cable shall be marked in accordance with 310.8(A), 310.8(B)(1), and 310.8(D). Informational Note: The “Uses Permitted” is not an all- • inclusive list. (1) Cable Tray. Type MC cable installed in cable tray shall ARTICLE 330 comply with 392.10, 392.12, 392.18, 392.20, 392.22, 392.30, Metal-Clad Cable: Type MC 392.46, 392.56, 392.60(C), and 392.80. (2) Direct Buried. Direct-buried cable shall comply with 300.5 or 300.50, as appropriate. Part I. General (3) Installed as Service-Entrance Cable. Type MC cable 330.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and installed as service-entrance cable shall be permitted in accor-

construction specifications of metal-clad cable, Type MC. dance with 230.43. 330.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply (4) Installed Outside of Buildings or Structures or as Aerial within this article and throughout the Code. Cable. Type MC cable installed outside of buildings or struc- Metal Clad Cable, Type MC. A factory assembly of one or tures or as aerial cable shall comply with 225.10, 396.10, and more insulated circuit conductors with or without optical fiber 396.12. members enclosed in an armor of interlocking metal tape, or a 330.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type MC cable shall not be smooth or corrugated metallic sheath. used under either of the following conditions: 330.6 Listing Requirements. Type MC cable shall be listed. (1) Where subject to physical damage Fittings used for connecting Type MC cable to boxes, cabinets, (2) Where exposed to any of the destructive corrosive condi- or other equipment shall be listed and identified for such use. tions in (a) or (b), unless the metallic sheath or armor is

resistant to the conditions or is protected by material resis- Part II. Installation tant to the conditions: 330.10 Uses Permitted. a. Direct buried in the earth or embedded in concrete (A) General Uses. Type MC cable shall be permitted as follows: unless identified for direct burial (1) For services, feeders, and branch circuits. b. Exposed to cinder fills, strong chlorides, caustic alka- (2) For power, lighting, control, and signal circuits. lis, or vapors of chlorine or of hydrochloric acids (3) Indoors or outdoors. 330.15 Exposed Work. Exposed runs of cable, except as pro- (4) Exposed or concealed. vided in 300.11(B), shall closely follow the surface of the building (5) To be direct buried where identified for such use. finish or of running boards. Exposed runs shall also be permit- (6) In cable tray where identified for such use. ted to be installed on the underside of joists where supported at (7) In any raceway. each joist and located so as not to be subject to physical damage. (8) As aerial cable on a messenger. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–223

330.17 ARTICLE 330 — METAL-CLAD CABLE: TYPE MC 330.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Type other electrical equipment and the cable and point of con- MC cable shall be protected in accordance with 300.4(A), (C), nection are within an accessible ceiling. and (D) where installed through or parallel to framing members. (3) Is Type MC of the interlocked armor type in lengths not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft) from the last point where it is 330.23 In Accessible Attics. The installation of Type MC cable securely fastened and is used to connect equipment where in accessible attics or roof spaces shall also comply with 320.23. flexibility is necessary to minimize the transmission of 330.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Type MC cable shall be so vibration from equipment or to provide flexibility for equip- made that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of the curve ment that requires movement after installation. of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than required in For the purpose of this section, Type MC cable fittings shall 330.24(A) through (C).

be permitted as a means of cable support. (A) Smooth Sheath. 330.31 Single Conductors. Where single-conductor cables (1) Ten times the external diameter of the metallic sheath for with a nonferrous armor or sheath are used, the installation shall cable not more than 19 mm ( 3 ⁄ 4 in.) in external diameter comply with 300.20. (2) Twelve times the external diameter of the metallic sheath 3 330.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type MC cable shall be for cable more than 19 mm ( ⁄ 4 in.) but not more than 1 determined in accordance with 310.14 or 311.60 for 14 AWG 38 mm (1 ⁄2 in.) in external diameter and larger conductors and in accordance with Table 402.5 (3) Fifteen times the external diameter of the metallic sheath 1 for 18 AWG and 16 AWG conductors. The installation for cable more than 38 mm (1 ⁄2 in.) in external diameter shall not exceed the temperature ratings of terminations and (B) Interlocked-Type Armor or Corrugated Sheath. Seven equipment. times the external diameter of the metallic sheath. (A) Type MC Cable Installed in Cable Tray. The ampacities (C) Shielded Conductors.

Twelve times the overall diameter for Type MC cable installed in cable tray shall be determined in of one of the individual conductors or seven times the overall accordance with 392.80. diameter of the multiconductor cable, whichever is greater. (B) Single Type MC Conductors Grouped Together. Where 330.30 Securing and Supporting. single Type MC conductors are grouped together in a trian- (A) General. Type MC cable shall be supported and secured gular or square configuration and installed on a messenger by staples; cable ties listed and identified for securement and or exposed with a maintained free airspace of not less than support; straps, hangers, or similar fittings; or other approved 2.15 times one conductor diameter (2.15 × O.D.) of the larg- means designed and installed so as not to damage the cable. est conductor contained within the configuration and adjacent conductor configurations or cables, the ampacity of the con- (B) Securing. Unless otherwise provided, cables shall be ductors shall not exceed the allowable ampacities in the fol-

secured at intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft). Cables contain- lowing tables: ing four or fewer conductors sized no larger than 10 AWG shall be secured within 300 mm (12 in.) of every box, cabinet, fitting, (1) Table 310.20 for conductors rated 0 volts through or other cable termination. In vertical installations, listed cables 2000 volts with ungrounded conductors 250 kcmil and larger shall be per- (2) Table 311.60(C)(67) and Table 311.60(C)(68) for conduc- mitted to be secured at intervals not exceeding 3 m (10 ft). tors rated over 2000 volts (C) Supporting. Unless otherwise provided, cables shall be N (C) Thermal Insulation. Where more than two Type MC supported at intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft). cables containing two or more current-carrying conductors in each cable are installed in contact with thermal insulation, caulk, Horizontal runs of Type MC cable installed in wooden or or sealing foam without maintaining spacing between cables, the metal framing members or similar supporting means shall be ampacity of each conductor shall be adjusted in accordance

considered supported and secured where such support does not with Table 310.15(C)(1). exceed 1.8-m (6-ft) intervals. (D) Unsupported Cables. Type MC cable shall be permitted Part III. Construction Specifications to be unsupported and unsecured where the cable complies with ∆ 330.104 Conductors. For ungrounded, grounded, and equip- any of the following: ment grounding conductors, the minimum conductor sizes (1) Is fished between access points through concealed shall be 14 AWG copper, nickel, or nickel-coated copper and spaces in finished buildings or structures and supporting is 12 AWG aluminum or copper-clad aluminum. impractical. For control and signal conductors minimum conductor (2) Is not more than 1.8 m (6 ft) in length from the last point sizes shall be 18 AWG copper, nickel, or nickel-coated copper, of cable support to the point of connection to luminaires or 14 AWG copper-clad aluminum, and 12 AWG aluminum. 70–224 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 332 — MINERAL-INSULATED, METAL-SHEATHED CABLE: TYPE MI 332.30 330.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. Where Type Part II. Installation MC cable is used to provide an equipment grounding conduc- 332.10 Uses Permitted. Type MI cable shall be permitted as tor, it shall comply with 250.118(10) and 250.122. follows: 330.112 Insulation. Insulated conductors shall comply with (1) For services, feeders, and branch circuits 330.112(A) or (B). (2) For power, lighting, control, and signal circuits (A) 1000 Volts or Less. Insulated conductors in sizes (3) In dry, wet, or continuously moist locations 18 AWG and 16 AWG shall be of a type listed in Table 402.3, (4) Indoors or outdoors with a maximum operating temperature not less than 90°C (5) Where exposed or concealed (194°F) and as permitted by 725.49. Conductors larger than (6) Where embedded in plaster, concrete, fill, or other 16 AWG shall be of a type listed in Table 310.4(A) or of a type masonry, whether above or below grade identified for use in Type MC cable. (7) In hazardous (classified) locations where specifically per-

mitted by other articles in this Code (B) Over 1000 Volts. Insulated conductors shall be of a type (8) Where exposed to oil and gasoline listed in Table 310.4(B) and Table 311.10(A). (9) Where exposed to corrosive conditions not deteriorating to 330.116 Sheath. Metallic covering shall be one of the follow- its sheath ing types: smooth metallic sheath, corrugated metallic sheath, (10) In underground runs where suitably protected against or interlocking metal tape armor. The metallic sheath shall be physical damage and corrosive conditions continuous and close fitting. A nonmagnetic sheath or armor (11) In or attached to cable tray shall be used on single conductor Type MC. Supplemental Informational Note: The “Uses Permitted” is not an all- protection of an outer covering of corrosion-resistant material inclusive list. shall be permitted and shall be required where such protection is needed. The sheath shall not be used as a current-carrying 332.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type MI cable shall not be used conductor. under the following conditions or in the following locations:

Informational Note: See 300.6 for protection against (1) In underground runs unless protected from physical dam- corrosion. age, where necessary (2) Where exposed to conditions that are destructive and cor- N 330.130 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Where required rosive to the metallic sheath, unless additional protection is to be marked MC-HL, the cable shall be listed and shall have a provided gas/vapor tight continuous corrugated metallic sheath, an over- all jacket of suitable polymeric material, and a separate equip- 332.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Type ment grounding conductor. MI cable shall be protected in accordance with 300.4 where installed through or parallel to framing members. 332.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Type MI cable shall be ARTICLE 332 so made that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than required as Cable: Type MI follows: (1) Five times the external diameter of the metallic sheath for cable not more than 19 mm ( 3 ⁄ 4 in.) in external diameter Part I.

General (2) Ten times the external diameter of the metallic sheath for 332.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- cable greater than 19 mm (3⁄4 in.) but not more than 25 mm struction specifications for mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed (1 in.) in external diameter cable, Type MI. 332.30 Securing and Supporting. Type MI cable shall be sup- 332.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply ported and secured by staples, straps, hangers, or similar fit- within this article and throughout the Code. tings, designed and installed so as not to damage the cable, at Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed Cable, Type MI. A intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft). factory assembly of one or more conductors insulated with a (A) Horizontal Runs Through Holes and Notches. In other highly compressed refractory mineral insulation and enclosed than vertical runs, cables installed in accordance with 300.4 in a liquidtight and gastight continuous copper or alloy steel shall be considered supported and secured where such support sheath. does not exceed 1.8 m (6 ft) intervals.

332.6 Listing Requirements. Type MI cable and associated (B) Unsupported Cable. Type MI cable shall be permitted fittings shall be listed. to be unsupported where the cable is fished between access 2022 California Electrical Code 70–225

332.31 ARTICLE 334 — NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE: TYPES NM AND NMC points through concealed spaces in finished buildings or struc- tures and supporting is impracticable. ARTICLE 334 (C) Cable Trays. All MI cable installed in cable trays shall Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable: comply with 392.30(A). Types NM and NMC 332.31 Single Conductors. Where single-conductor cables are used, all phase conductors and, where used, the neutral conduc- Part I. General tor shall be grouped together to minimize induced voltage on the 334.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- sheath. struction specifications of nonmetallic-sheathed cable. 332.40 Boxes and Fittings. 334.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply (A) Fittings. Fittings used for connecting Type MI cable within this article and throughout the Code. to boxes, cabinets, or other equipment shall be identified for Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable. A factory assembly of two or such use. more insulated conductors enclosed within an overall nonmetal- (B) Terminal Seals. Where Type MI cable terminates, an end lic jacket.

seal fitting shall be installed immediately after stripping to pre- Type NM. Insulated conductors enclosed within an overall non- vent the entrance of moisture into the insulation. The conductors metallic jacket. extending beyond the sheath shall be individually provided with an insulating material. Type NMC. Insulated conductors enclosed within an overall, corrosion resistant, nonmetallic jacket. 332.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type MI cable shall be • determined in accordance with 310.14. The conductor tempera- ∆ 334.6 Listing Requirements. Type NM and Type NMC ture at the end seal fitting shall not exceed the temperature rat- cables and associated fittings shall be listed. ing of the listed end seal fitting, and the installation shall not exceed the temperature ratings of terminations or equipment. Part II. Installation (A) Type MI Cable Installed in Cable Tray. The ampaci- ∆ 334.10 Uses Permitted. Type NM and Type NMC cables ties for Type MI cable installed in cable tray shall be deter- shall be permitted to be used in the following, except as pro-

mined in accordance with 392.80(A). hibited in 334.12: (B) Single Type MI Conductors Grouped Together. Where (1) One- and two-family dwellings and their attached or detached single Type MI conductors are grouped together in a triangular garages, and their storage buildings. or square configuration, as required by 332.31, and installed (2) Multi-family dwellings permitted to be of Types III, IV, and on a messenger or exposed with a maintained free air space of V construction. not less than 2.15 times one conductor diameter (2.15 × O.D.) (3) Other structures permitted to be of Types III, IV, and V con- of the largest conductor contained within the configuration and struction. Cables shall be concealed within walls, floors, or adjacent conductor configurations or cables, the ampacity of ceilings that provide a thermal barrier of material that has the conductors shall not exceed the allowable ampacities of at least a 15-minute finish rating as identified in listings of Table 310.17. fire-rated assemblies. Informational Note No. 1: Types of building construc- Part III.

Construction Specifications tion and occupancy classifications are defined in NFPA 332.104 Conductors. Type MI cable conductors shall be of 220-2018, Standard on Types of Building Construction, solid copper, nickel, or nickel-coated copper with a resistance or the applicable building code, or both. corresponding to standard AWG and kcmil sizes. Informational Note No. 2: See Informative Annex E for 332.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. Where the determination of building types. [NFPA 220, Table 4.1.1] outer sheath is made of copper, it shall provide an adequate path (4) Cable trays in structures permitted to be Types III, IV, or V to serve as an equipment grounding conductor. Where the outer where the cables are identified for the use. sheath is made of steel, a separate equipment grounding conduc- tor shall be provided. Informational Note: See 310.14(A)(3) for temperature limitation of conductors. 332.112 Insulation. The conductor insulation in Type MI cable shall be a highly compressed refractory mineral that provides (5) Types I and II construction where installed within raceways

proper spacing for all conductors. permitted to be installed in Types I and II construction. 332.116 Sheath. The outer sheath shall be of a continuous Note: [HCD 1 & HCD 2] Types I, II, III, IV, and V construc- C construction to provide mechanical protection and moisture tion as referenced in Section 334.10 shall be as defined in the A seal. California Building Code. C 70–226 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 334 — NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE: TYPES NM AND NMC 334.30 (A) Type NM. Type NM cable shall be permitted as follows: PVC conduit, Type RTRC marked with the suffix -XW, or other approved means extending at least 150 mm (6 in.) above the (1) For both exposed and concealed work in normally dry loca- floor. tions except as prohibited in 334.10(3) (2) To be installed or fished in air voids in masonry block or Type NMC cable installed in shallow chases or grooves in tile walls masonry, concrete, or adobe shall be protected in accordance with the requirements in 300.4(F) and covered with plaster, (B) Type NMC. Type NMC cable shall be permitted as follows: adobe, or similar finish. (1) For both exposed and concealed work in dry, moist, damp, (C) In Unfinished Basements and Crawl Spaces. Where or corrosive locations, except as prohibited by 334.10(3) cable is run at angles with joists in unfinished basements and (2) In outside and inside walls of masonry block or tile crawl spaces, it shall be permissible to secure cables not

(3) In a shallow chase in masonry, concrete, or adobe protected smaller than two 6 AWG or three 8 AWG conductors directly to against nails or screws by a steel plate at least 1.59 mm the lower edges of the joists. Smaller cables shall be run either (1⁄16 in.) thick and covered with plaster, adobe, or similar through bored holes in joists or on running boards. Nonmetallic- finish • sheathed cable installed on the wall of an unfinished basement 334.12 Uses Not Permitted. shall be permitted to be installed in a listed conduit or tub- ing or shall be protected in accordance with 300.4. Conduit or (A) Types NM and NMC. Types NM and NMC cables shall tubing shall be provided with a suitable insulating bushing or not be permitted as follows: adapter at the point the cable enters the raceway. The sheath of (1) In any dwelling or structure not specifically permitted in the nonmetallic-sheathed cable shall extend through the conduit 334.10(1), (2), (3), and (5) or tubing and into the outlet or device box not less than 6 mm (2) Exposed within a dropped or suspended ceiling cavity in (1⁄4 in.).

The cable shall be secured within 300 mm (12 in.) of the other than one- and two-family and multifamily dwellings point where the cable enters the conduit or tubing. Metal con- (3) As service-entrance cable duit, tubing, and metal outlet boxes shall be connected to an (4) In commercial garages having hazardous (classified) loca- equipment grounding conductor complying with the provisions tions as defined in 511.3 of 250.86 and 250.148. (5) In theaters and similar locations, except where permitted in ∆ 334.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Types 518.4(B) NM and NMC cable shall be protected in accordance with (6) In motion picture studios 300.4 where installed through or parallel to framing members. (7) In storage battery rooms Grommets used as required in 300.4(B)(1) shall remain in place (8) In hoistways or on elevators or escalators and be listed for the purpose of cable protection. (9) Embedded in poured cement, concrete, or aggregate (10) In hazardous (classified) locations, except where specifi- 334.23 In Accessible Attics. The installation of cable in

cally permitted by other articles in this Code accessible attics or roof spaces shall also comply with 320.23. (B) Type NM. Type NM cables shall not be used under the fol- 334.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Types NM and NMC lowing conditions or in the following locations: cable shall be so made that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend during or after (1) Where exposed to corrosive fumes or vapors installation shall not be less than five times the diameter of the (2) Where embedded in masonry, concrete, adobe, fill, or plaster cable. (3) In a shallow chase in masonry, concrete, or adobe and cov- ered with plaster, adobe, or similar finish 334.30 Securing and Supporting. Nonmetallic-sheathed (4) In wet or damp locations cable shall be supported and secured by staples, cable ties listed and identified for securement and support, or straps, hangers, 334.15 Exposed Work. In exposed work, except as provided or similar fittings designed and installed so as not to dam- in 300.11(B), cable shall be installed as specified in 334.15(A)

age the cable, at intervals not exceeding 1.4 m (41⁄2 ft) and through (C). within 300 mm (12 in.) of every cable entry into enclosures (A) To Follow Surface. Cable shall closely follow the surface such as outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, or fittings. The of the building finish or of running boards. cable length between the cable entry and the closest cable sup- port shall not exceed 450 mm (18 in.). Flat cables shall not be (B) Protection from Physical Damage. Cable shall be pro- stapled on edge. tected from physical damage where necessary by rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, Sections of cable protected from physical damage by race- Schedule 80 PVC conduit, Type RTRC marked with the suf- way shall not be required to be secured within the raceway. fix -XW, or other approved means. Where passing through a (A) Horizontal Runs Through Holes and Notches. In other floor, the cable shall be enclosed in rigid metal conduit, inter- than vertical runs, cables installed in accordance with 300.4

mediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, Schedule 80 2022 California Electrical Code 70–227

334.40 ARTICLE 336 — POWER AND CONTROL TRAY CABLE: TYPE TC shall be considered to be supported and secured where such installed in cable trays shall be determined in accordance with support does not exceed 1.4-m (4 1 ⁄ 2 -ft) intervals and the 392.80(A). nonmetallic-sheathed cable is securely fastened in place Where more than two NM cables containing two or more by an approved means within 300 mm (12 in.) of each box, current-carrying conductors are installed, without maintaining cabinet, conduit body, or other nonmetallic-sheathed cable spacing between the cables, through the same opening in wood termination. framing that is to be sealed with thermal insulation, caulk, or Informational Note: See 314.17(B)(1) for support sealing foam, the ampacity of each conductor shall be adjusted where nonmetallic boxes are used. in accordance with Table 310.15(C)(1) and the provisions of 310.14(A)(2), Exception, shall not apply. (B) Unsupported Cables. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable shall be permitted to be unsupported where the cable: Where more than two NM cables containing two or more

current-carrying conductors are installed in contact with ther- (1) Is fished between access points through concealed mal insulation without maintaining spacing between cables, spaces in finished buildings or structures and supporting is the ampacity of each conductor shall be adjusted in accordance impracticable. with Table 310.15(C)(1). (2) Is not more than 1.4 m (41⁄2 ft) from the last point of cable support to the point of connection to a luminaire or other Part III. Construction Specifications piece of electrical equipment and the cable and point of con- nection are within an accessible ceiling in one-, two-, or 334.100 Construction. The outer cable sheath of nonmetallic- multifamily dwellings. sheathed cable shall be a nonmetallic material. 334.104 Conductors. The 600-volt insulated power conduc- (C) Wiring Device Without a Separate Outlet Box. A wir- tors shall be sizes 14 AWG through 2 AWG copper conductors ing device identified for the use, without a separate outlet box, or sizes 12 AWG through 2 AWG aluminum or copper-clad alu-

and incorporating an integral cable clamp shall be permitted minum conductors. Control and signaling conductors shall be no where the cable is secured in place at intervals not exceeding smaller than 18 AWG copper. 1.4 m (4 1⁄2 ft) and within 300 mm (12 in.) from the wiring device wall opening, and there shall be at least a 300 mm (12 in.) loop 334.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. In addition to of unbroken cable or 150 mm (6 in.) of a cable end available on the insulated conductors, the cable shall have an insulated, cov- the interior side of the finished wall to permit replacement. ered, or bare equipment grounding conductor. 334.40 Boxes and Fittings. 334.112 Insulation. The insulated power conductors shall be one of the types listed in Table 310.4(A) that are suitable for (A) Boxes of Insulating Material. Nonmetallic outlet boxes branch-circuit wiring or one that is identified for use in these shall be permitted as provided by 314.3. cables. Conductor insulation shall be rated at 90°C (194°F). (B) Devices of Insulating Material. Self-contained switches,

self-contained receptacles, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable Informational Note: Types NM, NMC, and NMS cable interconnector devices of insulating material that are listed shall identified by the markings NM-B, NMC-B, and NMS-B be permitted to be used without boxes in exposed cable wir- meet this requirement. ing and for repair wiring in existing buildings where the cable ∆ 334.116 Sheath. The outer sheath of nonmetallic-sheathed cable is concealed. Openings in such devices shall form a close fit shall comply with 334.116(A) and (B). around the outer covering of the cable, and the device shall fully (A) Type NM. The overall covering shall be flame retardant enclose the part of the cable from which any part of the cover- and moisture resistant. ing has been removed. Where connections to conductors are by binding-screw terminals, there shall be available as many termi- (B) Type NMC. The overall covering shall be flame retar- nals as conductors. dant, moisture resistant, fungus resistant, and corrosion resistant. (C) Devices with Integral Enclosures. Wiring devices with •

integral enclosures identified for such use shall be permitted as provided by 300.15(E). ∆ 334.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Types NM and NMC cable ARTICLE 336 shall be determined in accordance with 310.14. The ampacity Power and Control Tray Cable: Type TC shall not exceed that of a 60°C (140°F) rated conductor. The 90°C (194°F) rating shall be permitted to be used for ampac- ity adjustment and correction calculations, provided the final Part I. General calculated ampacity does not exceed that of a 60°C (140°F) 336.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- rated conductor. The ampacity of Types NM and NMC cable struction specifications for power and control tray cable, Type TC. 70–228 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 336 — POWER AND CONTROL TRAY CABLE: TYPE TC 336.100 336.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply (9) In one- and two-family dwelling units, Type TC-ER-JP within this article and throughout this Code. cable containing both power and control conductors shall be permitted for branch circuits and feeders. Type TC- Power and Control Tray Cable, Type TC. A factory assem- ER-JP cable used as interior wiring shall be installed per bly of two or more insulated conductors, with or without associ- the requirements of Part II of Article 334 and where ated bare or covered equipment grounding conductors, under a installed as exterior wiring shall be installed per the nonmetallic jacket. requirements of Part II of Article 340. 336.6 Listing Requirements. Type TC cables and associ- Exception: Where used to connect a generator and associated ated fittings shall be listed. equipment having terminals rated 75°C (140°F) or higher, the Part II. Installation cable shall not be limited in ampacity by 334.80 or 340.80. ∆ 336.10 Uses Permitted.

Type TC cable shall be permitted to Informational Note: See 725.136 for limitations on be used as follows: Class 2 or 3 circuits contained within the same cable with conductors of electric light, power, or Class 1 circuits. (1) For power, lighting, control, and signal circuits. (2) In cable trays, including those with mechanically discon- (10) Direct buried, where identified for such use. tinuous segments up to 300 mm (1 ft). (11) In hazardous (classified) locations where specifically per- (3) In raceways. mitted by other articles in this Code. (4) In outdoor locations supported by a messenger wire. Informational Note: See 310.14(A)(3) for temperature (5) For Class 1 circuits as permitted in Parts II and III of limitation of conductors. Article 725. (6) For non-power-limited fire alarm circuits if conductors 336.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type TC tray cable shall not be comply with the requirements of 760.49. installed or used as follows: (7) Between a cable tray and the utilization equipment or (1) Installed where it will be exposed to physical damage

device(s), provided all of the following apply: (2) Installed outside a raceway or cable tray system, except a. The cable is Type TC-ER. as permitted in 336.10(4), 336.10(7), 336.10(9), and b. The cable is installed in industrial establishments 336.10(10) where the conditions of maintenance and supervision (3) Used where exposed to direct rays of the sun, unless identi- ensure that only qualified persons service the fied as sunlight resistant installation. 336.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Type TC cable shall be made c. The cable is continuously supported and protected so as not to damage the cable. For Type TC cable without metal against physical damage using mechanical protection shielding, the minimum bending radius shall be as follows: such as struts, angles, or channels. (1) Four times the overall diameter for cables 25 mm (1 in.) or d. The cable complies with the crush and impact require- less in diameter ments of Type MC cable and is identified with the (2) Five times the overall diameter for cables larger than 25 mm marking “TC–ER.”

(1 in.) but not more than 50 mm (2 in.) in diameter e. The cable is secured at intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (3) Six times the overall diameter for cables larger than (6 ft). 50 mm (2 in.) in diameter f. Equipment grounding for the utilization equipment is provided by an equipment grounding conductor Type TC cables with metallic shielding shall have a mini- within the cable. In cables containing conductors sized mum bending radius of not less than 12 times the cable overall 6 AWG or smaller, the equipment grounding conduc- diameter. tor shall be provided within the cable or, at the time 336.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type TC tray cable shall of installation, one or more insulated conductors shall be determined in accordance with 392.80(A) for 14 AWG and be permanently identified as an equipment grounding larger conductors, in accordance with 402.5 for 18 AWG through conductor in accordance with 250.119(B). 16 AWG conductors where installed in cable trays, and in accor-

Exception to (7): Where not subject to physical damage, dance with 310.14 where installed outside of cable trays, where Type TC-ER shall be permitted to transition between cable trays permitted. and between cable trays and equipment or devices for a distance not to exceed 1.8 m (6 ft) without continuous support. The cable Part III. Construction Specifications shall be mechanically supported where exiting the cable tray to 336.100 Construction. A metallic sheath or armor as defined ensure that the minimum bending radius is not exceeded. in 330.116 shall not be permitted either under or over the nonme- (8) Type TC cable shall be resistant to moisture and corrosive tallic jacket. Metallic shield(s) shall be permitted over groups of agents where installed in wet locations. conductors, under the outer jacket, or both. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–229

336.104 ARTICLE 337 — TYPE P CABLE ∆ 336.104 Conductors. For ungrounded, grounded, and equip- N Type P. Cable. A factory assembly of one or more insulated ment grounding conductors, the conductor sizes shall be 14 AWG flexible tinned copper conductors, with associated equipment through 1000 kcmil copper, nickel, or nickel-coated copper and grounding conductor(s), with or without a braided metallic 12 AWG through 1000 kcmil aluminum or copper-clad alumi- armor and with an overall nonmetallic jacket. num. Insulation types shall be one of the types listed in Table N 337.6 Listing Requirements. Type P cables and associated fit- 310.4(A) or Table 310.4(B) that is suitable for branch circuit and tings shall be listed. feeder circuits or one that is identified for such use. For control and signal conductors, the minimum conductor N Part II. Installation sizes shall be 18 AWG copper, nickel, or nickel-coated copper, N 337.10 Uses Permitted. Type P cable shall be permitted to be 14 AWG copper-clad aluminum, and 12 AWG aluminum. used: (A) Fire Alarm Systems.

Where used for fire alarm systems, (1) Under engineering supervision in industrial installa- conductors shall also be in accordance with 760.49. tions where conditions of maintenance and supervision (B) Thermocouple Circuits. Conductors in Type TC cable ensure that only qualified persons monitor and service the used for thermocouple circuits in accordance with Part III of system. Article 725 shall also be permitted to be any of the materials used (2) In hazardous (classified) locations where specifically per- for thermocouple extension wire. mitted by other articles in this Code. (C) Class 1 Circuit Conductors. Insulated conductors of N 337.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type P cable shall not be installed 18 AWG and 16 AWG copper shall also be in accordance with or used: 725.49. (1) Where it will be exposed to physical damage 336.116 Jacket. The outer jacket shall be a flame-retardant, (2) Where not specifically permitted by other articles in the nonmetallic material. Code 336.120 Marking. There shall be no voltage marking on a N 337.24 Bending Radius. The minimum bending radii during

Type TC cable employing thermocouple extension wire. installations and handling in service shall be adequate to prevent damage to the cable. N 336.130 Hazardous (Classified) Location Cable. Cable listed and marked Type TC-ER-HL shall comply with the N 337.30 Securing and Supporting. Type P cable shall be following: supported and secured by cable ties listed and identified for securement and support; straps, hangers, or similar fittings; or (1) The overall nonmetallic jacket shall be suitable for the other approved means designed and installed so as not to dam- environment. age the cable. (2) The overall cable construction shall be essentially circular in cross-section. N 337.31 Single Conductors. Where single-conductor cables (3) The overall nonmetallic jacket shall be continuous and gas/ are used, the installation shall comply with 300.20. vapor tight. N 337.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type P cable shall be deter- (4) For construction greater than 25.4 mm (1 in.) in diameter, mined in accordance with 310.14(A) or 310.14(B) for 14 AWG the following shall apply:

and larger conductors. For 18 AWG and 16 AWG conductors the a. The equipment grounding conductor shall be bare. ampacities shall be determined in accordance with Table 402.5. b. A metallic shield shall be included over all conductors When installed in cable tray, the ampacities shall be permitted under the outer jacket. to be determined in accordance with 392.80. The installation shall not exceed the temperature ratings of terminations and equipment. N ARTICLE 337 N Part III. Construction Specifications Type P Cable N 337.104 Conductors. Conductors shall be of tinned copper. Conductors shall employ flexible stranding. The minimum con- N Part I. General ductor size shall be 18 AWG. N 337.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- N 337.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. An equipment struction specifications for up through 2000 volt Type P cable grounding conductor complying with 250.122 shall be provided (armored and unarmored). within the cable. N 337.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply N 337.112 Insulation.

Insulated conductors shall be a thermoset within this article and throughout the Code. type identified for use in Type P cable. All conductors shall be 70–230 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 338 — SERVICE-ENTRANCE CABLE: TYPES SE AND USE 338.10 suitable for wet locations. The minimum wall thickness shall be shall be installed in accordance with 230.6, 230.7, and Parts II, 0.76 mm (30 mils). III, and IV of Article 230. N 337.114 Shield. Metallic shield(s) shall be permitted over a (B) Branch Circuits or Feeders. single conductor or groups of conductors. (1) Grounded Conductor Insulated. Type SE service- N 337.115 Jacket. Single conductor cables and multiconductor entrance cables shall be permitted in wiring systems where all cables shall have an overall nonmetallic jacket that is impervious of the circuit conductors of the cable are of the thermoset or to moisture, corrosion resistant, and sunlight resistant. thermoplastic type. N 337.116 Armor. Armor shall be permitted over the jacket. If (2) Use of Uninsulated Conductor. Type SE service-entrance provided, the armor or metallic covering shall be a braided bas- cable shall be permitted for use where the insulated conductors

ket weave type consisting of wire laid closely together, flat and are used for circuit wiring and the uninsulated conductor is used parallel, and forming a basket weave that shall firmly grip the only for equipment grounding purposes. cable. The wire shall be commercial bronze. The armor shall Exception: In existing installations, uninsulated conductors not be used as a current-carrying conductor or as an equipment shall be permitted as a grounded conductor in accordance with grounding conductor. A nonmetallic jacket that conforms to 250.32 and 250.140, where the uninsulated grounded conduc- 337.115 shall be provided over the armor. tor of the cable originates in service equipment, and with 225.30 N 337.120 Marking. Type P cable shall be marked in accordance through 225.40. with 310.8. When an armor is provided, the cable shall be (3) Temperature Limitations. Type SE service-entrance marked accordingly. cable used to supply appliances shall not be subject to conduc- tor temperatures in excess of the temperature specified for the type of insulation involved. ARTICLE 338

∆ (4) Installation Methods for Branch Circuits and Feeders. Service-Entrance Cable: Types SE and USE Informational Note No. 1: See 310.14(A)(3) for tempera- ture limitation of conductors. Part I. General Informational Note No. 2: For the installation of main 338.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- power feeder conductors in dwelling units refer to 310.12. struction specifications of service-entrance cable. (a) Interior Installations. 338.2 Definitions. The definition in this section shall apply (1) In addition to the provisions of this article, Type SE within this article and throughout the Code. service-entrance cable used for interior wiring shall com- ∆ Service-Entrance Cable. A single conductor or multicon- ply with the installation requirements of Part II of Arti- ductor cable provided with an overall covering, primarily used cle 334, excluding 334.80. for services, and of the following types: (2) Where more than two Type SE cables containing two or more current-carrying conductors in each cable are installed Type SE.

Service-entrance cable having a flame-retardant, in contact with thermal insulation, caulk, or sealing foam moisture- resistant covering. without maintaining spacing between cables, the ampacity Type USE. Service-entrance cable, identified for underground of each conductor shall be adjusted in accordance with Table use, having a moisture-resistant covering, but not required to 310.15(C)(1). have a flame-retardant covering. (3) For Type SE cable with ungrounded conductor sizes 10 AWG and smaller, where installed in contact with N Service-Entrance Conductor Assembly. Multiple single- thermal insulation, the ampacity shall be in accordance with insulated conductors twisted together without an overall cov- 60°C (140°F) conductor temperature rating. The maximum ering, other than an optional binder intended only to keep the conductor temperature rating shall be permitted to be used conductors together. for ampacity adjustment and correction purposes, if the final 338.6 Listing Requirements. Type SE and USE cables and ampacity does not exceed that for a 60°C (140°F) rated

associated fittings shall be listed. conductor. Part II. Installation (b) Exterior Installations. 338.10 Uses Permitted. (1) In addition to the provisions of this article, service-entrance cable used for feeders or branch circuits, where installed as (A) Service-Entrance Conductors. Service-entrance cable exterior wiring, shall be installed in accordance with Part I shall be permitted to be used as service-entrance conductors and 2022 California Electrical Code 70–231

338.12 ARTICLE 340 — UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE: TYPE UF of Article 225. The cable shall be supported in accordance with 334.30. ARTICLE 340 (2) Type USE cable installed as underground feeder and branch Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit circuit cable shall comply with Part II of Article 340. Cable: Type UF Exception: Single-conductor Type USE and multi-rated USE conductors shall not be subject to the ampacity limitations of Part I. General Part II of Article 340. 340.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- 338.12 Uses Not Permitted. struction specifications for underground feeder and branch- (A) Service-Entrance Cable. Service-entrance cable (SE) circuit cable, Type UF. shall not be used under the following conditions or in the fol- 340.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply lowing locations: within this article and throughout the Code. (1) Where subject to physical damage unless protected in accor- Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable, Type dance with 230.50(B) UF.

A factory assembly of one or more insulated conductors (2) Underground with or without a raceway with an integral or an overall covering of nonmetallic material (3) For exterior branch circuits and feeder wiring unless the suitable for direct burial in the earth. installation complies with the provisions of Part I of Arti- cle 225 and is supported in accordance with 334.30 or is 340.6 Listing Requirements. Type UF cable and associated used as messenger-supported wiring as permitted in Part II fittings shall be listed. of Article 396 Part II. Installation (B) Underground Service-Entrance Cable. Underground service-entrance cable (USE) shall not be used under the follow- ∆ 340.10 Uses Permitted. Type UF cable shall be permitted as ing conditions or in the following locations: follows: (1) For interior wiring (1) For use underground, including direct burial in the earth. (2) For aboveground installations except where USE cable (2) As single-conductor cables. Where installed as single-

emerges from the ground and is terminated in an enclosure at conductor cables, all conductors of the feeder or branch an outdoor location and the cable is protected in accordance circuit, including the grounded conductor and equipment with 300.5(D) grounding conductor, if any, shall be installed in accordance (3) As aerial cable unless it is a multiconductor cable iden- with 300.3. tified for use aboveground and installed as messenger- (3) For wiring in wet, dry, or corrosive locations. supported wiring in accordance with 225.10 and Part II of (4) Installed as nonmetallic-sheathed cable. Where so installed, Article 396 the installation and conductor requirements shall comply with Parts II and III of Article 334 and shall be of the mul- 338.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Types USE and SE cable ticonductor type. shall be so made that the cable will not be damaged. The radius (5) As single-conductor cables as the nonheating leads for heat- of the curve of the inner edge of any bend, during or after instal- ing cables as provided in 424.43.

lation, shall not be less than five times the diameter of the cable. (6) Supported by cable trays. Type UF cable supported by cable trays shall be of the multiconductor type. Part III. Construction Specifications Informational Note: See 310.14(A)(3) for temperature ∆ 338.100 Construction. limitation of conductors. N (A) Assemblies. Cabled assemblies of multiple single-conductor 340.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type UF cable shall not be used Type USE conductors shall be permitted for direct burial. All con- as follows: ductors shall be insulated. (1) As service-entrance cable Informational Note: The term “cabled” refers to a man- (2) In commercial garages ufacturing process of twisting single conductors together (3) In theaters and similar locations and may also be referred to as “plexed.” (4) In motion picture studios N (B) Uninsulated Conductor. Type SE or USE cable with an (5) In storage battery rooms overall covering containing two or more conductors shall be per- (6) In hoistways or on elevators or escalators mitted to have one conductor uninsulated.

(7) In hazardous (classified) locations, except as specifically permitted by other articles in this Code 338.120 Marking. Service-entrance cable shall be marked as (8) Embedded in poured cement, concrete, or aggregate, except required in 310.8. Cable with the neutral conductor smaller than where embedded in plaster as nonheating leads where per- the ungrounded conductors shall be so marked. mitted in 424.43 70–232 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 342 — INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT: TYPE IMC 342.22 (9) Where exposed to direct rays of the sun, unless identified Part II. Installation as sunlight resistant 342.10 Uses Permitted. Informational Note: The sunlight-resistant marking on (A) All Atmospheric Conditions and Occupancies. Use of the jacket does not apply to the individual conductors. IMC shall be permitted under all atmospheric conditions and (10) Where subject to physical damage occupancies. (11) As overhead cable, except where installed as messenger- (B) Corrosion Environments. IMC, elbows, couplings, and supported wiring in accordance with Part II of Article 396 fittings shall be permitted to be installed in concrete, in direct 340.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Type UF cable shall be so contact with the earth, or in areas subject to severe corrosive made that the cable is not damaged. The radius of the curve of influences where protected by corrosion protection approved for the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than five times the the condition. diameter of the cable. (C) Cinder Fill.

IMC shall be permitted to be installed in or 340.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type UF cable shall be that under cinder fill where subject to permanent moisture where pro- of 60°C (140°F) conductors in accordance with 310.14. tected on all sides by a layer of noncinder concrete not less than 50 mm (2 in.) thick; where the conduit is not less than 450 mm Part III. Construction Specifications (18 in.) under the fill; or where protected by corrosion protec- tion approved for the condition. 340.104 Conductors. The conductors shall be sizes 14 AWG copper or 12 AWG aluminum or copper-clad aluminum through (D) Wet Locations. All supports, bolts, straps, screws, and so 4/0 AWG. forth, shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or protected against corrosion by corrosion-resistant materials. 340.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. In addition to the insulated conductors, the cable shall be permitted to have an Informational Note: See 300.6 for protection against insulated or bare equipment grounding conductor. corrosion. 340.112 Insulation.

The conductors of Type UF shall be one N (E) Severe Physical Damage. IMC shall be permitted to be of the moisture-resistant types listed in Table 310.4(A) that installed where subject to severe physical damage. is suitable for branch-circuit wiring or one that is identified ∆ 342.14 Dissimilar Metals. Where practicable, dissimilar for such use. Where installed as a substitute wiring method metals in contact anywhere in the system shall be avoided to for NM cable, the conductor insulation shall be rated 90°C eliminate the possibility of galvanic action. (194°F). Stainless steel and aluminum fittings and enclosures shall be 340.116 Sheath. The overall covering shall be flame retardant; permitted to be used with galvanized steel IMC where not sub- moisture, fungus, and corrosion resistant; and suitable for direct ject to severe corrosive influences. burial in the earth. Stainless steel IMC shall only be used with the following: (1) Stainless steel fittings ARTICLE 342 (2) Stainless steel boxes and enclosures

Intermediate Metal Conduit: Type IMC (3) Steel (galvanized, painted, powder or PVC coated, and so forth) boxes and enclosures when not subject to severe cor- rosive influences Part I. General (4) Stainless steel, nonmetallic, or approved accessories 342.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- 342.20 Size. struction specifications for intermediate metal conduit (IMC) and (A) Minimum. IMC smaller than metric designator 16 (trade associated fittings. 1 size ⁄2) shall not be used. 342.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply (B) Maximum. IMC larger than metric designator 103 (trade within this article and throughout the Code. size 4) shall not be used. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). A steel threadable race- Informational Note: See 300.1(C) for the metric desig- way of circular cross section designed for the physical protection nators and trade sizes. These are for identification pur- and routing of conductors and cables and for use as an equipment poses only and do not relate to actual dimensions.

grounding conductor when installed with its integral or associ- ated coupling and appropriate fittings. 342.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified 342.6 Listing Requirements. IMC, factory elbows and cou- in Table 1, Chapter 9. plings, and associated fittings shall be listed. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–233

342.24 ARTICLE 344 — RIGID METAL CONDUIT: TYPE RMC Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is (4) Horizontal runs of IMC supported by openings through not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of framing members at intervals not exceeding 3 m (10 ft) cables shall not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified and securely fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) of termination in Table 1, Chapter 9. points shall be permitted. 342.24 Bends — How Made. Bends of IMC shall be so made 342.42 Couplings and Connectors. that the conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter (A) Threadless. Threadless couplings and connectors used of the conduit will not be effectively reduced. The radius of the with conduit shall be made tight. Where buried in masonry or curve of any field bend to the centerline of the conduit shall not concrete, they shall be the concretetight type. Where installed be less than indicated in Table 2, Chapter 9. in wet locations, they shall comply with 314.15. Threadless 342.26 Bends — Number in One Run.

There shall not be couplings and connectors shall not be used on threaded conduit more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees ends unless listed for the purpose. total) between pull points, for example, conduit bodies and (B) Running Threads. Running threads shall not be used on boxes. conduit for connection at couplings. 342.28 Reaming and Threading. All cut ends shall be reamed 342.46 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or other or otherwise finished to remove rough edges. Where conduit is enclosure, a bushing shall be provided to protect the wires from threaded in the field, a standard cutting die with a taper of 1 in 16 abrasion unless the box, fitting, or enclosure is designed to pro- (3⁄4 in. taper per foot) shall be used. vide such protection. Informational Note: See ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-2013, Informational Note: See 300.4(G) for the protection of Standard for Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). conductors 4 AWG and larger at bushings. 342.30 Securing and Supporting. IMC shall be installed 342.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in

as a complete system in accordance with 300.18 and shall be accordance with 300.15. securely fastened in place and supported in accordance with 342.30(A) and (B). 342.60 Grounding. IMC shall be permitted as an equipment grounding conductor. (A) Securely Fastened. IMC shall be secured in accordance with one of the following: Part III. Construction Specifications (1) IMC shall be securely fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) of 342.100 Construction. IMC shall be made of one of the each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, conduit following: body, or other conduit termination. (2) Where structural members do not readily permit fastening (1) Steel, with protective coatings within 900 mm (3 ft), fastening shall be permitted to be (2) Stainless steel increased to a distance of 1.5 m (5 ft). 342.120 Marking. Each length shall be clearly and durably (3) Where approved, conduit shall not be required to be securely marked at least every 1.5 m (5 ft) with the letters IMC. Each fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) of the service head for above-

length shall be marked as required in the first sentence of the-roof termination of a mast. 110.21(A). • (B) Supports. IMC shall be supported in accordance with one of the following: ARTICLE 344 (1) Conduit shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 3 m (10 ft). Rigid Metal Conduit: Type RMC (2) The distance between supports for straight runs of conduit shall be permitted in accordance with Table 344.30(B)(2), Part I. General provided the conduit is made up with threaded couplings and supports that prevent transmission of stresses to termi- 344.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- nation where conduit is deflected between supports. struction specifications for rigid metal conduit (RMC) and (3) Exposed vertical risers from industrial machinery or fixed associated fittings. equipment shall be permitted to be supported at inter- 344.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply vals not exceeding 6 m (20 ft) if the conduit is made within this article and throughout the Code. up with threaded couplings, the conduit is supported

and securely fastened at the top and bottom of the riser, Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC). A threadable raceway of circular and no other means of intermediate support is readily cross section designed for the physical protection and routing of available. conductors and cables and for use as an equipment grounding 70–234 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 344 — RIGID METAL CONDUIT: TYPE RMC 344.30 conductor when installed with its integral or associated cou- the possibility of galvanic action. Stainless steel and aluminum fit- pling and appropriate fittings. tings and enclosures shall be permitted to be used with galvanized steel RMC, and galvanized steel fittings and enclosures shall be 344.6 Listing Requirements. RMC, factory elbows and cou- permitted to be used with aluminum RMC where not subject to plings, and associated fittings shall be listed. severe corrosive influences. Stainless steel rigid conduit shall only Part II. Installation be used with the following: 344.10 Uses Permitted. (1) Stainless steel fittings (2) Stainless steel boxes and enclosures (A) Atmospheric Conditions and Occupancies. (3) Steel (galvanized, painted, powder or PVC coated, and so (1) Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steel, and Red Brass RMC. forth) boxes and enclosures when not subject to severe cor- Galvanized steel, stainless steel, and red brass RMC shall be rosive influences permitted under all atmospheric conditions and occupancies.

(4) Stainless steel, nonmetallic, or approved accessories • (2) Aluminum RMC. Aluminum RMC shall be permitted to 344.20 Size. be installed where approved for the environment. Rigid alumi- (A) Minimum. RMC smaller than metric designator 16 (trade num conduit encased in concrete or in direct contact with the 1 size ⁄2) shall not be used. earth shall be provided with approved supplementary corrosion protection. Exception: For enclosing the leads of motors as permitted in 430.245(B). (3) Ferrous Raceways and Fittings. Ferrous raceways and fit- tings protected from corrosion solely by enamel shall be per- (B) Maximum. RMC larger than metric designator 155 (trade mitted only indoors and in occupancies not subject to severe size 6) shall not be used. corrosive influences. Informational Note: See 300.1(C) for the metric desig- (B) Corrosive Environments. nators and trade sizes. These are for identification pur- poses only and do not relate to actual dimensions. (1) Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steel, and Red Brass RMC, Elbows, Couplings, and Fittings.

Galvanized steel, stain- 344.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors less steel, and red brass RMC elbows, couplings, and fittings shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified shall be permitted to be installed in concrete, in direct contact in Table 1, Chapter 9. with the earth, or in areas subject to severe corrosive influ- Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is ences where protected by corrosion protection approved for the not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of condition. cables shall not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified (2) Supplementary Protection of Aluminum RMC. Alumi- in Table 1, Chapter 9. num RMC shall be provided with approved supplementary cor- 344.24 Bends — How Made. Bends of RMC shall be so rosion protection where encased in concrete or in direct contact made that the conduit will not be damaged and so that the inter- with the earth. nal diameter of the conduit will not be effectively reduced. The (C) Cinder Fill.

Galvanized steel, stainless steel, and red brass radius of the curve of any field bend to the centerline of the con- RMC shall be permitted to be installed in or under cinder fill duit shall not be less than indicated in Table 2, Chapter 9. where subject to permanent moisture where protected on all 344.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be sides by a layer of noncinder concrete not less than 50 mm (2 in.) more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees thick; where the conduit is not less than 450 mm (18 in.) under total) between pull points, for example, conduit bodies and the fill; or where protected by corrosion protection approved for boxes. the condition. 344.28 Reaming and Threading. All cut ends shall be (D) Wet Locations. All supports, bolts, straps, screws, and reamed or otherwise finished to remove rough edges. Where so forth, shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or protected conduit is threaded in the field, a standard cutting die with a 1 against corrosion by corrosion-resistant materials. 3 in 16 taper ( ⁄4 in. taper per foot) shall be used.

Informational Note: See 300.6 for protection against Informational Note: See ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-2013, corrosion. Standard for Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). N (E) Severe Physical Damage. RMC shall be permitted to be 344.30 Securing and Supporting. RMC shall be installed as installed where subject to severe physical damage. a complete system in accordance with 300.18 and shall be 344.14 Dissimilar Metals. Where practicable, dissimilar metals securely fastened in place and supported in accordance with in contact anywhere in the system shall be avoided to eliminate 344.30(A) and (B). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–235

344.42 ARTICLE 348 — FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: TYPE FMC Table 344.30(B)(2) Supports for Rigid Metal Conduit (B) Running Threads. Running threads shall not be used on conduit for connection at couplings. Maximum Distance 344.46 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or Between Rigid Metal Conduit Size Conduit Supports other enclosure, a bushing shall be provided to protect the wires from abrasion unless the box, fitting, or enclosure is designed Metric to provide such protection. Designator Trade Size m ft Informational Note: See 300.4(G) for the protection of 1 3 16–21 ⁄2– ⁄4 3.0 10 conductors sizes 4 AWG and larger at bushings. 27 1 3.7 12 35–41 11⁄4–11⁄2 4.3 14 344.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in 53–63 2–21⁄2 4.9 16 accordance with 300.15. 78 and larger 3 and larger 6.1 20 344.60 Grounding. RMC shall be permitted as an equipment grounding conductor. (A) Securely Fastened. RMC shall be secured in accordance Part III. Construction Specifications with one of the following: 344.100 Construction. RMC shall be made of one of the

(1) RMC shall be securely fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) of following: each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, conduit (1) Steel with protective coatings body, or other conduit termination. (2) Aluminum (2) Fastening shall be permitted to be increased to a distance of (3) Red brass 1.5 m (5 ft) where structural members do not readily permit (4) Stainless steel fastening within 900 mm (3 ft). (3) Where approved, conduit shall not be required to be securely 344.120 Marking. Each length shall be clearly and durably fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) of the service head for above- identified in every 3 m (10 ft) as required in the first sentence of the-roof termination of a mast. 110.21(A). Nonferrous conduit of corrosion-resistant material shall have suitable markings. (B) Supports. RMC shall be supported in accordance with one • of the following: (1) Conduit shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 3 m ARTICLE 348 (10 ft). Flexible Metal Conduit: Type FMC (2) The distance between supports for straight runs of conduit shall be permitted in accordance with Table 344.30(B)(2),

provided the conduit is made up with threaded couplings Part I. General and supports that prevent transmission of stresses to ter- 348.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- mination where conduit is deflected between supports. struction specifications for flexible metal conduit (FMC) and (3) Exposed vertical risers from industrial machinery or associated fittings. fixed equipment shall be permitted to be supported at intervals not exceeding 6 m (20 ft) if the conduit is made 348.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply up with threaded couplings, the conduit is supported within this article and throughout the Code. and securely fastened at the top and bottom of the riser, Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC). A raceway of circular cross and no other means of intermediate support is readily section made of helically wound, formed, interlocked metal available. strip. (4) Horizontal runs of RMC supported by openings through 348.6 Listing Requirements. FMC and associated fittings framing members at intervals not exceeding 3 m (10 ft) and shall be listed.

securely fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) of termination points shall be permitted. Part II. Installation 344.42 Couplings and Connectors. 348.10 Uses Permitted. FMC shall be permitted to be used in (A) Threadless. Threadless couplings and connectors used exposed and concealed locations. with conduit shall be made tight. Where buried in masonry or 348.12 Uses Not Permitted. FMC shall not be used in the concrete, they shall be the concrete tight type. Where installed following: in wet locations, they shall comply with 314.15. Threadless couplings and connectors shall not be used on threaded conduit (1) In wet locations ends unless listed for the purpose. (2) In hoistways, other than as permitted in 620.21(A)(1) 70–236 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 348 — FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: TYPE FMC 348.30 (3) In storage battery rooms 348.24 Bends — How Made. Bends in conduit shall be made (4) In any hazardous (classified) location except as permitted so that the conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter of by other articles in this Code the conduit is not effectively reduced. Bends shall be permitted (5) Where exposed to materials having a deteriorating effect on to be made manually without auxiliary equipment. The radius the installed conductors, such as oil or gasoline of the curve to the centerline of any bend shall not be less than (6) Underground or embedded in poured concrete or aggregate shown in Table 2, Chapter 9 using the column “Other Bends.” (7) Where subject to physical damage 348.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be 348.20 Size. more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) between pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes. (A) Minimum. FMC less than metric designator 16 (trade 1 size ⁄ 2) shall not be used unless permitted in 348.20(A)(1) 348.28 Trimming.

All cut ends shall be trimmed or otherwise 3 through (A)(5) for metric designator 12 (trade size ⁄8). finished to remove rough edges, except where fittings that thread into the convolutions are used. (1) For enclosing the leads of motors as permitted in 430.245(B) (2) In lengths not in excess of 1.8 m (6 ft) for any of the follow- 348.30 Securing and Supporting. FMC shall be securely ing uses: fastened in place and supported in accordance with 348.30(A) and (B). a. For utilization equipment b. As part of a listed assembly (A) Securely Fastened. FMC shall be securely fastened in c. For tap connections to luminaires as permitted in place by an approved means within 300 mm (12 in.) of each 410.117(C) box, cabinet, conduit body, or other conduit termination and shall be supported and secured at intervals not to exceed 1.4 m (3) For manufactured wiring systems as permitted in 1 (4 ⁄ 2 ft). Where used, cable ties shall be listed and be identified 604.100(A) for securement and support. (4) In hoistways as permitted in 620.21(A)(1)

(5) As part of a listed assembly to connect wired luminaire sec- Exception No. 1: Where FMC is fished between access points tions as permitted in 410.137(C) through concealed spaces in finished buildings or structures and supporting is impracticable. (B) Maximum. FMC larger than metric designator 103 (trade Exception No. 2: Where flexibility is necessary after installa- size 4) shall not be used. tion, lengths from the last point where the raceway is securely Informational Note: See 300.1(C) for the metric designa- fastened shall not exceed the following: tors and trade sizes. These are for identification purposes (1) 900 mm (3 ft) for metric designators 16 through 35 (trade only and do not relate to actual dimensions. 1 1 sizes ⁄2 through 1 ⁄4) 348.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors (2) 1200 mm (4 ft) for metric designators 41 through 53 (trade shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified sizes 11⁄2 through 2) in Table 1, Chapter 9, or as permitted in Table 348.22, or for (3) 1500 mm (5 ft) for metric designators 63 (trade size 2 1⁄2) and

metric designator 12 (trade size 3⁄8). larger Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is Exception No. 3: Lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) from a not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of luminaire terminal connection for tap connections to luminaires cables shall not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified as permitted in 410.117(C). in Table 1, Chapter 9. Table 348.22 Maximum Number of Insulated Conductors in Metric Designator 12 (Trade Size 3⁄8) Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC)* Types TFN, THHN, Types FEP, FEBP, Types RFH-2, SF-2 Types TF, XHHW, TW THWN PF, PGF Fittings Fittings Fittings Fittings Fittings Fittings Fittings Fittings Inside Outside Inside Outside Inside Outside Inside Outside Size (AWG) Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit Conduit 18 2 3 3 5 5 8 5 8 16 1 2 3 4 4 6 4 6 14 1 2 2 3 3 4 3 4 12 — — 1 2 2 3 2 3 10 — — 1 1 1 1 1 2 *In addition, one insulated, covered, or bare equipment grounding conductor of the same size shall be permitted. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–237

348.42 ARTICLE 350 — LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: TYPE LFMC Exception No. 4: Lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) from the (1) Where conditions of installation, operation, or maintenance last point where the raceway is securely fastened for connec- require flexibility or protection from machine oils, liquids, tions within an accessible ceiling to a luminaire(s) or other vapors, or solids. equipment. For the purposes of this exception, listed flexible (2) In hazardous (classified) locations where specifically per- metal conduit fittings shall be permitted as a means of secure- mitted by Chapter 5. ment and support. (3) For direct burial where listed and marked for the purpose. (4) Conductors or cables rated at a temperature higher than (B) Supports. Horizontal runs of FMC supported by openings the listed temperature rating of LFMC conduit shall be through framing members at intervals not greater than 1.4 m 1 permitted to be installed in LFMC, provided the conductors (4 ⁄ 2 ft) and securely fastened within 300 mm (12 in.) of termi-

or cables are not operated at a temperature higher than the nation points shall be permitted. listed temperature rating of the LFMC per 110.14(C). 348.42 Couplings and Connectors. Angle connectors shall ∆ 350.12 Uses Not Permitted. LFMC shall not be used where not be concealed. subject to physical damage. 348.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in 350.20 Size. accordance with 300.15. (A) Minimum. LFMC smaller than metric designator 16 ∆ 348.60 Grounding and Bonding. If used to connect equip- 1 (trade size ⁄2) shall not be used. ment where flexibility is necessary to minimize the transmission of vibration from equipment or to provide flexibility for equip- Exception: LFMC of metric designator 12 (trade size 3⁄ 8) shall ment that requires movement after installation, an equipment be permitted as covered in 348.20(A). grounding conductor shall be installed. (B) Maximum. The maximum size of LFMC shall be metric Where flexibility is not required after installation, FMC designator 103 (trade size 4). shall be permitted to be used as an equipment grounding con-

Informational Note: See 300.1(C) for the metric desig- ductor when installed in accordance with 250.118(5). nators and trade sizes. These are for identification pur- Where required or installed, equipment grounding conduc- poses only and do not relate to actual dimensions. tors shall be installed in accordance with 250.134. 350.22 Number of Conductors or Cables. Where required or installed, equipment bonding jumpers shall 1 (A) Metric Designators 16 through 103 (Trade Sizes ⁄2 be installed in accordance with 250.102. through 4). The number of conductors shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9. Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is ARTICLE 350 not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: cables shall not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified Type LFMC in Table 1, Chapter 9. 3 (B) Metric Designator 12 (Trade Size ⁄ 8). The number of Part I. General conductors shall not exceed that permitted in Table 348.22, “Fit- tings Outside Conduit” columns.

350.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- struction specifications for liquidtight flexible metal conduit 350.24 Bends — How Made. Bends in conduit shall be so (LFMC) and associated fittings. made that the conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter of the conduit will not be effectively reduced. Bends 350.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply shall be permitted to be made manually without auxiliary equip- within this article and throughout the Code. ment. The radius of the curve to the centerline of any bend shall Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC). A raceway of not be less than required in Table 2, Chapter 9 using the column circular cross section having an outer liquidtight, nonmetallic, “Other Bends.” sunlight-resistant jacket over an inner flexible metal core with 350.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be associated couplings, connectors, and fittings for the installation more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) of electric conductors.

between pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes. 350.6 Listing Requirements. LFMC and associated fittings 350.28 Trimming. All cut ends of conduit shall be trimmed shall be listed. inside and outside to remove rough edges. Part II. Installation 350.30 Securing and Supporting. LFMC shall be securely 350.10 Uses Permitted. LFMC shall be permitted to be used fastened in place and supported in accordance with 350.30(A) in exposed or concealed locations as follows: and (B). 70–238 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 352 — RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT: TYPE PVC 352.10 ∆ (A) Securely Fastened. LFMC shall be securely fastened in Informational Note: See 501.30(B), 502.30(B), 503.30(B), place by an approved means within 300 mm (12 in.) of each 505.25(B), and 506.25(B) for types of equipment ground- box, cabinet, conduit body, or other conduit termination and ing conductors. shall be supported and secured at intervals not to exceed 1.4 m 1 (4 ⁄2 ft). Where used, cable ties shall be listed and be identified Part III. Construction Specifications for securement and support. 350.120 Marking. LFMC shall be marked according to Exception No. 1:Where LFMC is fished between access 110.21. The trade size and other information required by the list- points through concealed spaces in finished buildings or struc- ing shall also be marked on the conduit. Conduit suitable for tures and supporting is impractical. direct burial shall be so marked. Exception No. 2: Where flexibility is necessary after installa- tion, lengths from the last point where the raceway is securely ARTICLE 352

fastened shall not exceed the following: Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit: Type PVC (1) 900 mm (3 ft) for metric designators 16 through 35 (trade 1 sizes 1⁄2 through 1 ⁄4) (2) 1200 mm (4 ft) for metric designators 41 through 53 (trade Part I. General sizes 1 1⁄2 through 2) 352.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- (3) 1500 mm (5 ft) for metric designators 63 (trade size 2 1⁄2) and struction specifications for rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit larger (PVC) and associated fittings. Exception No. 3: Lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) from a Informational Note: Refer to Article 353 for High Den- luminaire terminal connection for tap conductors to luminaires, sity Polyethylene Conduit: Type HDPE, and Article 355 as permitted in 410.117(C). for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit: Type RTRC. Exception No. 4: Lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) from 352.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply the last point where the raceway is securely fastened for con- within this article and throughout the Code.

nections within an accessible ceiling to luminaire(s) or other equipment. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC). A rigid nonmetallic raceway of circular cross section, with integral or associated For the purposes of the exceptions, listed LFMC fittings couplings, connectors, and fittings for the installation of electri- shall be permitted as a means of securement and support. cal conductors and cables. (B) Supports. Horizontal runs of LFMC supported by open- 352.6 Listing Requirements. PVC conduit, factory elbows, ings through framing members at intervals not greater than 1 and associated fittings shall be listed. 1.4 m (4 ⁄ 2 ft) and securely fastened within 300 mm (12 in.) of termination points shall be permitted. Part II. Installation 350.42 Couplings and Connectors. Only fittings listed for 352.10 Uses Permitted. The use of PVC conduit shall be per- use with LFMC shall be used. Angle connectors shall not be mitted in accordance with 352.10(A) through (I). concealed. Straight LFMC fittings shall be permitted for direct burial where marked.

Informational Note: Extreme cold may cause some non- metallic conduits to become brittle and, therefore, more 350.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in susceptible to damage from physical contact. accordance with 300.15. (A) Concealed. PVC conduit shall be permitted in walls, floors, ∆ 350.60 Grounding and Bonding. If used to connect equip- and ceilings. ment where flexibility is necessary to minimize the transmis- sion of vibration from equipment or to provide flexibility for (B) Corrosive Influences. PVC conduit shall be permitted in equipment that requires movement after installation, an equip- locations subject to severe corrosive influences as covered in ment grounding conductor shall be installed. 300.6 and where subject to chemicals for which the materials are specifically approved. Where flexibility is not required after installation, LFMC shall be permitted to be used as an equipment grounding con- (C) Cinders. PVC conduit shall be permitted in cinder fill. ductor when installed in accordance with 250.118(6). (D) Wet Locations.

PVC conduit shall be permitted in por- Where required or installed, equipment grounding conduc- tions of dairies, laundries, canneries, or other wet locations, and tors shall be installed in accordance with 250.134. in locations where walls are frequently washed, the entire con- duit system, including boxes and fittings used therewith, shall be Where required or installed, equipment bonding jumpers shall installed and equipped so as to prevent water from entering the be installed in accordance with 250.102. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–239

352.12 ARTICLE 352 — RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT: TYPE PVC conduit. All supports, bolts, straps, screws, and so forth, shall 352.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors be of corrosion-resistant materials or be protected against cor- shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified rosion by approved corrosion-resistant materials. in Table 1, Chapter 9. (E) Dry and Damp Locations. PVC conduit shall be per- Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is mitted for use in dry and damp locations not prohibited by not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of 352.12. cables shall not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9. (F) Exposed. PVC conduit shall be permitted for exposed work. PVC conduit used exposed in areas of physical damage 352.24 Bends — How Made. Bends shall be so made that the shall be identified for the use. conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter of the conduit will not be effectively reduced. Field bends shall Informational Note: PVC Conduit, Type Schedule 80, is

be made only with identified bending equipment. The radius of identified for areas of physical damage. the curve to the centerline of such bends shall not be less than (G) Underground Installations. For underground installa- shown in Table 2, Chapter 9. tions, PVC shall be permitted for direct burial and underground 352.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be encased in concrete. See 300.5 and 300.50. more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees (H) Support of Conduit Bodies. PVC conduit shall be per- total) between pull points, for example, conduit bodies and mitted to support nonmetallic conduit bodies not larger than boxes. the largest trade size of an entering raceway. These conduit 352.28 Trimming. All cut ends shall be trimmed inside and bodies shall not support luminaires or other equipment and outside to remove rough edges. shall not contain devices other than splicing devices as permit- ted by 110.14(B) and 314.16(C)(2). 352.30 Securing and Supporting. PVC conduit shall be installed as a complete system as provided in 300.18 and shall

(I) Insulation Temperature Limitations. Conductors or cables be fastened so that movement from thermal expansion or con- rated at a temperature higher than the listed temperature rat- traction is permitted. PVC conduit shall be securely fastened ing of PVC conduit shall be permitted to be installed in PVC and supported in accordance with 352.30(A) and (B). conduit, provided the conductors or cables are not operated at a temperature higher than the listed temperature rating of the PVC (A) Securely Fastened. PVC conduit shall be securely fas- conduit. tened within 900 mm (3 ft) of each outlet box, junction box, device box, conduit body, or other conduit termination. Conduit 352.12 Uses Not Permitted. PVC conduit shall not be used listed for securing at other than 900 mm (3 ft) shall be permitted under the conditions specified in 352.12(A) through (E). to be installed in accordance with the listing. (A) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. In any hazardous (B) Supports. PVC conduit shall be supported as required (classified) location, except as permitted by other articles of

in Table 352.30. Conduit listed for support at spacings other this Code. than as shown in Table 352.30 shall be permitted to be (B) Support of Luminaires. For the support of luminaires or installed in accordance with the listing. Horizontal runs of other equipment not described in 352.10(H). PVC conduit supported by openings through framing mem- bers at intervals not exceeding those in Table 352.30 and (C) Physical Damage. Where subject to physical damage securely fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) of termination points unless identified for such use. shall be permitted. (D) Ambient Temperatures. Where subject to ambient tem- peratures in excess of 50°C (122°F) unless listed otherwise. (E) Theaters and Similar Locations. In theaters and similar Table 352.30 Support of Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC) locations, except as provided in 518.4 and 520.5. Maximum Spacing Between 352.20 Size. Conduit Size Supports (A) Minimum. PVC conduit smaller than metric designator 16 Metric 1 (trade size ⁄2) shall not be used. Designator Trade Size mm or m ft (B) Maximum.

PVC conduit larger than metric designator 155 16–27 1⁄2–1 900 mm 3 (trade size 6) shall not be used. 1 35–53 1 ⁄4–2 1.5 m 5 1 Informational Note: The trade sizes and metric designa- 63–78 2 ⁄2–3 1.8 m 6 91–129 31⁄2–5 2.1 m 7 tors are for identification purposes only and do not relate 155 6 2.5 m 8 to actual dimensions. See 300.1(C). 70–240 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 352 — RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT: TYPE PVC 352.120 Table 352.44 Expansion Characteristics of PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit Coefficient of Thermal Expansion = 6.084 × 10–5 mm/mm/°C (3.38 × 10–5 in./in./°F) Temperature Length Change of PVC Temperature Length Change of PVC Temperature Length Change of PVC Change (°C) Conduit (mm/m) Change (°F) Conduit (in./100 ft) Change (°F) Conduit (in./100 ft) 5 0.30 5 0.20 105 4.26 10 0.61 10 0.41 110 4.46 15 0.91 15 0.61 115 4.66 20 1.22 20 0.81 120 4.87 25 1.52 25 1.01 125 5.07 30 1.83 30 1.22 130 5.27 35 2.13 35 1.42 135 5.48 40 2.43 40 1.62 140 5.68 45 2.74 45 1.83 145 5.88 50 3.04 50 2.03 150 6.08 55 3.35 55 2.23 155 6.29 60 3.65 60 2.43 160 6.49 65 3.95 65 2.64 165 6.69 70 4.26 70 2.84 170 6.90 75 4.56 75 3.04 175 7.10 80 4.87 80 3.24 180 7.30 85 5.17 85 3.45 185 7.50 90 5.48 90 3.65 190 7.71 95 5.78 95 3.85 195 7.91 100 6.08 100 4.06 200 8.11 352.44 Expansion Fittings. Expansion fittings for PVC con- Part III. Construction Specifications duit shall be provided to compensate for thermal expansion 352.100 Construction.

PVC conduit shall be made of rigid and contraction where the length change, in accordance with (nonplasticized) polyvinyl chloride (PVC). PVC conduit and Table 352.44, is expected to be 6 mm (1⁄4 in.) or greater in a fittings shall be composed of suitable nonmetallic material straight run between securely mounted items such as boxes, cab- that is resistant to moisture and chemical atmospheres. For use inets, elbows, or other conduit terminations. aboveground, it shall also be flame retardant, resistant to impact 352.46 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or and crushing, resistant to distortion from heat under conditions other enclosure, a bushing or adapter shall be provided to pro- likely to be encountered in service, and resistant to low tem- tect the wire from abrasion unless the box, fitting, or enclosure perature and sunlight effects. For use underground, the material design provides equivalent protection. shall be acceptably resistant to moisture and corrosive agents and shall be of sufficient strength to withstand abuse, such as by

Informational Note: See 300.4(G) for the protection of impact and crushing, in handling and during installation. Where conductors 4 AWG and larger at bushings. intended for direct burial, without encasement in concrete, the 352.48 Joints. All joints between lengths of conduit, and material shall also be capable of withstanding continued load- between conduit and couplings, fittings, and boxes, shall be made ing that is likely to be encountered after installation. by an approved method. 352.120 Marking. Each length of PVC conduit shall be clearly 352.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in and durably marked at least every 3 m (10 ft) as required in the accordance with 300.15. first sentence of 110.21(A). The type of material shall also be included in the marking unless it is visually identifiable. For ∆ 352.60 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, conduit recognized for use aboveground, these markings shall a separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in be permanent. For conduit limited to underground use only, the conduit.

these markings shall be sufficiently durable to remain legible Exception No. 1: As permitted in 250.134, Exception No. 2, until the material is installed. Conduit shall be permitted to be for dc circuits and 250.134, Exception No. 1, for separately run surface marked to indicate special characteristics of the material. equipment grounding conductors. Informational Note: Examples of these markings include Exception No. 2: Where the grounded conductor is used to but are not limited to “limited smoke” and “sunlight ground equipment as permitted in 250.142. resistant.” 2022 California Electrical Code 70–241

353.1 ARTICLE 353 — HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONDUIT: TYPE HDPE CONDUIT (B) Maximum. HDPE conduit larger than metric designator ARTICLE 353 155 (trade size 6) shall not be used. High Density Polyethylene Conduit: Informational Note: The trade sizes and metric designa- Type HDPE Conduit tors are for identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions. See 300.1(C). Part I. General 353.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified 353.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- in Table 1, Chapter 9. struction specifications for high density polyethylene (HDPE) conduit and associated fittings. Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of Informational Note: Refer to Article 352 for Rigid cables shall not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit: Type PVC and Article 355 for in Table 1, Chapter 9. Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit: Type RTRC. 353.24 Bends — How Made.

Bends shall be so made that 353.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply the conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter within this article and throughout the Code. of the conduit will not be effectively reduced. Bends shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit. A nonmetallic permitted to be made manually without auxiliary equipment, raceway of circular cross section, with associated couplings, con- and the radius of the curve to the centerline of such bends nectors, and fittings for the installation of electrical conductors. shall not be less than shown in Table 354.24. For conduits of metric designators 129 and 155 (trade sizes 5 and 6) the allow- 353.6 Listing Requirements. HDPE conduit and associated able radii of bends shall be in accordance with specifications fittings shall be listed. provided by the manufacturer. Part II. Installation 353.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees 353.10 Uses Permitted. The use of HDPE conduit shall be

total) between pull points, for example, conduit bodies and permitted under the following conditions: boxes. (1) In discrete lengths or in continuous lengths from a reel 353.28 Trimming. All cut ends shall be trimmed inside and (2) In locations subject to severe corrosive influences as cov- outside to remove rough edges. ered in 300.6 and where subject to chemicals for which the conduit is listed 353.46 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or (3) In cinder fill other enclosure, a bushing or adapter shall be provided to pro- (4) In direct burial installations in earth or concrete tect the wire from abrasion unless the box, fitting, or enclosure design provides equivalent protection. Informational Note to (4): Refer to 300.5 and 300.50 for underground installations. Informational Note: See 300.4(G) for the protection of conductors 4 AWG and larger at bushings. (5) Above ground, except as prohibited in 353.12, where encased in not less than 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete. 353.48 Joints. All joints between lengths of conduit, and

(6) Conductors or cables rated at a temperature higher than the between conduit and couplings, fittings, and boxes, shall be made listed temperature rating of HDPE conduit shall be permit- by an approved method. ted to be installed in HDPE conduit, provided the conduc- Informational Note: HDPE conduit can be joined using tors or cables are not operated at a temperature higher than either heat fusion, electrofusion, or mechanical fittings. the listed temperature rating of the HDPE conduit. 353.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in 353.12 Uses Not Permitted. HDPE conduit shall not be accordance with 300.15. used under the following conditions: 353.60 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, (1) Where exposed a separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in (2) Within a building the conduit. (3) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted by other articles in this Code Exception No. 1: The equipment grounding conductor shall be

(4) Where subject to ambient temperatures in excess of 50°C permitted to be run separately from the conduit where used for (122°F) unless listed otherwise grounding dc circuits as permitted in 250.134, Exception No. 2. Exception No. 2: The equipment grounding conductor shall 353.20 Size. not be required where the grounded conductor is used to ground (A) Minimum. HDPE conduit smaller than metric designator equipment as permitted in 250.142. 1 16 (trade size ⁄2) shall not be used. 70–242 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 354 — NONMETALLIC UNDERGROUND CONDUIT WITH CONDUCTORS: TYPE NUCC 354.46 Part III. Construction Specifications Table 354.24 Minimum Bending Radius for Nonmetallic Underground Conduit with Conductors (NUCC) 353.100 Construction. HDPE conduit shall be composed of high density polyethylene that is resistant to moisture and Conduit Size Minimum Bending Radius chemical atmospheres. The material shall be resistant to mois- ture and corrosive agents and shall be of sufficient strength to Metric withstand abuse, such as by impact and crushing, in handling Designator Trade Size mm in. and during installation. Where intended for direct burial, with- 16 1⁄2 250 10 out encasement in concrete, the material shall also be capable 3 21 ⁄4 300 12 of withstanding continued loading that is likely to be encoun- 27 1 350 14 tered after installation. 35 1 1⁄4 450 18 41 1 1⁄2 500 20 353.120 Marking. Each length of HDPE shall be clearly 53 2 650 26 and durably marked at least every 3 m (10 ft) as required 1 63 2 ⁄2 900 36 in 110.21. The type of material shall also be included in the 78 3 1200 48

marking. 103 4 1500 60 Exception: The conductor or the cable portion of the assembly, ARTICLE 354 where suitable, shall be permitted to extend within the building Nonmetallic Underground Conduit for termination purposes in accordance with 300.3. with Conductors: Type NUCC (3) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted by other articles of this Code Part I. General 354.20 Size. 354.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- (A) Minimum. NUCC smaller than metric designator 16 struction specifications for nonmetallic underground conduit 1 (trade size ⁄2) shall not be used. with conductors (NUCC). (B) Maximum. NUCC larger than metric designator 103 (trade 354.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply size 4) shall not be used. within this article and throughout the Code. Informational Note: See 300.1(C) for the metric desig- Nonmetallic Underground Conduit with Conductors (NUCC). nators and trade sizes. These are for identification pur- A factory assembly of conductors or cables inside a nonmetal-

poses only and do not relate to actual dimensions. lic, smooth wall raceway with a circular cross section. 354.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors or 354.6 Listing Requirements. NUCC and associated fittings cables shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill in shall be listed. Table 1, Chapter 9. Part II. Installation 354.24 Bends — How Made. Bends shall be manually made 354.10 Uses Permitted. The use of NUCC and fittings shall so that the conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter be permitted in the following: of the conduit will not be effectively reduced. The radius of the curve of the centerline of such bends shall not be less than shown (1) For direct burial underground installation (For minimum in Table 354.24. cover requirements, see Table 300.5 and Table 300.50 under Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.) 354.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be (2) Encased or embedded in concrete more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees (3) In cinder fill total) between termination points.

(4) In underground locations subject to severe corrosive influ- 354.28 Trimming. For termination, the conduit shall be trimmed ences as covered in 300.6 and where subject to chemicals for away from the conductors or cables using an approved method which the assembly is specifically approved that will not damage the conductor or cable insulation or jacket. (5) Aboveground, except as prohibited in 354.12, where All conduit ends shall be trimmed inside and out to remove encased in not less than 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete rough edges. 354.12 Uses Not Permitted. NUCC shall not be used in the 354.46 Bushings. Where the NUCC enters a box, fitting, or following: other enclosure, a bushing or adapter shall be provided to pro- tect the conductor or cable from abrasion unless the design of (1) In exposed locations the box, fitting, or enclosure provides equivalent protection. (2) Inside buildings 2022 California Electrical Code 70–243

354.48 ARTICLE 355 — REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN CONDUIT: TYPE RTRC Informational Note: See 300.4(G) for the protection of Informational Note: Refer to Article 352 for Rigid conductors size 4 AWG or larger. Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit: Type PVC, and Article 353 for High Density Polyethylene Conduit: Type HDPE. 354.48 Joints. All joints between conduit, fittings, and boxes shall be made by an approved method. 355.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply within this article and throughout the Code. 354.50 Conductor Terminations. All terminations between the conductors or cables and equipment shall be made by an Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC). A rigid approved method for that type of conductor or cable. nonmetallic raceway of circular cross section, with integral or associated couplings, connectors, and fittings for the installa- 354.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in tion of electrical conductors and cables. junction boxes or other enclosures. 355.6 Listing Requirements. RTRC, factory elbows, and 354.60 Grounding.

Where equipment grounding is required, associated fittings shall be listed. an assembly containing a separate equipment grounding con- ductor shall be used. Part II. Installation Part III. Construction Specifications 355.10 Uses Permitted. The use of RTRC shall be permitted in accordance with 355.10(A) through (I). 354.100 Construction. (A) Concealed. RTRC shall be permitted in walls, floors, and (A) General. NUCC is an assembly that is provided in con- ceilings. tinuous lengths shipped in a coil, reel, or carton. (B) Corrosive Influences. RTRC shall be permitted in loca- (B) Nonmetallic Underground Conduit. The nonmetallic tions subject to severe corrosive influences as covered in 300.6 underground conduit shall be listed and composed of a material and where subject to chemicals for which the materials are spe- that is resistant to moisture and corrosive agents. It shall also be cifically approved. capable of being supplied on reels without damage or distortion and shall be of sufficient strength to withstand abuse, such as (C) Cinders. RTRC shall be permitted in cinder fill.

impact or crushing, in handling and during installation without (D) Wet Locations. RTRC shall be permitted in portions of damage to conduit or conductors. dairies, laundries, canneries, or other wet locations, and in loca- (C) Conductors and Cables. Conductors and cables used in tions where walls are frequently washed, the entire conduit NUCC shall be listed and shall comply with 310.10(C). Conduc- system, including boxes and fittings used therewith, shall be tors of different systems shall be installed in accordance with installed and equipped so as to prevent water from entering the 300.3(C). conduit. All supports, bolts, straps, screws, and so forth, shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or be protected against corrosion (D) Conductor Fill. The maximum number of conductors or by approved corrosion-resistant materials. cables in NUCC shall not exceed that permitted by the percent- age fill in Table 1, Chapter 9. (E) Dry and Damp Locations. RTRC shall be permitted for use in dry and damp locations not prohibited by 355.12. 354.120 Marking.

NUCC shall be clearly and durably marked at least every 3.05 m (10 ft) as required by 110.21. The type of (F) Exposed. RTRC shall be permitted for exposed work if conduit material shall also be included in the marking. identified for such use. Identification of conductors or cables used in the assembly Informational Note: RTRC, Type XW, is identified for shall be provided on a tag attached to each end of the assembly or areas of physical damage. to the side of a reel. Enclosed conductors or cables shall be (G) Underground Installations. For underground installa- marked in accordance with 310.8. tions, see 300.5 and 300.50. (H) Support of Conduit Bodies. RTRC shall be permitted to support nonmetallic conduit bodies not larger than the largest ARTICLE 355 trade size of an entering raceway. These conduit bodies shall Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit: not support luminaires or other equipment and shall not contain Type RTRC devices other than splicing devices as permitted by 110.14(B) and 314.16(C)(2). Part I. General (I) Insulation Temperature Limitations. Conductors or

cables rated at a temperature higher than the listed temperature 355.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- rating of RTRC conduit shall be permitted to be installed in struction specification for reinforced thermosetting resin con- RTRC conduit, if the conductors or cables are not operated at duit (RTRC) and associated fittings. 70–244 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 355 — REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN CONDUIT: TYPE RTRC 355.60 a temperature higher than the listed temperature rating of the Table 355.30 Support of Reinforced Thermosetting Resin RTRC conduit. Conduit (RTRC) 355.12 Uses Not Permitted. RTRC shall not be used under the Maximum Spacing Between following conditions. Conduit Size Supports (A) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Metric Designator Trade Size mm or m ft (1) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted by other articles in this Code 16–27 1⁄2–1 900 mm 3 1 (2) In Class I, Division 2 locations, except as permitted in 35–53 1 ⁄4–2 1.5 m 5 1 501.10(B)(1)(6) 63–78 2 ⁄2–3 1.8 m 6 91–129 31⁄2–5 2.1 m 7 (B) Support of Luminaires. For the support of luminaires or 155 6 2.5 m 8 other equipment not described in 355.10(H). (C) Physical Damage. Where subject to physical damage unless identified for such use. (D) Ambient Temperatures. Where subject to ambient tem- (A) Securely Fastened. RTRC shall be securely fastened peratures in excess of 50°C (122°F) unless listed otherwise.

within 900 mm (3 ft) of each outlet box, junction box, device (E) Theaters and Similar Locations. In theaters and similar box, conduit body, or other conduit termination. Conduit listed locations, except as provided in 518.4 and 520.5. for securing at other than 900 mm (3 ft) shall be permitted to be installed in accordance with the listing. 355.20 Size. (B) Supports. RTRC shall be supported as required in (A) Minimum. RTRC smaller than metric designator 16 (trade Table 355.30. Conduit listed for support at spacing other than 1 size ⁄2) shall not be used. as shown in Table 355.30 shall be permitted to be installed in (B) Maximum. RTRC larger than metric designator 155 accordance with the listing. Horizontal runs of RTRC supported (trade size 6) shall not be used. by openings through framing members at intervals not exceed- ing those in Table 355.30 and securely fastened within 900 mm Informational Note: The trade sizes and metric designa- (3 ft) of termination points shall be permitted. tors are for identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions. See 300.1(C).

355.44 Expansion Fittings. Expansion fittings for RTRC shall be provided to compensate for thermal expansion and 355.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors contraction where the length change, in accordance with Table shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified 1 355.44, is expected to be 6 mm ( ⁄4 in.) or greater in a straight in Table 1, Chapter 9. Cables shall be permitted to be installed run between securely mounted items such as boxes, cabinets, where such use is not prohibited by the respective cable arti- elbows, or other conduit terminations. cles. The number of cables shall not exceed the allowable per- centage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9. 355.46 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or other enclosure, a bushing or adapter shall be provided to pro- 355.24 Bends — How Made. Bends shall be so made that tect the wire from abrasion unless the box, fitting, or enclosure the conduit will not be damaged and the internal diameter of the design provides equivalent protection. conduit will not be effectively reduced.

Field bends shall be made only with identified bending equipment. The radius of Informational Note: See 300.4(G) for the protection of the curve to the centerline of such bends shall not be less than conductors 4 AWG and larger at bushings. shown in Table 2, Chapter 9. 355.48 Joints. All joints between lengths of conduit, and 355.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be between conduit and couplings, fitting, and boxes, shall be made more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees by an approved method. total) between pull points, for example, conduit bodies and 355.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in boxes. accordance with 300.15. 355.28 Trimming. All cut ends shall be trimmed inside and ∆ 355.60 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, outside to remove rough edges. a separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed 355.30 Securing and Supporting. RTRC shall be installed in the conduit. as a complete system in accordance with 300.18 and shall be Exception No. 1: As permitted in 250.134, Exception No. 2,

securely fastened in place and supported in accordance with for dc circuits and 250.134, Exception No. 1, for separately run 355.30(A) and (B). equipment grounding conductors. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–245

355.100 ARTICLE 356 — LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: TYPE LFNC Table 355.44 Expansion Characteristics of Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) Coefficient of Thermal Expansion = 2.7 × 10–5 mm/mm/°C (1.5 × 10–5 in./in./°F) Temperature Length Change of RTRC Temperature Length Change of RTRC Temperature Length Change of RTRC Change (°C) Conduit (mm/m) Change (°F) Conduit (in./100 ft) Change (°F) Conduit (in./100 ft) 5 0.14 5 0.09 105 1.89 10 0.27 10 0.18 110 1.98 15 0.41 15 0.27 115 2.07 20 0.54 20 0.36 120 2.16 25 0.68 25 0.45 125 2.25 30 0.81 30 0.54 130 2.34 35 0.95 35 0.63 135 2.43 40 1.08 40 0.72 140 2.52 45 1.22 45 0.81 145 2.61 50 1.35 50 0.90 150 2.70 55 1.49 55 0.99 155 2.79 60 1.62 60 1.08 160 2.88 65 1.76 65 1.17 165 2.97 70 1.89 70 1.26 170 3.06 75 2.03 75 1.35 175 3.15 80 2.16 80 1.44 180 3.24 85 2.30 85 1.53 185 3.33 90 2.43 90 1.62 190 3.42 95 2.57 95 1.71 195 3.51 100 2.70 100 1.80 200 3.60 Exception No. 2: Where the grounded conductor is used to Informational Note: Examples of these markings ground equipment as permitted in 250.142.

include but are not limited to “limited smoke” and “sun- light resistant.” Part III. Construction Specifications 355.100 Construction. RTRC and fittings shall be composed of suitable nonmetallic material that is resistant to moisture ARTICLE 356 and chemical atmospheres. For use aboveground, it shall also Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: be flame retardant, resistant to impact and crushing, resistant Type LFNC to distortion from heat under conditions likely to be encoun- tered in service, and resistant to low temperature and sunlight effects. For use underground, the material shall be acceptably Part I. General resistant to moisture and corrosive agents and shall be of suf- 356.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- ficient strength to withstand abuse, such as by impact and struction specifications for liquidtight flexible nonmetallic con- crushing, in handling and during installation. Where intended duit (LFNC) and associated fittings. for direct burial, without encasement in concrete, the material

shall also be capable of withstanding continued loading that is 356.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply likely to be encountered after installation. within this article and throughout the Code. 355.120 Marking. Each length of RTRC shall be clearly and Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (LFNC). A race- durably marked at least every 3 m (10 ft) as required in the way of circular cross section of various types as follows: first sentence of 110.21(A). The type of material shall also be (1) A smooth seamless inner core and cover bonded together and included in the marking unless it is visually identifiable. For having one or more reinforcement layers between the core conduit recognized for use aboveground, these markings shall and covers, designated as Type LFNC-A be permanent. For conduit limited to underground use only, (2) A smooth inner surface with integral reinforcement within these markings shall be sufficiently durable to remain legible the raceway wall, designated as Type LFNC-B until the material is installed. Conduit shall be permitted to

(3) A corrugated internal and external surface without inte- be surface marked to indicate special characteristics of the gral reinforcement within the raceway wall, designated as material. Type LFNC-C 70–246 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 356 — LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: TYPE LFNC 356.42 Informational Note: FNMC is an alternative designation Informational Note: See 300.1(C) for the metric designa- for LFNC. tors and trade sizes. These are for identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions. 356.6 Listing Requirements. LFNC and associated fittings shall be listed. 356.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified Part II. Installation in Table 1, Chapter 9. ∆ 356.10 Uses Permitted. LFNC shall be permitted to be used Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is in exposed or concealed locations for the following purposes: not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of (1) Where flexibility is required for installation, operation, or cables shall not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified maintenance. in Table 1, Chapter 9. (2) Where protection of the contained conductors is required 356.24 Bends — How Made. Bends in conduit shall be so

from vapors, machine oils, liquids, or solids. made that the conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter of (3) For outdoor locations where listed and marked as suitable the conduit is not effectively reduced. Bends shall be permitted to for the purpose. be made manually without auxiliary equipment. The radius of the (4) For direct burial where listed and marked for the purpose. curve to the centerline of any bend shall not be less than shown in (5) Type LFNC shall be permitted to be installed in lengths Table 2, Chapter 9 using the column “Other Bends.” longer than 1.8 m (6 ft) where secured in accordance with 356.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be 356.30. more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) (6) Type LFNC-B as a listed manufactured prewired assembly, between pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes. metric designator 16 through 27 (trade size 1⁄2 through 1) conduit. 356.28 Trimming. All cut ends of conduit shall be trimmed

(7) For encasement in concrete where listed for direct burial inside and outside to remove rough edges. and installed in compliance with 356.42. ∆ 356.30 Securing and Supporting. Type LFNC shall be (8) Conductors or cables rated at a temperature rating of securely fastened and supported in accordance with one of the LFNC conduit shall be permitted to be installed in LFNC, following: provided the conductors or cables are not operated at a tem- perature higher than the listed temperature rating of the (1) Where installed in lengths exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft), the con- LFNC. duit shall be securely fastened at intervals not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft) and within 300 mm (12 in.) on each side of Informational Note: Extreme cold can cause some types every outlet box, junction box, cabinet, or fitting. Where of nonmetallic conduits to become brittle and therefore used, cable ties shall be listed for the application and for more susceptible to damage from physical contact. securing and supporting. 356.12 Uses Not Permitted.

LFNC shall not be used as follows: (2) Securing or supporting of the conduit shall not be required where it is fished, installed in lengths not exceeding (1) Where subject to physical damage 900 mm (3 ft) at terminals where flexibility is required, or (2) Where any combination of ambient and conductor tem- installed in lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) from a lumi- peratures is in excess of that for which it is listed naire terminal connection for tap conductors to luminaires (3) In lengths longer than 1.8 m (6 ft), except as permitted by permitted in 410.117(C). 356.10(5) or where a longer length is approved as essential (3) Horizontal runs of LFNC supported by openings through for a required degree of flexibility framing members at intervals not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft) (4) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted and securely fastened within 300 mm (12 in.) of termina- by other articles in this Code tion points shall be permitted. 356.20 Size. (4) Securing or supporting of LFNC shall not be required where

installed in lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) from the last (A) Minimum. LFNC smaller than metric designator 16 (trade 1 point where the raceway is securely fastened for connec- size ⁄2) shall not be used unless permitted in 356.20(A)(1) or (A) 3 tions within an accessible ceiling to a luminaire(s) or other (2) for metric designator 12 (trade size ⁄8). equipment. For the purpose of 356.30, listed liquidtight (1) For enclosing the leads of motors as permitted in 430.245(B) flexible nonmetallic conduit fittings shall be permitted as a (2) In lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) as part of a listed means of support. assembly for tap connections to luminaires as required in 356.42 Couplings and Connectors. Only fittings listed for use 410.117(C), or for utilization equipment with LFNC shall be used. Angle connectors shall not be used (B) Maximum. LFNC larger than metric designator 103 for concealed raceway installations. Straight LFNC fittings are (trade size 4) shall not be used. permitted for direct burial or encasement in concrete. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–247

356.56 ARTICLE 358 — ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING: TYPE EMT 356.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in (1) In concrete, in direct contact with the earth or in areas sub- accordance with 300.15. ject to severe corrosive influences where installed in accor- dance with 358.10(B) ∆ 356.60 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, (2) In dry, damp, and wet locations a separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in (3) In any hazardous (classified) location as permitted by other the conduit. articles in this Code Exception No. 1: As permitted in 250.134, Exception No. 2, (B) Corrosive Environments. for dc circuits and 250.134, Exception No. 1, for separately run equipment grounding conductors. (1) Galvanized Steel and Stainless Steel EMT, Elbows, and Fittings. Galvanized steel and stainless steel EMT, elbows, Exception No. 2: Where the grounded conductor is used to and fittings shall be permitted to be installed in concrete, in ground equipment as permitted in 250.142. direct contact with the earth, or in areas subject to severe cor- Part III.

Construction Specifications rosive influences where protected by corrosion protection and approved as suitable for the condition. 356.100 Construction. LFNC-B as a prewired manufactured assembly shall be provided in continuous lengths capable of (2) Supplementary Protection of Aluminum EMT. Alumi- being shipped in a coil, reel, or carton without damage. num EMT shall be provided with approved supplementary cor- rosion protection where encased in concrete or in direct contact 356.120 Marking. LFNC shall be marked at least every with the earth. 600 mm (2 ft) in accordance with 110.21. The marking shall include a type designation in accordance with 356.2 and the (C) Cinder Fill. Galvanized steel and stainless steel EMT shall trade size. Conduit that is intended for outdoor use or direct be permitted to be installed in cinder concrete or cinder fill where burial shall be marked. subject to permanent moisture when protected on all sides by a layer of noncinder concrete at least 50 mm (2 in.) thick or when The type, size, and quantity of conductors used in prewired

the tubing is installed at least 450 mm (18 in.) under the fill. manufactured assemblies shall be identified by means of a printed tag or label attached to each end of the manufactured assembly and (D) Wet Locations. All supports, bolts, straps, screws, and so either the carton, coil, or reel. The enclosed conductors shall be forth shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or protected marked in accordance with 310.8. against corrosion by corrosion-resistant materials. Informational Note: See 300.6 for protection against corrosion. ARTICLE 358 N (E) Physical Damage. Steel and stainless steel EMT shall be Electrical Metallic Tubing: Type EMT permitted to be installed where subject to physical damage. 358.12 Uses Not Permitted. EMT shall not be used under the Part I. General following conditions: 358.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- (1) Where subject to severe physical damage struction specifications for electrical metallic tubing (EMT) (2) For the support of luminaires or other equipment except and associated fittings.

conduit bodies no larger than the largest trade size of the tubing 358.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply within this article and throughout the Code. ∆ 358.14 Dissimilar Metals. Where practicable, dissimilar metals in contact anywhere in the system shall be avoided to Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). An unthreaded thinwall eliminate the possibility of galvanic action. raceway of circular cross section designed for the physical pro- tection and routing of conductors and cables and for use as an Stainless steel and aluminum fittings and enclosures shall be equipment grounding conductor when installed utilizing appro- permitted to be used with galvanized steel EMT, and galvanized priate fittings. steel fittings and enclosures shall be permitted to be used with aluminum EMT where not subject to severe corrosive influences. 358.6 Listing Requirements. EMT, factory elbows, and asso- ciated fittings shall be listed. Stainless steel EMT shall only be used with the following: (1) Stainless steel fittings Part II. Installation (2) Stainless steel boxes and enclosures

358.10 Uses Permitted. (3) Steel (galvanized, painted, powder or PVC coated, and so (A) Exposed and Concealed. The use of EMT shall be per- forth) boxes and enclosures when not subject to severe cor- mitted for both exposed and concealed work for the following: rosive influences (4) Stainless steel, nonmetallic, or approved accessories 70–248 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 360 — FLEXIBLE METALLIC TUBING: TYPE FMT 360.12 358.20 Size. (B) Supports. Horizontal runs of EMT supported by open- ings through framing members at intervals not greater than 3 m (A) Minimum. EMT smaller than metric designator 16 (trade 1 (10 ft) and securely fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) of termina- size ⁄2) shall not be used. tion points shall be permitted. Exception: For enclosing the leads of motors as permitted in 358.42 Couplings and Connectors. Couplings and connectors 430.245(B). used with EMT shall be made up tight. Where buried in masonry (B) Maximum. The maximum size of EMT shall be metric or concrete, they shall be concretetight type. Where installed in designator 103 (trade size 4). wet locations, they shall comply with 314.15. Informational Note: See 300.1(C) for the metric desig- 358.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in nators and trade sizes. These are for identification pur- accordance with 300.15. poses only and do not relate to actual dimensions. 358.60 Grounding. EMT shall be permitted as an equipment 358.22 Number of Conductors.

The number of conductors grounding conductor. shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9. Part III. Construction Specifications Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is 358.100 Construction. EMT shall be made of one of the not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of following: cables shall not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified (1) Steel with protective coatings in Table 1, Chapter 9. (2) Aluminum 358.24 Bends — How Made. Bends shall be made so that the (3) Stainless steel tubing is not damaged and the internal diameter of the tubing 358.120 Marking. EMT shall be clearly and durably marked at is not effectively reduced. The radius of the curve of any field least every 3 m (10 ft) as required in the first sentence of 110.21(A). bend to the centerline of the tubing shall not be less than shown in Table 2, Chapter 9 for one-shot and full shoe benders. 358.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be ARTICLE 360 more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total)

Flexible Metallic Tubing: Type FMT between pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes. 358.28 Reaming and Threading. Part I. General (A) Reaming. All cut ends of EMT shall be reamed or other- wise finished to remove rough edges. 360.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- struction specifications for flexible metallic tubing (FMT) and (B) Threading. EMT shall not be threaded. associated fittings. Exception: EMT with factory threaded integral couplings com- 360.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply plying with 358.100. within this article and throughout the Code. 358.30 Securing and Supporting. EMT shall be installed Flexible Metallic Tubing (FMT). A metal raceway that is cir- as a complete system in accordance with 300.18 and shall be cular in cross section, flexible, and liquidtight without a non- securely fastened in place and supported in accordance with metallic jacket. 358.30(A) and (B). 360.6 Listing Requirements. FMT and associated fittings (A) Securely Fastened. EMT shall be securely fastened in shall be listed.

place at intervals not to exceed 3 m (10 ft). In addition, each EMT run between termination points shall be securely fastened Part II. Installation within 900 mm (3 ft) of each outlet box, junction box, device 360.10 Uses Permitted. FMT shall be permitted to be used for box, cabinet, conduit body, or other tubing termination. branch circuits as follows: Exception No. 1: Fastening of unbroken lengths shall be per- (1) In dry locations mitted to be increased to a distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) where (2) Where concealed structural members do not readily permit fastening within (3) In accessible locations 900 mm (3 ft). (4) For system voltages of 1000 volts maximum Exception No. 2: For concealed work in finished buildings or prefinished wall panels where such securing is impracticable, 360.12 Uses Not Permitted. FMT shall not be used as follows: unbroken lengths (without coupling) of EMT shall be permitted (1) In hoistways to be fished. (2) In storage battery rooms 2022 California Electrical Code 70–249

360.20 ARTICLE 362 — ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC TUBING: TYPE ENT (3) In hazardous (classified) locations unless otherwise per- Table 360.24(B) Minimum Radii for Fixed Bends mitted under other articles in this Code (4) Underground for direct earth burial, or embedded in poured Minimum Radii for Fixed Bends Metric concrete or aggregate Designator Trade Size mm in. (5) Where subject to physical damage (6) In lengths over 1.8 m (6 ft) 3 1 12 ⁄ 8 88.9 3 ⁄2 16 1⁄2 101.6 4 360.20 Size. 3 21 ⁄4 127.0 5 (A) Minimum. FMT smaller than metric designator 16 (trade 1 size ⁄2) shall not be used. Exception No. 1: FMT of metric designator 12 (trade size 3⁄8) radii of bends measured to the inside of the bend shall not be less shall be permitted to be installed in accordance with 300.22(B) than specified in Table 360.24(B). and (C). 360.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made in Exception No. 2: FMT of metric designator 12 (trade size 3⁄8) accordance with 300.15. shall be permitted in lengths not in excess of 1.8 m (6 ft) as part 360.60 Grounding. FMT shall be permitted as an equip-

of a listed assembly or for luminaires. See 410.117(C). ment grounding conductor where installed in accordance with (B) Maximum. The maximum size of FMT shall be metric 250.118(7). 3 designator 21 (trade size ⁄4). Part III. Construction Specifications Informational Note: See 300.1(C) for the metric designa- 360.120 Marking. FMT shall be marked according to 110.21. tors and trade sizes. These are for identification purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions. 360.22 Number of Conductors. ARTICLE 362 1 (A) FMT — Metric Designators 16 and 21 (Trade Sizes ⁄2 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing: Type ENT 3 and ⁄4). The number of conductors in metric designators 16 1 3 (trade size ⁄2) and 21 (trade size ⁄4) shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9. Part I. General Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is 362.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of struction specifications for electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT)

cables shall not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified and associated fittings. in Table 1, Chapter 9. 362.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply 3 (B) FMT — Metric Designator 12 (Trade Size ⁄ 8). The within this article and throughout the Code. 3 number of conductors in metric designator 12 (trade size ⁄8) shall Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT). A nonmetallic, pli- not exceed that permitted in Table 348.22. able, corrugated raceway of circular cross section with integral 360.24 Bends. or associated couplings, connectors, and fittings for the installa- tion of electrical conductors. ENT is composed of a material that (A) Infrequent Flexing Use. When FMT is infrequently is resistant to moisture and chemical atmospheres and is flame flexed in service after installation, the radii of bends measured retardant. to the inside of the bend shall not be less than specified in Table 360.24(A). A pliable raceway is a raceway that can be bent by hand with a reasonable force but without other assistance. (B) Fixed Bends. Where FMT is bent for installation purposes

and is not flexed or bent as required by use after installation, the 362.6 Listing Requirements. ENT and associated fittings shall be listed. Table 360.24(A) Minimum Radii for Flexing Use Part II. Installation ∆ 362.10 Uses Permitted. For the purpose of this article, the first Minimum Radii for Flexing Use Metric floor of a building shall be that floor that has 50 percent or more Designator Trade Size mm in. of the exterior wall surface area level with or above finished grade. One additional level that is the first level and not designed 3 12 ⁄8 254.0 10 for human habitation and used only for vehicle parking, storage, 16 1⁄2 317.5 12 1⁄2 3 1 or similar use shall be permitted. The use of ENT and fittings 21 ⁄4 444.5 17 ⁄2 shall be permitted in the following: 70–250 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 362 — ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC TUBING: TYPE ENT 362.30 (1) In any building not exceeding three floors above grade as operated at a temperature higher than the listed tempera- follows: ture rating of the ENT. a. For exposed work, where not prohibited by 362.12 362.12 Uses Not Permitted. ENT shall not be used in the b. Concealed within walls, floors, and ceilings following: (2) In any building exceeding three floors above grade, (1) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted ENT shall be concealed within walls, floors, and ceilings by other articles in this Code where the walls, floors, and ceilings provide a thermal (2) For the support of luminaires and other equipment barrier of material that has at least a 15-minute finish rat- (3) Where subject to ambient temperatures in excess of 50°C ing as identified in listings of fire-rated assemblies. The (122°F) unless listed otherwise 15-minute-finish-rated thermal barrier shall be permit- (4) For direct earth burial

ted to be used for combustible or noncombustible walls, (5) In exposed locations, except as permitted by 362.10(1), floors, and ceilings. 362.10(5), and 362.10(7) (6) In theaters and similar locations, except as provided in 518.4 Exception to (2): Where a fire sprinkler system(s) is installed and 520.5 in accordance with NFPA 13-2016, Standard for the Installa- (7) Where exposed to the direct rays of the sun, unless identi- tion of Sprinkler Systems, on all floors, ENT shall be permitted fied as sunlight resistant to be used within walls, floors, and ceilings, exposed or con- (8) Where subject to physical damage cealed, in buildings exceeding three floors abovegrade. Informational Note: Extreme cold may cause some types Informational Note: A finish rating is established for of nonmetallic conduits to become brittle and therefore assemblies containing combustible (wood) supports. The more susceptible to damage from physical contact. finish rating is defined as the time at which the wood stud or wood joist reaches an average temperature rise 362.20 Size.

of 121°C (250°F) or an individual temperature of 163°C (A) Minimum. ENT smaller than metric designator 16 (trade (325°F) as measured on the plane of the wood nearest the 1 size ⁄2) shall not be used. fire. A finish rating is not intended to represent a rating for a membrane ceiling. (B) Maximum. ENT larger than metric designator 63 (trade 1 size 2 ⁄2) shall not be used. (3) In locations subject to severe corrosive influences as cov- ered in 300.6 and where subject to chemicals for which Informational Note: See 300.1(C) for the metric desig- the materials are specifically approved. nators and trade sizes. These are for identification pur- (4) In concealed, dry, and damp locations not prohibited by poses only and do not relate to actual dimensions. 362.12. 362.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors (5) Above suspended ceilings where the suspended ceilings shall not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill in Table 1, provide a thermal barrier of material that has at least a Chapter 9. 15-minute finish rating as identified in listings of fire-rated

Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is assemblies, except as permitted in 362.10(1)a. not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The number of Exception to (5): ENT shall be permitted to be used above sus- cables shall not exceed the allowable percentage fill specified pended ceilings in buildings exceeding three floors above grade in Table 1, Chapter 9. where the building is protected throughout by a fire sprinkler sys- 362.24 Bends — How Made. Bends shall be so made that the tem installed in accordance with NFPA 13-2016, Standard for tubing will not be damaged and the internal diameter of the tub- the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. ing will not be effectively reduced. Bends shall be permitted to (6) Encased in poured concrete, or embedded in a concrete be made manually without auxiliary equipment, and the radius slab on grade where ENT is placed on sand or approved of the curve to the centerline of such bends shall not be less than screenings, provided fittings identified for this purpose shown in Table 2, Chapter 9 using the column “Other Bends.”

are used for connections. 362.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not be (7) For wet locations indoors as permitted in this section or in more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total) a concrete slab on or belowgrade, with fittings listed for between pull points, for example, conduit bodies and boxes. the purpose. (8) Metric designator 16 through 27 (trade size 1⁄2 through 1) as 362.28 Trimming. All cut ends shall be trimmed inside and listed manufactured prewired assembly. outside to remove rough edges. (9) Conductors or cables rated at a temperature higher than 362.30 Securing and Supporting. ENT shall be installed the listed temperature rating of ENT shall be permitted to as a complete system in accordance with 300.18 and shall be be installed in ENT, if the conductors or cables are not 2022 California Electrical Code 70–251

362.46 ARTICLE 366 — AUXILIARY GUTTERS securely fastened in place by an approved means and supported marking. Marking for limited smoke shall be permitted on the in accordance with 362.30(A) and (B). tubing that has limited smoke-producing characteristics. ∆ (A) Securely Fastened. ENT shall be securely fastened at The type, size, and quantity of conductors used in prewired intervals not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft). In addition, ENT shall manufactured assemblies shall be identified by means of be securely fastened in place within 900 mm (3 ft) of each outlet a printed tag or label attached to each end of the manufactured box, device box, junction box, cabinet, or fitting where it termi- assembly and either the carton, coil, or reel. The enclosed conduc- nates. Where used, cable ties shall be listed for the application tors shall be marked in accordance with 310.8. and for securing and supporting. Exception No. 1: Lengths not exceeding a distance of 1.8 m (6 ft) from a luminaire terminal connection for tap connections ARTICLE 366

to lighting luminaires shall be permitted without being secured. Auxiliary Gutters Exception No. 2: Lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) from the last point where the raceway is securely fastened for connections Part I. General within an accessible ceiling to luminaire(s) or other equipment. 366.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- Exception No. 3: For concealed work in finished buildings or struction requirements of metal auxiliary gutters and nonme- prefinished wall panels where such securing is impracticable, tallic auxiliary gutters and associated fittings. unbroken lengths (without coupling) of ENT shall be permitted to be fished. 366.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply within this article and throughout the Code. (B) Supports. Horizontal runs of ENT supported by open- ings in framing members at intervals not exceeding 900 mm Metal Auxiliary Gutter. A sheet metal enclosure used to sup- (3 ft) and securely fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) of termination plement wiring spaces at meter centers, distribution centers,

points shall be permitted. switchgear, switchboards, and similar points of wiring systems. The enclosure has hinged or removable covers for housing and 362.46 Bushings. Where a tubing enters a box, fitting, or other protecting electrical wires, cable, and busbars. The enclosure is enclosure, a bushing or adapter shall be provided to protect the designed for conductors to be laid or set in place after the enclo- wire from abrasion unless the box, fitting, or enclosure design sures have been installed as a complete system. provides equivalent protection. Nonmetallic Auxiliary Gutter. A flame-retardant, nonmetallic Informational Note: See 300.4(G) for the protection of enclosure used to supplement wiring spaces at meter centers, dis- conductors size 4 AWG or larger. tribution centers, switchgear, switchboards, and similar points of 362.48 Joints. All joints between lengths of tubing and wiring systems. The enclosure has hinged or removable covers between tubing and couplings, fittings, and boxes shall be by an for housing and protecting electrical wires, cable, and busbars.

approved method. The enclosure is designed for conductors to be laid or set in place after the enclosures have been installed as a complete system. 362.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made only in accordance with 300.15. 366.6 Listing Requirements. Informational Note: See Article 314 for rules on the instal- (A) Outdoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters installed out- lation and use of boxes and conduit bodies. doors shall be listed for all of the following conditions: 362.60 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, (1) Exposure to sunlight a separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in (2) Use in wet locations the raceway in compliance with Article 250, Part VI. (3) Maximum ambient temperature of the installation (B) Indoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters installed indoors Part III. Construction Specifications shall be listed for the maximum ambient temperature of the 362.100 Construction. ENT shall be made of material that does installation. not exceed the ignitibility, flammability, smoke generation, and

toxicity characteristics of rigid (nonplasticized) polyvinyl chloride. Part II. Installation ENT, as a prewired manufactured assembly, shall be pro- 366.10 Uses Permitted. vided in continuous lengths capable of being shipped in a coil, ∆ (A) Sheet Metal Auxiliary Gutters. reel, or carton without damage. (1) Indoor and Outdoor Use. Sheet metal auxiliary gutters shall 362.120 Marking. ENT shall be clearly and durably marked be permitted for indoor and outdoor use. at least every 3 m (10 ft) as required in the first sentence of (2) Wet Locations. Sheet metal auxiliary gutters installed in 110.21(A). The type of material shall also be included in the wet locations shall be suitable for such locations. 70–252 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 366 — AUXILIARY GUTTERS 366.60 (B) Nonmetallic Auxiliary Gutters. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters shall not exceed 1.55 amperes/mm2 (1000 amperes/in. 2) gutters shall be listed for the maximum ambient temperature of of cross section of the conductor. For aluminum bars, the cur- the installation and marked for the installed conductor insula- rent carried continuously shall not exceed 1.09 amperes/mm2 tion temperature rating. (700 amperes/in.2) of cross section of the conductor. Informational Note: Extreme cold may cause nonme- ∆ (B) Nonmetallic Auxiliary Gutters. The adjustment factors tallic auxiliary gutters to become brittle and therefore specified in 310.15(C)(1) shall be applicable to the current- more susceptible to damage from physical contact. carrying conductors up to and including the 20 percent fill speci- fied in 366.22(B). (1) Outdoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters shall be permitted to be installed outdoors where listed and marked as suitable for 366.30 Securing and Supporting. the purpose. (A) Sheet Metal Auxiliary Gutters. Sheet metal auxiliary (2) Indoors.

Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters shall be permitted gutters shall be supported and secured throughout their entire to be installed indoors. length at intervals not exceeding 1.5 m (5 ft). 366.12 Uses Not Permitted. Auxiliary gutters shall not be used: (B) Nonmetallic Auxiliary Gutters. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters shall be supported and secured at intervals not to exceed (1) To enclose switches, overcurrent devices, appliances, or 900 mm (3 ft) and at each end or joint, unless listed for other other similar equipment support intervals. In no case shall the distance between supports (2) To extend a greater distance than 9 m (30 ft) beyond the exceed 3 m (10 ft). equipment that it supplements 366.44 Expansion Fittings. Expansion fittings shall be installed Exception: As permitted in 620.35 for elevators, an auxiliary where expected length change, due to expansion and contraction gutter shall be permitted to extend a distance greater than 9 m due to temperature change, is more than 6 mm (0.25 in.). (30 ft) beyond the equipment it supplements. 366.56 Splices and Taps.

Splices and taps shall comply with Informational Note: For wireways, see Articles 376 and 366.56(A) through (D). 378. For busways, see Article 368. (A) Within Gutters. Splices or taps shall be permitted within 366.20 Conductors Connected in Parallel. Where single con- gutters where they are accessible by means of removable covers ductor cables comprising each phase, neutral, or grounded or doors. The conductors, including splices and taps, shall not fill conductor of an alternating-current circuit are connected in par- the gutter to more than 75 percent of its area. allel as permitted in 310.10(G), the conductors shall be installed in groups consisting of not more than one conductor per phase, (B) Bare Conductors. Taps from bare conductors shall leave neutral, or grounded conductor to prevent current imbalance in the gutter opposite their terminal connections, and conductors the paralleled conductors due to inductive reactance. shall not be brought in contact with uninsulated current-carrying parts of different voltages. 366.22 Number of Conductors. (C) Suitably Identified.

All taps shall be suitably identified ∆ (A) Sheet Metal Auxiliary Gutters. The sum of the cross- at the gutter as to the circuit or equipment that they supply. sectional areas of all contained conductors and cables at any cross section of a sheet metal auxiliary gutter shall not exceed (D) Overcurrent Protection. Tap connections from conduc- 20 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the sheet metal tors in auxiliary gutters shall be provided with overcurrent pro- auxiliary gutter. tection as required in 240.21. (B) Nonmetallic Auxiliary Gutters. The sum of cross-sectional 366.58 Insulated Conductors. areas of all contained conductors and cables at any cross section (A) Deflected Insulated Conductors. Where insulated con- of the nonmetallic auxiliary gutter shall not exceed 20 percent of ductors are deflected within an auxiliary gutter, either at the the interior cross-sectional area of the nonmetallic auxiliary gutter. ends or where conduits, fittings, or other raceways or cables 366.23 Ampacity of Conductors.

enter or leave the gutter, or where the direction of the gutter is deflected greater than 30 degrees, dimensions corresponding to (A) Sheet Metal Auxiliary Gutters. The adjustment fac- one wire per terminal in Table 312.6(A) shall apply. tors in 310.15(C)(1) shall be applied only where the number of current-carrying conductors, including neutral conductors (B) Auxiliary Gutters Used as Pull Boxes. Where insulated classified as current-carrying under 310.15(E), exceeds 30 at conductors 4 AWG or larger are pulled through an auxiliary gut- any cross section of the sheet metal auxiliary gutter. Conduc- ter, the distance between raceway and cable entries enclosing the tors for signaling circuits or controller conductors between a same conductor shall not be less than that required in 314.28(A)(1) motor and its starter and used only for starting duty shall not for straight pulls and 314.28(A)(2) for angle pulls. be considered as current-carrying conductors. The current car- 366.60 Grounding. Metal auxiliary gutters shall be connected

ried continuously in bare copper bars in sheet metal auxiliary to an equipment grounding conductor(s), to an equipment 2022 California Electrical Code 70–253

366.100 ARTICLE 368 — BUSWAYS bonding jumper, or to the grounded conductor where permitted 368.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply or required by 250.92(B)(1) or 250.142. within this article and throughout the Code. Busway. A raceway consisting of a metal enclosure containing Part III. Construction Specifications factory-mounted, bare or insulated conductors, which are usu- 366.100 Construction. ally copper or aluminum bars, rods, or tubes. (A) Electrical and Mechanical Continuity. Gutters shall be Informational Note: For cablebus, refer to Article 370. constructed and installed so that adequate electrical and mechani- cal continuity of the complete system is secured. Part II. Installation (B) Substantial Construction. Gutters shall be of substantial 368.10 Uses Permitted. Busways shall be permitted to be construction and shall provide a complete enclosure for the con- installed where they are located in accordance with 368.10(A) tained conductors. All surfaces, both interior and exterior, shall through (C). be suitably protected from corrosion.

Corner joints shall be made Informational Note: See 300.21 for information concern- tight, and where the assembly is held together by rivets, bolts, ing the spread of fire or products of combustion. or screws, such fasteners shall be spaced not more than 300 mm (12 in.) apart. (A) Exposed. Busways shall be permitted to be located in the open where visible, except as permitted in 368.10(C). (C) Smooth Rounded Edges. Suitable bushings, shields, or fittings having smooth, rounded edges shall be provided where (B) Behind Access Panels. Busways shall be permitted to be conductors pass between gutters, through partitions, around installed behind access panels, provided the busways are totally bends, between gutters and cabinets or junction boxes, and at enclosed, of nonventilating-type construction, and installed so other locations where necessary to prevent abrasion of the insula- that the joints between sections and at fittings are accessible for tion of the conductors. maintenance purposes. Where installed behind access panels,

means of access shall be provided, and either of the following (D) Covers. Covers shall be securely fastened to the gutter. conditions shall be met: (E) Clearance of Bare Live Parts. Bare conductors shall be (1) The space behind the access panels shall not be used for air- securely and rigidly supported so that the minimum clearance handling purposes. between bare current-carrying metal parts of different voltages (2) Where the space behind the access panels is used for envi- mounted on the same surface will not be less than 50 mm (2 in.), ronmental air, other than ducts and plenums, there shall be nor less than 25 mm (1 in.) for parts that are held free in the air. no provisions for plug-in connections, and the conductors A clearance not less than 25 mm (1 in.) shall be secured between shall be insulated. bare current-carrying metal parts and any metal surface. Ade- quate provisions shall be made for the expansion and contraction (C) Through Walls and Floors. Busways shall be permitted of busbars. to be installed through walls or floors in accordance with (C)(1) and (C)(2).

∆ 366.120 Marking. (1) Walls. Unbroken lengths of busway shall be permitted to (A) Outdoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters installed outdoors be extended through dry walls. shall have the following markings: (2) Floors. Floor penetrations shall comply with (a) and (b): (1) Suitable for exposure to sunlight (a) Busways shall be permitted to be extended vertically (2) Suitable for use in wet locations through dry floors if totally enclosed (unventilated) where (3) Installed conductor insulation temperature rating passing through and for a minimum distance of 1.8 m (6 ft) (B) Indoors. Nonmetallic auxiliary gutters installed indoors above the floor to provide adequate protection from physical shall be marked with the installed conductor insulation tempera- damage. ture rating. (b) In other than industrial establishments, where a vertical riser penetrates two or more dry floors, a minimum 100-mm (4-in.) high curb shall be installed around all floor openings for ARTICLE 368 riser busways to prevent liquids from entering the opening. The

curb shall be installed within 300 mm (12 in.) of the floor open- Busways ing. Electrical equipment shall be located so that it will not be damaged by liquids that are retained by the curb. Part I. General Requirements 368.12 Uses Not Permitted. 368.1 Scope. This article covers service-entrance, feeder, and (A) Physical Damage. Busways shall not be installed where branch-circuit busways and associated fittings. subject to severe physical damage or corrosive vapors. 70–254 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 368 — BUSWAYS 368.56 (B) Hoistways. Busways shall not be installed in hoistways. (D) Rating of Overcurrent Protection — Branch Circuits. A busway used as a branch circuit shall be protected against (C) Hazardous Locations. Busways shall not be installed in overcurrent in accordance with 210.20. any hazardous (classified) location, unless specifically approved for such use. 368.30 Support. Busways shall be securely supported at intervals not exceeding 1.5 m (5 ft) unless otherwise designed Informational Note: See 501.10(B). and marked. (D) Wet Locations. Busways shall not be installed outdoors or 368.56 Branches from Busways. Branches from busways in wet or damp locations unless identified for such use. shall be permitted to be made in accordance with 368.56(A), (B), (E) Working Platform. Lighting busway and trolley busway and (C). shall not be installed less than 2.5 m (8 ft) above the floor or (A) General. Branches from busways shall be permitted to working platform unless provided with an identified cover. use any of the following wiring methods:

368.17 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection shall (1) Type AC armored cable be provided in accordance with 368.17(A) through (D). (2) Type MC metal-clad cable ∆ (A) Rating of Overcurrent Protection — Feeders. A busway (3) Type MI mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with the cur- (4) Type IMC intermediate metal conduit rent rating of the busway. (5) Type RMC rigid metal conduit (6) Type FMC flexible metal conduit Exception No. 1: The applicable provisions of 240.4 shall be (7) Type LFMC liquidtight flexible metal conduit permitted. (8) Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit Exception No. 2: Where used as transformer secondary ties, (9) Type RTRC reinforced thermosetting resin conduit 450.6(A)(3) shall be permitted. (10) Type LFNC liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (B) Reduction in Ampacity Size of Busway. Overcurrent pro- (11) Type EMT electrical metallic tubing tection shall be required where busways are reduced in ampacity. (12) Type ENT electrical nonmetallic tubing (13) Busways

Exception: For industrial establishments only, omission of (14) Strut-type channel raceway overcurrent protection shall be permitted at points where bus- (15) Surface metal raceway ways are reduced in ampacity, provided that the length of the (16) Surface nonmetallic raceway busway having the smaller ampacity does not exceed 15 m (50 ft) and has an ampacity at least equal to one-third the Where a separate equipment grounding conductor is used, rating or setting of the overcurrent device next back on the connection of the equipment grounding conductor to the busway line, and provided that such busway is free from contact with shall comply with 250.8 and 250.12. combustible material. (B) Cord and Cable Assemblies. Suitable cord and cable (C) Feeder or Branch Circuits. Where a busway is used as a assemblies identified for extra-hard usage or hard usage and feeder, devices or plug-in connections for tapping off feeder or listed bus drop cable shall be permitted as branches from bus-

branch circuits from the busway shall contain the overcurrent ways for the connection of portable equipment or the connection devices required for the protection of the feeder or branch cir- of stationary equipment to facilitate their interchange in accor- cuits. The plug-in device shall consist of an externally operable dance with 400.10 and 400.12 and the following conditions: circuit breaker or an externally operable fusible switch. Where (1) The cord or cable shall be attached to the building by an such devices are mounted out of reach and contain disconnecting approved means. means, suitable means such as ropes, chains, or sticks shall be (2) The length of the cord or cable from a busway plug-in device provided for operating the disconnecting means from the floor. to a suitable tension take-up support device shall not exceed Exception No. 1: As permitted in 240.21. 1.8 m (6 ft). (3) The cord and cable shall be installed as a vertical riser from Exception No. 2: For fixed or semifixed luminaires, where the tension take-up support device to the equipment served.

the branch-circuit overcurrent device is part of the luminaire (4) Strain relief cable grips shall be provided for the cord or cable cord plug on cord-connected luminaires. at the busway plug-in device and equipment terminations. Exception No. 3: Where luminaires without cords are plugged Exception to (B)(2): In industrial establishments only, where directly into the busway and the overcurrent device is mounted the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that on the luminaire. only qualified persons service the installation, lengths exceed- Exception No. 4: Where the branch-circuit overcurrent plug- ing 1.8 m (6 ft) shall be permitted between the busway plug-in in device is directly supplying a readily accessible disconnect, a device and the tension take-up support device where the cord or method of floor operation shall not be required. cable is supported at intervals not exceeding 2.5 m (8 ft). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–255

368.58 ARTICLE 370 — CABLEBUS (C) Branches from Trolley-Type Busways. Suitable cord devices that are not load-break shall be interlocked to prevent and cable assemblies identified for extra-hard usage or hard operation under load, and disconnecting link enclosures shall be usage and listed bus drop cable shall be permitted as branches interlocked to prevent access to energized parts. from trolley-type busways for the connection of movable 368.240 Wiring 1000 Volts or Less, Nominal. Secondary equipment in accordance with 400.10 and 400.12. control devices and wiring that are provided as part of the 368.58 Dead Ends. A dead end of a busway shall be closed. metal-enclosed bus run shall be insulated by fire-retardant barriers from all primary circuit elements with the exception 368.60 Grounding. Busway shall be connected to an equip- of short lengths of wire, such as at instrument transformer ment grounding conductor(s), to an equipment bonding jumper, terminals. or to the grounded conductor where permitted or required by 250.92(B)(1) or 250.142. 368.244 Expansion Fittings.

Flexible or expansion connec- tions shall be provided in long, straight runs of bus to allow Part III. Construction for temperature expansion or contraction, or where the bus- 368.120 Marking. Busways shall be marked with the voltage way run crosses building vibration insulation joints. and current rating for which they are designed, and with the 368.258 Neutral Conductor. Neutral bus, where required, manufacturer’s name or trademark in such a manner as to be vis- shall be sized to carry all neutral load current, including har- ible after installation. monic currents, and shall have adequate momentary and short- circuit current rating consistent with system requirements. Part IV. Requirements for Over 1000 Volts, Nominal 368.260 Grounding. Metal-enclosed busway shall be grounded. 368.214 Adjacent and Supporting Structures. Metal- ∆ enclosed busways shall be installed so that temperature rise from 368.320 Marking. Each busway run shall be provided with a induced circulating currents in adjacent ferrous metal parts will permanent nameplate on which the following information shall

not be hazardous to personnel or constitute a fire hazard. be provided: 368.234 Barriers and Seals. (1) Rated voltage. (2) Rated continuous current; if bus is forced-cooled, both the (A) Vapor Seals. Busway runs that have sections located normal forced-cooled rating and the self-cooled (not forced- both inside and outside of buildings shall have a vapor seal at cooled) rating for the same temperature rise shall be given. the building wall to prevent interchange of air between indoor (3) Rated frequency. and outdoor sections. (4) Rated impulse withstand voltage. Exception: Vapor seals shall not be required in forced-cooled (5) Rated 60-Hz withstand voltage (dry). bus. (6) Rated momentary current. (7) Manufacturer’s name or trademark. (B) Fire Barriers. Fire barriers shall be provided where fire walls, floors, or ceilings are penetrated. Informational Note: See IEEE C37.23-2015, IEEE Stan- dard for Metal-Enclosed Bus, for construction and testing Informational Note: See 300.21 for information concern- requirements for metal-enclosed bus assemblies.

ing the spread of fire or products of combustion. 368.236 Drain Facilities. Drain plugs, filter drains, or similar methods shall be provided to remove condensed moisture from ARTICLE 370 low points in busway run. Cablebus 368.237 Ventilated Bus Enclosures. Ventilated busway enclo- sures shall be installed in accordance with Article 110, Part III, and 490.24. Part I. General 368.238 Terminations and Connections. Where bus enclo- 370.1 Scope. This article covers the use and installation require- sures terminate at machines cooled by flammable gas, seal-off ments of cablebus and associated fittings. bushings, baffles, or other means shall be provided to prevent 370.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply accumulation of flammable gas in the busway enclosures. within this article and throughout the Code. All conductor termination and connection hardware shall be Cablebus. An assembly of units or sections with insulated con- accessible for installation, connection, and maintenance. ductors having associated fittings forming a structural system 368.239 Switches.

Switching devices or disconnecting links used to securely fasten or support conductors and conductor provided in the busway run shall have the same momentary rat- terminations in a completely enclosed, ventilated, protective ing as the busway. Disconnecting links shall be plainly marked metal housing. This assembly is designed to carry fault current to be removable only when bus is de-energized. Switching and to withstand the magnetic forces of such current. 70–256 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 370 — CABLEBUS 370.120 Informational Note: Cablebus is ordinarily assembled at Informational Note No. 2: See 110.40 for conductor tem- the point of installation from the components furnished or perature limitations due to termination provisions for specified by the manufacturer in accordance with instruc- installations 2001 volts to 35,000 volts. tions for the specific job. 370.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors shall be that for which the cablebus is designed. Part II. Installation ∆ 370.23 Overcurrent Protection. Cablebus shall be protected 370.10 Uses Permitted. Approved cablebus shall be permitted: against overcurrent in accordance with the ampacity of the (1) At any voltage or current for which spaced conductors are cablebus conductors in accordance with 240.4. rated and where installed only for exposed work, except as Exception: Overcurrent protection shall be permitted in accor- permitted in 370.18 dance with 240.100 and 240.101. (2) For branch circuits, feeders, and services

(3) To be installed outdoors or in corrosive, wet, or damp loca- 370.30 Securing and Supporting. tions where identified for the use (A) Cablebus Supports. Cablebus shall be securely sup- 370.12 Uses Not Permitted. Cablebus shall not be permitted ported at intervals not exceeding 3.7 m (12 ft). Where spans to be installed in the following: longer than 3.7 m (12 ft) are required, the structure shall be spe- cifically designed for the required span length. (1) Hoistways (2) Hazardous (classified) locations, unless specifically permit- (B) Conductor Supports. The insulated conductors shall be ted in Chapter 5 supported on blocks or other identified mounting means. 370.18 Cablebus Installation. The individual conductors in a cablebus shall be supported at intervals not greater than 900 mm (3 ft) for horizontal runs (A) Transversely Routed. Cablebus shall be permitted to 1 and 450 mm (1 ⁄ 2 ft) for vertical runs. Vertical and horizontal extend transversely through partitions or walls, other than fire spacing between supported conductors shall be not less than one

walls, provided that the section within the wall is continuous, conductor diameter at the points of support. protected against physical damage, and unventilated. 370.42 Fittings. A cablebus system shall include approved fit- (B) Through Dry Floors and Platforms. Except where fire- tings for the following: stops are required, cablebus shall be permitted to extend verti- cally through dry floors and platforms, provided that the cablebus (1) Changes in horizontal or vertical direction of the run is totally enclosed at the point where it passes through the floor (2) Dead ends or platform and for a distance of 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor or (3) Terminations in or on connected apparatus or equipment or platform. the enclosures for such equipment (4) Additional physical protection where required, such as (C) Through Floors and Platforms in Wet Locations. Except guards where subject to severe physical damage where firestops are required, cablebus shall be permitted to extend vertically through floors and platforms in wet locations where: 370.60 Grounding.

A cablebus system shall be grounded and/ or bonded as applicable: (1) There are curbs or other suitable means to prevent water- flow through the floor or platform opening, and (1) Cablebus framework, where bonded, shall be permitted to (2) Where the cablebus is totally enclosed at the point where be used as the equipment grounding conductor for branch it passes through the floor or platform and for a distance of circuits and feeders. 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor or platform. (2) A cablebus installation shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with Article 250, excluding 250.86, Exception 370.20 Conductor Size and Termination. No. 2. (A) Conductors. The current-carrying conductors in cablebus 370.80 Ampacity of Conductors. The ampacity of con- shall: ductors in cablebus shall be in accordance with 310.17 and (1) Have an insulation rating of 75°C (167°F) or higher and be 310.19 for installations up to and including 2000 volts, or with of an approved type suitable for the application. Table 311.60(C)(69) and Table 311.60(C)(70) for installations

(2) Be sized in accordance with the design of the cablebus but 2001 volts to 35,000 volts. in no case be smaller than 1/0. Part III. Construction Specifications (B) Termination. Approved terminating means shall be used for connections to cablebus conductors. 370.120 Marking. Each section of cablebus shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or trade designation and the maxi- Informational Note No. 1: See 110.14(C) for conductor mum diameter, number, voltage rating, and ampacity of the con- temperature limitations due to termination provisions for ductors to be installed. Markings shall be located so as to be installations up to and including 2000 volts. visible after installation. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–257

372.1 ARTICLE 374 — CELLULAR METAL FLOOR RACEWAYS conductor or bonding jumper shall connect the insert recep- ARTICLE 372 tacles to a positive ground connection provided on the header. Cellular Concrete Floor Raceways Where cutting through the cell wall for setting inserts or other purposes (such as providing access openings between header and cells), chips and other dirt shall not be allowed to remain in the Part I. General raceway, and the tool used shall be designed so as to prevent the tool from entering the cell and damaging the conductors. 372.1 Scope. This article covers cellular concrete floor race- ways, the hollow spaces in floors constructed of precast cellular (E) Markers. A suitable number of markers shall be installed concrete slabs, together with suitable metal fittings designed to for the future location of cells. provide access to the floor cells. 372.20 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than 1/0 AWG 372.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply shall be installed, except by special permission. only within this article.

372.22 Maximum Number of Conductors. The combined Cell. A single, enclosed tubular space in a floor made of pre- cross-sectional area of all conductors or cables shall not exceed cast cellular concrete slabs, the direction of the cell being paral- 40 percent of the cross-sectional area of the cell or header. lel to the direction of the floor member. 372.23 Ampacity of Conductors. The ampacity adjustment Header. Transverse metal raceways for electrical conductors, factors as provided in 310.15(C) shall apply to conductors providing access to predetermined cells of a precast cellular con- installed in cellular concrete floor raceways. crete floor, thereby permitting the installation of electrical con- 372.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made ductors from a distribution center to the floor cells. only in header access units or junction boxes. A continuous unbroken conductor connecting the individual outlets is not a Part II. Installation splice or tap. 372.12 Uses Not Permitted. Conductors shall not be installed 372.58 Discontinued Outlets. When an outlet is abandoned,

in precast cellular concrete floor raceways as follows: discontinued, or removed, the sections of circuit conduc- (1) Where subject to corrosive vapor tors supplying the outlet shall be removed from the raceway. (2) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted No splices or reinsulated conductors, such as would be the by other articles in this Code case of abandoned outlets on loop wiring, shall be allowed in (3) In commercial garages, other than for supplying ceiling out- raceways. lets or extensions to the area below the floor but not above Informational Note: See 300.8 for installation of conduc- tors with other systems. ARTICLE 374 Cellular Metal Floor Raceways 372.18 Cellular Concrete Floor Raceways Installation. Installation of cellular concrete floor raceways shall comply with 372.18(A) through 372.18(E). Part I. General (A) Header. The header shall be installed in a straight line at 374.1 Scope. This article covers the use and installation right angles to the cells. The header shall be mechanically secured requirements for cellular metal floor raceways.

to the top of the precast cellular concrete floor. The end joints 374.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply shall be closed by a metal closure fitting and sealed against the within this article and throughout the Code. entrance of concrete. The header shall be electrically continu- ous throughout its entire length and shall be electrically bonded Cellular Metal Floor Raceway. The hollow spaces of cel- to the enclosure of the distribution center. lular metal floors, together with suitable fittings, that may be approved as enclosed channel for electrical conductors. (B) Connection to Cabinets and Other Enclosures. Connec- tions from headers to cabinets and other enclosures shall be Cell. A single enclosed tubular space in a cellular metal floor made by means of listed metal raceways and listed fittings. member, the axis of the cell being parallel to the axis of the metal floor member. (C) Junction Boxes. Junction boxes shall be leveled to the floor grade and sealed against the free entrance of water or concrete. Header.

A transverse raceway for electrical conductors, pro- Junction boxes shall be of metal and shall be mechanically and viding access to predetermined cells of a cellular metal floor, electrically continuous with the header. thereby permitting the installation of electrical conductors from a distribution center to the cells. (D) Inserts. Inserts shall be leveled and sealed against the entrance of concrete. Inserts shall be of metal and shall be fit- N 374.6 Listing Requirements. Cellular metal floor raceways ted with grounded-type receptacles. An equipment grounding shall be listed. 70–258 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 376 — METAL WIREWAYS 376.20 Part II. Installation For the purposes of this section, so-called loop wiring (con- tinuous unbroken conductor connecting the individual outlets) 374.12 Uses Not Permitted. Conductors shall not be installed shall not be considered to be a splice or tap. in cellular metal floor raceways as follows: 374.58 Discontinued Outlets. When an outlet is abandoned, (1) Where subject to corrosive vapor discontinued, or removed, the sections of circuit conductors sup- (2) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted plying the outlet shall be removed from the raceway. No splices by other articles in this Code or reinsulated conductors, such as would be the case with aban- (3) In commercial garages, other than for supplying ceiling doned outlets on loop wiring, shall be allowed in raceways. outlets or extensions to the area below the floor but not above Part III. Construction Specifications Informational Note: See 300.8 for installation of conduc- 374.100 General. Cellular metal floor raceways shall be tors with other systems.

constructed so that adequate electrical and mechanical con- 374.18 Cellular Metal Floor Raceways Installations. Instal- tinuity of the complete system will be secured. They shall lation of cellular metal floor raceways shall comply with provide a complete enclosure for the conductors. The interior 374.18(A) through 374.18(D). surfaces shall be free from burrs and sharp edges, and surfaces over which conductors are drawn shall be smooth. Suitable (A) Connection to Cabinets and Extensions from Cells. Con- bushings or fittings having smooth rounded edges shall be nections between raceways and distribution centers and wall out- provided where conductors pass. lets shall be made by means of liquidtight flexible metal conduit, flexible metal conduit where not installed in concrete, rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or ARTICLE 376 approved fittings. Where there are provisions for the termination of an equipment grounding conductor, rigid polyvinyl chloride Metal Wireways conduit, reinforced thermosetting resin conduit, electrical non-

metallic tubing, or liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall Part I. General be permitted. Where installed in concrete, liquidtight flexible metal conduit and liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall 376.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- be listed and marked for direct burial. struction specifications for metal wireways and associated fittings. (B) Junction Boxes. Junction boxes shall be leveled to the floor 376.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply grade and sealed against the free entrance of water or concrete. within this article and throughout the Code. Junction boxes used with these raceways shall be of metal and Metal Wireways. Sheet metal troughs with hinged or removable shall be electrically continuous with the raceway. covers for housing and protecting electrical wires and cable and (C) Inserts. Inserts shall be leveled to the floor grade and in which conductors are laid in place after the raceway has been sealed against the entrance of concrete. Inserts shall be of installed as a complete system.

metal and shall be electrically continuous with the raceway. In cutting through the cell wall and setting inserts, chips and other Part II. Installation dirt shall not be allowed to remain in the raceway, and tools 376.10 Uses Permitted. The use of metal wireways shall be shall be used that are designed to prevent the tool from entering permitted as follows: the cell and damaging the conductors. (1) For exposed work. (D) Markers. A suitable number of markers shall be installed (2) In any hazardous (classified) location, as permitted by other for locating cells in the future. articles in this Code. 374.20 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than (3) In wet locations where wireways are listed for the purpose. 1/0 AWG shall be installed, except by special permission. (4) In concealed spaces as an extension that passes transversely through walls, if the length passing through the wall is 374.22 Maximum Number of Conductors in Raceway. The unbroken. Access to the conductors shall be maintained on combined cross-sectional area of all conductors or cables shall both sides of the wall.

not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the cell or header. 376.12 Uses Not Permitted. Metal wireways shall not be used in the following: 374.23 Ampacity of Conductors. The ampacity adjustment factors in 310.15(C) shall apply to conductors installed in cel- (1) Where subject to severe physical damage lular metal floor raceways. (2) Where subject to severe corrosive environments 374.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made ∆ 376.20 Conductors Connected in Parallel. Where single con- only in header access units or junction boxes. ductor cables comprising each phase, neutral, or grounded 2022 California Electrical Code 70–259

376.21 ARTICLE 376 — METAL WIREWAYS conductor of an alternating-current circuit are connected in paral- wireway sections shall be securely fastened together to provide lel as permitted in 310.10(G), the conductors shall be installed a rigid joint. in groups consisting of not more than one conductor per phase, 376.56 Splices, Taps, and Power Distribution Blocks. neutral, or grounded conductor. (A) Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be permitted Informational Note: The purpose of having all parallel within a wireway, provided they are accessible. The conductors, conductor sets within the same group is to prevent current including splices and taps, shall not fill the wireway to more than imbalance in the paralleled conductors due to inductive 75 percent of its area at that point. reactance. (B) Power Distribution Blocks. 376.21 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for which the wireway is designed shall be installed in any wireway. (1) Installation. Power distribution blocks installed in metal wireways shall be listed. Power distribution blocks installed

376.22 Number of Conductors and Ampacity. The number on the line side of the service equipment shall be marked “suit- of conductors or cables and their ampacity shall comply with able for use on the line side of service equipment” or equivalent. 376.22(A) and (B). (2) Size of Enclosure. In addition to the wiring space require- (A) Cross-Sectional Areas of Wireway. The sum of the cross- ment in 376.56(A), the power distribution block shall be installed sectional areas of all contained conductors and cables at any in a wireway with dimensions not smaller than specified in the cross section of a wireway shall not exceed 20 percent of the installation instructions of the power distribution block. interior cross-sectional area of the wireway. (3) Wire Bending Space. Wire bending space at the termi- ∆ (B) Adjustment Factors. The adjustment factors in 310.15(C)(1) nals of power distribution blocks shall comply with 312.6(B). shall be applied only where the number of current-carrying conductors, including neutral conductors classified as current- (4) Live Parts.

Power distribution blocks shall not have carrying under 310.15(E), exceeds 30 at any cross section of the uninsulated live parts exposed within a wireway, whether or not wireway. Conductors for signaling circuits or controller con- the wireway cover is installed. ductors between a motor and its starter and used only for start- (5) Conductors. Conductors shall be arranged so the power dis- ing duty shall not be considered as current-carrying conductors. tribution block terminals are unobstructed following installation. 376.23 Insulated Conductors. Insulated conductors installed 376.58 Dead Ends. Dead ends of metal wireways shall be in a metal wireway shall comply with 376.23(A) and (B). closed. (A) Deflected Insulated Conductors. Where insulated con- 376.70 Extensions from Metal Wireways. Extensions from ductors are deflected within a metal wireway, either at the ends wireways shall be made with cord pendants installed in accor- or where conduits, fittings, or other raceways or cables enter or dance with 400.14 or with any wiring method in Chapter 3 that

leave the metal wireway, or where the direction of the metal wire- includes a means for equipment grounding. Where a separate way is deflected greater than 30 degrees, dimensions correspond- equipment grounding conductor is employed, connection of the ing to one wire per terminal in Table 312.6(A) shall apply. equipment grounding conductors in the wiring method to the (B) Metal Wireways Used as Pull Boxes. Where insulated wireway shall comply with 250.8 and 250.12. conductors 4 AWG or larger are pulled through a wireway, the Part III. Construction Specifications distance between raceway and cable entries enclosing the same conductor shall not be less than that required by 314.28(A)(1) 376.100 Construction. for straight pulls and 314.28(A)(2) for angle pulls. When trans- (A) Electrical and Mechanical Continuity. Wireways shall posing cable size into raceway size, the minimum metric desig- be constructed and installed so that electrical and mechanical nator (trade size) raceway required for the number and size of continuity of the complete system are assured.

conductors in the cable shall be used. (B) Substantial Construction. Wireways shall be of substan- 376.30 Securing and Supporting. Metal wireways shall be tial construction and shall provide a complete enclosure for the supported in accordance with 376.30(A) and (B). contained conductors. All surfaces, both interior and exterior, (A) Horizontal Support. Wireways shall be supported shall be suitably protected from corrosion. Corner joints shall where run horizontally at each end and at intervals not to exceed be made tight, and where the assembly is held together by riv- 1.5 m (5 ft) or for individual lengths longer than 1.5 m (5 ft) at ets, bolts, or screws, such fasteners shall be spaced not more than each end or joint, unless listed for other support intervals. The 300 mm (12 in.) apart. distance between supports shall not exceed 3 m (10 ft). (C) Smooth Rounded Edges. Suitable bushings, shields, or (B) Vertical Support. Vertical runs of wireways shall be fittings having smooth, rounded edges shall be provided where

securely supported at intervals not exceeding 4.5 m (15 ft) and conductors pass between wireways, through partitions, around shall not have more than one joint between supports. Adjoining bends, between wireways and cabinets or junction boxes, and at 70–260 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 378 — NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS 378.30 other locations where necessary to prevent abrasion of the insula- 378.20 Conductors Connected in Parallel. Where single con- tion of the conductors. ductor cables comprising each phase, neutral, or grounded conductor of an alternating-current circuit are connected in par- (D) Covers. Covers shall be securely fastened to the wireway. allel as permitted in 310.10(G), the conductors shall be installed 376.120 Marking. Metal wireways shall be so marked that in groups consisting of not more than one conductor per phase, their manufacturer’s name or trademark will be visible after neutral, or grounded conductor to prevent current imbalance in installation. the paralleled conductors due to inductive reactance. 378.21 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for which the nonmetallic wireway is designed shall be installed in ARTICLE 378 any nonmetallic wireway. Nonmetallic Wireways ∆ 378.22 Number of Conductors. The sum of cross-sectional areas of all contained conductors or cables at any cross section Part I.

General of the nonmetallic wireway shall not exceed 20 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the nonmetallic wireway. Con- 378.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- ductors for signaling circuits or controller conductors between struction specifications for nonmetallic wireways and associ- a motor and its starter and used only for starting duty shall not ated fittings. be considered as current-carrying conductors. 378.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply The adjustment factors specified in 310.15(C)(1) shall be within this article and throughout the Code. applicable to the current-carrying conductors up to and includ- Nonmetallic Wireways. Flame-retardant, nonmetallic troughs ing the 20 percent fill specified in the first paragraph of this with removable covers for housing and protecting electrical section. wires and cables in which conductors are laid in place after the 378.23 Insulated Conductors. Insulated conductors installed raceway has been installed as a complete system.

in a nonmetallic wireway shall comply with 378.23(A) and (B). 378.6 Listing Requirements. Nonmetallic wireways and asso- (A) Deflected Insulated Conductors. Where insulated con- ciated fittings shall be listed. ductors are deflected within a nonmetallic wireway, either at the ends or where conduits, fittings, or other raceways or cables Part II. Installation enter or leave the nonmetallic wireway, or where the direction of 378.10 Uses Permitted. The use of nonmetallic wireways shall the nonmetallic wireway is deflected greater than 30 degrees, be permitted in the following: dimensions corresponding to one wire per terminal in Table 312.6(A) shall apply. (1) Only for exposed work, except as permitted in 378.10(4). (2) Where subject to corrosive environments where identified (B) Nonmetallic Wireways Used as Pull Boxes. Where insu- for the use. lated conductors 4 AWG or larger are pulled through a wireway, (3) In wet locations where listed for the purpose. the distance between raceway and cable entries enclosing the same conductor shall not be less than that required in 314.28(A)(1)

Informational Note: Extreme cold may cause nonmetallic for straight pulls and in 314.28(A)(2) for angle pulls. When wireways to become brittle and therefore more susceptible transposing cable size into raceway size, the minimum metric to damage from physical contact. designator (trade size) raceway required for the number and size (4) As extensions to pass transversely through walls if the of conductors in the cable shall be used. length passing through the wall is unbroken. Access to the 378.30 Securing and Supporting. Nonmetallic wireway conductors shall be maintained on both sides of the wall. shall be supported in accordance with 378.30(A) and (B). 378.12 Uses Not Permitted. Nonmetallic wireways shall not (A) Horizontal Support. Nonmetallic wireways shall be sup- be used in the following: ported where run horizontally at intervals not to exceed 900 mm (1) Where subject to physical damage (3 ft), and at each end or joint, unless listed for other support (2) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted intervals. In no case shall the distance between supports exceed

by other articles in this Code 3 m (10 ft). (3) Where exposed to sunlight unless listed and marked as suit- (B) Vertical Support. Vertical runs of nonmetallic wireway able for the purpose shall be securely supported at intervals not exceeding 1.2 m (4) Where subject to ambient temperatures other than those (4 ft), unless listed for other support intervals, and shall not have for which nonmetallic wireway is listed more than one joint between supports. Adjoining nonmetallic (5) For conductors whose insulation temperature limitations wireway sections shall be securely fastened together to provide would exceed those for which the nonmetallic wireway is a rigid joint. listed 2022 California Electrical Code 70–261

378.44 ARTICLE 382 — NONMETALLIC EXTENSIONS 378.44 Expansion Fittings. Expansion fittings for nonmetal- by the building finish or recess a nonmetallic multioutlet lic wireway shall be provided to compensate for thermal expan- assembly in a baseboard sion and contraction where the length change is expected to be (2) Where subject to severe physical damage 6 mm (0.25 in.) or greater in a straight run. (3) Where the voltage is 300 volts or more between conductors unless the assembly is of metal having a thickness of not Informational Note: See Table 352.44 for expansion char- less than 1.02 mm (0.040 in.) acteristics of PVC conduit. The expansion characteristics (4) Where subject to corrosive vapors of PVC nonmetallic wireway are identical. (5) In hoistways 378.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be permitted (6) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted within a nonmetallic wireway, provided they are accessible. The by other articles in this Code conductors, including splices and taps, shall not fill the nonme- (7) Where cord and plug connected

tallic wireway to more than 75 percent of its area at that point. 380.23 Insulated Conductors. For field-assembled multioutlet 378.58 Dead Ends. Dead ends of nonmetallic wireway shall be assemblies, insulated conductors shall comply with 380.23(A) closed using listed fittings. and (B), as applicable. 378.60 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, (A) Deflected Insulated Conductors. Where insulated con- a separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in ductors are deflected within a multioutlet assembly, either at the nonmetallic wireway. A separate equipment grounding con- the ends or where conduits, fittings, or other raceways or cables ductor shall not be required where the grounded conductor is enter or leave the multioutlet assembly, or where the direc- used to ground equipment as permitted in 250.142. tion of the multioutlet assembly is deflected greater than 30 378.70 Extensions from Nonmetallic Wireways. Exten- degrees, dimensions corresponding to one wire per terminal in sions from nonmetallic wireway shall be made with cord Table 312.6(A) shall apply.

pendants or any wiring method of Chapter 3. A separate equip- (B) Multioutlet Assemblies Used as Pull Boxes. Where ment grounding conductor shall be installed in, or an equipment insulated conductors 4 AWG or larger are pulled through a grounding connection shall be made to, any of the wiring meth- multioutlet assembly, the distance between raceway and cable ods used for the extension. entries enclosing the same conductor shall not be less than that required by 314.28(A)(1) for straight pulls and 314.28(A)(2) for Part III. Construction Specifications angle pulls. When transposing cable size into raceway size, the 378.120 Marking. Nonmetallic wireways shall be marked so minimum metric designator (trade size) raceway required for the that the manufacturer’s name or trademark and interior cross- number and size of conductors in the cable shall be used. sectional area in square inches shall be visible after installation. 380.76 Metal Multioutlet Assembly Through Dry Parti- Marking for limited smoke shall be permitted on the nonmetallic tions.

It shall be permissible to extend a metal multioutlet wireways that have limited smoke-producing characteristics. assembly through (not run within) dry partitions if arrangements are made for removing the cap or cover on all exposed portions and no outlet is located within the partitions. ARTICLE 380 Multioutlet Assembly ARTICLE 382 Nonmetallic Extensions Part I. General 380.1 Scope. This article covers the use and installation require- ments for multioutlet assemblies. Part I. General Informational Note: See the definition of multioutlet 382.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- assembly in Article 100. struction specifications for nonmetallic extensions. 382.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply Part II. Installation within this article and throughout the Code. 380.10 Uses Permitted. The use of a multioutlet assembly ∆ Concealable Nonmetallic Extension. A listed assembly of two, shall be permitted in dry locations. three, or four insulated circuit conductors within a nonmetallic 380.12 Uses Not Permitted.

A multioutlet assembly shall not jacket, an extruded thermoplastic covering, or a sealed nonme- be installed as follows: tallic covering. The classification includes surface extensions intended for mounting directly on the surface of walls or ceil- (1) Where concealed, except that it shall be permissible to ings and concealed with paint, texture, joint compound, plaster, surround the back and sides of a metal multioutlet assembly wallpaper, tile, wall paneling, or other similar materials. 70–262 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 382 — NONMETALLIC EXTENSIONS 382.56 Nonmetallic Extension. An assembly of two insulated con- (B) Concealable Nonmetallic Extensions. Where identi- ductors within a nonmetallic jacket or an extruded thermoplastic fied for the use, nonmetallic extensions shall be permitted to covering. The classification includes surface extensions intended be concealed with paint, texture, concealing compound, plas- for mounting directly on the surface of walls or ceilings. ter, wallpaper, tile, wall paneling, or other similar materials and installed in accordance with 382.15(A). 382.6 Listing Requirements. Concealable nonmetallic exten- sions and associated fittings and devices shall be listed. The 382.26 Bends. starting/source tap device for the extension shall contain and (A) Nonmetallic Extensions. A bend that reduces the normal provide the following protection for all load-side extensions and spacing between the conductors shall be covered with a cap to devices: protect the assembly from physical damage. (1) Supplementary overcurrent protection (B) Concealable Nonmetallic Extensions.

Concealable (2) Level of protection equivalent to a Class A GFCI extensions shall be permitted to be folded back over themselves (3) Level of protection equivalent to a portable GFCI and flattened as required for installation. (4) Line and load-side miswire protection (5) Provide protection from the effects of arc faults 382.30 Securing and Supporting. (A) Nonmetallic Extensions. Nonmetallic surface extensions Part II. Installation shall be secured in place by approved means at intervals not 382.10 Uses Permitted. Nonmetallic extensions shall be per- exceeding 200 mm (8 in.), with an allowance for 300 mm mitted only in accordance with 382.10(A), (B), and (C). (12 in.) to the first fastening where the connection to the supply- ing outlet is by means of an attachment plug. There shall be at (A) From an Existing Outlet. The extension shall be from an least one fastening between each two adjacent outlets supplied. existing outlet on a 15- or 20-ampere branch circuit. Where a con- An extension shall be attached to only woodwork or plaster

cealable nonmetallic extension originates from a non–grounding- finish and shall not be in contact with any metal work or other type receptacle, the installation shall comply with 250.130(C), conductive material other than with metal plates on receptacles. 406.4(D)(2)(b), or 406.4(D)(2)(c). (B) Concealable Nonmetallic Extensions. All surface- (B) Exposed and in a Dry Location. The extension shall be mounted concealable nonmetallic extension components shall run exposed, or concealed as permitted in 382.15, and in a dry be firmly anchored to the wall or ceiling using an adhesive or location. mechanical anchoring system identified for this use. (C) Residential or Offices. For nonmetallic surface extensions 382.40 Boxes and Fittings. Each run shall terminate in a fit- mounted directly on the surface of walls or ceilings, the build- ting, connector, or box that covers the end of the assembly. All ing shall be occupied for residential or office purposes and shall fittings, connectors, and devices shall be of a type identified for not exceed three floors abovegrade.

Where identified for the use, the use. concealable nonmetallic extensions shall be permitted more than three floors abovegrade. 382.42 Devices. Informational Note No. 1: See 310.14(A)(3) for tempera- (A) Receptacles. All receptacles, receptacle housings, and self- ture limitation of conductors. contained devices used with concealable nonmetallic exten- sions shall be identified for this use. Informational Note No. 2: See 362.10 for definition of First Floor. (B) Receptacles and Housings. Receptacle housings and self- contained devices designed either for surface or for recessed 382.12 Uses Not Permitted. Nonmetallic extensions shall not mounting shall be permitted for use with concealable nonmetal- be used as follows: lic extensions. Receptacle housings and self-contained devices (1) In unfinished basements, attics, or roof spaces shall incorporate means for facilitating entry and termination (2) Where the voltage between conductors exceeds 150 volts of concealable nonmetallic extensions and for electrically con-

for nonmetallic surface extensions and 300 volts for aerial necting the housing or device. Receptacle and self-contained cable devices shall comply with 406.4. Power and communications (3) Where subject to corrosive vapors outlets installed together in common housing shall be permitted (4) Where run through a floor or partition, or outside the room in accordance with 805.133(A)(1)(c), Exception No. 2. in which it originates 382.56 Splices and Taps. Extensions shall consist of a con- 382.15 Exposed. tinuous unbroken length of the assembly, without splices, and (A) Nonmetallic Extensions. One or more extensions shall be without exposed conductors between fittings, connectors, or permitted to be run in any direction from an existing outlet, but not devices. Taps shall be permitted where approved fittings com- on the floor or within 50 mm (2 in.) from the floor. pletely covering the tap connections are used. Aerial cable and its tap connectors shall be provided with an approved means for 2022 California Electrical Code 70–263

382.100 ARTICLE 384 — STRUT-TYPE CHANNEL RACEWAY polarization. Receptacle-type tap connectors shall be of the locking type. ARTICLE 384 Strut-Type Channel Raceway Part III. Construction Specifications (Concealable Nonmetallic Extensions Only) Part I. General ∆ 382.100 Construction. Concealable nonmetallic extensions shall be of a multilayer flat conductor design consisting of a cen- 384.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- ter ungrounded conductor enclosed by a sectioned grounded con- struction specifications of strut-type channel raceway. ductor and an overall sectioned equipment grounding conductor. 384.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply 382.104 Flat Conductors. Concealable nonmetallic exten- within this article and throughout the Code. sions shall be constructed, using flat copper conductors equiva- Strut-Type Channel Raceway. A metal raceway that is lent to 14 AWG or 12 AWG conductor sizes, and constructed intended to be mounted to the surface of or suspended from a per 382.104(A), (B), and (C).

structure, with associated accessories for the installation of elec- (A) Ungrounded Conductor (Center Layer). The ungrounded trical conductors and cables. conductor shall consist of one or more ungrounded flat con- 384.6 Listing Requirements. Strut-type channel raceways and ductor(s) enclosed in accordance with 382.104(B) and (C) and accessories shall be listed and identified for such use. identified in accordance with 310.6(C). (B) Grounded Conductor (Inner Sectioned Layers). The Part II. Installation grounded conductor shall consist of two sectioned inner flat 384.10 Uses Permitted. The use of strut-type channel race- conductors that enclose the center ungrounded conductor(s). ways shall be permitted in the following: The sectioned grounded conductor shall be enclosed by the sec- tioned equipment grounding conductor and identified in accor- (1) Where exposed. dance with 200.6. (2) In dry locations. (3) In locations subject to corrosive vapors where protected by (C) Equipment Grounding Conductor (Outer Sectioned finishes approved for the condition. Layers).

The equipment grounding conductor shall consist of (4) As power poles. two overall sectioned conductors that enclose the grounded (5) In hazardous (classified) locations as permitted in Chapter 5. conductor and ungrounded conductor(s) and shall comply with (6) As extensions of unbroken lengths through walls, partitions, 250.4(A)(5). The equipment grounding conductor layers shall and floors where closure strips are removable from either be identified by any one of the following methods: side and the portion within the wall, partition, or floor (1) As permitted in 250.119 remains covered. (2) A clear covering (7) Ferrous channel raceways and fittings protected from cor- (3) One or more continuous green stripes or hash marks rosion solely by enamel shall be permitted only indoors. (4) The term “Equipment Grounding Conductor” printed at 384.12 Uses Not Permitted. Strut-type channel raceways shall regular intervals throughout the cable not be used as follows: 382.112 Insulation. The ungrounded and grounded flat con- (1) Where concealed.

ductor layers shall be individually insulated and comply with (2) Ferrous channel raceways and fittings protected from cor- 310.14(A)(3). The equipment grounding conductor shall be cov- rosion solely by enamel shall not be permitted where subject ered or insulated. to severe corrosive influences. 382.120 Marking. 384.21 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for (A) Cable. Concealable nonmetallic extensions shall be clearly which the raceway is listed shall be installed in strut-type chan- and durably marked on both sides at intervals of not more than nel raceways. 610 mm (24 in.) with the information required by 310.8(A) and ∆ 384.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors or with the following additional information: cables permitted in strut-type channel raceways shall not exceed (1) Material of conductors the percentage fill using Table 384.22 and applicable cross-sec- (2) Maximum temperature rating tional area of specific types and sizes of wire given in the tables (3) Ampacity (B) Conductor Identification. in Chapter 9. (B) Conductor Identification.

Conductors shall be clearly The adjustment factors of 310.15(C)(1) shall not apply to con- and durably identified on both sides throughout their length as ductors installed in strut-type channel raceways where all of the specified in 382.104. following conditions are met: 70–264 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 386 — SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS 386.10 Table 384.22 Channel Size and Inside Cross-Sectional Area listing, this cover shall not be permitted as the means for provid- ing electrical continuity for a receptacle mounted in the cover. Area 40% Area* 25% Area † Size Part III. Construction Specifications Channel in. 2 mm2 in. 2 mm2 in. 2 mm2 384.100 Construction. Strut-type channel raceways and their 15⁄8 × 15⁄16 0.887 572 0.355 229 0.222 143 accessories shall be of a construction that distinguishes them 5 1 ⁄8 × 1 1.151 743 0.460 297 0.288 186 from other raceways. Raceways and their elbows, couplings, 15⁄8 × 13⁄8 1.677 1076 0.671 433 0.419 270 and other fittings shall be designed such that the sections can 15⁄8 × 15⁄8 2.028 1308 0.811 523 0.507 327 5 7 be electrically and mechanically coupled together and installed 1 ⁄8 × 2 ⁄16 3.169 2045 1.267 817 0.792 511 15⁄8 × 31⁄4 without subjecting the wires to abrasion. They shall comply with 4.308 2780 1.723 1112 1.077 695 11⁄2 × 3⁄4 0.849 548 0.340 219 0.212 137 384.100(A), (B), and (C). 11⁄2 × 11⁄2 1.828 1179 0.731 472 0.457 295

1 7 (A) Material. Raceways and accessories shall be formed of 1 ⁄2 × 1 ⁄8 2.301 1485 0.920 594 0.575 371 11⁄2 × 3 3.854 2487 1.542 995 0.964 622 steel, stainless steel, or aluminum. (B) Corrosion Protection. Steel raceways and accessories *Raceways with external joiners shall use a 40 percent wire fill calculation to determine the number of conductors permitted. shall be protected against corrosion by galvanizing or by an † Raceways with internal joiners shall use a 25 percent wire fill calculation organic coating. to determine the number of conductors permitted. Informational Note: Enamel and PVC coatings are exam- ples of organic coatings that provide corrosion protection. (C) Cover. Covers of strut-type channel raceways shall be (1) The cross-sectional area of the raceway exceeds 2500 mm 2 either metal or nonmetallic. (4 in.2). (2) The current-carrying conductors do not exceed 30 in 384.120 Marking. Each length of strut-type channel raceway number. shall be clearly and durably identified as required in the first sen-

(3) The sum of the cross-sectional areas of all contained con- tence of 110.21(A). ductors does not exceed 20 percent of the interior cross- sectional area of the strut-type channel raceways. ARTICLE 386 Surface Metal Raceways 384.30 Securing and Supporting. (A) Surface Mount. A surface mount strut-type channel raceway shall be secured to the mounting surface with reten- Part I. General tion straps external to the channel at intervals not exceeding 386.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- 3 m (10 ft) and within 900 mm (3 ft) of each outlet box, cabinet, struction specifications for surface metal raceways and associ- junction box, or other channel raceway termination. ated fittings. (B) Suspension Mount. Strut-type channel raceways shall be 386.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply permitted to be suspension mounted in air with identified meth- within this article and throughout the Code. ods at intervals not to exceed 3 m (10 ft) and within 900 mm (3 ft) of channel raceway terminations and ends. Surface Metal Raceway.

A metal raceway that is intended to be mounted to the surface of a structure, with associated couplings, 384.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be permitted connectors, boxes, and fittings for the installation of electrical in raceways that are accessible after installation by having a conductors. removable cover. The conductors, including splices and taps, shall not fill the raceway to more than 75 percent of its area 386.6 Listing Requirements. Surface metal raceway and at that point. All splices and taps shall be made by approved associated fittings shall be listed. methods. Part II. Installation 384.60 Grounding. Strut-type channel raceway enclosures 386.10 Uses Permitted. The use of surface metal raceways shall providing a transition to or from other wiring methods shall be permitted in the following: have a means for connecting an equipment grounding conduc- tor. Strut-type channel raceways shall be permitted as an equip- (1) In dry locations. ment grounding conductor in accordance with 250.118(13). (2) In Class I, Division 2 hazardous (classified) locations as

Where a snap-fit metal cover for strut-type channel raceways permitted in 501.10(B)(3). is used to achieve electrical continuity in accordance with the (3) Under raised floors, as permitted in 645.5(E)(2). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–265

386.12 ARTICLE 388 — SURFACE NONMETALLIC RACEWAYS (4) Extension through walls and floors. Surface metal raceway compartments identified by stamping, imprinting, or color cod- shall be permitted to pass transversely through dry walls, ing of the interior finish. dry partitions, and dry floors if the length passing through is unbroken. Access to the conductors shall be maintained on Part III. Construction Specifications both sides of the wall, partition, or floor. 386.100 Construction. Surface metal raceways shall be of 386.12 Uses Not Permitted. Surface metal raceways shall not such construction as will distinguish them from other raceways. be used in the following: Surface metal raceways and their elbows, couplings, and simi- lar fittings shall be designed so that the sections can be electri- (1) Where subject to severe physical damage, unless otherwise cally and mechanically coupled together and installed without approved subjecting the wires to abrasion. (2) Where the voltage is 300 volts or more between conductors,

unless the metal has a thickness of not less than 1.02 mm Where covers and accessories of nonmetallic materials are (0.040 in.) nominal used on surface metal raceways, they shall be identified for (3) Where subject to corrosive vapors such use. (4) In hoistways 386.120 Marking. Each length of surface metal raceway (5) Where concealed, except as permitted in 386.10 shall be clearly and durably identified as required in the first sentence of 110.21(A). 386.21 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for which the raceway is designed shall be installed in surface metal raceway. ARTICLE 388 ∆ 386.22 Number of Conductors or Cables. The number of Surface Nonmetallic Raceways conductors or cables installed in surface metal raceway shall not be greater than the number for which the raceway is designed. Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such use is not Part I. General prohibited by the respective cable articles. 388.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- The adjustment factors of 310.15(C)(1) shall not apply to con-

struction specifications for surface nonmetallic raceways and ductors installed in surface metal raceways where all of the fol- associated fittings. lowing conditions are met: 388.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply 2 (1) The cross-sectional area of the raceway exceeds 2500 mm within this article and throughout the Code. (4 in.2). (2) The current-carrying conductors do not exceed 30 in number. Surface Nonmetallic Raceway. A nonmetallic raceway that is (3) The sum of the cross-sectional areas of all contained con- intended to be mounted to the surface of a structure, with associ- ductors does not exceed 20 percent of the interior cross- ated couplings, connectors, boxes, and fittings for the installa- sectional area of the surface metal raceway. tion of electrical conductors. 386.30 Securing and Supporting. Surface metal raceways and 388.6 Listing Requirements. Surface nonmetallic raceway associated fittings shall be supported in accordance with the and associated fittings shall be listed. manufacturer’s installation instructions. Part II. Installation

386.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be permitted in 388.10 Uses Permitted. Surface nonmetallic raceways shall be surface metal raceways having a removable cover that is accessi- permitted as follows: ble after installation. The conductors, including splices and taps, shall not fill the raceway to more than 75 percent of its area at that (1) The use of surface nonmetallic raceways shall be permitted point. Splices and taps in surface metal raceways without remov- in dry locations. able covers shall be made only in boxes. All splices and taps shall (2) Extension through walls and floors shall be permitted. Sur- be made by approved methods. face nonmetallic raceway shall be permitted to pass trans- versely through dry walls, dry partitions, and dry floors if the Taps of Type FC cable installed in surface metal raceway shall length passing through is unbroken. Access to the conduc- be made in accordance with 322.56(B). tors shall be maintained on both sides of the wall, partition, 386.60 Grounding. Surface metal raceway enclosures provid- or floor.

ing a transition from other wiring methods shall have a means 388.12 Uses Not Permitted. Surface nonmetallic raceways for connecting an equipment grounding conductor. shall not be used in the following: 386.70 Combination Raceways. When combination surface (1) Where concealed, except as permitted in 388.10(2) metal raceways are used for both signaling and for lighting and (2) Where subject to severe physical damage power circuits, the different systems shall be run in separate 70–266 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 390 — UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS 390.15 (3) Where the voltage is 300 volts or more between conductors, 388.120 Marking. Surface nonmetallic raceways that have lim- unless listed for higher voltage ited smoke-producing characteristics shall be permitted to be so (4) In hoistways identified. Each length of surface nonmetallic raceway shall be (5) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as permitted clearly and durably identified as required in the first sentence by other articles in this Code of 110.21(A). (6) Where subject to ambient temperatures exceeding those for which the nonmetallic raceway is listed (7) For conductors whose insulation temperature limitations ARTICLE 390 would exceed those for which the nonmetallic raceway is Underfloor Raceways listed 388.21 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for N Part I. General which the raceway is designed shall be installed in surface non- metallic raceway. 390.1 Scope. This article covers the use and installation requirements for underfloor raceways. 388.22 Number of Conductors or Cables. The number of

conductors or cables installed in surface nonmetallic raceway 390.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply shall not be greater than the number for which the raceway is within this article and throughout the Code. designed. Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such Underfloor Raceway. A raceway and associated components use is not prohibited by the respective cable articles. designed and intended for installation beneath or flush with the 388.30 Securing and Supporting. Surface nonmetallic race- surface of a floor for the installation of cables and electrical ways and associated fittings shall be supported in accordance conductors. • with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. N Part II. Installation 388.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be permit- ted in surface nonmetallic raceways having a cover capable of 390.10 Uses Permitted. The installation of underfloor race- being opened in place that is accessible after installation. The ways shall be permitted beneath the surface of concrete or other

conductors, including splices and taps, shall not fill the raceway flooring material or in office occupancies where laid flush with to more than 75 percent of its area at that point. Splices and taps the concrete floor and covered with linoleum or equivalent floor in surface nonmetallic raceways without covers capable of being covering. opened in place shall be made only in boxes. All splices and taps 390.12 Uses Not Permitted. Underfloor raceways shall not shall be made by approved methods. be installed (1) where subject to corrosive vapors or (2) in any 388.60 Grounding. Where equipment grounding is required, hazardous (classified) locations, except as permitted by 504.20 a separate equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in and in Class I, Division 2 locations as permitted in 501.10(B)(3). the raceway. Unless made of a material approved for the condition or unless corrosion protection approved for the condition is provided, 388.70 Combination Raceways. When combination surface metal underfloor raceways, junction boxes, and fittings shall

nonmetallic raceways are used both for signaling and for light- not be installed in concrete or in areas subject to severe cor- ing and power circuits, the different systems shall be run in rosive influences. separate compartments identified by stamping, imprinting, or color coding of the interior finish. 390.15 Covering. Raceway coverings shall comply with 390.15(A) through (D). Part III. Construction Specifications (A) Raceways Not over 100 mm (4 in.) Wide. Half-round 388.100 Construction. Surface nonmetallic raceways shall be and flat-top raceways not over 100 mm (4 in.) in width shall of such construction as will distinguish them from other race- have not less than 20 mm (3 ⁄4 in.) of concrete or wood above ways. Surface nonmetallic raceways and their elbows, couplings, the raceway. and similar fittings shall be designed so that the sections can be Exception: As permitted in 390.15(C) and (D) for flat-top mechanically coupled together and installed without subjecting raceways. the wires to abrasion. (B) Raceways over 100 mm (4 in.) Wide But Not over

Surface nonmetallic raceways and fittings are made of suit- 200 mm (8 in.) Wide. Flat-top raceways over 100 mm (4 in.) able nonmetallic material that is resistant to moisture and but not over 200 mm (8 in.) wide with a minimum of 25 mm chemical atmospheres. It shall also be flame retardant, resistant (1 in.) spacing between raceways shall be covered with concrete to impact and crushing, resistant to distortion from heat under to a depth of not less than 25 mm (1 in.). Raceways spaced less conditions likely to be encountered in service, and resistant to than 25 mm (1 in.) apart shall be covered with concrete to a low-temperature effects. 1 depth of 38 mm (1 ⁄2 in.). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–267

390.20 ARTICLE 392 — CABLE TRAYS (C) Trench-Type Raceways Flush with Concrete. Trench- concrete. Junction boxes used with metal raceways shall be type flush raceways with removable covers shall be permitted to metal and shall be electrically continuous with the raceways. be laid flush with the floor surface. Such approved raceways shall 390.75 Inserts. Inserts shall be leveled and sealed to prevent be designed so that the cover plates provide adequate mechanical the entrance of concrete. Inserts used with metal raceways shall protection and rigidity equivalent to junction box covers. be metal and shall be electrically continuous with the raceway. (D) Other Raceways Flush with Concrete. In office occu- Inserts set in or on fiber raceways before the floor is laid shall be pancies, approved metal flat-top raceways, if not over 100 mm mechanically secured to the raceway. Inserts set in fiber raceways (4 in.) in width, shall be permitted to be laid flush with the after the floor is laid shall be screwed into the raceway. When cut-

concrete floor surface, provided they are covered with substan- ting through the raceway wall and setting inserts, chips and other 1 tial linoleum that is not less than 1.6 mm ( ⁄16 in.) thick or with dirt shall not be allowed to remain in the raceway, and tools shall equivalent floor covering. Where more than one and not more be used that are designed so as to prevent the tool from entering than three single raceways are each installed flush with the con- the raceway and damaging conductors that may be in place. crete, they shall be contiguous with each other and joined to ∆ 390.76 Connections to Cabinets and Wall Outlets. Connec- form a rigid assembly. tions from underfloor raceways to distribution centers and wall 390.20 Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than that for outlets shall be made by approved fittings or by any of the wir- which the raceway is designed shall be installed in underfloor ing methods in Chapter 3, where installed in accordance with raceways. the respective articles. 390.22 Maximum Number of Conductors in Raceway. The

combined cross-sectional area of all conductors or cables shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the ARTICLE 392 raceway. Cable Trays ∆ 390.23 Ampacity of Conductors. The ampacity adjustment factors in 310.15(C) shall apply to conductors installed in under- Part I. General floor raceways. ∆ 392.1 Scope. This article covers cable tray systems, including 390.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made ladder, ventilated trough, ventilated channel, solid bottom, and only in junction boxes. other similar structures. For the purposes of this section, so-called loop wiring (con- Informational Note: For further information on cable tinuous, unbroken conductor connecting the individual outlets) trays, see ANSI/NEMA–VE 1-2017, Metal Cable Tray shall not be considered to be a splice or tap. Systems, and NECA/NEMA 105-2015, Standard for Exception: Splices and taps shall be permitted in trench-type Installing Metal Cable Tray Systems. flush raceway having a removable cover that is accessible after 392.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply

installation. The conductors, including splices and taps, shall within this article and throughout the Code. not fill more than 75 percent of the raceway area at that point. Cable Tray System. A unit or assembly of units or sections 390.57 Discontinued Outlets. When an outlet is abandoned, and associated fittings forming a structural system used to discontinued, or removed, the sections of circuit conductors sup- securely fasten or support cables and raceways. plying the outlet shall be removed from the raceway. No splices or reinsulated conductors, such as would be the case with aban- Part II. Installation doned outlets on loop wiring, shall be allowed in raceways. 392.10 Uses Permitted. Cable tray shall be permitted to be 390.70 Laid in Straight Lines. Underfloor raceways shall be used as a support system for wiring methods containing service laid so that a straight line from the center of one junction box to conductors, feeders, branch circuits, communications circuits, the center of the next junction box coincides with the centerline control circuits, and signaling circuits.

Single insulated con- of the raceway system. Raceways shall be firmly held in place ductors shall be permitted in cable tray only when installed in to prevent disturbing this alignment during construction. accordance with 392.10(B)(1). Cable tray installations shall not 390.71 Markers at Ends. A suitable marker shall be installed be limited to industrial establishments. Where exposed to direct at or near each end of each straight run of raceways to locate rays of the sun, insulated conductors and jacketed cables shall the last insert. be identified as being sunlight resistant. Cable trays and their associated fittings shall be identified for the intended use. 390.73 Dead Ends. Dead ends of raceways shall be closed. (A) Wiring Methods. The wiring methods in Table 392.10(A) 390.74 Junction Boxes. Junction boxes shall be leveled to the shall be permitted to be installed in cable tray systems under the floor grade and sealed to prevent the free entrance of water or conditions described in their respective articles and sections. 70–268 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 392 — CABLE TRAYS 392.18 Table 392.10(A) Wiring Methods (c) Single conductors used as equipment grounding con- ductors shall be insulated, covered, or bare, and they shall be Wiring Method Article 4 AWG or larger. (2) Single- and Multiconductor Medium Voltage Cables. Armored cable: Type AC 320 CATV cables 820 Single- and multiconductor medium voltage cables shall be Class 2 and Class 3 cables 725 Type MV cable. Single conductors shall be installed in accor- Communications cables 800 dance with 392.10(B)(1). Communications raceways 725, 770, and 800 (C) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Cable trays in hazard- Electrical metallic tubing: Type EMT 358 ous (classified) locations shall contain only the cable types Electrical nonmetallic tubing: Type ENT 362 and raceways permitted by other articles in this Code. Fire alarm cables 760 Flexible metal conduit: Type FMC 348 (D) Nonmetallic Cable Tray. In addition to the uses permit- Flexible metallic tubing: Type FMT 360 ted elsewhere in 392.10, nonmetallic cable tray shall be permit- Instrumentation tray cable: Type ITC 727

ted in corrosive areas and in areas requiring voltage isolation. Intermediate metal conduit: Type IMC 342 Liquidtight flexible metal conduit: Type LFMC 350 (E) Airfield Lighting Cable Tray. In airports where main- Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit: 356 tenance and supervision conditions ensure that only qualified Type LFNC persons can access, install, or service the cable, airfield lighting Metal-clad cable: Type MC 330 cable used in series circuits that are rated up to 5000 volts and Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable: Type MI 332 Network-powered broadband communications cables 830 are powered by constant current regulators shall be permitted to Nonmetallic-sheathed cable: Types NM, NMC, 334 be installed in cable trays. and NMS Non–power-limited fire alarm cable 760 Informational Note: Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Optical fiber cables 770 Advisory Circulars (ACs) provide additional practices Other factory-assembled, multiconductor control, signal, and methods for airport lighting. or power cables that are specifically approved for

installation in cable trays 392.12 Uses Not Permitted. Cable tray systems shall not be Power and control tray cable: Type TC 336 used in hoistways or where subject to severe physical damage. Power-limited fire alarm cable 760 392.18 Cable Tray Installation. Power-limited tray cable 725 Rigid metal conduit: Type RMC 344 (A) Complete System. Cable trays shall be installed as a Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit: Type PVC 352 complete system. Field bends or modifications shall be so made Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit: 355 that the electrical continuity of the cable tray system and support Type RTRC Service-entrance cable: Types SE and USE 338 for the cables is maintained. Cable tray systems shall be permit- Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable: 340 ted to have mechanically discontinuous segments between cable Type UF tray runs or between cable tray runs and equipment. (B) Completed Before Installation. Each run of cable tray shall be completed before the installation of cables. (B) In Industrial Establishments. The wiring methods in

Table 392.10(A) shall be permitted to be used in any industrial (C) Covers. In portions of runs where additional protection establishment under the conditions described in their respec- is required, covers or enclosures providing the required protec- tive articles. In industrial establishments only, where conditions tion shall be of a material that is compatible with the cable tray. of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified per- (D) Through Partitions and Walls. Cable trays shall be per- sons service the installed cable tray system, any of the cables mitted to extend transversely through partitions and walls or in 392.10(B)(1) and (B)(2) shall be permitted to be installed vertically through platforms and floors in wet or dry locations in ladder, ventilated trough, solid bottom, or ventilated channel where the installations, complete with installed cables, are cable trays. made in accordance with the requirements of 300.21. ∆ (1) Single-Conductor Cables. Single-conductor cables shall (E) Exposed and Accessible. Cable trays shall be exposed and

be permitted to be installed in accordance with (B)(1)(a) accessible, except as permitted by 392.18(D). through (B)(1)(c). (F) Adequate Access. Sufficient space shall be provided (a) Single-conductor cables shall be 1/0 AWG or larger and and maintained about cable trays to permit adequate access for shall be of a type listed and marked on the surface for use in installing and maintaining the cables. cable trays. Where 1/0 AWG through 4/0 AWG single-conductor cables are installed in ladder cable tray, the maximum allowable (G) Raceways, Cables, Boxes, and Conduit Bodies Sup- rung spacing for the ladder cable tray shall be 225 mm (9 in.). ported from Cable Tray Systems. In industrial facilities where (b) Welding cables shall comply with Article 630, Part IV. conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only 2022 California Electrical Code 70–269

392.20 ARTICLE 392 — CABLE TRAYS qualified persons service the installation and where the cable (D) Single Conductors. Where any of the single conduc- tray systems are designed and installed to support the load, such tors installed in ladder or ventilated trough cable trays are 1/0 systems shall be permitted to support raceways and cables, and through 4/0 AWG, all single conductors shall be installed in a boxes and conduit bodies covered in 314.1. For raceways ter- single layer. Conductors that are bound together to comprise minating at the tray, a listed cable tray clamp or adapter shall each circuit group shall be permitted to be installed in other be used to securely fasten the raceway to the cable tray system. than a single layer. Additional supporting and securing of the raceway shall be in 392.22 Number of Conductors or Cables. accordance with the requirements of the appropriate raceway article. For raceways or cables running parallel to and attached (A) Number of Multiconductor Cables, Rated 2000 Volts

to the bottom or side of a cable tray system, fastening and sup- or Less, in Cable Trays. The number of multiconductor porting shall be in accordance with the requirements of the cables, rated 2000 volts or less, permitted in a single cable tray appropriate raceway or cable article. shall not exceed the requirements of this section. The conduc- tor sizes shall apply to both aluminum and copper conductors. For boxes and conduit bodies attached to the bottom or side Where dividers are used, fill calculations shall apply to each of a cable tray system, fastening and supporting shall be in divided section of the cable tray. accordance with the requirements of 314.23. (1) Ladder or Ventilated Trough Cable Trays Containing (H) Marking. Cable trays containing conductors operating Any Mixture of Cables. Where ladder or ventilated trough over 600 volts shall have a permanent, legible warning notice cable trays contain multiconductor power or lighting cables, or carrying the wording “DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — any mixture of multiconductor power, lighting, control, and sig-

KEEP AWAY” placed in a readily visible position on all cable nal cables, the maximum number of cables shall conform to the trays, with the spacing of warning notices not to exceed 3 m following: (10 ft). The danger marking(s) or labels shall comply with (a) Where all of the cables are 4/0 AWG or larger, the sum 110.21(B). of the diameters of all cables shall not exceed the cable tray Exception: Where not accessible (as applied to equipment), width, and the cables shall be installed in a single layer. Where the in industrial establishments where the conditions of mainte- cable ampacity is determined according to 392.80(A)(1)(c), nance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons ser- the cable tray width shall not be less than the sum of the diam- vice the installation, cable tray system warning notices shall eters of the cables and the sum of the required spacing widths be located where necessary for the installation to ensure safe between the cables. maintenance and operation. (b) Where all of the cables are smaller than 4/0 AWG, the sum

of the cross-sectional areas of all cables shall not exceed the max- 392.20 Cable and Conductor Installation. imum allowable cable fill area in Column 1 of Table 392.22(A) (A) Multiconductor Cables Operating at 1000 Volts or for the appropriate cable tray width. Less. Multiconductor cables operating at 1000 volts or less shall (c) Where 4/0 AWG or larger cables are installed in the same be permitted to be installed in the same tray. cable tray with cables smaller than 4/0 AWG, the sum of the (B) Cables Operating at Over 1000 Volts. Cables operating cross-sectional areas of all cables smaller than 4/0 AWG shall not at over 1000 volts and those operating at 1000 volts or less exceed the maximum allowable fill area resulting from the calcu- installed in the same cable tray shall comply with either of the lation in Column 2 of Table 392.22(A) for the appropriate cable following: tray width. The 4/0 AWG and larger cables shall be installed in a single layer, and no other cables shall be placed on them. (1) The cables operating at over 1000 volts are Type MC.

(2) The cables operating at over 1000 volts are separated from (2) Ladder or Ventilated Trough Cable Trays Containing the cables operating at 1000 volts or less by a solid fixed Multiconductor Control and/or Signal Cables Only. Where barrier of a material compatible with the cable tray. a ladder or ventilated trough cable tray having a usable inside depth of 150 mm (6 in.) or less contains multiconductor control (C) Connected in Parallel. Where single conductor cables and/or signal cables only, the sum of the cross-sectional areas comprising each phase, neutral, or grounded conductor of an of all cables at any cross section shall not exceed 50 percent alternating-current circuit are connected in parallel as permitted of the interior cross-sectional area of the cable tray. A depth of in 310.10(G), the conductors shall be installed in groups con- 150 mm (6 in.) shall be used to calculate the allowable interior sisting of not more than one conductor per phase, neutral, or cross-sectional area of any cable tray that has a usable inside

grounded conductor to prevent current imbalance in the paral- depth of more than 150 mm (6 in.). leled conductors due to inductive reactance. (3) Solid Bottom Cable Trays Containing Any Mixture of Single conductors shall be securely bound in circuit groups Cables. Where solid bottom cable trays contain multiconduc- to prevent excessive movement due to fault-current magnetic tor power or lighting cables, or any mixture of multiconductor forces unless single conductors are cabled together, such as tri- power, lighting, control, and signal cables, the maximum num- plexed assemblies. ber of cables shall conform to the following: 70–270 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 392 — CABLE TRAYS 392.22 Table 392.22(A) Allowable Cable Fill Area for Multiconductor Cables in Ladder, Ventilated Trough, or Solid Bottom Cable Trays for Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less Maximum Allowable Fill Area for Multiconductor Cables Ladder or Ventilated Trough or Wire Mesh Cable Trays, 392.22(A)(1) Solid Bottom Cable Trays, 392.22(A)(3) Column 1 Column 2a Column 3 Column 4a Inside Width Applicable for Applicable for Applicable for Applicable for of Cable Tray 392.22(A)(1)(b) Only 392.22(A)(1)(c) Only 392.22(A)(3)(b) Only 392.22(A)(3)(c) Only mm in. mm2 in.2 mm2 in.2 mm2 in.2 mm2 in.2 50 2.0 1,500 2.5 1,500 – (30 Sd)b 2.5 – (1.2 Sd)b 1,200 2.0 1,200 – (25 Sd) b 2.0 – Sdb 100 4.0 3,000 4.5 3,000 – (30 Sd)b 4.5 – (1.2 Sd) 2,300 3.5 2,300 – (25 Sd) 3.5 – Sd 150 6.0 4,500 7.0 4,500 – (30 Sd)b 7 – (1.2 Sd) 3,500 5.5 3,500 – (25 Sd)b 5.5 – Sd 200 8.0 6,000 9.5 6,000 – (30 Sd)b 9.5 – (1.2 Sd) 4,500 7.0 4,500 – (25 Sd) 7.0 – Sd 225 9.0 6,800 10.5 6,800 – (30 Sd) 10.5 – (1.2 Sd) 5,100 8.0 5,100 – (25 Sd) 8.0 – Sd

300 12.0 9,000 14.0 9,000 – (30 Sd) 14 – (1.2 Sd) 7,100 11.0 7,100 – (25 Sd) 11.0 – Sd 400 16.0 12,000 18.5 12,000 – (30 Sd) 18.5 – (1.2 Sd) 9,400 14.5 9,400 – (25 Sd) 14.5 – Sd 450 18.0 13,500 21.0 13,500 – (30 Sd) 21 – (1.2 Sd) 10,600 16.5 10,600 – (25 Sd) 16.5 – Sd 500 20.0 15,000 23.5 15,000 – (30 Sd) 23.5 – (1.2 Sd) 11,800 18.5 11,800 – (25 Sd) 18.5 – Sd 600 24.0 18,000 28.0 18,000 – (30 Sd) 28 – (1.2 Sd) 14,200 22.0 14,200 – (25 Sd) 22.0 – Sd 750 30.0 22,500 35.0 22,500 – (30 Sd) 35 – (1.2 Sd) 17,700 27.5 17,700 – (25 Sd) 27.5 – Sd 900 36.0 27,000 42.0 27,000 – (30 Sd) 42 – (1.2 Sd) 21,300 33.0 21,300 – (25 Sd) 33.0 – Sd aThe maximum allowable fill areas in Columns 2 and 4 shall be calculated. For example, the maximum allowable fill in mm2 for a 150-mm wide cable tray in Column 2 shall be 4500 minus (30 multiplied by Sd) [the maximum allowable fill, in square inches, for a 6-in. wide cable tray in Column 2 shall be 7 minus (1.2 multiplied by Sd)].

bThe term Sd in Columns 2 and 4 is equal to the sum of the diameters, in mm, of all cables 107.2 mm (in inches, of all 4/0 AWG) and larger multiconductor cables in the same cable tray with smaller cables. (a) Where all of the cables are 4/0 AWG or larger, the sum Table 392.22(A)(5) Allowable Cable Fill Area for Multiconductor of the diameters of all cables shall not exceed 90 percent of the Cables in Ventilated Channel Cable Trays for Cables Rated cable tray width, and the cables shall be installed in a single 2000 Volts or Less layer. Maximum Allowable Fill Area (b) Where all of the cables are smaller than 4/0 AWG, the sum for Multiconductor Cables of the cross-sectional areas of all cables shall not exceed the max- imum allowable cable fill area in Column 3 of Table 392.22(A) Column 2 for the appropriate cable tray width. Inside Width Column 1 More Than of Cable Tray One Cable One Cable (c) Where 4/0 AWG or larger cables are installed in the same cable tray with cables smaller than 4/0 AWG, the sum of mm in. mm2 in.2 mm2 in.2

the cross-sectional areas of all cables smaller than 4/0 AWG 75 3 1500 2.3 850 1.3 shall not exceed the maximum allowable fill area resulting 100 4 2900 4.5 1600 2.5 from the computation in Column 4 of Table 392.22(A) for the 150 6 4500 7.0 2450 3.8 appropriate cable tray width. The 4/0 AWG and larger cables shall be installed in a single layer, and no other cables shall be placed on them. (5) Ventilated Channel Cable Trays Containing Multicon- (4) Solid Bottom Cable Tray Containing Multiconductor ductor Cables of Any Type. Where ventilated channel cable Control and/or Signal Cables Only. Where a solid bottom trays contain multiconductor cables of any type, the following cable tray having a usable inside depth of 150 mm (6 in.) or less shall apply: contains multiconductor control and/or signal cables only, the (a) Where only one multiconductor cable is installed, the sum of the cross sectional areas of all cables at any cross section cross-sectional area shall not exceed the value specified in Col-

shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area umn 1 of Table 392.22(A)(5). of the cable tray. A depth of 150 mm (6 in.) shall be used to cal- (b) Where more than one multiconductor cable is installed, culate the allowable interior cross-sectional area of any cable the sum of the cross-sectional area of all cables shall not exceed tray that has a usable inside depth of more than 150 mm (6 in.). the value specified in Column 2 of Table 392.22(A)(5). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–271

392.22 ARTICLE 392 — CABLE TRAYS (6) Solid Channel Cable Trays Containing Multiconductor single conductors, or conductor assemblies, shall be evenly dis- Cables of Any Type. Where solid channel cable trays contain tributed across the cable tray. The conductor sizes shall apply to multiconductor cables of any type, the following shall apply: both aluminum and copper conductors. (a) Where only one multiconductor cable is installed, the (1) Ladder or Ventilated Trough Cable Trays. Where ladder cross-sectional area of the cable shall not exceed the value or ventilated trough cable trays contain single-conductor cables, specified in Column 1 of Table 392.22(A)(6). the maximum number of single conductors shall conform to the (b) Where more than one multiconductor cable is installed, following: the sum of the cross-sectional area of all cable shall not exceed (a) Where all of the cables are 1000 kcmil or larger, the sum the value specified in Column 2 of Table 392.22(A)(6). of the diameters of all single-conductor cables shall not exceed

(B) Number of Single-Conductor Cables, Rated 2000 Volts the cable tray width, and the cables shall be installed in a single or Less, in Cable Trays. The number of single conductor layer. Conductors that are bound together to comprise each cir- cables, rated 2000 volts or less, permitted in a single cable tray cuit group shall be permitted to be installed in other than a single section shall not exceed the requirements of this section. The layer. (b) Where all of the cables are from 250 kcmil through 900 kcmil, the sum of the cross-sectional areas of all single- conductor cables shall not exceed the maximum allowable cable Table 392.22(A)(6) Allowable Cable Fill Area for Multiconductor fill area in Column 1 of Table 392.22(B)(1) for the appropriate Cables in Solid Channel Cable Trays for Cables Rated 2000 Volts cable tray width. or Less (c) Where 1000 kcmil or larger single-conductor cables are installed in the same cable tray with single-conductor cables Inside Width of Column 1 Column 2 More smaller than 1000 kcmil, the sum of the cross-sectional areas

Cable Tray One Cable Than One Cable of all cables smaller than 1000 kcmil shall not exceed the maxi- mm in. mm2 in.2 mm2 in.2 mum allowable fill area resulting from the computation in Col- umn 2 of Table 392.22(B)(1) for the appropriate cable tray 50 2 850 1.3 500 0.8 width. 75 3 1300 2.0 700 1.1 (d) Where any of the single conductor cables are 1/0 through 100 4 2400 3.7 1400 2.1 4/0 AWG, the sum of the diameters of all single conductor cables 150 6 3600 5.5 2100 3.2 shall not exceed the cable tray width. Table 392.22(B)(1) Allowable Cable Fill Area for Single-Conductor Cables in Ladder, Ventilated Trough, or Wire Mesh Cable Trays for Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less Maximum Allowable Fill Area for Single-Conductor Cables in Ladder, Ventilated Trough, or Wire Mesh Cable Trays Column 1 Column 2 a Inside Width of Cable Tray Applicable for 392.22(B)(1)(b) Only Applicable for 392.22(B)(1)(c) Only mm in. mm2 in.2 mm2 in.2 50 2 1,400 2.0 1,400 – (28 Sd) b 2.0 – (1.1 Sd)b 100 4 2,800 4.5 2,800 – (28 Sd) 4.5 – (1.1 Sd) 150 6 4,200 6.5 4,200 – (28 Sd) b 6.5 – (1.1 Sd)b

200 8 5,600 8.5 5,600 – (28 Sd) 8.5 – (1.1 Sd) 225 9 6,100 9.5 6,100 – (28 Sd) 9.5 – (1.1 Sd) 300 12 8,400 13.0 8,400 – (28 Sd) 13.0 – (1.1 Sd) 400 16 11,200 17.5 11,200 – (28 Sd) 17.5 – (1.1 Sd) 450 18 12,600 19.5 12,600 – (28 Sd) 19.5 – (1.1 Sd) 500 20 14,000 21.5 14,000 – (28 Sd) 21.5 – (1.1 Sd) 600 24 16,800 26.0 16,800 – (28 Sd) 26.0 – (1.1 Sd) 750 30 21,000 32.5 21,000 – (28 Sd) 32.5 – (1.1 Sd) 900 36 25,200 39.0 25,200 – (28 Sd) 39.0 – (1.1 Sd) aThe maximum allowable fill areas in Column 2 shall be calculated. For example, the maximum allowable fill, in mm2, for a 150-mm wide cable tray in Column 2 shall be 4200 minus (28 multiplied by Sd) [the maximum allowable fill, in square inches, for a 6-in. wide cable tray in Column 2 shall be 6.5 minus (1.1 multiplied by Sd)]. bThe term Sd in Column 2 is equal to the sum of the diameters, in mm, of all cables 507 mm2 (in inches, of all 1000 kcmil) and larger single-conductor cables in the same cable tray with small cables. 70–272 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 392 — CABLE TRAYS 392.60 (2) Ventilated Channel Cable Trays. Where 50 mm (2 in.), shall be permitted to enter enclosures where they are termi- 75 mm (3 in.), 100 mm (4 in.), or 150 mm (6 in.) wide ventilated nated through nonflexible bushed conduit or tubing installed for channel cable trays contain single-conductor cables, the sum their protection provided they are secured at the point of transi- of the diameters of all single conductors shall not exceed the tion from the cable tray and the conduit or tubing is sealed at the inside width of the channel. outer end using an approved means so as to prevent debris from entering the equipment through the conduit or tubing. (C) Number of Type MV and Type MC Cables (2001 Volts or Over) in Cable Trays. The number of cables rated N (B) Flanged Connections. Individual conductors or multi- 2001 volts or over permitted in a single cable tray shall not conductor cables with entirely nonmetallic sheaths shall be exceed the requirements of this section. permitted to enter enclosures through openings associated

The sum of the diameters of single-conductor and multicon- with flanges from cable trays where the cable tray is attached ductor cables shall not exceed the cable tray width, and the cables to the flange and the flange is mounted directly to the equip- shall be installed in a single layer. Where single conductor cables ment. The openings shall be made such that the conductors are triplexed, quadruplexed, or bound together in circuit groups, are protected from abrasion and the opening shall be sealed or the sum of the diameters of the single conductors shall not exceed covered to prevent debris from entering the enclosure through the cable tray width, and these groups shall be installed in single the opening. layer arrangement. Informational Note: One method of preventing debris 392.30 Securing and Supporting. from entering the enclosure is to seal the outer end of the raceway or the opening with duct seal. (A) Cable Trays. Cable trays shall be supported at intervals in accordance with the installation instructions. 392.56 Cable Splices. Cable splices made and insulated by

approved methods shall be permitted to be located within a (B) Cables and Conductors. Cables and conductors shall be cable tray, provided they are accessible. Splices shall be permit- secured to and supported by the cable tray system in accor- ted to project above the side rails where not subject to physical dance with (1), (2), (3), and (4) as applicable: damage. (1) In other than horizontal runs, the cables shall be fastened 392.60 Grounding and Bonding. securely to transverse members of the cable tray. (2) Supports shall be provided to prevent stress on cables where ∆ (A) Metal Cable Trays. Metal cable trays shall be permitted they enter raceways from cable tray systems. to be used as equipment grounding conductors where continu- (3) The system shall provide for the support of cables and race- ous maintenance and supervision ensure that qualified persons way wiring methods in accordance with their corresponding service the installed cable tray system and the cable tray com- articles. Where cable trays support individual conductors plies with this section.

Metal cable trays that support electri- or multiconductor cables and where the conductors or cal conductors shall be grounded as required for conductor multiconductor cables pass from one cable tray to another, enclosures in accordance with 250.96 and Part IV of Article 250. or from a cable tray to raceway(s) or from a cable tray to Metal cable trays containing only non-power conductors shall equipment where the conductors are terminated, the distance be electrically continuous through approved connections or the between the cable trays or between the cable tray and the use of a bonding jumper. raceway(s) or the equipment shall not exceed 1.8 m (6 ft). Informational Note: Examples of non-power conductors The conductors shall be secured to the cable tray(s) at the include nonconductive optical fiber cables and Class 2 transition, and they shall be protected, by guarding or by and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited location, from physical damage. circuits. (4) Cable ties shall be listed and identified for the application and for securement and support.

(B) Steel or Aluminum Cable Tray Systems. Steel or alumi- num cable tray systems shall be permitted to be used as equipment N 392.44 Expansion Splice Plates. Expansion splice plates grounding conductors, provided all the following requirements for cable trays shall be provided where necessary to compensate are met: for thermal expansion and contraction. (1) The cable tray sections and fittings are identified as an 392.46 Bushed Conduit and Tubing. A box shall not be equipment grounding conductor. required where cables or conductors are installed in bushed con- (2) The minimum cross-sectional area of cable trays conform duit and tubing used for support or for protection against physical to the requirements in Table 392.60(B). damage or where conductors or cables transition to a raceway (3) All cable tray sections and fittings are legibly and durably wiring method from the cable tray. Conductors shall be permitted marked to show the cross-sectional area of metal in channel to enter equipment in accordance with 392.46(A) or (B). cable trays, or cable trays of one-piece construction, and

N (A) Through Bushed Conduit or Tubing. Individual conduc- the total cross-sectional area of both side rails for ladder or tors or multiconductor cables with entirely nonmetallic sheaths trough cable trays. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–273

392.80 ARTICLE 392 — CABLE TRAYS ∆ Table 392.60(B) Metal Area Requirements for Cable Trays Used (c) Where multiconductor cables are installed in a single as Equipment Grounding Conductor layer in uncovered trays, with a maintained spacing of not less than one cable diameter between cables, the ampacity shall not Maximum Fuse Ampere Minimum Cross-Sectional exceed the ambient temperature-corrected ampacities of multi- Rating, Circuit Breaker Area of Metal* conductor cables, with not more than three insulated conduc- Ampere Trip Setting, or tors rated 0 through 2000 volts in free air, in accordance with Circuit Breaker Protective Steel Cable Aluminum Relay Ampere Trip Setting Trays Cable Trays 310.14(B). for Ground-Fault Protection Informational Note: See Informative Annex B, Table of Any Cable Circuit in the Cable Tray System mm2 in.2 mm2 in.2 B.2(3). ∆ (2) Single-Conductor Cables. The ampacity of single- 60 129 0.20 129 0.20 conductor cables shall be as permitted by 310.14(A)(2). The 100 258 0.40 129 0.20

200 451.5 0.70 129 0.20 adjustment factors of 310.15(C)(1) shall not apply to the ampac- 400 645 1.00 258 0.40 ity of cables in cable trays. The ampacity of single-conductor † 600 967.5 1.50 258 0.40 cables, or single conductors cabled together (triplexed, quadru- 1000 — — 387 0.60 plexed, and so forth), nominally rated 2000 volts or less, shall 1200 — — 645 1.00 comply with the following: 1600 — — 967.5 1.50 † (a) Where installed according to the requirements of 2000 — — 1290 2.00 392.22(B), the ampacities for 600 kcmil and larger single- *Total cross-sectional area of both side rails for ladder or trough cable trays; conductor cables in uncovered cable trays shall not exceed or the minimum cross-sectional area of metal in channel cable trays or cable 75 percent of the ampacities in Table 310.17 and Table 310.19. trays of one-piece construction. †Steel cable trays shall not be used as equipment grounding conductors for Where cable trays are continuously covered for more than 1.8 m circuits with ground-fault protection above 600 amperes.

Aluminum cable (6 ft) with solid unventilated covers, the ampacities for 600 kcmil trays shall not be used as equipment grounding conductors for circuits with and larger cables shall not exceed 70 percent of the ampacities in ground-fault protection above 2000 amperes. Table 310.17 and Table 310.19. (b) Where installed according to the requirements of (4) Cable tray sections, fittings, and connected raceways are 392.22(B), the ampacities for 1/0 AWG through 500 kcmil bonded in accordance with 250.96, using bolted mechani- single-conductor cables in uncovered cable trays shall not exceed cal connectors or bonding jumpers sized and installed in 65 percent of the ampacities in Table 310.17 and Table 310.19. accordance with 250.102. Where cable trays are continuously covered for more than 1.8 m (6 ft) with solid unventilated covers, the ampacities for (C) Transitions. Where metal cable tray systems are mechan- 1/0 AWG through 500 kcmil cables shall not exceed 60 percent ically discontinuous, as permitted in 392.18(A), a bonding of the ampacities in Table 310.17 and Table 310.19.

jumper sized in accordance with 250.102 shall connect the two (c) Where single conductors are installed in a single layer in sections of the cable tray, or the cable tray and the raceway or uncovered cable trays, with a maintained space of not less than equipment. Bonding shall be in accordance with 250.96. one cable diameter between individual conductors, the ampacity 392.80 Ampacity of Conductors. of 1/0 AWG and larger cables shall not exceed the ampacities in Table 310.17 and Table 310.19. (A) Ampacity of Cables, Rated 2000 Volts or Less, in Cable Trays. Informational Note: See 110.14(C) for conductor tem- Exception to (2)(c): For solid bottom cable trays, the ampacity perature limitations due to termination provisions. of single conductor cables shall be determined by 310.14(B). ∆ (1) Multiconductor Cables. The ampacity of multiconductor (d) Where single conductors are installed in a triangular or cables, nominally rated 2000 volts or less, installed according to square configuration in uncovered cable trays, with a main-

the requirements of 392.22(A) shall be as given in Table 310.16 tained free airspace of not less than 2.15 times one conduc- and Table 310.18, subject to 392.80(A)(1)(a), (A)(1)(b), (A)(1) tor diameter (2.15 × O.D.) of the largest conductor contained (c), and 310.14(A)(2). within the configuration and adjacent conductor configurations (a) The adjustment factors of 310.15(C)(1) shall apply only or cables, the ampacity of 1/0 AWG and larger cables shall not to multiconductor cables with more than three current-carrying exceed the ampacities of two or three single insulated conduc- conductors. Adjustment factors shall be limited to the number tors rated 0 through 2000 volts supported on a messenger in of current-carrying conductors in the cable and not to the num- accordance with 310.15. ber of conductors in the cable tray. Informational Note: See Table 310.20. (b) Where cable trays are continuously covered for more than 1.8 m (6 ft) with solid unventilated covers, not over ∆ (3) Combinations of Multiconductor and Single-Conductor

95 percent of the ampacities of Table 310.16 and Table 310.18 Cables. Where a cable tray contains a combination of multicon- shall be permitted for multiconductor cables. ductor and single-conductor cables, the ampacities shall be as 70–274 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 393 — LOW-VOLTAGE SUSPENDED CEILING POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 393.2 given in 392.80(A)(1) for multiconductor cables and 392.80(A) within the configuration and adjacent conductor configura- (2)for single-conductor cables, provided that the following con- tions or cables, the ampacity of 1/0 AWG and larger cables ditions apply: shall not exceed the ampacities in Table 311.60(C)(67) and Table 311.60(C)(68). (1) The sum of the multiconductor cable fill area as a percent- age of the allowable fill area for the tray calculated in accor- Part III. Construction Specifications dance with 392.22(A), and the single-conductor cable fill area as a percentage of the allowable fill area for the tray cal- 392.100 Construction. culated in accordance with 392.22(B), totals not more than (A) Strength and Rigidity. Cable trays shall have suitable 100 percent. strength and rigidity to provide adequate support for all con- (2) Multiconductor cables are installed according to 392.22(A), tained wiring. and single-conductor cables are installed according to (B) Smooth Edges.

Cable trays shall not have sharp edges, 392.22(B) and 392.22(C). burrs, or projections that could damage the insulation or jackets (B) Ampacity of Type MV and Type MC Cables (2001 Volts of the wiring. or Over) in Cable Trays. The ampacity of cables, rated 2001 (C) Corrosion Protection. Cable tray systems shall be corro- volts, nominal, or over, installed according to 392.22(C) shall not sion resistant. If made of ferrous material, the system shall be exceed the requirements of this section. protected from corrosion as required by 300.6. Informational Note: See 110.40 for conductor tempera- (D) Side Rails. Cable trays shall have side rails or equivalent ture limitations due to termination provisions. structural members. ∆ (1) Multiconductor Cables (2001 Volts or Over). The ampac- (E) Fittings. Cable trays shall include fittings or other suitable ity of multiconductor cables shall be as given in Table 311.60(C) means for changes in direction and elevation of runs. (75) and Table 311.60(C)(76), subject to the following: (F) Nonmetallic Cable Tray. Nonmetallic cable trays shall be

(1) Where cable trays are continuously covered for more than made of flame-retardant material. 1.8 m (6 ft) with solid unventilated covers, not more than 95 percent of the ampacities of Table 311.60(C)(75) and Table 311.60(C)(76) shall be permitted for multicon- ductor cables. ARTICLE 393 (2) Where multiconductor cables are installed in a single layer in Low-Voltage Suspended Ceiling Power uncovered cable trays, with maintained spacing of not less Distribution Systems than one cable diameter between cables, the ampacity shall not exceed the allowable ampacities of Table 311.60(C)(71) and Table 311.60(C)(72). Part I. General ∆ (2) Single-Conductor Cables (2001 Volts or Over). The 393.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of low-voltage ampacity of single-conductor cables, or single conductors cabled suspended ceiling power distribution systems. together (triplexed, quadruplexed, and so forth), shall comply 393.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply with the following: only within this article. (1) The ampacities for 1/0 AWG and larger single-conductor

Busbar. A noninsulated conductor electrically connected to cables in uncovered cable trays shall not exceed 75 percent of the source of supply and physically supported on an insulator the ampacities in Table 311.60(C)(69) and Table 311.60(C) providing a power rail for connection to utilization equipment, (70). Where the cable trays are covered for more than 1.8 m such as sensors, actuators, A/V devices, low-voltage luminaire (6 ft) with solid unventilated covers, the ampacities for assemblies, and similar electrical equipment. 1/0 AWG and larger single-conductor cables shall not exceed 70 percent of the ampacities in Table 311.60(C)(69) and Busbar Support. An insulator that runs the length of a section Table 311.60(C)(70). of suspended ceiling bus rail that serves to support and isolate (2) Where single-conductor cables are installed in a single layer the busbars from the suspended grid rail. in uncovered cable trays, with a maintained space of not less Connector. A term used to refer to an electromechanical fitting. than one cable diameter between individual conductors, the

Connector, Load. An electromechanical connector used for ampacity of 1/0 AWG and larger cables shall not exceed the power from the busbar to utilization equipment. ampacities in Table 311.60(C)(69) and Table 311.60(C)(70). (3) Where single conductors are installed in a triangular or Connector, Pendant. An electromechanical or mechanical square configuration in uncovered cable trays, with a connector used to suspend low-voltage luminaire or utilization maintained free air space of not less than 2.15 times the equipment below the grid rail and to supply power to connect diameter (2.15 × O.D.) of the largest conductor contained from the busbar to utilization equipment. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–275

393.6 ARTICLE 393 — LOW-VOLTAGE SUSPENDED CEILING POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Connector, Power Feed. An electromechanical connector used (1) For listed utilization equipment capable of operation at a to connect the power supply to a power distribution cable, to con- maximum of 30 volts ac (42.4 volts peak) or 60 volts dc nect directly to the busbar, or to connect from a power distribu- (24.8 volts peak for dc interrupted at a rate of 10 Hz to tion cable to the busbar. 200 Hz) and limited to Class 2 power levels in Chapter 9, Table 11(A) and Table 11(B) for lighting, control, and sig- Connector, Rail to Rail. An electromechanical connector used naling circuits. to interconnect busbars from one ceiling grid rail to another grid (2) In indoor dry locations. rail. (3) For residential, commercial, and industrial installations. Grid Bus Rail. A combination of the busbar, the busbar sup- (4) In other spaces used for environmental air in accordance port, and the structural suspended ceiling grid system. with 300.22(C), electrical equipment having a metal enclo-

Low-Voltage Suspended Ceiling Power Distribution Sys- sure, or with a nonmetallic enclosure and fittings, shall be tem. A system that serves as a support for a finished ceiling listed for use within an air-handling space and shall have surface and consists of a busbar and busbar support system to adequate fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing character- distribute power to utilization equipment supplied by a Class 2 istics and associated wiring material suitable for the ambi- power supply. ent temperature. Power Supply. A Class 2 power supply connected between the Informational Note: One method of defining adequate branch-circuit power distribution system and the busbar low- fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing characteristics voltage suspended ceiling power distribution system. for electrical equipment with a nonmetallic enclosure is in ANSI/UL 2043-2013, Fire Test for Heat and Visible Rail. The structural support for the suspended ceiling system Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accesso- typically forming the ceiling grid supporting the ceiling tile

ries Installed in Air-Handling Spaces. and listed utilization equipment, such as sensors, actuators, A/V devices, and low-voltage luminaires and similar electrical 393.12 Uses Not Permitted. Suspended ceiling power distri- equipment. bution systems shall not be installed in the following: Reverse Polarity Protection (Backfeed Protection). A system (1) In damp or wet locations that prevents two interconnected power supplies, connected pos- (2) Where subject to corrosive fumes or vapors, such as stor- itive to negative, from passing current from one power source age battery rooms into a second power source. (3) Where subject to physical damage (4) In concealed locations Suspended Ceiling Grid. A system that serves as a support (5) In hazardous (classified) locations for a finished ceiling surface and other utilization equipment. (6) As part of a fire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly, 393.6 Listing Requirements. Suspended ceiling power dis- unless specifically listed as part of the assembly

tribution systems and associated fittings shall be listed as in (7) For lighting in general or critical patient care areas 393.6(A) or (B). 393.14 Installation. (A) Listed System. Low-voltage suspended ceiling distribution (A) General Requirements. Support wiring shall be installed systems operating at 30 volts ac or less or 60 volts dc or less shall in a neat and workmanlike manner. Cables and conductors be listed as a complete system, with the utilization equipment, installed exposed on the surface of ceilings and sidewalls shall power supply, and fittings as part of the same identified system. be supported by the building structure in such a manner that (B) Assembly of Listed Parts. A low-voltage suspended ceiling the cable is not damaged by normal building use. Such cables power distribution system assembled from the following parts, shall be supported by straps, staples, hangers, cable ties listed listed according to the appropriate function, shall be permitted: and identified for securement and support, or similar fittings

(1) Listed low-voltage utilization equipment designed and installed so as not to damage the cable. (2) Listed Class 2 power supply Informational Note: Suspended ceiling low-voltage power (3) Listed or identified fittings, including connectors and grid grid distribution systems should be installed by qualified rails with bare conductors persons in accordance with the manufacturer’s installa- (4) Listed low-voltage cables in accordance with 725.179, con- tion instructions. ductors in raceways, or other fixed wiring methods for the (B) Insulated Conductors. Exposed insulated secondary secondary circuit circuit conductors shall be listed, of the type, and installed as Part II. Installation described as follows: 393.10 Uses Permitted. Low-voltage suspended ceiling power (1) Class 2 cable supplied by a listed Class 2 power source and distribution systems shall be permanently connected and shall installed in accordance with Parts I and III of Article 725 be permitted as follows: (2) Wiring methods described in Chapter 3 70–276 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 393 — LOW-VOLTAGE SUSPENDED CEILING POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 393.104 393.21 Disconnecting Means. 393.45 Overcurrent and Reverse Polarity (Backfeed) Protection. (A) Location. A disconnecting means for the Class 2 supply to the power grid system shall be located so as to be accessible (A) Overcurrent Protection. The listed Class 2 power sup- and within sight of the Class 2 power source for servicing or ply or transformer primary shall be protected at not greater maintenance of the grid system. than 20 amperes. (B) Multiwire Branch Circuits. Where connected to a mul- (B) Interconnection of Power Sources. Listed Class 2 tiwire branch circuit, the disconnecting means shall simulta- sources shall not have the output connections paralleled or oth- neously disconnect all the supply conductors, including the erwise interconnected unless listed for such interconnection. grounded conductors. (C) Reverse Polarity (Backfeed) Protection of Direct-Current 393.30 Securing and Supporting. Systems. A suspended ceiling low-voltage power distribution

system shall be permitted to have reverse polarity (backfeed) (A) Attached to Building Structure. A suspended ceiling protection of dc circuits by one of the following means: low-voltage power distribution system shall be secured to the mounting surface of the building structure by hanging wires, (1) If the power supply is provided as part of the system, the screws, or bolts in accordance with the installation and opera- power supply is provided with reverse polarity (backfeed) tion instructions. Mounting hardware, such as screws or bolts, protection; or shall be either packaged with the suspended ceiling low- (2) If the power supply is not provided as part of the system, voltage lighting power distribution system, or the installation reverse polarity or backfeed protection can be provided as instructions shall specify the types of mounting fasteners to part of the grid rail busbar or as a part of the power feed be used. connector. (B) Attachment of Power Grid Rails. The individual power 393.56 Splices. A busbar splice shall be provided with insula-

grid rails shall be mechanically secured to the overall ceiling grid tion and mechanical protection equivalent to that of the grid rail assembly. busbars involved. 393.40 Connectors and Enclosures. 393.57 Connections. Connections in busbar grid rails, cables, and conductors shall be made with listed insulating devices ∆ (A) Connectors. Connections to busbar grid rails, cables, and be accessible after installation. Where made in a wall, con- and conductors shall be made with listed insulating devices, nections shall be installed in an enclosure in accordance with and these connections shall be accessible after installation. Parts I, II, and III of Article 314, as applicable. A soldered connection shall be made mechanically secure before being soldered. Other means of securing leads, such as 393.60 Grounding. push-on terminals and spade-type connectors, shall provide (A) Grounding of Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source. The a secure mechanical connection. The following connectors supply side of the Class 2 power source shall be connected to an

shall be permitted to be used as connection or interconnec- equipment grounding conductor in accordance with the appli- tion devices: cable requirements in Part IV of Article 250. (1) Load connectors shall be used for power from the busbar to (B) Grounding of Load Side of Class 2 Power Source. listed utilization equipment. Class 2 load side circuits for suspended ceiling low-voltage (2) A pendant connector shall be permitted to suspend low- power grid distribution systems shall not be grounded. voltage luminaires or utilization equipment below the grid rail and to supply power from the busbar to the utilization Part III. Construction Specifications equipment. 393.104 Sizes and Types of Conductors. (3) A power feed connector shall be permitted to connect the power supply directly to a power distribution cable and to (A) Load Side Utilization Conductor Size. Current-carrying the busbar. conductors for load side utilization equipment shall be copper (4) Rail-to-rail connectors shall be permitted to interconnect bus- and shall be 18 AWG minimum.

bars from one ceiling grid rail to another grid rail. Exception: Conductors of a size smaller than 18 AWG, but Informational Note: For quick-connect terminals, see not smaller than 24 AWG, shall be permitted to be used for UL 310, Standard for Electrical Quick-Connect, and for Class 2 circuits. Where used, these conductors shall be installed mechanical splicing devices, see UL 486A-486B, Stan- using a Chapter 3 wiring method, shall be totally enclosed, shall dard for Wire Connectors. not be subject to movement or strain, and shall comply with the ampacity requirements in Table 522.22. (B) Enclosures. Where made in a wall, connections shall be installed in an enclosure in accordance with Parts I, II, and III (B) Power Feed Bus Rail Conductor Size. The power feed of Article 314. bus rail shall be 16 AWG minimum or equivalent. For a busbar 2022 California Electrical Code 70–277

394.1 ARTICLE 394 — CONCEALED KNOB-AND-TUBE WIRING with a circular cross section, the diameter shall be 1.29 mm insulation contractor with a notice, clearly visible, stating that C (0.051 in.) minimum, and, for other than circular busbars, the caution is required when entering these areas. The notice shall A C area shall be 1.32 mm 2 (0.002 in. 2) minimum. be printed in both English and Spanish. A (4) The insulation shall be noncombustible as defined in the Cal- C ifornia Building Code. A C ARTICLE 394 (5) The insulation shall not have any electrical conductive mate- A C Concealed Knob-and-Tube Wiring rial as part of or supporting the insulation material. A (6) Nothing in this exception will prohibit the authority hav- C ing jurisdiction for the enforcement of this code from requir- A Part I. General C ing permits and inspections for the installations of thermal A 394.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- insulation. struction specifications of concealed knob-and-tube wiring. 394.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Conduc- 394.2 Definition.

The definition in this section shall apply tors shall comply with 398.17 where passing through holes in within this article and throughout the Code. structural members. Where passing through wood cross mem- bers in plastered partitions, conductors shall be protected by non- Concealed Knob-and-Tube Wiring. A wiring method using combustible, nonabsorbent, insulating tubes extending not less knobs, tubes, and flexible nonmetallic tubing for the protection than 75 mm (3 in.) beyond the wood member. and support of single insulated conductors. 394.19 Clearances. Part II. Installation (A) General. A clearance of not less than 75 mm (3 in.) shall 394.10 Uses Permitted. Concealed knob-and-tube wiring shall be maintained between conductors and a clearance of not less be permitted to be installed in the hollow spaces of walls and than 25 mm (1 in.) between the conductor and the surface over ceilings, or in unfinished attics and roof spaces as provided by which it passes. 394.23, only as follows: (B) Limited Conductor Space. Where space is too limited to

(1) For extensions of existing installations provide these minimum clearances, such as at meters, panel- (2) Elsewhere by special permission boards, outlets, and switch points, the individual conductors shall be enclosed in flexible nonmetallic tubing, which shall be con- 394.12 Uses Not Permitted. Concealed knob-and-tube wiring tinuous in length between the last support and the enclosure or shall not be used in the following: terminal point. (1) Commercial garages (C) Clearance from Piping, Exposed Conductors, and So (2) Theaters and similar locations Forth. Conductors shall comply with 398.19 for clearances (3) Motion picture studios from other exposed conductors, piping, and so forth. (4) Hazardous (classified) locations (5) Hollow spaces of walls, ceilings, and attics where such 394.23 In Accessible Attics. Conductors in unfinished attics spaces are insulated by loose, rolled, or foamed-in-place and roof spaces shall comply with 394.23(A) or (B). insulating material that envelops the conductors Informational Note: See 310.14(A)(3) for temperature

C Exception: [HCD 1] This article is not intended to prohibit limitation of conductors. A the installation of insulation where knob-and-tube wiring is C (A) Accessible by Stairway or Permanent Ladder. Conduc- present, provided the following are complied with: A tors shall be installed along the side of or through bored holes C (1) The wiring shall be surveyed by an electrical contractor in floor joists, studs, or rafters. Where run through bored holes, A licensed by the State of California. Certification shall be pro- conductors in the joists and in studs or rafters to a height of C vided by the electrical contractor that the existing wiring is in not less than 2.1 m (7 ft) above the floor or floor joists shall be A C good condition with no evidence of deterioration or improper protected by substantial running boards extending not less than A over-current protection, and no improper connections or splices. 25 mm (1 in.) on each side of the conductors. Running boards C Repairs, alterations, or extensions to the electrical system will shall be securely fastened in place.

Running boards and guard A require permits and inspections by the authority having juris- strips shall not be required where conductors are installed C diction for the enforcement of this code. along the sides of joists, studs, or rafters. A C (2) The certification form shall be filed with the authority hav- (B) Not Accessible by Stairway or Permanent Ladder. Con- A ing jurisdiction for the enforcement of this code, and a copy fur- ductors shall be installed along the sides of or through bored C A nished to the property owner. holes in floor joists, studs, or rafters. C (3) All accessible areas in the building where insulation has been Exception: In buildings completed before the wiring is installed, A installed around knob-and-tube wiring shall be posted by the attic and roof spaces that are not accessible by stairway or C 70–278 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 396 — MESSENGER-SUPPORTED WIRING 396.10 permanent ladder and have headroom at all points less than Messenger-Supported Wiring. This definition shall apply 900 mm (3 ft), the wiring shall be permitted to be installed on the within this article and throughout the Code. edges of rafters or joists facing the attic or roof space. An exposed wiring support system using a messenger wire 394.30 Securing and Supporting. to support insulated conductors by any one of the following: (A) Supporting. Conductors shall be rigidly supported on (1) A messenger with rings and saddles for conductor support noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating materials and shall not (2) A messenger with a field-installed lashing material for con- contact any other objects. Supports shall be installed as follows: ductor support (3) Factory-assembled aerial cable (1) Within 150 mm (6 in.) of each side of each tap or splice, and (4) Multiplex cables utilizing a bare conductor, factory assem- (2) At intervals not exceeding 1.4 m (41⁄2 ft). bled and twisted with one or more insulated conductors,

Where it is impracticable to provide supports, conductors such as duplex, triplex, or quadruplex type of construction shall be permitted to be fished through hollow spaces in dry loca- tions, provided each conductor is individually enclosed in flex- Part II. Installation ible nonmetallic tubing that is in continuous lengths between 396.10 Uses Permitted. supports, between boxes, or between a support and a box. (A) Cable Types. The cable types in Table 396.10(A) shall be (B) Securing. Where solid knobs are used, conductors shall permitted to be installed in messenger-supported wiring under be securely tied thereto by tie wires having insulation equiva- the conditions described in the article or section referenced for lent to that of the conductor. each. 394.42 Devices. Switches shall comply with 404.4 and (B) In Industrial Establishments. In industrial establish- 404.10(B). ments only, where conditions of maintenance and supervi- 394.56 Splices and Taps. Splices shall be soldered unless sion ensure that only qualified persons service the installed approved splicing devices are used.

In-line or strain splices shall messenger-supported wiring, the following shall be permitted: not be used. (1) Any of the conductor types shown in Table 310.4(A) or Table 310.4(B) Part III. Construction Specifications (2) MV cable 394.104 Conductors. Conductors shall be of a type specified Where exposed to weather, conductors shall be listed for by Article 310. use in wet locations. Where exposed to direct rays of the sun, conductors or cables shall be sunlight resistant. (C) Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Messenger- supported ARTICLE 396 wiring shall be permitted to be used in hazardous (classified) Messenger-Supported Wiring locations where the contained cables and messenger-supported wiring are specifically permitted by other articles in this Code. Part I. General 396.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and Table 396.10(A) Cable Types construction specifications for messenger-supported wiring. Cable Type Section Article 396.2 Definitions. Insulated Conductor. This definition shall apply only within Medium-voltage cable 328 this article. Metal-clad cable 330

Mineral-insulated, metal- 332 For the purposes of this article, an insulated conductor sheathed cable includes the following: Multiconductor service- 338 entrance cable (1) Conductor types described in 310.4, and Multiconductor underground 340 (2) Overhead service conductors encased in a polymeric mate- feeder and branch-circuit rial that has been evaluated for the applied nominal voltage. cable Other factory-assembled, Informational Note: Evidence of evaluation for the multiconductor control, applied nominal voltage can be given by certification that signal, or power cables that are identified for the use the conductors have met the requirements of ICEA S-76- Power and control tray cable 336 474-2011, Standard for Neutral Supported Power Cable Power-limited tray cable Table 725.154, 725.135(J), and Assemblies with Weather-Resistant Extruded Insulation 725.179(E) Rated 600 Volts. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–279

396.12 ARTICLE 398 — OPEN WIRING ON INSULATORS 396.12 Uses Not Permitted. Messenger-supported wiring shall continuous lengths not exceeding 4.5 m (15 ft) and secured to not be used in hoistways or where subject to physical damage. the surface by straps at intervals not exceeding 1.4 m (41⁄2 ft). 396.30 Messenger. (B) Entering Spaces Subject to Dampness, Wetness, or Corrosive Vapors. Conductors entering or leaving locations (A) Support. The messenger shall be supported at dead ends subject to dampness, wetness, or corrosive vapors shall have drip and at intermediate locations so as to eliminate tension on the loops formed on them and shall then pass upward and inward conductors. The conductors shall not be permitted to come into from the outside of the buildings, or from the damp, wet, or cor- contact with the messenger supports or any structural members, rosive location, through noncombustible, nonabsorbent insu- walls, or pipes. lating tubes. (B) Neutral Conductor. Where the messenger is used as a neu- Informational Note: See 230.52 for individual conduc-

tral conductor, it shall comply with the requirements of 225.4, tors entering buildings or other structures. 250.184(A), 250.184(B)(7), and 250.187(B). (C) Exposed to Physical Damage. Conductors within 2.1 m (C) Equipment Grounding Conductor. Where the messen- (7 ft) from the floor shall be considered exposed to physical ger is used as an equipment grounding conductor, it shall com- damage. Where open conductors cross ceiling joists and wall ply with the requirements of 250.32(B), 250.118, 250.184(B)(8), studs and are exposed to physical damage, they shall be protected and 250.187(D). by one of the following methods: 396.56 Conductor Splices and Taps. Conductor splices and (1) Guard strips not less than 25 mm (1 in.) nominal in thick- taps made and insulated by approved methods shall be permit- ness and at least as high as the insulating supports, placed ted in messenger-supported wiring. on each side of and close to the wiring. 396.60 Grounding. The messenger shall be grounded as (2) A substantial running board at least 13 mm (1⁄2 in.) thick

required by 250.80 and 250.86 for enclosure grounding. in back of the conductors with side protections. Running boards shall extend at least 25 mm (1 in.) outside the con- ductors, but not more than 50 mm (2 in.), and the protect- ARTICLE 398 ing sides shall be at least 50 mm (2 in.) high and at least Open Wiring on Insulators 25 mm (1 in.), nominal, in thickness. (3) Boxing made in accordance with 398.15(C)(1) or (C)(2) and furnished with a cover kept at least 25 mm (1 in.) away from Part I. General the conductors within. Where protecting vertical conductors on side walls, the boxing shall be closed at the top and the 398.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and con- holes through which the conductors pass shall be bushed. struction specifications of open wiring on insulators. (4) Rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid 398.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply nonmetallic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. When within this article and throughout the Code. installed in metal piping, the conductors shall be encased

Open Wiring on Insulators. An exposed wiring method using in continuous lengths of approved flexible tubing. cleats, knobs, tubes, and flexible tubing for the protection and 398.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. Open support of single insulated conductors run in or on buildings. conductors shall be separated from contact with walls, floors, wood cross members, or partitions through which they pass by Part II. Installation tubes or bushings of noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating 398.10 Uses Permitted. Open wiring on insulators shall be material. Where the bushing is shorter than the hole, a water- permitted only for industrial or agricultural establishments on proof sleeve of noninductive material shall be inserted in the systems of 1000 volts, nominal, or less, as follows: hole and an insulating bushing slipped into the sleeve at each end in such a manner as to keep the conductors absolutely out of (1) Indoors or outdoors contact with the sleeve. Each conductor shall be carried through (2) In wet or dry locations a separate tube or sleeve.

(3) Where subject to corrosive vapors (4) For services Informational Note: See 310.14(A)(3) for temperature limitation of conductors. 398.12 Uses Not Permitted. Open wiring on insulators shall not be installed where concealed by the building structure. 398.19 Clearances. Open conductors shall be separated at least 50 mm (2 in.) from metal raceways, piping, or other 398.15 Exposed Work. conducting material, and from any exposed lighting, power, (A) Dry Locations. In dry locations, where not exposed to or signaling conductor, or shall be separated therefrom by a physical damage, conductors shall be permitted to be separately continuous and firmly fixed nonconductor in addition to the enclosed in flexible nonmetallic tubing. The tubing shall be in 70–280 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 399 — OUTDOOR OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS OVER 1000 VOLTS 399.30 insulation of the conductor. Where any insulating tube is used, (D) Mounting of Conductor Supports. Where nails are it shall be secured at the ends. Where practicable, conductors used to mount knobs, they shall not be smaller than tenpenny. shall pass over rather than under any piping subject to leakage Where screws are used to mount knobs, or where nails or or accumulations of moisture. screws are used to mount cleats, they shall be of a length suf- ficient to penetrate the wood to a depth equal to at least one- 398.23 In Accessible Attics. Conductors in unfinished attics half the height of the knob and the full thickness of the cleat. and roof spaces shall comply with 398.23(A) or (B). Cushion washers shall be used with nails. (A) Accessible by Stairway or Permanent Ladder. Conduc- (E) Tie Wires. Conductors 8 AWG or larger and supported on tors shall be installed along the side of or through bored holes solid knobs shall be securely tied thereto by tie wires having an in floor joists, studs, or rafters.

Where run through bored holes, insulation equivalent to that of the conductor. conductors in the joists and in studs or rafters to a height of not less than 2.1 m (7 ft) above the floor or floor joists shall be 398.42 Devices. Surface-type snap switches shall be mounted protected by substantial running boards extending not less than in accordance with 404.10(A), and boxes shall not be required. 25 mm (1 in.) on each side of the conductors. Running boards Other type switches shall be installed in accordance with 404.4. shall be securely fastened in place. Running boards and guard strips shall not be required for conductors installed along the Part III. Construction Specifications sides of joists, studs, or rafters. 398.104 Conductors. Conductors shall be of a type specified (B) Not Accessible by Stairway or Permanent Ladder. Con- by Article 310. ductors shall be installed along the sides of or through bored holes in floor joists, studs, or rafters. ARTICLE 399 Exception: In buildings completed before the wiring is

installed, in attic and roof spaces that are not accessible by stair- Outdoor Overhead Conductors over way or permanent ladder and have headroom at all points less 1000 Volts than 900 mm (3 ft), the wiring shall be permitted to be installed on the edges of rafters or joists facing the attic or roof space. 399.1 Scope. This article covers the use and installation for 398.30 Securing and Supporting. outdoor overhead conductors over 1000 volts, nominal. (A) Conductor Sizes Smaller Than 8 AWG. Conductors 399.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply smaller than 8 AWG shall be rigidly supported on noncombus- only within this article. tible, nonabsorbent insulating materials and shall not contact any other objects. Supports shall be installed as follows: Outdoor Overhead Conductors. Single conductors, insu- lated, covered, or bare, installed outdoors on support structures (1) Within 150 mm (6 in.) from a tap or splice in free air. (2) Within 300 mm (12 in.) of a dead-end connection to a lam- pholder or receptacle ∆ 399.10 Uses Permitted. Outdoor overhead conductors over

(3) At intervals not exceeding 1.4 m (4 1⁄2 ft) and at closer inter- 1000 volts, nominal, shall be permitted only for systems rated vals sufficient to provide adequate support where likely to over 1000 volts, nominal, as follows: be disturbed (1) Outdoors in free air (2) For service conductors, feeders, or branch circuits (B) Conductor Sizes 8 AWG and Larger. Supports for con- ductors 8 AWG or larger installed across open spaces shall be Informational Note: For additional information on out- permitted up to 4.5 m (15 ft) apart if noncombustible, nonab- door overhead conductors over 1000 volts, see IEEE 1 sorbent insulating spacers are used at least every 1.4 m (4 ⁄2 ft) C2, National Electrical Safety Code, and ANSI/IEEE 1 to maintain at least 65 mm (2 ⁄2 in.) between conductors. 3001.2, Recommended Practice for Evaluating the Elec- Where not likely to be disturbed in buildings of mill con- trical Service Requirements of Industrial and Commercial struction, 8 AWG and larger conductors shall be permitted to Power Systems.

be run across open spaces if supported from each wood cross 399.30 Support. member on approved insulators maintaining 150 mm (6 in.) (A) Conductors. Documentation of the engineered design by between conductors. a licensed professional engineer engaged primarily in the (C) Industrial Establishments. In industrial establishments design of such systems for the spacing between conductors only, where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure shall be available upon request of the authority having jurisdic- that only qualified persons service the system, conductors of sizes tion and shall include consideration of the following: 250 kcmil and larger shall be permitted to be run across open (1) Applied voltage spaces where supported at intervals up to 9.0 m (30 ft) apart. (2) Conductor size 2022 California Electrical Code 70–281

399.30 ARTICLE 399 — OUTDOOR OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS OVER 1000 VOLTS (3) Distance between support structures (4) Weather loading and other conditions such as, but not lim- (4) Type of structure ited to, ice, wind, temperature, and lightning (5) Wind/ice loading (5) Angle where change of direction occurs (6) Surge protection (6) Spans between adjacent structures (7) Effect of dead-end structures (B) Structures. Structures of wood, metal, or concrete, or (8) Strength of guy wires and guy anchors combinations of those materials, shall be provided for support (9) Structure size and material(s) of overhead conductors over 1000 volts, nominal. Documenta- (10) Hardware tion of the engineered design by a licensed professional engi- neer engaged primarily in the design of such systems and the (C) Insulators. Insulators used to support conductors shall be installation of each support structure shall be available upon rated for all of the following: request of the authority having jurisdiction and shall include (1) Applied phase-to-phase voltage consideration of the following:

(2) Mechanical strength required for each individual installation (1) Soil conditions (3) Impulse withstand BIL in accordance with Table 490.24 (2) Foundations and structure settings Informational Note: 399.30(A), (B), and (C) are not all- (3) Weight of all supported conductors and equipment inclusive lists. 70–282 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 4 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 400 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND FLEXIBLE CABLES HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 402 — FIXTURE WIRES HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 404 — SWITCHES HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended X X X X (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed X below Article/Section 404 FPN X 404.4(C) Exceptions X X X X ARTICLE 406 — RECEPTACLES, CORD CONNECTORS, AND ATTACHMENT PLUGS (CAPS) HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5

Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended X X X X (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed X below Article/Section 406 FPN X 406.9(C) X X X X 2022 California Electrical Code 70–283

CHAPTER 4 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 408 — SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR, AND PANELBOARDS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH CEC BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are X listed below Article/Section 408.2(A) & (B) X ARTICLE 409 — INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 410 — LUMINAIRES, LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 411 — LOW-VOLTAGE LIGHTING HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5

Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 70–284 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 4 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 422 — APPLIANCES HCD DSA OSHPD DPH CEC BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are X listed below Article/Section 422.3(A) & (B) X ARTICLE 424 — FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 425 — FIXED RESISTANCE AND ELECTRODE INDUSTRIAL PROCESS HEATING EQUIPMENT HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 440.3(E) & (F) ARTICLE 426 — FIXED OUTDOOR ELECTRIC DEICING AND SNOW-MELTING EQUIPMENT HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC-

Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 2022 California Electrical Code 70–285

CHAPTER 4 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 427 — FIXED ELECTRIC HEATING EQUIPMENT FOR PIPELINES AND VESSELS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 440 — AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT HCD DSA OSHPD DPH CEC BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are X listed below Article/Section 440.3(E) & (F) X ARTICLE 445 — GENERATORS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC-

Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 70–286 2022 California Electrical Code

CHAPTER 4 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 450 — TRANSFORMERS AND TRANSFORMER VAULTS (INCLUDING SECONDARY TIES) HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended X X (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 450.23 Note X X ARTICLE 455 — PHASE CONVERTERS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 460 — CAPACITORS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 470 — RESISTORS AND REACTORS HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5

Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 2022 California Electrical Code 70–287

CHAPTER 4 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES ARTICLE 480 — STORAGE BATTERIES HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section ARTICLE 490 — EQUIPMENT OVER 1000 VOLTS, NOMINAL HCD DSA OSHPD DPH BSC- Adopting Agency BSC CG SFM 1 2 AC SS SS/CC 1 1R 2 3 4 5 Adopt Entire Article X X X X X X X X X X X X Adopt entire Article as amended (amended sections listed below) Adopt only those sections that are listed below Article/Section 70–288 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 400 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND FLEXIBLE CABLES CHAPTER 4 Chapter 4 Equipment for General Use currents present in the neutral conductor and the neutral con- ARTICLE 400 ductor shall be considered to be a current-carrying conductor. Flexible Cords and Flexible Cables An equipment grounding conductor shall not be considered a current-carrying conductor. Part I. General Where a single conductor is used for both equipment grounding and to carry unbalanced current from other conduc- ∆ 400.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements, appli- tors, as provided for in 250.140 for electric ranges and electric cations, and construction specifications for flexible cords and clothes dryers, it shall not be considered as a current-carrying flexible cables. conductor. 400.2 Other Articles. Flexible cords and flexible cables shall (B) Ultimate Insulation Temperature. In no case shall con- comply with this article and with the applicable provisions of ductors be associated together in such a way with respect to the other articles of this Code.

kind of circuit, the wiring method used, or the number of con- 400.3 Suitability. Flexible cords and flexible cables and their ductors such that the limiting temperature of the conductors is associated fittings shall be suitable for the conditions of use and exceeded. location. (C) Engineering Supervision. Under engineering supervi- 400.4 Types. Flexible cords and flexible cables shall conform sion, conductor ampacities shall be permitted to be calculated to the description in Table 400.4. The use of flexible cords and in accordance with 310.14(B). flexible cables other than those in Table 400.4 shall require per- 400.6 Markings. mission by the authority having jurisdiction. (A) Standard Markings. Flexible cords and flexible cables 400.5 Ampacities for Flexible Cords and Flexible Cables. shall be marked by means of a printed tag attached to the ∆ (A) Ampacity Tables. Table 400.5(A)(1) provides the ampac- coil reel or carton. The tag shall contain the information required ities, and Table 400.5(A)(2) provides the ampacities for flexible in 310.8(A).

Types S, SC, SCE, SCT, SE, SEO, SEOO, SJ, SJE, cords and flexible cables with not more than three current- SJEO, SJEOO, SJO, SJT, SJTO, SJTOO, SO, SOO, ST, STO, carrying conductors. These tables shall be used in conjunction STOO, SEW, SEOW, SEOOW, SJEW, SJEOW, SJEOOW, with applicable end-use product standards to ensure selection SJOW, SJTW, SJTOW, SJTOOW, SOW, SOOW, STW, STOW, of the proper size and type. Where cords and cables are used in and STOOW flexible cords and G, G-GC, PPE, and W flexible ambient temperatures other than 30°C (86°F), the temperature cables shall be durably marked on the surface at intervals not correction factors from Table 310.15(B)(1) that correspond to exceeding 610 mm (24 in.) with the type designation, size, and the temperature rating of the cord or cable shall be applied to the number of conductors. Required markings on tags, cords, and ampacity in Table 400.5(A)(1) and Table 400.5(A)(2). Cords and cables shall also include the maximum operating temperature

cables rated 105°C shall use correction factors in the 90°C col- of the flexible cord or flexible cable. umn of Table 310.15(B)(1) for temperature correction. Where (B) Optional Markings. Flexible cords and cable types the number of current-carrying conductors exceeds three, the listed in Table 400.4 shall be permitted to be surface marked to ampacity of each conductor shall be reduced from the three- indicate special characteristics of the cable materials. These conductor rating as shown in Table 400.5(A)(3). markings include, but are not limited to, markings for limited Informational Note: See Informative Annex B, Table smoke, sunlight resistance, and so forth. B.2(11), for adjustment factors for more than three current- 400.10 Uses Permitted. carrying conductors in a raceway or cable with load diversity. (A) Uses. Flexible cords and flexible cables shall be used only A neutral conductor that carries only the unbalanced current for the following: from other conductors of the same circuit shall not be required to meet the requirements of a current-carrying conductor. (1) Pendants.

(2) Wiring of luminaires. In a 3-wire circuit consisting of two phase conductors and the (3) Connection of portable luminaires, portable and mobile neutral conductor of a 4-wire, 3-phase, wye-connected system, signs, or appliances. a common conductor carries approximately the same current (4) Elevator cables. as the line-to-neutral currents of the other conductors and shall (5) Wiring of cranes and hoists. be considered to be a current-carrying conductor. (6) Connection of utilization equipment to facilitate frequent On a 4-wire, 3-phase, wye circuit where more than 50 per- interchange. cent of the load consists of nonlinear loads, there are harmonic (7) Prevention of the transmission of noise or vibration. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–289

400.10 ARTICLE 400 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND FLEXIBLE CABLES ∆ Table 400.4 Flexible Cords and Flexible Cables Nominal Insulation Thickness Braid Type AWG or Number of AWG on Each Outer Trade Name Letter Voltage kcmil Conductors Insulation or kcmil mm mils Conductor Covering Use Lamp cord C 30 18–16 2 or more Thermoset or 18–16 0.76 30 Cotton None Pendant or Dry Not or 600 15–10 thermoplastic 15–10 1.14 45 portable locations hard usage Elevator cable E1,2,3,4 300 20–2 2 or more Thermoset 20–16 0.51 20 Cotton Three cotton; Elevator lighting Unclassified locations or 600 15–12 0.76 30 outer one and control 12–10 1.14 45 flame- 8–2 1.52 60 retardant and 20–16 0.51 20 Flexible moisture- 15–12 0.76 30 nylon resistant 12–10 1.14 45 jacket 8–2 1.52 60 Elevator cable EO 1,2,4 300 20–2 2 or more Thermoset 20–16 0.51 20 Cotton Three cotton; Elevator lighting Unclassified locations or 600 15–12 0.76 30 outer one and control 12–10 1.14 45 flame- 8–2 1.52 60 retardant and moisture- resistant One cotton and Hazardous (classified) a neoprene locations jacket

Elevator cable ETP 2,4 300 Rayon Thermoplastic Hazardous (classified) locations or 600 ETT2,4 300 None One cotton or or 600 equivalent and a thermoplastic jacket Electric vehicle EV5,6 1000 18–500 2 or more plus Thermoset with 18–15 0.76 30 Optional Oil-resistant Electric vehicle Wet locations Extra- cable equipment optional nylon (0.51) (20) thermoset charging hard grounding 14–10 1.14 45 usage conductor(s), (0.76) (30) plus optional 8–2 1.52 60 hybrid data, signal (1.14) (45) communications, and optical fiber 1–4/0 2.03 80 cables (1.52) (60) 250–500 2.41 95 (1.90) (75) EVJ 5,6 300 18–12 18–12 0.76 30 Hard (0.51) (20) usage EVE 5,6 1000 18–500 2 or more plus Thermoplastic 18–15 0.76 30 Oil-resistant Extra- equipment elastomer (0.51) (20) thermoplastic hard grounding with optional 14–10 1.14 45 elastomer usage conductor(s), nylon (0.76) (30) plus optional 8–2 1.52 60 hybrid data, signal (1.14) (45) communications, and optical fiber 1–4/0 2.03 80 cables (1.52) (60) 250–500 2.41 95 (1.90) (75) EVJE 5,6 300 18–12 18–12 0.76 30 Hard (0.51) (20) usage (continues)

70–290 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 400 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND FLEXIBLE CABLES 400.10 ∆ Table 400.4 Continued Nominal Insulation Thickness Braid Type AWG or Number of AWG on Each Outer Trade Name Letter Voltage kcmil Conductors Insulation or kcmil mm mils Conductor Covering Use EVT5,6 1000 18–500 2 or more plus Thermoplastic 18–15 0.76 30 Optional Oil-resistant Electric vehicle Wet locations Extra- equipment with optional (0.51) (20) thermoplastic charging hard grounding nylon 14–10 1.14 45 usage conductor(s), (0.76) (30) plus optional 8–2 1.52 60 hybrid data, signal (1.14) (45) communications, and optical fiber 1–4/0 2.03 80 cables (1.52) (60) 250–500 2.41 95 (1.90) (75) EVJT 5,6 300 18–12 18–12 0.76 30 Hard (0.51) (20) usage Portable power G 2000 12–500 2–6 plus Thermoset 12–2 1.52 60 Oil-resistant Portable and extra-hard usage cable equipment 1–4/0 2.03 80 thermoset grounding 250–500 2.41 95 conductor(s) G-GC 7 2000 12–500 3–6 plus Thermoset 12–2 1.52 60 Oil-resistant equipment 1–4/0 2.03 80 thermoset grounding 250–500 2.41 95 conductors and 1 ground check conductor

Heater cord HPD 300 18–12 2, 3, or 4 Thermoset 18–16 0.38 15 None Cotton or rayon Portable heaters Dry Not 15–12 0.76 30 locations hard usage Parallel heater cord HPN 8 300 18–12 2 or 3 Oil-resistant 18–16 1.14 45 None Oil-resistant Portable Damp Not hard thermoset 15 1.52 60 thermoset locations usage 14 2.41 95 12 Thermoset jacketed HSJ 300 18–12 2, 3, or 4 Thermoset 18–16 0.76 30 None Cotton and Portable or Damp Hard heater cords 15–12 1.14 45 thermoset portable locations usage HSJW 300 18–12 Thermoset Cotton and heater Damp thermoset locations HSJO 300 18–12 Oil-resistant Cotton and oil- Damp thermoset resistant and wet thermoset locations HSJOW 9 300 18–12 Damp HSJOO 300 18–12 locations HSJOOW 9 300 18–12 Damp and wet locations Non-integral NISP-1 300 20–18 2 or 3 Thermoset 20–18 0.38 15 None Thermoset Pendant or Damp Not hard parallel cords NISP-2 300 18–16 18–16 0.76 30 portable locations usage NISPE-1 8 300 20–18 Thermoplastic 20–18 0.38 15 Thermoplastic NISPE-2 8 300 18–16 elastomer 18–16 0.76 30 elastomer NISPT-1 8 300 20–18 Thermoplastic 20–18 0.38 15 Thermoplastic

NISPT-2 8 300 18–16 18–16 0.76 30 Twisted portable PD 300 18–16 2 or more Thermoset or 18–16 0.76 30 Cotton Cotton or rayon Pendant or Dry Not hard cord 600 14–10 thermoplastic 15–10 1.14 45 portable locations usage Portable power PPE 7 2000 12–500 1–6 plus optional Thermoplastic 12–2 1.52 60 Oil-resistant Portable, extra-hard usage cable equipment elastomer 1–4/0 2.03 80 thermoplastic grounding 250–500 2.41 95 elastomer conductor(s) Hard service cord S 7 600 18–2 2 or more Thermoset 18–15 0.76 30 None Thermoset Pendant or Damp Extra- 14–10 1.14 45 portable locations hard 8–2 1.52 60 usage (continues) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–291

400.10 ARTICLE 400 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND FLEXIBLE CABLES ∆ Table 400.4 Continued Nominal Insulation Thickness Braid Type AWG or Number of AWG on Each Outer Trade Name Letter Voltage kcmil Conductors Insulation or kcmil mm mils Conductor Covering Use Flexible stage and SC7,10 600 8–250 1 or more Thermoset 8–2 1.52 60 Thermoset Portable, extra-hard usage lighting power SCE 7,10 600 Thermoplastic 1–4/0 2.03 80 Thermoplastic cable elastomer 250 2.41 95 elastomer SCT 7,10 600 Thermoplastic Thermoplastic Hard service cord SE7 600 18–2 2 or more Thermoplastic 18–15 0.76 30 None Thermoplastic Pendant or Damp Extra- elastomer 14–9 1.14 4 elastomer portable locations hard SEW 7, 9 600 8–2 1.52 560 Damp and usage wet locations SEO 7 600 Oil-resistant Damp thermoplastic locations SEOW 7,9 600 elastomer Damp and wet locations SEOO 7 600 Oil-resistant Damp thermoplastic locations EOOW 7,9 600 elastomer Damp and wet locations Junior hard service SJ 300 18–10 2–6 Thermoset 18–11 0.76 30 None Thermoset Pendant or Damp Hard cord SJE 300 Thermoplastic 10 1.14 45 Thermoplastic portable locations usage

SJEW 9 300 elastomer elastomer Damp and wet locations SJEO 300 Oil-resistant Damp thermoplastic locations SJEOW 9 300 elastomer Damp and wet locations SJEOO 300 Oil-resistant Damp thermoplastic locations SJEOOW 9 300 elastomer Damp and wet locations SJO 300 Thermoset Oil-resistant Damp thermoset locations SJOW 9 300 Damp and wet locations SJOO 300 Oil-resistant Damp thermoset locations SJOOW 9 300 Damp and wet locations SJT 300 Thermoplastic Thermoplastic Damp locations SJTW 9 300 Damp and wet locations SJTO 300 Oil-resistant Damp thermoplastic locations SJTOW 9 300 Damp and wet locations SJTOO 300 Oil-resistant Damp thermoplastic locations SJTOOW 9 300 Damp and wet locations (continues) 70–292 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 400 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND FLEXIBLE CABLES 400.10 ∆ Table 400.4 Continued Nominal Insulation Thickness Braid Type AWG or Number of AWG on Each Outer Trade Name Letter Voltage kcmil Conductors Insulation or kcmil mm mils Conductor Covering Use Hard service cord SO7 600 18–2 2 or more Thermoset 18–15 0.76 30 None Oil-resistant Pendant or Damp Extra- thermoset portable locations hard SOW 7,9 600 Damp and usage wet locations SOO 7 600 Oil-resistant 14–9 1.14 45 Damp thermoset 8–2 1.52 60 locations SOOW 7,9 600 Damp and wet locations All thermoset SP-1 300 20–18 2 or 3 Thermoset 20–18 0.76 30 None None Pendant or Damp Not parallel cord SP-2 300 18–16 18–16 1.14 45 portable locations hard usage SP-3 300 18–10 18–16 1.52 60 Refrigerators, 15–14 2.03 80 room air 12 2.41 95 conditioners, 10 2.80 110 and as permitted in 422.16(B) All elastomer SPE-1 8 300 20-18 2 or 3 Thermoplastic 20–18 0.76 30 None None Pendant or Damp Not (thermoplastic) SPE-2 8 300 18–16 elastomer 18–16 1.14 45 portable locations hard parallel cord 8 usage SPE-3 300 18–10 18–16 1.52 60 Refrigerators,

15–14 2.03 80 room air 12 2.41 95 conditioners, 10 2.80 110 and as permitted in 422.16(B) All thermoplastic SPT-1 300 20–18 2 or 3 Thermoplastic 20–18 0.76 30 None None Pendant or Damp Not parallel cord portable locations hard SPT-1W 9 300 2 Damp and usage wet locations SPT-2 300 18–16 2 or 3 18–16 1.14 45 Damp locations SPT-2W 9 300 2 Damp and wet locations SPT-3 300 18–10 2 or 3 18–16 1.52 60 Refrigerators, Damp Not 15–14 2.03 80 room air locations hard 12 2.41 95 conditioners, usage 10 2.80 110 and as permitted in 422.16(B) Range, dryer cable SRD 300 10–4 3 or 4 Thermoset 10–4 1.14 45 None Thermoset Portable Damp Ranges, SRDE 300 10–4 3 or 4 Thermoplastic None Thermoplastic locations dryers elastomer elastomer SRDT 300 10–4 3 or 4 Thermoplastic None Thermoplastic Hard service cord ST 7 600 18–2 2 or more Thermoplastic 18–15 0.76 30 None Thermoplastic Pendant or Damp Extra- 14–9 1.14 45 portable locations hard STW 7,9 600 8–2 1.52 60 Damp and usage wet locations STO 7 600 Oil-resistant Damp thermoplastic locations STOW 7, 9 600 Damp and wet locations STOO 7 600 Oil-resistant Damp

thermoplastic locations STOOW 7 600 Damp and wet locations (continues) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–293

400.10 ARTICLE 400 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND FLEXIBLE CABLES ∆ Table 400.4 Continued Nominal Insulation Thickness Braid Type AWG or Number of AWG on Each Outer Trade Name Letter Voltage kcmil Conductors Insulation or kcmil mm mils Conductor Covering Use Vacuum cleaner SV 300 18–16 2 or 3 Thermoset 18–16 0.38 15 None Thermoset Pendant or Damp Not cord SVE 300 Thermoplastic Thermoplastic portable locations hard elastomer elastomer usage SVEO 300 Oil-resistant SVEOO 300 Oil-resistant thermoplastic thermoplastic elastomer elastomer SVO 300 Thermoset Oil-resistant thermoset SVOO 300 Oil-resistant Oil-resistant thermoset thermoset SVT 300 Thermoplastic Thermoplastic SVTO 300 Thermoplastic Oil-resistant SVTOO 300 Oil-resistant thermoplastic thermoplastic Parallel tinsel cord TPT11 300 27 2 Thermoplastic 27 0.76 30 None Thermoplastic Attached to an Damp Not appliance locations hard usage Jacketed tinsel TST 11 300 27 2 Thermoplastic 27 0.38 15 None Thermoplastic Attached to an Damp Not cord appliance locations hard usage

Portable power W 7 2000 12–500 1–6 Thermoset 12–2 1.52 60 Oil-resistant Portable, extra-hard usage cable 501–1000 1 1–4/0 2.03 80 thermoset 250–500 2.41 95 501–1000 2.80 110 Notes: All types listed in Table 400.4 shall have individual conductors twisted together, except for Types HPN, SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, SPE-1, SPE-2, SPE-3, SPT-1, SPT-2, SPT-3, SPT-1W, SPT-2W, TPT, NISP-1, NISP-2, NISPT-1, NISPT-2, NISPE-1, NISPE-2, and three-conductor parallel versions of SRD, SRDE, and SRDT. The individual conductors of all cords, except those of heat-resistant cords, shall have a thermoset or thermoplastic insulation, except that the equipment grounding conductor, where used, shall be in accordance with 400.23(B). 1Rubber-filled or varnished cambric tapes shall be permitted as a substitute for the inner braids. 2Elevator traveling cables for operating control and signal circuits shall contain nonmetallic fillers as necessary to maintain concentricity. Cables shall have steel supporting members as required for suspension by 620.41.

In locations subject to excessive moisture or corrosive vapors or gases, supporting members of other materials shall be permitted. Where steel supporting members are used, they shall run straight through the center of the cable assembly and shall not be cabled with the copper strands of any conductor. In addition to conductors used for control and signaling circuits, Types E, EO, ETP, and ETT elevator cables shall be permitted to incorporate in the construction one or more 20 AWG telephone conductor pairs, one or more coaxial cables, or one or more optical fibers. The 20 AWG conductor pairs shall be permitted to be covered with suitable shielding for telephone, audio, or higher frequency communications circuits; the coaxial cables shall consist of a center conductor, insulation, and a shield for use in video or other radio frequency communications circuits. The optical fiber shall be suitably covered with flame-retardant thermoplastic. The

insulation of the conductors shall be rubber or thermoplastic of a thickness not less than specified for the other conductors of the particular type of cable. Metallic shields shall have their own protective covering. Where used, these components shall be permitted to be incorporated in any layer of the cable assembly but shall not run straight through the center. 3Insulations and outer coverings that meet the requirements as flame retardant, limited smoke, and are so listed, shall be permitted to be marked for limited smoke after the Code type designation. 4Elevator cables in sizes 20 AWG through 14 AWG are rated 300 volts, and sizes 10 AWG through 2 AWG are rated 600 volts. 12 AWG is rated 300 volts with a 0.76 mm (30 mil) insulation thickness and 600 volts with a 1.14 mm (45 mil) insulation thickness. 5Conductor size for Types EV, EVJ, EVE, EVJE, EVT, and EVJT cables apply to nonpower-limited circuits only. Conductors of power-limited (data, signal, or communications) circuits may extend beyond the stated AWG size range.

All conductors shall be insulated for the same cable voltage rating. 6Insulation thickness for Types EV, EVJ, EVEJE, EVT, and EVJT cables of nylon construction is indicated in parentheses. 7Types G, G-GC, S, SC, SCE, SCT, SE, SEO, SEOO, SEW, SEOW, SEOOW, SO, SOO, SOW, SOOW, ST, STO, STOO, STW, STOW, STOOW, PPE, and W shall be permitted for use on theater stages, in garages, and elsewhere where flexible cords are permitted by this Code. 8The third conductor in Type HPN shall be used as an equipment grounding conductor only. The insulation of the equipment grounding conductor for Types SPE-1, SPE-2, SPE-3, SPT-1, SPT-2, SPT-3, NISPT-1, NISPT-2, NISPE-1, and NISPE-2 shall be permitted to be thermoset polymer. 9Cords that comply with the requirements for outdoor cords and are so listed shall be permitted to be designated as weather and water resistant with the suffix “W” after the Code type designation. Cords with the “W” suffix are suitable for use in wet locations and are sunlight resistant.

10The required outer covering on some single-conductor cables may be integral with the insulation. 11Types TPT and TST shall be permitted in lengths not exceeding 2.5 m (8 ft) where attached directly, or by means of a special type of plug, to a portable appliance rated at 50 watts or less and of such nature that extreme flexibility of the cord is essential. 70–294 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 400 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND FLEXIBLE CABLES 400.12 ∆ Table 400.5(A)(1) Ampacity for Flexible Cords and Flexible Cables [Based on Ambient Temperature of 30°C (86°F). See 400.13 and Table 400.4.] Thermoset Types C, E, EO, PD, S, SJ, SJO, SJOW, SJOO, SJOOW, SO, SOW, SOO, SOOW, SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, SRD, SV, SVO, SVOO, NISP-1, NISP-2 Thermoplastic Types ETP, ETT, NISPE-1, NISPE-2, NISPT-1, NISPT-2, SE, SEW, SEO, SEOO, SEOW, SEOOW, SJE, SJEW, SJEO, SJEOO, SJEOW, SJEOOW, SJT, SJTW, SJTO, SJTOW, SJTOO, SJTOOW, SPE-1, SPE-2, SPE-3, SPT-1, SPT-1W, SPT-2, SPT-2W, SPT-3, ST, STW, SRDE, SRDT, STO, Types HPD, HPN, HSJ, Copper Conductor Thermoplastic Types STOW, STOO, STOOW, SVE, SVEO, SVEOO, SVT, HSJO, HSJOW, HSJOO, Size (AWG) TPT, TST SVTO, SVTOO HSJOOW Column A 1 Column B2 273 0.5 — — — 20 — 5 4 5 — 18 — 7 10 10 17 — 9 12 13 16 — 10 13 15 15 — 12 16 17 14 — 15 18 20 13 — 17 21 — 12 — 20 25 30 11 — 23 27 — 10 — 25 30 35 9 — 29 34 — 8 — 35 40 — 7 — 40 47 — 6 — 45 55 — 5 — 52 62 — 4 — 60 70 — 3 — 70 82 — 2 — 80 95 —

1 The currents under Column A apply to three-conductor cords and other multiconductor cords connected to utilization equipment so that only three-conductors are current-carrying. 2 The currents under Column B apply to two-conductor cords and other multiconductor cords connected to utilization equipment so that only two conductors are current-carrying. 3 Tinsel cord. 4 Elevator cables only. 5 7 amperes for elevator cables only; 2 amperes for other types. (8) Appliances where the fastening means and mechanical (B) Attachment Plugs. Where used as permitted in 400.10(A) connections are specifically designed to permit ready removal (3), (A)(6), and (A)(8), each flexible cord shall be equipped for maintenance and repair, and the appliance is intended with an attachment plug and shall be energized from a recep- or identified for flexible cord connection. tacle outlet or cord connector body. (9) Connection of moving parts. Exception: As permitted in 368.56. (10) Where specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code.

(11) Between an existing receptacle outlet and an inlet, where ∆ 400.12 Uses Not Permitted. Unless specifically permitted in the inlet provides power to an additional single recepta- 400.10, flexible cords, flexible cables, cord sets, and power sup- cle outlet. The wiring interconnecting the inlet to the sin- ply cords shall not be used for the following: gle receptacle outlet shall be a Chapter 3 wiring method. (1) As a substitute for the fixed wiring of a structure The inlet, receptacle outlet, and Chapter 3 wiring method, (2) Where run through holes in walls, structural ceilings, sus- including the flexible cord and fittings, shall be a listed pended ceilings, dropped ceilings, or floors assembly specific for this application. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–295

400.12 ARTICLE 400 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND FLEXIBLE CABLES Table 400.5(A)(2) Ampacity of Cable Types SC, SCE, SCT, PPE, G, G-GC, and W [Based on Ambient Temperature of 30°C (86°F). See Table 400.4.] Temperature Rating of Cable Copper Conductor 60°C (140°F) 75°C (167°F) 90°C (194°F) Size (AWG or kcmil) D1 E2 F3 D1 E2 F3 D1 E2 F3 12 — 31 26 — 37 31 — 42 35 10 — 44 37 — 52 43 — 59 49 8 60 55 48 70 65 57 80 74 65 6 80 72 63 95 88 77 105 99 87 4 105 96 84 125 115 101 140 130 114 3 120 113 99 145 135 118 165 152 133 2 140 128 112 170 152 133 190 174 152 1 165 150 131 195 178 156 220 202 177 1/0 195 173 151 230 207 181 260 234 205 2/0 225 199 174 265 238 208 300 271 237 3/0 260 230 201 310 275 241 350 313 274 4/0 300 265 232 360 317 277 405 361 316 250 340 296 259 405 354 310 455 402 352 300 375 330 289 445 395 346 505 449 393 350 420 363 318 505 435 381 570 495 433 400 455 392 343 545 469 410 615 535 468 500 515 448 392 620 537 470 700 613 536 600 575 — — 690 — — 780 — — 700 630 — — 755 — — 855 — — 750 655 — — 785 — — 885 — — 800 680 — — 815 — — 920 — — 900 730 — — 870 — — 985 — —

1000 780 — — 935 — — 1055 — — 1The ampacities under subheading D shall be permitted for single-conductor Types SC, SCE, SCT, PPE, and W cable only where the individual conductors are not installed in raceways and are not in physical contact with each other except in lengths not to exceed 600 mm (24 in.) where passing through the wall of an enclosure. 2The ampacities under subheading E apply to two-conductor cables and other multiconductor cables connected to utilization equipment so that only two conductors are current-carrying. 3The ampacities under subheading F apply to three-conductor cables and other multiconductor cables connected to utilization equipment so that only three conductors are current-carrying. Table 400.5(A)(3) Adjustment Factors for More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in a Flexible Cord or Flexible Cable Percent of Value in able 400.5(A)(1) and Number of Conductors Table 400.5(A)(2) 4–6 80 7–9 70 10–20 50 21–30 45 31–40 40 41 and above 35

(3) Where run through doorways, windows, or similar openings Exception to (5): Flexible cords, flexible cables, and power (4) Where attached to building surfaces supply cords shall be permitted if contained within an enclo- sure for use in other spaces used for environmental air as per- Exception to (4): Flexible cord and flexible cable shall be per- mitted by 300.22(C)(3). mitted to be attached to building surfaces in accordance with 368.56(B) and 590.4. (6) Where installed in raceways, except as otherwise permitted in this Code (5) Where concealed by walls, floors, or ceilings or located (7) Where subject to physical damage above suspended or dropped ceilings 70–296 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 400 — FLEXIBLE CORDS AND FLEXIBLE CABLES 400.22 Informational Note: For proper application see UL 817, 400.21 Construction. CordSets and Power-Supply Cords, and UL 62, Flexible (A) Conductors. The individual conductors of a flexible Cords and Cables. cord or flexible cable shall have copper flexible stranding and 400.13 Splices. Flexible cord shall be used only in continuous shall not be smaller than the sizes specified in Table 400.4. lengths without splice or tap where initially installed in appli- (B) Nominal Insulation Thickness. The nominal thickness of cations permitted by 400.10(A). The repair of hard-service insulation for conductors of flexible cords and flexible cables cord and junior hard-service cord (see Trade Name column in shall not be less than specified in Table 400.4. Table 400.4) 14 AWG and larger shall be permitted if conduc- tors are spliced in accordance with 110.14(B) and the com- 400.22 Grounded-Conductor Identification. One conduc-

pleted splice retains the insulation, outer sheath properties, and tor of flexible cords that is intended to be used as a grounded usage characteristics of the cord being spliced circuit conductor shall have a continuous marker that readily distinguishes it from the other conductor or conductors. The 400.14 Pull at Joints and Terminals. Flexible cords and identification shall consist of one of the methods indicated in flexible cables shall be connected to devices and to fittings so 400.22(A) through (F). that tension is not transmitted to joints or terminals. (A) Colored Braid. A braid finished to show a white or gray Exception: Listed portable single-pole devices that are intended color and the braid on the other conductor or conductors fin- to accommodate such tension at their terminals shall be permit- ished to show a readily distinguishable solid color or colors. ted to be used with single-conductor flexible cable. (B) Tracer in Braid. A tracer in a braid of any color contrast- Informational Note: Some methods of preventing pull

ing with that of the braid and no tracer in the braid of the other on a cord from being transmitted to joints or terminals conductor or conductors. No tracer shall be used in the braid of include knotting the cord, winding with tape, and using any conductor of a flexible cord that contains a conductor hav- support or strain-relief fittings. ing a braid finished to show white or gray. 400.15 In Show Windows and Showcases. Flexible cords Exception: In the case of Types C and PD and cords having used in show windows and showcases shall be Types S, SE, the braids on the individual conductors finished to show white SEO, SEOO, SJ, SJE, SJEO, SJEOO, SJO, SJOO, SJT, SJTO, or gray. In such cords, the identifying marker shall be permit- SJTOO, SO, SOO, ST, STO, STOO, SEW, SEOW, SEOOW, ted to consist of the solid white or gray finish on one conduc- SJEW, SJEOW, SJEOOW, SJOW, SJOOW, SJTW, SJTOW, tor, provided there is a colored tracer in the braid of each other SJTOOW, SOW, SOOW, STW, STOW, or STOOW. conductor. Exception No. 1: For the wiring of chain-supported luminaires.

(C) Colored Insulation. A white or gray insulation on one Exception No. 2: As supply cords for portable luminaires and conductor and insulation of a readily distinguishable color or other merchandise being displayed or exhibited. colors on the other conductor or conductors for cords having no braids on the individual conductors. 400.16 Overcurrent Protection. Flexible cords not smaller than 18 AWG, and tinsel cords or cords having equivalent char- For jacketed cords furnished with appliances, one conductor acteristics of smaller size approved for use with specific appli- having its insulation colored light blue, with the other conduc- ances, shall be considered as protected against overcurrent in tors having their insulation of a readily distinguishable color accordance with 240.5. other than white or gray. ∆ 400.17 Protection from Damage. Flexible cords and flexible Exception: Cords that have insulation on the individual con- cables shall be protected by bushings or fittings where passing ductors integral with the jacket. through holes in covers, outlet boxes, or similar enclosures.

The insulation shall be permitted to be covered with an outer In industrial establishments where the conditions of mainte- finish to provide the desired color. nance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service (D) Colored Separator. A white or gray separator on one con- the installation, flexible cords and flexible cables shall be permit- ductor and a separator of a readily distinguishable solid color on ted to be installed in aboveground raceways that are no longer the other conductor or conductors of cords having insulation on than 15 m (50 ft) to protect the flexible cord or flexible cable the individual conductors integral with the jacket. from physical damage. Where more than three current-carrying conductors are installed within the raceway, the ampacity shall be (E) Tinned Conductors. One conductor having the individual adjusted in accordance with Table 400.5(A)(3). strands tinned and the other conductor or conductors having the individual strands untinned for cords having insulation on the Part II.

Construction Specifications individual conductors integral with the jacket. 400.20 Labels. Flexible cords shall be examined and tested at (F) Surface Marking. One or more ridges, grooves, or white the factory and labeled before shipment. stripes located on the exterior of the cord so as to identify one 2022 California Electrical Code 70–297

400.23 ARTICLE 402 — FIXTURE WIRES conductor for cords having insulation on the individual conduc- 400.36 Splices and Terminations. Portable cables shall not tors integral with the jacket. contain splices unless the splices are of the permanent molded, vulcanized types in accordance with 110.14(B). Terminations 400.23 Equipment Grounding Conductor Identification. A on portable cables rated over 600 volts, nominal, shall be acces- conductor intended to be used as an equipment grounding sible only to authorized and qualified personnel. conductor shall have a continuous identifying marker readily distinguishing it from the other conductor or conductors. Con- ductors having a continuous green color or a continuous green color with one or more yellow stripes shall not be used for other ARTICLE 402 than equipment grounding conductors. Cords or cables con- Fixture Wires sisting of integral insulation and a jacket without a nonintegral equipment grounding conductor shall be permitted to be green. The identifying marker shall consist of one of the methods in 402.1 Scope.

This article covers general requirements and con- 400.23(A) or (B). struction specifications for fixture wires. (A) Colored Braid. A braid finished to show a continuous 402.2 Other Articles. Fixture wires shall comply with this green color or a continuous green color with one or more yel- article and also with the applicable provisions of other articles low stripes. of this Code. (B) Colored Insulation or Covering. For cords having no Informational Note: For application in luminaires, see braids on the individual conductors, an insulation of a continu- Article 410. ous green color or a continuous green color with one or more 402.3 Types. Fixture wires shall be of a type listed in Table 402.3, yellow stripes. and they shall comply with all requirements of that table. The 400.24 Attachment Plugs. Where a flexible cord is provided fixture wires listed in Table 402.3 are all suitable for service at with an equipment grounding conductor and equipped with 600 volts, nominal, unless otherwise specified. an attachment plug, the attachment plug shall comply with

Informational Note: Thermoplastic insulation may stiffen 250.138(A) and (B). at temperatures lower than –10°C (+14°F). Thermo- plastic insulation may also be deformed at normal tem- Part III. Portable Cables Over 600 Volts, Nominal peratures where subjected to pressure, such as at points 400.30 Scope. Part III applies to single and multiconduc- of support. tor portable cables used to connect mobile equipment and ∆ 402.5 Ampacities for Fixture Wires. The ampacity of fixture machinery. wire shall be as specified in Table 402.5. 400.31 Construction. No conductor shall be used under such conditions that its (A) Conductors. The conductors shall be 12 AWG copper or operating temperature exceeds the temperature specified in larger and shall employ flexible stranding. Table 402.3 for the type of insulation involved. (B) Equipment Grounding Conductor(s). An equipment Informational Note: See 310.14(A)(3) for temperature ground ing conductor(s) shall be provided in cables with three or limitation of conductors. more conductors. The total area shall not be less than that of the

size of the equipment grounding conductor required in 250.122. 402.6 Minimum Size. Fixture wires shall not be smaller than 18 AWG. 400.32 Shielding. All shields shall be connected to an equip- ment grounding conductor. 402.7 Number of Conductors in Conduit or Tubing. The number of fixture wires permitted in a single conduit or tub- 400.33 Equipment Grounding Conductors. Equipment ing shall not exceed the percentage fill specified in Table 1, grounding conductors shall be connected in accordance with Chapter 9. Parts VI and VII of Article 250. 402.8 Grounded Conductor Identification. Fixture wires 400.34 Minimum Bending Radii. The minimum bending radii that are intended to be used as grounded conductors shall be for portable cables during installation and handling in service identified by one or more continuous white stripes on other shall be adequate to prevent damage to the cable. than green insulation or by the means described in 400.22(A) 400.35 Fittings. Connectors used to connect lengths of cable through (E). in a run shall be of a type that locks firmly together. Provisions

∆ 402.9 Marking. shall be made to prevent opening or closing these connectors while energized. Suitable means shall be used to eliminate ten- (A) Method of Marking. Thermoplastic insulated fixture wire sion at connectors and terminations. shall be durably marked on the surface at intervals not exceeding 70–298 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 402 — FIXTURE WIRES 402.9 ∆ Table 402.3 Fixture Wires Thickness of Insulation Maximum Type Outer Operating Application Name Letter Insulation AWG mm mils Covering Temperature Provisions Heat-resistant rubber- FFH-2 Heat-resistant rubber 18–16 0.76 30 Nonmetallic 75°C Fixture wiring covered fixture wire — or cross-linked covering (167°F) flexible stranding FFHH-2 synthetic polymer 90°C (194°F) ECTFE — solid or 7-strand HF Ethylene 18–14 0.38 15 None 150°C Fixture wiring chlorotri- (302°F) fluoroethylene ECTFE — flexible HFF Ethylene 18–14 0.38 15 None 150°C Fixture wiring stranding chlorotriflu- (302°F) oroethylene Tape insulated fixture KF-1 Aromatic polyimide 18–10 0.14 5.5 None 200°C Fixture wiring — wire — solid or 7-strand tape (392°F) limited to 300 volts KF-2 Aromatic polyimide 18–10 0.21 8.4 None 200°C Fixture wiring tape (392°F) Tape insulated fixture KFF-1 Aromatic polyimide 18–10 0.14 5.5 None 200°C Fixture wiring — wire — flexible tape (392°F) limited to stranding 300 volts KFF-2 Aromatic polyimide 18–10 0.21 8.4 None 200°C Fixture wiring tape (392°F)

Perfluoro-alkoxy — solid PAF Perfluoro-alkoxy 18–14 0.51 20 None 250°C Fixture wiring (nickel or 7-strand (nickel or (482°F) or nickel-coated nickel-coated copper) copper) Perfluoro-alkoxy — PAFF Perfluoro-alkoxy 18–14 0.51 20 None 150°C Fixture wiring flexible stranding (302°F) Fluorinated ethylene propylene PF Fluorinated ethylene 18–14 0.51 20 None 200°C Fixture wiring fixture wire — solid or propylene (392°F) 7-strand Fluorinated ethylene propylene PFF Fluorinated ethylene 18–14 0.51 20 None 150°C Fixture wiring fixture wire —flexible propylene (302°F) stranding Fluorinated ethylene propylene PGF Fluorinated ethylene 18–14 0.36 14 Glass braid 200°C Fixture wiring fixture wire — solid or propylene (392°F) 7-strand Fluorinated ethylene propylene PGFF Fluorinated ethylene 18–14 0.36 14 Glass braid 150°C Fixture wiring fixture wire — flexible propylene (302°F) stranding Extruded PTF Extruded 18–14 0.51 20 None 250°C Fixture wiring polytetrafluoroethylene — polytetraflu- (482°F) (nickel or solid or 7-strand oroethylene nickel-coated (nickel or nickel- copper) coated copper)

Extruded PTFF Extruded 18–14 0.51 20 None 150°C (302°F) Fixture wiring polytetrafluoroethylene — polytetraflu- (silver or flexible stranding 26-36 oroethylene nickel-coated (AWG silver or nickel-coated copper) copper) Heat-resistant rubber- RFH-1 Heat-resistant rubber 18 0.38 15 Nonmetallic 75°C (167°F) Fixture wiring — covered fixture wire — covering limited to solid or 7-strand 300 volts RFH-2 Heat-resistant 18–16 0.76 30 None or 75°C (167°F) Fixture wiring rubber nonmetallic Cross-linked covering synthetic polymer Heat-resistant cross-linked RFHH-2* Cross-linked 18–16 0.76 30 None or 90°C (194°F) Fixture wiring synthetic polymer- synthetic polymer nonmetallic insulated fixture wire — covering solid or 7-strand RFHH-3* 18–16 1.14 45 (continues) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–299

402.10 ARTICLE 402 — FIXTURE WIRES ∆ Table 402.3 Continued Thickness of Insulation Maximum Type Outer Operating Application Name Letter Insulation AWG mm mils Covering Temperature Provisions Silicone insulated fixture SF-1 Silicone rubber 18 0.38 15 Nonmetallic 200°C (392°F) Fixture wiring — wire — solid or 7-strand covering limited to 300 volts SF-2 Silicone rubber 18–12 0.76 30 Nonmetallic 200°C (392°F) Fixture wiring 10 1.14 45 covering Silicone insulated fixture SFF-1 Silicone rubber 18 0.38 15 Nonmetallic 150°C (302°F) Fixture wiring — wire — flexible stranding covering limited to 300 volts SFF-2 Silicone rubber 18–12 0.76 30 Nonmetallic 150°C (302°F) Fixture wiring 10 1.14 45 covering Thermoplastic covered fixture TF* Thermoplastic 18–16 0.76 30 None 60°C (140°F) Fixture wiring wire — solid or 7-strand Thermoplastic covered fixture TFF* Thermoplastic 18–16 0.76 30 None 60°C (140°F) Fixture wiring wire — flexible stranding Heat-resistant thermoplastic TFN* Thermoplastic 18–16 0.38 15 Nylon-jacketed 90°C (194°F) Fixture wiring covered fixture wire — solid or equivalent

or 7-strand Heat-resistant thermoplastic TFFN* Thermoplastic 18–16 0.38 15 Nylon-jacketed 90°C (194°F) Fixture wiring covered fixture wire — or equivalent flexible stranded Cross-linked polyolefin XF* Cross-linked 18–14 0.76 30 None 150°C (302°F) Fixture wiring — insulated fixture wire — polyolefin 12-10 1.14 45 limited to solid or 7-strand 300 volts Cross-linked polyolefin XFF* Cross-linked 18–14 0.76 30 None 150°C (302°F) Fixture wiring — insulated fixture wire — polyolefin 12–10 1.14 45 limited to flexible stranded 300 volts Modified ETFE — solid or ZF Modified ethylene 18–14 0.38 15 None 150°C (302°F) Fixture wiring 7-strand tetrafluoro- ethylene Modified ETFE — ZFF Modified ethylene 18–14 0.38 15 None 150°C (302°F) Fixture wiring flexible stranding tetrafluoro- ethylene High temp. modified ETFE— ZHF Modified ethylene 18–14 0.38 15 None 200°C (392°F) Fixture wiring solid or 7-strand tetrafluoro- ethylene *Insulations and outer coverings that meet the requirements of flame retardant, limited smoke, and are so listed, shall be permitted to be marked for limited smoke

after the Code type designation. ∆ Table 402.5 Ampacity for Fixture Wires but are not limited to, markings for limited smoke, sunlight resistance, and so forth. Size (AWG) Ampacity 402.10 Uses Permitted. Fixture wires shall be permitted (1) for installation in luminaires and in similar equipment where 18 6 16 8 enclosed or protected and not subject to bending or twisting in 14 17 use, or (2) for connecting luminaires to the branch-circuit con- 12 23 ductors supplying the luminaires. 10 28 402.12 Uses Not Permitted. Fixture wires shall not be used as branch-circuit conductors except as permitted elsewhere in this Code. 610 mm (24 in.). All other fixture wire shall be marked by means 402.14 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection for of a printed tag attached to the coil, reel, or carton. fixture wires shall be as specified in 240.5. (B) Optional Marking. Fixture wire types listed in Table 402.3 shall be permitted to be surface marked to indicate special characteristics of the cable materials. These markings include, 70–300 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 404 — SWITCHES 404.4 (3) Where snap switches with integral enclosures comply with ARTICLE 404 300.15(E) Switches (4) Where lighting in the area is controlled by automatic means (5) Where a switch controls a receptacle load The grounded conductor shall be extended to any switch loca- C Note: For applications listed in Section 1.9.1 of the California tion as necessary and shall be connected to switching devices A Building Code, regulated by the Division of the State Architect — C that require line-to-neutral voltage to operate the electronics of Access Compliance see California Code of Regulations, Title 24, A the switch in the standby mode and shall meet the requirements C Part 2 (California Building Code), California Chapter 1 (Divi- of 404.22. A sion 1 California Administration) under authority cited by Govern- C ment Code Section 4450 and in reference cited by Government Exception: The connection requirement shall become effective C Code Sections 4450, through 4461, 12955.1 and Health and on January 1, 2020. It shall not apply to replacement or retro- A

Safety Code Sections 18949.1, 19952 through 19959. fit switches installed in locations prior to local adoption of C 404.2(C) and where the grounded conductor cannot be extended Part I. Installation without removing finish materials. The number of electronic 404.1 Scope. This article covers all switches, switching devices, control switches on a branch circuit shall not exceed five, and and circuit breakers used as switches operating at 1000 volts and the number connected to any feeder on the load side of a system below, unless specifically referenced elsewhere in this Code for or main bonding jumper shall not exceed 25. For the purpose of higher voltages. this exception, a neutral busbar, in compliance with 200.2(B) and to which a main or system bonding jumper is connected 404.2 Switch Connections. shall not be limited as to the number of electronic lighting con- (A) Three-Way and Four-Way Switches. Three-way and four- trol switches connected. way switches shall be wired so that all switching is done only Informational Note: The provision for a (future)

in the ungrounded circuit conductor. Where in metal raceways grounded conductor is to complete a circuit path for elec- or metal-armored cables, wiring between switches and outlets tronic lighting control devices. shall be in accordance with 300.20(A). 404.3 Enclosure. Exception: Switch loops shall not require a grounded conductor. (A) General. Switches and circuit breakers shall be of the (B) Grounded Conductors. Switches or circuit breakers externally operable type mounted in an enclosure listed for the shall not disconnect the grounded conductor of a circuit. intended use. The minimum wire-bending space at terminals and Exception: A switch or circuit breaker shall be permitted to minimum gutter space provided in switch enclosures shall be as disconnect a grounded circuit conductor where all circuit con- required in 312.6. ductors are disconnected simultaneously, or where the device Exception No. 1: Pendant- and surface-type snap switches is arranged so that the grounded conductor cannot be discon- and knife switches mounted on an open-face switchboard or

nected until all the ungrounded conductors of the circuit have panelboard shall be permitted without enclosures. been disconnected. Exception No. 2: Switches and circuit breakers installed in ∆ (C) Switches Controlling Lighting Loads. The grounded accordance with 110.27(A)(1), (A)(2), (A)(3), or (A)(4) shall circuit conductor for the controlled lighting circuit shall be be permitted without enclosures. installed at the location where switches control lighting loads that are supplied by a grounded general-purpose branch circuit (B) Used as a Raceway. Enclosures shall not be used as serving bathrooms, hallways, stairways, and habitable rooms or junction boxes, auxiliary gutters, or raceways for conductors occupiable spaces as defined in the applicable building code. feeding through or tapping off to other switches or overcurrent Where multiple switch locations control the same lighting load devices, unless the enclosure complies with 312.8. such that the entire floor area of the room or space is visible from 404.4 Damp or Wet Locations.

the single or combined switch locations, the grounded circuit conductor shall only be required at one location. A grounded con- (A) Surface-Mounted Switch or Circuit Breaker. A surface- ductor shall not be required to be installed at lighting switch mounted switch or circuit breaker shall be enclosed in a weather- locations under any of the following conditions: proof enclosure or cabinet that complies with 312.2. (1) Where conductors enter the box enclosing the switch through (B) Flush-Mounted Switch or Circuit Breaker. A flush- a raceway, provided that the raceway is large enough for all mounted switch or circuit breaker shall be equipped with a weath- contained conductors, including a grounded conductor erproof cover. (2) Where the box enclosing the switch is accessible for the (C) Switches in Tub or Shower Spaces. Switches shall not installation of an additional or replacement cable without be installed within tub or shower spaces unless installed as part removing finish materials of a listed tub or shower assembly. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–301

404.5 ARTICLE 404 — SWITCHES C [OSHPD 1, 2, 4 & 5] Switches that are not part of a listed tub or 404.7 Indicating. General-use and motor-circuit switches, A shower assembly shall not be installed within shower rooms or circuit breakers, and molded case switches, where mounted in an C stalls, or be accessible from within those areas. Switches shall enclosure as described in 404.3, shall indicate, in a location that A not be installed within 900 mm (3 ft) of the perimeter of bathtubs is visible when accessing the external operating means, whether or shower stalls. they are in the open (off) or closed (on) position. A Exception 1: Bath station devices for Call Systems meeting the Where these switch or circuit breaker handles are operated requirements of 517.123(C)(4) shall be permitted to be installed vertically rather than rotationally or horizontally, the up posi- outside the perimeter of bathtubs or shower stalls. tion of the handle shall be the closed (on) position. Exception 2: Bath station devices for Call Systems meeting Exception No. 1:Vertically operated double-throw switches

the requirements of 517.123(C)(3) shall be permitted to be shall be permitted to be in the closed (on) position with the installed within the tub or shower spaces. handle in either the up or down position. 404.5 Time Switches, Flashers, and Similar Devices. Time Exception No. 2:On busway installations, tap switches switches, flashers, and similar devices shall be of the enclosed employing a center-pivoting handle shall be permitted to be type or shall be mounted in cabinets or boxes or equipment open or closed with either end of the handle in the up or down enclosures. Energized parts shall be barriered to prevent opera- position. The switch position shall be clearly indicating and shall tor exposure when making manual adjustments or switching. be visible from the floor or from the usual point of operation. Exception: Devices mounted so they are accessible only to 404.8 Accessibility and Grouping. qualified persons shall be permitted without barriers, provided (A) Location. All switches and circuit breakers used as they are located within an enclosure such that any energized

switches shall be located so that they may be operated from parts within 152 mm (6.0 in.) of the manual adjustment or a readily accessible place. They shall be installed such that switch are covered by suitable barriers. the center of the grip of the operating handle of the switch or 404.6 Position and Connection of Switches. circuit breaker, when in its highest position, is not more than 2.0 m (6 ft 7 in.) above the floor or working platform. (A) Single-Throw Knife Switches. Single-throw knife switches shall be placed so that gravity will not tend to close them. Single- Exception No. 1: On busway installations, fused switches and throw knife switches, approved for use in the inverted position, circuit breakers shall be permitted to be located at the same shall be provided with an integral mechanical means that ensures level as the busway. Suitable means shall be provided to operate that the blades remain in the open position when so set. the handle of the device from the floor. (B) Double-Throw Knife Switches. Double-throw knife Exception No.

2: Switches and circuit breakers installed adja- switches shall be permitted to be mounted so that the throw is cent to motors, appliances, or other equipment that they supply either vertical or horizontal. Where the throw is vertical, inte- shall be permitted to be located higher than 2.0 m (6 ft 7 in.) and gral mechanical means shall be provided to hold the blades in to be accessible by portable means. the open position when so set. Exception No. 3: Hookstick operable isolating switches shall be (C) Connection of Switches. Single-throw knife switches permitted at greater heights. and switches with butt contacts shall be connected such that (B) Voltage Between Adjacent Devices. A snap switch shall their blades are de-energized when the switch is in the open not be grouped or ganged in enclosures with other snap switches, position. Bolted pressure contact switches shall have barriers receptacles, or similar devices, unless they are arranged so that that prevent inadvertent contact with energized blades. Single- the voltage between adjacent devices does not exceed 300 volts,

throw knife switches, bolted pressure contact switches, molded or unless they are installed in enclosures equipped with identi- case switches, switches with butt contacts, and circuit breakers fied, securely installed barriers between adjacent devices. used as switches shall be connected so that the terminals sup- plying the load are de-energized when the switch is in the open (C) Multipole Snap Switches. A multipole, general-use position. snap switch shall not be permitted to be fed from more than a single circuit unless it is listed and marked as a two-circuit or Exception: The blades and terminals supplying the load of a three- circuit switch. switch shall be permitted to be energized when the switch is in the open position where the switch is connected to circuits or equip- Informational Note: See 210.7 for disconnect require- ment inherently capable of providing a backfeed source of power. ments where more than one circuit supplies a switch. For such installations, a permanent sign shall be installed on ∆ 404.9 General-Use Snap Switches, Dimmers, and Control

the switch enclosure or immediately adjacent to open switches Switches. with the following words or equivalent: WARNING — LOAD SIDE TERMINALS MAY BE ENERGIZED BY BACKFEED. (A) Faceplates. Faceplates provided for snap switches, dim- The warning sign or label shall comply with 110.21(B). mers, and control switches mounted in boxes and other enclosures 70–302 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 404 — SWITCHES 404.13 shall be installed so as to completely cover the opening and, where 404.10 Mounting of General-Use Snap Switches, Dimmers, the switch is flush mounted, seat against the finished surface. and Control Switches. ∆ (B) Grounding. Snap switches, dimmers, and control switches (A) Surface Type. General-use snap switches, dimmers, and shall be connected to an equipment grounding conductor and control switches used with open wiring on insulators shall be shall provide a means to connect metal faceplates to the equip- mounted on insulating material that separates the conductors at ment grounding conductor, whether or not a metal faceplate is least 13 mm (1⁄2 in.) from the surface wired over. installed. Metal faceplates shall be bonded to the equipment (B) Box Mounted. Flush-type general-use snap switches, grounding conductor. Snap switches, dimmers, control switches, dimmers, and control switches mounted in boxes that are set and metal faceplates shall be connected to an equipment ground- back of the finished surface as permitted in 314.20 shall be

ing conductor using either of the following methods: installed so that the extension plaster ears are seated against (1) The switch is mounted with metal screws to a metal box or the surface. Flush-type devices mounted in boxes that are flush metal cover that is connected to an equipment grounding with the finished surface or project from it shall be installed so conductor or to a nonmetallic box with integral means for that the mounting yoke or strap of the device is seated against connecting to an equipment grounding conductor. the box. Screws used for the purpose of attaching a device to a (2) An equipment grounding conductor or equipment bonding box shall be of the type provided with a listed device, or shall jumper is connected to an equipment grounding termination be machine screws having 32 threads per inch or part of listed of the snap switch. assemblies or systems, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Exception No. 1 to (B): Where no means exists within the enclo-

sure for bonding to the equipment grounding conductor, or where 404.11 Circuit Breakers as Switches. A hand-operable circuit the wiring method does not include or provide an equipment breaker equipped with a lever or handle, or a power-operated cir- grounding conductor, a snap switch without a connection to an cuit breaker capable of being opened by hand in the event of a equipment grounding conductor shall be permitted for replace- power failure, shall be permitted to serve as a switch if it has the ment purposes only. A snap switch wired under the provisions required number of poles. of this exception and located within 2.5 m (8 ft) vertically, or Informational Note: See the provisions contained in 1.5 m (5 ft) horizontally, of ground or exposed grounded metal 240.81 and 240.83. objects shall be provided with a faceplate of nonconducting non- combustible material with nonmetallic attachment screws, unless 404.12 Grounding of Enclosures. Metal enclosures for switches

the switch mounting strap or yoke is nonmetallic or the circuit is or circuit breakers shall be connected to an equipment grounding protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter. conductor as specified in Part IV of Article 250. Metal enclo- sures for switches or circuit breakers used as service equip- Exception No. 2 to (B): Listed kits or listed assemblies shall not ment shall comply with the provisions of Part V of Article 250. be required to be bonded to an equipment grounding conductor Where nonmetallic enclosures are used with metal raceways or if all of the following conditions are met: metal-armored cables, they shall comply with 314.3, Exception (1) The device is provided with a nonmetallic faceplate, and No. 1 or No. 2. the device is designed such that no metallic faceplate Except as covered in 404.9(B), Exception No. 1, nonmetal- replaces the one provided. lic boxes for switches shall be installed with a wiring method (2) The device does not have mounting means to accept other that provides or includes an equipment grounding conductor. configurations of faceplates.

(3) The device is equipped with a nonmetallic yoke. 404.13 Knife Switches. (4) All parts of the device that are accessible after instal- (A) Isolating Switches. Knife switches rated at over lation of the faceplate are manufactured of nonmetallic 1200 amperes at 250 volts or less, and at over 1000 amperes at materials. 251 to 1000 volts, shall be used only as isolating switches and Exception No. 3 to (B): A snap switch with integral nonme- shall not be opened under load. tallic enclosure complying with 300.15(E) shall be permit- (B) To Interrupt Currents. To interrupt currents over ted without a bonding connection to an equipment grounding 1200 amperes at 250 volts, nominal, or less, or over 600 amperes conductor. at 251 to 1000 volts, nominal, a circuit breaker or a switch listed (C) Construction. Metal faceplates shall be of ferrous metal for such purpose shall be used. not less than 0.76 mm (0.030 in.) in thickness or of nonferrous (C) General-Use Switches. Knife switches of ratings less metal not less than 1.02 mm (0.040 in.) in thickness. Faceplates

than specified in 404.13(A) and (B) shall be considered gen- of insulating material shall be noncombustible and not less than eral-use switches. 2.54 mm (0.100 in.) in thickness, but they shall be permitted to be less than 2.54 mm (0.100 in.) in thickness if formed or rein- Informational Note: See the definition of General-Use forced to provide adequate mechanical strength. Switch in Article 100. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–303

404.14 ARTICLE 404 — SWITCHES (D) Motor-Circuit Switches. Motor-circuit switches shall be in 404.14(A) and (B). These switches shall be used only for con- permitted to be of the knife-switch type. trolling any of the following: Informational Note: See the definition of a Motor-Circuit (1) Noninductive loads other than tungsten-filament lamps not Switch in Article 100. exceeding the ampere and voltage ratings of the switch. (2) Inductive loads not exceeding the ampere and voltage rat- 404.14 Rating and Use of Switches. Switches shall be listed ings of the switch. Where particular load characteristics or and used within their ratings. Switches of the types covered in limitations are specified as a condition of the listing, those 404.14(A) through (E) shall be limited to the control of loads as restrictions shall be observed regardless of the ampere rat- specified accordingly. Switches used to control cord-and-plug- ing of the load. connected loads shall be limited as covered in 404.14(F). (3) Electronic ballasts, self-ballasted lamps, compact fluo- Informational Note No.

1: For switches for signs and rescent lamps, and LED lamp loads with their associated outline lighting, see 600.6. drivers, not exceeding 20 amperes and not exceeding the Informational Note No. 2: For switches controlling ampere rating of the switch at the voltage applied. • motors, see 430.83, 430.109, and 430.110. (E) Dimmer and Electronic Control Switches. General- (A) Alternating-Current General-Use Snap Switch. This use dimmer switches shall be used only to control permanently form of switch shall only be used on ac circuits and used for installed incandescent luminaires unless listed for the control controlling the following: of other loads and installed accordingly. Other electronic con- trol switches, such as timing switches and occupancy sensors, (1) Resistive and inductive loads not exceeding the ampere rat- shall be used to control permanently connected loads. They shall ing of the switch at the voltage applied be marked by their manufacturer with their current and voltage (2) Tungsten-filament lamp loads not exceeding the ampere

ratings and used for loads that do not exceed their ampere rat- rating of the switch at 120 volts ing at the voltage applied. (3) Electric discharge lamp loads not exceeding the marked ∆ ampere and voltage rating of the switch (F) Cord- and Plug-Connected Loads. Where a snap switch (4) Motor loads not exceeding 80 percent of the ampere rating or control device is used to control cord-and-plug-connected of the switch at its rated voltage equipment on a general-purpose branch circuit, each snap switch (5) Electronic ballasts, self-ballasted lamps, compact fluo- or control device controlling receptacle outlets or cord con- rescent lamps, and LED lamp loads with their associated nectors that are supplied by permanently connected cord pen- drivers, not exceeding 20 amperes and not exceeding the dants shall be rated at not less than the rating of the maximum ampere rating of the switch at the voltage applied permitted ampere rating or setting of the overcurrent device protecting the receptacles or cord connectors, as provided in (B) Alternating-Current or Direct-Current General-Use

210.21(B). Snap Switch. This form of switch shall be permitted on either ac or dc circuits and used only for controlling the following: Informational Note: See 210.50(A) and 400.10(A)(1) for equivalency to a receptacle outlet of a cord connector (1) Resistive loads not exceeding the ampere rating of the that is supplied by a permanently connected cord pendant. switch at the voltage applied. (2) Inductive loads not exceeding 50 percent of the ampere rat- Exception: Where a snap switch or control device is used to ing of the switch at the applied voltage. Switches rated in control not more than one receptacle on a branch circuit, the horsepower are suitable for controlling motor loads within switch or control device shall be permitted to be rated at not less their rating at the voltage applied. than the rating of the receptacle. (3) Tungsten-filament lamp loads not exceeding the ampere rat- Part II. Construction Specifications ing of the switch at the applied voltage if T-rated. (4) Electronic ballasts, self-ballasted lamps, compact fluores- 404.20 Marking.

cent lamps, and LED lamp loads with their associated driv- (A) Ratings. Switches shall be marked with the current, volt- ers, not exceeding the ampere rating of the switch at the age, and, if horsepower rated, the maximum rating for which voltage applied. they are designed. ∆ (C) CO/ALR Snap Switches. Snap switches directly con- (B) Off Indication. Where in the off position, a switching nected to aluminum conductors and rated 20 amperes or less device with a marked OFF position shall completely disconnect shall be marked CO/ALR. all ungrounded conductors to the load it controls. (D) Alternating-Current General-Use Snap Switches Rated ∆ 404.22 Electronic Control Switches. Electronic control for 347 Volts. This form of switch shall not be rated less than switches shall be listed. Electronic control switches shall not 15 amperes at a voltage of 347 volts ac, and they shall not be introduce current on the equipment grounding conductor during readily interchangeable in box mounting with switches covered normal operation. The requirement to not introduce current on the

70–304 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 406 — RECEPTACLES, CORD CONNECTORS, AND ATTACHMENT PLUGS (CAPS) 406.3 equipment grounding conductor shall take effect on January 1, and ampere ratings. Receptacles shall not be permitted to be 2020. reconditioned. Exception: Electronic control switches that introduce current (B) Rating. Receptacles and cord connectors shall be rated not on the equipment grounding conductor shall be permitted for less than 15 amperes, 125 volts, or 15 amperes, 250 volts, and applications covered by 404.2(C), Exception. Electronic control shall be of a type not suitable for use as lampholders. switches that introduce current on the equipment grounding con- Informational Note: See 210.21(B) for receptacle ratings ductor shall be listed and marked for use in replacement or retrofit where installed on branch circuits. applications only. (C) Receptacles for Aluminum Conductors. Receptacles 404.26 Knife Switches Rated 600 to 1000 Volts. Auxiliary rated 20 amperes or less and designed for the direct connection contacts of a renewable or quick-break type or the equivalent

of aluminum conductors shall be marked CO/ALR. shall be provided on all knife switches rated 600 to 1000 volts and designed for use in breaking current over 200 amperes. ∆ (D) Isolated Ground Receptacles. Receptacles incorpo- rating an isolated equipment grounding conductor connection 404.27 Fused Switches. A fused switch shall not have fuses intended for the reduction of electromagnetic interference as in parallel except as permitted in 240.8. permitted in 250.146(D) shall be identified by an orange tri- 404.28 Wire-Bending Space. The wire-bending space required angle located on the face of the receptacle. by 404.3 shall meet Table 312.6(B) spacings to the enclosure (1) Isolated Equipment Grounding Conductor Required. wall opposite the line and load terminals. Receptacles so identified shall be used only with equipment grounding conductors that are isolated in accordance with 250.146(D). ARTICLE 406 (2) Installation in Nonmetallic Boxes. Isolated ground Receptacles, Cord Connectors, receptacles installed in nonmetallic boxes shall be covered with and Attachment Plugs (Caps)

a nonmetallic faceplate. Exception: Where an isolated ground receptacle is installed in C Note: For applications listed in Section 1.9.1 of the California a nonmetallic box, a metal faceplate shall be permitted if the A Building Code, regulated by the Division of the State Architect — box contains a feature or accessory that permits the connection C Access Compliance see California Code of Regulations, Title 24, of the faceplate to the equipment grounding conductor. A Part 2 (California Building Code), Chapter 1 (Division 1 Cali- C (E) Controlled Receptacle Marking. All nonlocking-type, A fornia Administration) under authority cited by Government 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles that are controlled by C Code Section 4450 and in reference cited by Government Code an automatic control device, or that incorporate control fea- A Sections 4450, through 4461, 12955.1 and Health and Safety C tures that remove power from the receptacle for the purpose Code Sections 18949.1, 19952 through 19959. A of energy management or building automation, shall be perma- 406.1 Scope.

This article covers the rating, type, and installation nently marked with the symbol shown in Figure 406.3(E) and of receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs (cord caps). the word “controlled.” 406.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply For receptacles controlled by an automatic control device, only within this article. the marking shall be located on the receptacle face and visible after installation. Child Care Facility. A building or structure, or portion thereof, for educational, supervisory, or personal care services for more In both cases where a multiple receptacle device is used, the than four children 7 years old or less. required marking of the word “controlled” and symbol shall denote which contact device(s) are controlled. Outlet Box Hood. A housing shield intended to fit over a face- plate for flush-mounted wiring devices, or an integral compo- Exception: The marking shall not be required for receptacles nent of an outlet box or of a faceplate for flush-mounted wiring controlled by a wall switch that provide the required room light- devices.

The hood does not serve to complete the electrical ing outlets as permitted by 210.70. enclosure; it reduces the risk of water coming in contact with electrical components within the hood, such as attachment plugs, current taps, surge protective devices, direct plug-in transformer units, or wiring devices. 406.3 Receptacle Rating and Type. Controlled (A) Receptacles. Receptacles shall be listed and marked with the manufacturer’s name or identification and voltage FIGURE 406.3(E) Controlled Receptacle Marking Symbol. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–305

406.4 ARTICLE 406 — RECEPTACLES, CORD CONNECTORS, AND ATTACHMENT PLUGS (CAPS) (F) Receptacle with USB Charger. A 125-volt 15- or receptacle enclosure, the installation shall comply with 406.4(D) 20-ampere receptacle that additionally provides Class 2 power (2)(a), (D)(2)(b), or (D)(2)(c). shall be listed and constructed such that the Class 2 circuitry is (a) A non–grounding-type receptacle(s) shall be permitted integral with the receptacle. to be replaced with another non–grounding-type receptacle(s). (b) A non–grounding-type receptacle(s) shall be permit- 406.4 General Installation Requirements. Receptacle outlets ted to be replaced with a ground-fault circuit interrupter-type shall be located in branch circuits in accordance with Part III of of receptacle(s). These receptacles or their cover plates shall Article 210. General installation requirements shall be in accor- be marked “No Equipment Ground.” An equipment ground- dance with 406.4(A) through (F). ing conductor shall not be connected from the ground-fault (A) Grounding Type.

Except as provided in 406.4(D), circuit-interrupter-type receptacle to any outlet supplied from receptacles installed on 15- and 20-ampere branch circuits shall the ground-fault circuit-interrupter receptacle. be of the grounding type. Grounding-type receptacles shall be (c) A non–grounding-type receptacle(s) shall be permit- installed only on circuits of the voltage class and current for ted to be replaced with a grounding-type receptacle(s) where which they are rated, except as provided in 210.21(B)(1) for supplied through a ground-fault circuit interrupter. Where single receptacles or Table 210.21(B)(2) and Table 210.21(B)(3) grounding-type receptacles are supplied through the ground- for two or more receptacles. fault circuit interrupter, grounding-type receptacles or their cover (B) To Be Grounded. Receptacles and cord connectors that plates shall be marked “GFCI Protected” and “No Equipment have equipment grounding conductor contacts shall have those Ground,” visible after installation. An equipment grounding contacts connected to an equipment grounding conductor.

conductor shall not be connected between the grounding-type receptacles. Exception No. 1: Receptacles mounted on portable and vehicle- mounted generator sets and generators in accordance with Informational Note No. 1: Some equipment or appli- 250.34. ance manufacturers require that the branch circuit to the equipment or appliance includes an equipment grounding Exception No. 2: Replacement receptacles as permitted by conductor. 406.4(D). Informational Note No. 2: See 250.114 for a list of a cord- (C) Methods of Grounding. The equipment grounding con- and-plug-connected equipment or appliances that require ductor contacts of receptacles and cord connectors shall be an equipment grounding conductor. connected to the equipment grounding conductor of the circuit (3) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. Ground- supplying the receptacle or cord connector. fault circuit-interrupter protected receptacles shall be provided Informational Note: For installation requirements for the where replacements are made at receptacle outlets that are

reduction of electromagnetic interference, see 250.146(D). required to be so protected elsewhere in this Code. The branch-circuit wiring method shall include or provide Exception: Where the outlet box size will not permit the instal- an equipment grounding conductor to which the equipment lation of the GFCI receptacle, the receptacle shall be permit- grounding conductor contacts of the receptacle or cord connec- ted to be replaced with a new receptacle of the existing type, tor are connected. where GFCI protection is provided and the receptacle is marked “GFCI Protected” and “No Equipment Ground,” in accordance Informational Note No. 1: See 250.118 for acceptable with 406.4(D)(2)(a), (D)(2)(b), or (D)(2)(c), as applicable. grounding means. Informational Note No. 2: For extensions of existing ∆ (4) Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. If a recep- branch circuits, see 250.130. tacle outlet located in any areas specified in 210.12(A), (B), or (C) is replaced, a replacement receptacle at this outlet shall be (D) Replacements. Replacement of receptacles shall com-

one of the following: ply with 406.4(D)(1) through (D)(7), as applicable. Arc-fault circuit-interrupter type and ground-fault circuit-interrupter type (1) A listed outlet branch-circuit type arc-fault circuit- receptacles shall be installed in a readily accessible location. interrupter receptacle (2) A receptacle protected by a listed outlet branch-circuit type (1) Grounding-Type Receptacles. Where a grounding means arc-fault circuit-interrupter type receptacle exists in the receptacle enclosure or an equipment grounding (3) A receptacle protected by a listed combination type arc-fault conductor is installed in accordance with 250.130(C), grounding- circuit-interrupter type circuit breaker type receptacles shall be used and shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor in accordance with 406.4(C) or Exception: Section 210.12(D), Exception, shall not apply to 250.130(C). replacement of receptacles. ∆ (2) Non–Grounding-Type Receptacles. Where attachment (5) Tamper-Resistant Receptacles. Listed tamper-resistant

to an equipment grounding conductor does not exist in the receptacles shall be provided where replacements are made at 70–306 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 406 — RECEPTACLES, CORD CONNECTORS, AND ATTACHMENT PLUGS (CAPS) 406.6 receptacle outlets that are required to be tamper-resistant else- the plate cannot be installed on any other receptacle, shall be where in this Code, except where a non-grounding receptacle is permitted. replaced with another non-grounding receptacle. (E) Receptacles in Countertops. Receptacle assemblies for (6) Weather-Resistant Receptacles. Weather-resistant recep- installation in countertop surfaces shall be listed for countertop tacles shall be provided where replacements are made at recep- applications. Where receptacle assemblies for countertop appli- tacle outlets that are required to be so protected elsewhere in this cations are required to provide ground-fault circuit-interrupter Code. protection for personnel in accordance with 210.8, such assem- blies shall be permitted to be listed as GFCI receptacle assem- N (7) Controlled Receptacles. Automatically controlled recep- blies for countertop applications. tacles shall be replaced with equivalently controlled receptacles.

If automatic control is no longer required, the receptacle and (F) Receptacles in Work Surfaces. Receptacle assemblies any associated receptacles marked in accordance with 406.3(E) and GFCI receptacle assemblies listed for work surface or shall be replaced with a receptacle and faceplate not marked in countertop applications shall be permitted to be installed in accordance with 406.3(E). work surfaces. (E) Cord- and Plug-Connected Equipment. The installa- ∆ (G) Receptacle Orientation. tion of grounding-type receptacles shall not be used as a require- N (1) Countertop and Work Surfaces. Receptacles shall not ment that all cord-and plug-connected equipment be of the be installed in a face-up position in or on countertop surfaces grounded type. or work surfaces unless listed for countertop or work surface Informational Note: See 250.114 for types of cord-and applications. plug- connected equipment to be grounded. N (2) Under Sinks. Receptacles shall not be installed in a face- (F) Noninterchangeable Types. Receptacles connected to up position in the area below a sink.

circuits that have different voltages, frequencies, or types (H) Receptacles in Seating Areas and Other Similar Sur- of current (ac or dc) on the same premises shall be of such faces. In seating areas or similar surfaces, receptacles shall not design that the attachment plugs used on these circuits are not be installed in a face-up position unless the receptacle is any of interchangeable. the following: 406.5 Receptacle Mounting. Receptacles shall be mounted in (1) Part of an assembly listed as a furniture power distribution identified boxes or assemblies. The boxes or assemblies shall unit be securely fastened in place unless otherwise permitted else- (2) Part of an assembly listed either as household furnishings where in this Code. Screws used for the purpose of attaching or as commercial furnishings receptacles to a box shall be of the type provided with a listed (3) Listed either as a receptacle assembly for countertop appli- receptacle, or shall be machine screws having 32 threads per cations or as a GFCI receptacle assembly for countertop

inch or part of listed assemblies or systems, in accordance with applications the manufacturer’s instructions. (4) Installed in a listed floor box (A) Boxes That Are Set Back. Receptacles mounted in (I) Exposed Terminals. Receptacles shall be enclosed so that boxes that are set back from the finished surface as permitted in live wiring terminals are not exposed to contact. 314.20 shall be installed such that the mounting yoke or strap of the receptacle is held rigidly at the finished surface. (J) Voltage Between Adjacent Devices. A receptacle shall not be grouped or ganged in enclosures with other receptacles, snap (B) Boxes That Are Flush. Receptacles mounted in boxes switches, or similar devices, unless they are arranged so that the that are flush with the finished surface or project therefrom shall voltage between adjacent devices does not exceed 300 volts, or be installed such that the mounting yoke or strap of the recep- unless they are installed in enclosures equipped with identified, tacle is held rigidly against the box or box cover.

securely installed barriers between adjacent devices. (C) Receptacles Mounted on Covers. Receptacles mounted to 406.6 Receptacle Faceplates (Cover Plates). Receptacle and supported by a cover shall be held rigidly against the cover by faceplates shall be installed so as to completely cover the open- more than one screw or shall be a device assembly or box cover ing and seat against the mounting surface. listed and identified for securing by a single screw. Receptacle faceplates mounted inside a box having a recess- (D) Position of Receptacle Faces. After installation, receptacle mounted receptacle shall effectively close the opening and seat faces shall be flush with or project from faceplates of insulat- against the mounting surface. ing material and shall project a minimum of 0.4 mm (0.015 in.) from metal faceplates. (A) Thickness of Metal Faceplates. Metal faceplates shall be of ferrous metal not less than 0.76 mm (0.030 in.) in thickness Exception: Listed kits or assemblies encompassing receptacles or of nonferrous metal not less than 1.02 mm (0.040 in.) in

and nonmetallic faceplates that cover the receptacle face, where thickness. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–307

406.7 ARTICLE 406 — RECEPTACLES, CORD CONNECTORS, AND ATTACHMENT PLUGS (CAPS) (B) Grounding. Metal faceplates shall be grounded. An installation suitable for wet locations shall also be con- sidered suitable for damp locations. (C) Faceplates of Insulating Material. Faceplates of insulat- ing material shall be noncombustible and not less than 2.54 mm A receptacle shall be considered to be in a location protected (0.10 in.) in thickness but shall be permitted to be less than from the weather where located under roofed open porches, 2.54 mm (0.10 in.) in thickness if formed or reinforced to pro- canopies, marquees, and the like, and will not be subjected to vide adequate mechanical strength. a beating rain or water runoff. All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt nonlocking receptacles shall be a listed weather-resis- (D) Receptacle Faceplate (Cover Plates) with Integral Night tant type. Light and/or USB Charger. A flush device cover plate that additionally provides a night light and/or Class 2 output Informational Note: The types of receptacles covered by

connector(s) shall be listed and constructed such that the night this requirement are identified as 5-15, 5-20, 6-15, and light and/or Class 2 circuitry is integral with the flush device 6-20 in ANSI/NEMA WD 6–2016, Wiring Devices — cover plate. Dimensional Specifications. 406.7 Attachment Plugs, Cord Connectors, and Flanged (B) Wet Locations. Surface Devices. All attachment plugs, cord connectors, and (1) Receptacles of 15 and 20 Amperes in a Wet Location. flanged surface devices (inlets and outlets) shall be listed and Receptacles of 15 and 20 amperes, 125 and 250 volts installed marked with the manufacturer’s name or identification and volt- in a wet location shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof age and ampere ratings. Attachment plugs, cord connectors, and whether or not the attachment plug cap is inserted. An outlet flanged surface devices shall not be permitted to be reconditioned. box hood installed for this purpose shall be listed and shall be (A) Construction of Attachment Plugs and Cord Connectors. identified as “extra-duty.” Other listed products, enclosures, or

Attachment plugs and cord connectors shall be constructed so assemblies providing weatherproof protection that do not uti- that there are no exposed current-carrying parts except the lize an outlet box hood need not be marked “extra duty.” prongs, blades, or pins. The cover for wire terminations shall Informational Note No. 1: Requirements for extra-duty be a part that is essential for the operation of an attachment plug outlet box hoods are found in ANSI/UL 514D–2016, or connector (dead-front construction). Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices. “Extra (B) Connection of Attachment Plugs. Attachment plugs shall duty” identification and requirements are not applicable be installed so that their prongs, blades, or pins are not energized to listed receptacles, faceplates, outlet boxes, enclo- unless inserted into an energized receptacle or cord connectors. sures, or assemblies that are identified as either being No receptacle shall be installed so as to require the insertion of suitable for wet locations or rated as one of the outdoor

an energized attachment plug as its source of supply. enclosure–type numbers of Table 110.28 that does not (C) Attachment Plug Ejector Mechanisms. Attachment utilize an outlet box hood. plug ejector mechanisms shall not adversely affect engagement Exception: 15- and 20-ampere, 125- through 250-volt recep- of the blades of the attachment plug with the contacts of the tacles installed in a wet location and subject to routine high- receptacle. pressure spray washing shall be permitted to have an enclosure (D) Flanged Surface Inlet. A flanged surface inlet shall be that is weatherproof when the attachment plug is removed. installed such that the prongs, blades, or pins are not energized All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt nonlocking-type unless an energized cord connector is inserted into it. receptacles shall be listed and so identified as the weather- 406.8 Noninterchangeability. Receptacles, cord connectors, resistant type. and attachment plugs shall be constructed such that receptacle Informational Note No. 2: The configuration of weather-

or cord connectors do not accept an attachment plug with a dif- resistant receptacles covered by this requirement are iden- ferent voltage or current rating from that for which the device is tified as 5-15, 5-20, 6-15, and 6-20 in ANSI/NEMA WD intended. However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle or cord con- 6–2016, Wiring Devices — Dimensional Specifications. nector shall be permitted to accept a 15-ampere attachment plug ∆ (2) Other Receptacles. All other receptacles installed in a wet of the same voltage rating. Non–grounding-type receptacles and location shall comply with 406.9(B)(2)(a) or (B)(2)(b). connectors shall not accept grounding-type attachment plugs. (a) A receptacle installed in a wet location, where the prod- 406.9 Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations. uct intended to be plugged into it is not attended while in use, (A) Damp Locations. A receptacle installed outdoors in shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof with the attachment a location protected from the weather or in other damp loca- plug cap inserted or removed.

tions shall have an enclosure for the receptacle that is weather- (b) A receptacle installed in a wet location where the prod- proof when the receptacle is covered (attachment plug cap not uct intended to be plugged into it will be attended while in use inserted and receptacle covers closed). (e.g., portable tools) shall have an enclosure that is weather- proof when the attachment plug is removed. 70–308 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 406 — RECEPTACLES, CORD CONNECTORS, AND ATTACHMENT PLUGS (CAPS) 406.12 (C) Bathtub and Shower Space. Receptacles shall not be installed within a zone measured 900 mm (3 ft) horizontally and 2.5 m (8 ft) vertically from the top of the bathtub rim or shower Informational Note Figure 406.10(B)(4) One Example of stall threshold. The identified zone is all-encompassing and a Symbol Used to Identify the Termination Point for an shall include the space directly over the tub or shower stall. Equipment Grounding Conductor. Exception: In bathrooms with less than the required zone the receptacle(s) shall be permitted to be installed opposite Informational Note: See Informational Note Figure the bathtub rim or shower stall threshold on the farthest wall 406.10(B)(4). within the room. (C) Grounding Terminal Use. A grounding terminal shall [OSHPD 1, 2, 4 & 5] Exception not adopted. not be used for purposes other than connection to the equipment (D) Protection for Floor Receptacles. Standpipes of floor grounding conductor. receptacles shall allow floor-cleaning equipment to be operated

(D) Grounding-Pole (Connection) Requirements. Grounding- without damage to receptacles. type attachment plugs and mating cord connectors and receptacles (E) Flush Mounting with Faceplate. The enclosure for a shall be designed such that the equipment grounding connection receptacle installed in an outlet box flush-mounted in a finished is made before the current-carrying connections. Grounding-type surface shall be made weatherproof by means of a weather- devices shall be so designed that grounding poles of attachment proof faceplate assembly that provides a watertight connection plugs cannot be brought into contact with current-carrying parts between the plate and the finished surface. of receptacles or cord connectors. 406.10 Grounding-Type Receptacles, Adapters, Cord Con- (E) Use. Grounding-type attachment plugs shall be used only nectors, and Attachment Plugs. with a cord having an equipment grounding conductor. (A) Grounding Poles (Connections). Grounding-type recep- Informational Note: See 250.126 for identification of

tacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs shall be provided equipment grounding conductor terminals. with one fixed grounding pole in addition to the circuit poles. 406.11 Connecting Receptacle Grounding Terminal to The grounding contacting pole of grounding-type plug-in Box. The connection of the receptacle grounding terminal shall ground-fault circuit interrupters shall be permitted to be of the comply with 250.146. movable, self-restoring type on circuits operating at not over 150 volts between any two conductors or any conductor and ∆ 406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles. All 15- and 20-ampere, ground. 125- and 250-volt nonlocking-type receptacles in the areas speci- fied in 406.12(1) through (8) shall be listed tamper-resistant (B) Grounding-Pole (Connection) Identification. Grounding- receptacles. type receptacles, adapters, cord connections, and attachment plugs shall have a means for connection of an equipment ground- (1) Dwelling units, including attached and detached garages ing conductor to the grounding pole. and accessory buildings to dwelling units, and common

areas of multifamily dwellings specified in 210.52 and A terminal for connection to the grounding pole shall be des- 550.13 ignated by one of the following: (2) Guest rooms and guest suites of hotels, motels, and their (1) A green-colored hexagonal-headed or -shaped terminal common areas screw or nut, not readily removable. (3) Child care facilities (2) A green-colored pressure wire connector body (a wire barrel). (4) Preschools and education facilities (3) A similar green-colored connection device, in the case of (5) Business offices, corridors, waiting rooms and the like in adapters. The grounding terminal of a grounding adapter clinics, medical and dental offices, and outpatient facilities shall be a green-colored rigid ear, lug, or similar device. The (6) Subset of assembly occupancies described in 518.2 to equipment grounding connection shall be so designed that include places of awaiting transportation, gymnasiums, skat- it cannot make contact with current-carrying parts of the ing rinks, and auditoriums receptacle, adapter, or attachment plug. The adapter shall be

(7) Dormitory units polarized. (8) Assisted living facilities (4) If the terminal for the equipment grounding conductor is not visible, the conductor entrance hole shall be marked Informational Note No. 1: This requirement would with the word green or ground, the letters G or GR, a include receptacles identified as 5-15, 5-20, 6-15, and 6-20 grounding symbol, or otherwise identified by a distinctive in ANSI/NEMA WD 6-2016, Wiring Devices — Dimen- green color. If the terminal for the equipment grounding sional Specifications. conductor is readily removable, the area adjacent to the ter- Informational Note No. 2: Assisted living facilities are minal shall be similarly marked. Institutional Use Group I-1 per IBC 2015. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–309

406.13 ARTICLE 408 — SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR, AND PANELBOARDS Exception to (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7) and (8): Receptacles Informational Note: A single-pole locking-type separa- in the following locations shall not be required to be tamper ble connector is investigated in accordance with ANSI/ resistant: UL 1691-2014, Single Pole Locking-Type Separable Connectors. (1) Receptacles located more than 1.7 m (51⁄2 ft) above the floor (2) Receptacles that are part of a luminaire or appliance (3) A single receptacle, or a duplex receptacle for two appli- ARTICLE 408 ances, located within the dedicated space for each appliance Switchboards, Switchgear, and Panelboards that, in normal use, is not easily moved from one place to another and that is cord-and-plug-connected in accordance with 400.10(A)(6), (A)(7), or (A)(8) Part I. General (4) Nongrounding receptacles used for replacements as per- 408.1 Scope. This article covers switchboards, switchgear, and mitted in 406.4(D)(2)(a) panelboards. It does not apply to equipment operating at over

N 406.13 Single-Pole Separable-Connector Type. Single-pole 1000 volts, except as specifically referenced elsewhere in the separable connectors shall be listed and labeled and shall com- Code. ply with 406.13(A) through (D). 408.2 Other Articles. Switches, circuit breakers, and overcur- N (A) Locking or Latching Type. Single-pole separable connec- rent devices used on switchboards, switchgear, and panelboards tors shall be of either the locking or latching type and marked and their enclosures shall comply with this article and also with with the manufacturer’s name or identification and voltage and the requirements of Articles 240, 250, 312, 404, and other articles ampere ratings. that apply. Switchboards, switchgear, and panelboards in hazard- ous (classified) locations shall comply with the applicable provi- N (B) Identification. Connectors designated for connection to sions of Articles 500 through 517. the grounded circuit conductor shall be identified by a white- colored housing; connectors designated for connection to the 408.2(A) California Energy Code Requirements for Panel-

grounding circuit conductor shall be identified by a green-col- boards in Single-Family Buildings [CEC]. In single-family resi- ored housing. dential buildings that include one or two dwellings, panelboards serving the individual dwelling unit shall be provided with circuit N (C) Interchangeability. Single-pole separable connectors shall breaker spaces for heat pump water heaters, heat pump space be permitted to be interchangeable for ac or dc use or for differ- heaters, electric cooktops and electric clothes dryers as specified ent current ratings or voltages on the same premises, provided in California Energy Code Section 150.0 (n), (t), (u) and (v). they are listed for ac/dc use and marked in a suitable manner to identify the system to which they are intended to be connected. 408.2(B) California Energy Code Requirements for Panel- boards in Multifamily Buildings [CEC]. In multifamily build- N (D) Connecting and Disconnecting. The use of single-pole ings, panelboards serving the individual dwelling unit shall be separable connectors shall be performed by a qualified person

provided with circuit breaker spaces for heat pump space heat- and shall comply with at least one of the following conditions: ers, electric cooktops and electric clothes dryers as specified in (1) Connection and disconnection of connectors are only pos- California Energy Code Section 160.9 (a), (b) and (c). sible where the supply connectors are interlocked to the 408.3 Support and Arrangement of Busbars and source, and it is not possible to connect or disconnect con- Conductors. nectors when the supply is energized. (2) Line connectors are of the listed sequential-interlocking ∆ (A) Conductors and Busbars on a Switchboard, Switchgear, type so that load connectors are connected in the following or Panelboard. Conductors and busbars on a switchboard, sequence and that disconnection is in the reverse sequence: switchgear, or panelboard shall comply with 408.3(A)(1) and (A)(2) as applicable. (a) Equipment grounding conductor connection (b) Grounded circuit conductor connection, if provided (1) Location. Conductors and busbars shall be located so as to

(c) Ungrounded conductor connection be free from physical damage and shall be held firmly in place. • (3) A caution notice that complies with 110.21(B) is provided (2) Same Vertical Section. Other than the required intercon- on the equipment employing single-pole separable con- nections and control wiring, only those conductors that are nectors, adjacent to the line connectors, indicating that con- intended for termination in a vertical section of a switchboard nections are to be performed in the following sequence and or switchgear shall be located in that section. that disconnection is in the reverse sequence: Exception: Conductors shall be permitted to travel horizon- (a) Equipment grounding conductor connectors tally through vertical sections of switchboards and switchgear (b) Grounded circuit-conductor connectors, if provided where such conductors are isolated from busbars by a barrier. (c) Ungrounded conductor connectors 70–310 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 408 — SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR, AND PANELBOARDS 408.4 (B) Overheating and Inductive Effects. The arrangement of as permitted in 250.21 shall be legibly and permanently field busbars and conductors shall be such as to avoid overheating marked as follows: due to inductive effects. “Caution Ungrounded System Operating — _____ Volts (C) Used as Service Equipment. Each switchboard, switch- Between Conductors” gear, or panelboard, if used as service equipment, shall be pro- (3) High-Impedance Grounded Neutral AC System. A vided with a main bonding jumper sized in accordance with switchboard, switchgear, or panelboard containing a high- 250.28(D) or the equivalent placed within the panelboard or impedance grounded neutral ac system in accordance with one of the sections of the switchboard or switchgear for con- 250.36 shall be legibly and permanently field marked as necting the grounded service conductor on its supply side to follows: the switchboard, switchgear, or panelboard frame. All sections

of a switchboard or switchgear shall be bonded together using CAUTION: HIGH-IMPEDANCE GROUNDED NEU- an equipment-bonding jumper or a supply-side bonding jumper TRAL AC SYSTEM OPERATING — _____ VOLTS sized in accordance with 250.122 or 250.102(C)(1) as applicable. BETWEEN CONDUCTORS AND MAY OPERATE — _____ VOLTS TO GROUND FOR INDEFINITE PERIODS UNDER Exception: Switchboards, switchgear, and panelboards used as FAULT CONDITIONS service equipment on high-impedance grounded neutral sys- tems in accordance with 250.36 shall not be required to be pro- (4) Ungrounded DC Systems. A switchboard, switchgear, or vided with a main bonding jumper. panelboard containing an ungrounded dc electrical system in accordance with 250.169 shall be legibly and permanently field (D) Terminals. In switchboards and switchgear, load terminals marked as follows: for field wiring shall comply with 408.18(C). CAUTION: UNGROUNDED DC SYSTEM OPERATING ∆ (E) Bus Arrangement. — _____ VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS (1) AC Phase Arrangement. Alternating-current phase (5) Resistively Grounded DC Systems. A switchboard,

arrangement on 3-phase buses shall be A, B, C from front to switchgear, or panelboard containing a resistive connection back, top to bottom, or left to right, as viewed from the front of between current-carrying conductors and the grounding system the switchboard, switchgear, or panelboard. The B phase shall to stabilize voltage to ground shall be legibly and permanently be that phase having the higher voltage to ground on 3-phase, field marked as follows: 4-wire, delta-connected systems. Other busbar arrangements shall be permitted for additions to existing installations and shall CAUTION: DC SYSTEM OPERATING — _____ VOLTS be marked. BETWEEN CONDUCTORS AND MAY OPERATE — _____ VOLTS TO GROUND FOR INDEFINITE PERIODS UNDER Exception: Equipment within the same single section or multi- FAULT CONDITIONS section switchboard, switchgear, or panelboard as the meter on 3-phase, 4-wire, delta-connected systems shall be permitted to (G) Minimum Wire-Bending Space. The minimum wire- have the same phase configuration as the metering equipment.

bending space at terminals and minimum gutter space provided in switchboards, switchgear, and panelboards shall be as required Informational Note: See 110.15 for requirements on in 312.6. marking the busbar or phase conductor having the higher voltage to ground where supplied from a 4-wire, delta- 408.4 Field Identification Required. connected system. (A) Circuit Directory or Circuit Identification. Every cir- (2) DC Bus Arrangement. Direct-current ungrounded buses cuit and circuit modification shall be legibly identified as to shall be permitted to be in any order. Arrangement of dc buses shall its clear, evident, and specific purpose or use. The identification be field marked as to polarity, grounding system, and nominal shall include an approved degree of detail that allows each cir- voltage. cuit to be distinguished from all others. Spare positions that con- tain unused overcurrent devices or switches shall be described (F) Switchboard, Switchgear, or Panelboard Identification. accordingly. The identification shall be included in a circuit

A caution sign(s) or a label(s) provided in accordance with directory that is located on the face, inside of, or in an approved 408.3(F)(1) through (F)(5) shall comply with 110.21(B). location adjacent to the panel door in the case of a panelboard (1) High-Leg Identification. A switchboard, switchgear, or and at each switch or circuit breaker in a switchboard or switch- panelboard containing a 4-wire, delta-connected system where gear. No circuit shall be described in a manner that depends on the midpoint of one phase winding is grounded shall be legibly transient conditions of occupancy. and permanently field marked as follows: (B) Source of Supply. All switchboards, switchgear, and “Caution _____ Phase Has _____ Volts to Ground” panelboards supplied by a feeder(s) in other than one- or two- family dwellings shall be permanently marked to indicate each (2) Ungrounded AC Systems. A switchboard, switchgear, device or equipment where the power originates. The label shall or panelboard containing an ungrounded ac electrical system 2022 California Electrical Code 70–311

408.5 ARTICLE 408 — SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR, AND PANELBOARDS Table 408.5 Clearance for Conductors Entering Bus Enclosures N (B) Switchboards and Switchgear. Switchboards and switch- gear, or sections of switchboards or switchgear, shall be permit- Minimum Spacing Between Bottom ted to be reconditioned. Reconditioned switchgear shall be listed of Enclosure and Busbars, Their or field labeled as reconditioned, and previously applied listing Supports, or Other Obstructions marks, if any, within the portions reconditioned shall be removed. Conductor mm in. Part II. Switchboards and Switchgear Insulated busbars, their 200 8 408.16 Switchboards and Switchgear in Damp or Wet Loca- supports, or other tions. Switchboards and switchgear in damp or wet locations obstructions Noninsulated busbars 250 10 shall be installed in accordance with 312.2. 408.17 Location Relative to Easily Ignitible Material. Switchboards and switchgear shall be placed so as to reduce to a minimum the probability of communicating fire to adjacent

be permanently affixed, of sufficient durability to withstand the combustible materials. Where installed over a combustible floor, environment involved, and not handwritten. suitable protection thereto shall be provided. 408.5 Clearance for Conductor Entering Bus Enclosures. 408.18 Clearances. Where conduits or other raceways enter a switchboard, switch- (A) From Ceiling. For other than a totally enclosed switch- gear, floor-standing panelboard, or similar enclosure at the board or switchgear, a space not less than 900 mm (3 ft) shall bottom, approved space shall be provided to permit installation be provided between the top of the switchboard or switchgear of conductors in the enclosure. The wiring space shall not be and any combustible ceiling, unless a noncombustible shield is less than shown in Table 408.5 where the conduit or raceways provided between the switchboard or switchgear and the ceiling. enter or leave the enclosure below the busbars, their supports, or other obstructions. The conduit or raceways, including their (B) Around Switchboards and Switchgear. Clearances

end fittings, shall not rise more than 75 mm (3 in.) above the around switchboards and switchgear shall comply with the pro- bottom of the enclosure. visions of 110.26. N 408.6 Short-Circuit Current Rating. Switchboards, switch- N (C) Connections. Each section of equipment that requires rear gear, and panelboards shall have a short-circuit current rating or side access to make field connections shall be so marked not less than the available fault current. In other than one- and by the manufacturer on the front. Section openings requiring two-family dwelling units, the available fault current and the rear or side access shall comply with 110.26. Load terminals date the calculation was performed shall be field marked on the for field wiring shall comply with 408.18(C)(1), (C)(2), or (C)(3) enclosure at the point of supply. The marking shall comply with as applicable. 110.21(B)(3). N (1) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Load terminals for 408.7 Unused Openings. Unused openings for circuit break- field wiring shall be so located that it is not necessary to reach

ers and switches shall be closed using identified closures, or across uninsulated ungrounded bus in order to make connections. other approved means that provide protection substantially N (2) Grounded Circuit Conductors. Where multiple branch or equivalent to the wall of the enclosure. feeder grounded circuit conductor load terminals for field wir- N 408.8 Reconditioning of Equipment. Reconditioning of equip- ing are grouped together in one location, they shall be so located ment within the scope of this article shall be limited as described that it is not necessary to reach across uninsulated ungrounded in 408.8(A) and (B). The reconditioning process shall use design bus, whether or not energized, in order to make connections. qualified parts verified under applicable standards and be per- Where only one branch or feeder set of load terminals for formed in accordance with any instructions provided by the field wiring are grouped with its associated ungrounded load manufacturer.

If equipment has been damaged by fire, products terminals, they shall be so located that it is not necessary to of combustion, or water, it shall be specifically evaluated by reach across energized uninsulated bus including other branch its manufacturer or a qualified testing laboratory prior to being or feeder bus in order to make connections. Bus on the line side returned to service. of service, branch, or feeder disconnects is considered energized N (A) Panelboards. Panelboards shall not be permitted to be with respect to its associated load side circuits. reconditioned. This shall not prevent the replacement of a N (3) Ungrounded Conductors. Load terminals for ungrounded panelboard within an enclosure. In the event the replacement conductors shall be so located that it is not necessary to reach has not been listed for the specific enclosure and the available across energized uninsulated bus in order to make connections. fault current is greater than 10,000 amperes, the completed work Bus on the line side of service, branch, or feeder disconnects

shall be field labeled, and any previously applied listing marks is considered energized with respect to its associated load side on the cabinet that pertain to the panelboard shall be removed. circuits. 70–312 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 408 — SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR, AND PANELBOARDS 408.40 408.19 Conductor Insulation. An insulated conductor used protection provided on the primary side of the transformer within a switchboard or switchgear shall be listed, shall be flame where that protection is in accordance with 240.21(C)(1). retardant, and shall be rated not less than the voltage applied to it (C) Delta Breakers. A 3-phase disconnect or overcurrent and not less than the voltage applied to other conductors or bus- device shall not be connected to the bus of any panelboard that bars with which it may come into contact. has less than 3-phase buses. Delta breakers shall not be installed 408.20 Location of Switchboards and Switchgear. Switch- in panelboards. boards and switchgear that have any exposed live parts shall (D) Back-Fed Devices. Plug-in-type overcurrent protection be located in permanently dry locations and then only where devices or plug-in type main lug assemblies that are backfed under competent supervision and accessible only to qualified

and used to terminate field-installed ungrounded supply con- persons. Switchboards and switchgear shall be located such ductors shall be secured in place by an additional fastener that that the probability of damage from equipment or processes is requires other than a pull to release the device from the mount- reduced to a minimum. ing means on the panel. 408.22 Grounding of Instruments, Relays, Meters, and 408.37 Panelboards in Damp or Wet Locations. Panel- Instrument Transformers on Switchboards and Switch- boards in damp or wet locations shall be installed to comply gear. Instruments, relays, meters, and instrument transformers with 312.2. located on switchboards and switchgear shall be grounded as specified in 250.170 through 250.178. 408.38 Enclosure. Panelboards shall be mounted in cabi- nets, cutout boxes, or identified enclosures and shall be N 408.23 Power Monitoring and Energy Management Equip- dead-front. ment. The requirements of 312.8(B) shall apply. Exception: Panelboards other than of the dead-front, exter- Part III.

Panelboards nally operable type shall be permitted where accessible only to qualified persons. 408.30 General. All panelboards shall have a rating not less than the minimum feeder capacity required for the load calcu- 408.39 Relative Arrangement of Switches and Fuses. In lated in accordance with Part III, IV, or V of Article 220, as panelboards, fuses of any type shall be installed on the load side applicable. of any switches. ∆ 408.36 Overcurrent Protection. In addition to the requirement Exception: Fuses installed as part of service equipment in of 408.30, a panelboard shall be protected by an overcurrent accordance with the provisions of 230.94 shall be permitted on protective device having a rating not greater than that of the the line side of the service switch. panelboard. This overcurrent protective device shall be located 408.40 Grounding of Panelboards. Panelboard cabinets and within or at any point on the supply side of the panelboard. panelboard frames, if of metal, shall be in physical contact with Exception No.

1: Individual protection shall not be required for each other and shall be connected to an equipment grounding a panelboard protected by two main circuit breakers or two sets conductor. Where the panelboard is used with nonmetallic race- of fuses in other than service equipment, having a combined rat- way or cable or where separate equipment grounding conduc- ing not greater than that of the panelboard. A panelboard con- tors are provided, a terminal bar for the equipment grounding structed or wired under this exception shall not contain more conductors shall be secured inside the cabinet. The termi- than 42 overcurrent devices. For the purposes of determining nal bar shall be bonded to the cabinet and panelboard frame, the maximum of 42 overcurrent devices, a 2-pole or a 3-pole if of metal; otherwise it shall be connected to the equipment circuit breaker shall be considered as two or three overcurrent grounding conductor that is run with the conductors feeding the devices, respectively. panelboard. Exception No.

2: For existing panelboards, individual pro- Exception: Where an isolated equipment grounding conduc- tection shall not be required for a panelboard used as service tor for a branch circuit or a feeder is provided as permitted by equipment for an individual residential occupancy. 250.146(D), the insulated equipment grounding conductor that is run with the circuit conductors shall be permitted to pass (A) Snap Switches Rated at 30 Amperes or Less. Panelboards through the panelboard without being connected to the panel- equipped with snap switches rated at 30 amperes or less shall have board’s equipment grounding terminal bar. overcurrent protection of 200 amperes or less. Equipment grounding conductors shall not be connected to (B) Supplied Through a Transformer. Where a panelboard a terminal bar provided for grounded conductors or neutral con- is supplied through a transformer, the overcurrent protection ductors unless the bar is identified for the purpose and is located required by 408.36 shall be located on the secondary side of

where interconnection between equipment grounding conduc- the transformer. tors and grounded circuit conductors is permitted or required Exception: A panelboard supplied by the secondary side of a by Article 250. transformer shall be considered as protected by the overcurrent 2022 California Electrical Code 70–313

408.41 ARTICLE 408 — SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR, AND PANELBOARDS 408.41 Grounded Conductor Terminations. Each grounded with Table 312.6(A) where at least one side wire-bending space conductor shall terminate within the panelboard in an individ- is sized in accordance with Table 312.6(B) for the largest con- ual terminal that is not also used for another conductor. ductor to be terminated in any side wire-bending space. Exception: Grounded conductors of circuits with parallel con- Exception No. 3: The top and bottom wire-bending space shall ductors shall be permitted to terminate in a single terminal if the be permitted to be sized in accordance with Table 312.6(A) spac- terminal is identified for connection of more than one conductor. ings if the panelboard is designed and constructed for wiring using only a single 90-degree bend for each conductor, including N 408.43 Panelboard Orientation. Panelboards shall not be the grounded circuit conductor, and the wiring diagram shows installed in the face-up position. and specifies the method of wiring that shall be used. Part IV.

Construction Specifications Exception No. 4: Either the top or the bottom wire-bending 408.50 Panels. The panels of switchboards and switchgear shall space, but not both, shall be permitted to be sized in accordance be made of moisture-resistant, noncombustible material. with Table 312.6(A) where there are no conductors terminated in that space. 408.51 Busbars. Insulated or bare busbars shall be rigidly mounted. (B) Side Wire-Bending Space. Side wire-bending space shall be in accordance with Table 312.6(A) for the largest con- 408.52 Protection of Instrument Circuits. Instruments, ductor to be terminated in that space. pilot lights, voltage (potential) transformers, and other switch- board or switchgear devices with potential coils shall be sup- (C) Back Wire-Bending Space. Where a raceway or cable plied by a circuit that is protected by standard overcurrent entry is in the wall of the enclosure opposite a removable cover, devices rated 15 amperes or less. the distance from that wall to the cover shall be permitted to comply with the distance required for one wire per terminal

Exception No. 1: Overcurrent devices rated more than 15 amperes in Table 312.6(A). The distance between the center of the rear shall be permitted where the interruption of the circuit could cre- entry and the nearest termination for the entering conductors ate a hazard. Short-circuit protection shall be provided. shall not be less than the distance given in Table 312.6(B). Exception No. 2: For ratings of 2 amperes or less, special types 408.56 Minimum Spacings. The distance between uninsu- of enclosed fuses shall be permitted. lated metal parts, busbars, and other uninsulated live parts shall 408.53 Component Parts. Switches, fuses, and fuseholders not be less than specified in Table 408.56. used on panelboards shall comply with the applicable require- Where close proximity does not cause excessive heating, ments of Articles 240 and 404. parts of the same polarity at switches, enclosed fuses, and so 408.54 Maximum Number of Overcurrent Devices. A panel- forth shall be permitted to be placed as close together as conve-

board shall be provided with physical means to prevent the instal- nience in handling will allow. lation of more overcurrent devices than that number for which Exception: The distance shall be permitted to be less than that the panelboard was designed, rated, and listed. specified in Table 408.56 at circuit breakers and switches and For the purposes of this section, a 2-pole circuit breaker or in listed components installed in switchboards, switchgear, and fusible switch shall be considered two overcurrent devices; panelboards. a 3-pole circuit breaker or fusible switch shall be considered ∆ Table 408.56 Minimum Spacings Between Bare Metal Parts three overcurrent devices. ∆ 408.55 Wire-Bending Space Within an Enclosure Opposite Opposite Containing a Panelboard. Polarity Where Polarity Where Mounted on the Held Free Live Parts to (A) Top and Bottom Wire-Bending Space. The enclosure Same Surface in Air Ground* for a panelboard shall have the top and bottom wire-bending AC or DC Voltage mm in. mm in. mm in. space sized in accordance with Table 312.6(B) for the largest

conductor entering or leaving the enclosure. Not over 19.1 3⁄4 12.7 1⁄2 12.7 1⁄2 125 volts, Exception No. 1: Either the top or bottom wire-bending space nominal shall be permitted to be sized in accordance with Table 312.6(A) Not over 31.8 1 1⁄4 19.1 3⁄4 12.7 1⁄2 for a panelboard rated 225 amperes or less and designed to con- 250 volts, tain not over 42 overcurrent devices. For the purposes of this nominal Not over 50.8 2 25.4 1 25.4 1 exception, a 2-pole or a 3-pole circuit breaker shall be consid- 1000 volts, ered as two or three overcurrent devices, respectively. nominal Exception No. 2: Either the top or bottom wire-bending space *For spacing between live parts and doors of cabinets, the dimensions in for any panelboard shall be permitted to be sized in accordance 312.11(A) shall apply. 70–314 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 409 — INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS 409.21 408.58 Panelboard Marking. Panelboards shall be durably ampacity not less than 125 percent of the full-load current rating marked by the manufacturer with the voltage and the current of all heating loads plus 125 percent of the full-load current rat- rating and the number of ac phases or dc buses for which they ing of the highest rated motor plus the sum of the full-load cur- are designed and with the manufacturer’s name or trademark rent ratings of all other connected motors and apparatus based on in such a manner so as to be visible after installation, without their duty cycle that may be in operation at the same time. disturbing the interior parts or wiring. 409.21 Overcurrent Protection. (A) General. Industrial control panels shall be provided with overcurrent protection in accordance with Parts I, II, and IX of ARTICLE 409 Article 240. Industrial Control Panels (B) Location. This protection shall be provided for each incoming supply circuit by either of the following: Part I.

General (1) An overcurrent protective device located ahead of the indus- trial control panel. 409.1 Scope. This article covers industrial control panels (2) A single main overcurrent protective device located intended for general use and operating at 1000 volts or less. within the industrial control panel. Where overcurrent pro- Informational Note: ANSI/UL 508A, Standard for tection is provided as part of the industrial control panel, Industrial Control Panels, is a safety standard for indus- the supply conductors shall be considered as either feed- trial control panels. ers or taps as covered by 240.21. 409.3 Other Articles. In addition to the requirements of Arti- (C) Rating. The rating or setting of the overcurrent protective cle 409, industrial control panels that contain branch circuits for device for the circuit supplying the industrial control panel shall specific loads or components, or are for control of specific types not be greater than the sum of the largest rating or setting of the

of equipment addressed in other articles of this Code, shall be branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device constructed and installed in accordance with the applicable provided with the industrial control panel, plus 125 percent of requirements from the specific articles in Table 409.3. the full-load current rating of all resistance heating loads, plus the sum of the full-load currents of all other motors and appara- Part II. Installation tus that could be in operation at the same time. 409.20 Conductor — Minimum Size and Ampacity. The size Exception: Where one or more instantaneous trip circuit of the industrial control panel supply conductor shall have an breakers or motor short-circuit protectors are used for motor Table 409.3 Other Articles Equipment/Occupancy Article Section Branch circuits 210 Luminaires 410 Motors, motor circuits, and controllers 430 Air-conditioning and refrigerating equipment 440 Capacitors 460.8, 460.9 Hazardous (classified) locations 500, 501, 502, 503, 504, 505 Commercial garages; aircraft hangars; motor 511, 513, 514, 515, 516, and

fuel dispensing facilities; bulk storage plants; 517 Part IV spray application, dipping, and coating processes; and inhalation anesthetizing locations Cranes and hoists 610 Electrically driven or controlled irrigation 675 machines Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving 620 walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts Industrial machinery 670 Resistors and reactors 470 Transformers 450 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, 725 signaling, and power-limited circuits 2022 California Electrical Code 70–315

409.22 ARTICLE 409 — INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection as per- the front of the industrial control panel. The B phase shall be that mitted by 430.52(C), the procedure specified above for deter- phase having the higher voltage to ground on 3-phase, 4-wire, mining the maximum rating of the protective device for the delta-connected systems. Other busbar arrangements shall be per- circuit supplying the industrial control panel shall apply with mitted for additions to existing installations, and the phases shall the following provision: For the purpose of the calculation, be permanently marked. each instantaneous trip circuit breaker or motor short-circuit 409.104 Wiring Space. protector shall be assumed to have a rating not exceeding the maximum percentage of motor full-load current permitted by (A) General. Industrial control panel enclosures shall not be Table 430.52 for the type of control panel supply circuit protec- used as junction boxes, auxiliary gutters, or raceways for conduc- tive device employed.

tors feeding through or tapping off to other switches or overcur- rent devices or other equipment, unless the conductors fill less Where no branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault than 40 percent of the cross-sectional area of the wiring space. protective device is provided with the industrial control panel In addition, the conductors, splices, and taps shall not fill the for motor or combination of motor and non-motor loads, the wiring space at any cross section to more than 75 percent of the rating or setting of the overcurrent protective device shall be cross-sectional area of that space. based on 430.52 and 430.53, as applicable. (B) Wire Bending Space. Wire bending space within industrial 409.22 Short-Circuit Current Rating. control panels for field wiring terminals shall be in accordance (A) Installation. An industrial control panel shall not be with the requirements in 430.10(B). installed where the available fault current exceeds its short- 409.106 Spacings. Spacings in feeder circuits between unin- circuit current rating as marked in accordance with 409.110(4).

sulated live parts of adjacent components, between uninsulated (B) Documentation. If an industrial control panel is required live parts of components and grounded or accessible non– to be marked with a short-circuit current rating in accordance current-carrying metal parts, between uninsulated live parts with 409.110(4), the available fault current at the industrial of components and the enclosure, and at field wiring terminals control panel and the date the available fault current calcula- shall be as shown in Table 430.97(D). tion was performed shall be documented and made available to Exception: Spacings shall be permitted to be less than those those authorized to inspect, install, or maintain the installation. specified in Table 430.97(D) at circuit breakers and switches 409.30 Disconnecting Means. Disconnecting means that and in listed components installed in industrial control panels. supply motor loads shall comply with Part IX of Article 430. 409.108 Service Equipment. Where used as service equip- 409.60 Grounding.

Multisection industrial control panels ment, each industrial control panel shall be of the type that is shall be bonded together with an equipment grounding conduc- suitable for use as service equipment. tor or an equivalent equipment grounding bus sized in accor- Where a grounded conductor is provided, the industrial con- dance with Table 250.122. Equipment grounding conductors trol panel shall be provided with a main bonding jumper, sized shall be connected to this equipment grounding bus or to an in accordance with 250.28(D), for connecting the grounded con- equipment grounding termination point provided in a single- ductor, on its supply side, to the industrial control panel equip- section industrial control panel. ment ground bus or equipment ground terminal. Part III. Construction Specifications 409.110 Marking. An industrial control panel shall be marked with the following information that is plainly visible 409.100 Enclosures. Table 110.28 shall be used as the basis after installation: for selecting industrial control panel enclosures for use in spe-

cific locations other than hazardous (classified) locations. The (1) Manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other descriptive mark- enclosures are not intended to protect against conditions such ing by which the organization responsible for the product as condensation, icing, corrosion, or contamination that may can be identified. occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed (2) Supply voltage, number of phases, frequency, and full-load openings. current for each incoming supply circuit. (3) Industrial control panels supplied by more than one elec- 409.102 Busbars and Conductors. Industrial control panels trical source where more than one disconnecting means is utilizing busbars shall comply with 409.102(A) and (B). required to disconnect all circuits 50-volts or more within (A) Support and Arrangement. Busbars shall be protected the control panel shall be marked to indicate that more from physical damage and be held firmly in place. than one disconnecting means is required to de-energize the (B) Phase Arrangement. The phase arrangement on 3-phase equipment.

The location of the means necessary to discon- horizontal common power and vertical buses shall be A, B, C nect all circuits 50-volts or more shall be documented and from front to back, top to bottom, or left to right, as viewed from available. 70–316 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 410 — LUMINAIRES, LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS 410.10 (4) Short-circuit current rating of the industrial control panel 300 mm (12 in.) 300 mm (12 in.) or shelf width based on one of the following: or shelf width a. Short-circuit current rating of a listed and labeled assembly b. Short-circuit current rating established utilizing an approved method 300 mm 300 mm (12 in.) Informational Note: ANSI/UL 508A, Standard for (12 in.) 1.8 m (6 ft) or shelf Industrial Control Panels, Supplement SB, is an example or 600 mm width rod height (24 in.) of an approved method. 600 mm Exception to (4): Short-circuit current rating markings are (24 in.) not required for industrial control panels containing only con- trol circuit components. (5) If the industrial control panel is intended as service equip- ment, it shall be marked to identify it as being suitable for use as service equipment. (6) Electrical wiring diagram or the identification number of a separate electrical wiring diagram or a designation refer- enced in a separate wiring diagram. FIGURE 410.2 Clothes Closet Storage Space.

(7) An enclosure type number shall be marked on the indus- trial control panel enclosure. to contact. Exposed accessible terminals in lampholders and switches shall not be installed in metal luminaire canopies or in open bases of portable table or floor luminaires. ARTICLE 410 Luminaires, Lampholders, and Lamps Exception: Cleat-type lampholders located at least 2.5 m (8 ft) above the floor shall be permitted to have exposed terminals. 410.6 Listing Required. All luminaires, lampholders, and Part I. General retrofit kits shall be listed. 410.1 Scope. This article covers luminaires, portable lumi- N 410.7 Reconditioned Equipment. Luminaires, lampholders, naires, lampholders, pendants, incandescent filament lamps, arc and retrofit kits shall not be permitted to be reconditioned. If lamps, electric-discharge lamps, decorative lighting products, a retrofit kit is installed in a luminaire in accordance with the lighting accessories for temporary seasonal and holiday use, installation instructions, the retrofitted luminaire shall not be

portable flexible lighting products, and the wiring and equip- considered reconditioned. ment forming part of such products and lighting installations. 410.8 Inspection. Luminaires shall be installed such that the 410.2 Definition. The definition in this section shall apply connections between the luminaire conductors and the circuit only within this article. conductors can be inspected without requiring the disconnec- Clothes Closet Storage Space. The volume bounded by the tion of any part of the wiring unless the luminaires are con- sides and back closet walls and planes extending from the nected by attachment plugs and receptacles. closet floor vertically to a height of 1.8 m (6 ft) or to the high- est clothes-hanging rod and parallel to the walls at a horizon- Part II. Luminaire Locations tal distance of 600 mm (24 in.) from the sides and back of 410.10 Luminaires in Specific Locations. the closet walls, respectively, and continuing vertically to the closet ceiling parallel to the walls at a horizontal distance of (A) Wet and Damp Locations. Luminaires installed in wet or

300 mm (12 in.) or the width of the shelf, whichever is greater; damp locations shall be installed such that water cannot enter for a closet that permits access to both sides of a hanging rod, or accumulate in wiring compartments, lampholders, or other this space includes the volume below the highest rod extend- electrical parts. All luminaires installed in wet locations shall be ing 300 mm (12 in.) on either side of the rod on a plane hori- marked, “Suitable for Wet Locations.” All luminaires installed in zontal to the floor extending the entire length of the rod. See damp locations shall be marked “Suitable for Wet Locations” or Figure 410.2. “Suitable for Damp Locations.” 410.5 Live Parts. Luminaires, portable luminaires, lamp- (B) Corrosive Locations. Luminaires installed in corrosive holders, and lamps shall have no live parts normally exposed locations shall be of a type suitable for such locations. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–317

410.11 ARTICLE 410 — LUMINAIRES, LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS (C) In Ducts or Hoods. Luminaires shall be permitted to be unswitched type. Unless an individual switch is provided for installed in commercial cooking hoods where all of the follow- each luminaire, lampholders shall be located at least 2.5 m ing conditions are met: (8 ft) above the floor or shall be located or guarded so that the lamps cannot be readily removed or damaged. (1) The luminaire shall be identified for use within commercial cooking hoods and installed such that the temperature lim- 410.14 Luminaires in Show Windows. Chain-supported its of the materials used are not exceeded. luminaires used in a show window shall be permitted to be (2) The luminaire shall be constructed so that all exhaust externally wired. No other externally wired luminaires shall be vapors, grease, oil, or cooking vapors are excluded from the used. lamp and wiring compartment. Diffusers shall be resistant 410.16 Luminaires in Clothes Closets. to thermal shock.

(3) Parts of the luminaire exposed within the hood shall be (A) Luminaire Types Permitted. Only luminaires of the corrosion resistant or protected against corrosion, and the following types shall be permitted in a clothes closet: surface shall be smooth so as not to collect deposits and to (1) Surface-mounted or recessed incandescent or LED lumi- facilitate cleaning. naires with completely enclosed light sources (4) Wiring methods and materials supplying the luminaire(s) (2) Surface-mounted or recessed fluorescent luminaires shall not be exposed within the cooking hood. (3) Surface-mounted fluorescent or LED luminaires identified Informational Note: See 110.11 for conductors and as suitable for installation within the clothes closet storage equipment exposed to deteriorating agents. space (D) Bathtub and Shower Areas. A luminaire installed in a bath- (B) Luminaire Types Not Permitted. Incandescent lumi- tub or shower area shall meet all of the following requirements: naires with open or partially enclosed lamps and pendant lumi- naires or lampholders shall not be permitted.

N (1) No parts of cord-connected luminaires, chain-, cable-, or cord-suspended luminaires, lighting track, pendants, or (C) Location. The minimum clearance between luminaires ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans shall be located within a installed in clothes closets and the nearest point of a clothes zone measured 900 mm (3 ft) horizontally and 2.5 m (8 ft) closet storage space shall be as follows: vertically from the top of the bathtub rim or shower stall (1) 300 mm (12 in.) for surface-mounted incandescent or threshold. This zone is all-encompassing and includes the LED luminaires with a completely enclosed light source space directly over the tub or shower stall. installed on the wall above the door or on the ceiling. N (2) Luminaires located within the actual outside dimension of (2) 150 mm (6 in.) for surface-mounted fluorescent luminaires the bathtub or shower to a height of 2.5 m (8 ft) vertically installed on the wall above the door or on the ceiling. from the top of the bathtub rim or shower threshold shall (3) 150 mm (6 in.) for recessed incandescent or LED luminaires

be marked suitable for damp locations or marked suitable with a completely enclosed light source installed in the for wet locations. Luminaires located where subject to wall or the ceiling. shower spray shall be marked suitable for wet locations. (4) 150 mm (6 in.) for recessed fluorescent luminaires (E) Luminaires in Indoor Sports, Mixed-Use, and All- installed in the wall or the ceiling. Purpose Facilities. Luminaires subject to physical damage, (5) Surface-mounted fluorescent or LED luminaires shall be using a mercury vapor or metal halide lamp, installed in play- permitted to be installed within the clothes closet storage ing and spectator seating areas of indoor sports, mixed-use, or space where identified for this use. all-purpose facilities shall be of the type that protects the lamp 410.18 Space for Cove Lighting. Coves shall have adequate with a glass or plastic lens. Such luminaires shall be permitted space and shall be located so that lamps and equipment can be to have an additional guard. properly installed and maintained.

(F) Luminaires Installed in or Under Roof Decking. Lumi- naires installed in exposed or concealed locations under metal- Part III. Provisions at Luminaire Outlet Boxes, Canopies, corrugated sheet roof decking shall be installed and supported and Pans so there is not less than 38 mm (11 ⁄ 2 in.) measured from the 410.20 Space for Conductors. Canopies and outlet boxes lowest surface of the roof decking to the top of the luminaire. taken together shall provide sufficient space so that luminaire 410.11 Luminaires Near Combustible Material. Lumi- conductors and their connecting devices are capable of being naires shall be constructed, installed, or equipped with shades installed in accordance with 314.16. or guards so that combustible material is not subjected to tem- 410.21 Temperature Limit of Conductors in Outlet Boxes. peratures in excess of 90°C (194°F). Luminaires shall be of such construction or installed so that the 410.12 Luminaires over Combustible Material. Lamphold- conductors in outlet boxes shall not be subjected to temperatures

ers installed over highly combustible material shall be of the greater than that for which the conductors are rated. 70–318 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 410 — LUMINAIRES, LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS 410.36 Branch-circuit wiring, other than 2-wire or multiwire branch Exception No. 2:No handhole shall be required in a pole circuits supplying power to luminaires connected together, 6.0 m (20 ft) or less in height abovegrade that is provided with shall not be passed through an outlet box that is an integral a hinged base. part of a luminaire unless the luminaire is identified for (2) Where raceway risers or cable is not installed within the through-wiring. pole, a threaded fitting or nipple shall be brazed, welded, Informational Note: See 410.64(C) for wiring supplying or attached to the pole opposite the handhole for the supply power to luminaires connected together. connection. (3) A metal pole shall be provided with an equipment ground- 410.22 Outlet Boxes to Be Covered. In a completed installa- ing terminal as follows: tion, each outlet box shall be provided with a cover unless cov- ered by means of a luminaire canopy, lampholder, receptacle a. A pole with a handhole shall have the equipment

that covers the box or is provided with a faceplate, or similar grounding terminal accessible from the handhole. device. b. A pole with a hinged base shall have the equipment grounding terminal accessible within the base. 410.23 Covering of Combustible Material at Outlet Boxes. Any combustible wall or ceiling finish exposed between the Exception to (3): No grounding terminal shall be required in a edge of a luminaire canopy or pan and an outlet box having a pole 2.5 m (8 ft) or less in height abovegrade where the supply surface area of 1160 mm2 (180 in.2) or more shall be covered wiring method continues without splice or pull, and where the with noncombustible material. interior of the pole and any splices are accessible by removing the luminaire. 410.24 Connection of Electric-Discharge and LED Luminaires. (4) A metal pole with a hinged base shall have the hinged base and pole bonded together. (A) Independent of the Outlet Box. Electric-discharge (5) Metal raceways or other equipment grounding conduc- and LED luminaires supported independently of the outlet box

tors shall be bonded to the metal pole with an equipment shall be connected to the branch circuit through metal raceway, grounding conductor recognized by 250.118 and sized in nonmetallic raceway, Type MC cable, Type AC cable, Type MI accordance with 250.122. cable, nonmetallic sheathed cable, or by flexible cord as permit- (6) Conductors in vertical poles used as raceway shall be sup- ted in 410.62(B) or 410.62(C). ported as provided in 300.19. (B) Access to Boxes. Electric-discharge and LED luminaires 410.36 Means of Support. surface mounted over concealed outlet, pull, or junction boxes and designed not to be supported solely by the outlet box shall ∆ (A) Luminaires Supported By Outlet Boxes. Luminaires be provided with suitable openings in the back of the luminaire shall be permitted to be supported by outlet boxes or fittings to provide access to the wiring in the box. installed as required by 314.23. The installation shall comply with the following requirements: Part IV. Luminaire Supports (1) The outlet boxes or fittings shall comply with 314.27(A)(1) 410.30 Supports.

and 314.27(A)(2). (2) Luminaires shall be permitted to be supported in accordance (A) General. Luminaires and lampholders shall be securely with 314.27(E). supported. A luminaire that weighs more than 3 kg (6 lb) or (3) Outlet boxes complying with 314.27(E) shall be considered exceeds 400 mm (16 in.) in any dimension shall not be sup- lighting outlets as required by 210.70(A), (B), and (C). ported by the screw shell of a lampholder. (B) Suspended Ceilings. Framing members of suspended (B) Metal or Nonmetallic Poles Supporting Luminaires. ceiling systems used to support luminaires shall be securely fas- Metal or nonmetallic poles shall be permitted to be used to sup- tened to each other and shall be securely attached to the building port luminaires and as a raceway to enclose supply conductors, structure at appropriate intervals. Luminaires shall be securely provided the following conditions are met: fastened to the ceiling framing member by mechanical means (1) A pole shall have a handhole not less than 50 mm × 100 mm such as bolts, screws, or rivets. Listed clips identified for use

(2 in. × 4 in.) with a cover suitable for use in wet locations with the type of ceiling framing member(s) and luminaire(s) to provide access to the supply terminations within the pole shall also be permitted. or pole base. (C) Luminaire Studs. Luminaire studs that are not a part of Exception No. 1: No handhole shall be required in a pole 2.5 m outlet boxes, hickeys, tripods, and crowfeet shall be made of steel, (8 ft) or less in height abovegrade where the supply wiring malleable iron, or other material suitable for the application. method continues without splice or pull point, and where the (D) Insulating Joints. Insulating joints that are not designed interior of the pole and any splices are accessible by removing to be mounted with screws or bolts shall have an exterior the luminaire. metal casing, insulated from both screw connections. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–319

410.40 ARTICLE 410 — LUMINAIRES, LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS (E) Raceway Fittings. Raceway fittings used to support a 410.50 Polarization of Luminaires. Luminaires shall be luminaire(s) shall be capable of supporting the weight of the wired so that the screw shells of lampholders are connected to the complete fixture assembly and lamp(s). same luminaire or circuit conductor or terminal. The grounded conductor, where connected to a screw shell lampholder, shall (F) Busways. Luminaires shall be permitted to be connected be connected to the screw shell. to busways in accordance with 368.17(C). • N 410.52 Conductor Insulation. Luminaires shall be wired (G) Trees. Outdoor luminaires and associated equipment shall with conductors having insulation suitable for the environmen- be permitted to be supported by trees. tal conditions, current, voltage, and temperature to which the Informational Note No. 1: See 225.26 for restrictions for conductors will be subjected. support of overhead conductors. Informational Note: For ampacity of fixture wire, maxi- Informational Note No.

2: See 300.5(D) for protection mum operating temperature, voltage limitations, minimum of conductors. wire size, and other information, see Article 402. Part V. Grounding N 410.54 Pendant Conductors for Incandescent Filament Lamps. 410.40 General. Luminaires and lighting equipment shall be connected to an equipment grounding conductor as required N (A) Support. Pendant lampholders with permanently attached in Article 250 and Part V of this article. leads, where used for other than festoon wiring, shall be hung from separate stranded rubber-covered conductors that are sol- 410.42 Luminaire(s) with Exposed Conductive Parts. dered directly to the circuit conductors but supported indepen- Exposed conductive parts that are accessible to unqualified dently thereof. persons shall be connected to an equipment grounding con- ductor or be separated from all live parts and other conducting N (B) Size. Unless part of listed decorative lighting assem- surfaces by a listed system of double insulation. blies, pendant conductors shall not be smaller than 14 AWG

for mogul-base or medium-base screw shell lampholders or Small isolated parts, such as mounting screws, clips, and smaller than 18 AWG for intermediate or candelabra-base decorative bands on glass spaced at least 38 mm (11⁄2 in.) from lampholders. lamp terminals, shall not require connection to an equipment grounding conductor. N (C) Twisted or Cabled. Pendant conductors longer than 900 mm (3 ft) shall be twisted together where not cabled in a Portable luminaires with a polarized attachment plug shall listed assembly. not require connection to an equipment grounding conductor. 410.56 Protection of Conductors and Insulation. ∆ 410.44 Methods of Grounding. Luminaires and equipment shall be mechanically connected to an equipment grounding (A) Properly Secured. Conductors shall be secured in a conductor as specified in 250.118 and sized in accordance with manner that does not tend to cut or abrade the insulation. 250.122. (B) Protection Through Metal. Conductor insulation shall be Exception No.

1: Replacement luminaires shall be permitted to protected from abrasion where it passes through metal. connect an equipment grounding conductor in the same manner (C) Luminaire Stems. Splices and taps shall not be located as replacement receptacles in compliance with 250.130(C). The within luminaire arms or stems. luminaire shall then comply with 410.42. (D) Splices and Taps. No unnecessary splices or taps shall be Exception No. 2: Where no equipment grounding conduc- made within or on a luminaire. tor exists at the outlet, replacement luminaires that are GFCI protected or do not have exposed conductive parts shall not be Informational Note: For approved means of making con- required to be connected to an equipment grounding conductor. nections, see 110.14. • N 410.46 Equipment Grounding Conductor Attachment. (E) Stranding. Stranded conductors shall be used for wiring Luminaires with exposed metal parts shall be provided with on luminaire chains and on other movable or flexible parts. a means for connecting an equipment grounding conductor. (F) Tension.

Conductors shall be arranged so that the weight of the luminaire or movable parts does not put tension on the Part VI. Wiring of Luminaires conductors. 410.48 Luminaire Wiring — General. Wiring on or within 410.59 Cord-Connected Showcases. Individual showcases, luminaires shall be neatly arranged and shall not be exposed to other than fixed, shall be permitted to be connected by flexible physical damage. Excess wiring shall be avoided. Conductors cord to permanently installed receptacles, and groups of not more shall be arranged so that they are not subjected to temperatures than six such showcases shall be permitted to be coupled together above those for which they are rated. by flexible cord and separable locking-type connectors with one 70–320 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 410 — LUMINAIRES, LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS 410.64 of the group connected by flexible cord to a permanently installed (1) Cord-Connected Installation. A luminaire or a listed receptacle. assembly in compliance with any of the conditions in 410.62(C) (1)(a) through (C)(1)(c) shall be permitted to be cord connected The installation shall comply with 410.59(A) through (E). provided the luminaire is located directly below the outlet or (A) Cord Requirements. Flexible cord shall be of the hard- busway, the cord is not subject to strain or physical damage, and service type, having conductors not smaller than the branch- the cord is visible over its entire length except at terminations. circuit conductors, having ampacity at least equal to the (a) A luminaire shall be permitted to be connected with a branch-circuit overcurrent device, and having an equipment cord terminating in a grounding-type attachment plug or bus- grounding conductor. way plug. If grounding is not required in accordance with 410.42, a polarized-type plug shall be permitted.

Informational Note: See Table 250.122 for size of (b) A luminaire assembly equipped with a strain relief and equipment grounding conductor. canopy shall be permitted to use a cord connection between (B) Receptacles, Connectors, and Attachment Plugs. Recep- the luminaire assembly and the canopy. The canopy shall be tacles, connectors, and attachment plugs shall be of a listed permitted to include a section of raceway not over 150 mm grounding type rated 15 or 20 amperes. (6 in.) in length and intended to facilitate the connection to an (C) Support. Flexible cords shall be secured to the under- outlet box mounted above a suspended ceiling. sides of showcases such that all of the following conditions are (c) Listed luminaires connected using listed assemblies ensured: that incorporate manufactured wiring system connectors in accordance with 604.100(C) shall be permitted to be cord (1) The wiring is not exposed to physical damage. connected. (2) The separation between cases is not in excess of 50 mm

(2 in.), or more than 300 mm (12 in.) between the first case (2) Provided with Mogul-Base, Screw Shell Lampholders. and the supply receptacle. Electric-discharge luminaires provided with mogul-base, (3) The free lead at the end of a group of showcases has a screw shell lampholders shall be permitted to be connected to female fitting not extending beyond the case. branch circuits of 50 amperes or less by cords complying with 240.5. Receptacles and attachment plugs shall be permitted to (D) No Other Equipment. Equipment other than showcases be of a lower ampere rating than the branch circuit but not less shall not be electrically connected to showcases. than 125 percent of the luminaire full-load current. (E) Secondary Circuit(s). Where showcases are cord- (3) Equipped with Flanged Surface Inlet. Electric-discharge connected, the secondary circuit(s) of each electric-discharge luminaires equipped with a flanged surface inlet shall be per- lighting ballast shall be limited to one showcase. mitted to be supplied by cord pendants equipped with cord

410.62 Cord-Connected Lampholders and Luminaires. connectors. Inlets and connectors shall be permitted to be of a lower ampere rating than the branch circuit but not less than (A) Lampholders. Where a metal lampholder is attached to 125 percent of the luminaire load current. a flexible cord, the inlet shall be equipped with an insulating bushing that, if threaded, is not smaller than metric designa- 410.64 Luminaires as Raceways. Luminaires shall not be tor 12 (trade size 3⁄8) pipe size. The cord hole shall be of a size used as a raceway for circuit conductors unless they comply appropriate for the cord, and all burrs and fins shall be removed with 410.64(A), (B), or (C). in order to provide a smooth bearing surface for the cord. (A) Listed. Luminaires listed and marked for use as a raceway Bushing having holes 7 mm (9⁄ 32 in.) in diameter shall be shall be permitted to be used as a raceway. permitted for use with plain pendant cord and holes 11 mm (B) Through-Wiring. Luminaires identified for through- ( 13⁄32 in.) in diameter with reinforced cord.

wiring, as permitted by 410.21, shall be permitted to be used (B) Adjustable Luminaires. Luminaires that require adjust- as a raceway. ing or aiming after installation shall not be required to be (C) Luminaires Connected Together. Luminaires designed equipped with an attachment plug or cord connector, provided for end-to-end connection to form a continuous assembly, or the exposed cord is suitable for hard-usage or extra-hard-usage luminaires connected together by recognized wiring methods, and is not longer than that required for maximum adjustment. shall be permitted to contain the conductors of a 2-wire branch The cord shall not be subject to strain or physical damage. circuit, or one multiwire branch circuit, supplying the connected Informational Note: For application provisions, see luminaires and shall not be required to be listed as a raceway. Table 400.4, “Use” column. One additional 2-wire branch circuit separately supplying one or more of the connected luminaires shall also be permitted. ∆ (C) Electric-Discharge and LED Luminaires. Electric-

discharge and LED luminaires shall comply with 410.62(C)(1), Informational Note: See Article 100 for the definition of (C)(2), and (C)(3), as applicable. Multiwire Branch Circuit. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–321

410.68 ARTICLE 410 — LUMINAIRES, LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS 410.68 Feeder and Branch-Circuit Conductors and Bal- by a circuit having a grounded conductor, the grounded conduc- lasts. Feeder and branch-circuit conductors within 75 mm tor shall be connected to the screw shell. (3 in.) of a ballast, LED driver, power supply, or transformer 410.93 Double-Pole Switched Lampholders. Where sup- shall have an insulation temperature rating not lower than 90°C plied by the ungrounded conductors of a circuit, the switching (194°F), unless supplying a luminaire marked as suitable for a device of lampholders of the switched type shall simultane- different insulation temperature. ously disconnect both conductors of the circuit. N 410.69 Identification of Control Conductor Insulation. 410.96 Lampholders in Wet or Damp Locations. Lamphold- Where control conductors are spliced, terminated, or connected ers installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet loca- in the same luminaire or enclosure as the branch-circuit con- tions. Lampholders installed in damp locations shall be listed for

ductors, the field-connected control conductor shall not be of a damp locations or shall be listed for wet locations. color reserved for the grounded branch-circuit conductor or the equipment grounding conductor. This requirement shall become 410.97 Lampholders Near Combustible Material. Lamp- effective January 1, 2022. holders shall be constructed, installed, or equipped with shades or guards so that combustible material is not subjected to tem- Informational Note: See 200.6 for identification of peratures in excess of 90°C (194°F). grounded conductor and 250.119 for identification of equipment grounding conductor. Part IX. Lamps and Auxiliary Equipment Exception: A field-connected gray-colored control conductor 410.103 Bases, Incandescent Lamps. An incandescent lamp shall be permitted if the insulation is permanently re-identified for general use on lighting branch circuits shall not be equipped by marking tape, painting, or other effective means at its termi- with a medium base if rated over 300 watts, or with a mogul nation and at each location where the conductor is visible and

base if rated over 1500 watts. Special bases or other devices accessible. Identification shall encircle the insulation and shall shall be used for over 1500 watts. be a color other than white, gray, or green. 410.104 Electric-Discharge Lamp Auxiliary Equipment. N 410.70 Combustible Shades and Enclosures. Air space shall be provided between lamps and shades or other enclosures (A) Enclosures. Auxiliary equipment for electric-discharge of combustible material. lamps shall be enclosed in noncombustible cases and treated as sources of heat. Part VII. Construction of Luminaires • (B) Switching. Where supplied by the ungrounded conduc- 410.74 Luminaire Rating. tors of a circuit, the switching device of auxiliary equipment shall simultaneously disconnect all conductors. (A) Marking. All luminaires shall be marked with the maxi- mum lamp wattage or electrical rating, manufacturer’s name, Part X. Special Provisions for Flush and Recessed trademark, or other suitable means of identification. A luminaire Luminaires requiring supply wire rated higher than 60°C (140°F) shall be

marked with the minimum supply wire temperature rating on 410.110 General. Luminaires installed in recessed cavities in the luminaire and shipping carton or equivalent. walls or ceilings, including suspended ceilings, shall comply with 410.115 through 410.122. (B) Electrical Rating. The electrical rating shall include the voltage and frequency and shall indicate the current rating of 410.115 Temperature. the unit, including the ballast, transformer, LED driver, power (A) Combustible Material. Luminaires shall be installed so supply, or autotransformer. • that adjacent combustible material will not be subjected to tem- N 410.82 Portable Luminaires. Portable luminaires shall be wired peratures in excess of 90°C (194°F). with flexible cord recognized by 400.4 and an attachment plug of (B) Recessed Incandescent Luminaires. Incandescent lumi- the polarized or grounding type. If used with Edison-base lamp- naires shall have thermal protection and shall be identified as holders, the grounded conductor shall be identified and attached thermally protected.

to the screw shell and the identified blade of the attachment plug. Exception No. 1: Thermal protection shall not be required in 410.84 Cord Bushings. A bushing or the equivalent shall be a recessed luminaire identified for use and installed in poured provided where flexible cord enters the base or stem of a porta- concrete. ble luminaire. The bushing shall be of insulating material unless a jacketed type of cord is used. Exception No. 2: Thermal protection shall not be required in a recessed luminaire whose design, construction, and Part VIII. Installation of Lampholders thermal performance characteristics are equivalent to a ther- mally protected luminaire and are identified as inherently 410.90 Screw Shell Type. Lampholders of the screw shell type protected. shall be installed for use as lampholders only. Where supplied 70–322 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 410 — LUMINAIRES, LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS 410.130 410.116 Clearance and Installation. Part XI. Construction of Flush and Recessed Luminaires (A) Clearance. 410.119 Temperature. Luminaires shall be constructed such that adjacent combustible material is not subject to tempera- (1) Non-Type IC. A recessed luminaire that is not identified tures in excess of 90°C (194°F). for contact with insulation shall have all recessed parts spaced not less than 13 mm (1⁄2 in.) from combustible materials. The 410.120 Lamp Wattage Marking. Incandescent lamp lumi- points of support and the trim finishing off the openings in the naires shall be marked to indicate the maximum allowable watt- ceiling, wall, or other finished surface shall be permitted to be age of lamps. The markings shall be permanently installed, in in contact with combustible materials. letters at least 6 mm (1⁄4 in.) high, and shall be located where visible during relamping. (2) Type IC. A recessed luminaire that is identified for con- tact with insulation, Type IC, shall be permitted to be in contact 410.121 Solder Prohibited.

No solder shall be used in the with combustible materials at recessed parts, points of support, construction of a luminaire recessed housing. and portions passing through or finishing off the opening in the 410.122 Lampholders. Lampholders of the screw shell type building structure. shall be of porcelain or other suitable insulating materials. (B) Installation. Thermal insulation shall not be installed above a recessed luminaire or within 75 mm (3 in.) of the recessed lumi- Part XII. Special Provisions for Electric-Discharge naire’s enclosure, wiring compartment, ballast, transformer, LED Lighting Systems of 1000 Volts or Less driver, or power supply unless the luminaire is identified as Type 410.130 General. IC for insulation contact. (A) Open-Circuit Voltage of 1000 Volts or Less. Equipment (C) Installation in Fire-Resistant Construction. Luminaires for use with electric-discharge lighting systems and designed marked “FOR USE IN NON-FIRE-RATED INSTALLA- for an open-circuit voltage of 1000 volts or less shall be of a TIONS” shall not be used in fire-rated installations.

Where a type identified for such service. luminaire is recessed in fire-resistant material in a building of (B) Considered as Energized. The terminals of an electric- fire-resistant construction, the recessed luminaire shall satisfy discharge lamp shall be considered as energized where any one of the following: lamp terminal is connected to a circuit of over 300 volts. (1) The recessed luminaire shall be listed for use in a fire (C) Transformers of the Oil-Filled Type. Transformers of resistance–rated construction. the oil-filled type shall not be used. (2) The recessed luminaire shall be installed in or used with a luminaire enclosure that is listed for use in a fire resistance– (D) Additional Requirements. In addition to complying with rated construction. the general requirements for luminaires, such equipment shall (3) The recessed luminaire shall be listed and shall be installed in comply with Part XII of this article. accordance with a tested fire resistance–rated assembly. When (E) Thermal Protection — Fluorescent Luminaires.

a tested fire resistance–rated assembly allows the installation of a recessed fluorescent luminaire, a recessed LED lumi- (1) Integral Thermal Protection. The ballast of a fluores- naire of comparable construction shall be permitted. cent luminaire installed indoors shall have integral thermal protection. Replacement ballasts shall also have thermal pro- 410.117 Wiring. tection integral with the ballast. (A) General. Conductors that have insulation suitable for the (2) Simple Reactance Ballasts. A simple reactance ballast in temperature encountered shall be used. a fluorescent luminaire with straight tubular lamps shall not be (B) Circuit Conductors. Branch-circuit conductors that required to be thermally protected. have an insulation suitable for the temperature encountered (3) Exit Luminaires. A ballast in a fluorescent exit lumi- shall be permitted to terminate in the luminaire. naire shall not have thermal protection. (C) Tap Conductors. Tap conductors of a type suitable for (4) Egress Luminaires. A ballast in a fluorescent luminaire

the temperature encountered shall be permitted to run from the that is used for egress lighting and energized only during a luminaire terminal connection to an outlet box placed at least failure of the normal supply shall not have thermal protection. 300 mm (1 ft) from the luminaire. Such tap conductors shall be in suitable raceway or Type AC or MC cable of at least 450 mm (F) High-Intensity Discharge Luminaires. (18 in.) but not more than 1.8 m (6 ft) in length. (1) Recessed. Recessed high-intensity luminaires designed to N 410.118 Access to Other Boxes. Luminaires recessed in ceil- be installed in wall or ceiling cavities shall have thermal protec- ings, floors, or walls shall not be used to access outlet, pull, tion and be identified as thermally protected. or junction boxes or conduit bodies, unless the box or conduit (2) Inherently Protected. Thermal protection shall not be body is an integral part of the listed luminaire. required in a recessed high-intensity luminaire whose design, 2022 California Electrical Code 70–323

410.134 ARTICLE 410 — LUMINAIRES, LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS construction, and thermal performance characteristics are equiv- 410.134 Direct-Current Equipment. Luminaires installed alent to a thermally protected luminaire and are identified as on dc circuits shall be equipped with auxiliary equipment and inherently protected. resistors designed for dc operation. The luminaires shall be marked for dc operation. (3) Installed in Poured Concrete. Thermal protection shall not be required in a recessed high-intensity discharge luminaire 410.135 Open-Circuit Voltage Exceeding 300 Volts. Equip- identified for use and installed in poured concrete. ment having an open-circuit voltage exceeding 300 volts shall not be installed in dwelling occupancies unless such equipment (4) Recessed Remote Ballasts. A recessed remote ballast for is designed so that there will be no exposed live parts when a high-intensity discharge luminaire shall have thermal protec- lamps are being inserted, are in place, or are being removed. tion that is integral with the ballast and shall be identified as

thermally protected. 410.136 Luminaire Mounting. (5) Metal Halide Lamp Containment. Luminaires that use (A) Exposed Components. Luminaires that have exposed a metal halide lamp other than a thick-glass parabolic reflector ballasts, transformers, LED drivers, or power supplies shall lamp (PAR) shall be provided with a containment barrier that be installed such that ballasts, transformers, LED drivers, or encloses the lamp, or shall be provided with a physical means power supplies shall not be in contact with combustible mate- that only allows the use of a lamp that is Type O. rial unless listed for such condition. Informational Note: See ANSI Standard C78.389, Amer- ∆ (B) Combustible Low-Density Cellulose Fiberboard. Where ican National Standard for Electric Lamps — High Inten- a surface-mounted luminaire containing a ballast, transformer, sity Discharge, Methods of Measuring Characteristics. LED driver, or power supply is to be installed on combustible low-density cellulose fiberboard, it shall be marked for this con- (G) Disconnecting Means.

dition or shall be spaced not less than 38 mm (11⁄2 in.) from the (1) General. In indoor locations other than dwellings and asso- surface of the fiberboard. Where such luminaires are partially ciated accessory structures, fluorescent luminaires that utilize or wholly recessed, the provisions of 410.110 through 410.122 double-ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that can be serviced shall apply. in place shall have a disconnecting means either internal or Informational Note: Combustible low-density cellulose external to each luminaire. For existing installed luminaires fiberboard includes sheets, panels, and tiles that have a without disconnecting means, at the time a ballast is replaced, density of 320 kg/m 3 (20 lb/ft 3) or less and that are formed a disconnecting means shall be installed. The line side terminals of bonded plant fiber material but does not include solid of the disconnecting means shall be guarded. or laminated wood or fiberboard that has a density in Exception No. 1: A disconnecting means shall not be required excess of 320 kg/m3 (20 lb/ft3) or is a material that has

for luminaires installed in hazardous (classified) location(s). been integrally treated with fire-retarding chemicals to the degree that the flame spread index in any plane of Exception No. 2: A disconnecting means shall not be required the material will not exceed 25, determined in accordance for luminaires that provide emergency illumination required with tests for surface burning characteristics of build- in 700.16. ing materials. See ASTM E84-18a, Standard Test Method Exception No. 3: For cord-and-plug-connected luminaires, an for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materi- accessible separable connector or an accessible plug and recep- als, or ANSI/UL 723-2018, Standard for Test for Surface tacle shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means. Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Exception No. 4: Where more than one luminaire is installed 410.137 Equipment Not Integral with Luminaire. and supplied by other than a multiwire branch circuit, a discon- (A) Metal Cabinets. Auxiliary equipment, including reactors,

necting means shall not be required for every luminaire when capacitors, resistors, and similar equipment, where not installed the design of the installation includes disconnecting means, such as part of a luminaire assembly, shall be enclosed in accessible, that the illuminated space cannot be left in total darkness. permanently installed metal cabinets. (2) Multiwire Branch Circuits. When connected to multi- (B) Separate Mounting. Separately mounted ballasts, trans- wire branch circuits, the disconnecting means shall simultane- formers, LED drivers, or power supplies that are listed for direct ously break all the supply conductors to the ballast, including connection to a wiring system shall not be required to be addi- the grounded conductor. tionally enclosed. (3) Location. The disconnecting means shall be located so as (C) Wired Luminaire Sections. Wired luminaire sections to be accessible to qualified persons before servicing or main- are paired, with a ballast(s) or LED driver(s) supplying a light taining the ballast. Where the disconnecting means is external to the

source or light sources in both. For interconnection between luminaire, it shall be a single device, and shall be attached to paired units, it shall be permissible to use metric designator 12 the luminaire or the luminaire shall be located within sight of the (trade size 3⁄8) flexible metal conduit in lengths not exceeding disconnecting means. 70–324 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 410 — LUMINAIRES, LAMPHOLDERS, AND LAMPS 410.151 7.5 m (25 ft), in conformance with Article 348. Luminaire wire (C) Rating. Transformers shall have a secondary short-cir- operating at line voltage, supplying only the ballast(s) or LED cuit current rating of not more than 150 mA if the open-circuit driver(s) of one of the paired luminaires, shall be permitted in voltage is over 7500 volts, and not more than 300 mA if the open- the same raceway as the light source supply wires of the paired circuit voltage rating is 7500 volts or less. luminaires where the voltage rating of the light source supply (D) Secondary Connections. Secondary circuit outputs shall wires is greater than the line voltage. not be connected in parallel or in series. 410.138 Autotransformers. An autotransformer that is used 410.144 Transformer Locations. to raise the voltage to more than 300 volts, as part of a bal- last for supplying lighting units, shall be supplied only by a (A) Accessible. Transformers shall be accessible after grounded system. installation. 410.139 Switches.

Snap switches shall comply with 404.14. (B) Secondary Conductors. Transformers shall be installed as near to the lamps as practicable to keep the secondary conduc- Part XIII. Special Provisions for Electric-Discharge tors as short as possible. Lighting Systems of More Than 1000 Volts (C) Adjacent to Combustible Materials. Transformers shall 410.140 General. be located so that adjacent combustible materials are not sub- jected to temperatures in excess of 90°C (194°F). (A) Listing. Electric-discharge lighting systems with an open- circuit voltage exceeding 1000 volts shall be listed and installed 410.145 Exposure to Damage. Lamps shall not be located in conformance with that listing. where normally exposed to physical damage. (B) Dwelling Occupancies. Equipment that has an open-circuit 410.146 Marking. Each luminaire or each secondary circuit of voltage exceeding 1000 volts shall not be installed in or on dwell- tubing having an open-circuit voltage of over 1000 volts shall ing occupancies. have a clearly legible marking in letters not less than 6 mm ( 1⁄4 in.)

high reading “Caution ____ volts.” The voltage indicated shall (C) Live Parts. The terminal of an electric-discharge lamp be the rated open-circuit voltage. The caution sign(s) or label(s) shall be considered as a live part. shall comply with 110.21(B). (D) Additional Requirements. In addition to complying with the general requirements for luminaires, such equipment shall Part XIV. Lighting Track comply with Part XIII of this article. 410.151 Installation. Informational Note: For signs and outline lighting, see (A) Lighting Track. Lighting track shall be permanently Article 600. installed and permanently connected to a branch circuit. Only 410.141 Control. lighting track fittings shall be installed on lighting track. Light- ing track fittings shall not be equipped with general-purpose (A) Disconnection. Luminaires or lamp installation shall be receptacles. controlled either singly or in groups by an externally operable switch or circuit breaker that opens all ungrounded primary (B) Connected Load. The connected load on lighting track shall conductors.

not exceed the rating of the track. Lighting track shall be supplied by a branch circuit having a rating not more than that of the track. (B) Within Sight or Locked Type. The switch or circuit The load calculation in 220.43(B) shall not be required to limit breaker shall be located within sight from the luminaires or the length of track on a single branch circuit, and it shall not be lamps, or it shall be permitted to be located elsewhere if it is required to limit the number of luminaires on a single track. lockable open in accordance with 110.25. (C) Locations Not Permitted. Lighting track shall not be 410.142 Lamp Terminals and Lampholders. Parts that must installed in the following locations: be removed for lamp replacement shall be hinged or held cap- tive. Lamps or lampholders shall be designed so that there are (1) Where likely to be subjected to physical damage no exposed live parts when lamps are being inserted or removed. (2) In wet or damp locations (3) Where subject to corrosive vapors 410.143 Transformers. (4) In storage battery rooms (A) Type.

Transformers shall be enclosed, identified for the (5) In hazardous (classified) locations use, and listed. (6) Where concealed (7) Where extended through walls or partitions (B) Voltage. The secondary circuit voltage shall not exceed (8) Less than 1.5 m (5 ft) above the finished floor except where 15,000 volts, nominal, under any load condition. The voltage to protected from physical damage or track operating at less ground of any output terminals of the secondary circuit shall not than 30 volts rms open-circuit voltage exceed 7500 volts under any load conditions. (9) Where prohibited by 410.10(D) 2022 California Electrical Code 70–325

410.153 ARTICLE 411 — LOW-VOLTAGE LIGHTING (D) Support. Fittings identified for use on lighting track shall with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and installation be designed specifically for the track on which they are to be markings on the equipment as required by that listing. installed. They shall be securely fastened to the track, shall main- N 410.176 Locations Not Permitted. tain polarization and connections to the equipment grounding conductor, and shall be designed to be suspended directly from N (A) General Lighting. Lighting equipment identified for the track. horticultural use shall not be installed as lighting for general illumination unless such use is indicated in the manufacturer’s 410.153 Heavy-Duty Lighting Track. Heavy-duty lighting instructions. track is lighting track identified for use exceeding 20 amperes. Each fitting attached to a heavy-duty lighting track shall have N (B) Installed Location. Lighting equipment identified for hor- individual overcurrent protection. ticultural use shall not be installed where it is likely to be subject

to physical damage or where concealed. 410.154 Fastening. Lighting track shall be securely mounted so that each fastening is suitable for supporting the maximum N 410.178 Flexible Cord. Flexible cord shall only be permitted weight of luminaires that can be installed. Unless identified for when provided as part of listed lighting equipment identified for supports at greater intervals, a single section 1.2 m (4 ft) or horticultural use for any of the following uses: shorter in length shall have two supports, and, where installed (1) Connecting a horticultural lighting luminaire directly to a in a continuous row, each individual section of not more than branch circuit outlet 1.2 m (4 ft) in length shall have one additional support. (2) Interconnecting horticultural lighting luminaires 410.155 Construction Requirements. (3) Connecting a horticultural lighting luminaire to a remote power source (A) Construction. The housing for the lighting track system shall be of substantial construction to maintain rigidity. The con- Informational Note: Remote power sources include LED

ductors shall be installed within the track housing, permitting drivers, fluorescent ballasts, or HID ballasts. insertion of a luminaire, and designed to prevent tampering and N 410.180 Fittings and Connectors. Fittings and connectors accidental contact with live parts. Components of lighting track attached to flexible cords shall be provided as part of a listed systems of different voltages shall not be interchangeable. The horticultural lighting equipment device or system and installed in track conductors shall be a minimum 12 AWG or equal and shall accordance with the instructions provided as part of that listing. be copper. The track system ends shall be insulated and capped. N 410.182 Grounding. Lighting equipment identified for hor- (B) Grounding. Lighting track shall be grounded in accor- ticultural use shall be grounded as required in Article 250 and dance with Article 250, and the track sections shall be securely Part V of this article. coupled to maintain continuity of the circuitry, polarization, and N grounding throughout.

410.184 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. Light- ing equipment identified for horticultural use employing flexible Part XV. Decorative Lighting and Similar Accessories cord(s) with one or more conductors shall be supplied by lighting outlets protected by a listed ground-fault circuit interrupter. 410.160 Listing of Decorative Lighting. Decorative lighting and similar accessories used for holiday lighting and similar N 410.186 Support. Special fittings identified for support of hor- purposes, in accordance with 590.3(B), shall be listed. ticultural lighting equipment shall be designed specifically for the horticultural lighting equipment on which they are installed N Part XVI. Special Provisions for Horticultural Lighting and shall be used in accordance with the installation instructions Equipment provided and shall be securely fastened. N 410.170 General. Luminaires complying with Parts, I. II, III, IV, N 410.188 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Where installed

V, VI, VII, IX, X, XI, and XII of this article shall be permitted to be in hazardous (classified) locations, horticultural lighting equip- used for horticultural lighting. Part XVI shall additionally apply ment shall conform to Articles 500 through 517 in addition to to lighting equipment specifically identified for horticultural use. this article. Informational Note: Lighting equipment identified for horticultural use is designed to provide a spectral charac- teristic needed for the growth of plants and can also pro- ARTICLE 411 vide supplemental general illumination within the growing Low-Voltage Lighting environment. N 410.172 Listing. Lighting equipment identified for horticul- 411.1 Scope. This article covers lighting systems and their tural use shall be listed. associated components operating at no more than 30 volts ac or N 410.174 Installation and Use. Lighting equipment identified 60 volts dc. Where wet contact is likely to occur, the limits are for horticultural use shall be installed and used in accordance 15 volts ac or 30 volts dc. 70–326 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 422 — APPLIANCES 422.5 Informational Note: Refer to Article 680 for applications involving immersion. ARTICLE 422 411.3 Low-Voltage Lighting Systems. Low voltage lighting Appliances systems shall consist of an isolating power supply, low-voltage luminaires, and associated equipment that are all identified for Part I. General the use. The output circuits of the power supply shall be rated for 25 amperes maximum under all load conditions. 422.1 Scope. This article covers electrical appliances used in any occupancy. 411.4 Listing Required. Low-voltage lighting systems shall comply with 411.4(A) or (B). Listed low-voltage lighting sys- 422.3 Other Articles. The requirements of Article 430 shall tems or a lighting system assembled from listed parts shall not apply to the installation of motor-operated appliances, and the be permitted to be reconditioned. requirements of Article 440 shall apply to the installation of appli- ances containing a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor(s), (A) Listed System. The luminaires, power supply, and lumi-

except as specifically amended in this article. naire fittings (including the exposed bare conductors) of an exposed bare conductor lighting system shall be listed for the use as part 422.3(A) California Energy Code Requirements for Heat Pump of the same identified lighting system. Water Heaters, Electric Cooktops, Electric Clothes Dryers and their Readiness in Single-Family Buildings [CEC]. In single- (B) Assembly of Listed Parts. A lighting system assembled family residential buildings that include one or two dwellings, from the following listed parts shall be permitted: each dwelling unit shall be provided with: (1) Low-voltage luminaires identified for the use (1) designated spaces, receptacles, branch circuits and circuit (2) Power supply identified for the use identifications as specified for heat pump water heaters in (3) Low-voltage luminaire fittings identified for the use California Energy Code Section 150.0(n); and (4) Suitably rated cord, cable, conductors in conduit, or other (2) dedicated circuits and circuit identifications as specified

fixed Chapter 3 wiring method for the secondary circuit for electric cooktops in California Energy Code Section 411.5 Specific Location Requirements. 150.0(u); and (3) dedicated circuits and circuit identifications as specified for (A) Walls, Floors, and Ceilings. Conductors concealed or electric clothes dryers in California Energy Code Section extended through a wall, floor, or ceiling shall be in accordance 150.0(v). with (1) or (2): 422.3(B) California Energy Code Requirements for Electric (1) Installed using any of the wiring methods specified in Cooktops, Electric Clothes Dryers and their Readiness in Chapter 3 Multifamily Buildings [CEC]. In multifamily buildings, each (2) Installed using wiring supplied by a listed Class 2 power dwelling unit shall be provided with: source and installed in accordance with 725.130 (1) dedicated circuits and circuit identifications as specified (B) Pools, Spas, Fountains, and Similar Locations. Light- for electric cooktops in California Energy Code Section ing systems shall be installed not less than 3 m (10 ft) hori- 160.9(b); and

zontally from the nearest edge of the water, unless permitted by (2) dedicated circuits and circuit identifications as specified for Article 680. electric clothes dryers in California Energy Code Section 411.6 Secondary Circuits. 160.9(c). (A) Grounding. Secondary circuits shall not be grounded. 422.4 Live Parts. Appliances shall have no live parts normally (B) Isolation. The secondary circuit shall be insulated from exposed to contact other than those parts functioning as open- the branch circuit by an isolating transformer. resistance heating elements, such as the heating element of a toaster, which are necessarily exposed. (C) Bare Conductors. Exposed bare conductors and current- carrying parts shall be permitted for indoor installations only. 422.5 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Protection Bare conductors shall not be installed less than 2.1 m (7 ft) for Personnel. above the finished floor, unless specifically listed for a lower ∆ (A) General. Appliances identified in 422.5(A)(1) through installation height.

(A)(7) rated 150 volts or less to ground and 60 amperes or less, • 411.7 Branch Circuit. Lighting systems covered by this article single- or 3-phase, shall be provided with Class A GFCI protec- shall be supplied from a maximum 20-ampere branch circuit. tion for personnel. Multiple Class A GFCI protective devices shall be permitted but shall not be required. 411.8 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Where installed in hazardous (classified) locations, these systems shall conform (1) Automotive vacuum machines with Articles 500 through 517 in addition to this article. (2) Drinking water coolers and bottle fill stations 2022 California Electrical Code 70–327

422.6 ARTICLE 422 — APPLIANCES (3) Cord-and-plug-connected high-pressure spray washing If a protective device rating is marked on an appliance, the machines branch-circuit overcurrent device rating shall not exceed the pro- (4) Tire inflation machines tective device rating marked on the appliance. (5) Vending machines (B) Household-Type Appliances with Surface Heating (6) Sump pumps Elements. Household-type appliances with surface heating (7) Dishwashers elements having a maximum demand of more than 60 amperes Informational Note: Section 210.8 specifies require- calculated in accordance with Table 220.55 shall have their ments for GFCI protection for the branch-circuit outlet power supply subdivided into two or more circuits, each of where the covered location warrants such protection. which shall be provided with overcurrent protection rated at not over 50 amperes. (B) Type and Location. The GFCI shall be readily accessible, listed, and located in one or more of the following locations: (C) Infrared Lamp Commercial and Industrial Heating Appliances.

Infrared lamp commercial and industrial heat- (1) Within the branch-circuit overcurrent device ing appliances shall have overcurrent protection not exceeding (2) A device or outlet within the supply circuit 50 amperes. (3) An integral part of the attachment plug (4) Within the supply cord not more than 300 mm (12 in.) from (D) Open-Coil or Exposed Sheathed-Coil Types of Surface the attachment plug Heating Elements in Commercial-Type Heating Appliances. (5) Factory installed within the appliance Open-coil or exposed sheathed-coil types of surface heating ele- ments in commercial-type heating appliances shall be protected 422.6 Listing Required. All appliances supplied by 50 volts by overcurrent protective devices rated at not over 50 amperes. or higher shall be listed. (E) Single Non–Motor-Operated Appliance. If the branch Part II. Installation circuit supplies a single non–motor-operated appliance, the rat- ing of overcurrent protection shall comply with the following: 422.10 Branch Circuits. This section specifies the require-

ments for branch circuits capable of carrying appliance current (1) Not exceed that marked on the appliance. without overheating under the conditions specified. (2) Not exceed 20 amperes if the overcurrent protection rat- ing is not marked and the appliance is rated 13.3 amperes ∆ (A) Individual Branch Circuits. The ampacities of branch- or less; or circuit conductors shall not be less than the marked rating of (3) Not exceed 150 percent of the appliance rated current if the the appliance or the marked rating of an appliance having com- overcurrent protection rating is not marked and the appli- bined loads. ance is rated over 13.3 amperes. Where 150 percent of the The ampacities of branch-circuit conductors for motor- appliance rating does not correspond to a standard over- operated appliances not having a marked rating shall be in current device ampere rating, the next higher standard rat- accordance with Part II of Article 430. ing shall be permitted. The branch-circuit rating for an appliance that is a continuous (F) Electric Heating Appliances Employing Resistance-

load, other than a motor-operated appliance, shall not be less Type Heating Elements Rated More Than 48 Amperes. than 125 percent of the marked rating, or not less than 100 per- (1) Electric Heating Appliances. Electric heating appli- cent of the marked rating if the branch-circuit device and its ances employing resistance-type heating elements rated more assembly are listed for continuous loading at 100 percent of its than 48 amperes, other than household appliances with sur- rating. face heating elements covered by 422.11(B), and commercial- Branch circuits and branch-circuit conductors for household type heating appliances covered by 422.11(D), shall have the ranges and cooking appliances shall be permitted to be in accor- heating elements subdivided. Each subdivided load shall not dance with Table 220.55 and shall be sized in accordance with exceed 48 amperes, and each subdivided load shall be protected 210.19(A)(3). at not more than 60 amperes. (B) Branch Circuits Supplying Two or More Loads. For These supplementary overcurrent protective devices shall

branch circuits supplying appliance and other loads, the rating be (1) factory-installed within or on the heater enclosure or shall be determined in accordance with 210.23. provided as a separate assembly by the heater manufacturer; 422.11 Overcurrent Protection. Appliances shall be protected (2) accessible; and (3) suitable for branch-circuit protection. against overcurrent in accordance with 422.11(A) through (G) The main conductors supplying these overcurrent protec- and 422.10. tive devices shall be considered branch-circuit conductors. (A) Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Protection. Branch cir- (2) Commercial Kitchen and Cooking Appliances. Com- cuits shall be protected in accordance with 240.4. mercial kitchen and cooking appliances using sheathed-type 70–328 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 422 — APPLIANCES 422.16 heating elements not covered in 422.11(D) shall be permitted (B) The ampacity of the connecting conductors shall not be to be subdivided into circuits not exceeding 120 amperes and less than the ampacity of the branch circuit conductors to which protected at not more than 150 amperes where one of the fol- they are connected. lowing is met: (C) Accessible non–current-carrying metal parts of the central (1) Elements are integral with and enclosed within a cooking vacuum outlet assembly likely to become energized shall be surface. connected to an equipment grounding conductor in accordance (2) Elements are completely contained within an enclosure with 250.110. Incidental metal parts such as screws or rivets identified as suitable for this use. installed into or on insulating material shall not be considered (3) Elements are contained within an ASME-rated and stamped likely to become energized. vessel. 422.16 Flexible Cords. (3) Water Heaters and Steam Boilers. Resistance-type (A) General. Flexible cord shall be permitted as follows:

immersion electric heating elements shall be permitted to be subdivided into circuits not exceeding 120 amperes and pro- (1) To connect appliances to facilitate their frequent interchange tected at not more than 150 amperes as follows: or to prevent the transmission of noise or vibration or (2) To facilitate the removal or disconnection of appliances (1) Where contained in ASME-rated and stamped vessels that are fastened in place, where the fastening means and (2) Where included in listed instantaneous water heaters mechanical connections are specifically designed to permit (3) Where installed in low-pressure water heater tanks or open- ready removal for maintenance or repair and the appliance outlet water heater vessels is intended or identified for flexible cord connection. Informational Note: Low-pressure and open-outlet heat- (B) Specific Appliances. ers are atmospheric pressure water heaters as defined ∆ in IEC 60335-2-21, Household and similar electrical (1) Electrically Operated In-Sink Waste Disposers. Electri-

appliances — Safety — Particular requirements for stor- cally operated in-sink waste disposers shall be permitted to be age water heaters. cord-and-plug-connected with a flexible cord identified as suit- able in the installation instructions of the appliance manufac- (G) Motor-Operated Appliances. Motors of motor-operated turer where all of the following conditions are met: appliances shall be provided with overload protection in accor- dance with Part III of Article 430. Hermetic refrigerant motor- (1) The length of the cord shall not be less than 450 mm (18 in.) compressors in air-conditioning or refrigerating equipment shall and not over 900 mm (36 in.). be provided with overload protection in accordance with Part VI (2) Receptacles shall be located to protect against physical of Article 440. Where appliance overcurrent protective devices damage to the flexible cord. that are separate from the appliance are required, data for selec- (3) The receptacle shall be accessible. tion of these devices shall be marked on the appliance.

The mini- (4) The flexible cord shall have an equipment grounding con- mum marking shall be that specified in 430.7 and 440.4. ductor and be terminated with a grounding-type attach- ment plug. 422.12 Central Heating Equipment. Central heating equip- ment other than fixed electric space-heating equipment shall be Exception: A listed appliance distinctly marked to identify it as supplied by an individual branch circuit. protected by a system of double insulation shall not be required to be terminated with a grounding-type attachment plug. Exception No. 1: Auxiliary equipment, such as a pump, valve, ∆ humidifier, or electrostatic air cleaner directly associated with (2) Built-in Dishwashers and Trash Compactors. Built-in the heating equipment, shall be permitted to be connected to the dishwashers and trash compactors shall be permitted to be cord- same branch circuit. and-plug-connected with a flexible cord identified as suitable for the purpose in the installation instructions of the appliance Exception No. 2:Permanently connected air-conditioning

manufacturer where all of the following conditions are met: equipment shall be permitted to be connected to the same branch circuit. (1) For a trash compactor, the length of the cord shall be 0.9 m to 1.2 m (3 ft to 4 ft) measured from the face of the attachment 422.13 Storage-Type Water Heaters. The branch-circuit over- plug to the plane of the rear of the appliance. current device and conductors for fixed storage-type water heat- (2) For a built-in dishwasher, the length of the cord shall be ers that have a capacity of 450 L (120 gal) or less shall be sized 0.9 m to 2.0 m (3 ft to 6.5 ft) measured from the face of the not smaller than 125 percent of the rating of the water heater. attachment plug to the plane of the rear of the appliance. Informational Note: For branch-circuit rating, see 422.10. (3) Receptacles shall be located to protect against physical damage to the flexible cord. 422.15 Central Vacuum Outlet Assemblies. (4) The receptacle for a trash compactor shall be located in the

(A) Listed central vacuum outlet assemblies shall be permitted space occupied by the appliance or adjacent thereto. to be connected to a branch circuit in accordance with 210.23(A). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–329

422.17 ARTICLE 422 — APPLIANCES (5) The receptacle for a built-in dishwasher shall be located in attachment fitting designed for support, identified for the the space adjacent to the space occupied by the dishwasher. use and installed in accordance with 314.27(E) Where the flexible cord passes through an opening, it shall 422.19 Space for Conductors. The combined volume of the be protected against damage by a bushing, grommet, or canopy of ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans and outlet box shall other approved means. provide sufficient space so that conductors and their connecting (6) The receptacle shall be accessible. devices are capable of being installed in accordance with 314.16. (7) The flexible cord shall have an equipment grounding con- ductor and be terminated with a grounding-type attach- 422.20 Outlet Boxes to Be Covered. In a completed installa- ment plug. tion, each outlet box shall be provided with a cover unless cov- ered by means of a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan canopy. Exception: A listed appliance distinctly marked to identify it as

protected by a system of double insulation shall not be required 422.21 Covering of Combustible Material at Outlet Boxes. to be terminated with a grounding-type attachment plug. Any combustible ceiling finish that is exposed between the edge of a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan canopy or pan and an (3) Wall-Mounted Ovens and Counter-Mounted Cooking 2 2 outlet box and that has a surface area of 1160 mm (180 in.) or Units. Wall-mounted ovens and counter-mounted cooking units more shall be covered with noncombustible material. complete with provisions for mounting and for making electrical connections shall be permitted to be permanently connected or N 422.22 Utilizing Separable Attachment Fittings. Appli- cord-and-plug-connected with a flexible cord identified as suit- ances shall be permitted to utilize listed locking support and able for the purpose in the installation instructions of the appli- mounting receptacles in combination with compatible attach- ance manufacturer. ment fittings utilized within their ratings and used in accor- dance with 314.27(E).

A separable connector or a plug and receptacle combination in the supply line to an oven or cooking unit shall be identified 422.23 Other Installation Methods. Appliances employing for the temperature of the space in which it is located. methods of installation other than covered by this article shall be permitted to be used only by special permission. ∆ (4) Range Hoods and Microwave Oven/Range Hood Com- binations. Range hoods and over-the-range microwave ovens Part III. Disconnecting Means with integral range hoods shall be permitted to be cord-and- 422.30 General. A means shall be provided to simultaneously plug-connected with a flexible cord identified as suitable for use disconnect each appliance from all ungrounded conductors in on range hoods in the installation instructions of the appliance accordance with the following sections of Part III. If an appliance manufacturer, where all of the following conditions are met: is supplied by more than one branch circuit or feeder, these dis-

(1) The length of the cord is not less than 450 mm (18 in.) and connecting means shall be grouped and identified as being the not over 1.2 m (4 ft). multiple disconnecting means for the appliance. Each discon- (2) Receptacles are located to protect against physical damage necting means shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded to the flexible cord. conductors that it controls. (3) The receptacle is supplied by an individual branch circuit. 422.31 Disconnection of Permanently Connected Appliances. (4) The receptacle shall be accessible. (5) The flexible cord shall have an equipment grounding con- (A) Rated at Not over 300 Volt-Amperes or 1⁄8 Horsepower. ductor and be terminated with a grounding-type attach- For permanently connected appliances rated at not over 300 volt- ment plug. amperes or 1⁄8 hp, the branch-circuit overcurrent device shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means where the switch Exception: A listed appliance distinctly marked to identify it as or circuit breaker is within sight from the appliance or be capable

protected by a system of double insulation shall not be required of being locked in the open position in compliance with 110.25. to be terminated with a grounding-type attachment plug. (B) Appliances Rated over 300 Volt-Amperes. For perma- ∆ 422.17 Protection of Combustible Material. Each electrically nently connected appliances rated over 300 volt-amperes, the heated appliance that is intended by size, weight, and service to branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker shall be permitted to be located in a fixed position shall be placed so as to provide pro- serve as the disconnecting means where the switch or circuit tection between the appliance and adjacent combustible material. breaker is within sight from the appliance or be capable of being 422.18 Support of Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fans. Ceil- locked in the open position in compliance with 110.25. ing-suspended (paddle) fans shall be supported independently Informational Note: For appliances employing unit of an outlet box or by one of the following: switches, see 422.34.

(1) A listed outlet box or listed outlet box system identified for (C) Motor-Operated Appliances Rated over 1⁄8 Horsepower. the use and installed in accordance with 314.27(C) The disconnecting means shall comply with 430.109 and (2) A listed outlet box system, a listed locking support and 430.110. For permanently connected motor-operated appliances mounting receptacle, and a compatible factory installed 70–330 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 422 — APPLIANCES 422.45 with motors rated over 1⁄8 hp, the disconnecting means shall be (D) Other Occupancies. In other occupancies, the branch- within sight from the appliance or be capable of being locked in circuit switch or circuit breaker, where readily accessible for the open position in compliance with 110.25. servicing of the appliance, shall be permitted as the other discon- necting means. Exception: If an appliance of more than 1⁄ 8 hp is provided with a unit switch that complies with 422.34(A), (B), (C), or (D), 422.35 Switch and Circuit Breaker to Be Indicating. Switches the switch or circuit breaker serving as the other disconnecting and circuit breakers used as disconnecting means shall be of the means shall be permitted to be out of sight from the appliance. indicating type. 422.33 Disconnection of Cord-and-Plug-Connected or Part IV. Construction Attachment Fitting–Connected Appliances. ∆ 422.40 Polarity in Cord-and-Plug-Connected Appliances. (A) Separable Connector or an Attachment Plug (or Attach- If the appliance is provided with a manually operated, line-

ment Fitting) and Receptacle. For cord-and-plug- (or attach- connected, single-pole switch for appliance on–off operation, ment fitting–) connected appliances, an accessible separable an Edison-base lampholder, or a 15- or 20-ampere receptacle, connector or an accessible plug (or attachment fitting) and the attachment plug shall be of the polarized or grounding type. receptacle combination shall be permitted to serve as the dis- connecting means. The attachment fitting shall be a factory A 2-wire, nonpolarized attachment plug shall be permitted installed part of the appliance and suitable for disconnection to be used on a listed double-insulated shaver. of the appliance. Where the separable connector or plug (or Informational Note: For polarity of Edison-base lamp- attachment fitting) and receptacle combination are not acces- holders, see 410.82. sible, cord-and-plug-connected or attachment fitting-and-plug- connected appliances shall be provided with disconnecting 422.41 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Appliances Subject to means in accordance with 422.31. Immersion.

Cord-and-plug-connected portable, freestand- ing hydromassage units and hand-held hair dryers shall be (B) Connection at the Rear Base of a Range. For cord-and- constructed to provide protection for personnel against elec- plug-connected household electric ranges, an attachment plug trocution when immersed while in the “on” or “off” position. and receptacle connection at the rear base of a range, accessible from the front by removal of a drawer, shall meet the intent of 422.42 Signals for Heated Appliances. In other than dwelling- 422.33(A). type occupancies, each electrically heated appliance or group of appliances intended to be applied to combustible material shall (C) Rating. The rating of a receptacle or of a separable con- be provided with a signal or an integral temperature-limiting nector shall not be less than the rating of any appliance con- device. nected thereto. 422.43 Flexible Cords. Exception: Demand factors authorized elsewhere in this Code shall be permitted to be applied to the rating of a receptacle or (A) Heater Cords. All cord-and-plug-connected smoothing

of a separable connector. irons and electrically heated appliances that are rated at more than 50 watts and produce temperatures in excess of 121°C 422.34 Unit Switch(es) as Disconnecting Means. A unit (250°F) on surfaces with which the cord is likely to be in con- switch(es) with a marked-off position that is a part of an tact shall be provided with one of the types of approved heater appliance and disconnects all ungrounded conductors shall be cords listed in Table 400.4. permitted as the disconnecting means required by this article where other means for disconnection are provided in occupan- (B) Other Heating Appliances. All other cord-and-plug- cies specified in 422.34(A) through (D). connected electrically heated appliances shall be connected with one of the approved types of cord listed in Table 400.4, selected (A) Multifamily Dwellings. In multifamily dwellings, the other in accordance with the usage specified in that table. disconnecting means shall be within the dwelling unit, or on the

same floor as the dwelling unit in which the appliance is installed, 422.44 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Immersion Heaters. Elec- and shall be permitted to control lamps and other appliances. tric heaters of the cord-and-plug-connected immersion type shall be constructed and installed so that current-carrying parts (B) Two-Family Dwellings. In two-family dwellings, the are effectively insulated from electrical contact with the sub- other disconnecting means shall be permitted either inside or stance in which they are immersed. outside of the dwelling unit in which the appliance is installed. In this case, an individual switch or circuit breaker for the 422.45 Stands for Cord-and-Plug-Connected Appliances. dwelling unit shall be permitted and shall also be permitted to Each smoothing iron and other cord-and-plug-connected elec- control lamps and other appliances. trically heated appliance intended to be applied to combustible material shall be equipped with an approved stand, which shall (C) One-Family Dwellings. In one-family dwellings, the

be permitted to be a separate piece of equipment or a part of the service disconnecting means shall be permitted to be the other appliance. disconnecting means. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–331

422.46 ARTICLE 424 — FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT 422.46 Flatirons. Electrically heated smoothing irons shall part of an appliance shall be legibly marked with the ratings in be equipped with an identified temperature-limiting means. volts and amperes, or in volts and watts, or with the manufac- turer’s part number. 422.47 Water Heater Controls. All storage or instantaneous- type water heaters shall be equipped with a temperature-limit- 422.62 Appliances Consisting of Motors and Other Loads. ing means in addition to its control thermostat to disconnect all (A) Nameplate Horsepower Markings. Where a motor- ungrounded conductors. Such means shall comply with both of operated appliance nameplate includes a horsepower rating, that the following: rating shall not be less than the horsepower rating on the motor (1) Installed to sense maximum water temperature. nameplate. Where an appliance consists of multiple motors, or (2) Be either a trip-free, manually reset type or a type having a one or more motors and other loads, the nameplate value shall replacement element.

Such water heaters shall be marked to not be less than the equivalent horsepower of the combined require the installation of a temperature and pressure relief loads, calculated in accordance with 430.110(C)(1). valve. (B) Additional Nameplate Markings. Appliances, other than Exception No. 1: Storage water heaters that are identified as those factory-equipped with cords and attachment plugs and being suitable for use with a supply water temperature of 82°C with nameplates in compliance with 422.60, shall be marked in (180°F) or above and a capacity of 60 kW or above. accordance with 422.62(B)(1) or (B)(2). Exception No. 2: Instantaneous-type water heaters that are (1) Marking. In addition to the marking required in 422.60, identified as being suitable for such use, with a capacity of 4 L the marking on an appliance consisting of a motor with other (1 gal) or less. load(s) or motors with or without other load(s) shall specify the minimum supply circuit conductor ampacity and the maxi- Informational Note: See ANSI Z21.22-1999/CSA 4.4-

mum rating of the circuit overcurrent protective device. This M99, Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems. requirement shall not apply to an appliance with a nameplate 422.48 Infrared Lamp Industrial Heating Appliances. in compliance with 422.60 where both the minimum supply circuit conductor ampacity and maximum rating of the circuit (A) 300 Watts or Less. Infrared heating lamps rated at 300 watts overcurrent protective device are not more than 15 amperes. or less shall be permitted with lampholders of the medium-base, unswitched porcelain type or other types identified as suitable for (2) Alternate Marking Method. An alternate marking use with infrared heating lamps rated 300 watts or less. method shall be permitted to specify the rating of the largest motor in volts and amperes, and the additional load(s) in volts (B) Over 300 Watts. Screw shell lampholders shall not be and amperes, or volts and watts in addition to the marking used with infrared lamps rated over 300 watts, unless the lam- required in 422.60. The ampere rating of a motor 1⁄8 horsepower

pholders are identified as being suitable for use with infrared or less or a nonmotor load 1 ampere or less shall be permitted heating lamps rated over 300 watts. to be omitted unless such loads constitute the principal load. 422.50 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Pipe Heating Assemblies. Cord-and-plug-connected pipe heating assemblies intended to prevent freezing of piping shall be listed. ARTICLE 424 Part V. Marking Fixed Electric Space-Heating Equipment 422.60 Nameplate. (A) Nameplate Marking. Each electrical appliance shall be Part I. General provided with a nameplate giving the identifying name and the ∆ 424.1 Scope. This article covers fixed electric equipment used rating in volts and amperes, or in volts and watts. If the appli- for space heating. For the purpose of this article, heating equip- ance is to be used on a specific frequency or frequencies, it shall ment includes heating cables, unit heaters, boilers, central heating be so marked. systems, or other fixed electric space-heating equipment. This arti-

Where motor overload protection external to the appliance is cle does not apply to process heating and room air conditioning. required, the appliance shall be so marked. 424.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply only within this article. Informational Note: See 422.11 for overcurrent protec- tion requirements. Heating Panel. A complete assembly provided with a junction box or a length of flexible conduit for connection to a branch (B) To Be Visible. Marking shall be located so as to be visible circuit. or easily accessible after installation. Heating Panel Set. A rigid or nonrigid assembly provided 422.61 Marking of Heating Elements. All heating elements with nonheating leads or a terminal junction assembly identi- that are rated over one ampere, replaceable in the field, and a fied as being suitable for connection to a wiring system. 70–332 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 424 — FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT 424.19 424.3 Other Articles. Fixed electric space-heating equipment Informational Note No. 2: See 680.27(C) for pool deck incorporating a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor shall areas. also comply with Article 440. 424.13 Spacing from Combustible Materials. Fixed electric 424.4 Branch Circuits. space-heating equipment shall be installed to provide the required spacing between the equipment and adjacent com- (A) Branch-Circuit Requirements. An individual branch bustible material, unless it is listed to be installed in direct circuit shall be permitted to supply any volt-ampere or wattage contact with combustible material. rating of fixed electric space-heating equipment for which the branch circuit is rated. Part III. Control and Protection of Fixed Electric Space- Branch circuits supplying two or more outlets for fixed elec- Heating Equipment tric space-heating equipment shall be rated not over 30 amperes. 424.19 Disconnecting Means. Means shall be provided to In other than a dwelling unit, fixed infrared heating equipment

simultaneously disconnect the heater, motor controller(s), and shall be permitted to be supplied from branch circuits rated not supplementary overcurrent protective device(s) of all fixed over 50 amperes. electric space-heating equipment from all ungrounded conduc- (B) Branch-Circuit Sizing. The branch-circuit conductors tors. Where heating equipment is supplied by more than one for fixed electric space-heating equipment and any associated source, feeder, or branch circuit, the disconnecting means shall motors shall be sized not smaller than 125 percent of the load. be grouped and identified as having multiple disconnecting means. Each disconnecting means shall simultaneously discon- ∆ 424.6 Listed Equipment. Electric baseboard heaters, heating nect all ungrounded conductors that it controls. The disconnect- cables, duct heaters, and radiant heating systems shall be listed ing means specified in 424.19(A) and (B) shall have an ampere and labeled. rating not less than 125 percent of the total load of the motors Part II.

Installation and the heaters and shall be capable of being locked in the open position in compliance with 110.25. 424.9 General. Factory-installed receptacle outlets that are part of a permanently installed electric baseboard heater, or outlets (A) Heating Equipment with Supplementary Overcurrent provided as a separate listed assembly of an electric baseboard Protection. The disconnecting means for fixed electric space- heater, shall be permitted in lieu of a receptacle outlet(s) that is heating equipment with supplementary overcurrent protection required by 210.52. Such receptacle outlets shall not be con- shall be within sight from the supplementary overcurrent protec- nected to the baseboard heater circuits. tive device(s), on the supply side of these devices, if fuses, and, in addition, shall comply with either 424.19(A)(1) or (A)(2). Informational Note: Listed baseboard heaters include ∆ (1) Heater Containing No Motor Rated over 1⁄8 Horsepower. instructions that may not permit their installation below The disconnecting means provided shall be within sight from

receptacle outlets. the motor controller(s) and the heater, or shall be lockable as 424.10 Special Permission. Fixed electric space-heating specified in 424.19, or shall be a unit switch complying with equipment and systems installed by methods other than 424.19(C). those covered by this article shall be permitted only by special ∆ (2) Heater Containing a Motor(s) Rated over 1⁄8 Horsepower. permission. The disconnecting means required by 424.19 shall be permit- ∆ 424.11 Supply Conductors. Fixed electric space-heating ted to serve as the required disconnecting means for both the equipment requiring supply conductors with an insulation rat- motor controller(s) and heater under either of the following ing greater than 60°C shall be clearly and permanently marked. conditions: This marking shall be plainly visible after installation and shall (1) Where the disconnecting means is in sight from the motor be permitted to be adjacent to the field connection box. controller(s) and the heater and complies with Part IX of 424.12 Locations. Article 430. 1 (A) Exposed to Physical Damage.

Where subject to physi- (2) Where a motor(s) of more than ⁄8 hp and the heater are pro- cal damage, fixed electric space-heating equipment shall be pro- vided with a single unit switch that complies with 422.34(A), tected in an approved manner. (B), (C), or (D), the disconnecting means shall be permitted to be out of sight from the motor controller. (B) Damp or Wet Locations. Heaters and related equipment installed in damp or wet locations shall be listed for such loca- (B) Heating Equipment Without Supplementary Over- tions and shall be constructed and installed so that water or other current Protection. liquids cannot enter or accumulate in or on wired sections, elec- (1) Without Motor or with Motor Not over 1⁄8 Horsepower. trical components, or ductwork. For fixed electric space-heating equipment without a motor rated over 1⁄8 hp, the branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker shall be Informational Note No. 1: See 110.11 for equipment permitted to serve as the disconnecting means where the switch exposed to deteriorating agents. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–333

424.20 ARTICLE 424 — FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT or circuit breaker is within sight from the heater or is capable of 424.21 Switch and Circuit Breaker to Be Indicating. Switches being locked in the open position in compliance with 110.25. and circuit breakers used as disconnecting means shall be of the indicating type. (2) Over 1 ⁄ 8 Horsepower. For motor-driven electric space- heating equipment with a motor rated over 1 ⁄ 8 hp, a discon- 424.22 Overcurrent Protection. necting means shall be located within sight from the motor ∆ (A) Branch-Circuit Devices. Electric space-heating equip- controller or shall be permitted to comply with the requirements ment, other than motor-operated equipment required to have in 424.19(A)(2). additional overcurrent protection by Parts III and IV of Arti- (C) Unit Switch(es) as Disconnecting Means. A unit switch(es) cle 430 or Parts III and VI of Article 440, shall be permitted to with a marked “off” position that is part of a fixed heater and be protected against overcurrent where supplied by one of the

disconnects all ungrounded conductors shall be permitted as the branch circuits in Part II of Article 210. disconnecting means required by this article where other means (B) Resistance Elements. Resistance-type heating elements in for disconnection are provided in the types of occupancies in electric space-heating equipment shall be protected at not more 424.19(C)(1) through (C)(4). than 60 amperes. Equipment rated more than 48 amperes and (1) Multifamily Dwellings. In multifamily dwellings, the employing such elements shall have the heating elements sub- other disconnecting means shall be within the dwelling unit, or divided, and each subdivided load shall not exceed 48 amperes. on the same floor as the dwelling unit in which the fixed heater is Where a subdivided load is less than 48 amperes, the rating of installed, and shall also be permitted to control general-purpose the supplementary overcurrent protective device shall comply circuits and appliance circuits. with 424.4(B). A boiler employing resistance-type immersion heating elements contained in an ASME-rated and stamped

(2) Two-Family Dwellings. In two-family dwellings, the other vessel shall be permitted to comply with 424.72(A). disconnecting means shall be permitted either inside or outside of the dwelling unit in which the fixed heater is installed. In this ∆ (C) Overcurrent Protective Devices. The supplementary case, an individual switch or circuit breaker for the dwelling unit overcurrent protective devices for the subdivided loads speci- shall be permitted and shall also be permitted to control general- fied in 424.22(B) shall meet all of the following conditions: purpose circuits and appliance circuits. (1) Be factory-installed within or on the heater enclosure or (3) One-Family Dwellings. In one-family dwellings, the supplied for use with the heater as a separate assembly by service disconnecting means shall be permitted to be the other the heater manufacturer disconnecting means. (2) Be accessible (3) Be suitable for branch-circuit protection (4) Other Occupancies. In other occupancies, the branch-circuit

switch or circuit breaker, where readily accessible for servicing Informational Note: See 240.10. of the fixed heater, shall be permitted as the other disconnecting Where cartridge fuses are used to provide overcurrent pro- means. tection for the subdivided loads, a single disconnecting means 424.20 Thermostatically Controlled Switching Devices. shall be permitted to be used as the disconnecting means for all of the subdivided loads. (A) Serving as Both Controllers and Disconnecting Means. Thermostatically controlled switching devices and combina- Informational Note No. 1: For supplementary overcur- tion thermostats and manually controlled switches shall be rent protection, see 240.10. permitted to serve as both controllers and disconnecting means, Informational Note No. 2: For disconnecting means for provided they meet all of the following conditions: cartridge fuses in circuits of any voltage, see 240.40. (1) Provided with a marked “off” position (D) Branch-Circuit Conductors. The conductors supplying (2) Directly open all ungrounded conductors when manually

the supplementary overcurrent protective devices shall be con- placed in the “off” position sidered branch-circuit conductors. (3) Designed so that the circuit cannot be energized automati- cally after the device has been manually placed in the “off” Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the conductors position supplying the supplementary overcurrent protective devices (4) Located as specified in 424.19 specified in 424.22(C) shall be permitted to be sized at not less (5) Located in an accessible location than 100 percent of the nameplate rating of the heater, provided all of the following conditions are met: (B) Thermostats That Do Not Directly Interrupt All Ungrounded Conductors. Thermostats that do not directly (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size. interrupt all ungrounded conductors and thermostats that oper- (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum ate remote-control circuits shall not be required to meet the size. requirements of 424.20(A). These devices shall not be permit- (3) A temperature-actuated device controls the cyclic operation

ted as the disconnecting means. of the equipment. 70–334 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 424 — FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT 424.41 (E) Conductors for Subdivided Loads. Field-wired con- it shall be subject to the ambient correction in accordance with ductors between the heater and the supplementary overcurrent 310.15(B)(1). protective devices shall be sized at not less than 125 percent 424.38 Area Restrictions. of the load served. The supplementary overcurrent protective devices specified in 424.22(C) shall protect these conductors in (A) Extending Beyond the Room or Area. Heating cables accordance with 240.4. shall be permitted to extend beyond the room or area in which they originate unless prohibited by 424.38(B). Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the ampacity of field-wired conductors between the heater and the supple- (B) Uses Not Permitted. Heating cables shall not be installed mentary overcurrent protective devices shall be permitted to as follows: be not less than 100 percent of the load of their respective (1) In closets, other than as noted in 424.38(C)

subdivided circuits, provided all of the following conditions (2) Over the top of walls where the wall intersects the ceiling are met: (3) Over partitions that extend to the ceiling, unless they are (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size. isolated single runs of embedded cable (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum (4) Under or through walls size. (5) Over cabinets whose clearance from the ceiling is less than (3) A temperature-activated device controls the cyclic operation the minimum horizontal dimension of the cabinet to the of the equipment. nearest cabinet edge that is open to the room or area (6) In tub and shower walls Part IV. Marking of Heating Equipment (7) Under cabinets or similar built-ins having no clearance to the floor 424.28 Nameplate. ∆ (C) In Closet Ceilings as Low-Temperature Heat Sources (A) Marking Required. Each unit of fixed electric space- to Control Relative Humidity. The provisions of 424.38(B) heating equipment shall be provided with a nameplate giving shall not prevent the use of cable in closet ceilings as low-

the identifying name and the normal rating in volts and watts or temperature heat sources to control relative humidity, provided in volts and amperes. they are used only in those portions of the ceiling that are unob- Electric space-heating equipment intended for use on alter- structed to the floor. nating current only, direct current only, or both shall be marked 424.39 Clearance from Other Objects and Openings. to so indicate. The marking of equipment consisting of motors Heating elements of cables installed in ceilings shall be sepa- over 1⁄8 hp and other loads shall specify the rating of the motor rated at least 200 mm (8 in.) from the edge of outlet boxes in volts, amperes, and frequency, and the heating load in volts and junction boxes that are to be used for mounting surface and watts or in volts and amperes. luminaires. A clearance of not less than 50 mm (2 in.) shall be ∆ (B) Location. This nameplate shall be located so as to be vis- provided from recessed luminaires and their trims, ventilat- ible or accessible after installation.

ing openings, and other such openings in room surfaces. No 424.29 Marking of Heating Elements. All heating elements heating cable shall be covered by any ceiling surface-mounted that are replaceable in the field and are part of an electric heater equipment. shall be legibly marked with the ratings in volts and watts or in 424.40 Splices. The length of heating cable shall only be altered volts and amperes. using splices identified in the manufacturer’s instructions. Part V. Electric Space-Heating Cables 424.41 Ceiling Installation of Heating Cables on Dry Board, in Plaster, and on Concrete. 424.34 Heating Cable Construction. Factory-assembled nonheating leads of heating cables, if any, shall be at least 2.1 m (A) In Walls. Cables shall not be installed in walls unless it is (7 ft) in length. necessary for an isolated single run of cable to be installed down a vertical surface to reach a dropped ceiling. 424.35 Marking of Heating Cables. Each unit shall be marked with the identifying name or identification symbol, catalog num- (B) Adjacent Runs. Adjacent runs of heating cable shall be

ber, and ratings in volts and watts or in volts and amperes. installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 424.36 Clearances of Wiring in Ceilings. Wiring located (C) Surfaces to Be Applied. Heating cables shall be applied above heated ceilings shall be spaced not less than 50 mm (2 in.) only to gypsum board, plaster lath, or other fire-resistant material. above the heated ceiling. The ampacity of conductors shall be With metal lath or other electrically conductive surfaces, a coat of calculated on the basis of an assumed ambient temperature of plaster or other means employed in accordance with the heating not less than 50°C (122°F), applying the correction factors in cable manufacturer’s instructions shall be applied to completely accordance with 310.15(B)(1). If this wiring is located above separate the metal lath or conductive surface from the cable. thermal insulation having a minimum thickness of 50 mm (2 in.), Informational Note: See also 424.41(F). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–335

424.42 ARTICLE 424 — FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT (D) Splices. All heating cables, the splice between the heat- embedded in plaster or other approved material, leaving only ing cable and nonheating leads, and 75-mm (3-in.) minimum a length sufficient to reach the junction box with not less than of the nonheating lead at the splice shall be embedded in plas- 150 mm (6 in.) of free lead within the box. ter or dry board in the same manner as the heating cable. ∆ 424.44 Installation of Cables in Concrete or Poured Masonry (E) Ceiling Surface. The entire ceiling surface shall have a Floors. finish of thermally noninsulating sand plaster that has a nomi- (A) Adjacent Runs. Adjacent runs of heating cable shall be nal thickness of 13 mm (1⁄2 in.), or other noninsulating material installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. identified as suitable for this use and applied according to speci- fied thickness and directions. (B) Secured in Place. Cables shall be secured in place by nonmetallic frames or spreaders or other approved means while (F) Secured.

Cables shall be secured by means of approved sta- the concrete or other finish is applied. pling, tape, plaster, nonmetallic spreaders, or other approved means either at intervals not exceeding 400 mm (16 in.) or at (C) Leads Protected. Leads shall be protected where they intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) for cables identified for such leave the floor by rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal con- use. Staples or metal fasteners that straddle the cable shall not be duit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or by used with metal lath or other electrically conductive surfaces. other approved means. (G) Dry Board Installations. In dry board installations, the (D) Bushings or Approved Fittings. Bushings or approved entire ceiling below the heating cable shall be covered with fittings shall be used where the leads emerge within the floor gypsum board not exceeding 13 mm (1⁄2 in.) thickness. The slab. void between the upper layer of gypsum board, plaster lath, or (E) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. In addi-

other fire-resistant material and the surface layer of gypsum tion to the requirements in 210.8, ground-fault circuit-inter- board shall be completely filled with thermally conductive, rupter protection for personnel shall be provided for cables nonshrinking plaster or other approved material or equivalent installed in electrically heated floors of bathrooms, kitchens, thermal conductivity. and in hydromassage bathtub locations. (H) Free from Contact with Conductive Surfaces. Cables 424.45 Installation of Cables Under Floor Coverings. shall be kept free from contact with metal or other electrically (A) Identification. Heating cables for installation under conductive surfaces. floor covering shall be identified as suitable for installation (I) Joists. In dry board applications, cable shall be installed par- under floor covering. allel to the joist, leaving a clear space centered under the joist (B) Expansion Joints. Heating cables shall not be installed of 65 mm (21⁄2 in.) (width) between centers of adjacent runs of where they bridge expansion joints unless provided with expan- cable.

A surface layer of gypsum board shall be mounted so sion and contraction fittings applicable to the manufacture of that the nails or other fasteners do not pierce the heating cable. the cable. (J) Crossing Joists. Cables shall cross joists only at the ends ∆ (C) Connection to Conductors. Heating cables shall be con- of the room unless the cable is required to cross joists elsewhere nected to branch-circuit and supply wiring by wiring methods in order to satisfy the manufacturer’s instructions regarding described in the installation instructions. clearance from ceiling penetrations and luminaires. (D) Anchoring. Heating cables shall be positioned and secured 424.42 Finished Ceilings. Finished ceilings shall not be cov- in place under the floor covering, in accordance with the manu- ered with decorative panels or beams constructed of materials facturer’s instructions. that have thermal insulating properties, such as wood, fiber, or plastic. Finished ceilings shall be permitted to be covered with (E) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. In addi-

paint, wallpaper, or other approved surface finishes. tion to the requirements in 210.8, ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel shall be provided. 424.43 Installation of Nonheating Leads of Cables. (F) Grounding Braid or Sheath. Grounding means, such as ∆ (A) Free Nonheating Leads. Free nonheating leads of copper braid, metal sheath, or other approved means, shall be cables shall be installed in accordance with Chapter 3 wiring provided as part of the heated length. methods, or other listed means, from the junction box to a loca- tion within the ceiling. ∆ 424.46 Inspection. Cable installations shall be made with due care to prevent damage to the cable assembly and shall be (B) Leads in Junction Box. Not less than 150 mm (6 in.) of inspected and approved before cables are covered or concealed. free nonheating lead shall be within the junction box. The mark- ing of the leads shall be visible in the junction box. 424.47 Label Provided by Manufacturer. The manufacturers of electric space-heating cables shall provide marking labels that (C) Excess Leads.

Excess leads of heating cables shall not indicate that the space-heating installation incorporates electric be cut but shall be secured to the underside of the ceiling and 70–336 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 424 — FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT 424.72 space-heating cables and instructions that the labels shall be ∆ 424.66 Installation. Duct heaters shall be installed in accor- affixed to the panelboards to identify which branch circuits sup- dance with the manufacturer’s instructions in such a manner ply the circuits to those space-heating installations. If the electric that the operation of the duct heater does not create a hazard to space-heating cable installations are visible and distinguishable persons or property. Furthermore, duct heaters shall be located after installation, the labels shall not be required to be provided with respect to building construction and other equipment so and affixed to the panelboards. as to permit access to the heater and the heater control. Suf- ficient clearance shall be maintained to permit replacement Part VI. Duct Heaters of controls and heating elements and for adjusting and clean- 424.57 General. Part VI shall apply to any heater mounted in ing of controls and other parts requiring such attention. See

the airstream of a forced-air system where the air-moving unit is 110.26. not provided as an integral part of the equipment. Informational Note: For additional installation informa- 424.58 Identification. Heaters installed in an air duct shall be tion, see NFPA 90A-2015, Standard for the Installa- identified as suitable for the installation. tion of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, and NFPA 90B-2015, Standard for the Installation of Warm 424.59 Airflow. Means shall be provided to ensure uniform air- Air Heating and Air- Conditioning Systems. flow over the face of the heater in accordance with the manu- facturer’s instructions. Part VII. Resistance-Type Boilers Informational Note: Heaters installed within 1.2 m (4 ft) 424.70 Scope. The provisions in Part VII of this article shall of the outlet of an air-moving device, heat pump, air con- apply to boilers employing resistance-type heating elements. ditioner, elbows, baffle plates, or other obstructions in See Part VIII of this article for electrode-type boilers. ductwork may require turning vanes, pressure plates, or

424.71 Identification. Resistance-type boilers shall be identi- other devices on the inlet side of the duct heater to ensure fied as suitable for the installation. an even distribution of air over the face of the heater. 424.72 Overcurrent Protection. 424.60 Elevated Inlet Temperature. Duct heaters intended for use with elevated inlet air temperature shall be identified as (A) Boiler Employing Resistance-Type Immersion Heat- suitable for use at the elevated temperatures. ing Elements in an ASME-Rated and Stamped Vessel. A boiler employing resistance-type immersion heating elements 424.61 Installation of Duct Heaters with Heat Pumps and contained in an ASME-rated and stamped vessel shall have Air Conditioners. Heat pumps and air conditioners having the heating elements protected at not more than 150 amperes. duct heaters closer than 1.2 m (4 ft) to the heat pump or air Such a boiler rated more than 120 amperes shall have the conditioner shall have both the duct heater and heat pump or heating elements subdivided into loads not exceeding 120

air conditioner identified as suitable for such installation and amperes. so marked. Where a subdivided load is less than 120 amperes, the rating 424.62 Condensation. Duct heaters used with air condition- of the overcurrent protective device shall comply with 424.4(B). ers or other air-cooling equipment that could result in conden- sation of moisture shall be identified as suitable for use with air (B) Boiler Employing Resistance-Type Heating Elements conditioners. Rated More Than 48 Amperes and Not Contained in an ASME-Rated and Stamped Vessel. A boiler employing 424.63 Fan Circuit Interlock. Means shall be provided to resistance-type heating elements not contained in an ASME- ensure that the fan circuit is energized when any heater circuit rated and stamped vessel shall have the heating elements pro- is energized. However, time- or temperature-controlled delay in tected at not more than 60 amperes. Such a boiler rated more energizing the fan motor shall be permitted. than 48 amperes shall have the heating elements subdivided 424.64 Limit Controls.

Each duct heater shall be provided into loads not exceeding 48 amperes. with an approved, integral, automatic-reset temperature-lim- Where a subdivided load is less than 48 amperes, the rating iting control or controllers to de-energize the circuit or circuits. of the overcurrent protective device shall comply with 424.4(B). In addition, an integral independent supplementary control or (C) Supplementary Overcurrent Protective Devices. The controllers shall be provided in each duct heater that disconnects supplementary overcurrent protective devices for the subdivided a sufficient number of conductors to interrupt current flow. This loads as required by 424.72(A) and (B) shall be as follows: device shall be manually resettable or replaceable. (1) Factory-installed within or on the boiler enclosure or pro- ∆ 424.65 Location of Disconnecting Means. Duct heater con- vided as a separate assembly by the boiler manufacturer troller equipment shall be accessible with the disconnecting (2) Accessible, but need not be readily accessible

means installed within sight from the controller or as permitted (3) Suitable for branch-circuit protection by 424.19(A). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–337

424.73 ARTICLE 424 — FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT Where cartridge fuses are used to provide this overcurrent Part VIII. Electrode-Type Boilers protection, a single disconnecting means shall be permitted 424.80 Scope. The provisions in Part VIII of this article shall for the several subdivided circuits. See 240.40. apply to boilers for operation at 600 volts, nominal, or less, in (D) Conductors Supplying Supplementary Overcurrent Pro- which heat is generated by the passage of current between elec- tective Devices. The conductors supplying these supplementary trodes through the liquid being heated. overcurrent protective devices shall be considered branch-circuit Informational Note: For over 600 volts, see Part V of conductors. Article 490. Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the conductors 424.81 Identification. Electrode-type boilers shall be identi- supplying the overcurrent protective device specified in 424.72(C) fied as suitable for the installation. shall be permitted to be sized at not less than 100 percent of the

nameplate rating of the heater, provided all of the following condi- 424.82 Branch-Circuit Requirements. The size of branch- tions are met: circuit conductors and overcurrent protective devices shall be calculated on the basis of 125 percent of the total load (motors (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size and not included). A contactor, relay, or other device, approved for conductor insulation temperature rating. continuous operation at 100 percent of its rating, shall be per- (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum mitted to supply its full-rated load. See 210.19(A), Exception. size. The provisions of this section shall not apply to conductors that (3) A temperature- or pressure-actuated device controls the form an integral part of an approved boiler. cyclic operation of the equipment. Where an electrode boiler is rated 50 kW or more, the con- (E) Conductors for Subdivided Loads. Field-wired con- ductors supplying the boiler electrode(s) shall be permitted to ductors between the heater and the supplementary overcurrent

be sized at not less than 100 percent of the nameplate rating protective devices shall be sized at not less than 125 percent of the electrode boiler, provided all the following conditions of the load served. The supplementary overcurrent protective are met: devices specified in 424.72(C) shall protect these conductors in accordance with 240.4. (1) The electrode boiler is marked with a minimum conductor size. Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the ampacity (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum of field-wired conductors between the heater and the supple- size. mentary overcurrent protective devices shall be permitted to (3) A temperature- or pressure-actuated device controls the be not less than 100 percent of the load of their respective cyclic operation of the equipment. subdivided circuits, provided all of the following conditions are met: 424.83 Overtemperature Limit Control. Each boiler, designed so that in normal operation there is no change in state of the heat (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size.

transfer medium, shall be equipped with a temperature-sensitive (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum limiting means. It shall be installed to limit maximum liquid size. temperature and shall directly or indirectly interrupt all current (3) A temperature-activated device controls the cyclic operation flow through the electrodes. Such means shall be in addition to of the equipment. the temperature-regulating system and other devices protecting 424.73 Overtemperature Limit Control. Each boiler the tank against excessive pressure. designed so that in normal operation there is no change in state of 424.84 Overpressure Limit Control. Each boiler, designed so the heat transfer medium shall be equipped with a temperature- that in normal operation there is a change in state of the heat sensitive limiting means. It shall be installed to limit maximum transfer medium from liquid to vapor, shall be equipped with liquid temperature and shall directly or indirectly disconnect all a pressure-sensitive limiting means. It shall be installed to limit

ungrounded conductors to the heating elements. Such means maximum pressure and shall directly or indirectly interrupt all shall be in addition to a temperature-regulating system and other current flow through the electrodes. Such means shall be in devices protecting the tank against excessive pressure. addition to a pressure-regulating system and other devices pro- 424.74 Overpressure Limit Control. Each boiler designed so tecting the tank against excessive pressure. that in normal operation there is a change in state of the heat 424.85 Grounding. Boilers designed such that fault cur- transfer medium from liquid to vapor shall be equipped with rents do not pass through the pressure vessel, and the pressure a pressure-sensitive limiting means. It shall be installed to limit vessel is electrically isolated from the electrodes, all exposed maximum pressure and shall directly or indirectly disconnect non–current-carrying metal parts, including the pressure ves- all ungrounded conductors to the heating elements. Such means sel, supply, and return connecting piping, shall be connected

shall be in addition to a pressure-regulating system and other to an equipment grounding conductor. devices protecting the tank against excessive pressure. 70–338 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 424 — FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT 424.96 For all other designs, the pressure vessel containing the elec- they shall be permitted to be installed at the marked clearances. trodes shall be isolated and electrically insulated from ground. Sufficient area shall be provided to ensure that no heating panel or heating panel set is to be covered by any surface-mounted ∆ 424.86 Markings. All electrode-type boilers shall be marked to equipment. show the following: (4) Surfaces Covering Heating Panels. After the heating (1) The manufacturer’s name. panels or heating panel sets are installed and inspected, it shall (2) The rating in volts, amperes, and kilowatts. be permitted to install a surface that has been identified by the (3) The electrical supply required specifying frequency, num- manufacturer’s instructions as being suitable for the installa- ber of phases, and number of wires. tion. The surface shall be secured so that the nails or other fas- (4) The marking “Electrode-Type Boiler.” tenings do not pierce the heating panels or heating panel sets.

(5) A warning marking, “All Power Supplies Shall Be Discon- nected Before Servicing, Including Servicing the Pressure (5) Surface Coverings. Surfaces permitted by 424.93(A)(4) Vessel.” shall be permitted to be covered with paint, wallpaper, or other approved surfaces identified in the manufacturer’s instructions A field-applied warning marking or label shall comply with as being suitable. 110.21(B). The nameplate shall be located so as to be visible after installation. (B) Heating Panel Sets. (1) Mounting Location. Heating panel sets shall be permitted Part IX. Electric Radiant Heating Panels and Heating to be secured to the lower face of joists or mounted in between Panel Sets joists, headers, or nailing strips. 424.90 Scope. The provisions of Part IX of this article shall (2) Parallel to Joists or Nailing Strips. Heating panel sets apply to radiant heating panels and heating panel sets. shall be installed parallel to joists or nailing strips. 424.92 Markings. (3) Installation of Nails, Staples, or Other Fasteners. Nail- (A) Location.

Markings shall be permanent and in a location ing or stapling of heating panel sets shall be done only through that is visible prior to application of panel finish. the unheated portions provided for this purpose. Heating panel sets shall not be cut through or nailed through any point closer (B) Identified as Suitable. Each unit shall be identified as 1 than 6 mm ( ⁄4 in.) to the element. Nails, staples, or other fasten- suitable for the installation. ers shall not be used where they penetrate current-carrying parts. (C) Required Markings. Each unit shall be marked with the (4) Installed as Complete Unit. Heating panel sets shall be identifying name or identification symbol, catalog number, installed as complete units unless identified as suitable for field and rating in volts and watts or in volts and amperes. cutting in an approved manner. 424.93 Installation. 424.94 Clearances of Wiring in Ceilings. Wiring located (A) General. above heated ceilings shall be spaced not less than 50 mm (2 in.) above the heated ceiling. The ampacity shall be calculated on the

(1) Manufacturer’s Instructions. Heating panels and heating basis of an assumed ambient temperature of not less than 50°C panel sets shall be installed in accordance with the manufac- (122°F), applying the correction factors in accordance with turer’s instructions. 310.15(B)(1). If this wiring is located above thermal insulation (2) Locations Not Permitted. The heating portion shall not having a minimum thickness of 50 mm (2 in.), it shall be subject be installed as follows: to the ambient correction in accordance with 310.15(B)(1). (1) In or behind surfaces where subject to physical damage 424.95 Location of Branch-Circuit and Feeder Wiring (2) Run through or above walls, partitions, cupboards, or simi- in Walls. lar portions of structures that extend to the ceiling ∆ (A) Exterior Walls. Wiring methods shall comply with (3) Run in or through thermal insulation, but shall be permitted 310.14(A)(3). to be in contact with the surface of thermal insulation (B) Interior Walls. The ampacity of any wiring behind heating (3) Separation from Outlets for Luminaires. Edges of pan-

panels or heating panel sets located in interior walls or parti- els and panel sets shall be separated by not less than 200 mm tions shall be calculated on the basis of an assumed ambient (8 in.) from the edges of any outlet boxes and junction boxes temperature of 40°C (104°F), applying the correction factors in that are to be used for mounting surface luminaires. A clearance accordance with 310.15(B)(1). of not less than 50 mm (2 in.) shall be provided from recessed luminaires and their trims, ventilating openings, and other such 424.96 Connection to Branch-Circuit Conductors. openings in room surfaces, unless the heating panels and panel (A) General. Heating panels or heating panel sets assembled sets are listed and marked for lesser clearances, in which case together in the field to form a heating installation in one room or 2022 California Electrical Code 70–339

424.97 ARTICLE 424 — FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE-HEATING EQUIPMENT area shall be connected in accordance with the manufacturer’s (2) Connection to Conductors. Heating panels and heating instructions. panel sets shall be connected to branch-circuit and supply wir- ing by wiring methods recognized in Chapter 3. (B) Heating Panels. Heating panels shall be connected to branch-circuit wiring by an approved wiring method. (3) Anchoring. Heating panels and heating panel sets shall be firmly anchored to the floor using an adhesive or anchoring (C) Heating Panel Sets. system identified for this use. (1) Connection to Branch-Circuit Wiring. Heating panel (4) Coverings. After heating panels or heating panel sets are sets shall be connected to branch-circuit wiring by a method installed and inspected, they shall be permitted to be covered by identified as being suitable for the purpose. a floor covering that has been identified by the heater manufac- (2) Panel Sets with Terminal Junction Assembly. A heat- turer as being suitable for the installation.

ing panel set provided with terminal junction assembly shall be (5) GFCI Protection. In addition to the requirements in 210.8, permitted to have the nonheating leads attached at the time of branch circuits supplying the heating panel or heating panel installation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. sets shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for 424.97 Nonheating Leads. Excess nonheating leads of heat- personnel. ing panels or heating panel sets shall be permitted to be cut to (6) Grounding Braid or Sheath. Excluding nonheating leads, the required length as indicated in the manufacturer’s installa- grounding means, such as copper braid, metal sheath, or other tion instructions. Nonheating leads that are an integral part of approved means, shall be provided with or as an integral part of a heating panel or heating panel set, either attached or provided the heating panel or heating panel set. by the manufacturer as part of a terminal junction assembly, shall not be subjected to the ampacity requirements of 424.4(B) Part X.

Low-Voltage Fixed Electric Space-Heating for branch circuits. Equipment 424.98 Installation in Concrete or Poured Masonry. 424.100 Scope. Low-voltage fixed electric space-heating (A) Secured in Place and Identified as Suitable. Heating equipment shall consist of an isolating power supply, low-volt- panels or heating panel sets shall be secured in place by means age heaters, and associated equipment that are all identified for specified in the manufacturer’s instructions and identified as use in dry locations. suitable for the installation. 424.101 Energy Source. (B) Expansion Joints. Heating panels or heating panel sets (A) Power Unit. The power unit shall be an isolating type with shall not be installed where they bridge expansion joints a rated output not exceeding 25 amperes, 30 volts (42.4 volts unless provision is made for expansion and contraction. peak) ac, or 60 volts dc under all load conditions. (C) Spacings. Spacings shall be maintained between heating (B) Alternate Energy Sources. Listed low-voltage fixed elec- panels or heating panel sets and metal embedded in the floor.

tric space-heating equipment shall be permitted to be supplied Grounded metal-clad heating panels shall be permitted to be in directly from an alternate energy source such as solar photovol- contact with metal embedded in the floor. taic (PV) or wind power. When supplied from such a source, the (D) Protection of Leads. Leads shall be protected where they source and any power conversion equipment between the source leave the floor by rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal con- and the heating equipment and its supply shall be listed and com- duit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing, or ply with the applicable section of the NEC for the source used. by other approved means. The output of the source shall meet the limits of 424.101(A). (E) Bushings or Fittings Required. Bushings or approved fit- 424.102 Listed Equipment. Low-voltage fixed electric tings shall be used where the leads emerge within the floor slabs. space-heating equipment shall be listed as a complete system. 424.99 Installation Under Floor Covering. 424.103 Installation. (A) Identification.

Heating panels or heating panel sets for (A) General. Equipment shall be installed per the manufac- installation under floor covering shall be identified as suitable turer’s installation instructions. for installation under floor covering. (B) Ground. Secondary circuits shall not be grounded. ∆ (B) Installation. Listed heating panels or panel sets, if installed (C) Ground-Fault Protection. Ground-fault protection shall under floor covering, shall be installed on surfaces that are not be required. smooth and flat in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc- tions and shall also comply with 424.99(B)(1) through (B)(6). 424.104 Branch Circuit. (1) Expansion Joints. Heating panels or heating panel sets (A) Equipment shall be permitted to be supplied from branch shall not be installed where they bridge expansion joints circuits rated not over 30 amperes. unless protected from expansion and contraction. (B) The equipment shall be considered a continuous duty load. 70–340 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 425 — FIXED RESISTANCE AND ELECTRODE INDUSTRIAL PROCESS HEATING EQUIPMENT 425.19 (C) Above Grade Level, Floor, or Work Platform. Where ARTICLE 425 the enclosure is located above grade, the floor, or a work plat- Fixed Resistance and Electrode Industrial form, all of the following shall apply: Process Heating Equipment (1) The enclosure shall be accessible. (2) The width of the working space shall be the width of the enclosure or a minimum of 762 mm (30 in.), whichever is Part I. General greater. ∆ 425.1 Scope. This article covers fixed industrial process heat- (3) The depth of the workspace shall comply with 110.26(A) or ing employing electric resistance or electrode heating technol- 110.34 based upon the voltage to ground. ogy. For the purpose of this article, heating equipment includes (4) All doors or hinged panels shall open to at least 90 degrees. • boilers, electrode boilers, duct heaters, strip heaters, immersion 425.10 Special Permission. Fixed industrial process heating heaters, process air heaters, or other fixed electric equipment

equipment and systems installed by methods other than covered used for industrial process heating. This article does not apply by this article shall be permitted only by special permission. to heating and room air conditioning for personnel spaces cov- 425.11 Supply Conductors. Fixed industrial process heating ered by Article 424, fixed heating equipment for pipelines and equipment requiring supply conductors with over 60°C insu- vessels covered by Article 427, induction and dielectric heating lation shall be clearly and permanently marked. This marking equipment covered by Article 665, industrial furnaces incorpo- shall be plainly visible after installation and shall be permitted rating silicon carbide, molybdenum, or graphite process heating to be adjacent to the field connection box. elements, and electric resistance or electrode heating technol- ogy covered by 424.90. 425.12 Locations. 425.2 Other Articles. Fixed industrial process heating equip- (A) Exposed to Physical Damage. Where subject to physical

ment incorporating a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor damage, fixed industrial process heating equipment shall be shall also comply with Article 440. Fixed industrial process protected in an approved manner. heating equipment incorporating motors shall also comply with (B) Damp or Wet Locations. Fixed industrial process heat- Article 430. ing equipment installed in damp or wet locations shall be listed 425.4 Branch Circuits. for such locations and shall be constructed and installed so that water or other liquids cannot enter or accumulate in or on wired (A) Branch-Circuit Requirements. An individual branch sections, electrical components, or ductwork. circuit shall be permitted to supply any volt-ampere or wattage rating of fixed industrial process heating equipment for which Informational Note: See 110.11 for equipment exposed the branch circuit is rated. to deteriorating agents. (B) Branch-Circuit Sizing. Fixed industrial process heat- 425.13 Spacing from Combustible Materials. Fixed indus-

ing equipment and motors shall be considered continuous trial process heating equipment shall be installed to provide the loads. required spacing between the equipment and adjacent com- 425.6 Listed Equipment. Fixed industrial process heating bustible material, unless it is listed to be installed in direct equipment shall be listed. contact with combustible material. 425.14 Infrared Lamp Industrial Heating Equipment. In Part II. Installation industrial occupancies, infrared industrial process heating 425.8 General. equipment lampholders shall be permitted to be operated in series on circuits of over 150 volts to ground, provided the volt- (A) Location. Fixed industrial process heating equipment age rating of the lampholders is not less than the circuit voltage. shall be accessible. Each section, panel, or strip carrying a number of infrared (B) Working Space. Working space about electrical enclosures lampholders, including the terminal wiring of such section, for fixed industrial process heating equipment that require exam-

panel, or strip, shall be considered as infrared industrial heat- ination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized ing equipment. The terminal connection block of each assem- shall be accessible, and the work space for personnel shall com- bly shall be considered an individual outlet. ply with 110.26 and 110.34, based upon the utilization voltage to ground. Part III. Control and Protection of Fixed Industrial Exception: With special permission, in industrial establish- Process Heating Equipment ments only, where conditions of maintenance and supervision 425.19 Disconnecting Means. Means shall be provided to ensure that only qualified persons will service the installation, simultaneously disconnect the heater, motor controller(s), and working space less than that required in 110.26 or 110.34 shall supplementary overcurrent protective device(s) of all fixed be permitted. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–341

425.21 ARTICLE 425 — FIXED RESISTANCE AND ELECTRODE INDUSTRIAL PROCESS HEATING EQUIPMENT industrial process heating equipment from all ungrounded con- disconnecting means shall be located within sight from the ductors. Where heating equipment is supplied by more than motor controller or shall be permitted to be out of sight from one source, feeder, or branch circuit, the disconnecting means the motor controller and shall be capable of being locked in shall be grouped and identified as having multiple disconnect- the open position in compliance with 110.25. ing means. Each disconnecting means shall simultaneously (C) Unit Switch(es) as Disconnecting Means. A unit disconnect all ungrounded conductors that it controls. The dis- switch(es) with a marked “off” position that is part of a fixed connecting means specified in 425.19(A) and (B) shall have an heater and disconnects all ungrounded conductors shall be per- ampere rating not less than 125 percent of the total load of the mitted as the disconnecting means required by this article. The

motors and the heaters and shall be capable of being locked in branch circuit switch or circuit breaker, where readily acces- the open position in compliance with 110.25. sible for servicing of the fixed heater, shall be permitted as the (A) Heating Equipment with Supplementary Overcurrent other disconnecting means. Protection. The disconnecting means for fixed industrial 425.21 Switch and Circuit Breaker to Be Indicating. Switches process heating equipment with supplementary overcurrent and circuit breakers used as disconnecting means shall be of the protection shall be within sight from the supplementary over- indicating type. current protective device(s), on the supply side of these devices, if fuses, and, in addition, shall comply with either 425.19(A)(1) 425.22 or (A)(2). (A) Branch-Circuit Devices. Fixed industrial process heat- (1) Heater Containing No Motor Rated over 1 ⁄ 8 Horsepower. ing equipment other than such motor-operated equipment as The disconnecting means specified in 425.19 or unit switches required by Articles 430 and 440 to have additional overcurrent

complying with 425.19(C) shall be permitted to serve as the protection shall be permitted to be protected against overcurrent required disconnecting means for both the motor controller(s) where supplied by one of the branch circuits in Article 210. and heater under either of the following conditions: ∆ (B) Resistance Elements. Resistance-type heating elements (1) The disconnecting means provided is also within sight in fixed industrial process heating equipment shall be protected from the motor controller(s) and the heater. at not more than 60 amperes. Equipment rated more than (2) The disconnecting means is capable of being locked in the 48 amperes and employing such elements shall have the heating open position in compliance with 110.25. elements subdivided, and each subdivided load shall not exceed 48 amperes. ∆ (2) Heater Containing a Motor(s) Rated over 1⁄8 Horsepower. The disconnecting means required by 425.19(A)(1) shall be Resistance-type heating elements in fixed industrial pro-

permitted to serve as the required disconnecting means for both cess heating equipment shall be permitted to be subdivided into the motor controller(s) and heater under either of the following circuits not exceeding 120 amperes and protected at not more conditions: than 150 amperes where one of the following is met: (1) The disconnecting means is in sight from the motor (1) Elements are integral with and enclosed within a process controller(s) and the heater and complies with Part IX of heating surface. Article 430. (2) Elements are completely contained within an enclosure (2) Motor(s) of more than 1⁄8 hp and the heater are provided identified as suitable for this use. with disconnecting means. The disconnecting means shall (3) Elements are contained within an ASME-rated and be permitted to be out of sight from the motor controller stamped vessel. and shall be capable of being locked in the open position in Where a subdivided load is less than 48 amperes, the rating of compliance with 110.25. the supplementary overcurrent protective device shall comply

(B) Heating Equipment Without Supplementary Overcur- with 425.4(B). A boiler employing resistance-type immersion rent Protection. heating elements contained in an ASME-rated and stamped vessel shall be permitted to comply with 425.72(A). (1) Without Motor or with Motor Not over 1 ⁄ 8 Horsepower. For fixed industrial process heating equipment without a motor (C) Overcurrent Protective Devices. The supplementary rated over 1⁄8 hp, the branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker overcurrent protective devices for the subdivided loads speci- shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means where fied in 425.22(B) shall be (1) factory installed within or on the the switch or circuit breaker is within sight from the heater, heater enclosure or supplied for use with the heater as a sepa- shall be permitted to be out of sight from the motor controller, rate assembly by the heater manufacturer; (2) accessible, but and shall be capable of being locked in the open position in shall not be required to be readily accessible; and (3) suitable compliance with 110.25.

for branch-circuit protection. 1 (2) Over ⁄8 Horsepower. For motor-driven fixed industrial Informational Note No. 1: See 240.10. Where cartridge 1 process heating equipment with a motor rated over ⁄8 hp, a fuses are used to provide this overcurrent protection, a 70–342 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 425 — FIXED RESISTANCE AND ELECTRODE INDUSTRIAL PROCESS HEATING EQUIPMENT 425.70 single disconnecting means shall be permitted to be used 425.29 Marking of Heating Elements. All heating elements for the several subdivided loads. that are replaceable in the field and are part of industrial pro- Informational Note No. 2: For supplementary overcur- cess heating equipment shall be legibly marked with the ratings rent protection, see 240.10. in volts and watts or in volts and amperes. Informational Note No. 3: Disconnecting means for car- ∆ 425.45 Concealed Fixed Industrial Heating Equipment — tridge fuses in circuits of any voltage, see 240.40. Inspection. Concealed fixed industrial heating equipment installations shall be made with due care to prevent damage (D) Supplying Supplementary Overcurrent Protective to the heating equipment and shall be inspected and approved Devices. The conductors supplying the supplementary over- before heating equipment is covered or concealed. current protective devices shall be considered branch-circuit conductors. Part V.

Fixed Industrial Process Duct Heaters Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the conductors 425.57 General. Part V shall apply to any heater mounted in supplying the supplementary overcurrent protective devices the airstream of a forced-air system where the air-moving unit specified in 425.22(C) shall be permitted to be sized at not less is not provided as an integral part of the equipment. than 100 percent of the nameplate rating of the heater, provided all of the following conditions are met: 425.58 Identification. Heaters installed in an air duct shall be identified as suitable for the installation. (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size. (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum 425.59 Airflow. Means shall be provided to ensure uniform air- size. flow over the face of the heater in accordance with the manu- (3) A temperature-actuated device controls the cyclic operation facturer’s instructions. of the equipment. Informational Note: Some heaters installed within 1.2 m (E) Conductors for Subdivided Loads.

Field-wired conduc- (4 ft) of the outlet of an air-moving device, elbows, baf- tors between the heater and the supplementary overcurrent pro- fle plates, or other obstructions in ductwork use turning tective devices for fixed industrial process heating equipment vanes, pressure plates, or other devices on the inlet side of shall be sized at not less than 125 percent of the load served. the duct heater to ensure an even distribution of air over The supplementary overcurrent protective devices specified in the face of the heater. 425.22(C) shall protect these conductors in accordance with 425.60 Elevated Inlet Temperature. Duct heaters intended 240.4. Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the ampac- for use with elevated inlet air temperature shall be identified as ity of field-wired conductors between the heater and the supple- suitable for use at the elevated temperatures. mentary overcurrent protective devices shall be permitted to be 425.63 Fan Circuit Interlock. Means shall be provided to not less than 100 percent of the load of their respective subdi-

ensure that the fan circuit, where present, is energized when any vided circuits, provided all of the following conditions are met: heater circuit is energized. However, time- or temperature- (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size. controlled delay in energizing the fan motor shall be permitted. (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum ∆ 425.64 Limit Controls. Each duct heater shall be provided size. with an integral, automatic-reset temperature-limiting control (3) A temperature-activated device controls the cyclic operation or controllers to de-energize the circuit or circuits. In addition, of the equipment. an integral independent supplementary control or controllers Part IV. Marking of Heating Equipment shall be provided in each duct heater that disconnects a sufficient number of conductors to interrupt heating element current flow. 425.28 Nameplate. This device shall be manually resettable or replaceable. (A) Marking Required. Fixed industrial process heating equip- 425.65 Location of Disconnecting Means. Duct heater con-

ment shall be provided with a nameplate identifying the manu- troller equipment shall be either accessible with the discon- facturer and the rating in volts and watts or in volts and amperes. necting means installed at or within sight from the controller or Fixed industrial process heating equipment intended for as permitted by 425.19(A). use on alternating current only, direct current only, or both shall be marked to so indicate. The marking of equipment consisting Part VI. Fixed Industrial Process Resistance-Type of motors over 1⁄8 hp and other loads shall specify the rating of Boilers the motor in volts, amperes, and frequency and the heating load 425.70 Scope. The provisions in Part VI of this article shall in volts and watts or in volts and amperes. apply to boilers employing resistance-type heating elements. ∆ (B) Location. This nameplate shall be located so as to be per- Electrode-type boilers shall not be considered as employing manent and shall be visible or accessible after installation. resistance-type heating elements. See Part VII of this article.

2022 California Electrical Code 70–343

425.71 ARTICLE 425 — FIXED RESISTANCE AND ELECTRODE INDUSTRIAL PROCESS HEATING EQUIPMENT 425.71 Identification. Resistance-type boilers shall be identi- ampacity of field-wired conductors between the heater and the fied as suitable for the installation. supplementary overcurrent protective devices shall be permitted to be not less than 100 percent of the load of their respective sub- 425.72 Overcurrent Protection. divided circuits, provided all of the following conditions are met: (A) Boiler Employing Resistance-Type Immersion Heat- (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size. ing Elements in an ASME-Rated and Stamped Vessel. A (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum boiler employing resistance-type immersion heating elements size. contained in an ASME-rated and stamped vessel shall have the (3) A temperature-activated device controls the cyclic operation heating elements protected at not more than 150 amperes. Such of the equipment. a boiler rated more than 120 amperes shall have the heating elements subdivided into loads not exceeding 120 amperes.

425.73 Overtemperature Limit Control. Each boiler designed Where a subdivided load is less than 120 amperes, the rating of so that in normal operation there is no change in state of the heat the overcurrent protective device shall comply with 425.4(B). transfer medium shall be equipped with a temperature-sensitive limiting means. It shall be installed to limit maximum liquid tem- (B) Boiler Employing Resistance-Type Heating Elements perature and shall directly or indirectly disconnect all ungrounded Rated More Than 48 Amperes and Not Contained in an conductors to the heating elements. Such means shall be in addi- ASME-Rated and Stamped Vessel. A boiler employing tion to a temperature-regulating system and other devices pro- resistance-type heating elements not contained in an ASME- tecting the tank against excessive pressure. rated and stamped vessel shall have the heating elements pro- tected at not more than 60 amperes. Such a boiler rated more 425.74 Overpressure Limit Control. Each boiler designed so

than 48 amperes shall have the heating elements subdivided that in normal operation there is a change in state of the heat into loads not exceeding 48 amperes. Where a subdivided load transfer medium from liquid to vapor shall be equipped with is less than 48 amperes, the rating of the overcurrent protective a pressure-sensitive limiting means. It shall be installed to limit device shall comply with 425.4(B). maximum pressure and shall directly or indirectly disconnect all ungrounded conductors to the heating elements. Such means (C) Supplementary Overcurrent Protective Devices. The shall be in addition to a pressure-regulating system and other supplementary overcurrent protective devices for the subdivided devices protecting the tank against excessive pressure. loads as required by 425.72(A) and (B) shall be as follows: (1) Factory-installed within or on the boiler enclosure or pro- Part VII. Fixed Industrial Process Electrode-Type Boilers vided as a separate assembly by the boiler manufacturer. 425.80 Scope. The provisions in Part VII of this article shall

(2) Accessible, but need not be readily accessible. apply to boilers for operation at 600 volts, nominal, or less, in (D) Suitable for Branch-Circuit Protection. Where car- which heat is generated by the passage of current between elec- tridge fuses are used to provide this overcurrent protection, a trodes through the liquid being heated. single disconnecting means shall be permitted for the several 425.81 Identification. Electrode-type boilers shall be identi- subdivided circuits. See 240.40. fied as suitable for the installation. (E) Conductors Supplying Supplementary Overcurrent ∆ 425.82 Branch-Circuit Requirements. The size of branch- Protective Devices. The conductors supplying these supple- circuit conductors and overcurrent protective devices shall be mentary overcurrent protective devices shall be considered calculated on the basis of 125 percent of the total load (motors branch-circuit conductors. Where the heaters are rated 50 kW not included). A contactor, relay, or other device, listed for con- or more, the conductors supplying the overcurrent protective

tinuous operation at 100 percent of its rating, shall be permitted device specified in 424.72(C) shall be permitted to be sized at to supply its full-rated load. See 210.19(A)(1)(a), Exception not less than 100 percent of the nameplate rating of the heater, No. 1. This section shall not apply to conductors that form an provided all of the following conditions are met: integral part of an approved boiler. (1) The heater is marked with a minimum conductor size. Where an electrode boiler is rated 50 kW or more, the con- (2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum ductors supplying the boiler electrode(s) shall be permitted to be size. sized at not less than 100 percent of the nameplate rating of the (3) A temperature- or pressure-actuated device controls the electrode boiler, provided all the following conditions are met: cyclic operation of the equipment. (1) The electrode boiler is marked with a minimum conductor (F) Conductors for Subdivided Loads. Field-wired conduc- size. tors between the heater and the supplementary overcurrent pro-

(2) The conductors are not smaller than the marked minimum tective devices shall be sized at not less than 125 percent of the size. load served. The supplementary overcurrent protective devices (3) A temperature- or pressure-actuated switch controls the specified in 425.72(C) shall protect these conductors in accor- cyclic operation of the equipment. dance with 240.4. Where the heaters are rated 50 kW or more, the 70–344 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 426 — FIXED OUTDOOR ELECTRIC DEICING AND SNOW-MELTING EQUIPMENT 426.12 425.83 Overtemperature Limit Control. Each boiler, designed Informational Note: For further information, see ANSI/ so that in normal operation there is no change in state of the heat IEEE 515.1-2012, Standard for the Testing, Design, transfer medium, shall be equipped with a temperature-sensitive Installation and Maintenance of Electrical Resistance limiting means. It shall be installed to limit maximum liquid Trace Heating for Commercial Applications. Also see temperature and shall directly or indirectly interrupt all current applicable sections of the IEEE 844/CSA 293 series of flow through the electrodes. Such means shall be in addition to standards for fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow- the temperature regulating system and other devices protecting melting equipment. the tank against excessive pressure. 426.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply 425.84 Overpressure Limit Control. Each boiler, designed so only within this article.

that in normal operation there is a change in state of the heat Heating System. A complete system consisting of compo- transfer medium from liquid to vapor, shall be equipped with nents such as heating elements, fastening devices, nonheating a pressure-sensitive limiting means. It shall be installed to limit circuit wiring, leads, temperature controllers, safety signs, junc- maximum pressure and shall directly or indirectly interrupt all tion boxes, raceways, and fittings. current flow through the electrodes. Such means shall be in addition to a pressure-regulating system and other devices pro- ∆ Impedance Heating System. A system in which heat is gen- tecting the tank against excessive pressure. erated in an object, such as a pipe, rod, or combination of such objects serving as a heating element, by causing current to flow 425.85 Grounding. Boilers designed such that fault currents do through such objects by direct connection to an ac voltage source not pass through the pressure vessel, and the pressure vessel is from an isolating transformer. In some situations the object is

electrically isolated from the electrodes, all exposed non–current- embedded in the surface to be heated or constitutes the exposed carrying metal parts, including the pressure vessel, supply, and component to be heated. return connecting piping, shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor. For all other designs, the pressure vessel Resistance Heating Element. A specific separate element to containing the electrodes shall be isolated and electrically insu- generate heat that is embedded in or fastened to the surface to lated from ground. be heated. ∆ 425.86 Markings. All electrode-type boilers shall be marked Informational Note: Tubular heaters, strip heaters, heat- to show the following: ing cable, heating tape, and heating panels are examples of resistance heaters. (1) The manufacturer’s name. (2) The rating in volts, amperes, and kilowatts. Skin-Effect Heating System. A system in which heat is gener- (3) The electrical supply required specifying frequency, num- ated on the inner surface of a ferromagnetic envelope embed- ber of phases, and number of wires.

ded in or fastened to the surface to be heated. (4) The marking “Electrode-Type Process Heating Boiler.” Informational Note: Typically, an electrically insulated (5) A warning marking, “All Power Supplies Shall Be Discon- conductor is routed through and connected to the enve- nected Before Servicing, Including Servicing the Pressure lope at the other end. The envelope and the electrically Vessel.” insulated conductor are connected to an ac voltage source A field-applied warning marking or label shall comply with from an isolating transformer. 110.21(B). The markings shall be permanent and located so as 426.3 Application of Other Articles. Cord-and-plug-con- to be visible after installation. nected fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow-melting equip- ment intended for specific use and identified as suitable for this use shall be installed according to Article 422. ARTICLE 426 426.4 Continuous Load. Fixed outdoor electric deicing and Fixed Outdoor Electric Deicing snow-melting equipment shall be considered a continuous load. and Snow-Melting Equipment Part II. Installation

∆ 426.10 General. Equipment for outdoor electric deicing and Part I. General snow melting shall be identified as suitable for the environment 426.1 Scope. This article covers fixed outdoor electric deicing and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. and snow-melting equipment and the installation of these systems. 426.11 Use. Electric heating equipment shall be installed in (A) Embedded. Embedded in driveways, walks, steps, and such a manner as to be afforded protection from physical damage. other areas. 426.12 Thermal Protection. External surfaces of outdoor (B) Exposed. Exposed on drainage systems, bridge structures, electric deicing and snow-melting equipment that operate roofs, and other structures. at temperatures exceeding 60°C (140°F) shall be physically 2022 California Electrical Code 70–345

426.13 ARTICLE 426 — FIXED OUTDOOR ELECTRIC DEICING AND SNOW-MELTING EQUIPMENT guarded, isolated, or thermally insulated to protect against con- 426.22 Installation of Nonheating Leads for Embedded tact by personnel in the area. Equipment. 426.13 Identification. The presence of outdoor electric deic- ∆ (A) Grounding Sheath or Braid. Except as permitted under ing and snow-melting equipment shall be evident by the post- 426.22(B), nonheating leads installed in concrete, masonry, or ing of appropriate caution signs or markings where clearly asphalt shall be provided with a grounding sheath or braid in visible. accordance with 426.27 or shall be enclosed in rigid metal con- duit, electrical metallic tubing, intermediate metal conduit, or 426.14 Special Permission. Fixed outdoor deicing and snow- other metal raceways. melting equipment employing methods of construction or instal- • lation other than covered by this article shall be permitted only N (B) Splice Connections. The splice connection between the by special permission.

nonheating lead and heating element, within concrete, masonry, or asphalt, shall be located no less than 25 mm (1 in.) and no Part III. Resistance Heating Elements more than 150 mm (6 in.) from the metal raceway. The length of 426.20 Embedded Deicing and Snow-Melting Equipment. the nonheating lead from the metal raceway to the splice assem- bly shall be permitted to be provided without a grounding sheath (A) Watt Density. Panels or units shall not exceed 1300 watts/m 2 or braid. Grounding continuity shall be maintained. (120 watts/ft2) of heated area. (C) Bushings. Insulating bushings shall be used in the concrete, (B) Spacing. The spacing between adjacent cable runs is masonry, or asphalt where the leads enter a metal raceway. dependent upon the rating of the cable and shall be not less than 25 mm (1 in.) on centers. (D) Expansion and Contraction. Leads shall be protected in expansion joints in accordance with 300.4(H) or installed in (C) Cover. Units, panels, or cables shall be installed as follows: accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

(1) On a substantial concrete, masonry, or asphalt base at least N (E) Emerging from Grade. Exposed nonheating leads shall 1 50 mm (2 in.) thick and have at least 38 mm (1⁄2 in.) of be protected by raceways or other identified means. concrete, masonry, or asphalt applied over the units, pan- els, or cables; or (F) Leads in Junction Boxes. Not less than 150 mm (6 in.) of (2) They shall be permitted to be installed over other identified free nonheating lead shall be within the junction box. 1 bases and embedded within 90 mm (3 ⁄2 in.) of concrete, 426.23 Installation of Nonheating Leads for Exposed 1 masonry, or asphalt but not less than 38 mm (1 ⁄2 in.) from Equipment. the top surface; or (A) Nonheating Leads. Power supply nonheating leads (3) Equipment that has been listed for other forms of installa- (cold leads) for resistance elements shall be identified for the tion shall be installed only in the manner for which it has temperature encountered. Not less than 150 mm (6 in.) of non- been identified. heating leads shall be provided within the junction box. Pre- (D) Secured.

Cables, units, and panels shall be secured in assembled factory-supplied and field-assembled nonheating place by frames or spreaders or other approved means while the leads on approved heaters shall be permitted to be shortened if concrete, masonry, or asphalt finish is applied. the markings specified in 426.25 are retained. (E) Expansion and Contraction. Cables, units, and panels (B) Protection. Nonheating power supply leads shall be shall not be installed where they bridge expansion joints unless enclosed in a rigid conduit, intermediate metal conduit, elec- provision is made for expansion and contraction. trical metallic tubing, or other approved means. ∆ 426.21 Exposed Deicing and Snow-Melting Equipment. 426.24 Electrical Connection. (A) Secured. Heating element assemblies shall be secured to (A) Heating Element Connections. Electrical connections, the surface being heated by identified means. other than factory connections of heating elements to nonheat- (B) Overtemperature. Where the heating element is not in ing elements embedded in concrete, masonry, or asphalt or on

direct contact with the surface being heated, the design of the exposed surfaces, shall be made with insulated connectors iden- heater assembly shall be such that its temperature limitations tified for the use. shall not be exceeded. (B) Circuit Connections. Splices and terminations at the end of (C) Expansion and Contraction. Heating elements and the nonheating leads, other than the heating element end, shall be assemblies shall not be installed where they bridge expansion installed in a box or fitting in accordance with 110.14 and 300.15. joints unless provision is made for expansion and contraction. 426.25 Marking. Each factory-assembled heating unit shall be (D) Flexural Capability. Where installed on flexible struc- legibly marked within 75 mm (3 in.) of each end of the nonheat- tures, the heating elements and assemblies shall have a flexural ing leads with the permanent identification symbol, catalog num- capability that is compatible with the structure. ber, and ratings in volts and watts or in volts and amperes. 70–346 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 426 — FIXED OUTDOOR ELECTRIC DEICING AND SNOW-MELTING EQUIPMENT 426.54 426.26 Corrosion Protection. Ferrous and nonferrous metal ∆ 426.44 Equipment Grounding Conductor. The ferromag- raceways, cable armor, cable sheaths, boxes, fittings, supports, netic envelope shall be connected to an equipment grounding and support hardware shall be permitted to be installed in concrete conductor at both ends; and, in addition, it shall be permitted to or in direct contact with the earth, or in areas subject to severe be connected to an equipment grounding conductor at interme- corrosive influences, where made of material suitable for the con- diate points as required by its design. dition, or where provided with corrosion protection identified as Section 250.30 shall not apply to the installation of skin- suitable for the condition. effect heating systems. 426.27 Grounding Braid or Sheath. Grounding means, such as copper braid, metal sheath, or other approved means, Part VI. Control and Protection shall be provided as part of the heated section of the cable, 426.50 Disconnecting Means.

panel, or unit. (A) Disconnection. All fixed outdoor deicing and snow-melting 426.28 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Ground- equipment shall be provided with a means for simultaneous fault protection of equipment shall be provided for fixed out- disconnection from all ungrounded conductors. Where readily door electric deicing and snow-melting equipment. accessible to the user of the equipment, the branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting Part IV. Impedance Heating means. The disconnecting means shall be of the indicating type 426.30 Personnel Protection. Exposed elements of impedance and be capable of being locked in the open (off) position. heating systems shall be physically guarded, isolated, or ther- (B) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Equipment. The factory- mally insulated with a weatherproof jacket to protect against installed attachment plug of cord-and-plug-connected equip- contact by personnel in the area. ment rated 20 amperes or less and 150 volts or less to ground 426.31 Isolation Transformer.

An isolation transformer shall be permitted to be the disconnecting means. with a grounded shield between the primary and secondary 426.51 Controllers. windings shall be used to isolate the distribution system from the heating system. (A) Temperature Controller with “Off” Position. Temper- ature-controlled switching devices that indicate an “off” posi- 426.32 Voltage Limitations. The secondary winding of the tion and that interrupt line current shall open all ungrounded isolation transformer connected to the impedance heating ele- conductors when the control device is in the “off” position. ments shall not have an output voltage greater than 30 volts ac. These devices shall not be permitted to serve as the disconnect- 426.33 Induced Currents. All current-carrying components ing means unless they are capable of being locked in the open shall be installed in accordance with 300.20. position in compliance with 110.25. • (B) Temperature Controller Without “Off” Position. Tem- Part V. Skin-Effect Heating perature controlled switching devices that do not have an “off”

∆ 426.40 Conductor Ampacity. The current through the elec- position shall not be required to open all ungrounded conductors trically insulated conductor inside the ferromagnetic enve- and shall not be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means. lope shall be permitted to exceed the ampacity values shown in (C) Remote Temperature Controller. Remote controlled Table 310.16, provided it is identified as suitable for this use. temperature-actuated devices shall not be required to meet the 426.41 Pull Boxes. Where pull boxes are used, they shall be requirements of 426.51(A). These devices shall not be permit- accessible without excavation by location in suitable vaults ted to serve as the disconnecting means. or abovegrade. Outdoor pull boxes shall be of watertight (D) Combined Switching Devices. Switching devices con- construction. sisting of combined temperature-actuated devices and manually 426.42 Single Conductor in Enclosure. The provisions of controlled switches that serve both as the controller and the discon-

300.20 shall not apply to the installation of a single conductor necting means shall comply with all of the following conditions: in a ferromagnetic envelope (metal enclosure). (1) Open all ungrounded conductors when manually placed 426.43 Corrosion Protection. Ferromagnetic envelopes, fer- in the “off” position rous or nonferrous metal raceways, boxes, fittings, supports, (2) Be so designed that the circuit cannot be energized auto- and support hardware shall be permitted to be installed in con- matically if the device has been manually placed in the crete or in direct contact with the earth, or in areas subjected “off” position to severe corrosive influences, where made of material suitable (3) Be capable of being locked in the open position in compli- for the condition, or where provided with corrosion protec- ance with 110.25 tion identified as suitable for the condition. Corrosion protection 426.54 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Deicing and Snow-Melting shall maintain the original wall thickness of the ferromagnetic Equipment. Cord-and-plug-connected deicing and snow-melt- envelope.

ing equipment shall be listed. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–347

427.1 ARTICLE 427 — FIXED ELECTRIC HEATING EQUIPMENT FOR PIPELINES AND VESSELS 427.4 Continuous Load. Fixed electric heating equipment for ARTICLE 427 pipelines and vessels shall be considered continuous load. Fixed Electric Heating Equipment Part II. Installation for Pipelines and Vessels 427.10 General. Equipment for pipeline and vessel electric heating shall be identified as being suitable for (1) the chemical, Part I. General thermal, and physical environment and (2) installation in accor- dance with the manufacturer’s drawings and instructions. ∆ 427.1 Scope. This article covers electrically energized heating systems and the installation of these systems used with pipe- 427.11 Use. Electric heating equipment shall be installed in lines and vessels. such a manner as to be afforded protection from physical damage. Informational Note: For further information, see ANSI/ 427.12 Thermal Protection. External surfaces of pipeline and IEEE 515-2017, Standard for the Testing, Design, Installa- vessel heating equipment that operate at temperatures exceeding

tion and Maintenance of Electrical Resistance Trace Heat- 60°C (140°F) shall be physically guarded, isolated, or thermally ing for Industrial Applications. insulated to protect against contact by personnel in the area. Also see applicable sections of the IEEE 844/CSA 293 427.13 Identification. The presence of electrically heated series of standards for alternate technologies for fixed electric pipelines, vessels, or both, shall be evident by the posting of heating equipment for pipelines and vessels. appropriate caution signs or markings at intervals not exceed- ing 6 m (20 ft) along the pipeline or vessel and on or adjacent to 427.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply equipment in the piping system that requires periodic servicing. only within this article. Impedance Heating System. A system in which heat is gen- Part III. Resistance Heating Elements erated in a pipeline or vessel wall by causing current to flow 427.14 Secured. Heating element assemblies shall be secured through the pipeline or vessel wall by direct connection to an ac

to the surface being heated by means other than the thermal voltage source from a dual-winding transformer. insulation. Induction Heating System. A system in which heat is gener- 427.15 Not in Direct Contact. Where the heating element is ated in a pipeline or vessel wall by inducing current and hys- not in direct contact with the pipeline or vessel being heated, teresis effect in the pipeline or vessel wall from an external means shall be provided to prevent overtemperature of the heat- isolated ac field source. ing element unless the design of the heating assembly is such Pipeline. A length of pipe including pumps, valves, flanges, that its temperature limitations will not be exceeded. control devices, strainers, and/or similar equipment for convey- 427.16 Expansion and Contraction. Heating elements and ing fluids. assemblies shall not be installed where they bridge expansion Resistance Heating Element. A specific separate element to joints unless provisions are made for expansion and contraction. generate heat that is applied to the pipeline or vessel externally

427.17 Flexural Capability. Where installed on flexible pipe- or internally. lines, the heating elements and assemblies shall have a flexural Informational Note: Tubular heaters, strip heaters, heat- capability that is compatible with the pipeline. ing cable, heating tape, heating blankets, and immersion 427.18 Power Supply Leads. heaters are examples of resistance heaters. (A) Nonheating Leads. Power supply nonheating leads (cold Skin-Effect Heating System. A system in which heat is gener- leads) for resistance elements shall be suitable for the temperature ated on the inner surface of a ferromagnetic envelope attached encountered. Not less than 150 mm (6 in.) of nonheating leads to a pipeline or vessel, or both. shall be provided within the junction box. Preassembled factory- Informational Note: Typically, an electrically insulated supplied and field-assembled nonheating leads on approved conductor is routed through and connected to the enve- heaters shall be permitted to be shortened if the markings speci- lope at the other end.

The envelope and the electrically fied in 427.20 are retained. insulated conductor are connected to an ac voltage source (B) Power Supply Leads Protection. Nonheating power from a dual-winding transformer. supply leads shall be protected where they emerge from elec- Vessel. A container such as a barrel, drum, or tank for holding trically heated pipeline or vessel heating units by rigid metal fluids or other material. conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or other raceways identified as suitable for the application. 427.3 Application of Other Articles. Cord-connected pipe heating assemblies intended for specific use and identified as (C) Interconnecting Leads. Interconnecting nonheating leads suitable for this use shall be installed according to Article 422. connecting portions of the heating system shall be permitted 70–348 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 427 — FIXED ELECTRIC HEATING EQUIPMENT FOR PIPELINES AND VESSELS 427.45 to be covered by thermal insulation in the same manner as the Exception No. 1:In industrial establishments, the isolation heaters. transformer connected to the pipeline or vessel being heated shall be permitted to have an output voltage greater than 30 but 427.19 Electrical Connections. not more than 80 volts ac to ground where all of the following (A) Nonheating Interconnections. Nonheating interconnec- conditions apply: tions, where required under thermal insulation, shall be made (1) Conditions of guarding, maintenance, and supervision with insulated connectors identified as suitable for this use. ensure that only qualified persons have access to the (B) Circuit Connections. Splices and terminations outside the installed systems. thermal insulation shall be installed in a box or fitting in accor- (2) Ground-fault protection of equipment is provided. dance with 110.14 and 300.15. Exception No. 2:In industrial establishments, the isolation 427.20 Marking.

Each factory-assembled heating unit shall be transformer connected to the pipeline or vessel being heated shall legibly marked within 75 mm (3 in.) of the termination end of be permitted to have an output voltage not greater than 132 volts all nonheating leads with the permanent identification symbol, ac to ground where all of the following conditions apply: catalog number, and ratings in volts and watts or in volts and (1) Conditions of guarding, maintenance, and supervision amperes. ensure that only qualified persons service the installed 427.22 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Ground- systems. fault protection of equipment shall be provided for electric heat (2) Ground-fault protection of equipment is provided. tracing and heating panels. This requirement shall not apply in (3) The pipeline or vessel being heated is completely enclosed industrial establishments where there is alarm indication of in a grounded metal enclosure. ground faults and the following conditions apply: (4) The transformer secondary connections to the pipeline or

(1) Conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only vessel being heated are completely enclosed in a grounded qualified persons service the installed systems. metal mesh or metal enclosure. (2) Continued circuit operation is necessary for safe operation 427.28 Induced Currents. All current-carrying components of equipment or processes. shall be installed in accordance with 300.20. 427.23 Grounded Conductive Covering. Electric heating 427.29 Grounding. The pipeline, vessel, or both, that is being equipment shall be listed and have a grounded conductive cov- heated and operating at a voltage greater than 30 but not more ering in accordance with 427.23(A) or (B). The conductive cov- than 80 shall be grounded at designated points. ering shall provide an effective ground-fault current path for 427.30 Secondary Conductor Sizing. The ampacity of the operation of ground-fault protection equipment. conductors connected to the secondary of the transformer (A) Heating Wires or Cables. Heating wires or cables shall shall be at least 100 percent of the total load of the heater.

have a grounded conductive covering that surrounds the heating element and bus wires, if any, and their electrical insulation. Part V. Induction Heating (B) Heating Panels. Heating panels shall have a grounded con- 427.35 Scope. This part covers the installation of line fre- ductive covering over the heating element and its electrical insu- quency induction heating equipment and accessories for pipe- lation on the side opposite the side attached to the surface to be lines and vessels. heated. Informational Note: See Article 665 for other applications. Part IV. Impedance Heating 427.36 Personnel Protection. Induction coils that operate or may operate at a voltage greater than 30 volts ac shall be 427.25 Personnel Protection. All accessible external sur- enclosed in a nonmetallic or split metallic enclosure, isolated, faces of the pipeline, vessel, or both, being heated shall be or made inaccessible by location to protect personnel in the physically guarded, isolated, or thermally insulated (with a area. weatherproof jacket for outside installations) to protect against

contact by personnel in the area. 427.37 Induced Current. Induction coils shall be prevented from inducing circulating currents in surrounding metallic equip- 427.26 Isolation Transformer. A dual-winding transformer ment, supports, or structures by shielding, isolation, or insula- with a grounded shield between the primary and secondary tion of the current paths. Stray current paths shall be bonded to windings shall be used to isolate the distribution system from prevent arcing. the heating system. 427.27 Voltage Limitations. The secondary winding of the Part VI. Skin-Effect Heating isolation transformer connected to the pipeline or vessel being ∆ 427.45 Conductor Ampacity. The ampacity of the electrically heated shall not have an output voltage greater than 30 volts insulated conductor inside the ferromagnetic envelope shall be ac. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–349

427.46 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS permitted to exceed the values given in Table 310.16, provided requirements of 427.56(A) and (B). These devices shall not be it is identified as suitable for this use. permitted to serve as the disconnecting means. 427.46 Pull Boxes. Pull boxes for pulling the electrically insu- (D) Combined Switching Devices. Switching devices con- lated conductor in the ferromagnetic envelope shall be permit- sisting of combined temperature-actuated devices and manually ted to be buried under the thermal insulation, provided their controlled switches that serve both as the controllers and the dis- locations are indicated by permanent markings on the insula- connecting means shall comply with all the following conditions: tion jacket surface and on drawings. For outdoor installations, (1) Open all ungrounded conductors when manually placed pull boxes shall be of watertight construction. in the “off” position 427.47 Single Conductor in Enclosure. The provisions of (2) Be designed so that the circuit cannot be energized auto-

300.20 shall not apply to the installation of a single conductor matically if the device has been manually placed in the in a ferromagnetic envelope (metal enclosure). “off” position (3) Be capable of being locked in the open position 427.48 Grounding. The ferromagnetic envelope shall be grounded at both ends, and, in addition, it shall be permitted 427.57 Overcurrent Protection. Heating equipment shall be to be grounded at intermediate points as required by its design. considered protected against overcurrent where supplied by a The ferromagnetic envelope shall be bonded at all joints to branch circuit as specified in 210.20 and 210.24. ensure electrical continuity. The provisions of 250.30 shall not apply to the installation of skin-effect heating systems. ARTICLE 430 Motors, Motor Circuits, and Controllers Informational Note: See Article 250 for grounding methods. Part I. General Part VII. Control and Protection 430.1 Scope. This article covers motors, motor branch-circuit 427.55 Disconnecting Means. and feeder conductors and their protection, motor overload

(A) Switch or Circuit Breaker. Means shall be provided to protection, motor control circuits, motor controllers, and motor simultaneously disconnect all fixed electric pipeline or ves- control centers. sel heating equipment from all ungrounded conductors. The Informational Note No. 1: Installation requirements branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker, where readily acces- for motor control centers are covered in 110.26(E). Air- sible to the user of the equipment, shall be permitted to serve as conditioning and refrigerating equipment are covered in the disconnecting means. The disconnecting means shall be of Article 440. the indicating type and shall be capable of being locked in the open (off) position. The disconnecting means shall be installed Informational Note No. 2: Figure 430.1 is for informa- in accordance with 110.25. tion only. (B) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Equipment. The factory- 430.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply installed attachment plug of cord-and-plug-connected equip- only within this article.

ment rated 20 amperes or less and 150 volts or less to ground Controller. Any switch or device that is normally used to shall be permitted to be the disconnecting means. start and stop a motor by making and breaking the motor circuit 427.56 Controls. current. (A) Temperature Control with “Off” Position. Tempera- N Electronically Protected (as applied to motors). A motor ture-controlled switching devices that indicate an “off” posi- that is provided with electronic control that is an integral part of tion and that interrupt line current shall open all ungrounded the motor and protects the motor against dangerous overheating conductors when the control device is in this “off” position. due to failure of the electronic control, overload and failure to These devices shall not be permitted to serve as the discon- start. necting means unless capable of being locked in the open ∆ Part-Winding Motors. A part-winding start induction or position. synchronous motor is one that is arranged for starting by first (B) Temperature Control Without “Off” Position.

Tem- energizing part of its primary (armature) winding and, subse- perature controlled switching devices that do not have an “off” quently, energizing the remainder of this winding in one or position shall not be required to open all ungrounded conductors more steps. A standard part-winding start induction motor is and shall not be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means. arranged so that one-half of its primary winding can be ener- gized initially, and, subsequently, the remaining half can be (C) Remote Temperature Controller. Remote controlled energized, both halves then carrying equal current. temperature-actuated devices shall not be required to meet the 70–350 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.6 each half of the motor winding shall be individually protected in General, 430.1 through 430.18 Part I Motor Circuit Conductors, 430.21 through 430.29 Part II accordance with 430.32 and 430.37 with a trip current one-half Motor and Branch-Circuit Overload Protection, 430.31 Part III that specified. through 430.44 Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Part IV Each motor-winding connection shall have branch-circuit Protection, 430.51 through 430.58 Motor Feeder Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protection, Part V short-circuit and ground-fault protection rated at not more than 430.61 through 430.63 one-half that specified by 430.52. Motor Control Circuits, 430.71 through 430.75 Part VI Motor Controllers, 430.81 through 430.90 Part VII Exception: A short-circuit and ground-fault protective device Motor Control Centers, 430.92 through 430.99 Part VIII Disconnecting Means, 430.101 through 430.113 Part IX shall be permitted for both windings if the device will allow the

Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems, 430.120 through 430.131 Part X motor to start. Where time-delay (dual-element) fuses are used, Over 1000 Volts, Nominal, 430.221 through 430.227 Part XI they shall be permitted to have a rating not exceeding 150 per- Protection of Live Parts—All Voltages, 430.231 Part XII through 430.233 cent of the motor full-load current. Grounding—All Voltages, 430.241 through 430.246 Part XIII Tables, Tables 430.247 through 430.252 Part XIV 430.5 Other Articles. Motors and controllers shall also com- ply with the applicable provisions of Table 430.5. To Supply Part II 430.24, ∆ 430.6 Ampacity and Motor Rating Determination. The size Motor feeder 430.25, 430.26 of conductors supplying equipment covered by Article 430 shall Motor feeder be selected from the ampacity tables in accordance with 310.15 short-circuit and or shall be calculated in accordance with 310.14(B). Where flex- ground-fault protection Part V ible cord is used, the size of the conductor shall be selected in Motor disconnecting means Part IX accordance with 400.5.

The required ampacity and motor ratings Motor branch-circuit short-circuit and shall be determined as specified in 430.6(A), (B), (C), and (D). ground-fault protection Part IV ∆ (A) General Motor Applications. For general motor applica- Motor circuit conductor Part II tions, current ratings shall be determined based on 430.6(A)(1) Motor controller Part VII and (A)(2). Motor control circuits Part VI (1) Table Values. Other than for motors built for low speeds Motor overload protection Part III (less than 1200 RPM) or high torques, and for multispeed Motor Part I motors, the values given in Table 430.247, Table 430.248, Table Thermal protection Part III 430.249, and Table 430.250 shall be used to determine the Secondary controller Part II ampacity of conductors or ampere ratings of switches, branch- Secondary conductors 430.23 circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection, instead of the Secondary resistor Part II actual current rating marked on the motor nameplate. Where 430.23 and Article 470 a motor is marked in amperes, but not horsepower, the horse-

∆ FIGURE 430.1 Article 430 Contents. power rating shall be assumed to be that corresponding to the value given in Table 430.247, Table 430.248, Table 430.249, and Table 430.250, interpolated if necessary. Motors built for low Informational Note: A hermetic refrigerant motor-com- speeds (less than 1200 RPM) or high torques may have higher pressor is not considered a standard part-winding start full-load currents, and multispeed motors will have full-load induction motor. current varying with speed, in which case the nameplate current System Isolation Equipment. A redundantly monitored, ratings shall be used. remotely operated contactor-isolating system, packaged to pro- Exception No. 1: Multispeed motors shall be in accordance vide the disconnection/isolation function, capable of verifiable with 430.22(B) and 430.52. operation from multiple remote locations by means of lockout switches, each having the capability of being padlocked in the Exception No. 2: For equipment that employs a shaded-pole “off” (open) position. or permanent-split capacitor-type fan or blower motor that is

marked with the motor type, the full load current for such motor Valve Actuator Motor (VAM) Assemblies. A manufactured marked on the nameplate of the equipment in which the fan assembly, used to operate a valve, consisting of an actuator motor or blower motor is employed shall be used instead of the horse- and other components such as controllers, torque switches, limit power rating to determine the ampacity or rating of the discon- switches, and overload protection. necting means, the branch-circuit conductors, the controller, Informational Note: VAMs typically have short-time duty the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection, and and high-torque characteristics. the separate overload protection. This marking on the equip- ment nameplate shall not be less than the current marked on the 430.4 Part-Winding Motors. Where separate overload devices fan or blower motor nameplate. are used with a standard part-winding start induction motor, 2022 California Electrical Code 70–351

430.7 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS Table 430.5 Other Articles Equipment/Occupancy Article Section Air-conditioning and refrigerating equipment 440 Capacitors 460.8, 460.9 Commercial garages; aircraft hangars; motor fuel 511, 513, 514, 515, 516, dispensing facilities; bulk storage plants; spray and 517 Part IV application, dipping, and coating processes; and inhalation anesthetizing locations Cranes and hoists 610 Electrically driven or controlled irrigation 675 machines Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving 620 walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts Fire pumps 695 Hazardous (classified) locations 500–503, 505, and 506 Industrial machinery 670 Motion picture projectors 540.11 and 540.20 Motion picture and television studios and similar 530 locations Resistors and reactors 470 Theaters, audience areas of motion picture and 520.48 television studios, and similar locations Transformers and transformer vaults 450 Exception No. 3: For a listed motor-operated appliance that (D) Valve Actuator Motor Assemblies. For valve actua-

is marked with both motor horsepower and full-load current, tor motor assemblies (VAMs), the rated current shall be the the motor full-load current marked on the nameplate of the nameplate full-load current, and this current shall be used to appliance shall be used instead of the horsepower rating on determine the maximum rating or setting of the motor branch- the appliance nameplate to determine the ampacity or rating circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device and the of the disconnecting means, the branch-circuit conductors, the ampacity of the conductors. controller, the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault pro- 430.7 Marking on Motors and Multimotor Equipment. tection, and any separate overload protection. (A) Usual Motor Applications. A motor shall be marked (2) Nameplate Values. Separate motor overload protection with the following information: shall be based on the motor nameplate current rating. (1) Manufacturer’s name. (B) Torque Motors. For torque motors, the rated current shall (2) Rated volts and full-load current. For a multispeed

be locked-rotor current, and this nameplate current shall be motor, full-load current for each speed, except shaded-pole used to determine the ampacity of the branch-circuit conductors and permanent-split capacitor motors where amperes are covered in 430.22 and 430.24, the ampere rating of the motor required only for maximum speed. overload protection, and the ampere rating of motor branch- (3) Rated frequency and number of phases if an ac motor. circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection in accordance (4) Rated full-load speed. with 430.52(B). (5) Rated temperature rise or the insulation system class and Informational Note: For motor controllers and discon- rated ambient temperature. necting means, see 430.83(D) and 430.110. (6) Time rating. The time rating shall be 5, 15, 30, or 60 min- utes, or continuous. (C) Alternating-Current Adjustable Voltage Motors. For (7) Rated horsepower if 1⁄8 hp or more. For a multispeed motor motors used in alternating-current, adjustable voltage, variable 1⁄8 hp or more, rated horsepower for each speed, except

torque drive systems, the ampacity of conductors, or ampere shaded-pole and permanent-split capacitor motors 1⁄8 hp or ratings of switches, branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- more where rated horsepower is required only for maxi- fault protection, and so forth, shall be based on the maximum mum speed. Motors of arc welders are not required to be operating current marked on the motor or control nameplate, marked with the horsepower rating. or both. If the maximum operating current does not appear on (8) Code letter or locked-rotor amperes if an alternating- the nameplate, the ampacity determination shall be based on current motor rated 1 ⁄ 2 hp or more. On polyphase wound- 150 percent of the values given in Table 430.249 and Table rotor motors, the code letter shall be omitted. 430.250. 70–352 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.7 Informational Note: See 430.7(B). Table 430.7(B) Locked-Rotor Indicating Code Letters (9) Design letter for design B, C, or D motors. Kilovolt-Amperes per Informational Note: Motor design letter definitions are Code Letter Horsepower with Locked Rotor found in ANSI/NEMA MG 1-1993, Motors and Genera- A 0–3.14 tors, Part 1, Definitions, and in IEEE 100-1996, Standard B 3.15–3.54 Dictionary of Electrical and Electronic Terms. C 3.55–3.99 (10) Secondary volts and full-load current if a wound-rotor D 4.0–4.49 induction motor. E 4.5–4.99 F 5.0–5.59 (11) Field current and voltage for dc excited synchronous G 5.6–6.29 motors. H 6.3–7.09 (12) Winding — straight shunt, stabilized shunt, compound, J 7.1–7.99 or series, if a dc motor. Fractional horsepower dc motors K 8.0–8.99 175 mm (7 in.) or less in diameter shall not be required to L 9.0–9.99 be marked. M 10.0–11.19 (13) A motor provided with a thermal protector complying N 11.2–12.49 with 430.32(A)(2) or (B)(2) shall be marked “thermally P 12.5–13.99 R 14.0–15.99

protected.” Thermally protected motors rated 100 watts S 16.0–17.99 or less and complying with 430.32(B)(2) shall be permit- T 18.0–19.99 ted to use the abbreviated marking “T.P.” U 20.0–22.39 (14) A motor complying with 430.32(B)(4) shall be marked V 22.4 and up “impedance protected.” Impedance-protected motors rated 100 watts or less and complying with 430.32(B)(4) shall be permitted to use the abbreviated marking “Z.P.” (15) Motors equipped with electrically powered condensa- (4) 50/60 Hz Motors. Motors with 50- and 60-Hz ratings tion prevention heaters shall be marked with the rated shall be marked with a code letter designating the locked-rotor heater voltage, number of phases, and the rated power in kilovolt-ampere (kVA) per horsepower (hp) on 60 Hz. watts. (16) Motors that are electronically protected from overloads (5) Part-Winding Motors. Part-winding start motors shall in accordance with 430.32(A)(2) and (B)(2) shall be be marked with a code letter designating the locked-rotor

marked “electronically protected” or “E.P.” kilovolt-ampere (kVA) per horsepower (hp) that is based on the locked-rotor current for the full winding of the motor. (B) Locked-Rotor Indicating Code Letters. Code letters marked on motor nameplates to show motor input with locked (C) Torque Motors. Torque motors are rated for operation rotor shall be in accordance with Table 430.7(B). at standstill and shall be marked in accordance with 430.7(A), except that locked-rotor torque shall replace horsepower. The code letter indicating motor input with locked rotor shall be in an individual block on the nameplate, properly designated. (D) Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment. (1) Multispeed Motors. Multispeed motors shall be marked (1) Factory-Wired. Multimotor and combination-load equip- with the code letter designating the locked-rotor kilovolt- ment shall be provided with a visible nameplate marked with ampere (kVA) per horsepower (hp) for the highest speed at the manufacturer’s name, the rating in volts, frequency, number which the motor can be started.

of phases, minimum supply circuit conductor ampacity, and the maximum ampere rating of the circuit short-circuit and ground- Exception: Constant horsepower multispeed motors shall be fault protective device. The conductor ampacity shall be calcu- marked with the code letter giving the highest locked-rotor lated in accordance with 430.24 and counting all of the motors kilovolt-ampere (kVA) per horsepower (hp). and other loads that will be operated at the same time. The short- (2) Single-Speed Motors. Single-speed motors starting on wye circuit and ground-fault protective device rating shall not exceed connection and running on delta connections shall be marked the value calculated in accordance with 430.53. Multimotor with a code letter corresponding to the locked-rotor kilovolt- equipment for use on two or more circuits shall be marked with ampere (kVA) per horsepower (hp) for the wye connection. the preceding information for each circuit. (3) Dual-Voltage Motors. Dual-voltage motors that have a dif- (2) Not Factory-Wired. Where the equipment is not factory-

ferent locked-rotor kilovolt-ampere (kVA) per horsepower (hp) wired and the individual nameplates of motors and other on the two voltages shall be marked with the code letter for the loads are visible after assembly of the equipment, the indi- voltage giving the highest locked-rotor kilovolt-ampere (kVA) vidual nameplates shall be permitted to serve as the required per horsepower (hp). marking. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–353

430.8 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.8 Marking on Controllers. A controller shall be marked Table 430.10(B) Minimum Wire-Bending Space at the Terminals with the manufacturer’s name or identification, the voltage, the of Enclosed Motor Controllers current or horsepower rating, the short-circuit current rating, Wires per Terminal* and other necessary data to properly indicate the applications for Size of Wire which it is suitable. 1 2 (AWG or Exception No. 1:The short-circuit current rating is not kcmil) mm in. mm in. required for controllers applied in accordance with 430.81(A) 10 and smaller Not specified — — or (B). 8–6 38 1 1⁄2 — — 4–3 50 2 — — Exception No. 2: The short-circuit rating is not required to be 1 2 65 2 ⁄2 — — marked on the controller when the short-circuit current rating of 1 75 3 — — the controller is marked elsewhere on the assembly. 1/0 125 5 125 5 2/0 150 6 150 6 Exception No. 3: The short-circuit rating is not required to 3/0–4/0 175 7 175 7 be marked on the controller when the assembly into which it is 250 200 8 200 8

installed has a marked short-circuit current rating. 300 250 10 250 10 350–500 300 12 300 12 Exception No. 4: Short-circuit ratings are not required for con- 600–700 350 14 400 16 trollers rated less than 2 hp at 300 V or less and listed exclu- 750–900 450 18 475 19 sively for general-purpose branch circuits. *Where provision for three or more wires per terminal exists, the minimum A controller that includes motor overload protection suitable wire-bending space shall be in accordance with the requirements of Article 312. for group motor application shall be marked with the motor overload protection and the maximum branch-circuit short-cir- cuit and ground-fault protection for such applications. Informational Note: See 312.8 for switch and overcurrent- Combination controllers that employ adjustable instanta- device enclosures. neous trip circuit breakers shall be clearly marked to indicate (B) Wire-Bending Space in Enclosures. Minimum wire- the ampere settings of the adjustable trip element. bending space within the enclosures for motor controllers shall

Where a controller is built in as an integral part of a motor or of be in accordance with Table 430.10(B) where measured in a motor-generator set, individual marking of the controller shall a straight line from the end of the lug or wire connector (in not be required if the necessary data are on the nameplate. For the direction the wire leaves the terminal) to the wall or bar- controllers that are an integral part of equipment approved as rier. Where alternate wire termination means are substituted a unit, the above marking shall be permitted on the equipment for that supplied by the manufacturer of the controller, they nameplate. shall be of a type identified by the manufacturer for use with the controller and shall not reduce the minimum wire-bending Informational Note: See 110.10 for information on cir- space. cuit impedance and other characteristics. 430.11 Protection Against Liquids. Suitable guards or enclo- 430.9 Terminals. sures shall be provided to protect exposed current-carrying parts (A) Markings.

Terminals of motors and controllers shall be of motors and the insulation of motor leads where installed suitably marked or colored where necessary to indicate the proper directly under equipment, or in other locations where dripping connections. or spraying oil, water, or other liquid is capable of occurring, unless the motor is designed for the existing conditions. (B) Conductors. Motor controllers and terminals of control circuit devices shall be connected with copper conductors unless 430.12 Motor Terminal Housings. identified for use with a different conductor. (A) Material. Where motors are provided with terminal hous- (C) Torque Requirements. Control circuit devices with screw- ings, the housings shall be of metal and of substantial construction. type pressure terminals used with 14 AWG or smaller copper Exception: In other than hazardous (classified) locations, sub- conductors shall be torqued to a minimum of 0.8 N·m (7 lb-in.) stantial, nonmetallic, noncombustible housings shall be permit- unless identified for a different torque value.

ted, provided an internal grounding means between the motor 430.10 Wiring Space in Enclosures. frame and the equipment grounding connection is incorporated within the housing. (A) General. Enclosures for motor controllers and disconnect- ing means shall not be used as junction boxes, auxiliary gutters, (B) Dimensions and Space — Wire-to-Wire Connections. or raceways for conductors feeding through or tapping off to Where these terminal housings enclose wire-to-wire connec- the other apparatus unless designs are employed that provide tions, they shall have minimum dimensions and usable volumes adequate space for this purpose. in accordance with Table 430.12(B). 70–354 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.13 Table 430.12(B) Terminal Housings — Wire-to-Wire Connections Table 430.12(C)(1) Terminal Spacings — Fixed Terminals Motors 275 mm (11 in.) in Diameter or Less Minimum Spacing Cover Opening Usable Volume Between Line Minimum Dimension Minimum Terminals and Other Between Line Uninsulated Metal Horsepower mm in. cm 3 in.3 Terminals Parts 1 and smallera 41 1 5⁄8 170 10.5 1 1⁄2, 2, and 3b 45 13⁄4 275 16.8 Nominal Volts mm in. mm in. 5 and 7 1⁄2 50 2 365 22.4 1 1 10 and 15 65 2 1⁄2 595 36.4 250 or less 6 ⁄4 6 ⁄4 Over 250 – 1000 10 3⁄8 10 3⁄8 Motors Over 275 mm (11 in.) in Diameter — Alternating-Current Motors Table 430.12(C)(2) Usable Volumes — Fixed Terminals Maximum Terminal Full Load Box Cover Typical Minimum Usable Volume Current Opening Maximum Power-Supply per Power-Supply Conductor for 3-Phase Minimum Usable Volume Horsepower Conductor Size Motors with Dimension Minimum 3-Phase (AWG) cm 3 in.3 Maximum of 12 Leads 230 460 14 16 1 (Amperes) mm in. cm3 in.3 Volt Volt 1 12 and 10 20 1 ⁄4 8 and 6 37 21⁄4

45 65 2.5 595 36.4 15 30 70 84 3.3 1,265 77 25 50 110 100 4.0 2,295 140 40 75 160 125 5.0 4,135 252 60 125 250 150 6.0 7,380 450 100 200 (C) Dimensions and Space — Fixed Terminal Connections. 400 175 7.0 13,775 840 150 300 Where these terminal housings enclose rigidly mounted motor 600 200 8.0 25,255 1540 250 500 terminals, the terminal housing shall be of sufficient size to pro- vide minimum terminal spacings and usable volumes in accor- Direct-Current Motors dance with Table 430.12(C)(1) and Table 430.12(C)(2). Terminal Box Maximum Full-Load (D) Large Wire or Factory Connections. For motors with Minimum Usable Volume Current for Motors Dimensions Minimum larger ratings, greater number of leads, or larger wire sizes, or with Maximum of where motors are installed as a part of factory-wired equipment, 6 Leads (Amperes) mm in. cm3 in.3 without additional connection being required at the motor termi- 68 65 2.5 425 26 nal housing during equipment installation, the terminal housing 105 84 3.3 900 55 shall be of ample size to make connections, but the foregoing pro- 165 100 4.0 1,640 100

visions for the volumes of terminal housings shall not be consid- 240 125 5.0 2,950 180 ered applicable. 375 150 6.0 5,410 330 600 175 7.0 9,840 600 (E) Equipment Grounding Connections. A means for 900 200 8.0 18,040 1,100 attachment of an equipment grounding conductor termination Note: Auxiliary leads for such items as brakes, thermostats, space heaters, and in accordance with 250.8 shall be provided at motor terminal exciting fields shall be permitted to be neglected if their current-carrying area housings for wire-to-wire connections or fixed terminal connec- does not exceed 25 percent of the current-carrying area of the machine power tions. The means for such connections shall be permitted to be leads. a located either inside or outside the motor terminal housing. For motors rated 1 hp and smaller, and with the terminal housing partially or wholly integral with the frame or end shield, the volume of the terminal 3 3 Exception: Where a motor is installed as a part of factory-wired housing shall not be less than 18.0 cm (1.1 in.) per wire-to-wire connection.

The minimum cover opening dimension is not specified. equipment that is required to be grounded and without additional b 1 For motors rated 1 ⁄2, 2, and 3 hp, and with the terminal housing partially connection being required at the motor terminal housing during or wholly integral with the frame or end shield, the volume of the terminal 3 3 equipment installation, a separate means for motor grounding at housing shall not be less than 23.0 cm (1.4 in.) per wire-to-wire connection. The minimum cover opening dimension is not specified. the motor terminal housing shall not be required. 430.13 Bushing. Where wires pass through an opening in an enclosure, conduit box, or barrier, a bushing shall be used to protect the conductors from the edges of openings having sharp edges. The bushing shall have smooth, well-rounded surfaces where it may be in contact with the conductors. If used where 2022 California Electrical Code 70–355

430.14 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS oils, greases, or other contaminants may be present, the bushing controllers, motor control centers, or other factory-assembled shall be made of material not deleteriously affected. control equipment. Informational Note: For conductors exposed to deterio- Informational Note: See 110.14(C) and 430.9(B) for rating agents, see 310.10(F). equipment device terminal requirements. 430.14 Location of Motors. 430.22 Single Motor. Conductors that supply a single motor used in a continuous duty application shall have an ampacity (A) Ventilation and Maintenance. Motors shall be located so of not less than 125 percent of the motor full-load current rat- that adequate ventilation is provided and so that maintenance, ing, as determined by 430.6(A)(1), or not less than specified in such as lubrication of bearings and replacing of brushes, can be 430.22(A) through (G). readily accomplished. (A) Direct-Current Motor-Rectifier Supplied. For dc motors Exception: Ventilation shall not be required for submersible

operating from a rectified power supply, the conductor ampac- types of motors. ity on the input of the rectifier shall not be less than 125 per- (B) Open Motors. Open motors that have commutators or col- cent of the rated input current to the rectifier. For dc motors lector rings shall be located or protected so that sparks cannot operating from a rectified single-phase power supply, the reach adjacent combustible material. conductors between the field wiring output terminals of the rectifier and the motor shall have an ampacity of not less Exception: Installation of these motors on wooden floors or sup- than the following percentages of the motor full-load current ports shall be permitted. rating: 430.16 Exposure to Dust Accumulations. In locations where (1) Where a rectifier bridge of the single-phase, half-wave type dust or flying material collects on or in motors in such quanti- is used, 190 percent. ties as to seriously interfere with the ventilation or cooling of (2) Where a rectifier bridge of the single-phase, full-wave type

motors and thereby cause dangerous temperatures, suitable types is used, 150 percent. of enclosed motors that do not overheat under the prevailing con- ditions shall be used. (B) Multispeed Motor. For a multispeed motor, the selection of branch-circuit conductors on the line side of the controller Informational Note: Especially severe conditions may shall be based on the highest of the full-load current ratings require the use of enclosed pipe-ventilated motors, or shown on the motor nameplate. The ampacity of the branch-cir- enclosure in separate dusttight rooms, properly ventilated cuit conductors between the controller and the motor shall not from a source of clean air. be less than 125 percent of the current rating of the winding(s) 430.17 Highest Rated or Smallest Rated Motor. In deter- that the conductors energize. mining compliance with 430.24, 430.53(B), and 430.53(C), the (C) Wye-Start, Delta-Run Motor. For a wye-start, delta-run highest rated or smallest rated motor shall be based on the rated connected motor, the ampacity of the branch-circuit conductors

full-load current as selected from Table 430.247, Table 430.248, on the line side of the controller shall not be less than 125 percent Table 430.249, and Table 430.250. of the motor full-load current as determined by 430.6(A)(1). 430.18 Nominal Voltage of Rectifier Systems. The nominal The ampacity of the conductors between the controller and the value of the ac voltage being rectified shall be used to determine motor shall not be less than 72 percent of the motor full-load the voltage of a rectifier derived system. current rating as determined by 430.6(A)(1). Exception: The nominal dc voltage of the rectifier shall be used Informational Note: The individual motor circuit con- if it exceeds the peak value of the ac voltage being rectified. ductors of a wye-start, delta-run connected motor carry 58 percent of the rated load current. The multiplier Part II. Motor Circuit Conductors of 72 percent is obtained by multiplying 58 percent by 1.25. ∆ 430.21 General. Part II specifies ampacities of conductors

that are capable of carrying the motor current without overheat- (D) Part-Winding Motor. For a part-winding connected ing under the conditions specified. motor, the ampacity of the branch-circuit conductors on the line side of the controller shall not be less than 125 percent Part II shall not apply to motor circuits rated over 1000 volts, of the motor full-load current as determined by 430.6(A)(1). nominal. The ampacity of the conductors between the controller and the Informational Note: For over 1000 volts, nominal, see motor shall not be less than 62.5 percent of the motor full-load Part XI. current rating as determined by 430.6(A)(1). Articles 250, 300, and 310 shall not apply to conductors Informational Note: The multiplier of 62.5 percent is that form an integral part of equipment, such as motors, motor obtained by multiplying 50 percent by 1.25. 70–356 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.23 Table 430.22(E) Duty-Cycle Service and less than or equal to 5 amperes, and all the following conditions are met: Nameplate Current Rating Percentages a. The circuit is protected in accordance with 430.52. 30- & 60- b. The circuit is provided with maximum Class 10 or 5-Minute 15-Minute Minute Class 10A overload protection in accordance with Classification Rated Rated Rated Continuous 430.32. of Service Motor Motor Motor Rated Motor c. Overcurrent protection is provided in accordance with 240.4(D)(1)(2). Short-time duty 110 120 150 — operating (2) The circuit supplies a motor with a full-load current rating, valves, raising as determined by 430.6(A)(1), of 3.5 amperes or less, and or lowering all the following conditions are met: rolls, etc. Intermittent duty 85 85 90 140 a. The circuit is protected in accordance with 430.52. freight and b. The circuit is provided with maximum Class 20 overload passenger protection in accordance with 430.32. elevators, tool heads, pumps, c.

Overcurrent protection is provided in accordance with drawbridges, 240.4(D)(1)(2). turntables, (2) 16 AWG Copper. 16 AWG individual copper conductors etc. (for arc welders, see installed in a cabinet or enclosure, copper conductors that are part 630.11) of a jacketed multiconductor cable assembly, or copper conduc- Periodic duty 85 90 95 140 tors in a flexible cord shall be permitted under either of the fol- rolls, ore- and lowing sets of conditions: coal-handling machines, etc. (1) The circuit supplies a motor with a full-load current rating, Varying duty 110 120 150 200 as determined by 430.6(A)(1), of greater than 5.5 amperes, and less than or equal to 8 amperes, and all the following Note: Any motor application shall be considered as continuous duty unless conditions are met: the nature of the apparatus it drives is such that the motor will not operate continuously with load under any condition of use. a. The circuit is protected in accordance with 430.52. b. The circuit is provided with maximum Class 10 or Class 10A overload protection in accordance with 430.32.

(E) Other Than Continuous Duty. Conductors for a motor c. Overcurrent protection is provided in accordance with used in a short-time, intermittent, periodic, or varying duty 240.4(D)(2)(2). application shall have an ampacity of not less than the per- (2) The circuit supplies a motor with a full-load current rating, centage of the motor nameplate current rating shown in Table as determined by 430.6(A)(1), of 5.5 amperes or less, and 430.22(E), unless the authority having jurisdiction grants spe- all the following conditions are met: cial permission for conductors of lower ampacity. a. The circuit is protected in accordance with 430.52. (F) Separate Terminal Enclosure. The conductors between b. The circuit is provided with maximum Class 20 overload a stationary motor rated 1 hp or less and the separate termi- protection in accordance with 430.32. nal enclosure permitted in 430.245(B) shall be permitted to be c. Overcurrent protection is provided in accordance with smaller than 14 AWG but not smaller than 18 AWG, provided 240.4(D)(2)(2). they have an ampacity as specified in 430.22.

430.23 Wound-Rotor Secondary. (G) Conductors for Small Motors. Conductors for small motors shall not be smaller than 14 AWG unless otherwise per- (A) Continuous Duty. For continuous duty, the conductors mitted in 430.22(G)(1) or (G)(2). connecting the secondary of a wound-rotor ac motor to its con- troller shall have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of the (1) 18 AWG Copper. 18 AWG individual copper conductors full-load secondary current of the motor. installed in a cabinet or enclosure, copper conductors that are part of a jacketed multiconductor cable assembly, or copper con- (B) Other Than Continuous Duty. For other than continu- ductors in a flexible cord shall be permitted, under either of the ous duty, these conductors shall have an ampacity, in percent following sets of conditions: of full-load secondary current, not less than that specified in Table 430.22(E). (1) The circuit supplies a motor with a full-load current rating, as determined by 430.6(A)(1), of greater than 3.5 amperes, (C) Resistor Separate from Controller. Where the second-

ary resistor is separate from the controller, the ampacity of the 2022 California Electrical Code 70–357

430.24 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS Table 430.23(C) Secondary Conductor ∆ 430.26 Feeder Demand Factor. Where reduced heating of the conductors results from motors operating on duty-cycle, Ampacity of Conductor intermittently, or from all motors not operating at one time, in Percent of Full-Load the authority having jurisdiction may grant permission for Resistor Duty Classification Secondary Current feeder conductors to have an ampacity less than specified in 430.24, provided the conductors have sufficient ampacity for Light starting duty 35 Heavy starting duty 45 the maximum load determined in accordance with the sizes Extra-heavy starting duty 55 and number of motors supplied and the character of their Light intermittent duty 65 loads and duties. Medium intermittent duty 75 Heavy intermittent duty 85 Informational Note: Demand factors determined in the Continuous duty 110 design of new facilities can often be validated against actual historical experience from similar installations. 430.27 Capacitors with Motors. Where capacitors are installed

conductors between controller and resistor shall not be less than in motor circuits, conductors shall comply with 460.8 and 460.9. that shown in Table 430.23(C). 430.28 Feeder Taps. Feeder tap conductors shall have an ampacity not less than that required by Part II, shall terminate in 430.24 Several Motors or a Motor(s) and Other Load(s). a branch-circuit protective device, and, in addition, shall meet Conductors supplying several motors, or a motor(s) and other one of the following requirements: load(s), shall have an ampacity not less than the sum of each of (1) Be enclosed either by an enclosed controller or by a race- the following: way, be not more than 3.0 m (10 ft) in length, and, for (1) 125 percent of the full-load current rating of the highest field installation, be protected by an overcurrent device on rated motor, as determined by 430.6(A) the line side of the tap conductor, the rating or setting of (2) Sum of the full-load current ratings of all the other motors which shall not exceed 1000 percent of the tap conductor in the group, as determined by 430.6(A) ampacity

(3) 100 percent of the noncontinuous non-motor load (2) Have an ampacity of at least one-third that of the feeder (4) 125 percent of the continuous non-motor load. conductors, be suitably protected from physical damage or enclosed in a raceway, and be not more than 7.5 m (25 ft) Informational Note: See Informative Annex D, Example in length No. D8. (3) Have an ampacity not less than the feeder conductors Exception No. 1: Where one or more of the motors of the group Exception: Feeder taps over 7.5 m (25 ft) long. In high-bay are used for short-time, intermittent, periodic, or varying duty, manufacturing buildings [over 11 m (35 ft) high at walls], the ampere rating of such motors to be used in the summation where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that shall be determined in accordance with 430.22(E). For the high- only qualified persons service the systems, conductors tapped est rated motor, the greater of either the ampere rating from to a feeder shall be permitted to be not over 7.5 m (25 ft) long 430.22(E) or the largest continuous duty motor full-load current

horizontally and not over 30.0 m (100 ft) in total length where multiplied by 1.25 shall be used in the summation. all of the following conditions are met: Exception No. 2:The ampacity of conductors supplying (1) The ampacity of the tap conductors is not less than one- motor-operated fixed electric space-heating equipment shall third that of the feeder conductors. comply with 424.4(B). (2) The tap conductors terminate with a single circuit breaker Exception No. 3: Where the circuitry is interlocked so as to pre- or a single set of fuses complying with (1) Part IV, where vent simultaneous operation of selected motors or other loads, the load-side conductors are a branch circuit, or (2) Part V, the conductor ampacity shall be permitted to be based on the where the load-side conductors are a feeder. summation of the currents of the motors and other loads to be (3) The tap conductors are suitably protected from physical operated simultaneously that results in the highest total current. damage and are installed in raceways. 430.25 Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment.

The (4) The tap conductors are continuous from end-to-end and ampacity of the conductors supplying multimotor and com- contain no splices. bination-load equipment shall not be less than the minimum (5) The tap conductors shall be 6 AWG copper or 4 AWG alu- circuit ampacity marked on the equipment in accordance with minum or larger. 430.7(D). Where the equipment is not factory-wired and the (6) The tap conductors shall not penetrate walls, floors, or individual nameplates are visible in accordance with 430.7(D)(2), ceilings. the conductor ampacity shall be determined in accordance with (7) The tap shall not be made less than 9.0 m (30 ft) from the 430.24. floor. 70–358 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.32 Table 430.29 Conductor Rating Factors for Power Resistors (1) Separate Overload Device. A separate overload device that is responsive to motor current. This device shall be Time in Seconds Ampacity selected to trip or shall be rated at no more than the following of Conductor percent of the motor nameplate full-load current rating: in Percent of On Off Full-Load Current Motors with a marked service factor 1.15 or greater 125% Motors with a marked temperature rise 40°C or less 125% 5 75 35 All other motors 115% 10 70 45 15 75 55 Modification of this value shall be permitted as provided in 15 45 65 430.32(C). For a multispeed motor, each winding connection 15 30 75 shall be considered separately. 15 15 85 Continuous Duty 110 Where a separate motor overload device is connected so that it does not carry the total current designated on the motor nameplate, such as for wye-delta starting, the proper percentage of nameplate current applying to the selection or setting of the 430.29 Constant Voltage Direct-Current Motors — Power

overload device shall be clearly designated on the equipment, or Resistors. Conductors connecting the motor controller to sep- the manufacturer’s selection table shall take this into account. arately mounted power accelerating and dynamic braking resis- tors in the armature circuit shall have an ampacity not less than Informational Note: Where power factor correction capac- the value calculated from Table 430.29 using motor full-load itors are installed on the load side of the motor overload current. If an armature shunt resistor is used, the power accel- device, see 460.9. erating resistor conductor ampacity shall be calculated using (2) Thermal Protector or Electronically Protected. A ther- the total of motor full-load current and armature shunt resistor mal protector integral with the motor shall be approved for use current. with the motor it protects on the basis that it will prevent dan- Armature shunt resistor conductors shall have an ampacity of gerous overheating of the motor due to overload and failure to

not less than that calculated from Table 430.29 using rated shunt start. An electronically protected motor shall be approved for resistor current as full-load current. use on the basis that it will prevent dangerous overheating due to the failure of the electronic control, overload, or failure to Part III. Motor and Branch-Circuit Overload Protection start the motor. The ultimate trip current of a thermally or elec- tronically protected motor shall not exceed the following per- ∆ 430.31 General. Part III specifies overload devices intended centage of motor full-load current given in Table 430.248, Table to protect motors, motor-control apparatus, and motor branch- 430.249, and Table 430.250: circuit conductors against excessive heating due to motor over- loads and failure to start. Motor full-load current 9 amperes or less 170% Motor full-load current from 9.1 to, and including, 156% Informational Note No. 1: See Informative Annex D, 20 amperes Example No. D8. Motor full-load current greater than 20 amperes 140% Informational Note No. 2: See the definition of Overload in Article 100.

If the motor current-interrupting device is separate from the motor and its control circuit is operated by a protective device These provisions shall not require overload protection where integral with the motor, it shall be arranged so that the opening a power loss would cause a hazard, such as in the case of fire of the control circuit will result in interruption of current to the pumps. motor. Informational Note: For protection of fire pump supply (3) Integral with Motor. A protective device integral with a conductors, see 695.7. motor that will protect the motor against damage due to failure Part III shall not apply to motor circuits rated over 1000 volts, to start shall be permitted if the motor is part of an approved nominal. assembly that does not normally subject the motor to overloads. Informational Note: For over 1000 volts, nominal, see (4) Larger Than 1500 Horsepower. For motors larger than Part XI. 1500 hp, a protective device having embedded temperature detectors that cause current to the motor to be interrupted when 430.32 Continuous-Duty Motors.

the motor attains a temperature rise greater than marked on the (A) More Than 1 Horsepower. Each motor used in a con- nameplate in an ambient temperature of 40°C. tinuous duty application and rated more than 1 hp shall be pro- (B) One Horsepower or Less, Automatically Started. Any tected against overload by one of the means in 430.32(A)(1) motor of 1 hp or less that is started automatically shall be pro- through (A)(4). tected against overload by one of the following means. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–359

430.33 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS (1) Separate Overload Device. By a separate overload Informational Note: A Class 20 overload relay will pro- device following the requirements of 430.32(A)(1). vide a longer motor acceleration time than a Class 10 or Class 10A overload relay. A Class 30 overload relay will For a multispeed motor, each winding connection shall be provide a longer motor acceleration time than a Class 20 considered separately. Modification of this value shall be per- overload relay. Use of a higher class overload relay may mitted as provided in 430.32(C). preclude the need for selection of a higher trip current. (2) Thermal Protector or Electronically Protected. A thermal (D) One Horsepower or Less, Nonautomatically Started. protector integral with the motor shall be approved for use with the motor that it protects on the basis that it will prevent danger- (1) Permanently Installed. Overload protection shall be in ous overheating of the motor due to overload and failure to start. accordance with 430.32(B).

An electronically protected motor shall be approved for use on the (2) Not Permanently Installed. basis that it will prevent dangerous overheating due to the failure (a) Within Sight from Controller. Overload protection shall of the electronic control, overload, or failure to start the motor. be permitted to be furnished by the branch-circuit short-circuit Where the motor current-interrupting device is separate from the and ground-fault protective device; such device, however, shall motor and its control circuit is operated by a protective device not be larger than that specified in Part IV of Article 430. integral with the motor, it shall be arranged so that the opening of the control circuit results in interruption of current to the motor. Exception: Any such motor shall be permitted on a nominal 120-volt branch circuit protected at not over 20 amperes. (3) Integral with Motor. A protective device integral with a motor that protects the motor against damage due to failure to (b) Not Within Sight from Controller. Overload protection

start shall be permitted (1) if the motor is part of an approved shall be in accordance with 430.32(B). assembly that does not subject the motor to overloads, or (2) if (E) Wound-Rotor Secondaries. The secondary circuits of the assembly is also equipped with other safety controls (such wound-rotor ac motors, including conductors, controllers, resis- as the safety combustion controls on a domestic oil burner) that tors, and so forth, shall be permitted to be protected against over- protect the motor against damage due to failure to start. Where load by the motor-overload device. the assembly has safety controls that protect the motor, it shall 430.33 Intermittent and Similar Duty. A motor used for be so indicated on the nameplate of the assembly where it will a condition of service that is inherently short-time, intermit- be visible after installation. tent, periodic, or varying duty, as illustrated by Table 430.22(E), (4) Impedance-Protected. If the impedance of the motor shall be permitted to be protected against overload by the

windings is sufficient to prevent overheating due to failure to branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device, start, the motor shall be permitted to be protected as specified in provided the protective device rating or setting does not exceed 430.32(D)(2)(a) for manually started motors if the motor is part that specified in Table 430.52. of an approved assembly in which the motor will limit itself so Any motor application shall be considered to be for continu- that it will not be dangerously overheated. ous duty unless the nature of the apparatus it drives is such that Informational Note: Many ac motors of less than 1⁄20 hp, the motor cannot operate continuously with load under any con- such as clock motors, series motors, and so forth, and also dition of use. some larger motors such as torque motors, come within this 430.35 Shunting During Starting Period. classification. It does not include split-phase motors having automatic switches that disconnect the starting windings. (A) Nonautomatically Started. For a nonautomatically started

motor, the overload protection shall be permitted to be shunted (C) Selection of Overload Device. Where the sensing ele- or cut out of the circuit during the starting period of the motor ment or setting or sizing of the overload device selected in if the device by which the overload protection is shunted or accordance with 430.32(A)(1) and 430.32(B)(1) is not suffi- cut out cannot be left in the starting position and if fuses or cient to start the motor or to carry the load, higher size sensing inverse time circuit breakers rated or set at not over 400 per- elements or incremental settings or sizing shall be permitted to cent of the full-load current of the motor are located in the be used, provided the trip current of the overload device does circuit so as to be operative during the starting period of the not exceed the following percentage of motor nameplate full- motor. load current rating: (B) Automatically Started. The motor overload protection Motors with marked service factor 1.15 or greater 140% shall not be shunted or cut out during the starting period if the

Motors with a marked temperature rise 40°C or less 140% motor is automatically started. All other motors 130% Exception: The motor overload protection shall be permitted to If not shunted during the starting period of the motor as pro- be shunted or cut out during the starting period on an automati- vided in 430.35, the overload device shall have sufficient time cally started motor where the following apply: delay to permit the motor to start and accelerate its load. 70–360 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.43 (1) The motor starting period exceeds the time delay of avail- 430.39 Motor Controller as Overload Protection. A motor able motor overload protective devices, and controller shall also be permitted to serve as an overload device (2) Listed means are provided to perform the following: if the number of overload units complies with Table 430.37 and if these units are operative in both the starting and running posi- a. Sense motor rotation and automatically prevent the tion in the case of a dc motor, and in the running position in the shunting or cutout in the event that the motor fails to case of an ac motor. start, and b. Limit the time of overload protection shunting or cut- 430.40 Overload Relays. Overload relays and other devices for out to less than the locked rotor time rating of the pro- motor overload protection that are not capable of opening short tected motor, and circuits or ground faults shall be protected by fuses or circuit c.

Provide for shutdown and manual restart if motor run- breakers with ratings or settings in accordance with 430.52 or ning condition is not reached. by a motor short-circuit protector in accordance with 430.52. 430.36 Fuses — In Which Conductor. Where fuses are used Exception: Where approved for group installation and marked for motor overload protection, a fuse shall be inserted in each to indicate the maximum size of fuse or inverse time circuit ungrounded conductor and also in the grounded conductor if the breaker by which they must be protected, the overload devices supply system is 3-wire, 3-phase ac with one conductor grounded. shall be protected in accordance with this marking. 430.37 Devices Other Than Fuses — In Which Conductor. 430.42 Motors on General-Purpose Branch Circuits. Over- Where devices other than fuses are used for motor overload pro- load protection for motors used on general-purpose branch cir- tection, Table 430.37 shall govern the minimum allowable num- cuits as permitted in Article 210 shall be provided as specified in

ber and location of overload units such as trip coils or relays. 430.42(A), (B), (C), or (D). 430.38 Number of Conductors Opened by Overload Device. (A) Not over 1 Horsepower. One or more motors without indi- Motor overload devices, other than fuses or thermal protectors, vidual overload protection shall be permitted to be connected shall simultaneously open a sufficient number of ungrounded to a general-purpose branch circuit only where the installation conductors to interrupt current flow to the motor. complies with the limiting conditions specified in 430.32(B) and 430.32(D) and 430.53(A)(1) and (A)(2). (B) Over 1 Horsepower. Motors of ratings larger than speci- Table 430.37 Overload Units fied in 430.53(A) shall be permitted to be connected to general- Number and Location purpose branch circuits only where each motor is protected by of Overload Units, overload protection selected to protect the motor as specified in Such as Trip Coils 430.32. Both the controller and the motor overload device shall be Kind of Motor Supply System or Relays

approved for group installation with the short-circuit and ground- fault protective device selected in accordance with 430.53. 1-phase ac or dc 2-wire, 1-phase ac or 1 in either conductor dc ungrounded (C) Cord-and Plug-Connected. Where a motor is connected 1-phase ac or dc 2-wire, 1-phase ac or 1 in ungrounded to a branch circuit by means of an attachment plug and a recep- dc, one conductor conductor tacle or a cord connector, and individual overload protection is grounded omitted as provided in 430.42(A), the rating of the attachment 1-phase ac or dc 3-wire, 1-phase ac or 1 in either ungrounded plug and receptacle or cord connector shall not exceed 1 amperes dc, grounded neutral conductor at 125 volts or 250 volts. Where individual overload protection is conductor required as provided in 430.42(B) for a motor or motor-operated 1-phase ac Any 3-phase 1 in ungrounded conductor appliance that is attached to the branch circuit through an attach- 2-phase ac 3-wire, 2-phase ac, 2, one in each phase ment plug and a receptacle or a cord connector, the overload

ungrounded device shall be an integral part of the motor or of the appliance. 2-phase ac 3-wire, 2-phase ac, 2 in ungrounded The rating of the attachment plug and receptacle or the cord con- one conductor conductors nector shall determine the rating of the circuit to which the motor grounded may be connected, as provided in 210.21(B). 2-phase ac 4-wire, 2-phase 2, one for each phase ac, grounded or in ungrounded (D) Time Delay. The branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- ungrounded conductors fault protective device protecting a circuit to which a motor or 2-phase ac Grounded neutral or 2, one for each phase in motor-operated appliance is connected shall have sufficient 5-wire, 2-phase ac, any ungrounded phase time delay to permit the motor to start and accelerate its load. ungrounded wire 3-phase ac Any 3-phase 3, one in each phase* 430.43 Automatic Restarting. A motor overload device that can restart a motor automatically after overload tripping *Exception: An overload unit in each phase shall not be required where shall not be installed unless approved for use with the motor

overload protection is provided by other approved means. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–361

430.44 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS it protects. A motor overload device that can restart a motor 430.52 Rating or Setting for Individual Motor Circuit. automatically after overload tripping shall not be installed (A) General. The motor branch-circuit short-circuit and if automatic restarting of the motor can result in injury to ground-fault protective device shall comply with 430.52(B) and persons. either 430.52(C) or (D), as applicable. ∆ 430.44 Orderly Shutdown. If immediate automatic shut- (B) All Motors. The motor branch-circuit short-circuit and down of a motor by a motor overload protective device(s) would ground-fault protective device shall be capable of carrying the introduce additional or increased hazard(s) to a person(s) and starting current of the motor. continued motor operation is necessary for safe shutdown of equipment or process, a motor overload sensing device(s) (C) Rating or Setting. complying with Part III of this article shall be permitted to be (1) In Accordance with Table 430.52. A protective device

connected to a supervised alarm instead of causing immediate that has a rating or setting not exceeding the value calculated interruption of the motor circuit, so that corrective action or an according to the values given in Table 430.52 shall be used. orderly shutdown can be initiated. Exception No. 1: Where the values for branch-circuit short- Part IV. Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground- circuit and ground-fault protective devices determined by Fault Protection Table 430.52 do not correspond to the standard sizes or ratings of fuses, nonadjustable circuit breakers, thermal protective devices, ∆ 430.51 General. Part IV specifies devices intended to protect or possible settings of adjustable circuit breakers, a higher size, the motor branch-circuit conductors, the motor control appa- rating, or possible setting that does not exceed the next higher ratus, and the motors against overcurrent due to short circuits standard ampere rating shall be permitted. or ground faults. These rules add to or amend Article 240. The

devices specified in Part IV do not include the types of devices Exception No. 2: Where the rating specified in Table 430.52, or required by 210.8, 230.95, and 590.6. the rating modified by Exception No. 1, is not sufficient for the starting current of the motor: Informational Note: See Informative Annex D, Example D8. (1) The rating of a nontime-delay fuse not exceeding 600 amperes or a time-delay Class CC fuse shall be permitted to be Part IV shall not apply to motor circuits rated over 1000 volts, increased but shall in no case exceed 400 percent of the full- nominal. load current. Informational Note: For over 1000 volts, nominal, see (2) The rating of a time-delay (dual-element) fuse shall be per- Part XI. mitted to be increased but shall in no case exceed 225 per- cent of the full-load current. Table 430.52 Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protective Devices Percentage of Full-Load Current Nontime Dual Element Instantaneous Inverse Delay (Time-Delay) Trip Time Type of Motor Fuse1 Fuse 1 Breaker Breaker2

Single-phase motors 300 175 800 250 AC polyphase motors other 300 175 800 250 than wound-rotor Squirrel cage — other than 300 175 800 250 Design B energy-efficient Design B energy-efficient 300 175 1100 250 Synchronous3 300 175 800 250 Wound-rotor 150 150 800 150 DC (constant voltage) 150 150 250 150 Note: For certain exceptions to the values specified, see 430.54. 1The values in the Nontime Delay Fuse column apply to time-delay Class CC fuses. 2The values given in the last column also cover the ratings of nonadjustable inverse time types of circuit breakers that may be modified as in 430.52(C)(1), Exceptions No. 1 and No. 2. 3Synchronous motors of the low-torque, low-speed type (usually 450 rpm or lower), such as are used to drive reciprocating compressors, pumps, and so forth, that start unloaded, do not require a fuse rating or circuit-breaker setting in excess of 200 percent of full-load current. 70–362 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.52 (3) The rating of an inverse time circuit breaker shall be permit- (4) Multispeed Motor. For a multispeed motor, a single short- ted to be increased but shall in no case exceed 400 percent circuit and ground-fault protective device shall be permitted for for full-load currents of 100 amperes or less or 300 percent for two or more windings of the motor, provided the rating of the full-load currents greater than 100 amperes. protective device does not exceed the above applicable percent- (4) The rating of a fuse of 601–6000 ampere classification shall age of the nameplate rating of the smallest winding protected. be permitted to be increased but shall in no case exceed Exception: For a multispeed motor, a single short-circuit and 300 percent of the full-load current. ground-fault protective device shall be permitted to be used and Informational Note: See Informative Annex D, Example sized according to the full-load current of the highest current D8, and Figure 430.1. winding, where all of the following conditions are met:

(2) Overload Relay Table. Where maximum branch-circuit (1) Each winding is equipped with individual overload protec- short-circuit and ground-fault protective device ratings are tion sized according to its full-load current. shown in the manufacturer’s overload relay table for use with (2) The branch-circuit conductors supplying each winding a motor controller or are otherwise marked on the equipment, are sized according to the full-load current of the highest they shall not be exceeded even if higher values are allowed as full-load current winding. shown above. (3) The controller for each winding has a horsepower rating not less than that required for the winding having the highest ∆ (3) Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breaker. An instantaneous horsepower rating. trip circuit breaker shall be used only if adjustable and if part of a listed combination motor controller having coordinated motor (5) Power Electronic Devices. Semiconductor fuses intended overload and short-circuit and ground-fault protection in each for the protection of electronic devices shall be permitted in lieu

conductor, and the setting is adjusted to no more than the value of devices listed in Table 430.52 for power electronic devices, specified in Table 430.52. associated electromechanical devices (such as bypass contac- tors and isolation contactors), and conductors in a solid-state Informational Note No. 1: Instantaneous trip circuit break- motor controller system, provided that the marking for replace- ers are also known as motor-circuit protectors (MCPs). ment fuses is provided adjacent to the fuses. Informational Note No. 2: For the purpose of this article, (6) Self-Protected Combination Controller. A listed self- instantaneous trip circuit breakers may include a damping protected combination controller shall be permitted in lieu of means to accommodate a transient motor inrush current the devices specified in Table 430.52. Adjustable instantaneous- without nuisance tripping of the circuit breaker. trip settings shall not exceed 1300 percent of full-load motor Exception No. 1: Where the setting specified in Table 430.52 current for other than Design B energy-efficient motors and not

is not sufficient for the starting current of the motor, the setting more than 1700 percent of full-load motor current for Design B of an instantaneous trip circuit breaker shall be permitted to be energy-efficient motors. increased but shall in no case exceed 1300 percent of the motor Informational Note: Proper application of self-protected full-load current for other than Design B energy-efficient combination controllers on 3-phase systems, other than motors and no more than 1700 percent of motor full-load cur- solidly grounded wye, particularly on corner grounded rent for Design B energy-efficient motors. Trip settings above delta systems, considers the self-protected combination 800 percent for other than Design B energy-efficient motors and controllers’ individual pole-interrupting capability. above 1100 percent for Design B energy-efficient motors shall be permitted where the need has been demonstrated by engi- (7) Motor Short-Circuit Protector. A motor short-circuit neering evaluation.

In such cases, it shall not be necessary to protector shall be permitted in lieu of devices listed in Table first apply an instantaneous-trip circuit breaker at 800 percent 430.52 if the motor short-circuit protector is part of a listed or 1100 percent. combination motor controller having coordinated motor over- load protection and short-circuit and ground-fault protection in Informational Note: For additional information on the each conductor and it will open the circuit at currents exceeding requirements for a motor to be classified “energy effi- 1300 percent of motor full-load current for other than Design B cient,” see NEMA MG 1-2016, Motors and Generators, energy-efficient motors and 1700 percent of motor full-load Part 12.59. motor current for Design B energy-efficient motors. Exception No. 2: Where the motor full-load current is 8 amperes Informational Note: A motor short-circuit protector, as or less, the setting of the instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with used in this section, is a fused device and is not an instan-

a continuous current rating of 15 amperes or less in a listed taneous trip circuit breaker. combination motor controller that provides coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit and ground-fault (D) Torque Motors. Torque motor branch circuits shall be protection shall be permitted to be increased to the value protected at the motor nameplate current rating in accordance marked on the controller. with 240.4(B). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–363

430.53 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.53 Several Motors or Loads on One Branch Circuit. protective device does not exceed that permitted by Two or more motors or one or more motors and other loads 430.52 for that individual controller and corresponding shall be permitted to be connected to the same branch circuit motor load. under conditions specified in 430.53(D) and in 430.53(A), (B), (3) Each circuit breaker is listed and is of the inverse time type. or (C). The branch-circuit protective device shall be fuses or (4) The branch circuit shall be protected by fuses or inverse time inverse time circuit breakers. circuit breakers having a rating not exceeding that specified in 430.52 for the highest rated motor connected to the (A) Not Over 1 Horsepower. Several motors, each not branch circuit plus an amount equal to the sum of the full- exceeding 1 hp in rating, shall be permitted on a nominal load current ratings of all other motors and the ratings of 120-volt branch circuit protected at not over 20 amperes or a other loads connected to the circuit.

Where this calculation branch circuit of 1000 volts, nominal, or less, protected at not results in a rating less than the ampacity of the branch- over 15 amperes, if all of the following conditions are met: circuit conductors, it shall be permitted to increase the (1) The full-load rating of each motor does not exceed maximum rating of the fuses or circuit breaker to a value 6 amperes. not exceeding that permitted by 240.4(B). (2) The rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- (5) The branch-circuit fuses or inverse time circuit breakers fault protective device marked on any of the controllers is are not larger than allowed by 430.40 for the overload relay not exceeded. protecting the smallest rated motor of the group. (3) Individual overload protection conforms to 430.32. (6) Overcurrent protection for loads other than motor loads shall (B) If Smallest Rated Motor Protected. If the branch- be in accordance with Parts I through VII of Article 240. circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device is Informational Note: See 110.10 for circuit impedance

selected not to exceed that allowed by 430.52 for the small- and other characteristics. est rated motor, two or more motors or one or more motors (D) Single Motor Taps. For group installations described above, and other load(s), with each motor having individual overload the conductors of any tap supplying a single motor shall not be protection, shall be permitted to be connected to a branch cir- required to have an individual branch-circuit short-circuit and cuit where it can be determined that the branch-circuit short- ground-fault protective device, provided they comply with one circuit and ground-fault protective device will not open under of the following: the most severe normal conditions of service that might be encountered. (1) No conductor to the motor shall have an ampacity less than that of the branch-circuit conductors. (C) Other Group Installations. Two or more motors of (2) No conductor to the motor shall have an ampacity less any rating or one or more motors and other load(s), with each than one-third that of the branch-circuit conductors, with a

motor having individual overload protection, shall be permit- minimum in accordance with 430.22. The conductors from ted to be connected to one branch circuit where the motor the point of the tap to the motor overload device shall be controller(s) and overload device(s) are (1) installed as a listed not more than 7.5 m (25 ft) long and be protected from factory assembly and the motor branch-circuit short-circuit physical damage by being enclosed in an approved race- and ground-fault protective device either is provided as part of way or by use of other approved means. the assembly or is specified by a marking on the assembly, or (3) Conductors from the point of the tap from the branch cir- (2) the motor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault pro- cuit to a listed manual motor controller additionally marked tective device, the motor controller(s), and overload device(s) “Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installa- are field-installed as separate assemblies listed for such use tions,” or to a branch-circuit protective device, shall be per-

and provided with manufacturers’ instructions for use with mitted to have an ampacity not less than one-tenth the rating each other, and (3) all of the following conditions are complied or setting of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault with: protective device. The conductors from the controller to the (1) Each motor overload device is either (a) listed for group motor shall have an ampacity in accordance with 430.22. The installation with a specified maximum rating of fuse, conductors from the point of the tap to the controller(s) shall inverse time circuit breaker, or both, or (b) selected such (1) be suitably protected from physical damage and enclosed that the ampere rating of the motor-branch short-circuit and either by an enclosed controller or by a raceway and be not ground-fault protective device does not exceed that permit- more than 3 m (10 ft) long or (2) have an ampacity not less ted by 430.52 for that individual motor overload device and than that of the branch-circuit conductors. corresponding motor load.

(4) Conductors from the point of the tap from the branch cir- (2) Each motor controller is either (a) listed for group instal- cuit to a listed manual motor controller additionally marked lation with a specified maximum rating of fuse, circuit “Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Instal- breaker, or both, or (b) selected such that the ampere rat- lations,” or to a branch-circuit protective device, shall be ing of the motor-branch short-circuit and ground-fault permitted to have an ampacity not less than one-third that 70–364 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.72 of the branch-circuit conductors. The conductors from the Where the same rating or setting of the branch-circuit short- controller to the motor shall have an ampacity in accor- circuit and ground-fault protective device is used on two or dance with 430.22. The conductors from the point of the more of the branch circuits supplied by the feeder, one of the tap to the controller(s) shall (1) be suitably protected from protective devices shall be considered the largest for the above physical damage and enclosed either by an enclosed con- calculations. troller or by a raceway and be not more than 7.5 m (25 ft) Exception No. 1: Where one or more instantaneous trip cir- long or (2) have an ampacity not less than that of the cuit breakers or motor short-circuit protectors are used for branch-circuit conductors. motor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection 430.54 Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment. as permitted in 430.52(C), the procedure provided above for

The rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault determining the maximum rating of the feeder protective device protective device for multimotor and combination-load equip- shall apply with the following provision: For the purpose of the ment shall not exceed the rating marked on the equipment in calculation, each instantaneous trip circuit breaker or motor accordance with 430.7(D). short-circuit protector shall be assumed to have a rating not exceeding the maximum percentage of motor full-load cur- 430.55 Combined Overcurrent Protection. Motor branch- rent permitted by Table 430.52 for the type of feeder protective circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection and motor device employed. overload protection shall be permitted to be combined in a sin- gle protective device where the rating or setting of the device Exception No. 2:Where the feeder overcurrent protective provides the overload protection specified in 430.32. device also provides overcurrent protection for a motor control center, the provisions of 430.94 shall apply.

∆ 430.56 Branch-Circuit Protective Devices — In Which Con- ductor. Branch-circuit protective devices shall comply with Informational Note: See Informative Annex D, 240.15. Example D8. 430.57 Size of Fuseholder. Where fuses are used for motor (B) Other Installations. Where feeder conductors have an branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection, the fuse- ampacity greater than required by 430.24, the rating or setting of holders shall not be of a smaller size than required to accommo- the feeder overcurrent protective device shall be permitted to be date the fuses specified by Table 430.52. based on the ampacity of the feeder conductors. Exception: Where fuses having time delay appropriate for the 430.63 Rating or Setting — Motor Load and Other Load(s). starting characteristics of the motor are used, it shall be permit- Where a feeder supplies a motor load and other load(s), the ted to use fuseholders sized to fit the fuses that are used. feeder protective device shall have a rating not less than that required for the sum of the other load(s) plus the following:

430.58 Rating of Circuit Breaker. A circuit breaker for motor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection shall (1) For a single motor, the rating permitted by 430.52 have a current rating in accordance with 430.52 and 430.110. (2) For a single hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor, the rating permitted by 440.22 Part V. Motor Feeder Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault (3) For two or more motors, the rating permitted by 430.62 Protection Exception: Where the feeder overcurrent device provides the 430.61 General. Part V specifies protective devices intended overcurrent protection for a motor control center, the provisions to protect feeder conductors supplying motors against overcur- of 430.94 shall apply. rents due to short circuits or grounds. Part VI. Motor Control Circuits Informational Note: See Informative Annex D, ExampleD8. 430.71 General. Part VI contains modifications of the general requirements and applies to the particular conditions of motor 430.62 Rating or Setting — Motor Load. control circuits. (A) Specific Load. A feeder supplying a specific fixed motor

430.72 Overcurrent Protection. load(s) and consisting of conductor sizes based on 430.24 shall be provided with a protective device having a rating or setting (A) General. A motor control circuit tapped from the load side not greater than the largest rating or setting of the branch- of a motor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protec- circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device for any tive device(s) and functioning to control the motor(s) connected motor supplied by the feeder [based on the maximum permitted to that branch circuit shall be protected against overcurrent in value for the specific type of a protective device in accordance accordance with 430.72. Such a tapped control circuit shall not with 430.52, or 440.22(A) for hermetic refrigerant motor- be considered to be a branch circuit and shall be permitted to compressors], plus the sum of the full-load currents of the other be protected by either a supplementary or branch-circuit over- motors of the group. current protective device(s). A motor control circuit other than

2022 California Electrical Code 70–365

430.72 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS ∆ Table 430.72(B) Maximum Rating of Overcurrent Protective Device in Amperes Protection Provided by Motor Branch-Circuit Protective Device(s) Column A Column B Column C Separate Protection Conductors Within Conductors Extend Beyond Provided Enclosure Enclosure Control Circuit Aluminum or Aluminum or Aluminum or Conductor Size Copper-Clad Copper-Clad Copper-Clad (AWG) Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum 18 7 — 25 — 7 — 16 10 — 40 — 10 — 14 (Note 1) — 100 — 45 — 12 (Note 1) (Note 1) 120 100 60 45 10 (Note 1) (Note 1) 160 140 90 75 Larger than 10 (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3) Notes: 1. Value specified in 310.15 as applicable. 2. 400 percent of value specified in Table 310.17 for 60°C conductors. 3. 300 percent of value specified in Table 310.16 for 60°C conductors. such a tapped control circuit shall be protected against overcur- short-circuit and ground-fault protective device and shall require

rent in accordance with 725.43 or the notes to Table 11(A) and only short-circuit and ground-fault protection. Where the con- Table 11(B) in Chapter 9, as applicable. ductors do not extend beyond the motor control equipment enclosure, the rating of the protective device(s) shall not exceed (B) Conductor Protection. The overcurrent protection for con- the value specified in Column B of Table 430.72(B). Where the ductors shall be provided as specified in 430.72(B)(1) or (B)(2). conductors extend beyond the motor control equipment enclo- Exception No. 1:Where the opening of the control circuit sure, the rating of the protective device(s) shall not exceed the would create a hazard as, for example, the control circuit of value specified in Column C of Table 430.72(B). a fire pump motor, and the like, conductors of control circuits (C) Control Circuit Transformer. Where a motor control shall require only short-circuit and ground-fault protection and circuit transformer is provided, the transformer shall be pro- shall be permitted to be protected by the motor branch-circuit

tected in accordance with 430.72(C)(1), (C)(2), (C)(3), (C)(4), short-circuit and ground-fault protective device(s). or (C)(5). Exception No. 2: Conductors supplied by the secondary side of a Exception: Overcurrent protection shall be omitted where the single-phase transformer having only a two-wire (single-voltage) opening of the control circuit would create a hazard as, for exam- secondary shall be permitted to be protected by overcurrent pro- ple, the control circuit of a fire pump motor and the like. tection provided on the primary (supply) side of the transformer, provided this protection does not exceed the value determined (1) Compliance with Article 725. Where the transformer sup- by multiplying the appropriate maximum rating of the overcur- plies a Class 1 power-limited circuit, Class 2, or Class 3 remote- rent device for the secondary conductor from Table 430.72(B) by control circuit complying with the requirements of Article 725, the secondary-to-primary voltage ratio. Transformer secondary protection shall comply with Article 725.

conductors (other than two-wire) shall not be considered to be (2) Compliance with Article 450. Protection shall be permit- protected by the primary overcurrent protection. ted to be provided in accordance with 450.3. (1) Separate Overcurrent Protection. Where the motor (3) Less Than 50 Volt-Amperes. Control circuit transformers branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device rated less than 50 volt-amperes (VA) and that are an integral does not provide protection in accordance with 430.72(B)(2), part of the motor controller and located within the motor con- separate overcurrent protection shall be provided. The overcur- troller enclosure shall be permitted to be protected by primary rent protection shall not exceed the values specified in Col- overcurrent devices, impedance limiting means, or other inher- umn A of Table 430.72(B). ent protective means. (2) Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Protective Device. Conduc- (4) Primary Less Than 2 Amperes. Where the control cir- tors shall be permitted to be protected by the motor branch-circuit

cuit transformer rated primary current is less than 2 amperes, 70–366 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.83 an overcurrent device rated or set at not more than 500 percent (B) Control Transformer in Controller Enclosure. Where of the rated primary current shall be permitted in the primary a transformer or other device is used to obtain a reduced volt- circuit. age for the motor control circuit and is located in the controller enclosure, such transformer or other device shall be connected (5) Other Means. Protection shall be permitted to be pro- to the load side of the disconnecting means for the motor control vided by other approved means. circuit. 430.73 Protection of Conductors from Physical Damage. Where damage to a motor control circuit would constitute a Part VII. Motor Controllers hazard, all conductors of such a remote motor control circuit 430.81 General. Part VII is intended to require suitable con- that are outside the control device itself shall be installed in trollers for all motors. a raceway or be otherwise protected from physical damage. 1 (A) Stationary Motor of ⁄8 Horsepower or Less. For a sta-

430.74 Electrical Arrangement of Control Circuits. Where 1 tionary motor rated at ⁄8 hp or less that is normally left running one conductor of the motor control circuit is grounded, the and is constructed so that it cannot be damaged by overload or motor control circuit shall be arranged so that a ground fault failure to start, such as clock motors and the like, the branch- in the control circuit remote from the motor controller will circuit disconnecting means shall be permitted to serve as the (1) not start the motor and (2) not bypass manually operated controller. shutdown devices or automatic safety shutdown devices. 1 (B) Portable Motor of ⁄3 Horsepower or Less. For a por- 430.75 Disconnection. 1 table motor rated at ⁄3 hp or less, the controller shall be permitted (A) General. Motor control circuits shall be arranged so that to be an attachment plug and receptacle or cord connector. they will be disconnected from all sources of supply when the 430.82 Controller Design. disconnecting means is in the open position. The disconnect-

ing means shall be permitted to consist of two or more separate (A) Starting and Stopping. Each controller shall be capable devices, one of which disconnects the motor and the controller of starting and stopping the motor it controls and shall be capa- from the source(s) of power supply for the motor, and the other(s), ble of interrupting the locked-rotor current of the motor. the motor control circuit(s) from its power supply. Where sepa- (B) Autotransformer. An autotransformer starter shall pro- rate devices are used, they shall be located immediately adjacent vide an “off” position, a running position, and at least one start- to each other. ing position. It shall be designed so that it cannot rest in the Exception No. 1: Where more than 12 motor control circuit starting position or in any position that will render the overload conductors are required to be disconnected, the disconnecting device in the circuit inoperative. means shall be permitted to be located other than immediately (C) Rheostats. Rheostats shall be in compliance with the

adjacent to each other where all of the following conditions are following: complied with: (1) Motor-starting rheostats shall be designed so that the con- (1) Access to energized parts is limited to qualified persons in tact arm cannot be left on intermediate segments. The point accordance with Part XII of this article. or plate on which the arm rests when in the starting posi- (2) A warning sign is permanently located on the outside of tion shall have no electrical connection with the resistor. each equipment enclosure door or cover permitting access (2) Motor-starting rheostats for dc motors operated from a to the live parts in the motor control circuit(s), warning that constant voltage supply shall be equipped with automatic motor control circuit disconnecting means are remotely devices that will interrupt the supply before the speed of located and specifying the location and identification of the motor has fallen to less than one-third its normal rate. each disconnect. Where energized parts are not in an equip- 430.83 Ratings. The controller shall have a rating as specified

ment enclosure as permitted by 430.232 and 430.233, an in 430.83(A), unless otherwise permitted in 430.83(B) or (C), or additional warning sign(s) shall be located where visible to as specified in (D), under the conditions specified. persons who may be working in the area of the energized parts. (A) General. Exception No. 2: The motor control circuit disconnecting means (1) Horsepower Ratings. Controllers, other than inverse time shall be permitted to be remote from the motor controller power circuit breakers and molded case switches, shall have horse- supply disconnecting means where the opening of one or more power ratings at the application voltage not lower than the motor control circuit disconnecting means is capable of resulting horsepower rating of the motor. in potentially unsafe conditions for personnel or property and the (2) Circuit Breaker. A branch-circuit inverse time circuit conditions of items (1) and (2) of Exception No. 1 are complied breaker rated in amperes shall be permitted as a controller for with. all motors.

Where this circuit breaker is also used for overload 2022 California Electrical Code 70–367

430.84 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS protection, it shall conform to the appropriate provisions of this (1) Where a number of motors drive several parts of a single article governing overload protection. machine or piece of apparatus, such as metal and wood- working machines, cranes, hoists, and similar apparatus (3) Molded Case Switch. A molded case switch rated in (2) Where a group of motors is under the protection of one amperes shall be permitted as a controller for all motors. overcurrent device as permitted in 430.53(A) (B) Small Motors. Devices as specified in 430.81(A) and (B) (3) Where a group of motors is located in a single room within shall be permitted as a controller. sight from the controller location (C) Stationary Motors of 2 Horsepower or Less. For sta- Exception No. 2: A branch-circuit disconnecting means serv- tionary motors rated at 2 hp or less and 300 volts or less, the ing as the controller as allowed in 430.81(A) shall be permitted controller shall be permitted to be either of the following: to serve more than one motor.

(1) A general-use switch having an ampere rating not less than 430.88 Adjustable-Speed Motors. Adjustable-speed motors twice the full-load current rating of the motor that are controlled by means of field regulation shall be equipped (2) On ac circuits, a general-use snap switch suitable only for and connected so that they cannot be started under a weakened use on ac (not general-use ac–dc snap switches) where the field. motor full-load current rating is not more than 80 percent Exception: Starting under a weakened field shall be permitted of the ampere rating of the switch where the motor is designed for such starting. (D) Torque Motors. For torque motors, the controller shall 430.89 Speed Limitation. Machines of the following types have a continuous-duty, full-load current rating not less than shall be provided with speed-limiting devices or other speed- the nameplate current rating of the motor. For a motor control- limiting means: ler rated in horsepower but not marked with the foregoing current

rating, the equivalent current rating shall be determined from (1) Separately excited dc motors the horsepower rating by using Table 430.247, Table 430.248, (2) Series motors Table 430.249, or Table 430.250. (3) Motor-generators and converters that can be driven at excessive speed from the dc end, as by a reversal of current (E) Voltage Rating. A controller with a straight voltage rat- or decrease in load ing, for example, 240 volts or 480 volts, shall be permitted to be applied in a circuit in which the nominal voltage between any Exception: Separate speed-limiting devices or means shall not two conductors does not exceed the controller’s voltage rating. be required under either of the following conditions: A controller with a slash rating, for example, 120/240 volts or (1) Where the inherent characteristics of the machines, the sys- 480Y/277 volts, shall only be applied in a solidly grounded cir- tem, or the load and the mechanical connection thereto are cuit in which the nominal voltage to ground from any conductor such as to safely limit the speed

does not exceed the lower of the two values of the controller’s (2) Where the machine is always under the manual control of voltage rating and the nominal voltage between any two conduc- a qualified operator tors does not exceed the higher value of the controller’s voltage rating. 430.90 Combination Fuseholder and Switch as Controller. The rating of a combination fuseholder and switch used as a 430.84 Need Not Open All Conductors. The controller shall motor controller shall be such that the fuseholder will accom- not be required to open all conductors to the motor. modate the size of the fuse specified in Part III of this article for Exception: Where the controller serves also as a disconnecting motor overload protection. means, it shall open all ungrounded conductors to the motor as Exception: Where fuses having time delay appropriate for provided in 430.111. the starting characteristics of the motor are used, fuseholders 430.85 In Grounded Conductors. One pole of the controller of smaller size than specified in Part III of this article shall be

shall be permitted to be placed in a permanently grounded con- permitted. ductor, provided the controller is designed so that the pole in the grounded conductor cannot be opened without simultaneously Part VIII. Motor Control Centers opening all conductors of the circuit. 430.92 General. Part VIII covers motor control centers installed 430.87 Number of Motors Served by Each Controller. Each for the control of motors, lighting, and power circuits. motor shall be provided with an individual controller. 430.94 Overcurrent Protection. Motor control centers shall Exception No. 1: For motors rated 1000 volts or less, a single be provided with overcurrent protection in accordance with controller rated at not less than the equivalent horsepower, as Parts I, II, and VIII of Article 240. The ampere rating or setting determined in accordance with 430.110(C)(1), of all the motors of the overcurrent protective device shall not exceed the rating of in the group shall be permitted to serve the group under any of the common power bus. This protection shall be provided by

the following conditions: (1) an overcurrent protective device located ahead of the motor 70–368 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.102 Table 430.97(D) Minimum Spacing Between Bare Metal Parts Opposite Polarity Where Opposite Polarity Where Mounted on the Same Surface Held Free in Air Live Parts to Ground Nominal Voltage mm in. mm in. mm in. Not over 125 volts, nominal 19.1 3⁄4 12.7 1⁄2 12.7 1⁄2 Not over 250 volts, nominal 31.8 1 1⁄4 19.1 3⁄4 12.7 1⁄2 Not over 600 volts, nominal 50.8 2 25.4 1 25.4 1 control center or (2) a main overcurrent protective device located (C) Minimum Wire-Bending Space. The minimum wire- within the motor control center. bending space at the motor control center terminals and mini- mum gutter space shall be as required in Article 312. 430.95 Service Equipment. Where used as service equip- ment, each motor control center shall be provided with a single (D) Spacings. Spacings between motor control center bus ter- main disconnecting means to disconnect all ungrounded service minals and other bare metal parts shall not be less than specified conductors. in Table 430.97(D).

Exception: A second service disconnect shall be permitted to (E) Barriers. Barriers shall be placed in all service-entrance supply additional equipment. motor control centers to isolate service busbars and terminals from the remainder of the motor control center. Where a grounded conductor is provided, the motor control center shall be provided with a main bonding jumper, sized 430.98 Marking. in accordance with 250.28(D), within one of the sections for (A) Motor Control Centers. Motor control centers shall be connecting the grounded conductor, on its supply side, to the marked according to 110.21, and the marking shall be plainly motor control center equipment ground bus. visible after installation. Marking shall also include common Exception: High-impedance grounded neutral systems shall be power bus current rating and motor control center short-circuit permitted to be connected as provided in 250.36. current rating. 430.96 Grounding. Multisection motor control centers shall (B) Motor Control Units. Motor control units in a motor con-

be connected together with an equipment grounding conductor trol center shall comply with 430.8. or an equivalent equipment grounding bus sized in accordance 430.99 Available Fault Current. The available fault current at with Table 250.122. Equipment grounding conductors shall be the motor control center and the date the available fault cur- connected to this equipment grounding bus or to a grounding ter- rent calculation was performed shall be documented and made mination point provided in a single-section motor control center. available to those authorized to inspect, install, or maintain the 430.97 Busbars and Conductors. installation. (A) Support and Arrangement. Busbars shall be protected Part IX. Disconnecting Means from physical damage and be held firmly in place. Other than for required interconnections and control wiring, only those con- 430.101 General. Part IX is intended to require disconnecting ductors that are intended for termination in a vertical section means capable of disconnecting motors and controllers from the shall be located in that section. circuit.

Exception: Conductors shall be permitted to travel horizon- 430.102 Location. tally through vertical sections where such conductors are iso- (A) Controller. An individual disconnecting means shall be lated from the busbars by a barrier. provided for each controller and shall disconnect the controller. (B) Phase Arrangement. The phase arrangement on 3-phase The disconnecting means shall be located in sight from the horizontal common power and vertical buses shall be A, B, C controller location. from front to back, top to bottom, or left to right, as viewed from Exception No. 1: For motor circuits over 1000 volts, nominal, the front of the motor control center. The B phase shall be that a controller disconnecting means lockable in accordance with phase having the higher voltage to ground on 3-phase, 4-wire, 110.25 shall be permitted to be out of sight of the controller, delta-connected systems. Other busbar arrangements shall be per- provided that the controller is marked with a warning label giv- mitted for additions to existing installations and shall be marked.

ing the location of the disconnecting means. Exception: Rear-mounted units connected to a vertical bus that Exception No. 2: A single disconnecting means shall be permit- is common to front-mounted units shall be permitted to have a ted for a group of coordinated controllers that drive several parts C, B, A phase arrangement where properly identified. of a single machine or piece of apparatus. The disconnecting 2022 California Electrical Code 70–369

430.103 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS means shall be located in sight from the controllers, and both the 430.104 To Be Indicating. The disconnecting means shall disconnecting means and the controllers shall be located in sight plainly indicate whether it is in the open (off) or closed (on) from the machine or apparatus. position. Exception No. 3: The disconnecting means shall not be required 430.105 Grounded Conductors. One pole of the discon- to be in sight from valve actuator motor (VAM) assemblies con- necting means shall be permitted to disconnect a permanently taining the controller where such a location introduces additional grounded conductor, provided the disconnecting means is or increased hazards to persons or property and conditions (1) and designed so that the pole in the grounded conductor cannot be (2) are met. opened without simultaneously disconnecting all conductors of the circuit. (1) The valve actuator motor assembly is marked with a warn- ing label giving the location of the disconnecting means. 430.107 Readily Accessible.

At least one of the disconnecting (2) The disconnecting means is lockable in accordance with means shall be readily accessible. 110.25. 430.108 Every Disconnecting Means. Every disconnecting ∆ (B) Motor. A disconnecting means shall be provided for a means in the motor circuit between the point of attachment motor in accordance with 430.102(B)(1) or (B)(2). to the feeder or branch circuit and the point of connection to the motor shall comply with the requirements of 430.109 and (1) Separate Motor Disconnect. A disconnecting means for 430.110. the motor shall be located in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location. 430.109 Type. The disconnecting means shall be a type spec- ified in 430.109(A), unless otherwise permitted in 430.109(B) ∆ (2) Controller Disconnect. The controller disconnecting through (G), under the conditions specified. means required in accordance with 430.102(A) shall be per- mitted to serve as the disconnecting means for the motor if it (A) General. is in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery (1) Motor Circuit Switch.

A listed motor-circuit switch location. rated in horsepower. Exception to (1) and (2): The disconnecting means for the (2) Molded Case Circuit Breaker. A listed molded case cir- motor shall not be required under either condition (1) or con- cuit breaker. dition (2), which follow, provided that the controller discon- necting means required in 430.102(A) is lockable in accordance (3) Molded Case Switch. A listed molded case switch. with 110.25. (4) Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breaker. An instantaneous (1) Where such a location of the disconnecting means for the trip circuit breaker that is part of a listed combination motor motor is impracticable or introduces additional or increased controller. hazards to persons or property (5) Self-Protected Combination Controller. Listed self- protected combination controller. Informational Note: Some examples of increased or addi- tional hazards include, but are not limited to, motors rated (6) Manual Motor Controller. Listed manual motor con-

in excess of 100 hp, multimotor equipment, submersible trollers additionally marked “Suitable as Motor Disconnect” motors, motors associated with adjustable speed drives, shall be permitted as a disconnecting means where installed and motors located in hazardous (classified) locations. between the final motor branch-circuit short-circuit protec- tive device and the motor. Listed manual motor controllers (2) In industrial installations, with written safety procedures, additionally marked “Suitable as Motor Disconnect” shall be where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure permitted as disconnecting means on the line side of the fuses that only qualified persons service the equipment permitted in 430.52(C)(5). In this case, the fuses permitted Informational Note: For information on lockout/tagout in 430.52(C)(5) shall be considered supplementary fuses, and procedures, see NFPA 70E-2015, Standard for Electrical suitable branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protec- Safety in the Workplace. tive devices shall be installed on the line side of the manual 430.103 Operation.

The disconnecting means shall open all motor controller additionally marked “Suitable as Motor ungrounded supply conductors and shall be designed so that no Disconnect.” pole can be operated independently. The disconnecting means (7) System Isolation Equipment. System isolation equip- shall be permitted in the same enclosure with the controller. ment shall be listed for disconnection purposes. System isolation The disconnecting means shall be designed so that it cannot be equipment shall be installed on the load side of the overcurrent closed automatically. protection and its disconnecting means. The disconnecting means shall be one of the types permitted by 430.109(A)(1) Informational Note: See 430.113 for equipment receiv- through (A)(3). ing energy from more than one source. 70–370 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.110 1 (B) Stationary Motors of ⁄8 Horsepower or Less. For sta- not less than 115 percent of the full-load current rating of the 1 tionary motors of ⁄8 hp or less, the branch-circuit overcurrent motor. device shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means. Exception: A listed unfused motor-circuit switch having a (C) Stationary Motors of 2 Horsepower or Less. For sta- horsepower rating not less than the motor horsepower shall be tionary motors rated at 2 hp or less and 300 volts or less, the permitted to have an ampere rating less than 115 percent of the disconnecting means shall be permitted to be one of the devices full-load current rating of the motor. specified in (1), (2), or (3): (B) For Torque Motors. Disconnecting means for a torque (1) A general-use switch having an ampere rating not less than motor shall have an ampere rating of at least 115 percent of the twice the full-load current rating of the motor motor nameplate current. (2) On ac circuits, a general-use snap switch suitable only for

(C) For Combination Loads. Where two or more motors are use on ac (not general-use ac–dc snap switches) where the used together or where one or more motors are used in combina- motor full-load current rating is not more than 80 percent tion with other loads, such as resistance heaters, and where the of the ampere rating of the switch combined load may be simultaneous on a single disconnecting (3) A listed manual motor controller having a horsepower rat- means, the ampere and horsepower ratings of the combined load ing not less than the rating of the motor and marked “Suit- shall be determined as follows. able as Motor Disconnect” (1) Horsepower Rating. The rating of the disconnecting (D) Autotransformer-Type Controlled Motors. For motors means shall be determined from the sum of all currents, includ- of over 2 hp to and including 100 hp, the separate disconnecting ing resistance loads, at the full-load condition and also at the means required for a motor with an autotransformer-type control- locked-rotor condition. The combined full-load current and

ler shall be permitted to be a general-use switch where all of the the combined locked-rotor current so obtained shall be con- following provisions are met: sidered as a single motor for the purpose of this requirement (1) The motor drives a generator that is provided with overload as follows. protection. The full-load current equivalent to the horsepower rating (2) The controller is capable of interrupting the locked- of each motor shall be selected from Table 430.247, Table rotor current of the motors, is provided with a no voltage 430.248, Table 430.249, or Table 430.250. These full-load cur- release, and is provided with running overload protection rents shall be added to the rating in amperes of other loads to not exceeding 125 percent of the motor full-load current obtain an equivalent full-load current for the combined load. rating. (3) Separate fuses or an inverse time circuit breaker rated or set The locked-rotor current equivalent to the horsepower rat- at not more than 150 percent of the motor full-load current ing of each motor shall be selected from Table 430.251(A) or

is provided in the motor branch circuit. Table 430.251(B). The locked-rotor currents shall be added to the rating in amperes of other loads to obtain an equivalent (E) Isolating Switches. For stationary motors rated at more locked-rotor current for the combined load. Where two or than 40 hp dc or 100 hp ac, the disconnecting means shall be more motors or other loads cannot be started simultaneously, permitted to be a general-use or isolating switch where plainly the largest sum of locked-rotor currents of a motor or group marked “Do not operate under load.” of motors that can be started simultaneously and the full-load (F) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Motors. For a cord-and- currents of other concurrent loads shall be permitted to be plug- connected motor, a horsepower-rated attachment plug and used to determine the equivalent locked-rotor current for the receptacle, flanged surface inlet and cord connector, or attach- simultaneous combined loads. In cases where different current

ment plug and cord connector having ratings no less than the ratings are obtained when applying these tables, the largest motor ratings shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting value obtained shall be used. means. Horsepower-rated attachment plugs, flanged surface Exception: Where part of the concurrent load is resistance load, inlets, receptacles, or cord connectors shall not be required and where the disconnecting means is a switch rated in horse- for cord-and-plug-connected appliances in accordance with power and amperes, the switch used shall be permitted to have 422.33, room air conditioners in accordance with 440.63, or a horsepower rating that is not less than the combined load of 1 portable motors rated ⁄3 hp or less. the motor(s), if the ampere rating of the switch is not less than (G) Torque Motors. For torque motors, the disconnecting the locked-rotor current of the motor(s) plus the resistance load. means shall be permitted to be a general-use switch. (2) Ampere Rating. The ampere rating of the disconnecting 430.110 Ampere Rating and Interrupting Capacity.

means shall not be less than 115 percent of the sum of all cur- rents at the full-load condition determined in accordance with (A) General. The disconnecting means for motor circuits 430.110(C)(1). rated 1000 volts, nominal, or less shall have an ampere rating 2022 California Electrical Code 70–371

430.111 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS Exception: A listed nonfused motor-circuit switch having a (3) Where a group of motors is in a single room within sight horsepower rating equal to or greater than the equivalent horse- from the location of the disconnecting means. power of the combined loads, determined in accordance with 430.113 Energy from More Than One Source. Motor and 430.110(C)(1), shall be permitted to have an ampere rating motor-operated equipment receiving electric energy from more less than 115 percent of the sum of all currents at the full-load than one source shall be provided with disconnecting means condition. from each source of electric energy immediately adjacent to (3) Small Motors. For small motors not covered by the equipment served. Each source shall be permitted to have Table 430.247, Table 430.248, Table 430.249, or Table 430.250, a separate disconnecting means. Where multiple disconnecting the locked-rotor current shall be assumed to be six times the means are provided, a permanent warning sign shall be pro- full-load current.

vided on or adjacent to each disconnecting means. 430.111 Switch or Circuit Breaker as Both Controller and Exception No. 1:Where a motor receives electric energy Disconnecting Means. A switch or circuit breaker shall be from more than one source, the disconnecting means for the permitted to be used as both the controller and disconnecting main power supply to the motor shall not be required to be means if it complies with 430.111(A) and is one of the types immediately adjacent to the motor, provided that the con- specified in 430.111(B). troller disconnecting means is lockable in accordance with 110.25. (A) General. The switch or circuit breaker complies with the requirements for controllers specified in 430.83, opens all Exception No. 2: A separate disconnecting means shall not ungrounded conductors to the motor, and is protected by an be required for a Class 2 remote-control circuit conforming overcurrent device in each ungrounded conductor (which shall with Article 725, rated not more than 30 volts, and isolated and be permitted to be the branch-circuit fuses).

The overcurrent ungrounded. device protecting the controller shall be permitted to be part of the controller assembly or shall be permitted to be separate. An Part X. Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems autotransformer-type controller shall be provided with a sepa- 430.120 General. The installation provisions of Part I through rate disconnecting means. Part IX are applicable unless modified or supplemented by (B) Type. The device shall be one of the types specified in Part X. 430.111(B)(1), (B)(2), or (B)(3). 430.122 Conductors — Minimum Size and Ampacity. (1) Air-Break Switch. An air-break switch, operable directly (A) Branch/Feeder Circuit Conductors. Circuit conductors by applying the hand to a lever or handle. supplying power conversion equipment included as part of an (2) Inverse Time Circuit Breaker. An inverse time circuit adjustable-speed drive system shall have an ampacity not less breaker operable directly by applying the hand to a lever or han- than 125 percent of the rated input current to the power conver- dle.

The circuit breaker shall be permitted to be both power and sion equipment. manually operable. Informational Note No. 1: Power conversion equipment (3) Oil Switch. An oil switch used on a circuit whose rating can have multiple power ratings and corresponding input does not exceed 1000 volts or 100 amperes, or by special per- currents. mission on a circuit exceeding this capacity where under expert Informational Note No. 2: Circuit conductors on the out- supervision. The oil switch shall be permitted to be both power put of an adjustable-speed drive system are susceptible and manually operable. to breakdown under certain conditions due to the char- 430.112 Motors Served by Single Disconnecting Means. acteristics of the output waveform of the drive. Factors Each motor shall be provided with an individual disconnect- affecting the conductors include but are not limited to ing means. the output voltage, frequency, and current, the length of the conductors, the spacing between the conductors, and Exception: A single disconnecting means shall be permitted to

the dielectric strength of the conductor insulation. Meth- serve a group of motors under any one of the conditions of (1), ods to mitigate breakdown include consideration of one (2), and (3). The single disconnecting means shall be rated in or more of these factors. accordance with 430.110(C). N (B) Output Conductors. The conductors between the power (1) Where a number of motors drive several parts of a single conversion equipment and the motor shall have an ampacity machine or piece of apparatus, such as metal- and wood- equal to or larger than 125 percent of the motor full-load cur- working machines, cranes, and hoists. rent as determined by 430.6(A) or (B). (2) Where a group of motors is under the protection of one set of branch-circuit protective devices as permitted by Exception: If the power conversion equipment is listed and 430.53(A). marked as “Suitable for Output Motor Conductor Protection,” 70–372 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.128 the conductor between the power conversion equipment and (1) Motor thermal protector in accordance with 430.32 the motor shall have an ampacity equal to or greater than the (2) Adjustable-speed drive system with load and speed- larger of: sensitive overload protection and thermal memory reten- tion upon shutdown or power loss (1) 125 percent of the motor full load current as determined by 430.6(A) or (B) Exception to (2): Thermal memory retention upon shutdown (2) The ampacity of the minimum conductor size marked on or power loss is not required for continuous duty loads. the power conversion equipment (3) Overtemperature protection relay utilizing thermal sen- Informational Note: The minimum ampacity required sors embedded in the motor and meeting the requirements of output conductors is often different than that of the of 430.126(A)(2) conductors supplying the power conversion equipment. (4) Thermal sensor embedded in the motor whose communica-

See 430.130 and 430.131 for branch circuit protection tions are received and acted upon by an adjustable-speed requirements. drive system (C) Bypass Device. For an adjustable-speed drive system Informational Note: The relationship between motor cur- that utilizes a bypass device, the conductor ampacity shall not rent and motor temperature changes when the motor is be less than required by 430.6. The ampacity of circuit conduc- operated by an adjustable-speed drive. In certain applica- tors supplying power conversion equipment included as part of tions, overheating of motors can occur when operated at an adjustable-speed drive system that utilizes a bypass device reduced speed, even at current levels less than a motor’s shall be the larger of either of the following: rated full-load current. The overheating can be the result of reduced motor cooling when its shaft-mounted fan is (1) 125 percent of the rated input current to the power conver- operating less than rated nameplate RPM. As part of the sion equipment analysis to determine whether overheating will occur, it

(2) 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating as deter- is necessary to consider the continuous torque capabil- mined by 430.6 ity curves for the motor given the application require- N (D) Several Motors or a Motor and Other Loads. Con- ments. This will assist in determining whether the motor ductors supplying several motors or a motor and other loads, overload protection will be able, on its own, to provide including power conversion equipment, shall have ampacity protection against overheating. These overheating pro- in accordance with 430.24, using the rated input current of tection requirements are only intended to apply to appli- the power conversion equipment for purposes of calculating cations where an adjustable-speed drive, as defined in ampacity. Article 100, is used. For motors that utilize external forced air or liq- 430.124 Overload Protection. Overload protection of the uid cooling systems, overtemperature can occur if the motor shall be provided. cooling system is not operating. Although this issue is (A) Included in Power Conversion Equipment. Where the

not unique to adjustable speed applications, externally power conversion equipment is marked to indicate that motor cooled motors are most often encountered with such overload protection is included, additional overload protection applications. In these instances, overtemperature protec- shall not be required. tion using direct temperature sensing is recommended (B) Bypass Circuits. For adjustable-speed drive systems that [i.e., 430.126(A)(1), (A)(3), or (A)(4)], or additional utilize a bypass device to allow motor operation at rated full- means should be provided to ensure that the cooling load speed, motor overload protection as described in Article system is operating (flow or pressure sensing, interlock- 430, Part III, shall be provided in the bypass circuit. ing of adjustable-speed drive system and cooling sys- tem, etc.). (C) Multiple Motor Applications. For multiple motor application, individual motor overload protection shall be pro- (B) Multiple Motor Applications. For multiple motor vided in accordance with Article 430, Part III.

applications, individual motor overtemperature protection shall be provided as required in 430.126(A). 430.126 Motor Overtemperature Protection. ∆ (C) Automatic Restarting and Orderly Shutdown. 430.43 ∆ (A) General. Adjustable-speed drive systems shall protect and 430.44 shall apply to the motor overtemperature protection against motor overtemperature conditions where the motor is means. not rated to operate at the nameplate rated current over the speed range required by the application. This protection shall 430.128 Disconnecting Means. The disconnecting means be provided in addition to the conductor protection required in shall be permitted to be in the incoming line to the conversion 430.32. Protection shall be provided by one of the following equipment and shall have a rating not less than 115 percent of means. the rated input current of the conversion unit. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–373

430.130 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS ∆ 430.130 Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault branch-circuit protective device type and its rating or setting shall Protection for Single Motor Circuits Containing Power be in accordance with those determined for the power conver- Conversion Equipment. sion equipment and for the bypass circuit/device(s) equipment. (A) Circuits Containing Power Conversion Equipment. 430.131 Several Motors or Loads on One Branch Circuit Circuits containing power conversion equipment shall be pro- Including Power Conversion Equipment. For installations tected by a branch circuit short-circuit and ground-fault pro- meeting all the requirements of 430.53 that include one or more tective device in accordance with all of the following: power converters, the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- fault protective fuses or inverse time circuit breakers shall be (1) The rating and type of protection shall be determined by of a type and rating or setting permitted for use with the power

430.52(C)(1), (C)(3), (C)(5), or (C)(6), using the full-load conversion equipment using the full-load current rating of current rating of the motor load as determined by 430.6(A) the connected motor load in accordance with 430.53. For the or (B). purposes of 430.53 and 430.131, power conversion equipment Exception to 1: The rating and type of protection shall be per- shall be considered to be a motor controller. mitted to be determined by Table 430.52 using the power con- version equipment’s rated input current where the power Part XI. Over 1000 Volts, Nominal conversion equipment is listed and marked “Suitable for Out- 430.221 General. Part XI recognizes the additional hazard due put Motor Conductor Protection.” to the use of higher voltages. It adds to or amends the other Informational Note No. 1: Motor conductor branch cir- provisions of this article. cuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection from the 430.222 Marking on Controllers. In addition to the marking power conversion equipment to the motor is provided required by 430.8, a controller shall be marked with the control

by power conversion equipment that is listed and marked voltage. “Suitable for Output Motor Conductor Protection.” 430.223 Raceway Connection to Motors. Flexible metal Informational Note No. 2: A motor branch circuit using conduit or liquidtight flexible metal conduit not exceeding power conversion equipment, including equipment listed 1.8 m (6 ft) in length shall be permitted to be employed for and marked “Suitable for Output Motor Conductor Pro- raceway connection to a motor terminal enclosure. tection,” includes the input circuit to the power conver- sion equipment. 430.224 Size of Conductors. Conductors supplying motors shall have an ampacity not less than the current at which the (2) Where maximum branch circuit short-circuit and ground- motor overload protective device(s) is selected to trip. fault protective ratings are stipulated for specific device types in the manufacturer’s instructions for the power con- 430.225 Motor-Circuit Overcurrent Protection. version equipment or are otherwise marked on the equip- (A) General. Each motor circuit shall include coordinated pro-

ment, they shall not be exceeded even if higher values are tection to automatically interrupt overload and fault currents permitted by 430.130(A)(1). in the motor, the motor-circuit conductors, and the motor con- (3) A self-protected combination controller shall only be per- trol apparatus. mitted where specifically identified in the manufacturer’s instructions for the power conversion equipment or if oth- Exception: Where a motor is critical to an operation and the erwise marked on the equipment. motor should operate to failure if necessary to prevent a greater hazard to persons, the sensing device(s) shall be permitted to be Informational Note: The type of protective device, its rat- connected to a supervised annunciator or alarm instead of inter- ing, and its setting are often marked on or provided with rupting the motor circuit. the power conversion equipment. (B) Overload Protection. (4) Where an instantaneous trip circuit breaker or semiconduc- (1) Type of Overload Device. Each motor shall be protected tor fuses are permitted in accordance with the drive manufac-

against dangerous heating due to motor overloads and failure turer’s instructions for use as the branch circuit short-circuit to start by a thermal protector integral with the motor or exter- and ground-fault protective device for listed power conver- nal current-sensing devices, or both. Protective device settings sion equipment, they shall be provided as an integral part for each motor circuit shall be determined under engineering of a single listed assembly incorporating both the protective supervision. device and power conversion equipment. (2) Wound-Rotor Alternating-Current Motors. The sec- (B) Bypass Circuit/Device. Branch-circuit short-circuit and ondary circuits of wound-rotor ac motors, including conduc- ground-fault protection shall also be provided for a bypass tors, controllers, and resistors rated for the application, shall be circuit/device(s). Where a single branch-circuit short-circuit and considered as protected against overcurrent by the motor over- ground-fault protective device is provided for circuits contain- load protection means.

ing both power conversion equipment and a bypass circuit, the 70–374 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.243 (3) Operation. Operation of the overload interrupting device (3) By elevation 2.5 m (8 ft) or more above the floor shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors. Exception: Live parts of motors operating at more than 50 volts (4) Automatic Reset. Overload sensing devices shall not between terminals shall not require additional guarding for automatically reset after trip unless resetting of the overload stationary motors that have commutators, collectors, and brush sensing device does not cause automatic restarting of the motor rigging located inside of motor-end brackets and not conductively or there is no hazard to persons created by automatic restarting connected to supply circuits operating at more than 150 volts to of the motor and its connected machinery. ground. (C) Fault-Current Protection. 430.233 Guards for Attendants. Where live parts of motors or controllers operating at over 50 volts to ground are guarded ∆ (1) Type of Protection. Fault-current protection shall be pro-

against accidental contact only by location as specified in vided in each motor circuit as specified by either 430.225(C) 430.232, and where adjustment or other attendance may be nec- (1)(a)or (C)(1)(b). essary during the operation of the apparatus, suitable insulating (a) A circuit breaker of suitable type and rating arranged so mats or platforms shall be provided so that the attendant cannot that it can be serviced without hazard. The circuit breaker shall readily touch live parts unless standing on the mats or platforms. simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors. The circuit breaker shall be permitted to sense the fault current by Informational Note: For working space, see 110.26 and means of integral or external sensing elements. 110.34. (b) Fuses of a suitable type and rating placed in each ungrounded conductor. Fuses shall be used with suitable dis- Part XIII. Grounding — All Voltages connecting means, or they shall be of a type that can also serve 430.241 General. Part XIII specifies the grounding of exposed as the disconnecting means. They shall be arranged so that

non–current-carrying metal parts, likely to become energized, of they cannot be serviced while they are energized. motor and controller frames to prevent a voltage aboveground (2) Reclosing. Fault-current interrupting devices shall not in the event of accidental contact between energized parts and automatically reclose the circuit. frames. Insulation, isolation, or guarding are suitable alternatives to grounding of motors under certain conditions. Exception: Automatic reclosing of a circuit shall be permitted where the circuit is exposed to transient faults and where such 430.242 Stationary Motors. The frames of stationary motors automatic reclosing does not create a hazard to persons. shall be grounded under any of the following conditions: (3) Combination Protection. Overload protection and fault- (1) Where supplied by metal-enclosed wiring current protection shall be permitted to be provided by the same (2) Where in a wet location and not isolated or guarded device. (3) If in a hazardous (classified) location (4) If the motor operates with any terminal at over 150 volts to

430.226 Rating of Motor Control Apparatus. The ultimate ground trip current of overcurrent (overload) relays or other motor- protective devices used shall not exceed 115 percent of the Where the frame of the motor is not grounded, it shall be controller’s continuous current rating. Where the motor branch- permanently and effectively insulated from the ground. circuit disconnecting means is separate from the controller, the 430.243 Portable Motors. The frames of portable motors disconnecting means current rating shall not be less than the ulti- that operate over 150 volts to ground shall be guarded or mate trip setting of the overcurrent relays in the circuit. grounded. 430.227 Disconnecting Means. The controller disconnecting Informational Note No. 1: See 250.114(4) for grounding of means shall be lockable in accordance with 110.25. portable appliances in other than residential occupancies. Part XII. Protection of Live Parts — All Voltages Informational Note No. 2: See 250.119(C) for color of equipment grounding conductor. 430.231 General. Part XII specifies that live parts shall be

protected in an approved manner for the hazard involved. Exception No. 1: Listed motor-operated tools, listed motor- operated appliances, and listed motor-operated equipment shall 430.232 Where Required. Exposed live parts of motors and not be required to be grounded where protected by a system of controllers operating at 50 volts or more between terminals double insulation or its equivalent. Double-insulated equipment shall be guarded against accidental contact by enclosure or by shall be distinctively marked. location as follows: Exception No. 2: Listed motor-operated tools, listed motor- (1) By installation in a room or enclosure that is accessible operated appliances, and listed motor-operated equipment only to qualified persons connected by a cord and attachment plug other than those (2) By installation on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform, required to be grounded in accordance with 250.114. elevated and arranged so as to exclude unqualified persons 2022 California Electrical Code 70–375

430.244 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.244 Controllers. Controller enclosures shall be con- leads enclosed in liquidtight flexible metal conduit, flexible nected to the equipment grounding conductor regardless of metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid metal conduit, or voltage. Controller enclosures shall have means for attachment electrical metallic tubing not smaller than metric designator 12 3 of an equipment grounding conductor termination in accor- (trade size ⁄8), the armor or raceway being connected both to the dance with 250.8. motor and to the box. Exception: Enclosures attached to ungrounded portable equip- Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit and rigid nonmetal- ment shall not be required to be grounded. lic conduit shall be permitted to enclose the leads to the motor, provided the leads are stranded and the required equipment 430.245 Method of Grounding. Connection to the equipment grounding conductor is connected to both the motor and to the grounding conductor shall be done in the manner specified in box. Part VI of Article 250.

Where stranded leads are used, protected as specified (A) Grounding Through Terminal Housings. Where the above, each strand within the conductor shall be not larger than wiring to motors is metal-enclosed cable or in metal raceways, 10 AWG and shall comply with other requirements of this Code junction boxes to house motor terminals shall be provided, and for conductors to be used in raceways. the armor of the cable or the metal raceways shall be connected to them in the manner specified in 250.96(A) and 250.97. (C) Grounding of Controller-Mounted Devices. Instrument transformer secondaries and exposed non–current-carrying (B) Separation of Junction Box from Motor. The junction metal or other conductive parts or cases of instrument trans- box required by 430.245(A) shall be permitted to be separated formers, meters, instruments, and relays shall be grounded as from the motor by not more than 1.8 m (6 ft), provided the leads specified in 250.170 through 250.178. to the motor are stranded conductors within Type AC cable, inter-

locked metal tape Type MC cable where listed and identified in Part XIV. Tables accordance with 250.118(10)(a), or armored cord or are stranded Table 430.247 Full-Load Current in Amperes, Direct-Current Motors The following values of full-load currents* are for motors running at base speed. Armature Voltage Rating* Horsepower 90 Volts 120 Volts 180 Volts 240 Volts 500 Volts 550 Volts 1⁄4 4.0 3.1 2.0 1.6 — — 1⁄3 5.2 4.1 2.6 2.0 — — 1⁄2 6.8 5.4 3.4 2.7 — — 3⁄4 9.6 7.6 4.8 3.8 — — 1 12.2 9.5 6.1 4.7 — — 11⁄2 — 13.2 8.3 6.6 — — 2 — 17 10.8 8.5 — — 3 — 25 16 12.2 — — 5 — 40 27 20 — — 71⁄2 — 58 — 29 13.6 12.2 10 — 76 — 38 18 16 15 — — — 55 27 24 20 — — — 72 34 31 25 — — — 89 43 38 30 — — — 106 51 46 40 — — — 140 67 61 50 — — — 173 83 75 60 — — — 206 99 90 75 — — — 255 123 111 100 — — — 341 164 148 125 — — — 425 205 185 150 — — — 506 246 222 200 — — — 675 330 294 *These are average dc quantities. 70–376 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.245 Table 430.248 Full-Load Currents in Amperes, Single-Phase Table 430.249 Full-Load Current, Two-Phase Alternating- Alternating-Current Motors Current Motors (4-Wire) The following values of full-load currents are for motors running The following values of full-load current are for motors running at usual speeds and motors with normal torque characteristics. The at speeds usual for belted motors and motors with normal torque voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed shall characteristics. Current in the common conductor of a 2-phase, be permitted for system voltage ranges of 110 to 120 and 220 to 3-wire system will be 1.41 times the value given. The voltages listed 240 volts. are rated motor voltages. The currents listed shall be permitted for system voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220 to 240, 440 to 480, and 550 to 600 volts. 115 200 208 230 Horsepower Volts Volts Volts Volts Induction-Type Squirrel Cage 1⁄6 4.4 2.5 2.4 2.2 and Wound Rotor (Amperes) 1⁄4 5.8 3.3 3.2 2.9

1⁄3 7.2 4.1 4.0 3.6 115 230 460 575 2300 1⁄2 9.8 5.6 5.4 4.9 Horsepower Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts 3⁄4 13.8 7.9 7.6 6.9 1 1 16 9.2 8.8 8.0 ⁄2 4.0 2.0 1.0 0.8 — 3 11⁄2 20 11.5 11.0 10 ⁄4 4.8 2.4 1.2 1.0 — 2 24 13.8 13.2 12 1 6.4 3.2 1.6 1.3 — 1 3 34 19.6 18.7 17 1 ⁄2 9.0 4.5 2.3 1.8 — 5 56 32.2 30.8 28 2 11.8 5.9 3.0 2.4 — 71⁄2 80 46.0 44.0 40 3 — 8.3 4.2 3.3 — 10 100 57.5 55.0 50 5 — 13.2 6.6 5.3 — 71⁄2 — 19 9.0 8.0 — 10 — 24 12 10 — 15 — 36 18 14 — 20 — 47 23 19 — 25 — 59 29 24 — 30 — 69 35 28 — 40 — 90 45 36 — 50 — 113 56 45 — 60 — 133 67 53 14 75 — 166 83 66 18 100 — 218 109 87 23 125 — 270 135 108 28 150 — 312 156 125 32 200 — 416 208 167 43 2022 California Electrical Code 70–377

430.245 ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS Table 430.250 Full-Load Current, Three-Phase Alternating-Current Motors The following values of full-load currents are typical for motors running at speeds usual for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics. The voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed shall be permitted for system voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220 to 240, 440 to 480, and 550 to 600 volts. Synchronous-Type Unity Power Induction-Type Squirrel Cage and Wound Rotor (Amperes) Factor* (Amperes) 115 200 208 230 460 575 2300 230 460 575 2300 Horsepower Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts 1⁄2 4.4 2.5 2.4 2.2 1.1 0.9 — — — — — 3⁄4 6.4 3.7 3.5 3.2 1.6 1.3 — — — — — 1 8.4 4.8 4.6 4.2 2.1 1.7 — — — — — 1 1⁄2 12.0 6.9 6.6 6.0 3.0 2.4 — — — — — 2 13.6 7.8 7.5 6.8 3.4 2.7 — — — — — 3 — 11.0 10.6 9.6 4.8 3.9 — — — — — 5 — 17.5 16.7 15.2 7.6 6.1 — — — — — 7 1⁄2 — 25.3 24.2 22 11 9 — — — — — 10 — 32.2 30.8 28 14 11 — — — — — 15 — 48.3 46.2 42 21 17 — — — — — 20 — 62.1 59.4 54 27 22 — — — — —

25 — 78.2 74.8 68 34 27 — 53 26 21 — 30 — 92 88 80 40 32 — 63 32 26 — 40 — 120 114 104 52 41 — 83 41 33 — 50 — 150 143 130 65 52 — 104 52 42 — 60 — 177 169 154 77 62 16 123 61 49 12 75 — 221 211 192 96 77 20 155 78 62 15 100 — 285 273 248 124 99 26 202 101 81 20 125 — 359 343 312 156 125 31 253 126 101 25 150 — 414 396 360 180 144 37 302 151 121 30 200 552 528 480 240 192 49 400 201 161 40 250 — — — — 302 242 60 — — — — 300 — — — — 361 289 72 — — — — 350 — — — — 414 336 83 — — — — 400 — — — — 477 382 95 — — — — 450 — — — — 515 412 103 — — — — 500 — — — — 590 472 118 — — — — *For 90 and 80 percent power factor, the figures shall be multiplied by 1.1 and 1.25, respectively. Table 430.251(A) Conversion Table of Single-Phase Locked-Rotor Currents for Selection of Disconnecting Means and Controllers as Determined from Horsepower and Voltage Rating For use only with 430.110, 440.12, 440.41, and 455.8(C). Maximum Locked-Rotor Current in Amperes, Single Phase Rated Horsepower 115 Volts 208 Volts 230 Volts 1⁄2 58.8 32.5 29.4 3⁄4 82.8 45.8 41.4 1 96 53 48 11⁄2 120 66 60 2 144 80 72

3 204 113 102 5 336 186 168 71⁄2 480 265 240 10 1000 332 300 70–378 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 430 — MOTORS, MOTOR CIRCUITS, AND CONTROLLERS 430.245 Table 430.251(B) Conversion Table of Polyphase Design B, C, and D Maximum Locked-Rotor Currents for Selection of Disconnecting Means and Controllers as Determined from Horsepower and Voltage Rating and Design Letter For use only with 430.110, 440.12, 440.41, and 455.8(C). Maximum Motor Locked-Rotor Current in Amperes, Two- and Three-Phase, Design B, C, and D* 115 Volts 200 Volts 208 Volts 230 Volts 460 Volts 575 Volts Rated Horsepower B, C, D B, C, D B, C, D B, C, D B, C, D B, C, D 1⁄2 40 23 22.1 20 10 8 3⁄4 50 28.8 27.6 25 12.5 10 1 60 34.5 33 30 15 12 1 1⁄2 80 46 44 40 20 16 2 100 57.5 55 50 25 20 3 — 73.6 71 64 32 25.6 5 — 105.8 102 92 46 36.8 7 1⁄2 — 146 140 127 63.5 50.8 10 — 186.3 179 162 81 64.8 15 — 267 257 232 116 93 20 — 334 321 290 145 116 25 — 420 404 365 183 146 30 — 500 481 435 218 174 40 — 667 641 580 290 232 50 — 834 802 725 363 290 60 — 1001 962 870 435 348 75 — 1248 1200 1085 543 434 100 — 1668 1603 1450 725 580 125 — 2087 2007 1815 908 726 150 — 2496 2400 2170 1085 868 200 — 3335 3207 2900 1450 1160

250 — — — — 1825 1460 300 — — — — 2200 1760 350 — — — — 2550 2040 400 — — — — 2900 2320 450 — — — — 3250 2600 500 — — — — 3625 2900 *Design A motors are not limited to a maximum starting current or locked rotor current. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–379

440.1 ARTICLE 440 — AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT Table 440.3(D) Other Articles ARTICLE 440 Air-Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment Equipment/Occupancy Article Section Capacitors 460.9 Commercial garages, aircraft 511, 513, 514, Part I. General hangars, motor fuel dispensing 515, 516, facilities, bulk storage plants, and 517 440.1 Scope. This article applies to electric motor-driven air- spray application, dipping, and Part IV conditioning and refrigerating equipment and to the branch coating processes, and inhalation circuits and controllers for such equipment. It provides for the anesthetizing locations special considerations necessary for circuits supplying her- Hazardous (classified) locations 500–503, 505, and 506 metic refrigerant motor-compressors and for any air-condition- Motion picture and television studios 530 ing or refrigerating equipment that is supplied from a branch and similar locations circuit that supplies a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor. Resistors and reactors 470 440.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply

only within this article. 440.3(E) California Energy Code Requirements for Heat Branch-Circuit Selection Current. The value in amperes to Pump Space Heaters and their Readiness in Single-Family be used instead of the rated-load current in determining the rat- Buildings [CEC]. In single-family residential buildings that ings of motor branch-circuit conductors, disconnecting means, include one or two dwellings, each dwelling unit shall be pro- controllers, and branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault vided with designated spaces, receptacles, branch circuits and protective devices wherever the running overload protective circuit identifications as specified for heat pump space heaters device permits a sustained current greater than the specified per- in California Energy Code Section 150.0(t). centage of the rated-load current. The value of branch-circuit 440.3(F) California Energy Code Requirements for Heat selection current will always be equal to or greater than the Pump Space Heaters and their Readiness in Multifamily marked rated-load current. Buildings [CEC].

In multifamily buildings, each dwelling unit Leakage-Current Detector-Interrupter (LCDI). A device shall be provided with designated spaces, receptacles, branch provided in a power supply cord or cord set that senses leakage circuits and circuit identifications as specified for heat pump current flowing between or from the cord conductors and inter- space heaters in California Energy Code Section 160.9(a). rupts the circuit at a predetermined level of leakage current. 440.4 Marking on Hermetic Refrigerant Motor- Rated-Load Current. The current of a hermetic refrigerant Compressors and Equipment. motor-compressor resulting when it is operated at the rated load, (A) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressor Nameplate. rated voltage, and rated frequency of the equipment it serves. A hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor shall be provided 440.3 Other Articles. with a nameplate that shall indicate the manufacturer’s name, trademark, or symbol; identifying designation; phase; voltage; (A) Article 430. These provisions are in addition to, or and frequency.

The rated-load current in amperes of the motor- amendatory of, the provisions of Article 430 and other articles compressor shall be marked by the equipment manufacturer on in this Code, which apply except as modified in this article. either or both the motor-compressor nameplate and the name- (B) Articles 422, 424, or 430. The rules of Articles 422, 424, or plate of the equipment in which the motor-compressor is used. 430, as applicable, shall apply to air-conditioning and refrig- The locked-rotor current of each single-phase motor-compressor erating equipment that does not incorporate a hermetic refrig- having a rated-load current of more than 9 amperes at 115 volts, erant motor-compressor. This equipment includes devices or more than 4.5 amperes at 230 volts, and each polyphase motor- that employ refrigeration compressors driven by conven- compressor shall be marked on the motor-compressor nameplate. tional motors, furnaces with air-conditioning evaporator coils Where a thermal protector complying with 440.52(A)(2) and (B)(2)

installed, fan-coil units, remote forced air-cooled condensers, is used, the motor-compressor nameplate or the equipment remote commercial refrigerators, and so forth. nameplate shall be marked with the words “thermally protected.” ∆ (C) Article 422. Equipment such as room air conditioners, Where a protective system complying with 440.52(A)(4) and (B)(4) household refrigerators and freezers, drinking water coolers, is used and is furnished with the equipment, the equipment name- and beverage dispensers shall be considered appliances, and plate shall be marked with the words, “thermally protected sys- Article 422 shall also apply. tem.” Where a protective system complying with 440.52(A)(4) and (B)(4) is specified, the equipment nameplate shall be appro- (D) Other Applicable Articles. Hermetic refrigerant motor- priately marked. compressors, circuits, controllers, and equipment shall also comply with the applicable provisions of Table 440.3(D). (B) Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment. Mul- timotor and combination-load equipment shall be provided with

70–380 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 440 — AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT 440.10 a visible nameplate marked with the maker’s name, the rating in protection, and the separate motor overload protection. Where volts, frequency and number of phases, minimum supply cir- no rated-load current is shown on the equipment nameplate, the cuit conductor ampacity, the maximum rating of the branch- rated-load current shown on the compressor nameplate shall be circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device, and the used. short-circuit current rating of the motor controllers or indus- Exception No. 1: Where so marked, the branch-circuit selection trial control panel. The ampacity shall be calculated by using current shall be used instead of the rated-load current to deter- Part IV and counting all the motors and other loads that will be mine the rating or ampacity of the disconnecting means, the operated at the same time. The branch-circuit short-circuit and branch-circuit conductors, the controller, and the branch-circuit ground-fault protective device rating shall not exceed the value

short-circuit and ground-fault protection. calculated by using Part III. Multimotor or combination-load equipment for use on two or more circuits shall be marked with Exception No. 2: For cord-and-plug-connected equipment, the above information for each circuit. the nameplate marking shall be used in accordance with 440.22(B), Exception No. 2. Exception No. 1: Multimotor and combination-load equip- ment that is suitable under the provisions of this article for con- (B) Multimotor Equipment. For multimotor equipment emplo- nection to a single 15- or 20-ampere, 120-volt, or a 15-ampere, ying a shaded-pole or permanent split-capacitor-type fan or 208- or 240-volt, single-phase branch circuit shall be permitted blower motor, the full-load current for such motor marked on to be marked as a single load. the nameplate of the equipment in which the fan or blower motor is employed shall be used instead of the horsepower rat- Exception No. 2:The minimum supply circuit conductor ing to determine the ampacity or rating of the disconnecting

ampacity and the maximum rating of the branch-circuit short- means, the branch-circuit conductors, the controller, the branch- circuit and ground-fault protective device shall not be required to circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection, and the sep- be marked on a room air conditioner complying with 440.62(A). arate overload protection. This marking on the equipment Exception No. 3: Multimotor and combination-load equipment nameplate shall not be less than the current marked on the fan used in one- and two-family dwellings or cord-and-attachment- or blower motor nameplate. plug-connected equipment shall not be required to be marked 440.7 Highest Rated (Largest) Motor. In determining compli- with a short-circuit current rating. ance with this article and with 430.24, 430.53(B) and 430.53(C), (C) Branch-Circuit Selection Current. A hermetic refrig- and 430.62(A), the highest rated (largest) motor shall be con- erant motor-compressor, or equipment containing such a com- sidered to be the motor that has the highest rated-load current.

pressor, having a protection system that is approved for use with Where two or more motors have the same highest rated-load the motor-compressor that it protects and that permits continu- current, only one of them shall be considered as the highest ous current in excess of the specified percentage of nameplate rated (largest) motor. For other than hermetic refrigerant motor- rated-load current given in 440.52(B)(2) or (B)(4) shall also be compressors, and fan or blower motors as covered in 440.6(B), marked with a branch-circuit selection current that complies the full-load current used to determine the highest rated motor with 440.52(B)(2) or (B)(4). This marking shall be provided by shall be the equivalent value corresponding to the motor horse- the equipment manufacturer and shall be on the nameplate(s) power rating selected from Table 430.248, Table 430.249, or where the rated-load current(s) appears. Table 430.250. 440.5 Marking on Controllers. A controller shall be marked Exception: Where so marked, the branch-circuit selection cur-

with the manufacturer’s name, trademark, or symbol; identify- rent shall be used instead of the rated-load current in determin- ing designation; voltage; phase; full-load and locked-rotor cur- ing the highest rated (largest) motor-compressor. rent (or horsepower) rating; and other data as may be needed to 440.8 Single Machine. An air-conditioning or refrigerating properly indicate the motor-compressor for which it is suitable. system shall be considered to be a single machine under the pro- 440.6 Ampacity and Rating. The size of conductors for equip- visions of 430.87, Exception No. 1, and 430.112, Exception. The ment covered by this article shall be selected from Table 310.16 motors shall be permitted to be located remotely from each other. through Table 310.19 or calculated in accordance with 310.14 ∆ 440.9 Grounding and Bonding. Where equipment is as applicable. The required ampacity of conductors and rating installed outdoors on a roof, an equipment grounding conductor of equipment shall be determined according to 440.6(A) and

of the wire type shall be installed in outdoor portions of metallic 440.6(B). raceway systems that use compression-type fittings. (A) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressor. For a hermetic 440.10 Short-Circuit Current Rating. refrigerant motor-compressor, the rated-load current marked on the nameplate of the equipment in which the motor-compressor (A) Installation. Motor controllers or industrial control pan- is employed shall be used in determining the rating or ampac- els of multimotor and combination-load equipment shall not be ity of the disconnecting means, the branch-circuit conductors, installed where the available fault current exceeds its short- the controller, the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault circuit current rating as marked in accordance with 440.4(B). 2022 California Electrical Code 70–381

440.11 ARTICLE 440 — AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT (B) Documentation. When motor controllers or industrial including resistance loads, at the rated-load condition and also control panels of multimotor and combination-load equipment at the locked-rotor condition. The combined rated-load current are required to be marked with a short circuit current rating, and the combined locked-rotor current so obtained shall be the available fault current and the date the available fault cur- considered as a single motor for the purpose of this requirement rent calculation was performed shall be documented and made as required by 440.12(B)(1)(a) and (B)(1)(b). available to those authorized to inspect, install, or maintain the (a) The full-load current equivalent to the horsepower rating of installation. each motor, other than a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor, and fan or blower motors as covered in 440.6(B) shall be selected Part II. Disconnecting Means from Table 430.248, Table 430.249, or Table 430.250. These ∆ 440.11 General.

Part II is intended to require disconnecting full-load currents shall be added to the motor-compressor rated- means capable of disconnecting air-conditioning and refriger- load current(s) or branch-circuit selection current(s), whichever ating equipment, including motor-compressors and controllers is greater, and to the rating in amperes of other loads to obtain an from the circuit conductors. equivalent full-load current for the combined load. (b) The locked-rotor current equivalent to the horse- 440.12 Rating and Interrupting Capacity. power rating of each motor, other than a hermetic refriger- (A) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressor. A discon- ant motor-compressor, shall be selected from Table 430.251(A) necting means serving a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor or Table 430.251(B), and, for fan and blower motors of the shall be selected on the basis of the nameplate rated-load cur- shaded-pole or permanent split-capacitor type marked with the rent or branch-circuit selection current, whichever is greater, locked-rotor current, the marked value shall be used. The locked-

and locked-rotor current, respectively, of the motor-compressor rotor currents shall be added to the motor-compressor locked-rotor as follows. current(s) and to the rating in amperes of other loads to obtain an equivalent locked-rotor current for the combined load. Where (1) Ampere Rating. The ampere rating shall be at least two or more motors or other loads such as resistance heaters, or 115 percent of the nameplate rated-load current or branch-circuit both, cannot be started simultaneously, appropriate combinations selection current, whichever is greater. of locked-rotor and rated-load current or branch-circuit selection Exception: A listed unfused motor circuit switch, without current, whichever is greater, shall be an acceptable means of fuseholders, having a horsepower rating not less than the equiv- determining the equivalent locked-rotor current for the simulta- alent horsepower determined in accordance with 440.12(A)(2) neous combined load. shall be permitted to have an ampere rating less than 115 per- Exception: Where part of the concurrent load is a resistance

cent of the specified current. load and the disconnecting means is a switch rated in horse- (2) Equivalent Horsepower. To determine the equivalent power and amperes, the switch used shall be permitted to have a horsepower in complying with the requirements of 430.109, the horsepower rating not less than the combined load to the motor- horsepower rating shall be selected from Table 430.248, Table compressor(s) and other motor(s) at the locked-rotor condition, 430.249, or Table 430.250 corresponding to the rated-load cur- if the ampere rating of the switch is not less than this locked- rent or branch-circuit selection current, whichever is greater, rotor load plus the resistance load. and also the horsepower rating from Table 430.251(A) or (2) Full-Load Current Equivalent. The ampere rating of Table 430.251(B) corresponding to the locked-rotor current. In the disconnecting means shall be at least 115 percent of the sum case the nameplate rated-load current or branch-circuit selection of all currents at the rated-load condition determined in accor-

current and locked-rotor current do not correspond to the cur- dance with 440.12(B)(1). rents shown in Table 430.248, Table 430.249, Table 430.250, Table 430.251(A), or Table 430.251(B), the horsepower rating Exception: A listed unfused motor circuit switch, without fuse- corresponding to the next higher value shall be selected. In case holders, having a horsepower rating not less than the equivalent different horsepower ratings are obtained when applying these horsepower determined by 440.12(B)(1) shall be permitted to tables, a horsepower rating at least equal to the larger of the have an ampere rating less than 115 percent of the sum of all values obtained shall be selected. currents. (B) Combination Loads. Where the combined load of two (C) Small Motor-Compressors. For small motor-compres- or more hermetic refrigerant motor-compressors or one or sors not having the locked-rotor current marked on the name- more hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor with other motors plate, or for small motors not covered by Table 430.247, Table

or loads may be simultaneous on a single disconnecting means, 430.248, Table 430.249, or Table 430.250, the locked-rotor the rating for the disconnecting means shall be determined in current shall be assumed to be six times the rated-load current. accordance with 440.12(B)(1) and (B)(2). (D) Disconnecting Means. Every disconnecting means in ∆ (1) Horsepower Rating. The horsepower rating of the discon- the refrigerant motor-compressor circuit between the point necting means shall be determined from the sum of all currents, of attachment to the feeder and the point of connection to the 70–382 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 440 — AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT 440.22 refrigerant motor-compressor shall comply with the require- is greater, shall be permitted, provided that, where the protection ments of 440.12. specified is not sufficient for the starting current of the motor, the rating or setting shall be permitted to be increased but shall ∆ (E) Disconnecting Means Rated in Excess of 100 Horse- not exceed 225 percent of the motor rated-load current or power. Where the rated-load or locked-rotor current as deter- branch-circuit selection current, whichever is greater. mined above would indicate a disconnecting means rated in excess of 100 hp, 430.109(E) shall apply. Exception: The rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device shall not be required to be less 440.13 Cord-Connected Equipment. For cord-connected than 15 amperes. equipment such as room air conditioners, household refrigerators and freezers, drinking water coolers, and beverage dispensers, a (B) Rating or Setting for Equipment. The equipment branch-

separable connector or an attachment plug and receptacle shall circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device shall be be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means. capable of carrying the starting current of the equipment. Where the hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor is the only load on the Informational Note: For room air conditioners, see 440.63. circuit, the protection shall comply with 440.22(A). Where the 440.14 Location. Disconnecting means shall be located equipment incorporates more than one hermetic refrigerant within sight from, and readily accessible from the air-condi- motor-compressor or a hermetic refrigerant motor-compressor tioning or refrigerating equipment. The disconnecting means and other motors or other loads, the equipment short-circuit shall be permitted to be installed on or within the air-condition- and ground-fault protection shall comply with 430.53 and ing or refrigerating equipment. 440.22(B)(1) and (B)(2). The disconnecting means shall not be located on panels that (1) Motor-Compressor Largest Load. Where a hermetic

are designed to allow access to the air-conditioning or refrig- refrigerant motor-compressor is the largest load connected to eration equipment or to obscure the equipment nameplate(s). the circuit, the rating or setting of the branch-circuit short- circuit and ground-fault protective device shall not exceed Exception No. 1:Where the disconnecting means provided the value specified in 440.22(A) for the largest motor-com- in accordance with 430.102(A) is lockable in accordance with pressor plus the sum of the rated-load current or branch-circuit 110.25 and the refrigerating or air-conditioning equipment is selection current, whichever is greater, of the other motor- essential to an industrial process in a facility with written safety compressor(s) and the ratings of the other loads supplied. procedures, and where the conditions of maintenance and super- vision ensure that only qualified persons service the equipment, (2) Motor-Compressor Not Largest Load. Where a hermetic

a disconnecting means within sight from the equipment shall not refrigerant motor-compressor is not the largest load connected to be required. the circuit, the rating or setting of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device shall not exceed a value equal Exception No. 2: Where an attachment plug and receptacle to the sum of the rated-load current or branch-circuit selection cur- serve as the disconnecting means in accordance with 440.13, rent, whichever is greater, rating(s) for the motor-compressor(s) their location shall be accessible but shall not be required to be plus the value specified in 430.53(C)(4) where other motor loads readily accessible. are supplied, or the value specified in 240.4 where only nonmotor Informational Note No. 1: See Parts VII and IX of Arti- loads are supplied in addition to the motor-compressor(s). cle 430 for additional requirements. Exception No. 1: Equipment that starts and operates on a 15- or Informational Note No. 2: See 110.26. 20-ampere 120-volt, or 15-ampere 208- or 240-volt single-phase

branch circuit, shall be permitted to be protected by the 15- or Part III. Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault 20-ampere overcurrent device protecting the branch circuit, but Protection if the maximum branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault ∆ 440.21 General. Part III specifies devices intended to protect protective device rating marked on the equipment is less than the branch-circuit conductors, control apparatus, and motors in these values, the circuit protective device shall not exceed the circuits supplying hermetic refrigerant motor-compressors value marked on the equipment nameplate. against overcurrent due to short circuits and ground faults. Exception No. 2:The nameplate marking of cord-and- They are in addition to or amendatory of Article 240. plug-connected equipment rated not greater than 250 volts, 440.22 Application and Selection. single-phase, such as household refrigerators and freezers, drinking water coolers, and beverage dispensers, shall be used (A) Rating or Setting for Individual Motor-Compressor.

in determining the branch-circuit requirements, and each unit The motor-compressor branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- shall be considered as a single motor unless the nameplate is fault protective device shall be capable of carrying the start- marked otherwise. ing current of the motor. A protective device having a rating or setting not exceeding 175 percent of the motor-compressor (C) Protective Device Rating Not to Exceed the Manufac- rated-load current or branch-circuit selection current, whichever turer’s Values. Where maximum protective device ratings 2022 California Electrical Code 70–383

440.31 ARTICLE 440 — AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT shown on a manufacturer’s overload relay table for use with 440.33 or, for a single motor-compressor, in accordance with a motor controller are less than the rating or setting selected in 440.32. accordance with 440.22(A) and (B), the protective device rat- Exception: Where the circuitry is interlocked so as to prevent ing shall not exceed the manufacturer’s values marked on the simultaneous operation of the motor-compressor(s) and all equipment. other loads connected, the conductor size shall be determined from the largest size required for the motor-compressor(s) and Part IV. Branch-Circuit Conductors other loads to be operated at a given time. ∆ 440.31 General. Part IV and Article 310 specify ampacities 440.35 Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment. of conductors required to carry the motor current without over- The ampacity of the conductors supplying multimotor and heating under the conditions specified, except as modified in combination-load equipment shall not be less than the mini- 440.6(A), Exception No. 1.

mum circuit ampacity marked on the equipment in accordance These articles shall not apply to integral conductors of with 440.4(B). motors, to motor controllers and the like, or to conductors that form an integral part of approved equipment. Part V. Controllers for Motor-Compressors 440.32 Single Motor-Compressor. Branch-circuit conduc- 440.41 Rating. tors supplying a single motor-compressor shall have an ampac- (A) Motor-Compressor Controller. A motor-compressor ity not less than the greater of: controller shall have both a continuous-duty full-load current (1) 125 percent of the motor-compressor rated-load current rating and a locked-rotor current rating not less than the name- (2) 125 percent of the branch-circuit selection current plate rated-load current or branch-circuit selection current, whichever is greater, and locked-rotor current, respectively, of For a wye-start, delta-run connected motor-compressor, the the compressor. In case the motor controller is rated in horse- selection of branch-circuit conductors between the controller

power but is without one or both of the foregoing current rat- and the motor-compressor shall be permitted to be based on ings, equivalent currents shall be determined from the ratings 72 percent of either the motor-compressor rated-load current or as follows. Table 430.248, Table 430.249, and Table 430.250 the branch-circuit selection current, whichever is greater. shall be used to determine the equivalent full-load current rat- Informational Note: The individual motor circuit con- ing. Table 430.251(A) and Table 430.251(B) shall be used to ductors of wye-start, delta-run connected motor-com- determine the equivalent locked-rotor current ratings. pressors carry 58 percent of the rated load current. The (B) Controller Serving More Than One Load. A controller multiplier of 72 percent is obtained by multiplying serving more than one motor-compressor or a motor-compres- 58 percent by 1.25. sor and other loads shall have a continuous-duty full-load cur- 440.33 Motor-Compressor(s) With or Without Additional rent rating and a locked-rotor current rating not less than the Motor Loads.

Conductors supplying one or more motor- combined load as determined in accordance with 440.12(B). compressor(s) with or without an additional motor load(s) shall have an ampacity not less than the sum of each of the following: Part VI. Motor-Compressor and Branch-Circuit Overload Protection (1) The sum of the rated-load or branch-circuit selection cur- rent, whichever is greater, of all motor-compressor(s) ∆ 440.51 General. Part VI specifies devices intended to protect (2) The sum of the full-load current rating of all other motors the motor-compressor, the motor-control apparatus, and the (3) 25 percent of the highest motor-compressor or motor full branch-circuit conductors against excessive heating due to motor load current in the group overload and failure to start. Exception No. 1: Where the circuitry is interlocked so as to Informational Note: See 240.4(G) for application of prevent the starting and running of a second motor-compressor Parts III and VI of Article 440. or group of motor-compressors, the conductor size shall be 440.52 Application and Selection.

determined from the largest motor-compressor or group of motor-compressors that is to be operated at a given time. (A) Protection of Motor-Compressor. Each motor-com- pressor shall be protected against overload and failure to start Exception No. 2: The branch-circuit conductors for room air by one of the following means: conditioners shall be in accordance with Part VII of Article 440. (1) A separate overload relay that is responsive to motor- 440.34 Combination Load. Conductors supplying a motor- compressor current. This device shall be selected to trip at compressor load in addition to other load(s) as calculated from not more than 140 percent of the motor-compressor rated- Article 220 and other applicable articles shall have an ampac- load current. ity sufficient for the other load(s) plus the required ampacity (2) A thermal protector integral with the motor-compressor, for the motor-compressor load determined in accordance with approved for use with the motor-compressor that it protects 70–384 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 440 — AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT 440.60 on the basis that it will prevent dangerous overheating of motors and marked to indicate the maximum size of fuse or the motor-compressor due to overload and failure to start. inverse time circuit breaker by which they shall be protected. If the current-interrupting device is separate from the motor- Exception: The fuse or inverse time circuit breaker size mark- compressor and its control circuit is operated by a protec- ing shall be permitted on the nameplate of the equipment in tive device integral with the motor-compressor, it shall be which the overload relay or other overload device is used. arranged so that the opening of the control circuit will result in interruption of current to the motor-compressor. 440.54 Motor-Compressors and Equipment on 15- or 20- (3) A fuse or inverse time circuit breaker responsive to motor Ampere Branch Circuits — Not Cord- and Attachment-Plug- current, which shall also be permitted to serve as the branch- Connected. Overload protection for motor-compressors and

circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device. equipment used on 15- or 20-ampere 120-volt, or 15-ampere 208- This device shall be rated at not more than 125 percent of or 240-volt single-phase branch circuits as permitted in Article the motor-compressor rated-load current. It shall have suf- 210 shall be permitted as indicated in 440.54(A) and 440.54(B). ficient time delay to permit the motor-compressor to start (A) Overload Protection. The motor-compressor shall be pro- and accelerate its load. The equipment or the motor-com- vided with overload protection selected as specified in 440.52(A). pressor shall be marked with this maximum branch-circuit Both the controller and motor overload protective device shall be fuse or inverse time circuit breaker rating. identified for installation with the short-circuit and ground-fault (4) A protective system, furnished or specified and approved protective device for the branch circuit to which the equipment for use with the motor-compressor that it protects on the is connected. basis that it will prevent dangerous overheating of the

(B) Time Delay. The short-circuit and ground-fault protec- motor-compressor due to overload and failure to start. If tive device protecting the branch circuit shall have sufficient the current-interrupting device is separate from the motor- time delay to permit the motor-compressor and other motors to compressor and its control circuit is operated by a protec- start and accelerate their loads. tive device that is not integral with the current-interrupting device, it shall be arranged so that the opening of the 440.55 Cord- and Attachment-Plug-Connected Motor- control circuit will result in interruption of current to the Compressors and Equipment on 15- or 20-Ampere Branch motor-compressor. Circuits. Overload protection for motor-compressors and equipment that are cord- and attachment-plug-connected and (B) Protection of Motor-Compressor Control Apparatus used on 15- or 20-ampere 120-volt, or 15-ampere 208- or 240- and Branch-Circuit Conductors. The motor-compressor volt, single-phase branch circuits as permitted in Article 210

controller(s), the disconnecting means, and the branch-circuit shall be permitted as indicated in 440.55(A), (B), and (C). conductors shall be protected against overcurrent due to motor overload and failure to start by one of the following means, (A) Overload Protection. The motor-compressor shall be pro- which shall be permitted to be the same device or system pro- vided with overload protection as specified in 440.52(A). Both tecting the motor-compressor in accordance with 440.52(A): the controller and the motor overload protective device shall be identified for installation with the short-circuit and ground-fault Exception: Overload protection of motor-compressors and protective device for the branch circuit to which the equipment equipment on 15- and 20-ampere, single-phase, branch cir- is connected. cuits shall be permitted to be in accordance with 440.54 and 440.55. (B) Attachment Plug and Receptacle or Cord Connector Rating. The rating of the attachment plug and receptacle or cord (1) An overload relay selected in accordance with 440.52(A)(1)

connector shall not exceed 20 amperes at 125 volts or 15 amperes (2) A thermal protector applied in accordance with 440.52(A) at 250 volts. (2), that will not permit a continuous current in excess of 156 percent of the marked rated-load current or branch- (C) Time Delay. The short-circuit and ground-fault protective circuit selection current device protecting the branch circuit shall have sufficient time (3) A fuse or inverse time circuit breaker selected in accor- delay to permit the motor-compressor and other motors to start dance with 440.52(A)(3) and accelerate their loads. (4) A protective system, in accordance with 440.52(A)(4), that will not permit a continuous current in excess of 156 per- Part VII. Provisions for Room Air Conditioners cent of the marked rated-load current or branch-circuit ∆ 440.60 General. Part VII shall apply to electrically energized selection current room air conditioners that control temperature and humidity. For 440.53 Overload Relays. Overload relays and other devices the purpose of Part VII, a room air conditioner (with or without

for motor overload protection that are not capable of opening provisions for heating) shall be considered as an ac appliance of short circuits shall be protected by fuses or inverse time cir- the air-cooled window, console, or in-wall type that is installed cuit breakers with ratings or settings in accordance with Part III in the conditioned room and that incorporates a hermetic refrig- unless identified for group installation or for part-winding erant motor-compressor(s). Part VII covers equipment rated not 2022 California Electrical Code 70–385

440.61 ARTICLE 445 — GENERATORS over 250 volts, single phase, and the equipment shall be permit- (1) Leakage-current detector-interrupter (LCDI) ted to be cord- and attachment-plug-connected. (2) Arc-fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) (3) Heat detecting circuit interrupter (HDCI) A room air conditioner that is rated 3-phase or rated over 250 volts shall be directly connected to a wiring method recog- The protection device shall be an integral part of the nized in Chapter 3, and Part VII shall not apply. attachment plug or be located in the power supply cord within 300 mm (12 in.) of the attachment plug. 440.61 Grounding. The enclosures of room air conditioners shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor in accordance with 250.110, 250.112, and 250.114. 440.62 Branch-Circuit Requirements. ARTICLE 445 Generators (A) Room Air Conditioner as a Single Motor Unit. A room air conditioner shall be considered as a single motor unit in determining its branch-circuit requirements where all the fol- 445.1 Scope. This article contains installation and other require-

lowing conditions are met: ments for generators. (1) It is cord- and attachment-plug-connected. N 445.6 Listing. Stationary generators 600 volts and less shall be (2) Its rating is not more than 40 amperes and 250 volts, single listed. phase. (3) Total rated-load current is shown on the room air-conditioner Exception: One of a kind or custom manufactured generators nameplate rather than individual motor currents. shall be permitted to be field labeled by a field evaluation body. (4) The rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- Informational Note: For additional information, see fault protective device does not exceed the ampacity of UL 2200, Standard for Stationary Engine Generator the branch-circuit conductors or the rating of the recep- Assemblies. tacle, whichever is less. 445.10 Location. Generators shall be of a type suitable for the (B) Where No Other Loads Are Supplied. The total marked locations in which they are installed. They shall also meet the rating of a cord- and attachment-plug-connected room air con- requirements for motors in 430.14.

ditioner shall not exceed 80 percent of the rating of a branch circuit where no other loads are supplied. Informational Note: See NFPA 37, Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines (C) Where Lighting Units or Other Appliances Are Also and Gas Turbines, for information on the location of gen- Supplied. The total marked rating of a cord- and attachment- erator exhaust. plug-connected room air conditioner shall not exceed 50 per- cent of the rating of a branch circuit where lighting outlets, other ∆ 445.11 Marking. Each generator shall be provided with a appliances, or general-use receptacles are also supplied. Where nameplate giving the manufacturer’s name, the rated frequency, the circuitry is interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation of the number of phases if ac, the rating in kilowatts or kilovolt- the room air conditioner and energization of other outlets on the amperes, the power factor, the normal volts and amperes corre- same branch circuit, a cord- and attachment-plug-connected room sponding to the rating, and the rated ambient temperature.

air conditioner shall not exceed 80 percent of the branch-circuit Nameplates or manufacturer’s instructions shall provide the rating. following information for all stationary generators and portable 440.63 Disconnecting Means. An attachment plug and generators rated more than 15 kW: receptacle or cord connector shall be permitted to serve as the (1) Subtransient, transient, synchronous, and zero sequence disconnecting means for a single-phase room air conditioner reactances rated 250 volts or less if (1) the manual controls on the room (2) Power rating category air conditioner are readily accessible and located within 1.8 m (3) Temperature rise at rated load and insulation system class (6 ft) of the floor, or (2) an approved manually operable dis- (4) Indication if the generator is protected against overload by connecting means is installed in a readily accessible location inherent design, an overcurrent protective relay, a circuit within sight from the room air conditioner. breaker, or a fuse 440.64 Supply Cords.

Where a flexible cord is used to supply (5) Available fault current for inverter-based generators, in lieu a room air conditioner, the length of such cord shall not exceed of the synchronous, subtransient, and transient reactances 3.0 m (10 ft) for a nominal, 120-volt rating or 1.8 m (6 ft) for a Marking shall be provided by the manufacturer to indicate nominal, 208- or 240-volt rating. whether or not the generator neutral is bonded to its frame. 440.65 Protection Devices. Single-phase cord- and plug- Where the bonding is modified in the field, additional marking connected room air conditioners shall be provided with one of shall be required to indicate whether the neutral is bonded to the following factory-installed devices: the frame. 70–386 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 445 — GENERATORS 445.18 445.12 Overcurrent Protection. (B) Overcurrent Protection Provided. Where the generator set is equipped with a listed overcurrent protective device or a (A) Constant-Voltage Generators. Constant-voltage gen- combination of a current transformer and overcurrent relay, con- erators, except ac generator exciters, shall be protected from ductors shall be permitted to be tapped from the load side of the overload by inherent design, circuit breakers, fuses, protective protected terminals in accordance with 240.21(B). relays, or other identified overcurrent protective means suitable for the conditions of use. Tapped conductors shall not be permitted for portable gen- erators rated 15 kW or less where field wiring connection ter- (B) Two-Wire Generators. Two-wire, dc generators shall be minals are not accessible. permitted to have overcurrent protection in one conductor only if the overcurrent device is actuated by the entire current generated 445.14 Protection of Live Parts. Live parts of generators other than the current in the shunt field.

The overcurrent device operated at more than 50 volts ac or 60 volts dc to ground shall not open the shunt field. shall not be exposed to accidental contact where accessible to unqualified persons. (C) 65 Volts or Less. Generators operating at 65 volts or less and driven by individual motors shall be considered as protected 445.15 Guards for Attendants. Where necessary for the safety by the overcurrent device protecting the motor if these devices of attendants, the requirements of 430.233 shall apply. will operate when the generators are delivering not more than 445.16 Bushings. Where field-installed wiring passes through 150 percent of their full-load rated current. an opening in an enclosure, a conduit box, or a barrier, a bush- (D) Balancer Sets. Two-wire, dc generators used in con- ing shall be used to protect the conductors from the edges of junction with balancer sets to obtain neutral points for 3-wire an opening having sharp edges. The bushing shall have smooth,

systems shall be equipped with overcurrent devices that discon- well-rounded surfaces where it may be in contact with the con- nect the 3-wire system in case of excessive unbalancing of volt- ductors. If used where oils, grease, or other contaminants may ages or currents. be present, the bushing shall be made of a material not deleteri- ously affected. (E) Three-Wire, Direct-Current Generators. Three-wire, dc generators, whether compound or shunt wound, shall be equipped 445.17 Generator Terminal Housings. Generator terminal with overcurrent devices, one in each armature lead, and connected housings shall comply with 430.12. Where a horsepower rating so as to be actuated by the entire current from the armature. Such is required to determine the required minimum size of the gen- overcurrent devices shall consist either of a double-pole, double- erator terminal housing, the full-load current of the generator coil circuit breaker or of a 4-pole circuit breaker connected in the shall be compared with comparable motors in Table 430.247

main and equalizer leads and tripped by two overcurrent devices, through Table 430.250. The higher horsepower rating of Table one in each armature lead. Such protective devices shall be inter- 430.247 and Table 430.250 shall be used whenever the generator locked so that no one pole can be opened without simultaneously selection is between two ratings. disconnecting both leads of the armature from the system. Exception: This section shall not apply to generators rated Exception to (A) through (E): Where deemed by the authority over 600 volts. having jurisdiction that a generator is vital to the operation of 445.18 Disconnecting Means and Emergency Shutdown. an electrical system and the generator should operate to fail- ure to prevent a greater hazard to persons, the overload sensing ∆ (A) Disconnecting Means. Generators other than cord-and- device(s) shall be permitted to be connected to an annunciator or plug-connected portable generators shall have one or more alarm supervised by authorized personnel instead of interrupt- disconnecting means. Each disconnecting means shall simulta-

ing the generator circuit. neously open all associated ungrounded conductors. Each dis- connecting means shall be lockable open in accordance with 445.13 Ampacity of Conductors. 110.25. (A) General. The ampacity of the conductors from the genera- ∆ (B) Emergency Shutdown of Prime Mover. Generators tor output terminals to the first distribution device(s) containing shall have provisions to shut down the prime mover. The means overcurrent protection shall not be less than 115 percent of the of shutdown shall comply with all of the following: nameplate current rating of the generator. It shall be permitted to size the neutral conductors in accordance with 220.61. Conduc- (1) Be equipped with provisions to disable all prime mover tors that must carry ground-fault currents shall not be smaller start control circuits to render the prime mover incapable than required by 250.30(A). Neutral conductors of dc genera- of starting tors that must carry ground-fault currents shall not be smaller (2) Initiate a shutdown mechanism that requires a mechanical

than the minimum required size of the largest conductor. reset Exception: Where the design and operation of the generator pre- The provisions to shut down the prime mover shall be permit- vent overloading, the ampacity of the conductors shall not be less ted to satisfy the requirements of 445.18(A) where it is capable than 100 percent of the nameplate current rating of the generator. of being locked in the open position in accordance with 110.25. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–387

445.20 ARTICLE 450 — TRANSFORMERS AND TRANSFORMER VAULTS (INCLUDING SECONDARY TIES) N (C) Remote Emergency Shutdown. Generators with greater Exception No. 2: Dry-type transformers that constitute a com- than 15 kW rating shall be provided with a remote emergency ponent part of other apparatus and comply with the require- stop switch to shut down the prime mover. The remote emer- ments for such apparatus. gency stop switch shall be located outside the equipment room Exception No. 3: Transformers that are an integral part of an or generator enclosure and shall also meet the requirements of X-ray, high-frequency, or electrostatic-coating apparatus. 445.18(B)(1) and (B)(2). Exception No. 4: Transformers used with Class 2 and Class 3 N (D) Emergency Shutdown in One- and Two-Family Dwelling circuits that comply with Article 725. Units. For other than cord-and-plug-connected portable genera- tors, an emergency shutdown device shall be located outside the Exception No. 5: Transformers for sign and outline lighting dwelling unit at a readily accessible location. that comply with Article 600.

(E) Generators Installed in Parallel. Where a generator is Exception No. 6: Transformers for electric-discharge lighting installed in parallel with other generators, the provisions of that comply with Article 410. 445.18(A) shall be capable of isolating the generator output ter- Exception No. 7:Transformers used for power-limited fire minals from the paralleling equipment. The disconnecting means alarm circuits that comply with Part III of Article 760. shall not be required to be located at the generator. Exception No. 8: Transformers used for research, development, 445.20 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for or testing, where effective arrangements are provided to safe- Receptacles on 15-kW or Smaller Portable Generators. guard persons from contacting energized parts. Receptacle outlets that are a part of a 15-kW or smaller portable This article covers the installation of transformers dedicated generator shall have listed ground-fault circuit-interrupter protec- to supplying power to a fire pump installation as modified by

tion (GFCI) for personnel integral to the generator or receptacle Article 695. as indicated in either (A) or (B): This article also covers the installation of transformers in haz- (A) Unbonded (Floating Neutral) Generators. Unbonded ardous (classified) locations as modified by Articles 501 through generators with both 125-volt and 125/250-volt receptacle out- 504. lets shall have listed GFCI protection for personnel integral to the generator or receptacle on all 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere 450.2 Definition. The definitions in this section shall apply receptacle outlets. only within this article. Exception: GFCI protection shall not be required where the Transformer. An individual transformer, single- or poly- 125-volt receptacle outlets(s) is interlocked such that it is not phase, identified by a single nameplate, unless otherwise indi- available for use when any 125/250-volt receptacle(s) is in use. cated in this article. (B) Bonded Neutral Generators. Bonded generators shall be 450.3 Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection of

provided with GFCI protection on all 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere transformers shall comply with 450.3(A), (B), or (C). As used receptacle outlets. in this section, the word transformer shall mean a transformer or polyphase bank of two or more single-phase transformers oper- Informational Note: Refer to 590.6(A)(3) for GFCI ating as a unit. requirements for 15-kW or smaller portable generators used for temporary electric power and lighting. Informational Note No. 1: See 240.4, 240.21, 240.100, and 240.101 for overcurrent protection of conductors. Exception to (A) and (B): If the generator was manufactured or remanufactured prior to January 1, 2015, listed cord sets or Informational Note No. 2: Nonlinear loads can increase devices incorporating listed GFCI protection for personnel identi- heat in a transformer without operating its overcurrent fied for portable use shall be permitted. protective device. (A) Transformers Over 1000 Volts, Nominal. Overcurrent protection shall be provided in accordance with Table 450.3(A). ARTICLE 450 (B) Transformers 1000 Volts, Nominal, or Less.

Overcurrent Transformers and Transformer Vaults protection shall be provided in accordance with Table 450.3(B). (Including Secondary Ties) Exception: Where the transformer is installed as a motor con- trol circuit transformer in accordance with 430.72(C)(1) through Part I. General Provisions (C)(5). 450.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of all (C) Voltage (Potential) Transformers. Voltage (potential) transformers. transformers installed indoors or enclosed shall be protected with primary fuses. Exception No. 1: Current transformers. 70–388 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 450 — TRANSFORMERS AND TRANSFORMER VAULTS (INCLUDING SECONDARY TIES) 450.3 Table 450.3(A) Maximum Rating or Setting of Overcurrent Protection for Transformers Over 1000 Volts (as a Percentage of Transformer-Rated Current) Secondary Protection (See Note 2.) Primary Protection over 1000 Volts Over 1000 Volts 1000 Volts or Less Location Transformer Rated Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Limitations Impedance (See Note 4.) Fuse Rating (See Note 4.) Fuse Rating or Fuse Rating Not more than 6% 600% 300% 300% 250% 125% (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) Any location More than 6% and not 400% 300% 250% 225% 125% more than 10% (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) Any 300% 250% Not required Not required Not required (See Note 1.) (See Note 1.) Supervised Not more than 6% 600% 300% 300% 250% 250% locations only (See Note 5.) (See Note 5.) (See Note 5.) (See Note 3.) More than 6% and not 400% 300% 250% 225% 250% more than 10% (See Note 5.) (See Note 5.) (See Note 5.) Notes: 1.

Where the required fuse rating or circuit breaker setting does not correspond to a standard rating or setting, a higher rating or setting that does not exceed the following shall be permitted: a. The next higher standard rating or setting for fuses and circuit breakers 1000 volts and below, or b. The next higher commercially available rating or setting for fuses and circuit breakers above 1000 volts. 2. Where secondary overcurrent protection is required, the secondary overcurrent device shall be permitted to consist of not more than six circuit breakers or six sets of fuses grouped in one location. Where multiple overcurrent devices are utilized, the total of all the device ratings shall not exceed the allowed value of a single overcurrent device. If both circuit breakers and fuses are used as the overcurrent device, the total of the device ratings shall not exceed that allowed for fuses. 3. A supervised location is a location where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons monitor and service the transformer installation. 4.

Electronically actuated fuses that may be set to open at a specific current shall be set in accordance with settings for circuit breakers. 5. A transformer equipped with a coordinated thermal overload protection by the manufacturer shall be permitted to have separate secondary protection omitted. Table 450.3(B) Maximum Rating or Setting of Overcurrent Protection for Transformers 1000 Volts and Less (as a Percentage of Transformer-Rated Current) Primary Protection Secondary Protection (See Note 2.) Protection Currents of Currents Less Than Currents Less Than Currents of Currents Less Method 9 Amperes or More 9 Amperes 2 Amperes 9 Amperes or More Than 9 Amperes Primary only 125% (See Note 1.) 167% 300% Not required Not required protection Primary and 250% (See Note 3.) 250% (See Note 3.) 250% (See Note 3.) 125% (See Note 1.) 167% secondary protection Notes: 1. Where 125 percent of this current does not correspond to a standard rating of a fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, a higher rating that does not exceed the next higher standard rating shall be permitted. 2.

Where secondary overcurrent protection is required, the secondary overcurrent device shall be permitted to consist of not more than six circuit breakers or six sets of fuses grouped in one location. Where multiple overcurrent devices are utilized, the total of all the device ratings shall not exceed the allowed value of a single overcurrent device. 3. A transformer equipped with coordinated thermal overload protection by the manufacturer and arranged to interrupt the primary current shall be permitted to have primary overcurrent protection rated or set at a current value that is not more than six times the rated current of the transformer for transformers having not more than 6 percent impedance and not more than four times the rated current of the transformer for transformers having more than 6 percent but not more than 10 percent impedance. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–389

450.4 ARTICLE 450 — TRANSFORMERS AND TRANSFORMER VAULTS (INCLUDING SECONDARY TIES) (1) Connections. The transformer shall be directly connected to the ungrounded phase conductors and shall not be switched or provided with overcurrent protection that is independent of the main switch and common-trip overcurrent protection for the A 3-phase, 4-wire system. Shunt winding(s) (2) Overcurrent Protection. An overcurrent sensing device shall be provided that will cause the main switch or common- trip overcurrent protection referred to in 450.5(A)(1) to open if B the load on the autotransformer reaches or exceeds 125 percent FIGURE 450.4(A) Autotransformer. of its continuous current per-phase or neutral rating. Delayed tripping for temporary overcurrents sensed at the autotrans- former overcurrent device shall be permitted for the purpose of Informational Note: For protection of instrument circuits allowing proper operation of branch or feeder protective devices including voltage transformers, see 408.52. on the 4-wire system. 450.4 Autotransformers 1000 Volts, Nominal, or Less.

(3) Transformer Fault Sensing. A fault-sensing system that causes the opening of a main switch or common-trip overcur- (A) Overcurrent Protection. Each autotransformer 1000 volts, rent device for the 3-phase, 4-wire system shall be provided to nominal, or less shall be protected by an individual overcurrent guard against single-phasing or internal faults. device installed in series with each ungrounded input conductor. Such overcurrent device shall be rated or set at not more than Informational Note: This can be accomplished by the use 125 percent of the rated full-load input current of the autotrans- of two subtractive-connected donut-type current trans- former. Where this calculation does not correspond to a standard formers installed to sense and signal when an unbalance rating of a fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker and the rated occurs in the line current to the autotransformer of 50 per- input current is 9 amperes or more, the next higher standard rat- cent or more of rated current. ing described in 240.6 shall be permitted. An overcurrent device (4) Rating.

The autotransformer shall have a continuous shall not be installed in series with the shunt winding (the wind- neutral-current rating that is not less than the maximum pos- ing common to both the input and the output circuits) of the auto- sible neutral unbalanced load current of the 4-wire system. transformer between Points A and B as shown in Figure 450.4(A). (B) Ground Reference for Fault Protection Devices. A Exception: Where the rated input current of the autotransformer grounding autotransformer used to make available a specified is less than 9 amperes, an overcurrent device rated or set at not magnitude of ground-fault current for operation of a ground- more than 167 percent of the input current shall be permitted. responsive protective device on a 3-phase, 3-wire ungrounded (B) Transformer Field-Connected as an Autotransformer. system shall conform to 450.5(B)(1) and (B)(2). A transformer field-connected as an autotransformer shall be (1) Rating. The autotransformer shall have a continuous identified for use at elevated voltage.

neutral-current rating not less than the specified ground-fault Informational Note: For information on permitted uses current. of autotransformers, see 210.9 and 215.11. (2) Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection shall com- ∆ 450.5 Grounding Autotransformers. Grounding autotrans- ply with 450.5(B)(2)(a) and (B)(2)(b). formers covered in this section are zigzag or T-connected trans- (a) Operation and Interrupting Rating. An overcurrent formers connected to 3-phase, 3-wire ungrounded systems for protective device having an interrupting rating in compliance the purpose of creating a 3-phase, 4-wire distribution system or with 110.9 and that will open simultaneously all ungrounded providing a neutral point for grounding purposes. Such trans- conductors when it operates shall be applied in the grounding formers shall have a continuous per-phase current rating and autotransformer branch circuit. a continuous neutral current rating. Zigzag-connected trans- (b) Ampere Rating. The overcurrent protection shall be rated

formers shall not be installed on the load side of any system or set at a current not exceeding 125 percent of the autotrans- grounding connection, including those made in accordance former continuous per-phase current rating or 42 percent of the with 250.24(B), 250.30(A)(1), or 250.32(B), Exception No. 1. continuous-current rating of any series-connected devices in the autotransformer neutral connection. Delayed tripping for tem- Informational Note: The phase current in a grounding porary overcurrents to permit the proper operation of ground- autotransformer is one-third the neutral current. responsive tripping devices on the main system shall be permitted (A) Three-Phase, 4-Wire System. A grounding autotrans- but shall not exceed values that would be more than the short- former used to create a 3-phase, 4-wire distribution system from time current rating of the grounding autotransformer or any a 3-phase, 3-wire ungrounded system shall conform to 450.5(A) series connected devices in the neutral connection thereto. (1) through (A)(4). 70–390 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 450 — TRANSFORMERS AND TRANSFORMER VAULTS (INCLUDING SECONDARY TIES) 450.7 Exception: For high-impedance grounded systems covered in corresponding with that of the conductor and of construction 250.36, where the maximum ground-fault current is designed and characteristics according to the operating voltage and the to be not more than 10 amperes, and where the grounding type of insulation on the tie conductors or (2) automatic circuit autotransformer and the grounding impedance are rated for breakers actuated by devices having comparable time–current continuous duty, an overcurrent device rated not more than characteristics. 20 amperes that will simultaneously open all ungrounded con- ∆ (4) Interconnection of Phase Conductors Between Trans- ductors shall be permitted to be installed on the line side of the former Supply Points. Where the tie consists of more than one grounding autotransformer. conductor per phase or neutral, the conductors of each phase or (C) Ground Reference for Damping Transitory Overvol- neutral shall comply with 450.6(A)(4)(a) or (A)(4)(b). tages.

A grounding autotransformer used to limit transitory (a) Interconnected. The conductors shall be interconnected in overvoltages shall be of suitable rating and connected in accor- order to establish a load supply point, and the protective device dance with 450.5(A)(1). specified in 450.6(A)(3) shall be provided in each ungrounded tie conductor at this point on both sides of the interconnection. 450.6 Secondary Ties. As used in this article, a secondary tie The means of interconnection shall have an ampacity not less is a circuit operating at 1000 volts, nominal, or less between than the load to be served. phases that connects two power sources or power supply points, (b) Not Interconnected. The loads shall be connected to such as the secondaries of two transformers. The tie shall be one or more individual conductors of a paralleled conductor tie permitted to consist of one or more conductors per phase or neu- without interconnecting the conductors of each phase or neu- tral. Conductors connecting the secondaries of transformers in

tral and without the protection specified in 450.6(A)(3) at load accordance with 450.7 shall not be considered secondary ties. connection points. Where this is done, the tie conductors of As used in this section, the word transformer means a trans- each phase or neutral shall have a combined capacity ampacity former or a bank of transformers operating as a unit. of not less than 133 percent of the rated secondary current of the (A) Tie Circuits. Tie circuits shall be provided with overcur- highest rated transformer supplying the secondary tie system, rent protection at each end as required in Parts I, II, and VIII of the total load of such taps shall not exceed the rated secondary Article 240. current of the highest rated transformer, and the loads shall be equally divided on each phase and on the individual conductors Under the conditions described in 450.6(A)(1) and 450.6 of each phase as far as practicable. (A)(2), the overcurrent protection shall be permitted to be in accordance with 450.6(A)(3). (5) Tie Circuit Control. Where the operating voltage exceeds

150 volts to ground, secondary ties provided with limiters shall ∆ (1) Loads at Transformer Supply Points Only. Where all have a switch at each end that, when open, de-energizes the loads are connected at the transformer supply points at each end associated tie conductors and limiters. The current rating of of the tie and overcurrent protection is not provided in accor- the switch shall not be less than the rated current ampacity of the dance with Parts I, II, and VIII of Article 240, the ampacity of conductors connected to the switch. It shall be capable of inter- the tie shall not be less than 67 percent of the rated secondary rupting its rated current, and it shall be constructed so that it current of the highest rated transformer supplying the second- will not open under the magnetic forces resulting from short- ary tie system. circuit current. ∆ (2) Loads Connected Between Transformer Supply Points. (B) Overcurrent Protection for Secondary Connections. Where load is connected to the tie at any point between trans- Where secondary ties are used, an overcurrent device rated or

former supply points and overcurrent protection is not provided set at not more than 250 percent of the rated secondary current of in accordance with Parts I, II, and VIII of Article 240, the the transformers shall be provided in the secondary connections ampacity of the tie shall not be less than 100 percent of the of each transformer supplying the tie system. In addition, an rated secondary current of the highest rated transformer sup- automatic circuit breaker actuated by a reverse-current relay set plying the secondary tie system. to open the circuit at not more than the rated secondary current Exception: Tie circuits comprised of multiple conductors per of the transformer shall be provided in the secondary connec- phase shall be permitted to be sized and protected in accor- tion of each transformer. dance with 450.6(A)(4). (C) Grounding. Where the secondary tie system is grounded, (3) Tie Circuit Protection. Under the conditions described each transformer secondary supplying the tie system shall be

in 450.6(A)(1) and (A)(2), both supply ends of each ungrounded grounded in accordance with the requirements of 250.30 for tie conductor shall be equipped with a protective device that separately derived systems. opens at a predetermined temperature of the tie conductor 450.7 Parallel Operation. Transformers shall be permitted to under short-circuit conditions. This protection shall consist of be operated in parallel and switched as a unit, provided the over- one of the following: (1) a fusible link cable connector, termi- current protection for each transformer meets the requirements nal, or lug, commonly known as a limiter, each being of a size of 450.3(A) for primary and secondary protective devices over 2022 California Electrical Code 70–391

450.8 ARTICLE 450 — TRANSFORMERS AND TRANSFORMER VAULTS (INCLUDING SECONDARY TIES) 1000 volts, or 450.3(B) for primary and secondary protective Exception: Where a dry-type transformer is equipped with devices 1000 volts or less. wire-type connections (leads), the grounding and bonding con- nections shall be permitted to be connected together using any 450.8 Guarding. Transformers shall be guarded as specified of the methods in 250.8 and shall be bonded to the enclosure if in 450.8(A) through (D). of metal. (A) Mechanical Protection. Appropriate provisions shall (B) Other Metal Parts. Exposed non–current-carrying metal be made to minimize the possibility of damage to transform- parts of transformer installations, including fences, guards, and ers from external causes where the transformers are exposed to so forth, shall be grounded and bonded under the conditions physical damage. and in the manner specified for electrical equipment and other (B) Case or Enclosure. Dry-type transformers shall be pro- exposed metal parts in Parts V, VI, and VII of Article 250.

vided with a noncombustible moisture-resistant case or enclo- 450.11 Marking. sure that provides protection against the accidental insertion of foreign objects. (A) General. Each transformer shall be provided with a nameplate giving the following information: (C) Exposed Energized Parts. Switches or other equipment operating at 1000 volts, nominal, or less and serving only equip- (1) Name of manufacturer ment within a transformer enclosure shall be permitted to be (2) Rated kilovolt-amperes installed in the transformer enclosure if accessible to qualified (3) Frequency persons only. All energized parts shall be guarded in accordance (4) Primary and secondary voltage with 110.27 and 110.34. (5) Impedance of transformers 25 kVA and larger (6) Required clearances for transformers with ventilating (D) Voltage Warning. The operating voltage of exposed live openings parts of transformer installations shall be indicated by signs or (7) Amount and kind of insulating liquid where used visible markings on the equipment or structures.

(8) For dry-type transformers, temperature class for the insu- ∆ 450.9 Ventilation. The ventilation shall dispose of the trans- lation system former full-load heat losses without creating a temperature rise (B) Source Marking. A transformer shall be permitted to be that is in excess of the transformer rating. supplied at the marked secondary voltage, provided that the Informational Note No. 1: See IEEE C57.12.00-2015, installation is in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, 450.12 Terminal Wiring Space. The minimum wire-bending Power, and Regulating Transformers, and IEEE C57.12.01- space at fixed, 1000-volt and below terminals of transformer 2015, General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution line and load connections shall be as required in 312.6. Wiring and Power Transformers. space for pigtail connections shall conform to Table 314.16(B). Informational Note No. 2: Additional losses occur in 450.13 Accessibility. All transformers and transformer vaults some transformers where nonsinusoidal currents are pres-

shall be readily accessible to qualified personnel for inspection ent, resulting in increased heat in the transformer above and maintenance or shall meet the requirements of 450.13(A) or its rating. See IEEE C57.110-2008, Recommended Prac- 450.13(B). tice for Establishing Liquid-Filled and Dry-Type Power and Distribution Transformer Capability When Supplying (A) Open Installations. Dry-type transformers 1000 volts, Nonsinusoidal Load Currents, where transformers are uti- nominal, or less, located in the open on walls, columns, or struc- lized with nonlinear loads. tures, shall not be required to be readily accessible. Transformers with ventilating openings shall be installed so (B) Hollow Space Installations. Dry-type transformers that the ventilating openings are not blocked by walls or other 1000 volts, nominal, or less and not exceeding 50 kVA shall be obstructions. The required clearances shall be clearly marked permitted in hollow spaces of buildings not permanently closed on the transformer.

Transformer top surfaces that are horizon- in by structure, provided they meet the ventilation requirements tal and readily accessible shall be marked to prohibit storage. of 450.9 and separation from combustible materials require- ments of 450.21(A). Transformers so installed shall not be 450.10 Grounding. required to be readily accessible. (A) Dry-Type Transformer Enclosures. Where separate 450.14 Disconnecting Means. Transformers, other than equipment grounding conductors and supply-side bonding jump- Class 2 or Class 3 transformers, shall have a disconnecting ers are installed, a terminal bar for all grounding and bonding means located either in sight of the transformer or in a remote conductor connections shall be secured inside the transformer location. Where located in a remote location, the disconnecting enclosure. The terminal bar shall be bonded to the enclosure in means shall be lockable open in accordance with 110.25, and its accordance with 250.12 and shall not be installed on or over any location shall be field marked on the transformer. vented portion of the enclosure.

70–392 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 450 — TRANSFORMERS AND TRANSFORMER VAULTS (INCLUDING SECONDARY TIES) 450.24 Part II. Specific Provisions Applicable to Different Types Informational Note: Such restrictions can include, but of Transformers are not limited to, maximum pressure of the tank, use of a pressure relief valve, appropriate fuse types, and proper 450.21 Dry-Type Transformers Installed Indoors. sizing of overcurrent protection. 1 (A) Not Over 112 ⁄ 2 kVA. Dry-type transformers installed 1 (2) If an automatic fire extinguishing system and a liquid con- indoors and rated 112 ⁄2 kVA or less shall have a separation of finement area is present, provided the transformer is rated at least 300 mm (12 in.) from combustible material unless sepa- 35,000 volts or less rated from the combustible material by a fire-resistant, heat- (3) If the installation complies with 450.26 insulated barrier. ∆ (B) Outdoor Installations. Less-flammable liquid-filled trans- Exception: This rule shall not apply to transformers rated for formers shall be permitted to be installed outdoors, attached to,

1000 volts, nominal, or less that are completely enclosed, except adjacent to, or on the roof of buildings, if installed in accordance for ventilating openings. with (1) or (2). 1 ∆ (B) Over 112 ⁄2 kVA. Individual dry-type transformers of more 1 (1) For Type I and Type II buildings, the installation shall com- than 112 ⁄2 kVA rating shall be installed in a transformer room ply with all the restrictions provided for in the listing of the of fire-resistant construction having a minimum fire rating of liquid. 1 hour. Informational Note No. 1: Installations adjacent to com- Exception No. 1: Transformers with Class 155 or higher insu- bustible material, fire escapes, or door and window open- lation systems and separated from combustible material by a ings can require additional safeguards such as those listed fire-resistant, heat-insulating barrier or by not less than 1.83 m in 450.27. (6 ft) horizontally and 3.7 m (12 ft) vertically. Informational Note No. 2: Such restrictions can include, Exception No. 2: Transformers with Class 155 or higher insu-

but are not limited to: maximum pressure of the tank, lation systems and completely enclosed except for ventilating use of a pressure relief valve, appropriate fuse types, openings. and proper sizing of overcurrent protection. Informational Note: See ASTM E119-18a, Standard (2) In accordance with 450.27. Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. Informational Note No. 1: As used in this section, Type I and Type II buildings refers to Type I and Type II build- (C) Over 35,000 Volts. Dry-type transformers rated over ing construction as defined in NFPA 220-2018, Standard 35,000 volts shall be installed in a vault complying with Part III on Types of Building Construction. Combustible materi- of this article. als refers to those materials not classified as noncombus- 450.22 Dry-Type Transformers Installed Outdoors. Dry- tible or limited-combustible as defined in NFPA 220-2018, type transformers installed outdoors shall have a weatherproof Standard on Types of Building Construction. enclosure. Informational Note No. 2: See definition of Listed in 1

Transformers exceeding 112 ⁄ 2 kVA shall not be located Article 100. within 300 mm (12 in.) of combustible materials of build- Note: (HCD 1 & HCD 2) Types I and II construction as refer- C ings unless the transformer has Class 155 insulation systems enced in Section 450.23 (A)(1) and (B)(1) shall be as defined in A or higher and is completely enclosed except for ventilating C the California Building Code. openings. 450.24 Nonflammable Fluid-Insulated Transformers. 450.23 Less-Flammable Liquid-Insulated Transformers. Transformers insulated with a dielectric fluid identified as Transformers insulated with listed less-flammable liquids that nonflammable shall be permitted to be installed indoors or have a fire point of not less than 300°C shall be permitted to be outdoors. Such transformers installed indoors and rated over installed in accordance with 450.23(A) or 450.23(B). 35,000 volts shall be installed in a vault. Such transformers (A) Indoor Installations. Indoor installations shall be permit- installed indoors shall be furnished with a liquid confinement

ted in accordance with one of the following: area and a pressure-relief vent. The transformers shall be fur- nished with a means for absorbing any gases generated by (1) In Type I or Type II buildings, in areas where all of the fol- arcing inside the tank, or the pressure-relief vent shall be con- lowing requirements are met: nected to a chimney or flue that will carry such gases to an a. The transformer is rated 35,000 volts or less. environmentally safe area. b. No combustible materials are stored. Informational Note: Safety may be increased if fire c. A liquid confinement area is provided. hazard analyses are performed for such transformer d. The installation complies with all the restrictions pro- installations. vided for in the listing of the liquid. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–393

450.25 ARTICLE 450 — TRANSFORMERS AND TRANSFORMER VAULTS (INCLUDING SECONDARY TIES) For the purposes of this section, a nonflammable dielectric 450.27 Oil-Insulated Transformers Installed Outdoors. Com- fluid is one that does not have a flash point or fire point and is bustible material, combustible buildings, and parts of build- not flammable in air. ings, fire escapes, and door and window openings shall be safeguarded from fires originating in oil-insulated transformers 450.25 Askarel-Insulated Transformers Installed Indoors. installed on roofs, attached to or adjacent to a building or com- Askarel-insulated transformers installed indoors and rated over bustible material. 25 kVA shall be furnished with a pressure-relief vent. Where installed in a poorly ventilated place, they shall be furnished with In cases where the transformer installation presents a fire haz- a means for absorbing any gases generated by arcing inside the ard, one or more of the following safeguards shall be applied

case, or the pressure-relief vent shall be connected to a chimney or according to the degree of hazard involved: flue that carries such gases outside the building. Askarel-insulated (1) Space separations transformers rated over 35,000 volts shall be installed in a vault. (2) Fire-resistant barriers 450.26 Oil-Insulated Transformers Installed Indoors. Oil- (3) Automatic fire suppression systems insulated transformers installed indoors shall be installed in a (4) Enclosures that confine the oil of a ruptured transformer vault constructed as specified in Part III of this article. tank Exception No. 1: Where the total capacity does not exceed Oil enclosures shall be permitted to consist of fire-resistant 1121⁄2 kVA, the vault specified in Part III of this article shall be dikes, curbed areas or basins, or trenches filled with coarse, permitted to be constructed of reinforced concrete that is not less crushed stone. Oil enclosures shall be provided with trapped than 100 mm (4 in.) thick. drains where the exposure and the quantity of oil involved are such that removal of oil is important.

Exception No. 2: Where the nominal voltage does not exceed 1000, a vault shall not be required if suitable arrangements Informational Note: For additional information on trans- are made to prevent a transformer oil fire from igniting other formers installed on poles or structures or under ground, materials and the total capacity in one location does not exceed see ANSI/IEEE C2-2017, National Electrical Safety Code. 10 kVA in a section of the building classified as combustible 450.28 Modification of Transformers. When modifications are or 75 kVA where the surrounding structure is classified as fire- made to a transformer in an existing installation that change the resistant construction. type of the transformer with respect to Part II of this article, such Exception No. 3: Electric furnace transformers that have a total transformer shall be marked to show the type of insulating liquid rating not exceeding 75 kVA shall be permitted to be installed installed, and the modified transformer installation shall comply

without a vault in a building or room of fire-resistant construc- with the applicable requirements for that type of transformer. tion, provided suitable arrangements are made to prevent a trans- former oil fire from spreading to other combustible material. Part III. Transformer Vaults Exception No. 4:A transformer that has a total rating not 450.41 Location. Vaults shall be located where they can be exceeding 75 kVA and a supply voltage of 1000 volts or less that ventilated to the outside air without using flues or ducts wher- is an integral part of charged-particle-accelerating equipment ever such an arrangement is practicable. shall be permitted to be installed without a vault in a building or ∆ 450.42 Walls, Roofs, and Floors. The walls and roofs of room of noncombustible or fire-resistant construction, provided vaults shall be constructed of materials that have approved suitable arrangements are made to prevent a transformer oil fire structural strength for the conditions with a minimum fire resis- from spreading to other combustible material. tance of 3 hours.

The floors of vaults in contact with the earth Exception No. 5: Transformers shall be permitted to be installed shall be of concrete that is not less than 100 mm (4 in.) thick, in a detached building that does not comply with Part III of this but, where the vault is constructed with a vacant space or other article if neither the building nor its contents present a fire haz- stories below it, the floor shall have approved structural strength ard to any other building or property, and if the building is used for the load imposed thereon and a minimum fire resistance of only in supplying electric service and the interior is accessible 3 hours. For the purposes of this section, studs and wallboard only to qualified persons. construction shall not be permitted. Exception No. 6: Oil-insulated transformers shall be permit- Exception: Where transformers are protected with automatic ted to be used without a vault in portable and mobile surface sprinkler, water spray, carbon dioxide, or halon, construction of

mining equipment (such as electric excavators) if each of the 1-hour rating shall be permitted. following conditions is met: Informational Note No. 1: For additional information, (1) Provision is made for draining leaking fluid to the ground. see ASTM E119-18a, Methods for Fire Tests of Building (2) Safe egress is provided for personnel. Construction and Materials. (3) A minimum 6-mm ( 1⁄4-in.) steel barrier is provided for per- Informational Note No. 2: A typical 3-hour construction sonnel protection. is 150 mm (6 in.) thick reinforced concrete. 70–394 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 455 — PHASE CONVERTERS 455.3 450.43 Doorways. Vault doorways shall be protected in (F) Ducts. Ventilating ducts shall be constructed of fire- accordance with 450.43(A), (B), and (C). resistant material. (A) Type of Door. Each doorway leading into a vault from the 450.46 Drainage. Where practicable, vaults containing more building interior shall be provided with a tight-fitting door that than 100 kVA transformer capacity shall be provided with a has a minimum fire rating of 3 hours. The authority having juris- drain or other means that will carry off any accumulation of oil diction shall be permitted to require such a door for an exterior or water in the vault unless local conditions make this imprac- wall opening where conditions warrant. ticable. The floor shall be pitched to the drain where provided. Exception: Where transformers are protected with automatic 450.47 Water Pipes and Accessories. Any pipe or duct sys- sprinkler, water spray, carbon dioxide, or halon, construction of tem foreign to the electrical installation shall not enter or pass

1-hour rating shall be permitted. through a transformer vault. Piping or other facilities provided for vault fire protection, or for transformer cooling, shall not be Informational Note: For additional information, see considered foreign to the electrical installation. NFPA 80-2016, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. 450.48 Storage in Vaults. Materials shall not be stored in transformer vaults. (B) Sills. A door sill or curb that is of an approved height that will confine the oil from the largest transformer within the vault shall be provided, and in no case shall the height be less than 100 mm (4 in.). ARTICLE 455 Phase Converters (C) Locks. Doors shall be equipped with locks, and doors shall be kept locked, with access being allowed only to qualified persons. Personnel doors shall open in the direction of egress Part I. General and be equipped with listed fire exit hardware. 455.1 Scope. This article covers the installation and use of 450.45 Ventilation Openings. Where required by 450.9, phase converters.

openings for ventilation shall be provided in accordance with 455.2 Definitions. 450.45(A) through (F). Manufactured Phase. This definition shall apply within this (A) Location. Ventilation openings shall be located as far as article and throughout the Code. possible from doors, windows, fire escapes, and combustible material. The phase that originates at the phase converter and is not solidly connected to either of the single-phase input conductors. (B) Arrangement. A vault ventilated by natural circulation of air shall be permitted to have roughly half of the total area of Phase Converter. This definition shall apply within this article openings required for ventilation in one or more openings near and throughout the Code. the floor and the remainder in one or more openings in the roof An electrical device that converts single-phase power to or in the sidewalls near the roof, or all of the area required for 3-phase electric power. ventilation shall be permitted in one or more openings in or near the roof. Informational Note: Phase converters have characteris-

tics that modify the starting torque and locked-rotor cur- (C) Size. For a vault ventilated by natural circulation of air to rent of motors served, and consideration is required in an outdoor area, the combined net area of all ventilating open- selecting a phase converter for a specific load. ings, after deducting the area occupied by screens, gratings, 2 2 or louvers, shall not be less than 1900 mm (3 in.) per kVA of Rotary-Phase Converter. This definition shall apply only within transformer capacity in service, and in no case shall the net area this article. be less than 0.1 m2 (1 ft2) for any capacity under 50 kVA. A device that consists of a rotary transformer and capacitor (D) Covering. Ventilation openings shall be covered with panel(s) that permits the operation of 3-phase loads from a durable gratings, screens, or louvers, according to the treatment single-phase supply. required in order to avoid unsafe conditions. Static-Phase Converter. This definition shall apply only within (E) Dampers. All ventilation openings to the indoors shall be this article.

provided with automatic closing fire dampers that operate in A device without rotating parts, sized for a given 3-phase response to a vault fire. Such dampers shall possess a standard load to permit operation from a single-phase supply. 1 fire rating of not less than 1 ⁄2 hours. 455.3 Other Articles. Phase converters shall comply with this Informational Note: See ANSI/UL 555-2016, Standard article and with the applicable provisions of other articles of for Fire Dampers. this Code. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–395

455.4 ARTICLE 455 — PHASE CONVERTERS 455.4 Marking. Each phase converter shall be provided with (B) Fixed Loads. Where the phase converter supplies specific a permanent nameplate indicating the following: fixed loads and the conductors are sized in accordance with 455.6(A)(2), the conductors shall be protected in accordance (1) Manufacturer’s name with their ampacity. The overcurrent protection determined (2) Rated input and output voltages from this section shall not exceed 125 percent of the phase con- (3) Frequency verter nameplate single-phase input amperes. (4) Rated single-phase input full-load amperes (5) Rated minimum and maximum single load in kilovolt- 455.8 Disconnecting Means. Means shall be provided to amperes (kVA) or horsepower disconnect simultaneously all ungrounded single-phase sup- (6) Maximum total load in kilovolt-amperes (kVA) or ply conductors to the phase converter. horsepower (A) Location. The disconnecting means shall be readily acces- (7) For a rotary-phase converter, 3-phase amperes at full load sible and located in sight from the phase converter.

455.5 Equipment Grounding Connection. A means for attach- (B) Type. The disconnecting means shall be a switch rated in ment of an equipment grounding conductor termination in accor- horsepower, a circuit breaker, or a molded-case switch. Where dance with 250.8 shall be provided. only nonmotor loads are served, an ampere-rated switch shall 455.6 Conductors. be permitted. (A) Ampacity. The ampacity of the single-phase supply con- (C) Rating. The ampere rating of the disconnecting means ductors shall be determined by 455.6(A)(1) or (A)(2). shall not be less than 115 percent of the rated maximum single- phase input full-load amperes or, for specific fixed loads, shall Informational Note: Single-phase conductors sized to be permitted to be selected from 455.8(C)(1) or (C)(2). prevent a voltage drop not exceeding 3 percent from the source of supply to the phase converter may help ensure (1) Current Rated Disconnect. The disconnecting means proper starting and operation of motor loads. shall be a circuit breaker or molded-case switch with an ampere

rating not less than 250 percent of the sum of the following: (1) Variable Loads. Where the loads to be supplied are vari- able, the conductor ampacity shall not be less than 125 percent (1) Full-load, 3-phase current ratings of the motors of the phase converter nameplate single-phase input full-load (2) Other loads served amperes. (2) Horsepower Rated Disconnect. The disconnecting means (2) Fixed Loads. Where the phase converter supplies specific shall be a switch with a horsepower rating. The equivalent locked fixed loads, and the conductor ampacity is less than 125 percent rotor current of the horsepower rating of the switch shall not be of the phase converter nameplate single-phase input full-load less than 200 percent of the sum of the following: amperes, the conductors shall have an ampacity not less than (1) Nonmotor loads 250 percent of the sum of the full-load, 3-phase current rat- (2) The 3-phase, locked-rotor current of the largest motor as ing of the motors and other loads served where the input and determined from Table 430.251(B)

output voltages of the phase converter are identical. Where the (3) The full-load current of all other 3-phase motors operating input and output voltages of the phase converter are different, at the same time the current as determined by this section shall be multiplied by the ratio of output to input voltage. (D) Voltage Ratios. The calculations in 455.8(C) shall apply directly where the input and output voltages of the phase converter (B) Manufactured Phase Marking. The manufactured phase are identical. Where the input and output voltages of the phase conductors shall be identified in all accessible locations with a converter are different, the current shall be multiplied by the ratio distinctive marking. The marking shall be consistent through- of the output to input voltage. out the system and premises. 455.9 Connection of Single-Phase Loads. Where single- 455.7 Overcurrent Protection. The single-phase supply con- phase loads are connected on the load side of a phase converter, ductors and phase converter shall be protected from overcurrent

they shall not be connected to the manufactured phase. by 455.7(A) or (B). Where the required fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker rating or settings of adjustable circuit breakers 455.10 Terminal Housings. A terminal housing in accor- do not correspond to a standard rating or setting, a higher rating dance with the provisions of 430.12 shall be provided on a phase or setting that does not exceed the next higher standard rating converter. shall be permitted. Part II. Specific Provisions Applicable to Different Types (A) Variable Loads. Where the loads to be supplied are vari- of Phase Converters able, overcurrent protection shall be set at not more than 125 per- 455.20 Disconnecting Means. The single-phase disconnect- cent of the phase converter nameplate single-phase input full-load ing means for the input of a static phase converter shall be amperes. 70–396 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 460 — CAPACITORS 460.10 permitted to serve as the disconnecting means for the phase con- Part I. 1000 Volts, Nominal, and Under verter and a single load if the load is within sight of the discon- 460.6 Discharge of Stored Energy. Capacitors shall be pro- necting means. vided with a means of discharging stored energy. 455.21 Start-Up. Power to the utilization equipment shall (A) Time of Discharge. The residual voltage of a capacitor not be supplied until the rotary-phase converter has been shall be reduced to 50 volts, nominal, or less within 1 minute started. after the capacitor is disconnected from the source of supply. 455.22 Power Interruption. Utilization equipment supplied (B) Means of Discharge. The discharge circuit shall be either by a rotary-phase converter shall be controlled in such a manner permanently connected to the terminals of the capacitor or capac- that power to the equipment will be disconnected in the event of itor bank or provided with automatic means of connecting it to a power interruption. the terminals of the capacitor bank on removal of voltage from

Informational Note: Magnetic motor starters, magnetic the line. Manual means of switching or connecting the discharge contactors, and similar devices, with manual or time delay circuit shall not be used. restarting for the load, provide restarting after power 460.8 Conductors. interruption. (A) Ampacity. The ampacity of capacitor circuit conductors 455.23 Capacitors. Capacitors that are not an integral part of shall not be less than 135 percent of the rated current of the the rotary-phase conversion system but are installed for a motor capacitor. The ampacity of conductors that connect a capacitor load shall be connected to the line side of that motor overload to the terminals of a motor or to motor circuit conductors shall protective device. not be less than one-third the ampacity of the motor circuit conductors and in no case less than 135 percent of the rated current of the capacitor. ARTICLE 460 (B) Overcurrent Protection. An overcurrent device shall Capacitors be provided in each ungrounded conductor for each capacitor bank.

The rating or setting of the overcurrent device shall be as low as practicable. 460.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of capacitors on electrical circuits. Exception: A separate overcurrent device shall not be required for a capacitor connected on the load side of a motor overload Surge capacitors or capacitors included as a component protective device. part of other apparatus and conforming with the requirements of such apparatus are excluded from these requirements. (C) Disconnecting Means. A disconnecting means shall be provided in each ungrounded conductor for each capacitor bank This article also covers the installation of capacitors in haz- and shall meet the following requirements: ardous (classified) locations as modified by Articles 501 through 503. (1) The disconnecting means shall open all ungrounded con- ductors simultaneously. N 460.2 Definitions. The definition in this section shall apply (2) The disconnecting means shall be permitted to disconnect only within this article. the capacitor from the line as a regular operating procedure. N Safe Zone.

Low probability of damage other than a slight (3) The rating of the disconnecting means shall not be less than swelling of the capacitor case, as identified by the case rupture 135 percent of the rated current of the capacitor. curve of the capacitor. Exception: A separate disconnecting means shall not be required 460.3 Enclosing and Guarding. where a capacitor is connected on the load side of a motor controller. (A) Containing More Than 11 L (3 gal) of Flammable Liquid. Capacitors containing more than 11 L (3 gal) of flammable 460.9 Rating or Setting of Motor Overload Device. Where liquid shall be enclosed in vaults or outdoor fenced enclosures a motor installation includes a capacitor connected on the load complying with Article 110, Part III. This limit shall apply to side of the motor overload device, the rating or setting of the any single unit in an installation of capacitors. motor overload device shall be based on the improved power factor of the motor circuit. (B) Accidental Contact. Where capacitors are accessible to

unauthorized and unqualified persons, they shall be enclosed, The effect of the capacitor shall be disregarded in deter- located, or guarded so that persons cannot come into acciden- mining the motor circuit conductor rating in accordance with tal contact or bring conducting materials into accidental contact 430.22. with exposed energized parts, terminals, or buses associated with 460.10 Grounding. Capacitor cases shall be connected to the them. However, no additional guarding is required for enclosures equipment grounding conductor. accessible only to authorized and qualified persons. 2022 California Electrical Code 70–397

460.12 ARTICLE 470 — RESISTORS AND REACTORS Exception: Capacitor cases shall not be connected to the equip- (C) Protected Individually or in Groups. Capacitors shall ment grounding conductor where the capacitor units are sup- be permitted to be protected individually or in groups. ported on a structure designed to operate at other than ground ∆ (D) Protective Devices Rated or Adjusted. Protective potential. devices for capacitors or capacitor equipment shall be rated or 460.12 Marking. Each capacitor shall be provided with a adjusted to operate within the limits of the safe zone for indi- nameplate giving the name of the manufacturer, rated voltage, vidual capacitors. frequency, kilovar or amperes, number of phases, and, if filled 460.26 Identification. Each capacitor shall be provided with with a combustible liquid, the volume of liquid. Where filled with a permanent nameplate giving the manufacturer’s name, rated a nonflammable liquid, the nameplate shall so state. The name- voltage, frequency, kilovar or amperes, number of phases, and

plate shall also indicate whether a capacitor has a discharge the volume of liquid identified as flammable, if such is the case. device inside the case. 460.27 Grounding. Capacitor cases shall be connected to Part II. Over 1000 Volts, Nominal the equipment grounding conductor. If the capacitor neutral point is connected to a grounding electrode conductor, the con- 460.24 Switching. nection shall be made in accordance with Part III of Article 250. (A) Load Current. Group-operated switches shall be used Exception: Capacitor cases shall not be connected to the equip- for capacitor switching and shall be capable of the following: ment grounding conductor where the capacitor units are sup- (1) Carrying continuously not less than 135 percent of the ported on a structure designed to operate at other than ground rated current of the capacitor installation potential. (2) Interrupting the maximum continuous load current of each 460.28 Means for Discharge. capacitor, capacitor bank, or capacitor installation that will be switched as a unit (A) Means to Reduce the Residual Voltage.

A means shall be (3) Withstanding the maximum inrush current, including con- provided to reduce the residual voltage of a capacitor to 50 volts tributions from adjacent capacitor installations or less within 5 minutes after the capacitor is disconnected from (4) Carrying currents due to faults on capacitor side of switch the source of supply. (B) Isolation. (B) Connection to Terminals. A discharge circuit shall be either permanently connected to the terminals of the capacitor (1) General. A means shall be installed to isolate from all or provided with automatic means of connecting it to the termi- sources of voltage each capacitor, capacitor bank, or capacitor nals of the capacitor bank after disconnection of the capacitor installation that will be removed from service as a unit. The iso- from the source of supply. The windings of motors, transform- lating means shall provide a visible gap in the electrical circuit ers, or other equipment directly connected to capacitors without adequate for the operating voltage. a switch or overcurrent device interposed shall meet the require-

(2) Isolating or Disconnecting Switches with No Interrupt- ments of 460.28(A). ing Rating. Isolating or disconnecting switches (with no inter- rupting rating) shall be interlocked with the load-interrupting device or shall be provided with prominently displayed cau- ARTICLE 470 tion signs in accordance with 490.22 to prevent switching load Resistors and Reactors current. (C) Additional Requirements for Series Capacitors. The proper switching sequence shall be ensured by use of one of the Part I. 1000 Volts, Nominal, and Under following: 470.1 Scope. This article covers the installation of separate (1) Mechanically sequenced isolating and bypass switches resistors and reactors on electrical circuits. (2) Interlocks Exception: Resistors and reactors that are component parts of (3) Switching procedure prominently displayed at the switch- other apparatus. ing location This article also covers the installation of resistors and reac- 460.25 Overcurrent Protection. tors in hazardous (classified) locations as modified by Arti- (A) Provided to Detect and Interrupt Fault Current.

A cles 501 through 504. means shall be provided to detect and interrupt fault cur- 470.2 Location. Resistors and reactors shall not be placed rent likely to cause dangerous pressure within an individual where exposed to physical damage. capacitor. 470.3 Space Separation. A thermal barrier shall be required (B) Single Pole or Multipole Devices. Single-pole or multi- if the space between the resistors and reactors and any combus- pole devices shall be permitted for this purpose. tible material is less than 305 mm (12 in.). 70–398 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 480 — STORAGE BATTERIES 480.2 470.4 Conductor Insulation. Insulated conductors used for (3) IEEE 1145, Recommended Practice for Installation connections between resistance elements and controllers shall and Maintenance of Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for be suitable for an operating temperature of not less than 90°C Photovoltaic (PV) Systems (194°F). (4) IEEE 1187, Recommended Practice for Installation Design, and Installation of Valve-Regulated Lead- Exception: Other conductor insulations shall be permitted for Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications motor starting service. (5) IEEE 1375, IEEE Guide for the Protection of Sta- Part II. Over 1000 Volts, Nominal tionary Battery Systems (6) IEEE 1578, Recommended Practice for Station- 470.18 General. ary Battery Electrolyte Spill Containment and (A) Protected Against Physical Damage. Resistors and reac- Management tors shall be protected against physical damage. (7) IEEE 1635/ASHRAE 21, Guide for the Ventilation and Thermal Management of Batteries for Station- (B) Isolated by Enclosure or Elevation. Resistors and reac-

ary Applications tors shall be isolated by enclosure or elevation to protect per- (8) UL 1973, Standard for Batteries for Use in Station- sonnel from accidental contact with energized parts. ary, Vehicle Auxiliary Power, and Light Electric Rail (C) Combustible Materials. Resistors and reactors shall not (LER) Applications be installed in close enough proximity to combustible materials (9) UL Subject 2436, Outline of Investigation for Spill to constitute a fire hazard and shall have a clearance of not less Containment for Stationary Lead Acid Battery Systems than 305 mm (12 in.) from combustible materials. (10) UL 1989, Standard for Standby Batteries (11) UL Subject 1974, Standard for Evaluation of Repur- (D) Clearances. Clearances from resistors and reactors to posed Batteries grounded surfaces shall be adequate for the voltage involved. 480.2 Definitions. The definitions in this section shall apply (E) Temperature Rise from Induced Circulating Currents. only within this article. Metallic enclosures of reactors and adjacent metal parts shall

be installed so that the temperature rise from induced circulating Cell. The basic electrochemical unit, characterized by an anode currents is not hazardous to personnel or does not constitute a and a cathode, used to receive, store, and deliver electrical fire hazard. energy. 470.19 Grounding. Resistor and reactor cases or enclosures Container. A vessel that holds the plates, electrolyte, and other shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor. elements of a single unit in a battery. Exception: Resistor or reactor cases or enclosures supported Informational Note: A container may be single-cell or on a structure designed to operate at other than ground potential multi-cell and is sometimes referred to in the industry as shall not be connected to the equipment grounding conductor. a “jar.” 470.20 Oil-Filled Reactors. Installation of oil-filled reac- Electrolyte. The medium that provides the ion transport mech- tors, in addition to the above requirements, shall comply with anism between the positive and negative electrodes of a cell. applicable requirements of Article 450.

Intercell Connector. An electrically conductive bar or cable used to connect adjacent cells. Intertier Connector. An electrical conductor used to connect ARTICLE 480 two cells on different tiers of the same rack or different shelves Storage Batteries of the same rack. Nominal Voltage (Battery or Cell). The value assigned to a ∆ 480.1 Scope. This article applies to all stationary installations cell or battery of a given voltage class for the purpose of con- of storage batteries. venient designation. The operating voltage of the cell or battery may vary above or below this value. Informational Note: The following standards are fre- quently referenced for the installation of stationary Informational Note: The most common nominal cell batteries: voltages are 2 volts per cell for the lead-acid systems, (1) IEEE 484, Recommended Practice for Installation 1.2 volts per cell for alkali systems, and 3.6 to 3.8 volts Design and Installation of Vented Lead-Acid Batter- per cell for Li-ion systems. Nominal voltages might ies for Stationary Applications vary with different chemistries.

(2) IEEE 485, Recommended Practice for Sizing Vented Sealed Cell or Battery. A cell or battery that has no provision Lead-Acid Storage Batteries for Stationary Applications for the routine addition of water or electrolyte or for external 2022 California Electrical Code 70–399

480.3 ARTICLE 480 — STORAGE BATTERIES measurement of electrolyte specific gravity and might contain be subject to the applicable provisions of this Code applying to pressure relief venting. wiring and equipment operating at the same voltage, unless oth- erwise permitted by 480.6. Storage Battery (Battery). A single or group of recharge- able cells connected together electrically in series, in parallel, 480.6 Overcurrent Protection for Prime Movers. Overcur- or a combination of both, and comprised of lead-acid, nickel- rent protection shall not be required for conductors from a bat- cadmium, or other rechargeable electrochemical types. tery with a voltage of 60 volts dc or less if the battery provides power for starting, ignition, or control of prime movers. Sec- Terminal. That part of a cell, container, or battery to which an tion 300.3 shall not apply to these conductors. external connection is made (commonly identified as post, pil- lar, pole, or terminal post). 480.7 DC Disconnect Methods. 480.3 Equipment. Storage batteries and battery management (A) Disconnecting Means.

A disconnecting means shall be equipment shall be listed. This requirement shall not apply to provided for all ungrounded conductors derived from a station- lead-acid batteries. ary battery system with a voltage over 60 volts dc. A discon- necting means shall be readily accessible and located within 480.4 Battery and Cell Terminations. sight of the battery system. (A) Corrosion Prevention. Where mating dissimilar metals, Informational Note: See 240.21(H) for information on the antioxidant material suitable for the battery connection shall location of the overcurrent device for battery conductors. be used where recommended by the battery manufacturer. N (B) Emergency Disconnect. For one-family and two-family Informational Note: The battery manufacturer’s instal- dwellings, a disconnecting means or its remote control for a sta- lation and instruction manual can be used for guidance tionary battery system shall be located at a readily accessible for acceptable materials. location outside the building for emergency use. The disconnect

(B) Intercell and Intertier Conductors and Connections. shall be labeled “EMERGENCY DISCONNECT”. The ampacity of field-assembled intercell and intertier connec- N (C) Disconnection of Series Battery Circuits. Battery circuits tors and conductors shall be of such cross-sectional area that the exceeding 240 volts dc nominal between conductors or to ground temperature rise under maximum load conditions and at maxi- and subject to field servicing shall have provisions to discon- mum ambient temperature shall not exceed the safe operating nect the series-connected strings into segments not exceeding temperature of the conductor insulation or of the material of the 240 volts dc nominal for maintenance by qualified persons. Non- conductor supports. load-break bolted or plug-in disconnects shall be permitted. Informational Note: Conductors sized to prevent a volt- (D) Remote Actuation. Where a disconnecting means, located age drop exceeding 3 percent of maximum anticipated in accordance with 480.7(A), is provided with remote controls to load, and where the maximum total voltage drop to the

activate the disconnecting means and the controls for the discon- furthest point of connection does not exceed 5 percent, necting means are not located within sight of the stationary bat- may not be appropriate for all battery applications. IEEE tery system, the disconnecting means shall be capable of being 1375-2003, Guide for the Protection of Stationary Bat- locked in the open position, in accordance with 110.25, and the tery Systems, provides guidance for overcurrent protec- location of the controls shall be field marked on the disconnect- tion and associated cable sizing. ing means. (C) Battery Terminals. Electrical connections to the battery, (E) Busway. Where a dc busway system is installed, the dis- and the cable(s) between cells on separate levels or racks, shall connecting means shall be permitted to be incorporated into the not put mechanical strain on the battery terminals. Terminal busway. plates shall be used where practicable. ∆ (F) Notification. The disconnecting means shall be legibly Informational Note: Conductors are commonly pre-formed marked in the field.

A label with the marking shall be placed to eliminate stress on battery terminations. Fine stranded in a conspicuous location near the battery if a disconnecting cables may also eliminate the stress on battery terminations. means is not provided. The marking shall be of sufficient dura- See the manufacturer’s instructions for guidance. bility to withstand the environment involved and shall include N (D) Accessibility. The terminals of all cells or multicell units the following: shall be readily accessible for readings, inspections, and cleaning (1) Nominal battery voltage where required by the equipment design. One side of transparent (2) Available fault current derived from the stationary battery battery containers shall be readily accessible for inspection of the system internal components. Informational Note: Battery equipment suppliers can pro- 480.5 Wiring and Equipment Supplied from Batter- vide information about available fault current on any par- ies. Wiring and equipment supplied from storage batteries shall ticular battery model. 70–400 2022 California Electrical Code

ARTICLE 480 — STORAGE BATTERIES 480.12 (3) An arc flash label in accordance with acceptable industry shall be measured from the edge of the battery cabinet, racks, practice or trays. Informational Note: NFPA 70E-2018, Standard for For battery racks, there shall be a minimum clearance of Electrical Safety in the Workplace, provides assistance 25 mm (1 in.) between a cell container and any wall or structure in determining the severity of potential exposure, plan- on the side not requiring access for maintenance. Battery stands ning safe work practices, arc flash labeling, and selecting shall be permitted to contact adjacent walls or structures, pro- personal protective equipment. vided that the battery shelf has a free air space for not less than 90 percent of its length. (4) Date the calculation was performed Informational Note: Additional space is often needed to Exception: List items (2), (3), and (4) shall not apply to one- accommodate battery hoisting equipment, tray removal, and two-family dwellings. or spill containment. N (G) Identification of Power Sources.

Battery systems shall (D) Top Terminal Batteries. Where top terminal batteries are be indicated by 480.7(G)(1) and (G)(2). installed on tiered racks or on shelves of battery cabinets, work- N (1) Facilities with Utility Services and Battery Systems. ing space in accordance with the battery manufacturer’s instruc- Plaques or directories shall be installed in accordance with tions shall be provided between the highest point on a cell and the 705.10 and 712.10. row, shelf, or ceiling above that point. Exception: This requirement does not apply where a discon- Informational Note: IEEE 1187-2013, IEEE Recom- nect in 480.7(A) is not required. mended Practice for Installation Design and Installation N (2) Facilities with Stand-Alone Systems. A permanent plaque of Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary or directory shall be installed in accordance with 710.10. Applications, provides guidance for top clearance of valve-regulated lead-acid batteries, which are com- 480.8 Insulation of Batteries. Batteries constructed of an monly used in battery cabinets.

electrically conductive container shall have insulating support if a voltage is present between the container and ground. (E) Egress. Personnel doors intended for entrance to, and egress from, rooms designated as battery rooms shall open in ∆ 480.9 Battery Support Systems. For battery chemistries the direction of egress and shall be equipped with listed panic with corrosive electrolyte, the structure that supports the bat- or listed fire exit hardware. tery shall be resistant to deteriorating action by the electrolyte. Metallic structures shall be provided with nonconducting sup- (F) Piping in Battery Rooms. Gas piping shall not be permit- port members for the cells, or shall be constructed with a con- ted in dedicated battery rooms. tinuous insulating material. Paint alone shall not be considered (G) Illumination. Illumination shall be provided for working as an insulating material. spaces containing battery systems. The lighting outlets shall not 480.10 Battery Locations. Battery locations shall conform to be controlled by automatic means only. Additional lighting out-

480.10(A) through (G). lets shall not be required where the work space is illuminated by an adjacent light source. The location of luminaires shall not: (A) Ventilation. Provisions appropriate to the battery technol- ogy shall be made for sufficient diffusion and ventilation of (1) Expose personnel to energized battery components while gases from the battery, if present, to prevent the accumulation of performing maintenance on the luminaires in the battery an explosive mixture. space; or (2) Create a hazard to the battery upon failure of the luminaire. Informational Note No. 1: See NFPA 1-2018, Fire Code, Chapter 52, for ventilation considerations for specific bat- 480.11 Vents. tery chemistries. (A) Vented Cells. Each vented cell shall be equipped with a Informational Note No. 2: Some battery technologies do flame arrester. not require ventilation. Informational Note: A flame arrester prevents destruction Informational Note No. 3: For additional information of the cell due to ignition of gases within the cell by an